JP7479067B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

For example, Patent Document 1 describes how a display screen or other device can be used to create effects on gaming machines.

JP 2019-033816 A

However, in gaming machines such as those described in the above patent documents, there was room for further improvement in the presentation in order to increase the entertainment value of the game.

The purpose of this invention is to increase the enjoyment of games.

The present invention, which achieves the above object, is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) includes a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) capable of controlling the progress of a special game, and a performance control means (e.g., a performance control unit 300) for controlling a performance, the main control means is capable of acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of a starting condition, and is capable of executing a variable display based on the judgment information , the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance in which a plurality of rows of symbols (e.g., three rows of decorative symbols 41) are changed and then stopped on a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, the symbols include a first symbol (decorative symbol 41) and a second symbol (pseudo consecutive symbol 41, development symbol 41) different from the first symbol, and a predetermined sound (e.g., variable background music) can be output in the variable performance, When the symbol stops, a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) different from the predetermined sound can be output, and when the symbol stops, a special effect (e.g., display of an effect image) can be executed. The effect mode for executing the variable effect can be executed by a first effect mode and a second effect mode. In the variable effect, a specific effect (e.g., temporary stopping of the decorative symbol 41) can be executed, and an operation effect suggesting an operation of an operation means that can be operated by a player can be executed. The operation effect includes a first operation effect that can be executed before the start of the specific effect and a second operation effect that can be executed after the start of the specific effect. In the variable effect in which the first operation effect is executed, the operation of the operation means is enabled during an operation effective period in which the operation of the operation means is enabled in the first operation effect. It is possible to make the manner of the sound output different when the operation means is operated (for example, as shown in FIG. 274(12)) and when it is not operated (for example, as shown in FIG. 426(2)). In the variation performance in which the special game is executed and the second operation performance is executed as a result of the determination, it is possible to make the manner of the sound output common when the operation means is operated during the effective operation period in the second operation performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 291(45)) and when it is not operated (for example, as shown in FIG. 426(8)). In the variation performance, a first variation performance in which the path of the variation of the patterns in a specific column is a first path (for example, the first variation path shown in FIG. 251-1(1)) in the first performance mode and a second variation path in which the path of the variation of the patterns in a specific column is a second path (for example, the first variation path shown in FIG. 251-1(2)) in the second performance mode are different from each other. and a second variation performance in which the path of the variation of the patterns in the specific row is a second path (for example, the fifth variation path shown in FIG. 251-1 (5)) different from the first path, and it is possible to make the specific sound (for example, the first stop sound) outputted or the special performance executed when the first pattern stops in the first variation performance different from the specific sound (for example, the fifteenth stop sound) outputted or the special performance executed when the second pattern stops in the second variation performance, and it is possible to make the specific sound outputted or the special performance executed when the second pattern stops in the first variation performance the same as the specific sound outputted or the special performance executed when the second pattern stops in the second variation performance (for example, to output a pseudo consecutive stop sound in both) .

The above symbols in this section are given as examples in explaining the present invention, and do not limit the scope of the present invention.

The present invention can increase the enjoyment of games.

1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine as seen from the rear. FIG. (a) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display disposed at the bottom left of the game board, (b) is a partial plan view of a pachinko game machine, and (c) is an enlarged view showing an example of a sub-information display disposed at the bottom left of the game board. A diagram showing the internal configuration of a control unit of a pachinko game machine of this embodiment. 2 is an explanatory diagram of an image/audio control unit and a lamp control unit of the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of a game control unit of the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the operation of basic processing by a game control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing the operation of the game control unit during power interruption processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the main control processing of a game control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start port switch processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of a gate switch process. A flowchart showing the contents of the second large prize winning port switch processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big win determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of processing during a stop. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of a customer waiting setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of normal pattern processing. A flowchart showing the contents of the first large prize winning port processing. A flowchart showing the contents of the second large prize winning port processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of a game status setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of an electric tulip process. These figures show examples of the configuration of random numbers used in this embodiment, where (a) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot random number, (b) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot pattern random number, (c) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a small win pattern random number, (d) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a reach random number, and (e) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a winning random number. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation patterns and table settings used in the fluctuation pattern selection process. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation patterns and table settings used in the fluctuation pattern selection process. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation patterns and table settings used in the fluctuation pattern selection process. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation patterns and table settings used in the fluctuation pattern selection process. 1A and 1B are block diagrams illustrating an example of the configuration of a RAM of a game control unit, where (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a memory area, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memory units shown in (a). 1A and 1B are block diagrams illustrating an example of the configuration of the RAM of the performance control unit, where (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the reserved memory area, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memory units shown in (a). 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of a pre-determination process. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating examples of pre-determination patterns and tables used in the pre-determination process; 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating examples of pre-determination patterns and tables used in the pre-determination process; 11A and 11B are flowcharts showing the operation of the performance control unit, where FIG. 11A is a diagram showing main processing, and FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of a command receiving process. A flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination performance selection process and the performance selection process of Figure 34. A flowchart showing the contents of the big win effect selection process of Figure 34. 35 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending performance selection process of FIG. 34. 35 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting command receiving process of FIG. 34. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of a specific time-saving related performance process. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of effect button processing. A diagram showing the display information of the information display device in each game area. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a main process of a general control unit. A diagram showing the initial processing of the reels by the lamp control unit. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an origin return process of a lamp control unit. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an initial operation process of a lamp control unit. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a board role initial operation pattern determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a frame role initial operation pattern determination table. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing a specific example of initializing various driving sources during a setting change. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various driving sources during preparation for clearing the RWM. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various driving sources during setting confirmation. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various drive sources after changing settings. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing a specific example of initializing various driving sources after clearing the RWM; 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various driving sources after confirming settings. This is a pre-determined presentation pattern table used when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole in a normal gaming state. This is a pre-determined presentation pattern table used when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole in a special time-saving gaming state. This is a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is carried out based on a winning entry into the first starting port during normal game play. This is a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is carried out based on a winning entry into the second starting port during normal game play. This is a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on a winning entry into the second starting port during a special time-saving game state. This is a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on a winning entry into the first starting port during a special time-saving game state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the visual appearance of the decorative pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the visual appearance of the decorative pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the visual appearance of the decorative pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the visual appearance of the decorative pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the visual appearance of the decorative pattern. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A chart showing the timing at which decorative patterns are displayed in various visual modes during variable performance. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a chart showing the execution timing of a vibration effect in response to a button operation effect. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the relationship between the stage controlled by the performance control unit and the stopping sound of the decorative pattern. FIG. 11 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. 2 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of a control unit of a pachinko game machine. A diagram showing the position of the performance lever. 13A is a flowchart showing the contents of interrupt processing by the performance control unit in this embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the contents of performance lever processing. This is a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is carried out based on a winning entry into the first starting port during normal game play. This is a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is carried out based on a winning entry into the second starting port during normal game play. This is a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on a winning entry into the second starting port during a special time-saving game state. This is a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on a winning entry into the first starting port during a special time-saving game state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the visual appearance of the decorative pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the visual appearance of the decorative pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the visual appearance of the decorative pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the visual appearance of the decorative pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the visual appearance of the decorative pattern. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A chart showing the timing at which decorative patterns are displayed in various visual modes during variable performance. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A chart showing the execution timing of a vibration effect in response to a lever operation effect. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the relationship between the stage controlled by the performance control unit and the stopping sound of the decorative pattern.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
[Basic configuration of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment.
FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine 100 as viewed from the rear.
1, a pachinko game machine 100 as an example of a game machine is configured to pay out prize balls when a game ball shot out in response to a player's instruction enters a prize ball. The pachinko game machine 100 includes a game board 110 from which the game balls are shot out, and a frame member 150 that surrounds the game board 110. The game board 110 is attached to the frame member 150 in a removable manner.

The game board 110 is provided with a game area 111 on the front where games are played with game balls, a rail member 112 that forms a path along which game balls launched from below rise and head toward an upper position of the game area 111, and a guide member 113 on the right side of the game area 111 that guides the game balls.
In this embodiment, an image display unit 114 that displays various images for effects is disposed in a position of the game area 111 that is easily visible to the player. The image display unit 114 has a display screen such as a liquid crystal display, and displays, for example, decorative patterns for notifying the player of the lottery result (pattern change result) of the special pattern lottery as the player progresses through the game, and displays effect images due to the appearance of characters and items. In addition, the image display unit 114 is provided with a plurality of layers as layers on which images are displayed, and an image is displayed on each of the plurality of layers.
In addition, the front of the game board 110 is provided with three movable parts 115 and a board lamp 116 used for various effects. The three movable parts 115 are arranged in a left-right direction on the upper side of the image display unit 114. When each of the three movable parts 115 is described individually, the movable part 115 arranged on the left side is referred to as the "left movable part 115A". The movable part 115 arranged in the center is referred to as the "middle movable part 115B". The movable part 115 arranged on the right side is referred to as the "right movable part 115C". When the three movable parts 115 are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are simply referred to as the movable part 115. The movable parts 115 perform various effects by operating on the game board 110. The board lamp 116 performs various effects by emitting light.

In the game area 111, there are arranged game nails and windmills (not shown) for changing the direction in which the game balls fall. In addition, in the game area 111, various devices related to winning prizes and lotteries are arranged at predetermined positions. In addition, in the game area 111, there is arranged an outlet 117 for discharging game balls that are shot into the game area 111 but do not enter a winning hole, out of the game area 111. In addition, the pachinko game machine 100 is equipped with an out ball detection switch (SW) 227 (see FIG. 4 described later) for detecting out balls consisting of game balls that flow into the outlet 117.

In this embodiment, various prize-winning and lottery-related features include a first start hole 121 and a second start hole 122 that start a special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball wins, and a start gate (hereinafter simply called a gate) 124 that starts a normal symbol lottery (opening and closing lottery) when a game ball passes through. In FIG. 1, the gates 124 are provided on the left and right of the game area 111, with the left gate 124 written as 124L and the right gate 124 written as 124R. The first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122 here refer to the winning hole that triggers the operation of a predetermined special symbol display device. Specifically, the first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122 are provided with switches (first start hole switch 211 and second start hole switch 212 described below) that detect the passage of the game ball when a winning prize is awarded. When the game ball enters the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122, the switch detects the passage of the game ball, which triggers the activation of the special symbol display device.

The second starting hole 122 is equipped with an electric tulip (opening/closing member) 123 as a normal electric device in which a pair of tulip-shaped wings are opened and closed by an electric solenoid and light up. The electric tulip 123 is configured so that when the wings are closed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 122, but when the wings are open, the entrance to the second starting hole 122 expands, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 122. When the normal pattern lottery is won, the electric tulip 123 opens its wings for a specified time (e.g., 0.15 to 1.8 seconds) and a specified number of times (e.g., 1 to 3 times) while lighting up or flashing.

The pachinko game machine 100 has, as game states, a no-electric support state in which there are fewer chances of winning at the second starting hole 122, and an electric support state in which there are more chances of winning at the second starting hole 122 than in the no-electric support state. And, under a predetermined condition, for example, triggered by a jackpot or the number of times a special symbol lottery is drawn, the game machine is controlled to either the no-electric support state or the electric support state. The electric support state is a game state controlled by, for example, shortening the normal symbol variation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, or increasing the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery, either by one or a combination of the above.
The pachinko game machine 100 has, as game states, a no-time-shortening state in which the special symbol variation time is long, and a time-shortening state in which the special symbol variation time is shorter than that in the no-time-shortening state. Here, the time-shortening state is a state more advantageous to the player than the no-time-shortening state.
In this embodiment, the electric support state and the time-saving state are controlled simultaneously. In the following description, the electric support state and the time-saving state are simply referred to as the time-saving state, and the no electric support state and no time-saving state are simply referred to as the no time-saving state.

In this embodiment, as other roles related to winning and lottery, the first large prize opening 125 and the second large prize opening 126 as special electric roles that open according to the result of the special pattern lottery, and the normal prize opening 127 that does not perform a lottery even if the game ball wins are arranged on the game board 110. The first large prize opening 125 is provided with a first large prize opening door 125D that opens and closes the first large prize opening 125. The second large prize opening 126 is provided with a second large prize opening door 126D that opens and closes the second large prize opening 126. In the following description, the opening and closing state and opening and closing operation of the first large prize opening door 125D may be described as the opening and closing state and opening and closing operation of the first large prize opening 125 for convenience. In addition, in the following description, the open/closed state and opening/closing operation of the second large prize opening door 126D may be described for convenience as the open/closed state and opening/closing operation of the second large prize opening door 126D.
In this embodiment, a display 130 is disposed at the bottom left of the game board 110 to display information regarding the lottery results and the number of reserved balls.

In the pachinko game machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the second start hole 122 equipped with the electric tulip 123, the gate 124R, the first large winning hole 125, and the second large winning hole 126 are arranged in the right area of the game area 111. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 100 of this embodiment, when trying to win the second start hole 122, the gate 124R, the first large winning hole 125, the second large winning hole 126, etc., the game ball is made to flow down to the right area of the game area 111. Here, the left area of the game area 111 is regarded as the first game area. Also, the right area of the game area 111 is regarded as the second game area.
In the illustrated example, the second start gate 122 with the electric tulip 123, the gate 124R, the first large winning gate 125, and the second large winning gate 126 are arranged in the right area of the play area 111, but this is not limited to the above. The second start gate 122 with the electric tulip 123, the gate 124R, the first large winning gate 125, and the second large winning gate 126 may be arranged in the left area of the play area 111, and the first start gate 121, the gate 124L, and the normal winning gate 127 may be arranged in the left area of the play area 111. In this case, the right area of the play area 111 is regarded as the first play area. Also, the left area of the play area 111 is regarded as the second play area.

Attached to the back of the game board 110 are a game control board 200B that determines whether a special symbol has won, and a performance control board 300B that controls the overall performance. Attached to the back of the game board 110 are various boards (not shown), such as an image control board that controls the performance using images and sounds, and a lamp control board that controls the performance using various lamps and movable role objects 115. Attached to the back of the game board 110 are a connector 200C that connects the game control board 200B and the performance control board 300B, and a switching power supply (not shown) that converts the supplied 24V AC power into DC power and outputs it to various boards. The connector 200C is provided with multiple wires (not shown) for connecting the game control board 200B and the performance control board 300B.

The frame member 150 is equipped with a launching device (not shown) that electrically launches game balls at a predetermined time interval (e.g., 100 balls per minute) with a ball-hitting force corresponding to the angle of operation when the player touches the handle 151 and rotates the lever 152 clockwise. The frame member 150 also includes a supplying device (not shown) that supplies game balls to the launching device one by one in sequence at a timing linked to the player's operation of the lever 152, and a tray 153 that temporarily stores the game balls supplied by the supplying device to the launching device. Balls are paid out to the tray 153 by a payout unit, for example.
In this embodiment, the plate 153 is configured as an integrated upper and lower plate, but a configuration example in which the upper plate and the lower plate are separated is also conceivable. Also, a configuration example in which the handle 151 of the launching device is made to emit light under a predetermined condition is also conceivable.

The frame member 150 also has a stop button 154 for temporarily stopping the launch of the game balls even when the player is touching the handle 151 of the launching device, and an ejection button 155 for dropping the game balls accumulated in the tray 153 into a box (not shown) and removing them.
The frame member 150 also includes a speaker 156 and a frame lamp 157 that notify the game status and situation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and perform various effects. The speaker 156 performs various effects using music, voice, and sound effects. The frame lamp 157 is composed of an illuminant such as an LED, and performs various effects using light with lighting/flashing patterns, differences in light emission color, etc. It should be noted that the frame lamp 157 may be configured to perform effects by changing the direction of light irradiation.
The frame member 150 also includes a transparent plate (not shown) for separating the game board 110 from the player.

Figure 3 is a diagram explaining a pachinko gaming machine 100 according to this embodiment, where Figure 3(a) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display 130 arranged at the bottom left of the gaming board 110, Figure 3(b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and Figure 3(c) is an enlarged view showing an example of a sub-information display 80 arranged at the bottom left of the gaming board.
As shown in Fig. 3(a), the display 130 of the pachinko game machine 100 includes a first special symbol display 221 that operates in response to winning at the first start port 121, a second special symbol display 222 that operates in response to winning at the second start port 122, and a normal symbol display 223 that operates in response to passing through the gate 124. The first special symbol display 221 displays a special symbol in a variable manner and then stops to display the lottery result based on the winning at the first start port 121. The second special symbol display 222 displays a special symbol in a variable manner and then stops to display the lottery result based on the winning at the second start port 122. The first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 perform cycle fluctuations (cycle display) in which the change in the display mode is one cycle (=256 ms) multiple times, and stop display when the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed.
The normal symbol display 223 displays the lottery result by displaying the normal symbol variably and then stopping it based on the game ball passing through the gate 124. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 are each composed of a display device with an array of LEDs, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode of the LEDs. Similarly, the normal symbol display 223 is also composed of a display device with an array of LEDs, and the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode of the LEDs.

The display 130 also includes a first special symbol reserved indicator 218 that operates in response to a reserved symbol on the first special symbol display 221, a second special symbol reserved indicator 219 that operates in response to a reserved symbol on the second special symbol display 222, and a normal symbol reserved indicator 220 that operates in response to a reserved symbol on the normal symbol display 223. In this embodiment, the first special symbol reserved indicator 218, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219, and the normal symbol reserved indicator 220 are each comprised of a display device with an array of LEDs, and the number of reserved symbols is displayed by the lighting state of the LEDs.

Here, the reservation will be explained. If a game ball enters the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122 during the variable display operation of the special symbol (while the variable display for one winning is being performed), the variable display operation of the special symbol based on the later winning cannot be started because the special symbol is changing. Therefore, the later winning is stored up to a specified number (for example, four), and the right to start the special symbol for the winning game ball is reserved until the variable display operation for the previously winning game ball is completed.
The normal symbols are also processed in the same manner as the special symbols. The fact that such a reservation has been made and the number of reservations (unchanged number) are displayed on the first special symbol reservation indicator 218, the second special symbol reservation indicator 219, and the normal symbol reservation indicator 220.

The display 130 further includes a status indicator 224 that displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In this embodiment, the status indicator 224 is configured as a display device with two LEDs arranged in an array. One of the two LEDs lights up to indicate whether the status of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a time-saving state in which the special pattern variation time is short. The other LED lights up to indicate whether the status is favorable to the player by hitting to the right (by changing the hitting force of the gaming ball).

The display 130 also includes a round number display 225 that displays the number of rounds when the first large winning port 125 is activated in a jackpot game that is played according to the results of the special pattern lottery. The jackpot game will be described later. The round number display 225 is composed of a display device with an array of LEDs, and the number of rounds when the first large winning port 125 is activated in a jackpot game is displayed by the lighting state of the LEDs.

The display 130 also includes a status confirmation indicator 226. The status confirmation indicator 226 is made up of a single LED and is used to indicate that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. When the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is entered, the LED starts to light up, and when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is ended, the LED goes out. In this way, since the status confirmation indicator 226 is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine, it is possible to easily check whether the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set. The status confirmation indicator 226 may be installed in any location as long as it is on the front (surface) of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same display mode (illuminated display) is used regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but the display may be made so that it is possible to recognize which mode is set. For example, the status confirmation indicator 226 may be illuminated in the setting change mode and flashing in the setting confirmation mode, or vice versa.

In addition, in this embodiment, the status confirmation indicator 226 is provided as a dedicated indicator to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it may be used in combination with other indicators. For example, in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol indicator 221, the second special symbol indicator 222, the first special symbol reserved indicator 218, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219, the round number indicator 225, the status indicator 224, etc. are turned off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be turned on.

The frame member 150 of the pachinko game machine 100 is equipped with an input device for the player to input for the effects. As shown in FIG. 3(b), in this embodiment, as an example of an input device, an effect button 161 and an effect key 162 consisting of a plurality of keys arranged in a substantially cross shape adjacent to the effect button 161 are arranged on the frame member 150. In the illustrated example, consider a case where an effect is performed in which an operation to select one image from a plurality of images is accepted. In this case, for example, a player can operate the effect key 162 consisting of four keys arranged in a cross shape to specify one of the multiple images displayed on the image display unit 114, and operate the effect button 161 to select the specified image. In addition, as the form of the input device, in addition to the illustrated effect button 161 and effect key 162, various input forms such as a lever or a handle can be adopted depending on the content of the effect.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 100 of this embodiment is equipped with a sub-information display 80 inside the game area 111, which consists of a sub-first change display device 81, a sub-second change display device 82, a sub-first hold display device 83, a sub-second hold display device 84, a sub-regular map change display device 85, a sub-regular map hold display device 86, and a sub-right-hit display device 87.
The sub-information display 80 is basically composed of LEDs and is designed to be dynamically lit. The sub-information display 80 does not have an indicator such as the status check indicator 226 that indicates that the sub-information display 80 is in a setting change mode or setting check mode.

The sub-first variable indicator 81 is for displaying (informing) whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed, and the sub-second variable indicator 82 is for displaying (informing) whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed, and each is composed of one LED. When the display of the corresponding special symbol begins, the LED flashes at a predetermined cycle (1 second) (0.5 seconds on → 0.5 seconds off), and lights up when the corresponding special symbol is displayed stationary. In other words, the sub-first variable indicator 81 and the sub-second variable indicator 82 repeatedly perform a cyclic display in which one flash is one cycle (= 1 second), and light up when the corresponding special symbol is displayed stationary.

The result of the special symbol jackpot determination may be notified by the sub-first variable display 81 or the sub-second variable display 82. In this case, the LED may be lit in the case of a jackpot and turned off in the case of a miss.

The sub-first hold indicator 83 is for displaying the number of first hold information items (first hold number) described below, and the sub-second hold indicator 84 is for displaying the number of second hold information items (second hold number) described below, and each is composed of two LEDs. When the hold number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the hold number is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, when the hold number is "2", the left LED is turned on, when the hold number is "3", the left LED is blinking and the right LED is turned on, and when the hold number is "4", the left and right LEDs are blinking.

The sub-regular symbol variation display 85 is for displaying (informing) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the regular symbol starts, the LED blinks (varies) at a specified interval. Then, when the regular symbol is displayed in a static state, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up in the case of a win, and goes out in the case of a loss) is displayed in a static state.

In addition, the sub-regular pattern change indicator 85 may be configured to flash while displaying the normal pattern change, and to light up or go out when the normal pattern is displayed as stopped, so that it is possible to know whether or not the normal pattern change is being displayed.

The sub-regular map reservation indicator 86 is used to display the number of reserved regular map memories (regular map reservation number) and is composed of two LEDs. When the regular map reservation number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the regular map reservation number is "1", the left LED is lit and the right LED is turned off, when the regular map reservation number is "2", the left and right LEDs are lit, when the regular map reservation number is "3", the left LED flashes and the right LED is lit, and when the regular map reservation number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

The sub right-hit indicator 87 is intended to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the right-hand area of the game area 111 (so-called right hit), and is composed of one LED. The LED lights up during a jackpot state (special game) and during a time-saving game state, and is turned off in other game states.

[Configuration of the control unit]
Next, a control unit that controls the operation and processes signals in the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment.
FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of the image/audio control unit and the lamp control unit of this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 4, the control unit includes a game control unit 200 as a game control means for determining whether a special symbol has been won. Also, as a presentation control means, the control unit includes a presentation control unit 300 for overall control of the presentation, and a payout control unit 330 for controlling the payout of balls.

[Game control unit configuration and functions]
The game control unit 200 includes a CPU 201 which performs calculations when determining whether a special symbol has been won, a ROM 202 which stores programs to be executed by the CPU 201 and various data, and a RAM 203 which is used as a working memory for the CPU 201, etc.

The game control unit 200 controls the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 to either a no-time-reduction state or a time-reduction state. The game state of the pachinko game machine 100 in the no-time-reduction state may be referred to as a normal game state below. The game state of the pachinko game machine 100 in the time-reduction state may be referred to as a time-reduction game state below. In addition, in this embodiment, the time-reduction game state includes a special time-reduction game state and a specific time-reduction game state. The special time-reduction game state is a game state controlled via a jackpot game. In addition, the specific time-reduction game state is a game state controlled by the number of times that the special pattern variable display executed from the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RAM clear, reset of the number of variations) reaches a specific number (300 times in this embodiment). As a result, the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 becomes either a normal game state, a special time-reduction game state, or a specific time-reduction game state. The game control unit 200 then switches between the normal game state and the special time-saving game state based on a predetermined condition. The game control unit 200 also switches between the normal game state and the specific time-saving game state based on a predetermined condition. The game control unit 200 also switches between the specific time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state based on a predetermined condition. In the time-saving game state, the game control unit 200 also performs control such as increasing the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery compared to the normal game state, shortening the normal pattern fluctuation time, and extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123.

The game control unit 200 performs a special pattern lottery when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122. Then, a special game such as a big win game or a small win game is performed according to the result of the special pattern lottery. In the big win game, the game control unit 200 controls the round in which the first large winning hole 125, which is a special electric role, maintains an open state until a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have passed or 10 game balls have entered) is met, to be repeated a predetermined number of times. Then, the game control unit 200 controls the interval between opening and closing operations when the first large winning hole 125 opens. Also, in the small win game, the game control unit 200 controls the round in which the second large winning hole 126, which is a special electric role, maintains an open state until a predetermined condition (for example, 0.9 seconds have passed) is met, to be repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice). Then, the game control unit 200 controls the interval between opening and closing operations when the second large winning hole 126 opens.

In addition, the game control unit 200 performs a normal symbol lottery when the gaming ball passes through the gate 124. Then, the game control unit 200 controls the operation of the electric tulip according to the result of the normal symbol lottery.
In addition, the game control unit 200 sets holds that occur when the game ball enters the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 during special pattern change, and holds that occur when the game ball passes through the gate 124 during normal pattern change.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sends information related to game control, such as the results of the special pattern lottery and the normal pattern lottery, information on changing the time-saving state to no time-saving state, and hold setting information, to the performance control unit 300 using commands described later.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first start hole 121, the second start hole 122, the first large winning hole 125, the second large winning hole 126, and the normal winning hole 127, the game control unit 200 instructs the payout control unit 330 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls per game ball according to the place where the game ball entered. For example, the game control unit 200 sends an instruction command (command) to the payout control unit 330 so as to pay out three prize balls when the game ball enters the first start hole 121, four prize balls when the game ball enters the second start hole 122, nine prize balls when the game ball enters the second large winning hole 126, thirteen prize balls when the game ball enters the first large winning hole 125, and ten prize balls when the game ball enters the normal winning hole 127. Even if it is detected that a gaming ball has passed through the gate 124, the payout control unit 330 is not instructed to pay out any prize balls associated with that passage.
When the payout control unit 330 pays out prize balls in accordance with an instruction from the game control unit 200, the game control unit 200 obtains information on the number of paid out prize balls from the payout control unit 330. In this way, the number of paid out prize balls is managed.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game control unit 200 is connected to a detection means including a first start port detection unit (first start port switch (SW)) 211 that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port 121, a second start port detection unit (second start port switch (SW)) 212 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port 122, an electric tulip opening/closing unit 213 that opens and closes the electric tulip 123, and a gate detection unit (gate switch (SW)) 214 that detects the passage of a game ball through the gate 124.
In addition, connected to the game control unit 200 are a first large prize opening detection unit (first large prize opening switch (SW)) 215 which detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 125, a first large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216 which sets the first large prize opening door 125D of the first large prize opening 125 to a closed state and a protruding, tilted open state, a second large prize opening detection unit (second large prize opening switch (SW)) 209 which detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 126, a second large prize opening door opening/closing unit 210 which sets the second large prize opening door 126D of the second large prize opening 126 to a closed state and a protruding, tilted open state, and a normal prize opening detection unit (normal prize opening switch (SW)) 217 which detects the entry of a game ball into the normal prize opening 127.

In addition, a magnetic detection sensor 207 that detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period of time and a radio wave detection sensor 208 that detects abnormal radio waves for a predetermined period of time are connected to the game control unit 200. The magnetic detection sensor 207 and the radio wave detection sensor 208 are connected to the game control board 200B via wiring (not shown).
In addition, the game control unit 200 is connected to a first special pattern reserved display 218 which displays the number of reserved, unchanging symbols that have entered the first start port 121 while the special pattern is changing, a second special pattern reserved display 219 which displays the number of reserved, unchanging symbols that have entered the second start port 122 while the special pattern is changing, and a normal pattern reserved display 220 which displays the number of reserved, unchanging symbols that have passed through the gate 124 while the normal pattern is changing.
In addition, the game control unit 200 is connected to a first special pattern display 221 which displays the change in special pattern that occurs when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 and the result of the special pattern lottery, a second special pattern display 222 which displays the change in special pattern that occurs when a game ball enters the second starting hole 122 and the result of the special pattern lottery, a normal pattern display 223 which displays the change in normal pattern and the result of the normal pattern lottery, and a status display 224 which displays the status of the pachinko game machine 100.

Then, the detection signals detected by the first start gate switch 211, the second start gate switch 212, the gate switch 214, the first large prize gate switch 215, the second large prize gate switch 209, the normal prize gate switch 217, the magnetic detection sensor 207, and the radio wave detection sensor 208 are sent to the game control unit 200. In addition, control signals from the game control unit 200 are sent to the electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, the first large prize gate door opening/closing unit 216, the second large prize gate door opening/closing unit 210, the first special symbol reserved indicator 218, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219, the normal symbol reserved indicator 220, the first special symbol indicator 221, the second special symbol indicator 222, the normal symbol indicator 223, and the status indicator 224. As a result, the game control unit 200 performs various controls related to the number of prize balls paid out as described above.

Also mounted on the front side of the gaming control board are a RAM clear switch 228 for inputting a signal to clear the memory contents of the RAM 203 of the gaming control unit 200 or to update a setting value (probability of determining a jackpot), which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game, a setting key switch 229 for inputting a signal to switch to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, by operating the setting key, an information display 230 for displaying performance information and setting values that enable the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped, and other electronic components.

The information display 230 is composed of four seven-segment displays (230a to 230d, see FIG. 48 below) arranged in the left-right direction. The two seven-segment displays 230a and 230b from the left form an identification segment for displaying identification information showing the type of performance information (data type), and the two seven-segment displays 230c and 230d from the right form a numeric segment for displaying numerical information showing setting values and numerical values of the performance information (see FIG. 47). Static lighting is used to display setting values, and dynamic lighting is used to display performance information.

The game control unit 200 is further connected to an external information terminal board 350 for the board, which transmits various information to a host computer (not shown) installed in the hall. The game control unit 200 transmits information obtained from the payout control unit 330 regarding the number of prize balls paid out and information indicating the status of the game control unit 200, etc., to the host computer via the external information terminal board 350 for the board.

[Configuration and functions of the dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 330 comprises a CPU 331 which performs calculations when controlling the payout of balls, a ROM 332 which stores programs executed by the CPU 331 and various data, etc., and a RAM 333 which is used as a working memory for the CPU 331, etc.
The payout control unit 330 then controls the payout of balls based on commands sent from the game control unit 200.
Specifically, the payout control unit 330 receives a command from the game control unit 200 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the location where the game ball has entered (such as the first starting hole 121). Then, the payout control unit 330 controls the payout drive unit 334 to pay out the number of prize balls specified in the command. The payout drive unit 334 here is composed of a drive motor that sends out game balls from a storage unit for game balls.

Also connected to the payout control unit 330 are a payout ball detection unit 335 that detects the number of prize balls actually paid out from the game ball storage unit by the payout drive unit 334, a ball presence detection unit 336 that detects whether game balls are stored in the storage unit (not shown), and a full tank detection unit 337 that detects whether the tray 153 that holds the game balls used by the player when playing and the paid-out prize balls is full or not. The payout control unit 330 receives detection signals detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, the ball presence detection unit 336, and the full tank detection unit 337, and performs a predetermined process according to these detection signals.
Furthermore, the payout control unit 330 is connected to a frame external information terminal board 340 that transmits various information to a host computer installed in the hall. The payout control unit 330 transmits, for example, information on the number of prize balls instructed to be paid out by the payout drive unit 334 and information on the number of prize balls actually paid out detected by the payout ball detection unit 335 to the host computer via the frame external information terminal board 340. The payout control unit 330 also transmits similar information to the game control unit 200.

[Configuration and functions of the production control unit]
The performance control unit 300 is equipped with a CPU 301 which performs calculations when controlling the performance, a ROM 302 which stores programs to be executed by the CPU 301 and various data, a RAM 303 which is used as working memory for the CPU 301, and a real-time clock (RTC) 304 which measures the date and time.
The performance control unit 300 sets the performance contents based on, for example, the result of the determination of whether or not a special symbol lottery has been won and the variation pattern sent from the game control unit 200. At that time, the performance contents corresponding to the operation input may be set in response to an operation input from the user using the performance button 161 or the performance key 162. In this case, for example, a signal corresponding to the operation (operation signal) is received from a controller (not shown) such as the performance button 161, and the operation content identified by this operation signal is reflected in the performance settings.
Furthermore, when a game is suspended for a predetermined period of time, the performance control unit 300 instructs the setting of a screen display for waiting customers as one of the performance effects.
Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 sets the presentation content based on the change information of the time-saving no state and the time-saving state received from the game control unit 200.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 sends commands to the image/audio control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 to instruct the execution of the set performance contents.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 is connected to an image/audio control unit 310 that controls the performance using images and sounds, and a lamp control unit 320 that controls the performance using various lamps and movable props 115.

[Image/audio control unit configuration and functions]
As shown in FIG. 5, the image/audio control unit 310 includes a CPU 311 which performs calculations when controlling the images and sounds that express the performance content, a ROM 312 in which programs executed by the CPU 311 and various data are stored, a RAM 313 which is used as a working memory for the CPU 311, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 314, a CGROM 315, and an SNDROM 316.

Then, based on the commands sent from the performance control unit 300, the image/audio control unit 310 controls the image displayed on the image display unit 114 and the sound output from the speaker 156.
Specifically, the CGROM 315 stores image data such as pattern images and background images to be displayed on the image display unit 114 during play, decorative patterns for notifying the player of lottery results, characters and items for displaying advance notices to the player, etc. Also, the SNDROM 316 stores various types of sound data such as music and voice to be output from the speaker 156 in synchronization with the image data or independently of the image data, as well as sound effects such as jingles.
Based on the pending number command or variable performance start command sent from the performance control unit 300, the CPU 311 analyzes the animation pattern, creates a display list that summarizes drawing commands, and sends the display list to the VDP 314.

Based on the display list received from the CPU 311, the VDP 314 reads out image data and sound data stored in the CGROM 315 and the SNDROM 316, respectively. Furthermore, the VDP 314 performs drawing processing for background image display, pattern image display, pattern image variation, character/item display, and the like, using the read image data, and performs sound processing using the read sound data. The VDP 314 then controls the screen display on the image display unit 114 using the image data that has been subjected to the drawing processing. The VDP 314 also controls the sound output from the speaker 156 using the sound data that has been subjected to the sound processing.
In this embodiment, the VDP 314 is configured to perform audio processing in addition to drawing processing, but this is not limiting, and a separate processor dedicated to audio processing may be provided.

[Lamp control unit configuration and functions]
The lamp control unit 320 includes a CPU 321 which performs calculations when controlling the illumination of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 and the operation of the movable part 115, a ROM 322 in which programs executed by the CPU 321 and various data are stored, and a RAM 323 which is used as a working memory for the CPU 321, etc.
The lamp control unit 320 controls the lighting/flashing and light color of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the command sent from the performance control unit 300. It also controls the operation of the movable prop 115.

Specifically, ROM 322 of lamp control unit 320 stores lighting/flashing pattern data and light color pattern data (light emission pattern data) for board lamp 116 and frame lamp 157 according to the performance content set by performance control unit 300. CPU 321 selects and reads out the light emission pattern data stored in ROM 322 that corresponds to the command sent from performance control unit 300. Then, lamp control unit 320 controls the light emission of board lamp 116 and frame lamp 157 according to the read light emission pattern data.
In addition, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores operation pattern data of the movable role object 115 according to the performance content set by the performance control unit 300. The CPU 321 controls the operation of the movable role object 115 based on the read operation pattern data.

In this embodiment, the game control unit 200, the presentation control unit 300, the image/sound control unit 310, the lamp control unit 320, and the payout control unit 330 are each individually configured in a game control board 200B as a main board arranged on the rear surface of the game board 110, a presentation control board 300B as a sub-board, an image control board, a lamp control board, and a payout control board.
5, the performance button 161 and the performance key 162 are connected to the performance control unit 300 and controlled by the performance control unit 300, but are not limited to this. The performance button 161 and the performance key 162 may be connected to the lamp control unit 320 and controlled by the lamp control unit 320.

[Functional configuration of the game control unit]
Next, the functional configuration of the game control unit 200 will be described.
Fig. 6 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the game control unit 200. As shown in Fig. 6, the game control unit 200 includes a random number acquisition unit 231, a normal symbol determination unit 232, a special symbol variation control unit 233, a special symbol determination unit 234, and a normal symbol variation control unit 236 as functional units for executing various lottery processes.
The game control unit 200 also includes a variation pattern selection unit 235 as a functional unit that executes processing associated with the variation of special symbols.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 is equipped with a large prize opening operation control unit 237, an electric tulip operation control unit 238, a prize ball processing unit 239, an output control unit 240, and a random number control unit 241, which are functional units that control the operation of various gimmicks and execute data processing related to prize balls, etc.

The random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value used in the special symbol lottery and a random number value used in the normal symbol lottery. In the case of the random number value used in the special symbol lottery, specifically, one number (random number value) is selected (acquired) from a predetermined range of numbers for each type of random number, on the condition that a gaming ball has entered the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122. The acquired random number value is used for the judgment by the special symbol judgment unit 234. Although the details will be described later, the random numbers used in the special symbol lottery include a jackpot random number indicating whether or not there is a jackpot, a pattern random number indicating the type of jackpot, a variable pattern random number, a reach random number, and the like.
In the case of the random number used in the normal symbol lottery, specifically, one number (random number) is selected (obtained) from a predetermined range of numbers on the condition that the gaming ball has passed through the gate 124. The obtained random number is used for the determination by the normal symbol determination unit 232. Note that as the random number used in the normal symbol lottery, in addition to a winning random number indicating whether or not there is a win, a pattern random number indicating the type of win or a variable pattern random number may be set.
When a special pattern lottery is held, the special pattern change control unit 233 controls the change of the special pattern on the first special pattern display device 221 or the second special pattern display device 222 according to the lottery result.

When the special symbols start to change, the special symbol determination unit 234 uses a random number table as shown in FIG. 23 described later to determine whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the type of jackpot if a jackpot is won, and whether it is a small jackpot or a miss if a jackpot is not won. That is, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value related to the special symbol when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 211 or the second start port switch 212, which are detection means, and the special symbol determination unit 234 determines whether or not to play a special game (jackpot game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired random number value. The lottery for the special symbol (jackpot lottery) described above refers to the processing in the random number acquisition unit 231 and the special symbol determination unit 234.

The variation pattern selection unit 235 selects the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 221 or the second special symbol display unit 222. Specifically, the variation pattern selection unit 235 determines the variation pattern based on the judgment result of whether or not to play a big win game and the judgment result of whether or not to set a variation pattern (for example, 15.0 seconds or more) that can perform a reach performance in the decorative symbol variation performance accompanying the special symbol variation. Then, based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection unit 235, the special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbol. The details of the operation of the variation pattern selection unit 235 and the special symbol variation control unit 233 will be described later.
Here, "reach" refers to a presentation that makes the player expect a big win with decorative symbols, which will be described later.

When the normal symbol starts to change, the normal symbol determination unit 232 uses a random number table as shown in FIG. 23(e) to determine whether the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win or not. That is, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not to play the auxiliary game of opening and closing the electric tulip 123 based on the random number value for the normal symbol lottery acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231. In addition, when multiple types of wins are set in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the "type of win" when the judgment result is a win. The normal symbol lottery is a process performed by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the normal symbol determination unit 232.
When a normal pattern lottery is held, the normal pattern change control unit 236 controls the change of the normal pattern by the normal pattern display device 223 according to the lottery result.
When the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines that the normal symbol lottery results in a "win," the electric tulip operation control unit 238 opens the electric tulip 123 for a specified time and a specified number of times, creating a state in which the game ball can easily win in the second starting hole 122. When the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines that the game ball has lost, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 does not create such an open state of the electric tulip 123. The operation patterns of the electric tulip 123 will be described later, but there are, for example, an operation pattern in which the electric tulip opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds, and an operation pattern in which the electric tulip opens three times with an opening time of 1.80 seconds.

When the special pattern determination unit 234 determines a "big win" in the special pattern lottery, the big prize opening operation control unit 237 controls the opening operation of the first big prize opening 125 in an operation pattern specified based on the type of big prize won as a big prize game. Also, when the special pattern determination unit 234 determines a "small win" in the special pattern lottery, the big prize opening operation control unit 237 opens the second big prize opening 126 for a specified time and a specified number of times as a small prize game.
The prize ball processing unit 239 sets commands for managing the number of winning balls for various prize-winning and lottery-related devices and for controlling the payout of prize balls according to winnings.
The output control unit 240 controls the output of control commands from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300 and the payout control unit 330 .
The random number control unit 241 updates various random number values acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 at a predetermined timing.

[Basic operation of gaming machine]
Next, the basic operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
When the power is turned on, the game control unit 200 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 initializes various devices and sets them as basic processing at startup. After performing the basic processing, the game control unit 200 repeatedly executes main control processing, which is a series of processing related to the progress of the game. When the power is turned off, the game control unit 200 also executes a series of power-off processing.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the operation of the basic process by the game control unit 200.
When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the gaming control unit 200 first permits access to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 4) (step (hereinafter, step is abbreviated as "S") 701). Then, the gaming control unit 200 judges whether or not a RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM 203 is ON (S702).
If the RAM clear switch is OFF (No in S702), the game control unit 200 next judges whether or not a backup flag relating to the operation when the power is cut off is ON (S703).
If the backup flag is ON (Yes in S703), the game control unit 200 next judges whether or not the checksum created when the power was cut off is normal (S704).
If the checksum is normal (Yes in S704), the game control unit 200 then executes a recovery process (S705). In this recovery process, the game control unit 200 sets the sub-control means such as the performance control unit 300 in response to recovery from a power-off state. Specifically, the game control unit 200 outputs a command to the performance control unit 300 to set the sub-control means so as to reflect the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 when the power is cut off (whether or not a jackpot game is being played, and whether the game is in a normal game state, a special time-saving game state, or a specific time-saving game state). In addition, in this recovery process, the game control unit 200 turns off the backup flag.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is ON (Yes in S702), the backup flag is OFF (No in S703), or the checksum is abnormal (No in S704), the game control unit 200 then clears the memory contents of RAM 203 (S706) and sets the working area of RAM 203 (S707) as an initialization process. The game control unit 200 then outputs a command to the performance control unit 300 to set (initialize) the sub-control means, and sets the sub-board (sub-control means) (S708). Setting the sub-board includes clearing the RAM 303, RAM 313, and RAM 323 mounted on each sub-board.

After the return process (see S705) is completed, or after the sub-board setting (see S708) is completed, the game control unit 200 sets various counters and timers used for game control (S709).Then, the game control unit 200 repeatedly executes interrupt permission (S710), interrupt prohibition (S711), symbol random number control process (S712), initial value random number update process (S713), and judgment of whether the power cutoff flag is ON or not (S714) as a loop process.
Here, the interrupt permission (S710) and interrupt prohibition (S711) are provided to enable execution of an interrupt process during execution of this loop process (S710 to S714). In this embodiment, the main control process in the game control is executed by this interrupt process. The details of the main control process will be described later.
In the symbol random number control process (S712), the game control unit 200 updates the variable pattern random number used in the special symbol lottery.
In the initial value random number update process (S713), the game control unit 200 updates the initial values of various random number values used in game control.
In the determination of the power cutoff flag, if the power cutoff flag is OFF (No in S714), the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not cut off, and the gaming control unit 200 repeatedly executes the loop process (S710 to S714) and the main control process by interruption. On the other hand, if the power cutoff flag is ON (Yes in S714), the gaming control unit 200 starts a process for cutting off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (processing at the time of power cutoff).

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the operation of the game control unit 200 during power interruption processing.
In the power interruption process, the game control unit 200 first clears the settings of the output ports for various outputs (S801). Next, the game control unit 200 creates a checksum and stores it in the RAM 203 (S802). Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the backup flag (S803), prohibits access to the RAM 203 (S804), and transitions to an infinite loop.

[Main control process of gaming machine]
Next, the main control process of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
In the main control process, the game control unit 200 controls the game in the pachinko game machine 100, and instructs the presentation control unit 300, which is a sub-control means, to control the presentation, and instructs the payout control unit 330 to control the payout of winning balls.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main control process of the game control unit 200.
The main control process is a series of processes in game control, and is repeatedly executed at preset fixed time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). In this embodiment, the game control unit 200 generates an interrupt at preset fixed time intervals, and executes the main control process as an interrupt process when the interrupt is permitted (see S710) in the loop process shown in Fig. 7. As shown in Fig. 9, in the main control process, a random number update process, a switch process, a pattern process, an electric role process, a prize ball process, and an output process are executed in sequence (S901 to S906).

In the random number update process (S901), the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the random number control unit 241 and updates the values of various random numbers used in game control by the game control unit 200. Details of setting random numbers and updating random number values will be described later.

The switch processing (S902) includes start port switch processing, gate switch processing, and second large prize port switch processing.
In the start port switch processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the state of the first start port switch 211 and the second start port switch 212 in Fig. 4, and executes processing for the special symbol lottery when the switch is turned ON. In addition, as will be described later in detail, when performing pre-determination processing in the first start port switch 211 and the second start port switch 212, each function (subroutine) of the special symbol determination unit 234 and the variation pattern selection unit 235 is called, and processing for pre-determination is executed.
In the gate switch processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the state of the gate switch 214 in Figure 4, and when the switch is turned ON, executes processing for the normal pattern lottery.
In the second big prize opening process, the game control unit 200 monitors the state of the second big prize opening switch 209 in FIG. 4, and when the switch is turned ON, executes a process for playing a big prize game.
The details of these switching processes will be described later.

As the symbol processing (S903), special symbol processing and normal symbol processing are carried out.
In the special symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls each function (subroutine) of the special symbol change control unit 233, the special symbol determination unit 234, and the change pattern selection unit 235, and executes the special symbol change and processing associated with this pattern change.
In the normal symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls the functions (subroutines) of the normal symbol determination unit 232 and the normal symbol change control unit 236, and executes the normal symbol change and processing associated with this pattern change.
The details of these symbol processes will be described later.

As the electric role processing (S904), a first large prize winning slot processing, a second large prize winning slot processing, and an electric tulip processing are performed.
In the first large prize opening processing, the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the large prize opening operation control unit 237 and controls the opening operation of the first large prize opening 125, which is a special electric device, based on specified conditions.
In the second large prize opening processing, the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the large prize opening operation control unit 237 and controls the opening operation of the second large prize opening 126, which is a special electric device, based on specified conditions.
In the electric tulip processing, the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the electric tulip operation control unit 238, and controls the opening operation of the electric tulip 123, which is a normal electric role, based on predetermined conditions.
The details of these electric accessory processes will be described later.

In prize ball processing (S905), the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the prize ball processing unit 239 and sets commands for managing the number of winning balls and for controlling the payout of prize balls according to the winning balls.

In the output process (S906), the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the output control unit 240, outputs a command for controlling the presentation to the presentation control unit 300, and outputs a command for controlling the payout to the payout control unit 330. The presentation control commands are generated in each process from S902 to S904, and are stored (set) in a storage area for control commands provided in the RAM 203. The payout control command is generated in the process of S905, and is stored (set) in a storage area for control commands provided in the RAM 203. The RAM 203 has a storage area set for each type of control command.

The output control unit 240 sequentially checks the storage areas of each control command in the RAM 203, and if a control command is stored in each storage area (i.e., if a control command has been generated in the processing of S902 to S905), it reads out the control command and outputs it to the output destination (the performance control unit 300 or the payout control unit 330).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, output processing is performed at the end of a series of main control processing. That is, the commands generated in each of the processing steps S902 to S905 by the above-mentioned functions as the first processing means are stored in the corresponding storage area of RAM 203 for each processing step. Then, after these processing steps, output control unit 240 as the second processing means outputs all of the commands generated in each processing step that have been accumulated in the storage area of RAM 203. In other words, in this embodiment, when one cycle of main control processing is executed, the commands generated in the execution of that one cycle are output after the final command generation for that one cycle is performed.

[Modifications of the basic operation of the gaming machine]
In the operation example described with reference to Figures 7 to 9, an interrupt is permitted in the loop processing portion of the basic processing, and a main control processing consisting of a series of processing is executed as an interrupt processing. However, the main control processing may be configured to be repeatedly executed at regular intervals, and the specific implementation means (execution procedure) is not limited to the examples shown in Figures 7 to 9. For example, the main control processing may be incorporated into a series of operations of the basic processing, the elapsed time may be measured at a predetermined timing, and the main control processing may be returned to at regular intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). Also, while the main control processing is incorporated into a series of operations of the basic processing, an interrupt may be generated at regular intervals, and if an interrupt is generated, the main control processing may be returned to the main control processing incorporated into the basic processing, as in the operation described with reference to Figures 7 to 9.

When a command generated in the basic process is output, in principle, each time a command is generated, it is stored in a command storage area of the RAM 203, and the function of the output control unit 240, which is the second processing means, is called and output. The basic process is a special process such as an initial operation that is performed only when the power is turned on, unlike the main control process related to the progress of the game. The basic process is also a process that quickly outputs the generated command so that there are no gaps in the output process, since the processing procedure may vary due to branching based on conditions such as the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is turned on. Note that, in cases where commands are generated consecutively by multiple related processes, or in other cases, a processing procedure may be adopted in which multiple commands are stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203 and output together depending on the specific processing requirements.

[Random number update process by game control unit]
The random number value as the judgment information used for various lotteries in game control such as the special symbol lottery is counted by a counter, and starting from a predetermined initial value, one is added each time the random number update process (S901) of the main control process shown in FIG. 9 is performed. Then, the value at the time when each lottery is performed is obtained by the start port switch process (FIG. 10) and the gate switch process (FIG. 11), and is used in the special symbol process (FIG. 13) and the normal symbol process (FIG. 18). This random number counter is an infinite loop counter, and after the counted random number value reaches the maximum value of the set random number (for example, 299 for the jackpot random number shown in FIG. 23(a) described later), it returns to the initial value again. In addition, since the random number update process is performed at regular intervals, if the initial value of each random number is specified, there is a risk that the winning value will be estimated based on the update interval and the initial value information. Therefore, after returning from the main control process to the basic process shown in FIG. 7, the initial value of each random number is randomly changed in the initial value random number update process of S713.

[Start port switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the contents of the start port switch process of the switch process shown in S902 of FIG.
In this start port switch processing, processing for winning at the first start port 121 and processing for winning at the second start port 122 are performed in sequence. Referring to FIG. 10, the game control unit 200 first judges whether or not a game ball has won at the first start port 121 and the first start port switch 211 has been turned ON (S1001). If the first start port switch 211 is turned ON, the game control unit 200 then judges whether or not the number of reserved balls U1 of the unchanging portion of winning at the first start port 121 is less than the upper limit (S1002). In the example shown in FIG. 10, the upper limit is set to 4 balls. If the number of reserved balls U1 has reached the upper limit (No in S1002), no more unchanging winning balls can be reserved, so the processing for winning at the first start port 121 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the reserved number U1 is less than the upper limit (Yes in S1002), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for determining whether or not a win has been won this time, and stores it in the RAM 203 (S1003). In this case, since the first starting hole 121 has won, a random number value for the special symbol lottery is acquired. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated in the random number update process of S901. This random number value then determines the result of the special symbol lottery in the subsequent special symbol process. The random number values referred to here include a jackpot random number value that determines whether or not a jackpot, a small jackpot, or a miss; a symbol random number value (jackpot symbol random number value) that determines the type of jackpot; a variation pattern random number value that specifies the variation pattern in the symbol variation; and a reach random number value that determines whether or not a variation pattern (variation time) that can execute the reach performance described below is set in the event of a miss.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a pre-determination process (S1004). The pre-determination process is a process (pre-determination) in which a winning ball (reserved ball) that has already obtained a random number by winning at the starting hole but has not yet had its random number determined by the special pattern process described below is determined before the random number is determined by the special pattern process.

The performance control unit 300 of this embodiment can perform a preview performance that suggests the result of the random number judgment by the special pattern processing based on the result of the random number judgment (pre-judgment result) determined by the pre-judgment processing before the random number is judged by the special pattern processing and the judgment result is announced. This preview performance is performed, for example, using a reserved display performance (described later) displayed on the image display unit 114 in response to the occurrence of a winning ball (reserved ball) that has already acquired a random number by winning at the starting hole but has not yet been judged by the special pattern processing. This preview performance based on the pre-judgment suggests to the player the judgment result when the random number is judged by the special pattern processing afterwards for the reserved ball corresponding to the pre-judgment related to the preview performance. This allows the player to play while having expectations about the reserved ball. Details of the preview performance based on the pre-judgment will be described later.

Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number U1 (S1005).
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 sets a pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information from the pre-determination process of S1004 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the performance control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S1006).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets a reserved number increase command in the RAM 203 to notify the performance control unit 300 of the increase in the reserved number U1 due to S1005 (S1007), and ends the processing for the winning at the first starting port 121.

Next, processing for the winning at the second start port 122 is performed. Referring to FIG. 10, the game control unit 200 next judges whether or not a game ball has won at the second start port 122 and the second start port switch 212 has been turned ON (S1008). If the second start port switch 212 has been turned ON, the game control unit 200 next judges whether or not the number of reserved balls U2 that have not changed due to the winning at the second start port 122 is less than the upper limit (S1009). In the example shown in FIG. 10, the upper limit is set to four balls. If the number of reserved balls U2 has reached the upper limit (No in S1009), no more winning balls that have not changed can be reserved, and processing for the winning at the second start port 122 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the reserved number U2 is less than the upper limit (Yes in S1009), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for the lottery due to this winning and stores it in the RAM 203 (S1010). In this case, since the winning occurred at the second starting port 122, a random number value for the special symbol lottery (jackpot random number value, jackpot pattern random number value, small win pattern random number value, reach random number value, variable pattern random number value, etc.) is acquired, as in S1003 above. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated in the random number update process in S901. The result of the special symbol lottery is then determined in the subsequent special symbol process based on this random number value.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a pre-determination process (S1011). The contents of this pre-determination process are the same as those of S1004.
Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number U2 (S1012).
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 sets a pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information from the pre-determination process of S1011 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the performance control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S1013).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets a reserved number increase command in the RAM 203 to notify the performance control unit 300 of the increase in the reserved number U2 by S1012 (S1014), and ends the processing for the winning at the second starting port 122.

[Gate switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the contents of the gate switch processing when the gaming ball passes through the gate 124.
In this gate switch process, the game control unit 200 first judges whether the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the gate switch 214 has been turned ON (S1101). If the gate switch 214 has been turned ON, the game control unit 200 then judges whether the number of reserved balls G that have not yet been changed is less than the upper limit (S1102). In the example shown in FIG. 11, the upper limit is set to 4 balls. If the number of reserved balls G has reached the upper limit (No in S1102), no more winning balls that have not yet been changed can be reserved, and the gate switch process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the reserved number G is less than the upper limit (Yes in S1102), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for the lottery due to this winning and stores it in the RAM 203 (S1103). In this case, since the winning is at gate 124, a random number value for the regular pattern lottery (such as a winning random number value) is acquired.

Next, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number G (S1104).
After the value of the reserved number G is added in S1104, the game control unit 200 sets a reserved number G increase command in RAM 203 to notify the presentation control unit 300 of the increase in the reserved number G by S1104 (S1105), and terminates processing for the winning at gate 124.

[Second big prize opening switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second large prize opening switch processing among the switch processing shown in S902 of FIG.
In this second large prize opening switch processing, the game control unit 200 first judges whether or not the game ball has passed through the second large prize opening 126 and the second large prize opening switch 209 has been turned ON (S1201). If the second large prize opening switch 209 has not been turned ON (NO in S1201), the current second large prize opening switch processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the second large prize opening switch 209 is ON (YES in S1201), the game control unit 200 judges whether or not a small prize is being played (S1202). When a small prize is being played (YES in S1202), the game control unit 200 sets a second large prize opening passage command in the RAM 203 (S1203). The second large prize opening passage command is a command indicating that the game ball has passed through the second large prize opening 126. The second large prize opening passage command set in S1203 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9. On the other hand, when a small prize is not being played (NO in S1202), the game control unit 200 notifies the performance control board 300 of a second large prize opening passage error. The second large prize opening passage error is an error that occurs when the game ball passes through the second large prize opening 126 at an abnormal timing.

In addition, an area on the right side of the game area 111 that is different from the second large winning hole 126 may be set as a specific area, and the pachinko game machine 100 may be provided with a specific area switch that detects whether the game ball has passed through this specific area. Then, instead of determining whether the second large winning hole switch 209 has been turned ON, the game control unit 200 may determine whether the specific area switch has been turned ON, and if it is turned ON during a small win game, a large win game described below may be executed after the small win game ends. In other words, the area that detects whether the game ball has passed through during a small win game is not limited to the second large winning hole 126.

[Special symbol processing by game control unit]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol processing of the symbol processing shown in S903 of FIG.
In this special symbol processing, the special symbol variation control unit 233 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the big win game flag is ON in the flag setting (hereinafter, flag setting) set in the RAM 203 (S1301). Here, the big win game flag is a flag that is set to identify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.

If the jackpot game flag is ON, the pachinko game machine 100 is already in the jackpot, so the special symbol processing ends without starting the special symbol change (Yes in S1301). On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is OFF (No in S1301), the special symbol change control unit 233 then judges whether the current state of the pachinko game machine 100 is in the special symbol change (S1302). If the special symbol is not changing (No in S1302), the special symbol change control unit 233 then performs processing on the reserved numbers U1 and U2 (see FIG. 10) of the special symbols that have not changed (S1303 to S1306). In this embodiment, the reserved number U1 related to the winning of the first start port 121 and the reserved number U2 related to the winning of the second start port 122 are distinguished, so this processing is also performed individually for each corresponding start port.

Specifically, the special symbol change control unit 233 first judges whether the reserved number U2 related to the winning of the second starting gate 122 is 1 or more (S1303). If the reserved number U2 is 1 or more (Yes in S1303), the special symbol change control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved number U2 (S1304). On the other hand, if the reserved number U2=0 (No in S1303), the special symbol change control unit 233 next judges whether the reserved number U1 related to the winning of the first starting gate 121 is 1 or more (S1305). If the reserved number U1 is 1 or more (Yes in S1305), the special symbol change control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved number U1 (S1306). On the other hand, if the reserved number U1 = 0 (No in S1305), this means that there is no winning combination to trigger the lottery for the special symbol, so the special symbol variation is not started, and a separate routine for setting up customer waiting is executed, and the process ends (S1319).
In this embodiment, priority is given to processing the reserved number U2 related to the winning of the second start port 122. That is, if the reserved number U2 is 1 or more, processing is performed for the reserved number U2, and if the reserved number U2=0, processing is performed for the reserved number U1 (see S1303 to S1306). On the other hand, it is also possible to control the reserved numbers U1 and U2 to be decremented in the order of winning, regardless of whether the winning is at the first start port 121 or the second start port 122.

After subtracting the reserved number U1 or reserved number U2 in S1304 or S1306, the special symbol change control unit 233 generates a game status command indicating the current game status of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1307). The game status command set in S1307 is sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9. Furthermore, the special symbol change control unit 233 turns off the customer waiting flag set in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1308). The customer waiting flag is a flag for identifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state, and is set in the customer waiting setting process (S1319, see FIG. 17 described later).

Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 executes a jackpot determination process and a variation pattern selection process by a separate routine (S1309, S1310). As will be described in detail later, this jackpot determination process and variation pattern selection process determines setting information (jackpot symbol, game state, variation pattern, etc.) for the variation of the special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222. This information is included in the variation start command sent to the performance control unit 300.

After this, the special symbol variation control unit 233 starts variation of the special symbols displayed by the first special symbol display unit 221 and the second special symbol display unit 222 shown in Fig. 3 based on the setting contents determined in the big win determination process and the variation pattern selection process (S1311). Then, a variation start command including setting information (big win symbol, game state, variation pattern, etc.) showing the setting contents is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S1312). The variation start command set in S1312 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of Fig. 9.
Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 adds one to the number of times the special symbol has been displayed since the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RAM clear, reset of the number of times of variation) (S1313). Then, a variation number command indicating the number of times of the added variation display is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S1314). The variation number command set in S1314 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9.

If it is determined in S1302 that the special pattern is changing (Yes in S1302), or after the change count command is set in S1314, the special pattern change control unit 233 determines whether the change time has elapsed (S1315). That is, it determines whether the time elapsed since the special pattern started changing in S1311 has reached the change time set in the change pattern selection process in S1310. If the change time has not elapsed (No in S1315), the special pattern change continues, and the special pattern processing ends.

On the other hand, if the change time has elapsed (Yes in S1315), the special symbol change control unit 233 first stops the change of the special symbols in the first special symbol display unit 221 and the second special symbol display unit 222 at the symbol determined in the big win determination process in S1309 (S1316). Then, another routine of stop processing is executed (S1317). The contents of the stop processing will be described later. In addition, the special symbol change control unit 233 sets a change stop command for stopping the decorative symbol described later in the RAM 203 (S1318). The change stop command set in S1318 is transmitted to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9.
In addition, if a win at the second starting port 122 occurs during the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the first starting port 121, the special pattern may be changed due to a win at the second starting port 122 during the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the first starting port 121. Also, for example, if a win at the first starting port 121 occurs during the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the second starting port 122, the special pattern may be changed due to a win at the first starting port 121 during the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the second starting port 122.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 13, after subtracting the value of reserved number U2 or reserved number U1 (see S1304, S1306), a jackpot determination process and a variation pattern selection process are executed (see S1309, S1310), but this is not limited to this.
In the special symbol process, after the big win determination process and the variation pattern selection process are performed, a process of subtracting the value of the reserved number U2 or the reserved number U1 may be performed. In this case, in the variation pattern selection process, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the reserved number U2 or the reserved number U1 before subtraction.

[Jackpot Determination Processing by the Game Control Unit]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big win determination process (S1309 in FIG. 13).
In this jackpot determination process, the special symbol determination unit 234 of the game control unit 200 first determines the jackpot random number value in the current special symbol lottery (S1401), and determines whether or not a jackpot or a small jackpot has been obtained (S1402, S1405). Whether or not a jackpot or a small jackpot has been obtained is determined by determining whether or not the value of the jackpot random number obtained in S1003 or S1010 of FIG. 10 matches the value set as the winning value for the jackpot or the value set as the winning value for the small jackpot (see FIG. 23(a)).

If the result of the random number determination in S1401 is a jackpot (Yes in S1402), the special symbol determination unit 234 then determines the jackpot symbol random number value (S1403). The type of jackpot is determined according to the result of this determination. The type of jackpot is determined by whether the value of the jackpot symbol random number obtained in S1003 or S1010 in FIG. 10 matches any of the values preset for each type of jackpot (see FIG. 23(b)).
After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets the symbol (jackpot symbol) representing the type of jackpot determined by the jackpot symbol random number determination as setting information in the RAM 203 (S1404).

If the result of the random number determination in S1401 is a small win (No in S1402, Yes in S1405), the special symbol determination unit 234 then determines the small win symbol random number value (S1406). The type of small win is determined according to the result of this determination. The type of small win is determined by whether the value of the big win symbol random number acquired in S1003 or S1010 in FIG. 10 matches any of the values preset for each type of small win (see FIG. 23(c)).
After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets the symbol (small win symbol) representing the type of small win determined by the determination of the small win symbol random number as setting information in the RAM 203 (S1407).

If the result of the random number determination in S1401 is neither a big win nor a small win (No in S1402 and S1405), the special symbol determination unit 234 then sets a symbol indicating that the lottery was lost (hereinafter, a losing symbol) as setting information in the RAM 203 (S1408).

[Variation pattern selection process by game control unit]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process (S1310 in FIG. 13).
In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern selection unit 235 of the game control unit 200 first refers to the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 (whether it is a normal game state, a special time-saving game state, or a specific time-saving game state) (S1501). Then, using the judgment result of S1402 of the big win judgment process (FIG. 14), it judges whether or not a big win has been won in this special symbol lottery (S1502). Then, if it is a big win (Yes in S1502), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out the big win variation pattern table from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1503).

On the other hand, if a big win has not been achieved (No in S1502), the variation pattern selection unit 235 then uses the result of the determination in S1405 of the big win determination process (FIG. 14) to determine whether or not a small win has been achieved in this special pattern lottery (S1504). If a small win has been achieved (YES in S1504), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out the variation pattern table for small wins from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1505).

On the other hand, if a small win has not been obtained (NO in S1504), a random number value is judged to determine whether or not to perform a so-called reach effect to make the player expect a big win (S1506). Whether or not to perform the reach effect is determined by judging whether or not the reach random number value obtained in S1003 or S1010 in Fig. 10 matches a preset value (see Fig. 23(d)).
If the result of the determination using the random number value indicates that a reach effect is to be performed (Yes in S1507), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out a reach-use variation pattern table from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1508). If the reach effect is not to be performed (No in S1507), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out a loss-use variation pattern table from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1509).
Here, the fluctuation pattern table is a table that associates multiple pre-prepared fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times of 3 seconds, 7 seconds, 13 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) with the value of the fluctuation pattern random number.

Next, the variation pattern selection unit 235 judges the variation pattern random number value using the variation pattern random number value acquired in S1003 or S1010 of FIG. 10 and the variation pattern table set in S1503, S1505, S1508, and S1509 (S1510). That is, the variation pattern selection unit 235 refers to the variation pattern table set in the RAM 203 and selects a variation pattern according to the random number value of the variation pattern random number. Therefore, even if the same random number value is acquired, the variation pattern table referenced differs depending on the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is in a time-saving state or not), the result of the special symbol lottery (whether it has been a jackpot or not, whether it has been a small jackpot or not, and whether a reach performance is performed if it has been neither a jackpot nor a small jackpot), and the like, and therefore the determined variation pattern differs.

Then, the variation pattern selection unit 235 sets the variation pattern selected in S1510 as setting information in the RAM 203 (S1511). The setting information for the variation pattern set in S1511 is included in the variation start command set in S1312 of FIG. 13, and is sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9. Details of the variation pattern selected in this embodiment and its setting will be described later.

[Processing during stoppage by game control unit]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the contents of the during-stop process (S1317 in FIG. 13).
In this stop processing, the game control unit 200 first checks whether a flag indicating a time-saving state (hereinafter, time-saving flag) is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1601). If the time-saving flag is ON (Yes in S1601), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of lotteries (variation number) J in the time-saving state (S1602) and checks whether the number of lotteries J has become 0 (S1603). If the number of lotteries J=0 (Yes in S1603), the time-saving flag is turned OFF (S1604). The operation of turning ON the time-saving flag and setting the initial value of the number of lotteries J are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 21) in the first big prize winning port process (FIG. 19) described later.
Also, if the number of lottery draws J is not 0 (NO in S1603), the game control unit 200 generates a time-saving number command indicating the value of the number of lottery draws J in the time-saving state and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1605). The time-saving number command set in S1605 is transmitted to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

If the time-saving flag is OFF (No in S1601), or after the time-saving flag is turned OFF in S1604, or after the time-saving count command is set in S1605, the game control unit 200 then generates a game status command and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1606). The game status command set in S1606 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 in FIG.
Next, the game control unit 200 judges whether or not the current special symbol lottery has resulted in a jackpot (S1607). Here, the judgment of whether or not the jackpot has been won can be made based on the judgment result of the jackpot judgment process (FIG. 14). For example, if any of the symbols shown in the chart of FIG. 23(b) described later is set, the answer is Yes in S1607. If a losing symbol or a small winning symbol is set in the RAM 203 by the jackpot judgment process, the answer is No in S1607.

If it is a jackpot (Yes in S1607), the game control unit 200 then turns on the jackpot game flag (S1608), which causes the game state setting in the RAM 203 to become the jackpot game state.
Next, the game control unit 200 initializes the value of the number of lottery draws J (S1609). Furthermore, if the time-saving flag is ON in S1601 and the number of lottery draws J is not 0 in S1603, the game control unit 200 turns the time-saving flag OFF (S1610).

After initializing the value of the number of lottery draws J in S1610, the game control unit 200 starts the opening operation of the big win game (S1611).
After that, the game control unit 200 sets an opening command for performing an effect in an opening operation according to the big win game flag in the performance control unit 300 in the RAM 203 (S1612), and ends the processing during the stop. This opening command is transmitted to the performance control unit 300 in the output processing shown in S906 of FIG.

On the other hand, if the result of the current special symbol lottery is not a big win (No in S1607), the game control unit 200 next determines whether the result of the current special symbol lottery is a small win or not (S1613).
If it is a small win (YES in S1613), the game control unit 200 then turns on the small win game flag (S1614). This causes the game state setting in the RAM 203 to become a small win game state. Furthermore, the game control unit 200 starts an opening operation for the small win game (S1615).
Next, the game control unit 200 sets an opening command for performing an effect in an opening operation corresponding to the small win game flag in the performance control unit 300 in the RAM 203 (S1616). This opening command is transmitted to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

On the other hand, if it is not a small win (No in S1613), the game control unit 200 judges whether the number of times of the variable display of the special symbol executed from the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RAM clear, reset of the number of times of variation) reaches a specific number (300 times in this embodiment) (S1617). If the specific number of times is reached (YES in S1617), the game control unit 200 executes a game status setting process of a different routine (S1618). The contents of the game status setting process will be described later.
Also, if the number of times the variable display has not reached the specific number (NO in S1617), the processing during the stoppage is terminated.

[Customer waiting setting process by the game control unit]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (S1319 in FIG. 13).
In this customer waiting setting process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether the customer waiting flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1701). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag that is set to identify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state.

If the customer waiting flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state, and the process ends as is (Yes in S1701). On the other hand, if the customer waiting flag is OFF (No in S1701), the game control unit 200 generates a customer waiting command and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1702), and turns the customer waiting flag ON (S1703). The customer waiting command set in S1702 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9. The customer waiting flag is set when the variation of the special symbols has stopped and there are no reserved symbols.

[Normal symbol processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal symbol processing of the symbol processing shown in S903 of FIG.
In this normal symbol processing, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1801). Here, the auxiliary game flag is a flag that is set when the normal symbol lottery is won. When the auxiliary game flag is set, the electric tulip 123 is opened according to the electric tulip processing (FIG. 22) described later, and it is easy to win the second start hole 122 (auxiliary game state).

If the auxiliary game flag is ON, the auxiliary game state is already set and the normal symbol is stopped, so the normal symbol processing ends without starting the normal symbol change (Yes in S1801). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is OFF (No in S1801), the normal symbol change control unit 236 then judges whether the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is during normal symbol change (S1802). If the normal symbol is not during change (No in S1802), the normal symbol change control unit 236 then judges whether the reserved number G (see FIG. 11) of unchanged normal symbols is 1 or more (S1803). If the reserved number G=0 (No in S1803), this means that there is no winning to start the lottery for the normal symbol, so the processing ends without starting the normal symbol change.

In contrast, if the reserved number G is 1 or more (Yes in S1803), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 subtracts 1 from the reserved number G (S1804). Then, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the winning random number in this normal symbol lottery and judges whether or not the normal symbol lottery has been won (S1805). Whether or not a winning number has been won is determined by judging whether or not the value of the winning random number obtained in S1103 of FIG. 11 matches the value set as the winning value in the table shown in FIG. 23(e) described below.

Next, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 sets the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery (S1806). That is, if the normal symbol lottery is won, a symbol representing the win (hereinafter, winning symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is not won, a symbol representing a loss in the lottery (hereinafter, losing symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information.

Next, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 sets the variation time of the normal symbol (S1807). This variation time is set based on the time-saving flag set in the processing of S1604, S1610 in FIG. 16, S2101 in FIG. 21 described later, etc. That is, if the time-saving flag is ON when setting by S1807, it is set to a short time (e.g., 1.5 seconds), and if the time-saving flag is OFF, it is set to a long time (e.g., 4.0 seconds). After this setting, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 starts the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 223 shown in FIG. 2(a) and FIG. 4 based on the setting contents of S1807 (S1808). The variation pattern of the normal symbol can also be determined by lottery. In this case, for example, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value for the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, and in S1807, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 determines the random number value for the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, thereby setting the fluctuation time.

After the normal pattern change has started in S1808, or if it is determined in S1802 that the normal pattern is changing (Yes in S1802), the normal pattern change control unit 236 determines whether the change time has elapsed (S1809). In other words, it determines whether the time elapsed since the normal pattern change started in S1808 has reached the change time set in S1807. If the change time has not elapsed (No in S1809), the normal pattern change continues, and the normal pattern processing ends.

On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (Yes in S1809), the normal pattern variation control unit 236 stops the variation of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display 223 (S1810). Then, the normal pattern variation control unit 236 judges whether or not the result of the judgment in S1805 was a win (S1811). If it was a win (Yes in S1811), the auxiliary game flag is turned ON (S1812). On the other hand, if the lottery was lost (No in S1811), the normal pattern processing ends without turning ON the auxiliary game flag.

[First big prize slot processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first big winning port processing of the electric role processing shown in S904 of FIG.
In this first big prize winning port process, the big prize winning port operation control unit 237 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether the big prize game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1901). If the big prize game flag is OFF, there is no winning in the first big prize winning port 125, so the first big prize winning port process is terminated (No in S1901). On the other hand, if the big prize game flag is ON (Yes in S1901), the big prize winning port operation control unit 237 next judges whether the pachinko game machine 100 is in the middle of the opening operation in the big prize operation control started in the stop processing (FIG. 16) (S1902).

If the pachinko game machine 100 is in the opening state (Yes in S1902), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether or not the time (opening time) during which the preset opening operation should be performed has elapsed (S1903). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation at the first special prize opening 125 continues, and the first special prize opening process is terminated (No in S1903). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1903), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then sets the operation of the first special prize opening 125 (S1904), initializes the number of winning prizes C (C=0) (S1905), adds 1 to the current value of the number of rounds R of the operation of the first special prize opening 125 (S1906), and starts the operation (opens) of the first special prize opening 125 (S1907).

In the operation setting of S1904, the operation pattern of the first large prize opening 125 and the number of rounds (number of operation rounds) to be operated with that operation pattern are set. The operation pattern and number of rounds are set in various ways depending on the type of jackpot in the special pattern lottery. Note that in a jackpot game, it is specified that the first large prize opening 125 is operated multiple times (multiple rounds) in succession. As an example, it is operated for 15 rounds (15R), and in one round, it is opened once for 29.5 seconds. As another example, it is operated for two rounds (2R), and in one round, it is opened once for 0.9 seconds. To explain further, it is opened for 0.9 seconds, closed for 1.0 second, and then opened for 0.9 seconds.

Next, the large prize opening operation control unit 237 judges whether the opening time in the operation pattern set in S1904 has elapsed (S1908). If the opening state of the first large prize opening 125 has not elapsed the opening time (No in S1908), the large prize opening operation control unit 237 then judges whether the number of winning balls C in the first large prize opening 125 is equal to or greater than a specified number (e.g., 9 balls) (S1909). If the opening time has not elapsed and the number of winning balls C is less than the specified number, the operation state (open state) of the first large prize opening 125 continues, so the first large prize opening process is terminated (No in S1909). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1908) or the number of winning balls C has reached the specified number (Yes in S1909), the large prize opening operation control unit 237 terminates the operation (closes) of the first large prize opening 125 (S1910).

Next, the large prize opening operation control unit 237 determines whether the number of rounds R of the operation of the first large prize opening 125 has reached the maximum value set in S1904 (S1911). If the maximum value has not been reached, the remaining operations are performed, and the first large prize opening processing is terminated (No in S1911).

When the number of rounds R of the operation of the first big prize opening 125 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S1911), the big prize opening operation control unit 237 then starts the ending operation (S1912). Here, the content of the ending operation corresponds to the state of the big prize game flag.
After this, the big prize opening operation control unit 237 sets an ending command for performing an ending operation corresponding to the big prize game flag in the performance control unit 300 in the RAM 203 (S1913). This ending command is transmitted to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

Next, the special prize opening operation control unit 237 resets the number of rounds R of the operation of the first special prize opening 125 to 0 (S1914), and then determines whether the time elapsed since the start of the ending operation has passed the time (ending time) at which the ending operation should be performed (S1917). If the ending time has not passed, the ending operation continues, and the first special prize opening process is terminated (No in S1917). On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (Yes in S1917), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then goes through a game status setting process by the game control unit 200 (S1918), and then turns off the special prize game flag, and terminates the first special prize opening process (S1919). The contents of the game status setting process will be described later.

If it is determined in S1902 that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the opening mode (No in S1902), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether or not the game is ending (S1915). If the game is ending (Yes in S1915), the operation from S1917 onwards is executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the ending mode (No in S1915), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether the first special prize opening 125 is in operation (open) or not (S1916). If it is not in operation (No in S1916), the operations from S1905 onwards are executed, and if it is in operation (Yes in S1916), the operations from S1908 onwards are executed.

[Second big prize slot processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second large winning port processing of the electric gimmick processing shown in S904 of FIG.
In this second large prize opening process, the large prize opening operation control unit 237 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether the small prize game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S2001). If the small prize game flag is OFF (No in S2001), there is no prize in the second large prize opening 126, so the second large prize opening process is terminated. On the other hand, if the small prize game flag is ON (Yes in S2001), the large prize opening operation control unit 237 next judges whether the pachinko game machine 100 is in the middle of the opening operation in the operation control at the time of the small prize that was started in the stop processing (FIG. 16) (S2002).

If the pachinko game machine 100 is in the opening state (Yes in S2002), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 next judges whether or not the time (opening time) for the preset opening operation to be performed has elapsed (S2003). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation at the second special prize opening 126 continues, and the second special prize opening process is terminated (No in S2003). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S2003), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 next sets the operation of the second special prize opening 126 (S2004), initializes the number of winnings C (C=0) (S2005), adds 1 to the current value of the number of rounds R of the operation of the second special prize opening 126 (S2006), and starts the operation (opens) of the second special prize opening 126 (S2007).

In the operation setting of S2004, the operation pattern of the second large winning opening 126 and the number of rounds (number of operating rounds) to be operated with that operation pattern are set. The operation pattern and number of rounds are set in various ways depending on the type of small win in the special pattern lottery. Note that, in the case of a small win, it is stipulated that the cumulative opening time of the second large winning opening 126 must be set to within 1.8 seconds.

Next, the large prize opening operation control unit 237 judges whether the opening time in the operation pattern set in S2004 has elapsed (S2008). If the open state of the second large prize opening 126 has not elapsed the opening time (No in S2008), the large prize opening operation control unit 237 then judges whether the number of winning balls C in the second large prize opening 126 is equal to or greater than a specified number (S2009). If the opening time has not elapsed and the number of winning balls C is less than the specified number, the second large prize opening 126 will continue to be in an operating state (open state), and the second large prize opening process will be terminated (No in S2009). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S2008) or the number of winning balls C has reached the specified number (Yes in S2009), the large prize opening operation control unit 237 will terminate the operation (close) of the second large prize opening 126 (S2010).

Next, the large prize opening operation control unit 237 judges whether the number of rounds R of the operation of the second large prize opening 126 has reached the maximum value set in S2004 (S2011). If the maximum value has not been reached, the remaining operations are performed, and the second large prize opening processing is terminated (No in S2011).

If the number of rounds R of the operation of the second large prize opening 126 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S2011), the large prize opening operation control unit 237 next judges whether or not the game ball has passed through the second large prize opening 126 during the small prize game (S2012). This judgment is made based on the judgment of the second large prize opening switch processing (S1202 in FIG. 12).
When the gaming ball passes through the second big winning opening 126 (YES in S2012), the gaming control unit 200 turns on the big win gaming flag (S2013). As a result, the gaming state setting in the RAM 203 becomes the big win gaming state.
Next, the game control unit 200 starts the opening operation of the big win game (S2014). Then, the performance control unit 300 sets an opening command in the RAM 203 for performing a performance in the opening operation according to the big win game flag (S2015). Furthermore, the first big win port processing (see FIG. 19) of another routine is executed, and the second big win port processing is terminated (S2016).

On the other hand, if the gaming ball has not passed through the second large prize opening 126 (NO in S2012), the large prize opening operation control unit 237 starts the ending operation (S2017).
After this, the big prize opening operation control unit 237 sets an ending command for performing an ending operation corresponding to the small prize game flag in the performance control unit 300 in the RAM 203 (S2018). This ending command is transmitted to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

Next, the large prize opening operation control unit 237 resets the number of rounds R of the operation of the second large prize opening 126 to 0 (S2019), and then determines whether the time elapsed since the start of the ending operation has passed the time (ending time) at which the ending operation should be performed (S2020). If the ending time has not passed (No in S2020), the ending operation continues, and the second large prize opening processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (Yes in S2020), the large prize opening operation control unit 237 then generates a game status command and sets it in RAM 203 (S2021). Furthermore, the small prize game flag is turned OFF, and the second large prize opening processing is terminated (S2022).

If it is determined in S2002 that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the opening mode (No in S2002), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether or not the game is ending (S2023). If the game is ending (Yes in S2023), the operation from S2020 onwards is executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the ending mode (No in S2023), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether the second special prize opening 126 is in operation (open) or not (S2024). If it is not in operation (No in S2024), the operations from S2005 onwards are executed, and if it is in operation (Yes in S2024), the operations from S2008 onwards are executed.

[Game Status Setting Process]
The contents of the game status setting process (S1618, S1918) by the game control unit 200 are shown in FIG.
First, the game control unit 200 judges whether the result of the special symbol lottery was a big win or a small win (S2101, S2103). These judgments can be made based on the type of symbol set as setting information in the RAM 203 in the big win judgment process (FIG. 14), for example. These judgments are generally similar to S1402, S1403, S1405, and S1406 in the big win judgment process (FIG. 14), so the judgment results of S1402, S1403, S1405, and S1406 may be used.

If it is a jackpot (YES in S2101), the game control unit 200 sets an initial value of the number of lottery draws J based on the type of jackpot symbol set as setting information in the RAM 203 (S2102). This initial value is, for example, 30. When the lottery draw for the set number of lottery draws J is performed, the time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is entered.
If it is a small win (NO in S2101, YES in S2103), the game control unit 200 sets an initial value of the number of lottery draws J based on the type of small win symbol set as setting information in the RAM 203 (S2104). This initial value is, for example, 30 times.

Next, the game control unit 200 resets the number of times the special symbol has been changed since the establishment of a predetermined condition (executing RAM clear and resetting the number of times of change) (S2105). In addition, the game control unit 200 generates a change number command indicating the number of times of change display and sets it in the RAM 203 (S2106). This change number command is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9.
Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the special time-saving flag (S2107), which causes the game state setting in the RAM 203 to become the special time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if the result is neither a big win nor a small win (NO in S2101, NO in S2103), the game control unit 200 sets the initial value of the number of lotteries J (S2108). In this embodiment, the initial value of the number of lotteries J is 295. Therefore, when 295 lotteries are performed in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state ends and the game enters the normal game state.
Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the specific time-shortening flag (S2109), which causes the game state setting in the RAM 203 to become the specific time-shortening game state.

Next, the game control unit 200 generates a game status command and sets it in the RAM 203 (S2110). This game status command is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9.

[Electric tulip processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the contents of the electric tulip processing of the electric role processing shown in S904 of FIG.
In the electric tulip processing, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S2201). If the auxiliary game flag is OFF, the electric tulip 123 will not be opened, and so the electric tulip processing is terminated (No in S2201). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is ON (Yes in S2201), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 next judges whether the electric tulip 123 is operating (S2202).

If the electric tulip 123 is not in operation (No in S2202), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 sets the operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 (S2203) and operates the electric tulip 123 with the set operation pattern (S2204). Here, the operation pattern is set based on the time-saving flag set in the processing of S1604, S1610 in FIG. 16, S2107, S2109 in FIG. 21, etc. For example, if the time-saving flag is OFF when setting in S2203, an operation pattern is set to open once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds, and if the time-saving flag is ON, an operation pattern is set to open three times with an opening time of 1.80 seconds. In this way, normally, when the time-saving flag is ON (in the time-saving state), the electric tulip 123 is opened multiple times for a long time, and a winning support (electric tulip support) that makes it easier to win the second starting hole 122 is performed. In addition, multiple operation patterns (types of auxiliary games) of the electric tulip 123 when the time-saving flag is ON or OFF may be prepared, and the operation pattern may be set according to the type of win determined in the normal symbol process (see FIG. 18).

If it is determined in S2202 that the electric tulip 123 is in operation (Yes in S2202), or after the electric tulip 123 has been operated in S2204, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 determines whether the opening time for the set operation pattern has elapsed (S2205). If the opening time has not elapsed, the electric tulip 123 will continue to be in operation (open state), and the electric tulip processing will end (No in S2205). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S2205), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 will turn off the auxiliary game flag and end the electric tulip processing (S2206).

[Random number determination method]
Here, we will explain in detail the random number determination method used in the jackpot determination process (Figure 14), the variable pattern selection process (Figure 15), the normal pattern process (Figure 18), etc.
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of random numbers (judgment table) used in the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery in this embodiment.
Figure 23(a) shows an example of the composition of a jackpot random number used in a special pattern lottery, Figure 23(b) shows an example of the composition of a jackpot random number used in a special pattern lottery, Figure 23(c) shows an example of the composition of a small win random number used in a special pattern lottery, Figure 23(d) shows an example of the composition of a reach random number used in a special pattern lottery that is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 121 during normal game play, and Figure 23(e) shows an example of the composition of a winning random number used in a normal pattern lottery.

Referring to FIG. 23(a), a jackpot and a small jackpot are set as the jackpot random number judgment value. The range of the random number (jackpot random number) is 300, ranging from 0 to 299. In addition, the winning value of the jackpot is set for each of the first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122, which are the triggers for the special pattern lottery, while the winning value of the small jackpot is set only for the second start hole 122. For the jackpot, three winning values are set for both the first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122, and the winning probability is 3/300 (=1/100). In addition, the winning value of the small jackpot is set to 10, and the winning probability is 10/300 (=1/30).
Here, an example of the special symbol lottery is explained. It is judged whether the jackpot random number (see S1003, S1010) obtained as a result of winning the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 matches any of the winning values of the jackpot lottery in Fig. 23(a), namely "8", "58", and "208". Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery for the small jackpot.

Referring to FIG. 23(b), five types of jackpot symbols are available: jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, jackpot symbol C, jackpot symbol D, and jackpot symbol E. Here, jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, and jackpot symbol C are symbols that indicate that the result of the special symbol lottery, which is triggered by winning the first starting hole 121, is a jackpot, and among these, jackpot symbol A indicates an 8-round jackpot. Jackpot symbol B indicates a 4-round jackpot. Jackpot symbol C indicates a 15-round jackpot. Also, jackpot symbol D and jackpot symbol E are symbols that indicate that the result of the special symbol lottery, which is based on winning the second starting hole 122, is a jackpot, and among these, jackpot symbol D indicates a 15-round jackpot. Jackpot symbol E indicates an 8-round jackpot. The range of random number values is 100, from 0 to 99.

In the jackpot pattern A, 20 values are assigned as winning values for the first starting hole 121. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery started by winning the first starting hole 121, the probability of winning with the jackpot pattern A is 20/100 (=2/10).
For the jackpot pattern B, 70 values are assigned as winning values for the first starting hole 121. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery started by winning the first starting hole 121, the probability of winning with the jackpot pattern B is 70/100 (=7/10).
In the jackpot pattern C, 10 values are assigned as winning values for the first starting hole 121. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery started by winning the first starting hole 121, the probability of winning with the jackpot pattern C is 10/100 (=1/10).

For the jackpot symbol D, 50 values are assigned as the winning value when the symbol enters the second starting hole 122. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with the jackpot symbol D is 50/100 (=5/10).
For the jackpot symbol E, 50 values are assigned as the winning value when the second starting hole 122 is won. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with the jackpot symbol E is 50/100 (=5/10).

Here, taking the jackpot pattern A as an example, it is determined whether the jackpot pattern random number value (see S1003) obtained upon winning at the first starting hole 121 matches the winning value of jackpot pattern A in FIG. 23(b), which is "0 to 19." Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the same applies to the special pattern lottery for other jackpot patterns such as jackpot pattern B.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is capable of setting a set value which is a stage of the advantageous degree of the game. In the pachinko gaming machine 100, the set value can be set to one of, for example, six stages of "1", "2", "3", "4", "5" and "6".
In the pachinko gaming machine 100, when the set value is set to "1," the probability of winning is the lowest. For example, when the set value is "1," the probability of winning is 1/100.
In the pachinko gaming machine 100, the winning probability is highest when the set value is set to "6." For example, when the set value is "6," the winning probability is 1/95.
In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, the winning probability is set in the order of increasing set values "1"<"2"<"3"<"4"<"5"<"6".

Referring to FIG. 23(c), there are three types of small win symbols: small win symbol A, small win symbol B, and small win symbol C. Here, small win symbol A, small win symbol B, and small win symbol C all indicate two rounds of small win. The range of random number values is 100, from 0 to 99.

For the small prize pattern A, 20 values are assigned as winning values for the second starting hole 122. Therefore, when a small prize is won in the special pattern lottery started by winning the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with the small prize pattern A is 20/100 (=2/10).
For the small prize pattern B, 50 values are assigned as winning values for the second starting hole 122. Therefore, when a small prize is won in the special pattern lottery started by winning the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with the small prize pattern B is 50/100 (=5/10).
For the small prize pattern C, 30 values are assigned as winning values for the second starting hole 122. Therefore, when a small prize is won in the special pattern lottery started by winning the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with the small prize pattern C is 30/100 (=3/10).

Next, the determination of the reach random number will be explained. The reach random number is set according to the number of reserved balls, as described later. Here, as an example, the reach random number when the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 121 is one will be explained.
Referring to FIG. 23(d), the range of the random number value is 250 from 0 to 249, and 22 random numbers are assigned to the lottery result (with reach) that is a variation pattern (variation time) that can execute the reach performance (for example, 15.0 seconds or more), and 228 random numbers are assigned to the lottery result (without reach) that is not a variation pattern that can execute the reach performance (for example, less than 15.0 seconds). That is, in the illustrated example, when the special pattern lottery does not result in a jackpot, the reach performance is performed with a probability of 22/250 (=11/125). Here, the reach performance is a performance performed in the image display unit 114 when the special pattern changes. Hereinafter, the performance when the special pattern changes that does not have a variation pattern that can execute the reach performance is called a no-reach performance, and the performance when the special pattern changes that has a variation pattern that can execute the reach performance is called a reach performance.

Here, taking the reach-enabled state as an example, it is determined whether the reach random number value (see S1003) obtained as a result of winning the first start port 121 matches the reach-enabled winning value "0 to 21" in FIG. 23(d). Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the same applies to the special pattern lottery without the reach. Furthermore, the reach random number used in the special pattern lottery based on winning the first start port 121 and the reach random number used in the special pattern lottery based on winning the second start port 122 may have the same number of winning values or different numbers. Furthermore, the reach random number used in the special pattern lottery in the normal game state, the reach random number used in the special pattern lottery in the special time-saving game state, and the reach random number used in the special pattern lottery in the specific time-saving game state may have the same number of winning values or different numbers.

In many cases, when the special symbol changes, a performance using a decorative symbol is performed in the image display unit 114 in conjunction with the display control of the first special symbol display unit 221 and the second special symbol display unit 222 (hereinafter, when there is no need to distinguish between them, they are referred to as the special symbol displays 221 and 222). The decorative symbol is, for example, configured by displaying three rows of symbols consisting of a sequence of numbers in which the numbers 1 to 9 are written consecutively in a vertical direction. Then, when the display of the special symbol changes in the special symbol displays 221 and 222 starts, the decorative symbol displayed in the image display unit 114 starts scrolling. Also, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display of the special symbol changes (the start of scrolling of the decorative symbol), the decorative symbol is also fixed and stopped. Generally, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win, the decorative symbol stops and displays three identical numbers horizontally, vertically, or diagonally. The performance performed in conjunction with the display of the special symbol changes is called a change performance. In addition, below, the variation effect that is executed based on the result of the special pattern lottery being a big win or a small win may be referred to as a big win variation effect. Also, below, the variation effect that is executed based on the result of the special pattern lottery being a miss may be referred to as a miss variation effect.

In the reach performance, the following operation is performed on the decorative symbols as a variable performance. First, before the decorative symbols scrolling vertically (horizontally) are fixed and stopped, any two symbols (number series) are temporarily stopped first. At this time, the same numbers are temporarily stopped in a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal straight line. To explain further, if the decorative symbols are scrolling vertically, the same numbers are temporarily stopped in a horizontal line.
Next, the scrolling speed of the last row gradually slows down, giving the player a sense of expectation that three identical numbers will line up in a straight line. After the last row temporarily stops, the three symbols are fixed and stopped.
Here, in the reach effect, before the three symbols are fixed and stopped, the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect may be performed. The SP reach effect is generally called the super reach or the special reach, and is an effect that gives more hope for a big win than the reach effect, and is a moving image effect in which various characters appear and a story unfolds. The SPSP reach effect is generally called the super super reach or the special special reach, and is an effect that gives more hope for a big win than the SP reach effect, and is a moving image effect in which various characters appear and a story unfolds.
In addition, a reach effect in which neither the SP reach effect nor the SPSP reach effect is performed may be referred to as a normal reach effect below.
As shown in FIG. 24 described later, in this embodiment, when the fluctuation time is longer (for example, 90 seconds or 60 seconds), the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is set to be executed.
On the other hand, in the no-reach performance, the decorative symbols scrolling vertically (horizontally) are not determined and stopped before the symbols are determined and stopped without the same numbers lining up in a straight line horizontally (vertically) or diagonally, without any performance that gives the player a sense of expectation like the reach performance.

In this way, when the result of the judgment of the jackpot random number is a miss, the reach random number determines whether to perform a reach effect in which the reach effect is an executable variation pattern on the image display unit 114, or a reach-free effect in which the reach effect is not an executable variation pattern. Also, the reach random number changes the execution rate of the reach effect according to the reserved number, enabling efficient game progress while giving the player an appropriate sense of expectation.
In addition, when a big win is won, a reach effect is performed, and the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped in a state where the same numbers are lined up in a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal line. On the other hand, when a small win is won or a miss is won, the reach effect is performed, and the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped in a state where the same numbers are not lined up in the above line.

Next, the determination of the winning random number used in the normal symbol lottery will be described.
23(e), the range of random number values is 10, from 0 to 9, with one value being assigned as the winning value when the time-saving flag is OFF, and nine values being assigned as the winning value when the time-saving flag is ON. Therefore, when a game ball passes through gate 124 in a non-time-saving state and a normal symbol lottery is held, there is a 1/10 probability of winning. In contrast, when a game ball passes through gate 124 in a time-saving state and a normal symbol lottery is held, there is a 9/10 probability of winning.

Here, taking the time-saving flag OFF as an example, it is determined whether the winning random number value (see S1103) obtained in response to the passage of the game ball through the gate 124, the first start port 121, or the second start port 122 matches the winning value "0" for the time-saving flag OFF in FIG. 23(e). Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the same applies to the normal symbol lottery for the time-saving flag ON.

Although not shown, multiple winning patterns can be set with different contents of auxiliary games (opening patterns of electric tulips 123) to be played when a winning is determined in the normal pattern lottery. In this case, for example, a winning pattern random number for specifying the type of winning in the normal pattern lottery is set in the same way as the jackpot pattern random number for specifying the type of winning in the special pattern lottery (see FIG. 23(b)). Then, the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value of the winning pattern random number together with the random number value of the winning random number in the gate switch process (see FIG. 11) by the random number acquisition unit 231, and identifies the type of winning based on the acquired random number value by the normal pattern determination unit 232.
It should be noted that the range of random numbers, the ratio of winning values, and each value of the winning values shown in the configuration example of each random number in FIG. 23 are merely examples and are not limited to the values shown.

[Example of setting fluctuation patterns]
Next, an example of the setting of the fluctuation patterns and tables used in the fluctuation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 15 will be described.
Fig. 24 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process shown in Fig. 15. Fig. 24 shows a setting example in which the variation of the special symbol is performed based on the winning of the first start hole 121 in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 24, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot (Yes in S1502 in FIG. 15), the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines the variation pattern based on the jackpot symbol and the variation pattern random number. Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines the variation pattern based on whether the variation pattern random number value (see S1003) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 matches any one of the variation pattern random number values assigned to each jackpot symbol. For example, when the jackpot symbol is "jackpot symbol C" and the variation pattern random number is "51", it matches the variation pattern random number range "50-69" assigned to "jackpot symbol C" in FIG. 24, so "PB3" is selected as the variation pattern. The special symbol variation time in this "PB3" is "90.18 seconds".

In addition, when the judgment result of the special symbol lottery is a miss (when both S1502 and S1504 in FIG. 15 are No), the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines the variation pattern based on the reserved number U1 of the first special symbol lottery, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number. Specifically, when the reserved number U1 of the first special symbol lottery is "1", the special symbol variation control unit 233 judges whether the reach random number value (see S1003) acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 together with the jackpot random number value is assigned to the reach random number range "0 to 21" assigned to the reserved number "1" of "miss" in FIG. 23, or to the reach random number range "22 to 249". If the acquired reach random number is included in the reach random number range "0 to 21", the fluctuation pattern is determined based on whether the fluctuation pattern random number value (see S1003) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 matches any of the fluctuation pattern random number values assigned to the reach random number range "0 to 21". For example, if the fluctuation pattern random number is "51", it matches the fluctuation pattern random number range "50 to 69", so "PR8" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.
In addition, the "..." shown in the "Variation Pattern" in Figure 24 means that a variation pattern that is not shown in the figure is provided.

Fig. 25 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, Fig. 25 shows a setting example in which the variation of the special symbol is performed based on the winning of the second start port in the normal game state.
In the table shown in Fig. 25, a variation pattern is provided according to the judgment result of the special symbol lottery and the variation pattern random number. More specifically, a variation pattern is provided in which the "judgment result" corresponds to "big win", "small win", and "miss".
In the table shown in FIG. 25, a variation pattern in which the "time" is "7.00" is provided as a "big win pattern D". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "7.01" is provided as a "big win pattern E". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "6.00" is provided as a "small win pattern A". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "6.01" is provided as a "small win pattern B". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "6.02" is provided as a "small win pattern C". A variation pattern in which the "time" is "0.50" is provided as a "miss".

In this table, a winning value in the reach random number is not assigned to "miss". Therefore, in the case of a special pattern change in which the lottery result based on winning the second start port 122 in the normal game state is a miss, a reach is not performed.

Fig. 26 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, Fig. 26 shows a setting example in which the variation of the special symbol is performed based on the winning of the second start hole 122 in the special time-saving game state.
In the table shown in FIG. 26, a fluctuation pattern is provided according to the determination result of the special pattern lottery, the reserved number U2 of the second special pattern lottery, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number.
In the table shown in FIG. 26, a variation pattern is provided in which the "time" is "2.50" and "4.00" as "no reach" when the "reserved number" is "1". The "time" of "2.50" and "4.00" is shorter than the "time" of "8.00", "10.00", and "11.00" of the "variation pattern" provided in the table shown in FIG. 24 as "no reach" when the "reserved number" is "1". In addition, in the table shown in FIG. 26, a variation pattern is provided in which the "time" is "2.00" and "4.00" as "no reach" when the "reserved number" is "2 to 3". The "time" of "2.00" and "4.00" is shorter than the "time" of "6.80" and "10.00" of the "variation pattern" provided in the table shown in FIG. 24 as "no reach" when the "reserved number" is "2 to 3". In addition, in the table shown in Fig. 26, a fluctuation pattern in which the "time" is "1.50" and "4.00" is provided as "no reach" with the "reserved number" being "4". The "time" of "1.50" and "4.00" is shorter than the "time" of "4.60" and "10.00" of the "fluctuation pattern" provided as "no reach" with the "reserved number" being "4" in the table shown in Fig. 24.
In addition, the "..." shown in the "Variation Pattern" in Figure 26 means that a variation pattern that is not shown in the figure is provided.

Fig. 27 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, Fig. 27 shows a setting example in which the variation of the special symbol is performed based on the winning of the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving game state.
In the table shown in FIG. 27, a variation pattern is provided according to the judgment result of the special symbol lottery, the reserved number U1 of the first special symbol lottery, and the variation pattern random number. In this table, a winning value in the reach random number is not assigned to the "variation pattern" in which the "judgment result" is "miss." Therefore, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving game state is a miss, a reach is not performed in the special symbol variation.
In the table shown in Fig. 27, a variation pattern is provided in which the "reserved number" is "1 to 4" and the "time" is "14.00". The "time" of this variation pattern is longer than any of the "times" of the "variation patterns" provided as "no reach" in the table shown in Fig. 26. In other words, when the result of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving game state is "miss" and "no reach", the variation time of the special symbol variation based on the winning of the second start port 122 is shorter than the variation time of the special symbol variation based on the winning of the first start port 121.

The game control unit 200 determines the table to be used for selecting the special symbol variation pattern based on whether the game ball has entered the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122 and the game status of the pachinko game machine 100. Then, as described above, the game control unit 200 determines the special symbol variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number value (see S1003 and S1010 in FIG. 10) obtained when the game ball has entered the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122, the presence or absence of reach performance, the number of reserved balls, and other conditions. Then, information on the determined special symbol variation pattern is included in a variation start command and sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300. In the performance control unit 300, as described later, a performance corresponding to (executable during) the variation time specified based on the variation pattern information included in the variation start command is selected and executed as the performance during the special symbol variation.

[Configuration of RAM of game control unit and RAM of performance control unit for performing advance notice performance based on advance judgment]
Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 and the RAM 303 of the presentation control unit 300 in this embodiment for executing the advance notice presentation based on the advance judgment will be described.
Fig. 28 is a block diagram for explaining an example of the configuration of the RAM 203 (see Fig. 4) of the game control unit 200 according to this embodiment. Fig. 28(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the memory area 204, and Fig. 28(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memories shown in Fig. 28(a).

As shown in FIG. 28(a), the RAM 203 has a memory area 204 as a special symbol reservation memory area that stores the jackpot random number obtained by the jackpot random number lottery. This memory area 204 has eight memory sections corresponding to the maximum number of reserved numbers in the first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122 (when the upper limit of each reserved number is 4). More specifically, the memory area 204 has a first memory section 204a, a second memory section 204b, a third memory section 204c, a fourth memory section 204d, a fifth memory section 204e, a sixth memory section 204f, a seventh memory section 204g, and an eighth memory section 204h.

As shown in FIG. 28(b), each of these memory units 204a-204h has an area for storing information indicating which starting hole (first starting hole 121 or second starting hole 122) was won, an area for storing the obtained jackpot random number, an area for storing a pattern random number, an area for storing a reach random number, and an area for storing a variation pattern random number. That is, each of memory units 204a-204h stores a jackpot random number, a pattern random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number.

Here, each random number is stored in order starting from the first storage unit 204a. To explain more specifically, for example, when no random number is stored in any of the first storage unit 204a to the eighth storage unit 204h, the acquired random number is stored in the first storage unit 204a. Also, for example, when random numbers are already stored in the first storage unit 204a to the fourth storage unit 204d, the acquired random number is stored in the fifth storage unit 204e.

Fig. 29 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration example of the RAM 303 (see Fig. 4) of the performance control unit 300 according to this embodiment. Fig. 29(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the reserved memory areas 305 and 306, and Fig. 29(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memory units shown in Fig. 29(a).
As shown in FIG. 29(a), the RAM 303 includes a first reserved memory area 305 and a second reserved memory area 306 as reserved status memory areas that store the status of reserved balls. The first reserved memory area 305 and the second reserved memory area 306 correspond to the reserved status for the winning of the first starting hole 121 and the reserved status for the winning of the second starting hole 122, respectively, and each has four memory sections. Specifically, the first reserved memory area 305 includes a first memory section 305a, a second memory section 305b, a third memory section 305c, and a fourth memory section 305d. The second reserved memory area 306 includes a first memory section 306a, a second memory section 306b, a third memory section 306c, and a fourth memory section 306d.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), each of these storage units 305a-305d, 306a-306d has a reserved flag storage area for turning the reserved flag ON/OFF and a notification flag storage area for turning the notification flag ON/OFF. The reserved flag is a flag for identifying the presence or absence of reserved balls for each storage unit 305a-305d, 306a-306d. That is, for example, if the number of reserved balls due to winning in the first starting hole 121 is 3, the reserved flag is ON in the three reserved flag storage areas of the first to third storage units 305a, 305b, and 305c. The notification flag is a flag for setting whether or not to perform a notice performance based on the results of a preliminary judgment for each reserved ball. In the pachinko game machine 100 of this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can set whether or not to perform a notice performance based on the results of a preliminary judgment depending on the game state and the situation of the performance. Therefore, if a preview performance is to be performed, the notification flag is set to ON, and if a preview performance is not to be performed, the notification flag is set to OFF. For example, if a preview performance is to be performed for the third of the three reserved balls, the notification flag is set to ON in the notification flag storage area of the third storage unit 305c.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the RAM 203 has an area (hereinafter, the pre-judgment information storage area) in which pre-judgment information is stored, in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 28(a). The pre-judgment information is information obtained by the pre-judgment process based on the random numbers described above (see S1004 and S1011 in FIG. 10). The contents of the pre-judgment information are the same as the information obtained as various judgment results in the special symbol process (see FIG. 13), and specifically, it is information for indicating whether or not a jackpot has been hit (and whether or not a small jackpot has been hit), the type of jackpot if a jackpot has been hit, whether the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is long enough to execute a reach performance, and the contents of the fluctuation pattern. The pre-judgment information stored in the pre-judgment information storage area is sent from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300 together with information on the reservation (hereinafter, the reservation information) corresponding to the winning ball (reserved ball) for which the pre-judgment process has been performed, or at a unique timing separate from this reservation information, and is included in the pre-judgment result command.

[Preliminary judgment process]
Next, the pre-determination process (see S1004 and S1011 in FIG. 10) will be described in detail.
In the pre-determination process in this embodiment, the game control unit 200 performs pre-determination as follows, using a random number table similar to the example of the random number configuration described with reference to Figures 24 to 27.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination process (S1004 and S1011 in FIG. 10) according to this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 30, the game control unit 200 first refers to the game status (S3201), selects a table corresponding to the current game status of the pachinko game machine 100, and performs a preliminary determination of the jackpot random number and jackpot pattern random number (S3202).
Next, the game control unit 200 selects a table according to the current game state of the pachinko game machine 100 and performs a preliminary determination of the reach random number (S3203). Furthermore, it selects a table according to the current game state and performs a preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern random number (S3204).
Although not shown in the figures, in S3202, S3203 and S3204, a dedicated table is selected depending on whether the pre-determination process is based on a winning entry at the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122.

Next, the game control unit 200 selects a pre-determination pattern according to the results of the pre-determinations in S3202, S3203, and S3204 (S3205).
After that, the game control unit 200 stores the result of the pre-determination of the jackpot random number, the result of the pre-determination of the jackpot pattern random number, the result of the pre-determination of the reach random number, the result of the pre-determination of the variation pattern, and the pre-determination pattern obtained as described above in the pre-determination information storage area as pre-determination information (S3206). Furthermore, in order to transmit the pre-determination information to the performance control unit 300, a pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information is set in the RAM 203 (S3207).

The above-mentioned preliminary judgment is performed using a random number value (see S1003 and S1010 in FIG. 10) obtained in response to the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122, and a judgment table having a configuration similar to that of the judgment table used in the jackpot judgment process (see FIG. 23). In other words, the judgment itself after selecting the judgment table to be used is the same as the judgment in the jackpot judgment process (see S1401 in FIG. 14). Therefore, in this embodiment, the subroutine (see S1309 in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14) of the jackpot judgment process used in the special pattern process (see FIG. 13) is called, and the random number judgment in the above-mentioned preliminary judgment is performed.

By configuring in this manner, in this embodiment, there is no need to prepare a processing function (subroutine) for judging random numbers separately from the jackpot judgment process in order to judge the random numbers in the pre-judgment process. This reduces the number of control instructions, and suppresses an increase in the size of the programs related to the jackpot judgment process and the pre-judgment process. Also, as described above, if the judgment table used for the pre-judgment is configured in the same way as the judgment table used for the jackpot judgment, the judgment table used for the jackpot judgment may also be used for the pre-judgment.

In addition, although only the advance judgment (whether or not it is a big win) regarding the special symbol lottery has been described here, in this embodiment, the variation pattern when performing the variation display and the stop display of the special symbol is also read ahead (advance judgment). The selection of the variation pattern in the special symbol lottery is performed using the variation pattern selection random number value (see S1003, S1010 in FIG. 10) obtained in response to the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122 and the variation pattern table (see FIG. 24 to FIG. 29) (see S1310 in FIG. 13 and FIG. 15). Therefore, in the advance reading of the variation pattern, the variation pattern to be selected can be read ahead using the variation pattern selection random number value obtained at the time of winning and the advance reading table having the same configuration as the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process of the special symbol process. In other words, a different advance reading table can be used for each game state of the pachinko game machine 100. Also, different look-ahead tables can be used depending on whether the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 is won.

In this case, the subroutine (see S1310 in FIG. 13 and FIG. 15) of the variation pattern selection process used in the special symbol processing (see FIG. 13) can be called and used to look ahead at the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process of the special symbol processing may be used for the look-ahead table used to look ahead at the variation pattern selection. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of control commands related to the look-ahead of the variation pattern selection and suppress an increase in the size of the program.

In addition, if the pre-judgment process and the jackpot judgment process during the special pattern change are performed in the same subroutine using the same judgment table group, the execution time of each process is different, so the pre-judgment result and the judgment result by the jackpot judgment process during the special pattern change may differ. That is, after the pre-judgment process is performed, the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 (either the normal game state, the special time-saving game state, or the specific time-saving game state) changes by the time the special pattern change starts. In this case, since different types of judgment tables are used depending on the game state, the specific judgment tables used for judgment will be different when the pre-judgment process is performed and when the jackpot judgment process is performed. Therefore, even if the same random number value obtained when winning the first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122 is used, the pre-judgment result and the judgment result of the jackpot judgment process may differ. In such a case, if the game state changes after the execution of the pre-determination process and before the special pattern variation starts, the performance control unit 300 may perform control such as prohibiting the execution of the performance based on the pre-determination result.

In accordance with the command output from the game control unit 200 to the performance control unit 300 as described above, the performance control unit 300 controls, for example, the image display unit 114, the board lamp 116, the speaker 156, and the frame lamp 157. For example, when the performance control unit 300 receives a command indicating the start of a door opening error, the performance control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display a message such as "Please call an attendant" or an image indicating an abnormal state. The performance control unit 300 also causes the speaker 156 to output an alarm indicating an abnormal state, and restricts the output of music, voice, sound effects, and the like. The performance control unit 300 also turns on the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 in red, for example, to indicate an abnormal state.

In addition, although it has been described here that the performance control unit 300 notifies the occurrence of an error using all of the image display unit 114, the board lamp 116, the speaker 156, and the frame lamp 157, it may be possible to use only some of these. The notification mode may be switched depending on the type of error. For example, when a door opening error occurs, the image display unit 114, the board lamp 116, the speaker 156, and the frame lamp 157 may all be used as described above. When a payout error occurs, the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156 notify the occurrence of an error. This allows staff at the gaming establishment (pachinko parlor) to easily determine the urgency of an error that has occurred in the gaming machine.

[Example of pre-determined pattern settings]
Next, a description will be given of an example of setting the pre-determination patterns and tables used in the pre-determination process shown in FIG.
Fig. 31 is a diagram showing an example of setting the pre-determination pattern and the table used in the pre-determination process shown in Fig. 30. Fig. 31 shows a setting example in which the special symbol is changed based on the winning of the first start hole 121 in the normal game state.

In the table shown in Figure 31, "judgment result,""pattern,""reach random number,""variation pattern random number,""planned variation pattern," and "pre-judgment pattern" are associated with each other.
The game control unit 200 determines a planned fluctuation pattern and a pre-determination pattern based on the pre-determination results of the jackpot random number and the jackpot pattern random number, the pre-determination results of the reach random number, and the pre-determination results of the fluctuation pattern random number.
The "..." shown in the "pre-determination pattern" in FIG. 31 means that a pre-determination pattern not shown in the figure is provided.

32 is a diagram showing an example of a pre-determination pattern and a table used in the pre-determination process. In addition, FIG. 32 shows a setting example in which a special symbol is changed based on a winning into the second start hole 122 in the special time-saving game state.
In the table shown in Figure 32, "judgment result,""pattern,""reach random number,""variation pattern random number,""planned variation pattern," and "pre-judgment pattern" are associated with each other.

[Operation of the production control unit]
Next, the operation of the performance control unit 300 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the operation of the performance control unit 300.
The operation of the performance control unit 300 consists of the main processing shown in Fig. 33(a) and the interrupt processing shown in Fig. 33(b). Referring to Fig. 33(a), the performance control unit 300 first performs initial settings at startup (S3601), sets the cycle of the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) (S3602), and then accepts interrupt processing while updating the random numbers used in performance control according to the set cycle (S3603).

The interrupt process is performed periodically according to the cycle set in S3602. Referring to FIG. 33(b), in this interrupt process, the performance control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200 and performs command reception process (S3611). In this command reception process, the performance content (performance pattern) is selected. In addition, the performance control unit 300 performs specific time-saving related performance process to execute a performance related to a specific time-saving game state (S3612). In addition, the performance control unit 300 performs performance button process to accept the operation of the performance button 161 by the player (S3613). After this, the performance control unit 300 performs command transmission process to transmit a command including information on the selected performance pattern to the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 (S3614). As a result, a performance is performed by displaying an image and outputting sound on the image display unit 114, operating the movable role object 115, lighting the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, etc.

[Command reception processing by the production control unit]
FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command receiving process (S3611 in FIG. 33(b)).
In this command reception process, the performance control unit 300 first judges whether or not the preliminary judgment result command and the reserved number increase command have been received (S3701). The preliminary judgment result command and the reserved number increase command are set in the game control unit 200 in the start port switch process shown in Fig. 10 (S1006, S1007, S1013, S1014) and are commands sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output process (S906) shown in Fig. 9.
Then, if the performance control unit 300 determines that it has received a pre-determination result command and a command to increase the number of reserved items (Yes in S3701), it adds 1 to the value of the number of reserved items stored in RAM 303 (S3702).
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 performs a pre-determination performance selection process based on the pre-determination result command and the reserved number increase command (S3703). The contents of the pre-determination performance selection process will be described later.

If the received command is neither a pre-determination result command nor a reserved number increase command (No in S3701), the performance control unit 300 judges whether the received command is a fluctuation start command (S3704). This fluctuation start command is a command that is set in the game control unit 200 in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 13 (S1312) and sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output processing (S906) shown in FIG. 9.
If the received command is a fluctuation start command (Yes in S3704), the performance control unit 300 executes a performance selection process (S3705). When a fluctuation start command is received, a random number value for performance control used in the performance selection process is obtained. This random number value is a random number value that is periodically updated in S3603 of the main process shown in FIG. 33(a). The details of the performance selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a reserved number increase command, or a fluctuation start command (No in S3701 and S3704), the performance control unit 300 judges whether the received command is a fluctuation stop command (S3706). This fluctuation stop command is a command that is set in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 13 by the game control unit 200 (S1318) and sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output processing (S906) shown in FIG. 9.
If the received command is a fluctuation stop command (Yes in S3707), the performance control unit 300 executes a process during the end of the fluctuation performance (S3707). In the process during the end of the fluctuation performance, the performance control unit 300 analyzes the received fluctuation stop command and sets a fluctuation performance end command in the RAM 303 to instruct the end of the performance of the pattern fluctuation.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a reserved number increase command, a fluctuation start command, or a fluctuation stop command (No in S3701, S3704, and S3706), the performance control unit 300 judges whether the received command is an opening command for starting the opening operation of the big win game (S3708). This opening command is set (S1618) during the stop processing shown in FIG. 16 or the second big winning port processing (S2015) shown in FIG. 20, and is a command sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output processing (S906) shown in FIG. 9.
If the received command is an opening command (Yes in S3708), the effect control unit 300 executes a big win effect selection process (S3709). The big win effect selection process will be described in detail later.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a reserved number increase command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, or an opening command (No in S3701, S3704, S3706, and S3708), the performance control unit 300 judges whether the received command is an ending command for starting the ending operation of the big win game (S3710). This ending command is a command that was set in the first big win port process shown in Fig. 19 (S1913) and sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output process (S906) shown in Fig. 9.
If the received command is an ending command (Yes in S3710), the performance control unit 300 executes an ending performance selection process (S3711). The details of the ending performance selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a hold number increase command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, or an ending command (No in S3701, S3704, S3706, S3708, and S3710), the performance control unit 300 then executes a customer waiting command reception process to transition the received command to a customer waiting state (S3712). The customer waiting command reception process will be described in detail later.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination effect selection process (S3703) and the effect selection process (S3705) of FIG.
In the pre-determination effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the pre-determination result command received from the game control unit 200 (S3801). Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 analyzes the reserved number increase command received from the game control unit 200 (S3802). Then, the effect control unit 300 selects an effect pattern (pre-determination effect pattern) to be used in the pre-determination effect based on the pre-determination result command and the reserved number increase command (S3803).

Here, as the pre-determination performance pattern, various performance patterns can be provided that foretell the result of the random number determination by the special pattern processing before the start of the fluctuation based on the result of the random number determination by the special pattern processing. For example, a reserved display performance, a continuous notice performance, etc. can be provided as a pre-determination performance pattern. In this embodiment, when a reserved ball occurs, a display showing the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first special pattern reserved display 218 and the second special pattern reserved display 219 of the display 130 (see FIG. 3), and a reserved display suggesting the occurrence of a reserved ball and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the image display unit 114 (reserved display performance). Therefore, in this reserved display performance, by reflecting the pre-determination result in the display mode of the reserved display, etc., a pre-determination performance can be provided that suggests to the player the judgment result when the random number determination by the special pattern processing is performed later for the reserved ball.

Note that, although the case where the pending display effect is used as the pre-determination effect has been described here, it is possible to perform a variety of advance notice effects by reflecting the various effects performed before the start of fluctuations based on the random number determination results by the special pattern processing. For example, effects using the effect image displayed on the image display unit 114, effects using the illumination of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, effects using the operation of movable props, effects using audio output such as music and sound effects, etc. can be set as pre-determination effect patterns.

In addition, the pre-determination performance may be performed in conjunction with a pattern change for other winning balls that is performed before the pattern change for the winning ball (reserved ball) for which a pre-determination has been performed. In this embodiment, the reserved balls are limited to four per start port (first start port 121 or second start port 122) (see FIG. 10). Also, priority is given to the consumption of reserved balls in the second start port 122. In this case, for example, if a pre-determination is performed for a reserved ball in the second start port 122, a pattern change will be performed for up to four winning balls, including the currently changing change (referred to as the change in question), before the pattern change for that reserved ball is performed. In the advance notice performance for the reserved ball for which a pre-determination has been performed, if multiple pattern changes are performed before the pattern change for that reserved ball, an advance notice performance (continuous advance notice performance) that spans the multiple pattern changes may be performed.

Then, the performance control unit 300 sets a reserved number command containing the value of the reserved number after the addition and information on the pre-determined performance pattern selected in the pre-determined performance selection process in RAM 303 (S3804). The reserved number command contains information indicating the selected pre-determined performance pattern to notify the CPU 311 of the image/audio control unit 310 of the pattern. By receiving the reserved number command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like for the VDP 314 to draw and output images and sounds corresponding to the selected pre-determined performance pattern. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads image data and sound data for representing the selected pre-determined performance pattern from the CGROM 315 and the SNDROM 316, and displays the pre-determined performance using the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156.

In the effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received fluctuation start command (S3811). It also subtracts 1 from the reserved number value stored in RAM 303 (S3812). Then, the effect control unit 300 selects a fluctuation effect pattern for the pattern fluctuation by the image displayed on the image display unit 114 based on various setting information (information on the type of jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game, the fluctuation pattern, etc.) obtained from the analysis result of the fluctuation start command (S3813). Note that after the fluctuation effect pattern is selected, the reserved number value stored in RAM 303 may be subtracted by 1. In other words, the fluctuation effect pattern may be selected in the state before the reserved number value stored in RAM 303 is subtracted by 1.

Finally, the performance control unit 300 sets a variable performance start command in the RAM 303 to instruct the start of execution of the selected performance (S3814). The variable performance start command includes information indicating the selected variable performance pattern in order to notify the CPU 311 of the selected pattern. By receiving the variable performance start command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like for the VDP 314 to draw and output images and sounds corresponding to the selected variable performance pattern. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads image data and sound data for representing the selected variable performance pattern from the CGROM 315 and the SNDROM 316, and displays the variable performance using the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156.

Although not described in detail, in the selection process of the variation presentation pattern of the pattern variation in S3813, the variation presentation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern. The variation presentation pattern of the decorative pattern, the background presentation, the notice presentation, etc. are determined based on the variation presentation pattern determined here. The variation presentation of the decorative pattern is a presentation display performed on the image display unit 114 in conjunction with the variation presentation of the special pattern performed on the first special pattern display device 221 or the second special pattern display device 222. In this variation presentation of the decorative pattern, a reach presentation, etc. is executed. Unlike this embodiment, when multiple variation presentation patterns are set for the variation pattern, the variation presentation pattern may be selected by lottery using a presentation random number (one of the random numbers updated in S3603 of FIG. 33(a), and the presentation random number value is obtained when the variation start command is received).

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big win effect selection process (S3709) of FIG.
In this big win effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received opening command (including information on the type of big win symbol) (S3901), and selects an effect pattern (big win effect pattern) (S3902). Then, the effect control unit 300 reads image data and sound data used for the effect by the selected big win effect pattern from the ROM 302, sets these data together with a big win effect start command instructing the selected effect in the RAM 303, and ends the big win effect selection process (S3903). This determines the effect during the big win. In addition, in the selection of the big win effect pattern (S3902), a judgment may be made based on a random number value obtained when the command is received.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process (S3711) of FIG.
In this ending performance selection process, the performance control unit 300 first analyzes the received ending command (including information on the type of big win symbol) (S4001), and selects a performance pattern (ending performance pattern) (S4002). Then, the performance control unit 300 reads image data and sound data used for the performance of the selected ending performance pattern from the ROM 302, sets the ending performance start command that instructs the selected performance together with these data in the RAM 303, and ends the ending performance selection process (S4003). Note that in the selection of the ending performance pattern (S4002), a judgment may be made based on a random number value obtained when the command is received.

FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the contents of the customer waiting command receiving process (S3712) of FIG.
The performance control unit 300 judges whether or not a customer waiting command for switching to a customer waiting state has been received (S4101). If a customer waiting command has been received (Yes in S4101), the performance control unit 300 starts measuring the elapsed time (S4102) and sets the measurement flag in the RAM 303 to ON (S4103). On the other hand, if the received command is not a customer waiting command (No in S4101), the performance control unit 300 judges whether or not the measurement flag stored in the RAM 303 is ON (S4104). If the measurement flag is OFF (No in S4104), the customer waiting command reception process ends.

If the measurement flag is ON (Yes in S4104 or after being set to ON in S4103), the performance control unit 300 then determines whether the measurement time has reached a predetermined time-up time (e.g., 10 seconds) (S4105). If the time has not yet expired (No in S4105), the customer waiting command reception process ends. On the other hand, if the time has expired (Yes in S4105), the performance control unit 300 turns OFF the measurement flag stored in RAM 303 (S4106).

Next, the performance control unit 300 judges whether or not the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is a specific time-saving game state (S4107). If it is in the specific time-saving game state (YES in S4107), the performance control unit 300 judges whether or not the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state has not yet started (S4108).
If it is not before the start of the first variable performance (NO in S4108), the performance control unit 300 sets a customer waiting performance command for performing the first customer waiting performance in the RAM 303 and ends the customer waiting command receiving process (S4109).
If the game is not in the specific time-saving game state (NO in S4107) or before the start of the first variable performance in the specific time-saving game state (YES in S4108), the performance control unit 300 sets a customer waiting performance command for performing a second customer waiting performance (demo performance) in the RAM 303 and ends the customer waiting command reception process (S4110). The second customer waiting performance is a performance of a different type from the first customer waiting performance.

When the command reception process is completed in this manner, one of the following commands is set in RAM 303: variable performance start command, variable performance end command, big win performance start command, ending performance start command, or customer waiting performance command.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific time-saving related performance processing (S3612) of FIG. 33(b).
The performance control unit 300 judges whether the current game state of the pachinko game machine 100 is a normal game state (S4201). If it is a normal game state (YES in S4201), the performance control unit 300 judges whether it has been controlled from a specific time-saving game state to a normal game state (S4202). If it has been controlled from a specific time-saving game state to a normal game state (YES in S4202), the performance control unit 300 ends the specific time-saving related performance processing. Also, if it has not been controlled from a specific time-saving game state to a normal game state (NO in S4202), the performance control unit 300 judges whether a variable performance is being executed (S4203). If it is not being variable (NO in S4203), the performance control unit 300 ends the specific time-saving related performance processing.

On the other hand, if the variation performance is in progress (YES in S4203), the performance control unit 300 judges whether or not a RAM clear was performed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 was last restored from a power-off state (S4204). If a RAM clear was not performed (NO in S4204), the performance control unit 300 judges whether or not the number of times the decorative pattern changed after the last restoration is equal to or greater than the first number (S4205). In this embodiment, the first number is 50 times. However, the first number may be any value. If the number of times of change is less than the first number (NO in S4205), the specific time-saving related performance process is terminated. Note that the condition for the performance control unit 300 to judge that the number of times of change is equal to or greater than the first number may be that the first number of times of change has ended, or that the first number of times of change has started.
If the number of changes is equal to or greater than the first number (YES in S4205), the performance control unit 300 judges whether the number of changes of the decorative pattern after the return is equal to or greater than the second number (S4206). The second number is a number of changes greater than the first number. In this embodiment, the second number is, for example, 101 times. However, the second number may be any value as long as it is a number of changes greater than the first number. Note that the performance control unit 300 may determine that the number of changes is equal to or greater than the second number when the second number of changes has ended or when the second number of changes has started.
If the number of times of change is less than the second number (NO in S4206), the performance control unit 300 judges whether the number of times of change of the decorative pattern after the return is the third number (S4207). In this embodiment, the third number is 100 times. The performance control unit 300 may determine that the number of times of change is the third number as a condition that the third number of changes has ended or that the third number of changes has started.

If the number of times of change is not the third number (NO in S4207), the performance control unit 300 determines by lottery (for example, a ratio of 1/2) whether or not to execute the clear negation performance (S4208). The clear negation performance is a performance indicating that the RAM clear has not been executed. If it is determined that the clear negation performance is not executed (NO in S4208), the specific time-saving related performance processing is terminated.
If it is determined that the clear negation effect is to be executed (YES in S4208), the effect control unit 300 executes the clear negation effect and the remaining number notification effect (S4209). The remaining number notification effect is an effect that notifies the number of variable effects required until the specific time-saving game state is reached.

If the number of changes is the third number (YES in S4207), the performance control unit 300 determines whether or not the clear negation performance has been performed (S4210). If the clear negation performance has not been performed (NO in S4210), the performance control unit 300 executes the clear negation performance and the remaining number of times notification performance (S4211).

On the other hand, if the RAM is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is most recently restored from a power-off state (YES in S4204), the performance control unit 300 judges whether the most recent reset of the number of fluctuations was a reset based on a jackpot (S2105 in FIG. 21) (S4212). If the reset was not based on a jackpot (NO in S4212), the performance control unit 300 judges whether the number of fluctuations after the most recent restoration from a power-off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is the fourth number or more (S4213). The fourth number is a number of fluctuations greater than the first number. In this embodiment, the fourth number is 100 times. However, the fourth number may be any value as long as it is a number of fluctuations greater than the first number. If the number of fluctuations is less than the fourth number (NO in S4213), the specific time-saving related performance process is terminated. The performance control unit 300 may determine that the number of fluctuations is equal to or greater than the fourth number when the fourth number of fluctuations has ended or when the fourth number of fluctuations has started.

If the number of times of change is the fourth or more (YES in S4213) or if the most recent reset was a reset based on a big win (YES in S4212), the performance control unit 300 judges whether or not the remaining number of times notification performance has been executed (S4214). If the remaining number of times notification performance has not been executed (NO in S4214), the performance control unit 300 executes the remaining number of times notification performance (S4215).
In addition, if S4206 is YES, if S4210 is YES, after S4209 is executed, after S4211 is executed, if S4214 is YES, or after S4215 is executed, the presentation control unit 300 executes a remaining number update presentation (S4216). The remaining number update presentation is a presentation that notifies the user of the updated number of variable presentations required until the specific time-saving game state is reached.

On the other hand, if the normal game state is not reached (NO in S4201), the performance control unit 300 judges whether the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the specific time-saving game state (S4217). If the current game state is not in the specific time-saving game state (NO in S4217), the specific time-saving related performance process is terminated.
If the specific time-saving game state is in progress (YES in S4217), the performance control unit 300 judges whether or not the first variable performance in the specific time-saving game state has yet to start (S4218). If the first variable performance has yet to start (YES in S4218), the performance control unit 300 judges whether or not there is a hold (S4219). If there is a hold (NO in S4219), the specific time-saving related performance process ends.
If there is no reserved ball (YES in S4219), the performance control unit 300 starts a right hit notification (S4220). More specifically, the performance control unit 300 starts a notification to prompt the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111.

On the other hand, if the first variable effect in the specific time-saving game state has started (NO in S4218), the effect control unit 300 judges whether or not the right hit notification has started (S4221). If the right hit notification has started (NO in S4221), the specific time-saving related effect processing is terminated.
If the right hit notification has not yet started (YES in S4221), the performance control unit 300 starts the right hit notification (S4222). Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 executes a specific time-saving notification performance (S4223). The specific time-saving notification performance is a performance that notifies the pachinko gaming machine 100 that it is in a specific time-saving game state.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect button processing (S3613 in FIG. 33(b)).
In this effect button process, the effect control unit 300 first judges whether or not the player has operated the operation means such as the effect button 161 during a predetermined acceptance period (operation valid period described later) (S4301). Here, the operation of the operation means includes the effect button 161 being pressed so as to be displaced from a non-operation position (reference position) when not operated to a predetermined position to be turned ON, and the center key or surrounding keys of the effect keys 162 being pressed to be turned ON. In addition, if the pachinko game machine 100 is provided with an operation device other than the effect button 161 and the effect keys 162, such as a touch panel, this includes the detection of the operation of that device. The effect control unit 300 receives operation signals from the controllers of these devices and detects that an operation has been performed.
If an operating means such as the effect button 161 is not operated (No in S4301), the effect button processing is terminated.

Also, if an operating means such as the performance button 161 is operated (Yes in S4301), the performance control unit 300 sets a performance button command including information indicating the operation content of the operating means in RAM 303 and ends the performance button processing (S4302).

Then, the performance control unit 300 performs the command sending process (S3614) in FIG. 33(b) and sends the command set in the RAM 303 in the command receiving process and performance button process to the image/audio control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320. Based on the received command, the image/audio control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 then control the image display on the image display unit 114, the sound output, the operation of the movable prop 115, the illumination of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, etc., to execute the set performance.

[Information displayed on the information display in each game zone]
Next, the display information of the information display device 230 in each game section will be described with reference to Fig. 41. In the table of display information in Fig. 41, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of outs during normal play, the data selection counter value, and the display content of the information display device 230 are associated with each other.
Here, the first game section shown in FIG. 41 starts when the power is turned on for the first time. The total number of outs set at 60,000 is a value that can approximately guarantee one day's operation of a pachinko machine that produces 100 shots per minute. The normal base value is always displayed in two digits in the numeric segment. Also, if the normal number of outs is "0" or if the normal base value is 100 or more, "99." is displayed in the numeric segment.

The identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 230 includes "bL.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the current play section, "b1.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the play section one period before, "b2.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the play section two periods before, and "b3.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the play section three periods before.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical segment of the information display 230 includes "--", which indicates that there is no calculated normal base value, "00", which indicates that the normal base value is "0" or the normal out count is "0", "01" to "99", which indicate that the normal out count is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99", and "99.", which indicates that the normal base value is "100" or more. Note that if the normal base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information will always be "0" and it will be displayed in two digits.

The display mode of the numerical information displayed in the numerical segment does not change (it is displayed as a lit light) regardless of the play area or the number of outs during normal play, but the display mode of the identification information displayed in the identification segment changes (it is displayed as a flashing light or a lit light) depending on the play area or the number of outs during normal play (whether or not a calculated normal base value is present, and whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth play zones, when displaying the identification information of a play zone in which there is no calculated normal base value, the identification information will be displayed in a blinking manner. In addition, in the second play zone and onwards, when displaying the identification information of the current play zone ("bL."), if the period in which the reliability of the calculated normal base value is low (the number of normal outs is between 0 and 5999), the identification information will be displayed in a blinking manner. In all other cases, the identification information will be displayed in a lit manner.

Here, as an example of the display on the information display 230, if the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is within the range of 0 to 5999, the data selection counter value is "0", and the normal base value stored in the first area of the base memory area is "35", the identification segment of the information display 230 will flash "bL." and the numeric segment will light up and display "35".

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information displayed in the numeric segment does not use the decimal point DP of the seven-segment display, i.e., "00" to "99", whereas when the normal base value is "100" or more, the performance information displayed in the numeric segment uses the decimal point DP of the seven-segment display, i.e., "99.", making it easier to know that the normal base value is abnormal.

Also, when the base value is normally less than "10", a "0" is always displayed in the tens digit of the numeric segment, resulting in a two-digit display (e.g. "01"), making it possible to effectively use the two seven-segment displays as numeric segments and provide an easy-to-understand display.

In addition, when the normal base value for the current play area is displayed, if the number of normal outs for the current play area is between 0 and 5999, which is not enough to calculate the normal base value, the identification information "bL." displayed in the identification segment will flash, making it easier to understand that the currently displayed normal base value is unreliable information.

In addition, if no normal base value has been calculated, a non-numeric "- - " will be displayed in the numerical segment, making it easier to understand that no normal base value has been calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment.

In addition, rather than executing the game ball counting process, performance information calculation process, and performance display data setting process as information programs, it is also possible to execute one or two of them as game programs (for example, execute the game ball counting process within the input control process that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while executing the rest as information programs.

In addition, the process of outputting display data for displaying performance information on the information display device 230 may be executed by the performance program, rather than by the output control process, which is the game program.

In addition, instead of using the out ball detection switch 227 to detect out balls consisting of game balls that have won in the normal prize opening 127, the first start opening 121, the second start opening 122, the first large prize opening 125, and the second large prize opening 126, and game balls that have flowed into the discharge opening 117, the out ball detection switch 227 may be configured to detect only game balls that have flowed into the out opening. In that case, the number of outs (total number of outs, number of outs during normal play) may be incremented by one each time a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 227, the normal prize opening switch 217, the first start opening switch 211, the second start opening switch 212, the first large prize opening switch 215, and the second large prize opening switch 209.

(Main processing of the general control unit)
The main processing of the image/audio control unit 310 will be described with reference to Fig. 42. Fig. 42 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the image/audio control unit 310. This main processing is performed when a system reset, which occurs when a power supply voltage is supplied from a power supply board (not shown), is input to the CPU 311.

First, the CPU 311 prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, the CPU performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting the built-in registers, granting access to the RAM 313, initializing (clearing to 0) all RAM areas of the RAM 313, starting the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate timer interrupts, and so on, and then in step T3, all interrupts are permitted.

In step T4, the CPU 311 performs an adjustment mode switching process. Specifically, by referring to an input signal from a changeover switch (not shown) that can be operated by a gaming store staff member, the CPU 311 performs a process for adjusting the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the speaker 156 and the light intensity (value) of the backlight of the image display unit 114, and for switching the adjustment mode related to the volume and light intensity adjustment (whether or not the volume can be adjusted, whether or not the light intensity can be adjusted, the initial value of the volume value (any of 0 to 5) and the initial value of the light intensity value (any of 0 to 5), the adjustment range of the volume value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5) and the adjustment range of the light intensity value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5)).

Here, a changeover switch (not shown) is provided on the game control board serving as the main board, and switches between adjustment modes related to the volume of the performance sounds output from the speaker 156 and the light intensity of the display devices (image display unit 114, sub-display unit (a display device that displays images related to the performance separately from the image display unit 114)) and various lighting devices (frame lamp 157, board lamp 116).
In addition, the setting (adjustment) of the volume and light values using a selector switch (not shown) can be performed at any time as long as the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on (after the image/sound control unit 310 has been started).

In step T5, the CPU 311 performs a volume adjustment process. Specifically, the CPU 311 performs a process to adjust the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the speaker 156 based on the detection signal (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the detection switch that detects the operation of the effect key 162 that can be operated by the player.

In step T6, the CPU 311 performs a light intensity adjustment process. Specifically, the CPU 311 performs a process to adjust the light intensity (value) of the backlight of the image display unit 114 based on a detection signal (down button detection signal, up button detection signal) from a detection switch that detects the operation of the effect keys 162 that can be operated by the player.

The setting (adjustment) of the volume value and light intensity value using the performance key 162 is restricted (limited) when the variable performance starts and ends (when the decorative pattern 41 stops). In addition, the settings (adjustments) of the volume value and light intensity value using the performance key 162 are restricted (limited) from when the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned on until the game progress control starts (specifically, during the setting change mode, RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode, during the initial operation of various drive sources, etc., until a timer interrupt is started on the game control board), and during the notification (output of notification sound) of important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) that should be notified with priority over a full tray error or a payout abnormality.

In addition, while the abnormality warning sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, the volume of the various sound effects (such as background music) output from the speaker 156 is reduced from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality warning sound ends, the volume of the various sound effects is restored to the volume before the reduction.

In step T7, the CPU 311 performs an eco mode control process. Specifically, the CPU 311 performs a process to control the start and end of an eco mode that reduces the amount of light from the backlight of the image display unit 114 to reduce power consumption.

In step T8, the CPU 311 determines whether or not it has received a performance instruction command or a notification instruction command transmitted from the performance control unit 300. If it has not received a performance instruction command or a notification instruction command, it proceeds to step T11. If it has received a performance instruction command or a notification instruction command, it proceeds to step T9.

In step T9, the CPU 311 performs an animation pattern setting process. Specifically, the CPU 311 performs a process of determining an animation pattern from an animation group of a type corresponding to the received performance instruction command or notification instruction command, and setting (setting) the animation pattern in a predetermined area of the RAM 313.

In step T10, the CPU 311 performs a sound pattern setting process. Specifically, the CPU 311 determines a sound pattern from a sound group of a type corresponding to the received performance instruction command or notification instruction command, and sets the sound pattern in a predetermined area of the RAM 313.

In step T11, the CPU 311 determines whether a frame switching flag is set in the RAM 313, indicating that it is time to update the frame of the image displayed on the image display unit 114. If the frame switching flag is set, the process proceeds to step T12. If the frame switching flag is not set, the process proceeds to step T4.

The frame switching flag is set by the V blank interrupt process, which is executed every time the image/audio control unit 310 receives a V blank signal sent from the VDP 314 every 1/30th of a second (the time it takes for the drawing and display of one frame of the performance image to be completed). Therefore, the processes in steps T12 to T15 described below are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

In step T12, the CPU 311 clears the frame switch flag set in the RAM 313, and in step T13 performs a scene update process. Specifically, the CPU 311 refers to the scene switch counter, wait frame counter, and frame counter that are updated in the V blank interrupt process described above, and updates the address of the animation scene based on the animation pattern determined in step T9, and updates the address of the sound scene based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

In step T14, the CPU 311 performs drawing control processing. Specifically, in accordance with the priority order (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs, the CPU 311 generates a display list consisting of a group of drawing control commands from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address, outputs this display list to the VDP 314, and performs processing to instruct the drawing of a display image based on the display list.

As a result, the VDP 314 draws display images based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and also performs processing to display the images (performance images, abnormality notification images) drawn in the display frame buffer on the image display unit 114. In other words, the frame update timing becomes the start and end timing of various performances (image displays and sound outputs such as hold displays, variable performances, big win preview performances, and pre-reading performances) performed by the image display unit 114. Note that performances (performance operations of the movable role-player 115) directly controlled by the performance control unit 300 or lamp control unit 320 may or may not coincide with the frame update timing.

In step T15, the CPU 311 performs audio control processing. Specifically, the CPU 311 generates an audio control command from the sound information at the updated address and outputs the audio control command to the image/audio control unit 310.

As a result, the image/audio control unit 310 performs processing to output various special sounds and notification sounds based on the voice control commands from the speaker 156. When this processing ends, the process proceeds to step T4.

In this way, when the variable presentation starts and ends (when the decorative pattern 41 stops), the volume and light intensity can be adjusted using a selector switch (not shown) that can be operated by game store staff, but volume and light intensity adjustments using the presentation key 162 that can be operated by the player are regulated (limited). This makes it difficult for players to miss important points such as the start and end of the variable presentation, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, during the notification (output of alarm sound) of important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, unrecoverable error, illegal win, abnormal win, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) that should be given priority over a full tray error or a payout abnormality, it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using a changeover switch (not shown) that can be operated by game store staff, but volume and light intensity adjustment using the effect key 162 that can be operated by the player is regulated (limited). This makes it possible to improve the convenience of the game store in adjusting the volume and light intensity while avoiding the inconvenience of a player not noticing the occurrence of an abnormality when trying to adjust the volume or light intensity.

In addition, while the abnormality notification sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, the volume of the various sound effects (BGM, etc.) output from the speaker 156 is reduced from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality notification sound ends, the volume of the various sound effects is restored to the volume before the reduction. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing the abnormality notification sound due to the various sound effects, and ensures the security of the gaming machine.

Note that while an abnormality is being notified (an alarm sound is being output), it may be impossible to set (adjust) the volume value or light intensity value using the effect key 162 that the player can operate, or the adjustment range of the volume value or light intensity value may be limited to, for example, between 0 and 2.

(Initial processing of the lamp control unit)
The role initial processing of the lamp control unit 320 will be described with reference to Fig. 43. Fig. 43 is a flowchart showing the role initial processing of the lamp control unit 320, and this processing is executed within a timer interrupt processing executed in the lamp control unit 320 at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds).

In step R101, the CPU 321 determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) has been received from the game control unit 200. If a power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step R102; if a power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R103.

In step R102, the CPU 321 sets the initial processing number, which is updated during each process of the reel initial processing, to "1" to execute the origin return process for the reels (movable reels 115, sub-image display section (not shown), and performance button 161).

In step R103, the CPU 321 determines whether the initial processing number is "1". If the initial processing number is not "1", the process proceeds to step R105 without executing the origin return process for the reel. If the initial processing number is "1", the process proceeds to step R104, where it executes the origin return process and ends the current reel initial processing. Specifically, it performs processes such as returning the reel (movable reel 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) to the origin position based on the input signal from the position detection sensor and setting the initial processing number to "2". The origin return process will be described in detail later.

In step R105, the CPU 321 determines whether the initial processing number is "2". If the initial processing number is not "2", the current reel initial processing is terminated without executing the initial operation processing of the reel, and if the initial processing number is "2", the initial operation processing is performed and the current reel initial processing is terminated. Specifically, the CPU 321 performs processing such as performing an initial operation and initial light emission to check whether the reel is operating normally and setting the initial processing number to "0". Details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

In this way, according to the reel initial processing shown in FIG. 43, the origin return processing for returning the various reels to their origin positions and the initial operation processing for performing the initial operations and initial light emission of the various reels are not executed at the same time. Therefore, the return operations of the various reels to their origin positions and the initial operations and initial light emission of the various reels are not mixed, and it becomes possible to check the return operations separately from the initial operations and initial light emission.

In addition, according to the reel initial processing shown in FIG. 43, the origin return processing is executed before the initial operation processing. Therefore, the various reels start their initial operation from the origin position, making it easier to determine whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the various reels.

(Origin return process of lamp control unit)
The origin return process of the lamp control unit 320 will be described with reference to Fig. 44. Fig. 44 is a flowchart showing the origin return process in the lamp control unit 320.

In step R105-1, the CPU 321 determines whether the board role processing number, which indicates the progress of the origin return status of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)), is "0". If the board role processing number is not "0", the process proceeds to step R105-3. If the board role processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the drive target to be returned to the origin is set to the movable role 115 (movable performance device), and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-3, the CPU 321 determines whether the board role processing number is "1." If the board role processing number is not "1," the process proceeds to step R105-12. If the board role processing number is "1," the process proceeds to step R105-4, where the drive target to be returned to the origin is set to the sub display device (not shown), and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the CPU 321 determines whether the target reel is in the origin position (standby position). Specifically, it determines the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects whether each reel is in the origin position. If the target reel is not in the origin position, the process proceeds to step R105-6. If the target reel is in the origin position, the process proceeds to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the CPU 321 drives the drive motor to move the target board part so that the target board part returns to its origin position, and in step R105-7, increments by +1 the board part abnormality determination timer to determine the occurrence of a return abnormality in which the board part does not return to its origin position within a specified time.

In step R105-8, the CPU 321 determines whether the updated board role abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit (e.g., 5 seconds). If the board role abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit, it assumes that a return abnormality has occurred in the board role to be driven and proceeds to step R105-9. If the board role abnormality determination timer is not at its upper limit, it proceeds to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the CPU 321 sets in the RAM 323 recovery abnormality information (movable performance device recovery abnormality information, sub display device recovery abnormality information) indicating that a recovery abnormality has occurred in the target board role, and in step R105-10, clears the board role abnormality determination timer.

In step R105-11, the CPU 321 updates the board role processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board role processing number is "0", the board role processing number is updated to "1" to drive the sub-image display unit (not shown), and if the board role processing number is "1", the board role processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of returning the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) to its origin.

In step R105-12, the CPU 321 determines whether the frame role processing number, which indicates the transition of the origin return status of the frame role (performance button 161), is "0." If the frame role processing number is "0," the process proceeds to step R105-13, and if the board role processing number is not "0," the process proceeds to step R105-20.

In step R105-13, the CPU 321 determines whether the performance button 161 is in the origin position (standby position). Specifically, it determines an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the performance button 161 is in the origin position. If the performance button 161 is not in the origin position, the process proceeds to step R105-14, and if the performance button 161 is in the origin position, the process proceeds to step R105-19.

In step R105-14, the CPU 321 drives the effect button drive motor to move the effect button 161 so that the effect button 161 returns to its original position, and in step R105-15, increments by +1 the frame role object abnormality determination timer to determine the occurrence of a return abnormality in which the effect button 161 does not return to its original position within a predetermined time.

In step R105-16, the CPU 321 determines whether the updated frame role object abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit (e.g., 5 seconds). If the frame role object abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit, it assumes that a return abnormality has occurred in the performance button 161 and proceeds to step R105-17. If the frame role object abnormality determination timer is not at its upper limit, it ends the current origin return process.

In step R105-17, the CPU 321 sets in the RAM 323 recovery abnormality information indicating that a recovery abnormality has occurred in the performance button 161, and in step R105-18, clears the frame role object abnormality determination timer.

In step R105-19, the CPU 321 updates the frame role object processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame role object processing number is "0", the CPU 321 updates the frame role object processing number to "1" to end the process of returning the frame role object (performance button 161) to its origin.

In step R105-20, the CPU 321 determines whether the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the termination condition. Specifically, it determines whether the board role processing number is "2" and the frame role processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R105-21, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-21, the CPU 321 clears the board role processing number and the frame role processing number, and in step R105-22, sets the initial processing number described above to "2" to execute the initial operation processing of the role, and ends this return to origin process.

In this way, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 44, when the movable role 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown), whose performance positions (movement areas) overlap when the power is turned on, are not in the origin position (standby position), they are not returned to the origin position (standby position) at the same time (at the same time) but are returned to the origin position in a specified order (the order of the movable role 115 → the sub-image display unit (not shown)). This makes it easier to check whether various board roles have returned to their origin positions. Also, when the movable role 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) are in contact with each other in a way that makes it difficult to separate them, it is possible to prevent the two roles from applying load to each other, and to prevent the inconvenience of both roles being damaged at the same time.

In addition, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 44, the return operation of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display section (not shown)) to the origin position and the return operation of the frame role (performance button 161) to the origin position can be executed simultaneously (at the same time). Therefore, the time required for the return operation of the various roles can be shortened, and it becomes possible to smoothly transition to the initial operation of the various roles to be executed next.

In addition, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 44, an upper limit is set on the time for each reel to return to its origin position. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as the return action of various reels never finishing. This makes it possible to avoid situations where various reels are performing a return action during a variable performance, resulting in no performance action being performed, and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 44, when both the return operation of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display section (not shown)) to the origin position and the return operation of the frame role (performance button 161) to the origin position are completed, a process is performed to transition to the initial operation process. Therefore, the return operation of the various roles to their origin positions and the initial operation of the various roles are no longer performed simultaneously, making it possible to check the return operation and initial operation of the various roles separately.

The movable reel 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) are designed to return to their original positions in a predetermined order (movable reel 115 → sub-image display unit (not shown)), but they may also start to return to their original positions at the same time. In this way, the time required for the return operation of the movable reel 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) can be shortened, and a smooth transition to the initial operation of the various reels to be executed next can be made.

(Initial Operation Processing of Lamp Control Unit)
The initial operation process of the lamp control unit 320 will be described with reference to Fig. 45. Fig. 45 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process of the lamp control unit 320.

In step R107-1, the CPU 321 determines whether the board feature processing number, which indicates the transition of the initial operation status of the board feature, is "0." If the board feature processing number is "0," the process proceeds to step R107-2. If the board feature processing number is not "0," the process proceeds to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the CPU 321 determines whether or not return abnormality information for the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) has been set in the RAM 323. If return abnormality information has not been set, the process moves to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board role will be performed, and if return abnormality information has been set, in step R107-3, the board role processing number is set to "2" assuming that the initial operation of the board role will not be performed, and the process moves to step R107-7.

In step R107-4, the CPU 321 selects a board role initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 46(a)) for determining the initial operation pattern of the board role. Details of the board role initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the CPU 321 determines the initial operation pattern of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) and sets it in the RAM 323. Specifically, it refers to the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46(a) and determines one initial operation pattern from among multiple initial operation patterns based on the type of power-on command and the presence or absence of return abnormality information.

In step R107-6, the CPU 321 increments the board feature processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board feature processing number is "0", the board feature processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the board feature.

In step R107-7, the CPU 321 determines whether the board role processing number is "1." If the board role processing number is not "1," the process proceeds to step R107-11. If the board role processing number is "1," the CPU 321 executes the initial operation of the board role according to the initial operation pattern of the board role set in the RAM 323 in step R107-8.

In step R107-9, the CPU 321 determines whether or not all steps of the initial operation of the board role have been completed. If all steps of the initial operation of the board role have not been completed, the process proceeds to step R107-11. If all steps of the initial operation of the board role have been completed, the board role processing number is updated by +1 in step R107-10. Specifically, if the board role processing number is "1", the board role processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of initializing the board role.

In step R107-11, the CPU 321 determines whether the frame role processing number, which indicates the transition of the initial operating status of the frame role (performance button 161), is "0." If the frame role processing number is "0," the process proceeds to step R107-12. If the frame role processing number is not "0," the process proceeds to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the CPU 321 determines whether or not return abnormality information for the effect button 161 has been set in the RAM 323. If the return abnormality information has not been set, the process moves to step R107-14, assuming that the initial operation of the frame role object will be performed. If the return abnormality information has been set, in step R107-13, the process sets the frame role object processing number to "2", assuming that the initial operation of the frame role object will not be performed, and the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the CPU 321 selects a framed reel initial movement pattern determination table (see FIG. 46(b)) for determining the initial movement pattern of the framed reel. Details of the framed reel initial movement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-15, the CPU 321 determines the initial operation pattern of the frame role object (performance button 161) and sets it in the RAM 323. Specifically, it refers to the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46(b) and determines one initial operation pattern from among multiple initial operation patterns based on the type of power-on command.

In step R107-16, the CPU 321 updates the frame role object processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame role object processing number is "0", the frame role object processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the frame role object.

In step R107-17, the CPU 321 determines whether the frame role processing number is "1." If the frame role processing number is not "1," the process proceeds to step R107-21. If the frame role processing number is "1," the process proceeds to step R107-18, where the initial operation of the frame role is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the frame role set in the RAM 323.

In step R107-19, the CPU 321 determines whether or not all steps of the initial operation of the frame role have been completed. If all steps of the initial operation of the frame role have not been completed, the process proceeds to step R107-21. If all steps of the initial operation of the frame role have been completed, the frame role processing number is updated by +1 in step R107-20. Specifically, if the frame role processing number is "1", the frame role processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of initializing the frame role.

In step R107-21, the CPU 321 determines whether the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the termination condition. Specifically, it determines whether the board role processing number is "2" and the frame role processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current initial operation process is terminated.

In step R107-22, the CPU 321 clears the board role processing number and the frame role processing number, and in step R107-23, it clears the initial processing number described above, and ends this initial operation processing.

In this way, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 45, the initial operation of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display section (not shown)) and the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 161) can be executed simultaneously (at the same time). Therefore, the time required for the initial operation of each role can be shortened, and it is possible to prevent the performance operation of each role during play from being hindered.

In addition, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 45, if there is a return abnormality in the movable role 115 and sub-image display unit (not shown) that constitute the board role, the initial operation of the movable role 115 and sub-image display unit (not shown) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the board role from completely failing or being damaged by forcibly initializing the board role in which a return abnormality has occurred.

In addition, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 45, if there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button 161 that constitutes the frame role object, the initial operation of the performance button 161 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as a complete failure or damage of the performance button 161 caused by forcibly performing the initial operation of the performance button 161 that is experiencing a recovery abnormality.

In addition, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 45, even if the initial operation of the board part where a return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame part where a return abnormality has not occurred is executed, and even if the initial operation of the frame part where a return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the board part where a return abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to check whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the part where a return abnormality has not occurred.

In addition, according to the initial operation processing shown in FIG. 45, the initial operation processing ends when both the initial operation of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display section (not shown)) and the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 161) have been completed. This prevents a situation in which it is unclear whether the operation is an initial operation or a performance operation, such as when one of the board role and the frame role is performing an initial operation while the other is performing a performance operation.

(Table for determining initial operation pattern of board role)
FIG. 46(a) is a diagram showing a board role initial operation pattern determination table for determining the initial operation pattern of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display section (not shown)).

The initial operation pattern determination table for the board role-playing device associates the type of command when the power is turned on, the presence or absence of recovery abnormality information, and the initial operation pattern to be selected, and for reference, the operating mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are also listed.

The initial operation patterns include patterns 01-03, which are determined when a power-on command is received, patterns 04-06, which are determined when a first power restoration command is received, indicating that the machine is waiting for customers, and patterns 07-09, which are determined when a second power restoration command is received, indicating that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, or a third power restoration command is received, indicating that a jackpot is being played.

"Small descent of the movable performance device" refers to the movement (descent) of the movable performance device 115 from the standby position to an intermediate position slightly lower than the standby position, "large descent of the movable performance device" refers to the movement (descent) of the movable performance device 115 from the standby position to a performance position lower than the intermediate position, and "return to origin of the movable performance device" refers to the movement of the movable performance device 115 returning to the standby position.

"Sub-display device movement" refers to the operation of the sub-image display unit (not shown) rising from the standby position to the performance position, and "sub-display device return to origin" refers to the operation of the sub-image display unit (not shown) returning to the standby position.

The "movable performance device LED" refers to the multiple LEDs provided on the movable prop 115, and the "sub-display device LED" refers to the multiple LEDs provided around the screen of the sub-image display unit (not shown).

Note that the color of the movable performance device LED is not specified in initial operation pattern 02, initial operation pattern 05, and initial operation pattern 08. This is because the movable performance device LED flashes red to indicate an abnormality when the first movable member 115a returns to its original position.

In addition, the lighting color of the sub display device LED is not described in initial operation pattern 03, initial operation pattern 06, and initial operation pattern 09. This is because the sub display device LED flashes red to notify of an abnormality due to a recovery abnormality in the sub image display unit (not shown).

The first feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46(a) is that the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) is the same when the power is turned on with the initialization of RAM 203 and when the power is restored without the initialization of RAM 203. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored, it is possible to properly check whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the board role.

The same initial action means that at least the movement pattern of the board parts in each step is the same, and the action time in each step may be the same or different.

In addition, the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of one of the movable role 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) may be different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, or the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of both the movable role 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) may be different. In this way, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

In addition, when the operating mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the movable role 115 and/or the sub-image display unit (not shown) is made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is turned on may be executed by the initial operation when the power is restored, or an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be executed by the initial operation when the power is turned on. In this way, it is easier to know whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The second feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46(a) is that the lighting pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The third feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46(a) is that while the light emission pattern of the initial light emission of the movable performance device LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, the light emission pattern of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED is different. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The initial light emission pattern of the movable performance device LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state, but the initial light emission pattern of the sub-display device LED is different. Conversely, the initial light emission pattern of the movable performance device LED may be different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state, but the initial light emission pattern of the sub-display device LED may be the same.

In addition, both the light emission pattern of the initial light emission of the movable effect device LED and the light emission pattern of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED may be different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state for customers. This makes it easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power being turned on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power being restored (the game control state is restored).

The fourth feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46(a) is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the variable display of special symbols or when a jackpot game is played. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The fifth feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46(a) is that the initial light emission pattern during the initial operation of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) is different when power is restored to restore the waiting state and the special symbol is changing or being displayed, or when power is restored during a jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power restoration to restore the waiting state and the special symbol is changing or being displayed, or during a jackpot game.

When the power is restored during the display of the changing special symbols or during a jackpot game, both the movable performance device LED and the sub display device LED are turned off, but the movable performance device LED and the sub display device LED may be lit in the same illumination mode as when the power is restored to return to the waiting state.

The sixth feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46(a) is that, regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored, if there is a return abnormality in the movable role 115 but no return abnormality in the sub-image display unit (not shown), the initial operation of the movable role 115 is not performed but the initial operation of the sub-image display unit (not shown) is performed, whereas if there is no return abnormality in the movable role 115 but there is a return abnormality in the sub-image display unit (not shown), the initial operation of the movable role 115 is performed but the initial operation of the sub-image display unit (not shown) is not performed. In this way, it is possible to perform an appropriate initial operation depending on whether or not there is a return abnormality.

(Frame role initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 46(b) is a diagram showing a frame role initial operation pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the initial operation pattern of the frame role (performance button 161).

The frame role initial operation pattern determination table associates the type of command when the power is turned on with the initial operation pattern to be selected, and for reference, the operating mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are listed.

"Performance button big rise" refers to the action of the performance button 161 rising from the standby position (initial position) to the performance position (upper position), and "performance button return to origin" refers to the action of the performance button 161 returning to the standby position.

The first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46(b) is that the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 161) is different when the power is turned on with the initialization of RAM 203 and when the power is restored without the initialization of RAM 203. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The second feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46(b) is that the initial operation of the effect button 161 when the power is turned on is set to execute an operation that is not executed in the initial operation of the effect button 161 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to know whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the performance button 161 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. In this way, it becomes possible to properly check whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame device, regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

The third feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46(b) is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 161) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The fourth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46(b) is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 161) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the variable display of special symbols or when the power is restored during a jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The LED on the effect button is set to turn off when the power is restored while the special symbol is changing or during a jackpot game, but the LED on the effect button may be set to light up in the same illumination mode as when the power is restored to return to the waiting state.

The fifth feature of the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46(b) is that the number of luminous colors in the initial light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is turned on is different from the number of luminous colors in the initial light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

Note that the number of colors emitted by the initial light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of colors emitted by the initial light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is restored, but this may be reversed.

The sixth feature of the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46(b) is that the color of the light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is turned on includes a color of light that is not included in the color of the light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The color of the light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is restored may include a color that is not included in the color of the light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46(b) is that the time during which the effect button 161 vibrates when the power is turned on or when the power is restored is different from the time during which the effect button 161 vibrates during an operation effect that is executed by operating the effect button 161 during an effective period that occurs while a variable effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to understand that the vibration is during the initial operation of the effect button 161.

The eighth feature of the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46(b) is that the initial vibration of the button vibration motor, which does not detect whether it is at the origin position, is executed by overlapping with the initial operation of the performance button 161, which does detect whether it is at the origin position. This makes it possible to check the operation of the performance button 161 and the button vibration motor at the same time, thereby shortening the time required for operation check.

(Example of initializing various drive sources while changing settings)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources during a setting change will be described with reference to Fig. 47. Fig. 47 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources during a setting change.

First, at timing T0, the power supply of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, first large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216, second large prize opening door opening/closing unit 210) for operating the movable bodies (electric tulip 123, first large prize opening door 125D, second large prize opening 126D) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing the difficulty of whether the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 122, first large prize opening 125, second large prize opening 126) or not (ball entry difficulty level), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize opening LEDs that illuminate the large prize openings (first large prize opening 125, second large prize opening 126) in a predetermined manner during a round of play are turned off, and the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, status display 224, status check display 226), image display unit 114, and information display 230 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned ON and a setting change operation (setting key switch 229 is ON and RAM clear switch 228 is ON) is performed, the setting change mode is started in the game control unit 200, and the state becomes a pre-start state before the control of the progress of the game is started.

At this time, the status confirmation display 226 displays a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed, and the various drive sources start operating (drive sources = ON) as their initial operation. In addition, a setting change notification is started to indicate that the settings are being changed and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (display of a screen during setting change, and alternating output of a voice during setting change saying "Settings are being changed" and an initial operation confirmation voice saying "Please also check the operation of the solenoid"). In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the seven-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230.

At the time T2, when the operation time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF), and thereafter, the operation and stopping of the various drive sources is repeated from the time T3 to the time T10.

If, at the timing of T10, the operation time of the various drive sources that started at the timing of T9 has not yet elapsed and the setting value confirmation operation (setting key switch 229 is turned OFF) is performed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are terminated, the operation of the various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive sources = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources is terminated, and the display of the setting value on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230 is also terminated. Then, the game control unit 200 transitions from the pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) start on the display 130, and the power-on notification described above starts. In addition, the return and initial operations of the various roles (movable roles 115 (115a, 115b), sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) controlled by the performance control unit 300 start, and all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d on the information display 230 light up to start checking whether they are on. The initial operations of the various roles end after the lighting check on the information display 230 is completed.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 230, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

(Specific example of initializing various drive sources while preparing to clear RAM)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources during RAM clear preparation will be described with reference to Fig. 48. Fig. 48 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources during RAM clear preparation.

First, at timing T0, the power supply of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, first large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216, second large prize opening door opening/closing unit 210) for operating the movable bodies (electric tulip 123, first large prize opening door 125D, second large prize opening door 126D) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 122, first large prize opening 125, second large prize opening 126) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize opening LEDs that illuminate the large prize openings (first large prize opening 125, second large prize opening 126) in a predetermined manner during a round of play are turned off, and the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, status display 224, status check display 226), image display unit 114, and information display 230 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned ON and a RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 228 is turned ON) is performed, the RAM clear preparation mode is started in the gaming control unit 200, and the state becomes a pre-start state before the control of the progress of the game is started.

At this time, the status confirmation display 226 displays a status confirmation display indicating that the RAM is being prepared for clearing, and the various drive sources start operating (drive sources = ON) as the initial operation. In addition, a RAM clear preparation notification starts (display of the clear preparation screen, alternating output of the notification voice saying "Press RAM clear again" and the initial operation confirmation voice saying "Check the operation of the solenoid") to indicate that the RAM is being prepared for clearing and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources.

At the time T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF), and thereafter, the operation and stopping of the various drive sources is repeated from the time T3 to the time T10.

At time T10, if the RAM clear approval operation (RAM clear switch 228 is turned ON) is performed before the operation time of the various drive sources that began at time T9 has elapsed, the RAM clear preparation mode and RAM clear preparation notification will end, and the operation of the various drive sources will immediately stop (drive sources = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources will end, and the game control unit 200 will transition from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the game progress is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) start on the display 130, and the power-on notification described above starts. In addition, the return and initial operations of the various roles controlled by the performance control unit 300 (movable roles 115 (115a, 115b), sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) start, and all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d on the information display 230 light up to start checking whether they are on. The initial operation of the movable roles 115 ends after checking whether the information display 230 is on.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 230, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

(Example of initializing various drive sources while checking settings)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources during setting confirmation will be described with reference to Fig. 49. Fig. 49 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources during setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power supply of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, first large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216, second large prize opening door opening/closing unit 210) for operating the movable bodies (electric tulip 123, first large prize opening door 125D, second large prize opening door 126D) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 122, first large prize opening 125, second large prize opening 126) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize opening LEDs that illuminate the large prize openings (first large prize opening 125, second large prize opening 126) in a predetermined manner during a round of play are turned off, and the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, status display 224, status check display 226), image display unit 114, and information display 230 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At timing T1, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on and a setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 229 is turned on) is performed, the game control unit 200 starts a setting confirmation mode and enters a pre-start state before control of the game progress begins.

At this time, the status confirmation display 226 displays a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being confirmed, and the various drive sources start operating (drive source = ON) as their initial operation. Also, a setting confirmation notification is started to indicate that the settings are being confirmed and to prompt the user to confirm the operation of the various drive sources (display of the setting confirmation screen, alternating output of the setting confirmation voice "Settings are being confirmed" and the initial operation confirmation voice "Please also check the operation of the solenoid"). Also, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the seven-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230.

At the time T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF), and thereafter, the operation and stopping of the various drive sources is repeated from the time T3 to the time T10.

If, at the timing of T10, the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 229 is turned OFF) is performed before the operation time of the various drive sources that began at the timing of T9 has elapsed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification end, and the operation of the various drive sources immediately stops (drive sources = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the display of the setting value on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230 also ends. Then, the game control unit 200 transitions from the pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) start on the display 130, and the power restoration notification described above starts. In addition, the recovery operation and initial operation of the various roles controlled by the performance control unit 300 (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) start, and all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d on the information display 230 light up to start checking whether they are on. Note that the initial operation of the movable role 115 ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 is completed.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 230, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

In this way, according to this embodiment, in the pre-start state before the game progress control starts, various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, first large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216, second large prize opening door opening/closing unit 210) for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game (electric tulip 123, first large prize opening door 125D, second large prize opening door 126D) are initialized, so that when the pachinko game machine 100 is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game parlor, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive sources controlled by the main control means that controls the game progress.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game result are being initially operated (pre-start state), the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, round number display 225, status display 224) except for the status confirmation display 226 are in a non-display (non-operating) state, which prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the game control unit 200 and allows it to concentrate on checking the operation of the various drive sources.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game outcome are being initially operated, a setting change notification is issued to indicate that a setting change is being made and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (a RAM clear preparation notification that the RAM is being prepared to be cleared and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources, and a setting confirmation notification that the settings are being confirmed and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources). This allows the worker (factory worker, game store staff) who checks the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 to be informed that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, and allows the worker to check the operation appropriately.

In addition, according to this embodiment, various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are initialized in the setting change modes (RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode), so there is no need to create multiple states in the pre-start state before the game progress control begins, making it possible to reduce the development costs of the pachinko game machine 100 (shortening the development period, etc.).

In addition, according to this embodiment, when a setting value confirmation operation (RAM clear approval operation, confirmation end operation) is performed and the pre-start state ends, the operation of the various drive sources is immediately terminated even before the operation time of the various drive sources has elapsed. This means that the initial operation of the various drive sources is not performed to a playable state, making it possible to avoid the inconvenience of confusing the operation of the various drive sources with the operation of the various drive sources according to the progress of the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is performed, various initial operations of the drive sources are performed to operate the movable bodies that affect the game outcome, and in the playable state in which the game progress control is performed, initial operations of the movable role 115 that does not affect the game outcome are performed. Therefore, two types of initial operations can be checked in sequence, and operation checks can be performed appropriately.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening door 125D and the second large prize opening door 126D are initially operating, the large prize opening LED is kept off, which avoids the inconvenience of the light from the large prize opening LED making it difficult to check the operation of the first large prize opening door 125D and the second large prize opening door 126D, and makes it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening door 125D and the second large prize opening door 126D are initially operated, an open signal is not output even though the first large prize opening 125 and the second large prize opening 126 are open. This prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the game control unit 200, and also makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collection device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the pachinko game machine 100 collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 230 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from when the gaming machine is powered on until the control of the game progress begins, so it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the gaming control unit 200.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of performance information is permitted) after the game progress control has started, so it is possible to check whether the game progress control has started and to inform the user that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, during the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, performance information is not displayed on any of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230c other than the 7-segment display 230d that displays the current setting value, so that the current setting value can be properly notified, ensuring convenience for the gaming establishment.

In this embodiment, in the setting change notification, RAM clear preparation notification, and setting confirmation notification, text such as "Initial operation of drive source" or "Please check the operation of the solenoid" that encourages visual confirmation of the initial operation of various drive sources is not displayed, but such text may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the game progress control is started, all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d of the information display 230 are fully lit to check whether they are lit, but after the setting change mode, RAM clear preparation mode, or setting check mode, the lighting check may not be performed.

(Modification of Initial Operation of Various Driving Sources)
A modified example of initializing the various drive sources will be described below with reference to the drawings. This modified example differs from the above embodiment in that the drive source processing operation is performed after the setting change mode, the RAM clear preparation mode, or the setting confirmation mode is completed.

(Example of initializing various drive sources after changing settings)
A specific example of initializing the various drive sources after changing the settings in the modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 50. Fig. 50 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing the various drive sources after changing the settings in the modified example.

First, at timing T0, the power supply of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, first large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216, second large prize opening door opening/closing unit 210) for operating the movable bodies (electric tulip 123, first large prize opening door 125D, second large prize opening door 126D) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 122, first large prize opening 125, second large prize opening 126) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize opening LEDs that illuminate the large prize openings (first large prize opening 125, second large prize opening 126) in a predetermined manner during a round of play are turned off, and the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, status display 224, status check display 226), image display unit 114, and information display 230 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned ON and a setting change operation (setting key switch 229 is ON, RAM clear switch 228 is ON) is performed, the game control unit 200 starts the setting change mode and enters a pre-start state before control of the game progress is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 226, and the setting change notification described above is started. In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the seven-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230.

At the timing of T2, when the setting value confirmation operation (setting key switch 229 is turned OFF) is performed, the setting change mode and setting change notification are terminated, the initial operation of the various drive sources is started, and the setting value displayed on the seven-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230 is erased and becomes hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 226 is terminated, and an initial operation notification (display of an initial operation in progress screen, output of an initial operation confirmation voice "Please check the operation of the solenoid") is initiated to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive sources = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, when the operation time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive sources = OFF).

At time T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at time T6, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At time T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at time T8, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation end, and the game control unit 200 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the game progress is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) start on the display 130, and the power-on notification described above starts. In addition, the return and initial operations of the various roles controlled by the performance control unit 300 (movable roles 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) start, and all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d on the information display 230 light up to start checking whether they are on. The initial operations of the various roles end after the lighting check on the information display 230 is completed.

At timing T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 230, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

(Example of initializing various drive sources after clearing RAM)
A specific example of the case where various driving sources are initialized after the RAM is cleared in the modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 51. Fig. 51 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example in the case where various driving sources are initialized after the RAM is cleared in the modified example.

First, at timing T0, the power supply of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, first large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216, second large prize opening door opening/closing unit 210) for operating the movable bodies (electric tulip 123, first large prize opening door 125D, second large prize opening door 126D) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 122, first large prize opening 125, second large prize opening 126) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize opening LEDs that illuminate the large prize openings (first large prize opening 125, second large prize opening 126) in a predetermined manner during a round of play are turned off, and the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, status display 224), image display unit 114, and information display 230 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned ON and a RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 228 is turned ON) is performed, the game control unit 200 starts a RAM clear preparation mode and enters a pre-start state before the control of the game progress begins. At this time, the above-mentioned RAM clear preparation notification starts.

When the RAM clear approval operation (RAM clear switch 228 is turned ON) is performed at timing T2, the RAM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operation of the various drive sources is started. At this time, an initial operation notification is started to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (display of an initial operation screen and output of an initial operation confirmation voice saying "Please check the operation of the solenoids").

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive sources = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, when the operation time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive sources = OFF).

At time T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at time T6, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing T8, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation end, and the game control unit 200 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the game progress is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) start on the display 130, and the power-on notification described above starts. In addition, the return and initial operations of the various roles controlled by the performance control unit 300 (movable roles 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) start, and all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d on the information display 230 light up to start checking whether they are on. The initial operations of the various roles end after the lighting check on the information display 230 is completed.

At timing T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 230, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

(Example of initial operation of various drive sources after checking the settings)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources after setting confirmation in the modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 52. Fig. 52 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example in the modified example when initializing various drive sources after setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power supply of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, first large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216, second large prize opening door opening/closing unit 210) for operating the movable bodies (electric tulip 123, first large prize opening door 125D, second large prize opening door 126D) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 122, first large prize opening 125, second large prize opening 126) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize opening LEDs that illuminate the large prize openings (first large prize opening 125, second large prize opening 126) in a predetermined manner during a round of play are turned off, and the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, status display 224, status check display 226), image display unit 114, and information display 230 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned ON and a setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 229 is turned ON) is performed, the game control unit 200 starts a setting confirmation mode and enters a pre-start state before control of the game progress is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 226, and the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification is started. In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the seven-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230.

At the timing of T2, when the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 229 is turned OFF) is performed, the setting confirmation mode and setting confirmation notification are ended, the initial operation of the various drive sources is started, and the setting value displayed on the seven-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230 is erased and becomes hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 226 is ended, and an initial operation notification (display of an initial operation in progress screen, output of an initial operation confirmation voice "Please check the operation of the solenoid") is started to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive sources = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, when the operation time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive sources = OFF).

At time T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at time T6, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing T8, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation end, and the game control unit 200 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the game progress is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) start on the display 130, and the power-on notification described above starts. In addition, the return and initial operations of the various roles controlled by the performance control unit 300 (movable roles 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) start, and all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d on the information display 230 light up to start checking whether they are on. The initial operations of the various roles end after the lighting check on the information display 230 is completed.

At timing T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 230, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 230a to 230d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

In this way, according to this modified example, in the pre-start state before the control of the game progress begins, various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, first large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216, second large prize opening door opening/closing unit 210) for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game (electric tulip 123, first large prize opening door 125D, second large prize opening door 126D) are initialized, making it possible to easily check the operation of the drive sources controlled by the main control means that controls the game progress when the pachinko game machine 100 is shipped from the factory or when it is replaced at the game parlor.

In addition, according to this modified example, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game outcome are being initially operated (in the pre-start state), the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, round number display 225, and status display 224) except for the status confirmation display 226 are in a non-display (non-operating) state, which prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the game control unit 200 and allows it to concentrate on checking the operation of the various drive sources.

In addition, according to this modified example, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are initially operated, an initial operation notification is issued to prompt the operator to check the operation of the various drive sources. This notifies the operator (factory worker, game store staff) who checks the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, enabling the operator to appropriately check the operation.

In addition, according to this modified example, even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game outcome are initialized after the setting change mode (RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) is finished, so it is possible to avoid the complicated task of checking the operation of various drive sources while changing the settings (RAM clear, setting confirmation), and it is possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this modified example, after the setting change mode (RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) ends, the operation of various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game begins after an operation standby time has elapsed, so there is enough time between the end of the setting change (setting confirmation) and the start of the operation check of the various drive sources, making it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this modified example, the same initial operation notification is made regardless of whether the initial operation of the various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game outcome is after the setting change mode, the RAM clear preparation mode, or the setting confirmation mode has ended. This simplifies the control of the initial operation notification, making it possible to reduce the development costs of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (shortening the development period, etc.).

In addition, according to this modified example, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening door 125D and the second large prize opening door 126D are initially operating, the large prize opening LED is kept off, which avoids the inconvenience of the light from the large prize opening LED making it difficult to check the operation of the first large prize opening door 125D and the second large prize opening door 126D, and makes it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this modified example, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is performed, various drive sources are initialized to operate movable bodies that affect the game outcome, and in the playable state in which the game progress control is performed, an initial operation of the movable part 115 that does not affect the game outcome is performed. Therefore, two types of initial operations can be checked in sequence, making it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this modified example, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening door 125D and the second large prize opening door 126D are initially operated, an open signal is not output even though the first large prize opening 125 and the second large prize opening 126 are open. This prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the game control unit 200, and also makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collection device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the pachinko game machine 100 collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, according to this modified example, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 230 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from when the gaming machine is turned on until the control of the progress of the game begins, so it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the gaming control unit 200.

In addition, according to this modified example, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of performance information is permitted) after the game progress control has started, so it is possible to check whether the game progress control has started and to inform the player that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, according to this modified example, during the setting change mode, RAM clear preparation mode, and setting confirmation mode, performance information is not displayed on any of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230c other than the 7-segment display 230d that displays the current setting value, so that the current setting value can be properly notified, ensuring convenience for the gaming establishment.

In addition, according to this modified example, the information display 230 is configured not to display setting values or performance information of the gaming machine during the initial operation of the various drive sources, so that the attention of the employees of the gaming facility can be focused on checking the initial operation of the various drive sources, and it becomes possible to accurately determine the malfunction of the various drive sources.

[Pre-determined performance pattern table]
53 and 54 are diagrams showing examples of pre-determined effect patterns and table settings used in the pre-determined effect pattern selection (S3803) in the pre-determined effect selection process of FIG. 35(a). Note that FIG. 53 shows a pre-determined effect pattern table used when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 in the normal game state. Also, FIG. 54 shows a pre-determined effect pattern table used when a game ball enters the second start hole 122 in the special time-saving game state.

The pre-determination effect pattern table shown in FIG. 53, which is used when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state, has multiple pre-determination effect patterns set. The pre-determination patterns "JA1" to "JA6", "JB1" to "JB6", "JR1" to "JR3", and "JR6" to "JR13" set using FIG. 31 above are associated one-to-one with the pre-determination effect patterns "AA1" to "AA6", "AB1" to "AB6", "AR1" to "AR3", and "AR6" to "AR13".

In addition, multiple pre-determined performance patterns are set in the pre-determined performance pattern table shown in FIG. 54, which is used when the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. The pre-determined performance patterns "AF1", "AF2", "AG1" to "AG3", and "AH1" to "AH8" correspond one-to-one to the pre-determined performance patterns "JF1", "JF2", "JG1" to "JG3", and "JH1" to "JH8" set using FIG. 32 above.

Here, the pre-determination effect is an effect that is performed based on the pre-determination process.
In addition, in the illustrated pre-determined performance pattern, "reserved image", "display color", "chance eye", "zone", "gimmick", "button vibration", and "symbol operation" are set. Note that "-" in each column of the illustrated table indicates that the corresponding performance will not be executed.

Here, the "reserved image" is an image indicating that the right to judge a big win is reserved. The reserved image will be described in detail later.
The "display color" indicates the display color of the reserved image. In this embodiment, the display color of the reserved image is changed to notify or suggest to the player the expectation of winning the jackpot. In this embodiment, one of "blue", "green", "red", and "rainbow" is selected as the display color. For example, the display colors of the reserved images may be set in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow, with the expectation level increasing the later the order. In addition, the variable presentation in which a rainbow-colored reserved image is displayed may be a variable presentation in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. In other words, the expectation level of a rainbow-colored reserved image may be 100%.

"Chance Eye" indicates the type of chance eye effect. The chance eye effect is an effect that displays a chance eye based on the result of a pre-determination process. The chance eye is three decorative patterns that are a combination of predetermined same-color patterns including different numbers. The chance eye effect notifies or suggests, for example, that there is a high possibility of a big win in the special pattern variation after the special pattern variation that started the chance eye effect. In addition, the chance eye effect may be performed multiple times in multiple variation effects. In the illustrated example, either "RO1" or "RO2" is executed as the type of chance eye effect. In addition, the order of "RO1" and "RO2" is set so that the higher the number, the higher the expectation.
In addition, the chance eye may be any three specific decorative patterns 41 that notify or suggest that there is a high possibility of a jackpot in the special pattern variation following the special pattern variation that initiated the chance eye performance, and the three decorative patterns 41 do not have to be the same color.

"Zone" refers to a zone effect. A zone effect is, for example, an effect that creates the expectation that a jackpot will occur when a special symbol changes. A zone effect that is performed based on a pre-determination result may be an effect that creates the expectation that a jackpot will occur when a special symbol changes when a zone effect is started, or may be an effect that creates the expectation that a jackpot will occur when a special symbol changes after the special symbol change when a zone effect is started.

"Gem" indicates the type of gem performance. A gem performance is a performance in which the movable gem 115 operates. The gem performance performed based on the results of the preliminary determination may be a performance in which the player hopes for a jackpot in the special pattern variation that started the gem performance, or a performance in which the player hopes for a jackpot in the special pattern variation following the special pattern variation that started the gem performance. In the example shown, either "CH1" or "CH2" is executed as the type of gem performance. Also, the higher the number, the higher the expectation, in the order of "CH1" and "CH2".

"Button vibration" refers to a vibration effect. A vibration effect is an effect that vibrates the effect button 161. The vibration effect, which is performed based on the results of a preliminary determination, is an effect that creates the expectation that a jackpot will occur in the special pattern variation following the special pattern variation that started the vibration effect.

"Pattern action" indicates the type of pattern action presentation. A pattern action presentation refers to a presentation in which a decorative pattern moves. A pattern action presentation performed based on the results of a preliminary determination is a presentation that creates hope for a jackpot in the special pattern variation following the special pattern variation that initiated the pattern action presentation. In the illustrated example, either "DE1" or "DE2" is executed as the pattern action presentation for each type of decorative pattern action. Also, the higher the number, the higher the expectation, in the order of "DE1" and "DE2".

The performance control unit 300 determines a pre-determined performance pattern based on the tables shown in Figures 53 and 54. Specifically, the performance control unit 300 selects a pre-determined performance pattern corresponding to the pre-determined pattern set in the pre-determining process (see Figure 30) based on the tables shown in Figures 53 and 54.
For example, in Fig. 53, when the "judgment result" is "miss" and the pre-judgment pattern is "JR6", "AR6" is selected as the pre-judgment performance pattern. In this pre-judgment performance pattern "AR6", a "reserved image", a "display color", a "chance eye", a "zone", a "gimmick", and a "symbol action" are set. That is, in the pre-judgment performance pattern "AR6", a "reserved image" is displayed, the "display color" becomes "blue", "RO1" is executed as the "chance eye", a zone performance is executed, "CH1" is executed as the "gimmick", and "DE2" is executed as the "symbol action".

In addition, in this embodiment, there is no pre-determination effect pattern table that is used when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving game state. In other words, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving game state, no pre-determination effect is performed. However, there may be a pre-determination effect pattern table that is used when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving game state. The effect control unit 300 may then use this pre-determination effect pattern table to perform a pre-determination effect when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving game state.

[Variable performance pattern table]
55 to 58 are diagrams showing examples of the variable presentation patterns and table settings used in the variable presentation pattern selection (S3813) in the presentation selection process of FIG. 35(b). FIG. 55 shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state is performed. FIG. 56 shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the second start port 122 in the normal game state is performed. FIG. 57 shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is performed. FIG. 58 shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is performed.

The variable presentation pattern table shown in FIG. 55, which is used when a variable presentation is performed based on a winning entry into the first starting hole 121 in normal game mode, has multiple variable presentation patterns set. The variable presentation patterns "EA1" to "EA6", "EB1" to "EB6", and "ER1" to "ER13" correspond one-to-one to the variable presentation patterns "PA1" to "PA6", "PB1" to "PB6", and "PR1" to "PR13" set using FIG. 24 above.

In addition, a plurality of variable presentation patterns are set in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the second start hole 122 in the normal game state is performed, as shown in Fig. 56. The variable presentation patterns "EC1", "EC2", "ED1" to "ED3" and "EE1" correspond one-to-one to the variable presentation patterns "PC1", "PC2", "PD1" to "PD3" and "PE1" set using Fig. 25 above.
In addition, a plurality of variable presentation patterns are set in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the second starting hole 122 in the special time-saving game state shown in Fig. 57 is performed. The variable presentation patterns "PF1", "PF2", "PG1" to "PG3", and "PH1" to "PH8" set using Fig. 26 above are associated one-to-one with the variable presentation patterns "EF1", "EF2", "EG1" to "EG3", and "EH1" to "EH8".
In addition, a plurality of variable presentation patterns are set in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in the special time-saving game state shown in Fig. 58 is performed. Variable presentation patterns "EI1" to "EI3" and "EJ1" are associated one-to-one with the variable presentation patterns "PI1" to "PI3" and "PJ1" set using Fig. 27 above.

In addition, the number of variable performance patterns is not limited to the numbers shown in Figures 55 to 58.
For example, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a miss may be greater than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a jackpot. Also, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is a miss may be greater than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot. In this case, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is a miss may be less than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot.
In this case, when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, or when a game ball enters the second start hole 122 in the special time-saving game state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a miss, the interest in the game can be increased by various presentations. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the entry into the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving game state is a miss, the interest in the game is difficult to increase because the number of variable presentation patterns is small. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game ball should enter the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and that the game ball should enter the second start hole 122 in the special time-saving game state.

Also, for example, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a miss may be greater than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a jackpot. Also, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on winning the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is a miss may be greater than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on winning the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is a miss. And in this case, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on winning the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is a miss may be less than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on winning the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot.

Here, the variable effect is an effect in which the result of the special pattern lottery (i.e., whether or not a jackpot has been won) is notified in a dramatic manner by varying and then stopping the display of the effect symbols.
In addition, the variable presentation patterns shown in the figure include the following settings: "final display color,""pseudostimulation,""pseudo consecutive number of times,""reachstimulation,""normal,""SPreach,""SPSPreach,""zonestimulation,""zone,""step,""developmentstimulation,""development,""gimmick,""button,""buttonvibration,""promotionstimulation,""promotion," and "revival." Note that a "-" in each column of the table shown in the figure indicates that the corresponding presentation will not be executed.

Here, "final display color" refers to the final display color of the variable image (described later). In this embodiment, the display color of the variable image is changed to notify or suggest to the player the expectation of winning the jackpot. In the illustrated example, one of "blue," "green," "red," and "rainbow" is selected as the final display color. For example, the display colors of the variable image may be set in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow, with the expectation increasing the later the order. Furthermore, a variable presentation in which a rainbow-colored variable image is displayed may be a variable presentation in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. In other words, a rainbow-colored variable image may have a 100% expectation.

"Pseudo-stimulation" refers to a pseudo consecutive stimulation performance. The pseudo consecutive stimulation performance is a performance that stimulates the execution of a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive performance). The pseudo consecutive performance is a performance that makes it look as if multiple decorative pattern variations are being performed in the variation display (one variation performance) of one variation of the special pattern. In the pseudo consecutive performance, the performance control unit 300 varies the decorative pattern before the reach state, temporarily stops the decorative pattern, and then starts the variation display of the decorative pattern again. In other words, in the pseudo consecutive performance, after the variation of the decorative pattern starts, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and re-varied a set number of times, and then the decorative pattern is stopped to be confirmed, thereby completing the variation display of one variation of the special pattern. Here, the provisional stop is a pseudo stop state in which the pattern appears to be stopped at first glance, but in reality the pattern is slightly swaying. In other words, the provisional stop of the pattern is a state in which the variation is treated as continuing in terms of game control. Here, the stop includes not only a fixed stop but also a provisional stop. The fixed stop of the symbol refers to a state where the special symbol is stopped as a fixed symbol in the variable display of one variation of the special symbol.
In addition, in the pseudo consecutive performance, the performance control unit 300 may start the variable display of the decorative symbols again after the reach state is reached. Furthermore, in the pseudo consecutive performance, after starting the variation of the decorative symbols (variation performance), the performance control unit 300 may start the variable display of the decorative symbols again without temporarily stopping the decorative symbols.

Here, the "pseudo consecutive number of times" is the number of times the pseudo consecutive performance occurs. In the illustrated example, the "pseudo consecutive number of times" is set to "-", "1", "2", or "3", i.e., between 0 and 3 times. The pseudo consecutive number of times is also set in association with the expectation (reliability) of a jackpot, which is the degree to which one can expect to win. In other words, the higher the pseudo consecutive number of times, the higher the expectation is set.

"Reach prompting" indicates the type of reach prompting effect. A reach prompting effect is an effect that prompts the execution of a reach effect. In the illustrated example, either "RE1" or "RE2" is executed as the type of reach prompting effect. Also, in the order of "RE1" and "RE2", the higher the number, the higher the expectation level when a reach effect is executed (when the reach prompting effect is successful).
"Normal" indicates the type of normal reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "N1", "N2", and "N3" is executed as the reach effect type. Also, the higher the number in the order of "N1", "N2", and "N3", the higher the expectation level is set.
"SP Reach" indicates the type of SP Reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3" is executed as the type of SP Reach effect. Also, the order of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3" is set so that the larger the number, the higher the expectation.
"SPSP Reach" indicates the type of SPSP Reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3" is executed as the type of SPSP Reach effect. In addition, the order of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3" is set such that the larger the number, the higher the expectation.

The term "zone stimulation" refers to a zone stimulation effect. The zone stimulation effect is an effect that stimulates the execution of a zone effect.
"Zone" refers to a zone presentation.
"Step" indicates the number of stages executed in the step performance. A step performance is a performance (stage performance) that can be developed stepwise up to a predetermined number. In the illustrated example, the number of step performances executed is either "1", "2", or "3". A step performance of "1" means that only the first stage is executed as a step performance. A step performance of "2" means that the first and second stages are executed as a step performance. A step performance of "3" means that the first, second, and third stages are executed as a step performance.

The "development prompt" refers to a development prompting performance. The development prompting performance is a performance that prompts the execution of a development performance. The development performance is a performance that suggests or notifies the player that the performance will develop to the SPSP reach.
"Development" refers to developmental presentation.

"Gem" indicates the type of gem performance. More specifically, "before temporary stop" of "Gem" indicates the type of gem performance performed before the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable performance, and "after temporary stop" of "Gem" indicates the type of gem performance performed after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable performance. In the illustrated example, one of "CH2", "CH3", and "CH4" is executed as the type of gem performance. In addition, the higher the number, the higher the expectation, in the order of "CH2", "CH3", and "CH4". In this embodiment, the expectation of the gem performance of "CH2" is 10%, the expectation of the gem performance of "CH3" is 15%, and the expectation of the gem performance of "CH4" is 35%. In addition, the expectation of the gem performance "before temporary stop" (the average expectation of the gem performance before temporary stop in all variable patterns in which the gem performance is performed before temporary stop) is 11%. In addition, the expectation of a special feature performance "after a temporary stop" (the average expectation of a special feature performance after a temporary stop in all fluctuation patterns in which a special feature performance occurs after a temporary stop) is 35%.

"Button" indicates the type of button operation effect. More specifically, "before temporary stop" of "button" indicates the type of button operation effect performed before the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable effect, and "after temporary stop" of "button" indicates the type of button operation effect performed after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable effect. In addition, the button operation effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 161. The button operation effect may be executed based on the result of a pre-determination by a pre-determination process. The button operation effect executed based on the result of a pre-determination may be an effect that makes the player expect a jackpot in the special pattern change that started the button operation effect, or may be an effect that makes the player expect a jackpot in the special pattern change next to the special pattern change that started the button operation effect. In the illustrated example, any of "BU1", "BU2", "BU3", "BU4", and "BU5" is executed as the type of button operation effect. In addition, the higher the number, the higher the expectation level, in the order of "BU1", "BU2", "BU3", "BU4", and "BU5". In this embodiment, the expectation level of the button operation presentation of "BU1" is 0%, the expectation level of the button operation presentation of "BU2" is 3%, the expectation level of the button operation presentation of "BU3" is 5%, the expectation level of the button operation presentation of "BU4" is 20%, and the expectation level of the button operation presentation of "BU5" is 65%. In addition, the expectation level of the button operation presentation "before the temporary stop" (the average value of the expectation level of the button operation presentation before the temporary stop in all fluctuation patterns in which the button operation presentation is performed before the temporary stop) is 3%. In addition, the expectation level of the button operation presentation "after the temporary stop" (the average value of the expectation level of the button operation presentation after the temporary stop in all fluctuation patterns in which the button operation presentation is performed after the temporary stop) is 25%.

"Button vibration" indicates the type of vibration effect. More specifically, "before temporary stop" of "button vibration" indicates the type of vibration effect performed before the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable effect, and "after temporary stop" of "button vibration" indicates the type of vibration effect performed after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable effect. Also, the vibration effect is an effect that vibrates the effect button 161. The vibration effect may be executed based on the result of a pre-determination by a pre-determination process. The button vibration effect performed based on the result of a pre-determination is an effect that makes the player expect a jackpot in the special pattern change following the special pattern change in which the vibration effect was started. In other words, the vibration effect may be an effect that suggests or notifies the expectation level in one or more side Otsu effects. In the illustrated example, any of "V1", "V2", "V3", "V4", and "V5" is executed as the type of vibration effect. Also, the higher the number in the order of "V1", "V2", "V3", "V4", and "V5", the higher the expectation level. In this embodiment, the expectation of the vibration effect of "V1" is 60%, and the expectation of the vibration effect of "V4" is 100%. In addition, the expectation of the vibration effect "before the temporary stop" (the average expectation of the vibration effect before the temporary stop in all fluctuation patterns in which a vibration effect is performed before the temporary stop) is 60%. In addition, the expectation of the vibration effect "after the temporary stop" (the average expectation of the vibration effect after the temporary stop in all fluctuation patterns in which a vibration effect is performed after the temporary stop) is 99%.

The "promotion teasing" refers to a promotion teasing performance. The promotion teasing performance is a performance in which, after a decorative pattern that notifies the player that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot is temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern is changed to a decorative pattern that notifies the player that the game state will be more advantageous to the player.
"Promotion" means a promotion effect. The promotion effect is an effect in which a decorative pattern that indicates that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win is temporarily stopped, and then changed to a decorative pattern that indicates that the game state will be more advantageous for the player. In this promotion effect, for example, after "333" is temporarily stopped as a decorative pattern, the decorative pattern "777" is displayed as a stopped pattern.
The term "revival" refers to a revival effect. The revival effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 41 of the losing numbers are temporarily stopped, and then the decorative symbols 41 of the repeating numbers are stopped.

The performance control unit 300 determines the variable performance pattern based on the tables shown in Figures 55 to 58. Specifically, the performance control unit 300 selects a variable performance pattern corresponding to the variable pattern set in the variable pattern selection process (see Figure 15) based on the tables shown in Figures 55 to 58.
For example, in FIG. 55, when the "jackpot pattern" is the "jackpot pattern A" and the change pattern is "PA1", "EA1" is selected as the change performance pattern. In this change performance pattern "EA1", "pseudo-stimulation", "reach-stimulation", "promotion", and "revival" are set to "-". In other words, when "EA1" is selected as the change performance pattern, the pseudo-stimulation performance, the reach-stimulation performance, the promotion performance, and the revival performance are not executed. In addition, in the variable performance pattern "EA1", "red" is displayed as the "final display color", "2" is executed as the "pseudo consecutive number of times", "N2" is executed as "normal", "SP2" is executed as the "SP reach", "SPSP1" is executed as the "SPSP reach", "zone teasing" and "zone" are executed, "3" is executed as the "step", "development teasing" and "development" are executed, "CH2" and "CH4" are executed as "roles""before the temporary stop" and "after the temporary stop", "BU3" and "BU5" are executed as "buttons""before the temporary stop" and "after the temporary stop", "V1" and "V2" are executed as "button vibrations""before the temporary stop" and "after the temporary stop", and "promotion teasing" is executed.

In this embodiment, as described later, the presentation control unit 300 controls one of a plurality of stages (presentation modes) in the normal game state, but the same table of variable presentation patterns shown in FIG. 55 is used regardless of the stage in the normal game state. However, different tables of variable presentation patterns may be used for each stage in the normal game state.

[Production image]
Next, the performance image that the performance control unit 300 causes to be displayed on the image display unit 114 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 59-1, the effect control unit 300 controls to display the effect image on the image display unit 114. In this embodiment, the effect images displayed on the image display unit 114 include the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, the small pattern 56, and the stage image 61. The image display unit 114 also includes a first effect image at start 501, a button operation image 502, a first effect image at stop 503, a first image at operation 504, a zone promotion image 505, a second effect image at start 555, a second effect image at stop 506, a first effect image for a role 507, a step image 508, a first reach line image 509, a first reach notification image 510, a pseudo consecutive image 511, a pseudo consecutive promotion effect image 512, A second effect image 513 of a reel, an effect image 514 at the time of pseudo consecutive stop, a re-change notification image 515, a transition image 516, an SP reach image 517, a first effect image 518 of a SP tease, a second effect image 519 of a SP tease, a switching image 520, a development image 521, a first effect image 522 of a reach tease, a second effect image 523 of a reach tease, a third effect image 524 at the time of stop, a third effect image 525 at the time of start, a third effect image 526 of a reel, a second image during operation 527, a zone notification image 528, a zone effect image 529, a zone execution image 530, a second reach line image 531, a second reach notification image 532, a change effect image 533, a development effect image 534, a fourth effect image of a reel 535, an SPSP reach image 536, a first chance effect image 537, a button effect image 557, a success image 538, a fifth effect image of a reel 53 9, the first big win effect image 540, the first double number effect image 556, the second double number effect image 541, the big win game notification image 542, the right hit image 543, the number of rounds image 544, the image during the round 545, the time-saving start image 546, the fourth effect image at the start 547, the third reach teasing effect image 548, the fourth effect image at the stop 549, the first double number teasing effect image 550, and the second double number teasing effect image 551, the fifth effect image at the time of stopping 552, the sixth effect image at the time of stopping 553, the eighth effect image at the time of stopping 554, the revival image 558, the fifth effect image at the time of starting 559, the eighth effect image at the time of stopping 560, the sixth effect image at the time of starting 561, the ninth effect image at the time of stopping 562, the sixth effect image at the time of stopping 563, the seventh effect image at the time of stopping 564, the fourth effect image at the time of reaching 565, the tenth effect image at the time of stopping 566, the seventh effect image at the time of starting 567, the eighth effect image at the time of starting 568, the third image at the time of operation 569, the second effect image at the time of chance 570, the eighth effect image at the time of starting 571, the ninth effect image at the time of starting 572, the eleventh effect image at the time of stopping 573, the tenth effect image at the time of starting 574, the twelfth effect image at the time of stopping 575, the ninth effect image at the time of starting 576, the tenth effect image at the time of stopping 577, the fifth effect image at the time of reaching An image 578, a sixth reach teasing effect image 579, a thirteenth effect image when stopped 580, an eleventh effect image when started 581, an eleventh role effect image 582, a third chance eye effect image 583, a twelfth effect image when started 584, a stage change image 585, a fourteenth effect image when stopped 586, a pattern effect image 587, a thirteenth effect image when started 588, a fifteenth effect image when stopped 589, a seventh reach teasing effect image 590, an eighth reach teasing effect image 591, a fourteenth effect image when started 592, a twelfth role effect image 593, a sixteenth effect image when stopped 594, a third SP teasing effect image 595, a fourth chance eye effect image 596, a thirteenth role effect image 597, a second jackpot effect image 598, a seventeenth effect image when stopped 599, and a jackpot suggestion image 600 may be displayed.

(Decorative design 41)
As shown in FIG. 59-1 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed on the image display unit 114. When describing the three rows of patterns constituting the decorative pattern 41 individually, the pattern arranged in the left row may be referred to as the "left row decorative pattern 41", the pattern arranged in the center row may be referred to as the "middle row decorative pattern 41", and the pattern arranged in the right row may be referred to as the "right row decorative pattern 41". When describing the left row decorative pattern 41 and the right row decorative pattern 41 together, they may be referred to as the "left and right rows of decorative patterns 41". When describing the left row decorative pattern 41, the middle row decorative pattern 41, and the right row decorative pattern 41 together, they may be referred to as the "three rows of decorative patterns 41". When describing the left row decorative pattern 41, the middle row decorative pattern 41, and the right row decorative pattern 41 together, they may be referred to as the "three rows of decorative patterns 41". When describing the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 with matching numbers, that is, the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 with a reach, they may be referred to as the "reach eye decorative pattern 41". In addition, three rows of decorative patterns 41 including different numbers may be referred to as "decorative patterns 41 with no matching numbers." Furthermore, three rows of decorative patterns 41 with matching numbers may be referred to as "decorative patterns 41 with matching numbers."

In this embodiment, the display modes of the decorative pattern 41 include a highly decorative display mode (see FIG. 59-1(1)) in which character images and the like are displayed in addition to letters such as numbers, and a less decorative display mode (see FIG. 75(6), FIG. 86(34), FIG. 101(58), etc.) in which letters such as numbers are the main display. The images of characters and the like provided in the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 are different for each letter of the decorative pattern 41, and it is possible to identify which pattern it is by the images of the characters and the like. Furthermore, the less decorative decorative pattern 41 has a higher proportion of the area of the letters in the decorative pattern 41 compared to the more decorative decorative pattern 41.
Here, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 is switched according to the change in the game state or the progress of the presentation, etc. Although the details will be described later, for example, the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is displayed in the SP reach presentation, the SPSP reach presentation, and the time-saving game state, and the decorative pattern 41 with high decorativeness is displayed in other cases.
In addition to characters such as numbers, simple pictures, images of characters, etc. may be displayed in the low-decorative decorative pattern 41. In other words, the "low-decorative decorative pattern 41" shown in Figure 75 (6), Figure 86 (34), Figure 101 (58), etc. may be less decorative than the "highly decorative decorative pattern 41" shown in Figure 59-1 (1), etc.

In the variable presentation, the presentation control unit 300 displays three rows of decorative patterns 41 in a variable manner, for example by vertical scrolling (scrolling downwards), and then temporarily stops the left row decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number "2"), then the right row decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number "3"), and then the center decorative pattern (for example, the number "1"). After all decorative patterns 41 have been temporarily stopped in this manner, all decorative patterns 41 are finally stopped in accordance with the stopped display of the special patterns. The combination "213" of stopped decorative patterns 41 shown in Figure 59-1 (1) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a miss. The decorative patterns 41 are also an example of a presentation pattern.

(Variable image 51)
As shown in FIG. 59-1 (2), the image display unit 114 displays a variable image 51 indicating that the special symbol is being displayed (the performance symbol is being displayed) by the special symbol change control unit 233 (see FIG. 6, etc.). In other words, the variable image 51 is displayed as an image related to the variable display of the special symbol during the variable display of the special symbol. When the variable display of the special symbol starts, the variable image 51 is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed (in the illustrated example, the lower side of the display area of the image display unit 114), and when the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the display disappears. In the illustrated example, the variable image 51 has a spherical shape. Also, a variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.
In addition, the variable image 51 may be erased (not displayed) when the variable performance ends, or may be erased (not displayed) before the variable performance ends (in the middle of the variable performance).

The variable image 51 also changes its display mode, such as its display color, to notify or suggest the likelihood of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, it is set so that a color with a higher likelihood of winning is displayed when the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, rather than a miss. For example, when the colors of the variable image 51 are set to white, blue, green, red, and rainbow, it may be set so that the later the order, the higher the likelihood of winning. Furthermore, the likelihood of winning a rainbow-colored variable image 51 may be 100%.

(Reserved image 52)
As shown in Fig. 59-1 (1), the image display unit 114 displays the reserved image 52 based on the information of the memory area in the RAM 303 (see Fig. 4, etc.) corresponding to the currently reserved ball. In other words, the reserved image 52 is an image indicating that the right to determine the big win is reserved. In this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image 52 on the screen is determined based on the result of the pre-determination process.
The reserved image 52 has a smaller display size than the variable image 51. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 52 has a spherical shape. A reserved pedestal is displayed in the area where the reserved image 52 is displayed. The variable pedestal of the variable image 51 and the reserved pedestal of the reserved image 52 are displayed in different modes. In the following, the display mode of the variable image 51, which is white, and the display mode of the reserved image 52, which is white, may be referred to as a normal display mode.

As described above, a maximum of four pending images 52 are generated by winning the first starting port 121. Therefore, a maximum of four pending images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114 by winning the first starting port 121. In this embodiment, the multiple pending images 52 generated by winning the first starting port 121 are displayed in the area to the left of the variable image 51, in order from a position closer to the variable image 51 to a position farther away, that is, from the right side to the left side.

Although detailed description is omitted, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are also generated by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 122. Therefore, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114 by the entry into the second starting hole 122. In this embodiment, the multiple reserved images 52 generated by the entry into the second starting hole 122 are displayed in an area to the right of the variable image 51 in order from a position closer to the variable image 51 to a position farther away, that is, from the left side to the right side.
In addition, in this embodiment, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are basically configured in the same or similar form. However, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be configured in different forms. In addition, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 displayed by winning the first start port 121 may be displayed in a different form from the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 displayed by winning the second start port 122.

In addition, in the following description, the four pending images 52 displayed at maximum may be referred to as the "first pending image 52," the "second pending image 52," the "third pending image 52," and the "fourth pending image 52," in order of proximity to the variable image 51.

(Number of reserved items displayed: 55)
As shown in FIG. 59-1(1), the image display unit 114 displays a reserved number display 55 based on information in a memory area corresponding to reserved balls in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 4, etc.). This reserved number display 55 is an image showing the reserved number. Here, the reserved image 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes in number according to the reserved number for winning balls in the first starting hole 121 and the second starting hole 122. In the reserved number display 55, the reserved number for winning balls in the first starting hole 121 is displayed on the left side, and the reserved number for winning balls in the second starting hole 122 is displayed on the right side.

(Small design 56)
As shown in Fig. 59-1 (1), the image display unit 114 displays a small symbol 56 indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed (the decorative symbol 41 is being variably displayed) based on winning at the first start gate 121 or the second start gate 122 by the special symbol variably control unit 233 (see Fig. 6, etc.). The small symbol 56 is controlled by the performance control unit 300 to variably display in accordance with the variably displayed special symbol and to stop display in accordance with the stop of the special symbol.

In the illustrated example, the small patterns 56 are three images each corresponding to the decorative patterns 41, and are displayed on the right side of the image display area of the image display unit 114. The small patterns 56 are displayed as images smaller in size than the decorative patterns 41. As described above, the decorative patterns 41 may be displayed in a highly decorative display mode or a less decorative display mode, but the small patterns 56 are displayed only in a less decorative display mode that mainly consists of characters. However, the small patterns 56 may be displayed in a display mode in which images such as pictures and characters are displayed in addition to characters. In other words, the small patterns 56 may be less decorative than the highly decorative decorative patterns 41.

The small symbols 56 are displayed (vertically scrolled) in a manner that indicates that the special symbols are being displayed in a changing manner in response to winning at the first starting gate 121 or the second starting gate 122. During scrolling, the small symbols 56 display number images incrementing by one from "1" to "9," and then start again at "1," and the display is repeated in increments of one. Then, when the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the small symbols 56 are displayed in a stopped state. In the example shown, the number indicated by the stopped small symbols 56 matches the number indicated by the decorative symbols 41. To explain further, in the example of FIG. 59-1(1), the number corresponding to the "213" of the decorative symbols 41 is displayed as the small symbols 56. The small symbols 56 can also be regarded as performance symbols.

(Stage image 61)
As shown in Fig. 59-1 (1), a stage image 61 is displayed on the image display unit 114 as a background for the decorative pattern 41 and the like. This stage image 61 is, for example, an image (such as a stage) related to the content (such as an idol or an anime character) that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The stage image 61 may also be a moving image. In the illustrated example, a space-themed moving image is displayed as the stage image 61.
In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 selects one of the multiple performance modes and executes a variable performance in the selected performance mode. The performance control unit 300 then displays the stage image 61 in a display mode corresponding to the selected performance mode. The performance modes in this embodiment are provided for each game state of the pachinko game machine 100, and the performance control unit 300 sets the performance mode according to the switched game state each time the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 is switched, and displays the stage image 61 in a display mode corresponding to the set performance mode. In addition, when a variable performance in one performance mode has been performed a predetermined number of times, the performance control unit 300 switches the performance mode and displays the stage image 61 in a display mode corresponding to the switched performance mode. Therefore, the performance mode can also be regarded as a stage displayed in the stage image 61. In addition, the stage image 61 (display mode of the stage image 61) may be switched, for example, when a specific variable performance (for example, a variable performance in which an SP reach or SPSP reach performance is performed) is performed.
In this embodiment, the stage image 61 is displayed on a layer behind other performance images such as the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51, the pending image 52, the pending number display 55, and the small pattern 56.

(First effect image 501 at start)
61(2), a start-time first effect image 501 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The start-time first effect image 501 is an image that highlights the decorative patterns 41 that start to vary. In the illustrated example, the start-time first effect image 501 is displayed above each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(Button operation image 502)
As shown in FIG. 61 (5), a button operation image 502 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The button operation image 502 is an image that is displayed when a button operation effect is being executed. By displaying this button operation image 502, the player can recognize that it is time to operate the effect button 161. In the illustrated example, an image imitating the effect button 161 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed as the button operation image 502. The operation valid period is a period during which the operation of the effect button 161 is accepted by the effect control unit 300 as being valid. The button operation image 502 is displayed during the operation valid period, and if the effect button 161 is operated between the display of the button operation image 502 and the lapse of the operation valid period, a predetermined effect is executed.

(First effect image 503 when stopped)
As shown in Fig. 62 (9), the image display unit 114 displays the first effect image 503 when stopped. The first effect image 503 when stopped is an image that emphasizes the stopped decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the first effect image 503 when stopped is displayed below the stopped left row decorative pattern 41.

(First image during operation 504)
As shown in FIG. 64 (2), the image display unit 114 displays the first image 504 during operation. The first image 504 during operation is an image that is displayed when the effect button 161 is operated during execution of the button operation effect (during the display of the button operation image 502, during the operation valid period). In the illustrated example, the first image 504 during operation is displayed in a layer on the near side (player side) of the layer in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the image display unit 114, and is displayed in a display area that overlaps with the three columns of decorative patterns 41. Therefore, when the first image 504 during operation is displayed, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible for the player to see.

(Zone teaser image 505)
As shown in FIG. 65 (2), a zone teasing image 505 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The zone teasing image 505 is an image that teases the execution of a zone performance. In this embodiment, the zone teasing image 505 is displayed when the zone teasing performance is being executed. In the illustrated example, the zone teasing image 505 is displayed in a layer on the near side (player side) of the layer in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed on the image display unit 114, in a display area that overlaps with the three columns of decorative patterns 41. Therefore, when the zone teasing image 505 is displayed, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 are difficult or impossible for the player to see.

(Start time second effect image 555)
66(2), the image display unit 114 displays a start-time second effect image 555. The start-time second effect image 555 is an image that highlights the decorative pattern 41 that starts to vary. In the illustrated example, the start-time second effect image 555 is displayed on the left and right sides of each of the three columns of decorative patterns 41.

(Second effect image when stopped 506)
As shown in Fig. 66 (6), the image display unit 114 displays a second stop effect image 506. The second stop effect image 506 is an image that emphasizes the stopped decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, the second stop effect image 506 is displayed above each of the three rows of stopped decorative patterns 41.

(First effect image 507)
As shown in FIG. 68 (5), the image display unit 114 displays the first reel effect image 507. The first reel effect image 507 is an image that emphasizes the middle movable reel 115B. In the illustrated example, the first reel effect image 507 is displayed around the middle movable reel 115B in the shape of the middle movable reel 115B.

(Step image 508)
As shown in FIG. 68 (6), a step image 508 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The step image 508 is an image that notifies the stage being executed in the step performance. In this embodiment, the display manner of the step image 508 changes depending on the stage being executed in the step performance. In the illustrated example, the step image 508 displays the text "Step 1," which indicates that the stage in the step performance is the first stage.

(First reach line image 509)
69 (14), a first reach line image 509 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first reach line image 509 is a linear image that crosses the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the first reach line image 509 is displayed in white.

(First reach notification image 510)
As shown in Fig. 69 (14), a first reach notification image 510 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first reach notification image 510 is an image that notifies that a reach has been achieved. In the example shown, the first reach notification image 510 is displayed between the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41, above the first reach line image 509. The first reach notification image 510 also displays the text "Reach!", which indicates that a reach has been achieved.

(Pseudo-continuous image 511)
As shown in FIG. 69 (16), the image display unit 114 displays a pseudo consecutive image 511. The pseudo consecutive image 511 is an image that notifies the user that a pseudo consecutive performance will be performed by stopping. In this embodiment, the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed instead of the middle row decoration pattern 41. However, even when the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed, the middle row decoration pattern 41 may be displayed. In the illustrated example, the pseudo consecutive image 511 moves from the top to the bottom of the image display unit 114. Note that the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed in a variable or stopped state as part of the middle row decoration pattern 41, as described later. Therefore, the pseudo consecutive image 511 can also be regarded as a performance pattern in a broad sense.

(Pseudo-continuous teasing effect image 512)
As shown in Fig. 70 (17), the image display unit 114 displays a pseudo consecutive win promotion effect image 512. The pseudo consecutive win promotion effect image 512 is an image that emphasizes the pseudo consecutive win image 511, and is an image that promotes the stopping of the pseudo consecutive win image 511, i.e., the execution of a pseudo consecutive win performance. In this embodiment, the pseudo consecutive win promotion effect image 512 is displayed when the pseudo consecutive win promotion performance is being executed. In the illustrated example, the pseudo consecutive win promotion effect image 512 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive win image 511.

(Second effect image 513)
As shown in Fig. 71 (2), the image display unit 114 displays the second reel effect image 513. The second reel effect image 513 is an image that emphasizes the left movable reel 115A. In the illustrated example, the second reel effect image 513 is displayed around the left movable reel 115A.

(Effect image 514 when pseudo consecutive stops)
72 (13), a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is an image that emphasizes the stopped pseudo consecutive image 511. In the illustrated example, the pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the stopped pseudo consecutive image 511.

(Re-change notification image 515)
As shown in FIG. 72 (15), a re-change notification image 515 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The re-change notification image 515 is an image that notifies that the decorative pattern 41 will change again due to the pseudo consecutive performance. In the illustrated example, the re-change notification image 515 is displayed in the center of the image display unit 114 in the left-right direction, above the three columns of decorative patterns 41. In addition, the re-change notification image 515 displays the text "x2" indicating the number of times that the decorative pattern 41 will change in the change performance due to the re-change.

(Transition Image 516)
As shown in FIG. 75(4), a transition image 516 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The transition image 516 is an image that suggests or notifies that the effect to be executed will transition from a normal reach effect to an SP reach effect. In this embodiment, the transition image 516 is displayed on the entire display area of the image display unit 114. Also, in this embodiment, the transition image 516 is displayed as a background for the decorative pattern 41, etc., instead of the stage image 61. Therefore, the transition image 516 can also be regarded as the stage image 61. The stage (effect mode) in this case is a stage (effect mode) specific to when the transition image 516 is displayed.

(SP reach image 517)
As shown in FIG. 75(6), the image display unit 114 displays an SP reach image 517. The SP reach image 517 is an image indicating that the SP reach performance is being executed. The SP reach image 517 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini-game. In this embodiment, the SP reach image 517 is displayed on the entire display area of the image display unit 114. In this embodiment, the SP reach image 517 is displayed as a background of the decorative pattern 41, etc., instead of the stage image 61. Therefore, the SP reach image 517 can also be regarded as the stage image 61. In this case, the stage (performance mode) is a stage (performance mode) specific to when the SP reach performance is being executed.

(SP promotion first effect image 518)
As shown in Fig. 76 (9), the image display unit 114 displays a SP teasing first effect image 518. The SP teasing first effect image 518 is an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is a different number from the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows in the SP reach performance. In the illustrated example, the SP teasing first effect image 518 is displayed on the side where the middle row decorative pattern 41 advances and the side where it returns.

(SP teaser second effect image 519)
As shown in Fig. 76 (11), the image display unit 114 displays a SP fanning second effect image 519. The SP fanning second effect image 519 is an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41, which has the same number as the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows in the SP reach performance. In the illustrated example, the SP fanning second effect image 519 is displayed on the side where the middle row decorative pattern 41 advances and the side where it returns.

(Switching image 520)
As shown in FIG. 76 (14), the image display unit 114 displays a switching image 520. The switching image 520 is an image for switching the background (display mode of the stage image 61) of the decorative pattern 41, etc., from the background corresponding to the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance to the background (display mode of the stage image 61) before the reach performance starts in the variable performance. The switching image 520 is displayed on the entire display area of the image display unit 114. The switching image 520 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, and the stage image 61, and on a layer behind the reserved number display 55 and the small pattern 56.

(Advanced image 521)
As shown in FIG. 78 (2), a development image 521 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The development image 521 is an image that notifies the player that a development performance will be executed by stopping. In the illustrated example, the development image 521 moves so as to exchange display positions with the middle row decorative pattern 41. Note that the development image 521 is displayed in a variable or stopped state as part of the middle row decorative pattern 41, as described later. Therefore, the development image 521 can also be regarded as a performance pattern in a broad sense.

(Reach teasing first effect image 522)
80(2), the image display unit 114 displays a reach prompting first effect image 522. The reach prompting first effect image 522 is an image that emphasizes the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 in the reach prompting performance. In the illustrated example, the reach prompting first effect image 522 is displayed below each of the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41.

(Reach teasing second effect image 523)
As shown in Fig. 80 (3), the image display unit 114 displays a reach prompting second effect image 523. The reach prompting second effect image 523 is an image that emphasizes the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows in the reach prompting performance. In this embodiment, the reach prompting second effect image 523 is displayed after the reach prompting first effect image 522 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the reach prompting second effect image 523 is displayed above and below each of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows, respectively.

(Third effect image 524 when stopped)
81(4), the image display unit 114 displays a third effect image 524 at stop. The third effect image 524 at stop is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 that has stopped after the reach-inducing performance has started. In the example shown in the figure, the third effect image 524 at stop is displayed so as to surround each of the reach-eye decorative patterns 41.

(Third effect image at start 525)
82(2), the image display unit 114 displays a start-up third effect image 525. The start-up third effect image 525 is an image that highlights the decorative pattern 41 that starts to vary. In the illustrated example, the start-up third effect image 525 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(Third effect image 526)
As shown in Fig. 82 (5), the image display unit 114 displays a third reel effect image 526. The third reel effect image 526 is an image that emphasizes the right movable reel 115C. In the illustrated example, the third reel effect image 526 is displayed around the right movable reel 115C.

(Second image during operation 527)
As shown in FIG. 83 (12), the image display unit 114 displays the second image 527 at the time of operation. The second image 527 at the time of operation is an image that is displayed when the effect button 161 is operated during execution of the button operation effect (during the display of the button operation image 502, during the operation valid period). In the illustrated example, the second image 527 at the time of operation is displayed in a layer on the front side (player side) of the layer in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the image display unit 114, and is displayed in a display area that overlaps with the three columns of decorative patterns 41. Therefore, when the second image 527 at the time of operation is displayed, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible for the player to see. However, the decorative patterns 41 may be visible even during the display of the second image 527 at the time of operation by displaying the second image 527 at the time of operation in a display area different from the display area of the decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, the second image 527 at the time of operation displays the text "Hot!?", which makes the player expect that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot.

(Zone notification image 528)
83 (14), a zone notification image 528 is displayed on the image display unit 114. This zone notification image 528 is an image that notifies the execution of a zone effect. In the illustrated example, the text "Entering the zone!" is displayed as the zone notification image 528.

(Zone effect image 529)
83 (14), a zone effect image 529 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The zone effect image 529 is an image that emphasizes the zone notification image 528. In the example shown in the figure, the zone effect image 529 is displayed around the zone notification image 528.

(Zone execution image 530)
83 (15), a zone execution image 530 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The zone execution image 530 is an image that notifies that a zone effect is being executed. In the example shown, the word "Zone" is displayed on the upper side of the display area of the image display unit 114 as the zone execution image 530.

(Second reach line image 531)
As shown in Fig. 84 (19), a second reach line image 531 is displayed on the image display section 114. The second reach line image 531 is a linear image that crosses the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. The second reach line image 531 has a higher expectation than the first reach line image 509 (see Fig. 69 (14)). In the illustrated example, the second reach line image 531 is displayed in red.

(Second reach notification image 532)
As shown in Fig. 84 (19), a second reach notification image 532 is displayed on the image display section 114. The second reach notification image 532 is an image that notifies that a reach has been achieved. The second reach notification image 532 has a higher expectation than the first reach notification image 510 (see Fig. 69 (14)). In the illustrated example, the second reach notification image 532 is displayed between the decorative patterns 41 on the left and right rows, above the second reach line image 531. The second reach notification image 532 also displays the text "Chance!"

(Change effect image 533)
85 (28), a change effect image 533 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The change effect image 533 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative patterns 41 whose numbers have changed. In the illustrated example, the change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the reach-eye decorative patterns 41.

(Development effect image 534)
85 (32), an development effect image 534 is displayed on the image display section 114. The development effect image 534 is an image that emphasizes the stopped development image 521. In the illustrated example, the development effect image 534 is displayed around the stopped development image 521.

(Fourth effect image 535)
As shown in FIG. 86 (33), the image display unit 114 displays the fourth reel effect image 535. The fourth reel effect image 535 is an image that emphasizes the middle movable reel 115B in the development performance. In the illustrated example, the fourth reel effect image 535 is a radial image centered on the middle movable reel 115B.

(SPSP reach image 536)
As shown in FIG. 86 (34), the image display unit 114 displays an SPSP reach image 536. The SPSP reach image 536 is an image indicating that the SPSP reach performance is being executed. The SPSP reach image 536 is, for example, a moving image in which characters appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko game machine 100 fight. In this embodiment, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed on the entire display area of the image display unit 114. In this embodiment, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed as a background of the decorative pattern 41, etc., instead of the stage image 61. Therefore, the SPSP reach image 536 can also be regarded as the stage image 61. The stage (performance mode) in this case is a stage (performance mode) specific to when the SPSP reach performance is being executed.

(Chance eye first effect image 537)
93(7), the image display section 114 displays a first chance eye effect image 537. The first chance eye effect image 537 is an image that emphasizes the chance eye decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the first chance eye effect image 537 is displayed around the chance eye decorative pattern 41.

(Button effect image 557)
As shown in Fig. 99 (44), a button effect image 557 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The button effect image 557 is an image that emphasizes the image imitating the effect button 161 in the button operation image 502. In this embodiment, a button operation effect in which the button effect image 557 is displayed is more anticipated than a button operation effect in which the button effect image 557 is not displayed. In the illustrated example, the button effect image 557 is displayed around the image imitating the effect button 161 in the button operation image 502.

(Success image 538)
As shown in FIG. 99 (45), a success image 538 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The success image 538 is an image that suggests or notifies that the performance performed in the SPSP reach performance has been successful. In this embodiment, the success image 538 is displayed only when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

(5th effect image 539)
As shown in FIG. 99 (46), the image display unit 114 displays a fifth reel effect image 539. The fifth reel effect image 539 is an image that emphasizes the three movable reels 115. In the illustrated example, a radial image with the middle movable reel 115 at the center is displayed in rainbow colors as the fifth reel effect image 539.

(First big win effect image 540)
As shown in FIG. 99 (47), the image display unit 114 displays a first big win effect image 540. The first big win effect image 540 is an image that suggests or notifies that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. In the illustrated example, the first big win effect image 540 is a radial image centered on the middle row decorative symbol 41, which is displayed in rainbow colors.

(Double number first effect image 556)
100 (50), a duplicate first effect image 556 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The duplicate first effect image 556 is an image that emphasizes the duplicate decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, the duplicate first effect image 556 is displayed around each of the duplicate decorative patterns 41.

(Double number second effect image 541)
As shown in Fig. 100 (53), a duplicate second effect image 541 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The duplicate second effect image 541 is an image that emphasizes the duplicate decorative patterns 41 that were not promoted after the promotion teasing performance. In the illustrated example, the duplicate second effect image 541 is displayed so as to surround each of the duplicate decorative patterns 41.

(Big win game notification image 542)
As shown in FIG. 100 (55), a jackpot game notification image 542 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The jackpot game notification image 542 is an image that notifies the start of a jackpot game or a small jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the jackpot game notification image 542 displays the text "Bonus!" indicating the start of a jackpot game. The jackpot game notification image 542 indicates the type of jackpot (e.g., the total number of rounds) and the game status after the jackpot game ends.

(Right-handed image 543)
As shown in FIG. 100 (56), a right-hit image 543 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The right-hit image 543 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. In the illustrated example, a mark of an arrow pointing to the right is displayed as the right-hit image 543. The right-hit image 543 is displayed, for example, during the execution of a big win game and in a time-saving game state.

(Round number image 544)
As shown in FIG. 100 (56), a round number image 544 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The round number image 544 is an image for notifying the player of the number of rounds currently being executed in a big win game. In the illustrated example, the text "Round 1" is displayed as the round number image 544.

(Round image 545)
As shown in Fig. 100 (56), a round-in-progress image 545 is displayed on the image display unit 114. This round-in-progress image 545 is a moving image of a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The round-in-progress image 545 is displayed during a round in a big win game.

(Time-saving start image 546)
101 (57), a time-saving start image 546 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The time-saving start image 546 is an image that notifies the start of a time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, the time-saving start image 546 displays the text "Entering special time-saving!!" which suggests or notifies that the game state will be controlled to a special time-saving game state.

(Start time fourth effect image 547)
104(2), the image display unit 114 displays a fourth start effect image 547. The fourth start effect image 547 is an image that highlights the decorative pattern 41 that starts to vary. In the illustrated example, the fourth start effect image 547 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(Reach teasing third effect image 548)
As shown in Fig. 104 (5), the image display unit 114 displays a reach prompting third effect image 548. The reach prompting third effect image 548 is an image that emphasizes the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows in the reach prompting performance. In this embodiment, the reach prompting third effect image 548 may be displayed only when the target of the reach prompting performance is the "7" decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the reach prompting third effect image 548 is displayed on the left and right sides of each of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows, respectively.

(Fourth effect image when stopped 549)
As shown in Fig. 104 (6), the image display unit 114 displays a fourth effect image 549 at stop. The fourth effect image 549 at stop is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 that has stopped after the reach prompting performance has started. In this embodiment, the fourth effect image 549 at stop may be displayed only when the target of the reach prompting performance is the "7" decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the fourth effect image 549 at stop is displayed so as to surround each of the reach-eye decorative patterns 41.

(Double number teasing first effect image 550)
As shown in FIG. 105 (9), the image display unit 114 displays a first effect image 550 of a double number teasing. The first effect image 550 of a double number teasing is an image teasing that the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is the same decorative pattern 41 as the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 in the normal reach performance, will be stopped. In other words, the first effect image 550 of a double number teasing is an image emphasizing the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is the same decorative pattern 41 as the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 in the normal reach performance. In the illustrated example, the first effect image 550 of a double number teasing is displayed on the upper side and the lower side of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.

(Double number teasing second effect image 551)
As shown in FIG. 105 (10), the image display unit 114 displays a doublet teasing second effect image 551. The doublet teasing second effect image 551 is an image teasing that the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is the same decorative pattern 41 as the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 in the normal reach performance, will be stopped. In other words, the doublet teasing second effect image 551 is an image emphasizing the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is the same decorative pattern 41 as the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 in the normal reach performance. In the illustrated example, the doublet teasing second effect image 551 is displayed on the upper side, lower side, left side, and right side of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.

(Fifth effect image 552 when stopped)
105 (11), the image display unit 114 displays a fifth effect image 552 at stop. The fifth effect image 552 at stop is an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41 that stops with the same number as the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the fifth effect image 552 at stop is displayed around the middle row decorative pattern 41.

(Sixth effect image 553 when stopped)
105 (14), the image display unit 114 displays a sixth effect image 553 at stop. The sixth effect image 553 at stop is an image that emphasizes the doublet decorative pattern 41 that has stopped in the normal reach performance. In the illustrated example, the sixth effect image 553 at stop is displayed so as to surround each of the doublet decorative patterns 41.

(Seventh effect image 554 when stopped)
107 (11), the seventh effect image 554 at stop is displayed on the image display unit 114. The seventh effect image 554 at stop is an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41 that has stopped in the SP reach performance. In the illustrated example, the seventh effect image 554 at stop is displayed around the middle row decorative pattern 41 that has low decorativeness.

(Resurrected image 558)
109(6), a revival image 558 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The revival image 558 is an image that suggests or notifies that a revival performance will be performed. In the example shown in the figure, the revival image 558 displays the text "Revival!!" indicating a revival performance.

(5th effect image at start 559)
111(2), a fifth start effect image 559 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fifth start effect image 559 is an image that highlights the decorative pattern 41 that starts to change. In the illustrated example, the fifth start effect image 559 is displayed on the side where each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 moves.

(Eighth effect image 560 when stopped)
As shown in Fig. 112 (9), the image display unit 114 displays an eighth effect image 560 at stop. The eighth effect image 560 at stop is an image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 that is stopped. The eighth effect image 560 at stop is displayed ahead in the direction in which the decorative pattern 41 has been moving. In the illustrated example, the eighth effect image 560 at stop is displayed to the left of the left row decorative pattern 41 that is stopped.

(Starting sixth effect image 561)
116(2), a sixth start effect image 561 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The sixth start effect image 561 is an image that highlights the decorative patterns 41 that start to vary. In the illustrated example, the sixth start effect image 561 is displayed above and below each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(9th effect image 562 when stopped)
116(6), the image display unit 114 displays a ninth effect image 562 at stop. The ninth effect image 562 at stop is an image that emphasizes the stopped decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the ninth effect image 562 at stop is displayed in the direction in which the three rows of stopped decorative patterns 41 were moving when they changed.

(6th effect image 563)
As shown in FIG. 118(5), the image display unit 114 displays a sixth effect image 563. The sixth effect image 563 is an image that emphasizes the middle movable part 115B. In the illustrated example, the sixth effect image 563 is displayed around the middle movable part 115B in the shape of the middle movable part 115B.

(7th effect image 564)
As shown in FIG. 121 (2), the image display unit 114 displays a seventh reel effect image 564. The seventh reel effect image 564 is an image that emphasizes the left movable reel 115A. In the illustrated example, the seventh reel effect image 564 is displayed around the left movable reel 115A.

(Reach teasing fourth effect image 565)
129(2), a reach prompting fourth effect image 565 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The reach prompting fourth effect image 565 is an image that emphasizes the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 in the reach prompting performance. In the illustrated example, the reach prompting fourth effect image 565 is displayed on the left and right sides of each of the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41, respectively.

(10th effect image 566 when stopped)
130(4), a tenth effect image at stop 566 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The tenth effect image at stop 566 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 that has stopped after the reach teasing performance has started. In the example shown in the figure, the tenth effect image at stop 566 is displayed so as to surround each of the reach-eye decorative patterns 41.

(Start time 7th effect image 567)
131(2), the image display unit 114 displays a seventh start effect image 567. The seventh start effect image 567 is an image that highlights the decorative pattern 41 that starts to vary. In the illustrated example, the seventh start effect image 567 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(Effect image 8 of the reel 568)
As shown in FIG. 131 (5), the image display unit 114 displays the eighth reel effect image 568. The eighth reel effect image 568 is an image that emphasizes the right movable reel 115C. In the illustrated example, the eighth reel effect image 568 is displayed around the right movable reel 115C.

(Third image during operation 569)
As shown in FIG. 132 (12), the image display unit 114 displays the third image 569 at the time of operation. The third image 569 at the time of operation is an image that is displayed when the effect button 161 is operated during execution of the button operation effect (during the display of the button operation image 502, during the operation valid period). In the illustrated example, the third image 569 at the time of operation is displayed in a layer on the front side (player side) of the layer in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the image display unit 114, and is displayed in a display area that overlaps with the three columns of decorative patterns 41. Therefore, when the third image 569 at the time of operation is displayed, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 are difficult or impossible for the player to see. However, the decorative patterns 41 may be visible even during the display of the third image 569 at the time of operation by displaying the third image 569 at the time of operation in a display area different from the display area of the decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, the third image 569 at the time of operation displays the text "Chance!?", which makes the player expect that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.

(Chance eye second effect image 570)
142(7), the image display section 114 displays a second chance eye effect image 570. The second chance eye effect image 570 is an image that emphasizes the chance eye decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the second chance eye effect image 570 is displayed around the chance eye decorative pattern 41.

(Start time 8th effect image 571)
153(2), an eighth start effect image 571 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The eighth start effect image 571 is an image that highlights the decorative pattern 41 that starts to vary. In the illustrated example, the eighth start effect image 571 is displayed below each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(9th effect image at start 572)
161(2), the image display unit 114 displays a ninth start effect image 572. The ninth start effect image 572 is an image that highlights the decorative pattern 41 that starts to vary. In the illustrated example, the ninth start effect image 572 is displayed on the upper left side of each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(11th effect image 573 when stopped)
162(9), the image display unit 114 displays an eleventh effect image 573 at the time of stopping. The eleventh effect image 573 at the time of stopping is an image that emphasizes the stopped decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the eleventh effect image 573 at the time of stopping is displayed on the lower right side of the stopped left row decorative pattern 41.

(Start time 10th effect image 574)
166(2), a start-time tenth effect image 574 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The start-time tenth effect image 574 is an image that highlights the decorative pattern 41 that starts to vary. In the illustrated example, the start-time tenth effect image 574 is displayed on the upper left side and the lower right side of each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(12th effect image when stopped 575)
166(6), the image display unit 114 displays a twelfth effect image 575 at stop. The twelfth effect image 575 at stop is an image that emphasizes the stopped decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the twelfth effect image 575 at stop is displayed on the upper left side and the lower right side of each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 at stop.

(Effect image 9 576)
As shown in FIG. 168 (5), the image display unit 114 displays a ninth effect image 576. The ninth effect image 576 is an image that emphasizes the middle movable part 115B. In the illustrated example, the ninth effect image 576 is displayed around the middle movable part 115B in the shape of the middle movable part 115B.

(Effect image 10 577)
As shown in FIG. 171 (2), the image display unit 114 displays a tenth reel effect image 577. The tenth reel effect image 577 is an image that emphasizes the left movable reel 115A. In the illustrated example, the tenth reel effect image 577 is displayed around the left movable reel 115A.

(Reach teasing effect number 5 image 578)
180(2), a reach prompting fifth effect image 578 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The reach prompting fifth effect image 578 is an image that emphasizes the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 in the reach prompting performance. In the illustrated example, the reach prompting fifth effect image 578 is displayed on the lower right side of each of the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41.

(Reach teasing effect number 6 image 579)
As shown in Fig. 180 (3), the image display unit 114 displays a reach prompting sixth effect image 579. The reach prompting sixth effect image 579 is an image that emphasizes the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows in the reach prompting performance. In this embodiment, the reach prompting sixth effect image 579 is displayed after the reach prompting fifth effect image 578 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the reach prompting sixth effect image 579 is displayed on the upper left and lower right sides of each of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows, respectively.

(13th effect image 580 when stopped)
181(4), the image display unit 114 displays a thirteenth effect image 580 at stop. The thirteenth effect image 580 at stop is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 that has stopped after the start of the reach teasing performance. In the example shown in the figure, the thirteenth effect image 580 at stop is displayed so as to surround each of the reach-eye decorative patterns 41.

(Start time 11th effect image 581)
182(2), an eleventh start effect image 581 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The eleventh start effect image 581 is an image that highlights the decorative pattern 41 that starts to vary. In the illustrated example, the eleventh start effect image 581 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(Effect image 11 of the role 582)
As shown in FIG. 182(5), the image display unit 114 displays an eleventh reel effect image 582. The eleventh reel effect image 582 is an image that emphasizes the right movable reel 115C. In the illustrated example, the eleventh reel effect image 582 is displayed around the right movable reel 115C.

(Chance eye third effect image 583)
193(7), a third chance eye effect image 583 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third chance eye effect image 583 is an image that emphasizes the chance eye decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the third chance eye effect image 583 is displayed around the chance eye decorative pattern 41.

(Start time 12th effect image 584)
204(2), a start-time twelfth effect image 584 is displayed on the image display section 114. The start-time twelfth effect image 584 is an image that highlights the decorative pattern 41 that starts to vary. In the illustrated example, the start-time twelfth effect image 584 is displayed on the left side of each of the three columns of decorative patterns 41.

(Stage change image 585)
As shown in FIG. 211(4), the image display unit 114 displays a stage change image 585. The stage change image 585 is an image that suggests or notifies that the stage (performance mode) controlled by the performance control unit 300 will change. The stage change image 585 is displayed on the entire display area of the image display unit 114. The stage change image 585 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, and the stage image 61, and on a layer behind the reserved number display 55 and the small pattern 56. In the illustrated example, the stage change image 585 displays the text "change" that suggests or notifies that the stage (performance mode) will change.

(14th effect image when stopped 586)
215(4), the image display unit 114 displays a fourteenth effect image 586 at stop. The fourteenth effect image 586 at stop is an image that emphasizes the doublet decorative pattern 41 displayed by the promotion performance. In the illustrated example, the fourteenth effect image 586 at stop is displayed so as to surround each of the doublet decorative patterns 41.

(Pattern effect image 587)
216(3), a pattern effect image 587 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The pattern effect image 587 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 that is the target of the pattern change presentation. In the illustrated example, the pattern effect image 587 is displayed so as to surround each of the reach-eye decorative patterns 41.

(Start time 13th effect image 588)
218(2), a start-time thirteenth effect image 588 is displayed on the image display section 114. The start-time thirteenth effect image 588 is an image that emphasizes the less decorative decorative pattern 41 that starts to vary. In the illustrated example, the start-time thirteenth effect image 588 is displayed above each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(15th effect image when stopped 589)
218(6), a fifteenth effect image 589 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fifteenth effect image 589 is an image that emphasizes the less decorative decorative patterns 41 that are stopped. In the illustrated example, the fifteenth effect image 589 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 that are stopped.

(Reach teasing effect number 7 image 590)
220(2), the image display unit 114 displays a reach prompting seventh effect image 590. The reach prompting seventh effect image 590 is an image that emphasizes the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 in the reach prompting performance. In the illustrated example, the reach prompting seventh effect image 590 is displayed below each of the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41.

(Reach teasing effect number 8 image 591)
As shown in Fig. 220 (3), the image display unit 114 displays a reach prompting eighth effect image 591. The reach prompting eighth effect image 591 is an image that emphasizes the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows in the reach prompting performance. In this embodiment, the reach prompting eighth effect image 591 is displayed after the reach prompting seventh effect image 590 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the reach prompting eighth effect image 591 is displayed above and below each of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows, respectively.

(Start time 14th effect image 592)
221(2), a start-time fourteenth effect image 592 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The start-time fourteenth effect image 592 is an image that highlights the decorative pattern 41 that starts to vary. In the illustrated example, the start-time fourteenth effect image 592 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(Effect image 12 of the role 593)
As shown in FIG. 221 (4), the image display unit 114 displays a twelfth effect image 593. The twelfth effect image 593 is an image that emphasizes the center movable part 115B and the right movable part 115C. In the illustrated example, the twelfth effect image 593 is displayed around the center movable part 115B and the right movable part 115C by the shape of the movable part 115, respectively.

(16th effect image 594 when stopped)
221(7), the image display unit 114 displays a sixteenth effect image 594 at stop. The sixteenth effect image 594 at stop is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 that has stopped after the reach teasing performance has started. In the example shown in the figure, the sixteenth effect image 594 at stop is displayed around each of the reach-eye decorative patterns 41.

(SP teaser third effect image 595)
222(13), the image display unit 114 displays a SP provocation third effect image 595. The SP provocation third effect image 595 is an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41, which has the same number as the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows in the SP reach performance. In the illustrated example, the SP provocation third effect image 595 is displayed on the left and right sides of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.

(Chance Eye 4th Effect Image 596)
224(6), a fourth chance eye effect image 596 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourth chance eye effect image 596 is an image that emphasizes the chance eye decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the fourth chance eye effect image 596 is displayed so as to surround the chance eye decorative pattern 41.

(Effect image 13 of the feature 597)
As shown in FIG. 227 (17), the image display unit 114 displays a thirteenth reel effect image 597. The thirteenth reel effect image 597 is an image that highlights the three movable reels 115. In the illustrated example, an image that spreads from the center movable reel 115B is displayed in rainbow colors as the thirteenth reel effect image 597.

(Second big win effect image 598)
As shown in FIG. 227 (18), the image display unit 114 displays a second big win effect image 598. The second big win effect image 598 is an image that suggests or notifies that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. In the illustrated example, the second big win effect image 598 is an image that spreads from the middle row decorative symbol 41 in the center in rainbow colors.

(17th effect image when stopped 599)
227 (21), a seventeenth effect image 599 at stop is displayed on the image display unit 114. The seventeenth effect image 599 at stop is an image that emphasizes the stopped doublet decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the seventeenth effect image 599 at stop is displayed around each of the doublet decorative patterns 41.

(Big win suggestion image 600)
As shown in FIG. 232(2), the image display unit 114 displays a jackpot suggestion image 600. The jackpot suggestion image 600 is an image that suggests or notifies that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. The jackpot suggestion image 600 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and the stage image 61, and in a layer behind the reserved number display 55 and the small pattern 56. In the illustrated example, the jackpot suggestion image 600 displays the text "Jackpot!?"

In this embodiment, the first effect image at start 501, the first effect image at stop 503, the second effect image at start 555, the second effect image at stop 506, the first effect image of the reel 507, the pseudo consecutive promotion effect image 512, the second effect image of the reel 513, the effect image when the pseudo consecutive promotion stops 514, the first effect image of the SP promotion 518, the second effect image of the SP promotion 519, the first effect image of the reach promotion 522, the second effect image of the reach promotion 523, the third effect image at stop 524, the third effect image at start 525, the third effect image of the reel 526, the zone effect image 529, the change effect image 533, the development effect image 534, the fourth effect image of the reel 535, chance eye first effect image 537, button effect image 557, role item fifth effect image 539, big win first effect image 540, double numbers first effect image 556, double numbers second effect image 541, start time fourth effect image 547, reach tease third effect image 548, stop time fourth effect image 549, double numbers tease first effect image 550, double numbers tease second effect image 551, stop time fifth effect image 552, stop time sixth effect image 553, stop time eighth effect image 554, start time fifth effect image 559, stop time eighth effect image 560, start time sixth effect image 561, stop time ninth effect image 562, role item sixth effect 563, the seventh effect image of the reel 564, the fourth effect image of the reach tease 565, the tenth effect image at the time of stopping 566, the seventh effect image at the time of starting 567, the eighth effect image of the reel 568, the second effect image of the chance eye 570, the eighth effect image at the time of starting 571, the ninth effect image at the time of starting 572, the eleventh effect image at the time of stopping 573, the tenth effect image at the time of starting 574, the twelfth effect image at the time of stopping 575, the ninth effect image of the reel 576, the tenth effect image of the reel 577, the fifth effect image of the reach tease 578, the sixth effect image of the reach tease 579, the thirteenth effect image at the time of stopping 580, the eleventh effect image at the time of starting 581, the eleventh effect image of the reel The image 582, the third chance effect image 583, the twelfth effect image at start 584, the fourteenth effect image at stop 586, the pattern effect image 587, the thirteenth effect image at start 588, the fifteenth effect image at stop 589, the seventh reach tease effect image 590, the eighth reach tease effect image 591, the fourteenth effect image at start 592, the twelfth role effect image 593, the sixteenth effect image at stop 594, the third SP tease effect image 595, the fourth chance effect image 596, the thirteenth role effect image 597, the second big win effect image 598, and the seventeenth effect image at stop 599 are all different images (having different display modes).

(Visual recognition mode of decorative pattern 41)
Next, a description will be given of the visual recognition mode of the decorative symbol 41. The visual recognition mode of the decorative symbol 41 refers to the mode in which the decorative symbol 41 is visually recognized by a player.
In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 displays the decorative pattern 41 in various visual modes according to the progress of the performance.
Figures 59-1 to 59-5 are diagrams showing the visual appearance of the decorative pattern 41 controlled by the performance control unit 300.

Figure 59-1 (1) is a diagram showing the first viewing mode. The first viewing mode is the viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 that is fixed and stopped. In the first viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 is opaque (has low transparency) and is visible to the player. Furthermore, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first viewing mode, the stage image 61 is difficult to view, difficult to view, or impossible to view through the display area of the decorative pattern 41. Furthermore, in the first viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 is stationary. However, even in the first viewing mode, characters in the decorative pattern 41 and images that emphasize the number portion of the decorative pattern 41 (such as the outline portion surrounding the number) may be displayed in motion.

FIG. 59-1 (2) is a diagram showing the second viewing mode. The second viewing mode is a viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 that starts to change immediately after the start of the change performance. In the second viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 is opaque (has low transparency) and is visible to the player. Also, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second viewing mode, the stage image 61 is difficult to view, difficult to view, or impossible to view through the display area of the decorative pattern 41. Also, in the second viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an operational state. In the example shown in the figure, in the second viewing mode, three rows of the decorative pattern 41 are displayed in an operational state so as to move upward. Also, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second viewing mode, an image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 is displayed, like the first effect image 501 at the start.
In this embodiment, there are multiple operation modes of the decorative pattern 41 in the second visual mode, each having a different degree of expectation, and the degree of expectation is suggested or indicated depending on which operation mode causes the decorative pattern 41 to be displayed.

Figure 59-1 (3) is a diagram showing the third viewing mode. The third viewing mode is a viewing mode in which the decorative pattern 41 accelerates after the start of fluctuation. In the third viewing mode, the transparency of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same as that of the second viewing mode, or may be higher than that of the second viewing mode. If the transparency of the decorative pattern 41 is higher in the third viewing mode than in the second viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 is more difficult for the player to see when displayed in the third viewing mode than when displayed in the second viewing mode, and the stage image 61 becomes easier to see through the display area of the decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 in the third viewing mode is displayed as moving downward.

FIG. 59-1 (4) is a diagram showing the fourth viewing mode. The fourth viewing mode is the viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 that changes at the highest speed in the variable performance. In the fourth viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 has a higher transparency than the second viewing mode, and is difficult to view, difficult to view, or impossible for the player. More specifically, each of the decorative patterns 41 in the row of the fourth viewing mode is difficult to view, difficult to view, or impossible compared to the second viewing mode. Also, in the fourth viewing mode, the stage image 61 is easier to view through the display area of the decorative pattern 41 than in the second viewing mode. In the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 in the fourth viewing mode is displayed in an action such that it moves downward. Also, when the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 in the drawing are displayed (scrolled) at a particularly high speed to show that they are difficult to view or impossible to view, the target performance pattern is displayed by an arrow for easy understanding.
In addition, the transparency of the decorative pattern 41 in the third viewing mode may be the same as that of the decorative pattern 41 in the fourth viewing mode, or it may be higher than that of the decorative pattern in the second viewing mode and lower than that of the decorative pattern 41 in the fourth viewing mode.

Figure 59-1 (5) is a diagram showing the fifth viewing mode. The fifth viewing mode is a viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 that fluctuates at a slower speed than the fourth viewing mode. In the fifth viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 has a lower transparency than the fourth viewing mode, and is visible to the player. More specifically, each of the decorative patterns 41 in the row that is the fifth viewing mode is visible. In other words, the fifth viewing mode is a viewing mode that is easier for the player to view than the fourth viewing mode. Also, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth viewing mode, the stage image 61 is difficult to view, difficult to view, or impossible to view through the display area of the decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 in the fifth viewing mode is displayed in an action that moves downward.

Figure 59-1 (6) is a diagram showing the sixth viewing mode. The sixth viewing mode is a viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 that stops. In the sixth viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 is opaque (has low transparency) and is visible to the player. In other words, the sixth viewing mode is a viewing mode that is easier for the player to view than the fourth viewing mode. When the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth viewing mode, the stage image 61 is difficult to view, difficult to view, or impossible to view through the display area of the decorative pattern 41. In addition, in the sixth viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion. In the example shown in the figure, in the sixth viewing mode, the left row decorative pattern 41 that was moving downward is displayed in motion so as to bound and move upward. In addition, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth viewing mode, an image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 is displayed, such as the first effect image 503 when stopped.

Figure 59-1 (7) is a diagram showing the seventh viewing mode. The seventh viewing mode is a viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 that is temporarily stopped. In the seventh viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 is opaque (has low transparency) and is visible to the player. In other words, the seventh viewing mode is a viewing mode that is easier for the player to view than the fourth viewing mode. When the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh viewing mode, the stage image 61 is difficult to view, difficult to view, or impossible to view through the display area of the decorative pattern 41. In addition, in the seventh viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion. In the example shown in the figure, in the seventh viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion so as to sway left and right at a predetermined cycle. This predetermined cycle may be referred to as the first cycle below. The first cycle is, for example, one second.

Figure 59-1 (8) is a diagram showing the eighth visual mode. The eighth visual mode is the visual mode of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows when a reach is achieved (when the reach performance starts). In the eighth visual mode, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in motion. In the illustrated example, in the eighth visual mode, the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in motion as if raising the right hand. In this embodiment, the motion mode of the decorative symbols 41 in the eighth visual mode includes multiple motion modes with different degrees of expectation, and the degree of expectation is suggested or indicated depending on which motion mode the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in.

The ninth visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the decorative symbol 41 in the reach prompting performance. The ninth visual recognition mode includes a first mode to a fourth mode.
FIG. 59-2 (9) is a diagram showing the first mode of the ninth viewing mode. The first mode of the ninth viewing mode is a viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 in the beginning of the reach-inducing performance. In the first mode of the ninth viewing mode, the left-row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in its entirety, while the number portion of the right-row decorative pattern 41 is displayed and the character portion is not displayed. In addition, in the first mode of the ninth viewing mode, the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in motion. In the illustrated example, in the first mode of the ninth viewing mode, the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in motion so as to move downward at a slower speed than in the fifth viewing mode. In addition, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the ninth viewing mode, an image emphasizing the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows is displayed, like the reach-inducing first effect image 522.

Figure 59-2 (10) is a diagram showing the second mode of the ninth viewing mode. The second mode of the ninth viewing mode is a viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 in the middle of the reach teasing performance. In the second mode of the ninth viewing mode, both of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in their entirety. In addition, in the second mode of the ninth viewing mode, the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the center of the image display unit 114 in the vertical direction, and the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed above the left row decorative pattern 41. In addition, in the second mode of the ninth viewing mode, the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in motion. In the illustrated example, in the second mode of the ninth viewing mode, the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion so as to swing up and down, and the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion so as to move downward at a slower speed than in the first mode of the ninth viewing mode. In addition, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode, an image that highlights the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows is displayed, such as the reach teasing second effect image 523.

Figure 59-2 (11) is a diagram showing the third mode of the ninth visual mode. The third mode of the ninth visual mode is the visual mode of the decorative pattern 41 at the end of the reach-stimulating performance. In the third mode of the ninth visual mode, the left row decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in such a manner that the number that was the target of the reach-stimulating performance passes below and the next number to the number that was the target of the reach-stimulating performance moves from the top to the bottom. In other words, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the ninth visual mode in the reach-stimulating performance, the left row decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped without being displayed in the sixth visual mode (see Figure 59-1 (6)). Also, in the third mode of the ninth visual mode, the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in such a manner that it moves below at a higher speed than in the first mode of the ninth visual mode.

As shown in FIG. 59-2 (12), the fourth aspect of the ninth viewing aspect is the viewing aspect of the decorative pattern 41 at the end of the reach teasing performance. In the fourth aspect of the ninth viewing aspect, the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop, establishing a reach. Also, in the fourth aspect of the ninth viewing aspect, each of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows is displayed in an enlarged manner. Also, when the decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth aspect of the ninth viewing aspect, an image that emphasizes the decorative patterns 41 of the reach eye is displayed, as in the third effect image 524 at the time of stop.

In this embodiment, when a reach prompting performance is executed, if the reach performance is not executed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the third aspect of the ninth viewing aspect, and if the reach performance is executed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the fourth aspect of the ninth viewing aspect. That is, in the reach prompting performance, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by either the third aspect of the ninth viewing aspect or the fourth aspect of the ninth viewing aspect. However, when the reach performance is executed after the reach prompting performance, after the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the third aspect of the ninth viewing aspect, the number that has passed in the right column decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an action to return to the upper side, thereby establishing a reach, and the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed by the fourth aspect of the ninth viewing aspect. On the other hand, after the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the fourth aspect of the ninth viewing aspect, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed by the third aspect of the ninth viewing aspect.

The tenth visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the middle row decorative symbol 41 in the normal reach performance. The tenth visual recognition mode includes a first mode and a second mode.
FIG. 59-2 (13) is a diagram showing the first mode of the tenth viewing mode. The first mode of the tenth viewing mode is a viewing mode of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the first half of the normal reach performance. In the first mode of the tenth viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 has a lower transparency than the fourth viewing mode (see FIG. 59-1 (4)), and is visible to the player. More specifically, each of the middle row decorative patterns 41 is visible. In other words, the first mode of the tenth viewing mode is a viewing mode that is easier for the player to view than the fourth viewing mode. Also, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the tenth viewing mode, the stage image 61 is difficult to view, difficult to view, or impossible to view through the display area of the decorative pattern 41. Also, in the first mode of the tenth viewing mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 of the first aspect of the tenth visual aspect is displayed as moving downward.

Figure 59-2 (14) is a diagram showing the second mode of the tenth visual mode. The second mode of the tenth visual mode is the visual mode of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the latter half of the normal reach performance. In the second mode of the tenth visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed moving downward at a higher speed than in the first mode of the tenth visual mode. Also, in the second mode of the tenth visual mode, after the same number as the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 passes, the next number moves from above to below the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 in the middle row decorative pattern 41.

The eleventh visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the transition image 516 is displayed. The eleventh visual recognition mode includes a first mode and a second mode. In the eleventh visual recognition mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is not displayed (is difficult to see or cannot be seen).
FIG. 59-2 (15) is a diagram showing the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. The first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 in the first half of the display of the transition image 516. In the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode, the character portion of the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is erased, thereby reducing the decorativeness, and the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner. Also, in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode, each of the reach-eye decorative patterns 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner, moving in the left-right direction toward the center of the image display unit 114 and upward.

FIG. 59-2 (16) is a diagram showing the second mode of the eleventh visual mode. The second mode of the eleventh visual mode is a visual mode of the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 in the latter half of the display of the transition image 516. In the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, each of the reach-eye decorative patterns 41 is displayed in a manner to shrink. Also, in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, each of the reach-eye decorative patterns 41 is displayed in a manner to move to both upper corners of the image display unit 114. Also, in the illustrated example, the reach-eye decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a manner to rotate at a predetermined period. This predetermined period may be referred to as the second period hereinafter. The second period is, for example, 1.5 seconds. That is, the second period is longer than the first period (see FIG. 59-1 (7)).
The second period may be shorter than the first period, or the first period and the second period may be the same in length.

The twelfth visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the decorative symbol 41 when the SP reach effect is being executed. In the twelfth visual recognition mode, the reach eye decorative symbol 41 is the same visual recognition mode as the second mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. The twelfth visual recognition mode includes first to sixth modes.
FIG. 59-3 (17) is a diagram showing the first mode of the twelfth visual mode. The first mode of the twelfth visual mode is a visual mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is fluctuating at high speed. In the first mode of the twelfth visual mode, the decorative pattern 41 has a higher transparency than the second visual mode (see FIG. 59-1 (2)), and is difficult to be visually recognized by the player, or is difficult to be visually recognized. More specifically, each of the middle row decorative patterns 41 is difficult to be visually recognized, or is difficult to be visually recognized, compared to the second visual mode. In addition, in the first mode of the twelfth visual mode, the background (SP reach image 517) is easier to be visually recognized through the display area of the middle row decorative pattern 41 than in the second visual mode. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an action such that it moves from the upper right side to the lower left side in the image display unit 114.

Figure 59-3 (18) is a diagram showing the second mode of the 12th visual mode. The second mode of the 12th visual mode is a visual mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is fluctuating at a low speed. In the second mode of the 12th visual mode, the decorative pattern 41 has a lower transparency than the first mode of the 12th visual mode, and is easier for the player to see. In other words, the second mode of the 12th visual mode is a visual mode that is easier for the player to see than the fourth visual mode. Also, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode, it is more difficult to see the background (SP reach image 517) through the display area of the middle row decorative pattern 41 than when it is displayed in the first mode of the 12th visual mode. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in such a manner that it moves from the upper right side to the lower left side of the image display unit 114.

Figure 59-3 (19) is a diagram showing the third mode of the 12th viewing mode. The third mode of the 12th viewing mode is the viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 when a performance is being executed to incite whether the middle row decorative pattern 41 will stop. In the third mode of the 12th viewing mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the center of the image display unit 114 and is displayed as if it is swaying. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the third mode of the 12th viewing mode is displayed as if it is swaying to the forward side (lower left side) and the return side (upper right side). In addition, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 12th viewing mode, an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed, such as the SP instigation second effect image 519.

FIG. 59-3 (20) is a diagram showing the fourth mode of the twelfth visual mode. The fourth mode of the twelfth visual mode is a visual mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a manner to return to the opposite side of the moving direction. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the fourth mode of the twelfth visual mode is displayed in a manner to move to the upper right side of the image display unit 114 at a higher speed than the third mode of the twelfth visual mode.
FIG. 59-3 (21) is a diagram showing the fifth mode of the twelfth visual recognition mode. The fifth mode of the twelfth visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is a number different from the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye, is stopped. In the fifth mode of the twelfth visual recognition mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped and is displayed as if it is swinging. Note that, between the fifth mode of the twelfth visual recognition mode and the seventh visual recognition mode (see FIG. 59-1 (7)), the motion mode of the decorative pattern 41 may be different, such as the direction in which the decorative pattern 41 swings being different, or the motion mode of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same, such as the direction in which the decorative pattern 41 swings being the same.

59-3 (22) is a diagram showing the sixth aspect of the twelfth visual recognition aspect. The sixth aspect of the twelfth visual recognition aspect is a visual recognition aspect of the decorative pattern 41 when the middle row decorative pattern 41, which has the same number as the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye, is stopped. When the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth aspect of the twelfth visual recognition aspect, an image emphasizing the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed, as in the seventh effect image 554 when stopped.
In this embodiment, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 12th viewing mode, if the doublet decorative pattern 41 is not displayed, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth and fifth modes of the 12th viewing mode, and if the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth mode of the 12th viewing mode. However, when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed, the middle row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the fourth and fifth modes of the 12th viewing mode, and then may change again and be displayed in the sixth mode of the 12th viewing mode. On the other hand, after the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth mode of the 12th viewing mode, it is not displayed in either the fourth or fifth mode of the 12th viewing mode.

The thirteenth visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the development prompting performance is executed in the SP reach performance. In the thirteenth visual recognition mode, the reach eye decorative pattern 41 is the same visual recognition mode as the first mode of the twelfth visual recognition mode. In addition, the thirteenth visual recognition mode includes the first mode to the sixth mode.
FIG. 59-3 (23) is a diagram showing the first mode of the thirteenth visual mode. The first mode of the thirteenth visual mode is a visual mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the development image 521 is displayed in front of the middle decorative pattern 41. In the first mode of the thirteenth visual mode, the middle decorative pattern 41 and the development image 521 are displayed in a rotating manner so that the display positions of the two are exchanged. In addition, in the first mode of the thirteenth visual mode, the middle decorative pattern 41 with a different number from the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed. At this time, the number of the middle decorative pattern 41 may be visible to the player, or may be hidden by the development image 521 and difficult or impossible to see.

Figure 59-3 (24) is a diagram showing the second mode of the thirteenth viewing mode. The second mode of the thirteenth viewing mode is a viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in front of the developed image 521. In the second mode of the thirteenth viewing mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 and the developed image 521 are displayed in a rotating motion such that the display positions of the two are swapped.

Figure 59-4 (25) is a diagram showing the third mode of the thirteenth viewing mode. The third mode of the thirteenth viewing mode is a viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the developed image 521 and the middle row decorative pattern 41 are displayed side by side. The third mode of the thirteenth viewing mode is a viewing mode that is easier for the player to view than the fourth viewing mode. In the third mode of the thirteenth viewing mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 and the developed image 521 are displayed in such a way that they push against each other toward the center of the image display unit 114.

59-4 (26) is a diagram showing the fourth mode of the thirteenth viewing mode. The fourth mode of the thirteenth viewing mode is a viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the developed image 521 is not displayed. In the fourth mode of the thirteenth viewing mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in such a manner that it moves to the center of the image display unit 114.
FIG. 59-4 (27) is a diagram showing the fifth mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode. The fifth mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is a number different from the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye, is stopped. In the fifth mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped and is displayed as if it is swinging. Note that the fifth mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode and the seventh visual recognition mode (see FIG. 59-1 (7)) may have different motion modes of the decorative pattern 41, such as different swing directions of the decorative pattern 41, or may have the same motion modes of the decorative pattern 41, such as the same swing directions of the decorative pattern 41. Also, the fifth mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode and the fifth mode of the twelfth visual recognition mode (see FIG. 59-3 (21)) may have different motion modes of the decorative pattern 41, or may have the same motion modes of the decorative pattern 41.

FIG. 59-4 (28) is a diagram showing the sixth aspect of the thirteenth viewing aspect. The sixth aspect of the thirteenth viewing aspect is the viewing aspect of the decorative pattern 41 when the development image 521 stops. In the sixth aspect of the thirteenth viewing aspect, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. Also, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth aspect of the thirteenth viewing aspect, an image that emphasizes the development image 521 is displayed, such as the development effect image 534.
In this embodiment, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 13th viewing mode during the SP reach performance, if the development image 521 does not stop, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth and fifth modes of the 13th viewing mode, and if the development image 521 stops, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth mode of the 13th viewing mode.

FIG. 59-4 (29) is a diagram showing the 14th visual mode. The 14th visual mode is a visual mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the SPSP reach performance is being executed. In the 14th visual mode, the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a line in the corner of the image display unit 114, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. However, in the 14th visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is difficult or impossible for the player to see because it fluctuates at high speed between the reach-eye decorative patterns 41, but it does not have to be hidden. In addition, in the 14th visual mode, the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a smaller size than the second mode of the 11th visual mode (see FIG. 59-2 (16)) and the first mode of the 12th visual mode (see FIG. 59-3 (17)). In the fourteenth visual mode, the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is temporarily stopped in the same operation mode as the second mode of the eleventh visual mode and the second mode of the twelfth visual mode.
In the 14th visual recognition mode, the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the same size as in the second mode of the 11th visual recognition mode or the second mode of the 12th visual recognition mode. In the 14th visual recognition mode, the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 may be temporarily stopped in an operation mode different from the second mode of the 11th visual recognition mode or the second mode of the 12th visual recognition mode.

Figure 59-4 (30) is a diagram showing the 15th viewing mode. The 15th viewing mode is a viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 of the missing eye in the SPSP reach performance. In the 15th viewing mode, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a size larger than that of the 14th viewing mode. In the 15th viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 of the missing eye is temporarily stopped in an operation mode different from that of the 14th viewing mode. Note that the operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 may be different between the 15th viewing mode and the 7th viewing mode (see Figure 59-1 (7)), such as the direction in which the decorative pattern 41 swings being different, or the operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same, such as the direction in which the decorative pattern 41 swings being the same.

The 16th visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the doublet decorative pattern 41. The 16th visual recognition mode includes the first to fourth modes. In the 16th visual recognition mode, an image emphasizing the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed, such as the first big win effect image 540.
59-4 (31) is a diagram showing the first aspect of the 16th visual aspect. The first aspect of the 16th visual aspect is a visual aspect of the doublet decorative pattern 41 displayed in a small size.

FIG. 59-4 (32) is a diagram showing the second aspect of the 16th visual mode. The second aspect of the 16th visual mode is a visual mode of the doublet decorative pattern 41 displayed in a size larger than that of the first aspect of the 16th visual mode. When the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second aspect of the 16th visual mode, the display size of each of the doublet decorative patterns 41 may be the same, or the display size of the middle decorative pattern 41 may be larger than the display size of each of the left and right decorative patterns 41.
FIG. 59-5 (33) is a diagram showing the third mode of the 16th visual mode. The third mode of the 16th visual mode is a visual mode of the decorative pattern 41 of the doublet displayed at the largest size and temporarily stopped. In the third mode of the 16th visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in its entirety, whereas each of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows is displayed only partially. In other words, in the third mode of the 16th visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 has a larger display size than each of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows.

Figure 59-5 (34) is a diagram showing the fourth mode of the 16th viewing mode. The fourth mode of the 16th viewing mode is a viewing mode of the doublet decorative pattern 41 that is displayed in a smaller size than in the third mode of the 16th viewing mode and temporarily stopped. In the fourth mode of the 16th viewing mode, each of the doublet decorative patterns 41 is displayed in its entirety, and the display size of each of the doublet decorative patterns 41 is the same. However, even when the doublet decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the 16th viewing mode, the display size of the middle row decorative pattern 41 may be larger than each of the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41.

The 17th visual confirmation mode is a visual confirmation mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the middle symbol projection effect is executed in the normal reach effect. The middle symbol projection effect is an effect that projections the middle row decorative pattern 41, which has the same number as the reach-eye decorative pattern 41, to stop. The 17th visual confirmation mode includes the first to third modes. In the 17th visual confirmation mode, the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode.
FIG. 59-5 (35) is a diagram showing the first mode of the 17th visual mode. The first mode of the 17th visual mode is a visual mode of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the first half of the middle pattern tilting performance. In the first mode of the 17th visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is the same number as the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye, is displayed in motion. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion so as to move from the upper side to the lower side. In addition, the moving speed of the middle row decorative pattern 41 is slower when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 17th visual mode than when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 10th visual mode (see FIG. 59-2 (13)). In addition, in the first mode of the 17th visual mode, an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed, such as the first effect image 550 of the double-digit tilting.

FIG. 59-5 (36) is a diagram showing the second mode of the 17th visual mode. The second mode of the 17th visual mode is the visual mode of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the latter half of the middle pattern tilting performance. In the second mode of the 17th visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion so as to swing up and down. In addition, in the second mode of the 17th visual mode, an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed, such as the double-digit tilting second effect image 551.
FIG. 59-5 (37) is a diagram showing the third mode of the 17th visual mode. The third mode of the 17th visual mode is a visual mode of the middle row decorative pattern 41 that stops with the same number as the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 after the middle pattern tilting performance. In the third mode of the 17th visual mode, an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed, such as the fifth effect image 552 at the time of stopping.
The above-mentioned first to seventeenth viewing modes are displays of the decorative pattern 41 when the decorative pattern 41 is in various viewing modes. Therefore, the first to seventeenth viewing modes can also be regarded as the first to seventeenth displays.

(Variation path of decorative pattern 41)
Next, the movement path of the decorative pattern 41 will be described.
In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 executes a variable performance using various variable paths for each column of the decorative pattern 41. The variable path is a path through which the decorative pattern 41 passes in the display area of the image display unit 114 when the decorative pattern 41 is variable.
60-1 and 60-2 are diagrams showing the fluctuation path.

Figure 60-1 (1) is a diagram showing the first variation path. The first variation path is a variation path used for the variation of the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 in the first stage (first presentation mode) and the third stage (third presentation mode), and for the variation of the decorative pattern 41 in the fourth stage (fourth presentation mode). In other words, the first variation path is a variation path when no reach performance is being performed or when a normal reach performance is being performed in the first stage, when a normal reach performance is being performed in the third stage, and when no reach performance is being performed in the fourth stage.

The first movement path includes a left first movement path LR1 which is the movement path of the left row decorative pattern 41, a middle first movement path CR1 which is the movement path of the middle row decorative pattern 41, and a right first movement path RR1 which is the movement path of the right row decorative pattern 41. The left first movement path LR1, the middle first movement path CR1, and the right first movement path RR1 are arranged in the left-right direction. In addition, the left first movement path LR1, the middle first movement path CR1, and the right first movement path RR1 all extend in the up-down direction of the image display unit 114. The three rows of decorative patterns 41 passing through the first movement path are all displayed as moving from the top to the bottom of the image display unit 114 in a common movement manner.
The decorative pattern 41 passes through the first variable path when it is displayed in any one of the third, fourth, fifth, ninth, tenth, and seventeenth viewing modes in the first stage. The middle row decorative pattern 41 passes through the first variable path when it is displayed in the tenth viewing mode in the third stage. The decorative pattern 41 passes through the first variable path when it is displayed in any one of the third, fourth, and fifth viewing modes in the fourth stage.

FIG. 60-1 (2) is a diagram showing the second variation path. The second variation path is a variation path when the SP reach performance is executed in the normal game state. The second variation path includes the middle second variation path CR2 which is a variation path of the middle row decorative pattern 41. The middle second variation path CR2 extends from the upper right corner to the lower left corner of the image display unit 114. The middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the SP reach performance so as to move from the upper right corner to the lower left corner of the image display unit 114 along the middle second variation path CR2.
The middle row decorative pattern 41 passes through the second variable path when displayed in the twelfth visual mode.

FIG. 60-1 (3) is a diagram showing the third variation path. The third variation path is a variation path when a development prompting performance is executed during a SP reach performance in a normal game state. The third variation path includes a middle third variation path CR3 which is a variation path of the middle row decorative pattern 41. The middle third variation path CR3 extends in a circular shape. The middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a rotational manner along the middle third variation path CR3 in the development prompting performance.
The middle row decorative pattern 41 passes through the third variation path when displayed in the thirteenth visual mode.

FIG. 60-1 (4) is a diagram showing the fourth variation path. The fourth variation path is a variation path used for the variation of the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 in the second stage (second performance mode). In other words, the fourth variation path is a variation path when the reach performance is not performed in the second stage or when the normal reach performance is performed. The fourth variation path includes a left fourth variation path LR4 which is a variation path of the left row decorative pattern 41, a middle fourth variation path CR4 which is a variation path of the middle row decorative pattern 41, and a right fourth variation path RR4 which is a variation path of the right row decorative pattern 41. The left fourth variation path LR4, the middle fourth variation path CR4, and the right fourth variation path RR4 are arranged in the left-right direction. In addition, the left fourth variation path LR4 and the right fourth variation path RR4 are provided extending in the left-right direction. The left row decorative pattern 41 passing through the left fourth variation path LR4 is displayed in such a manner that it moves from the center of the image display unit 114 to the left side in the left-right direction. In addition, the right row decorative pattern 41 passing through the right fourth change path RR4 is displayed so as to move from the center to the right side in the left-right direction of the image display unit 114. In addition, the middle row decorative pattern 41 passing through the middle fourth change path CR4 is displayed so as to rotate in the center of the image display unit 114.
The decorative pattern 41 passes through the fourth variation path when it is displayed in any one of the third viewing mode, the fourth viewing mode, the fifth viewing mode, the ninth viewing mode, the tenth viewing mode, and the seventeenth viewing mode in the second stage.

FIG. 60-1 (5) is a diagram showing the fifth variation path. The fifth variation path is a variation path used for the variation of the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 in the second stage. In other words, the fifth variation path is a variation path when a normal reach performance is executed in the second stage. The fifth variation path includes a middle fifth variation path CR5 which is a variation path of the middle row decorative pattern 41. The middle fifth variation path CR5 is provided so as to extend in the vertical direction in the display area of the image display unit 114. The middle row decorative pattern 41 passing through the middle fifth variation path CR5 is displayed in such a manner as to move from the bottom to the top in the image display unit 114.
The middle row decorative pattern 41 passes through the fifth variation path when it is displayed in the fourth viewing mode and the tenth viewing mode in the second stage.

FIG. 60-1 (6) is a diagram showing the sixth variation path. The sixth variation path is a variation path used for the variation of the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 in the third stage. In other words, the sixth variation path is a variation path when the reach performance is not executed in the third stage. The sixth variation path includes a left sixth variation path LR6 which is a variation path of the left row decorative pattern 41, a middle sixth variation path CR6 which is a variation path of the middle row decorative pattern 41, and a right sixth variation path RR6 which is a variation path of the right row decorative pattern 41. The left sixth variation path LR6, the middle sixth variation path CR6, and the right sixth variation path RR6 are all provided so as to extend vertically in the image display unit 114 and to incline to the right as they move downward. The three rows of decorative patterns 41 passing through the sixth variation path are all displayed in an operational manner so as to move to the right as they move downward in the image display unit 114.
The left and right decorative patterns 41 pass through the sixth variation path when they are displayed in any one of the third, fourth, fifth, and ninth viewing modes in the third stage. The middle decorative pattern 41 passes through the sixth variation path when they are displayed in any one of the third and fourth viewing modes in the third stage.

FIG. 60-1 (7) is a diagram showing the seventh variation path. The seventh variation path is a variation path used for the variation of the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 in the third stage. In other words, the seventh variation path is a variation path when the reach performance is not executed in the third stage. The seventh variation path includes the middle seventh variation path CR7, which is the variation path of the middle row decorative pattern 41. The middle seventh variation path CR7 is provided by extending upward through a curved surface extending in a counterclockwise direction. The middle row decorative pattern 41 passing through the middle seventh variation path CR7 is displayed in an action such that it rotates in a counterclockwise direction and then moves upward.
The middle row decorative pattern 41 passes through the seventh variation path when it is displayed in the fifth visual mode in the third stage.

FIG. 60-1 (8) is a diagram showing the eighth variation path. The eighth variation path is a variation path used for the variation of the middle row decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness in the second stage. In other words, the eighth variation path is a variation path when the SP reach performance is executed in the second stage. The eighth variation path includes the middle eighth variation path CR8, which is the variation path of the middle row decorative pattern 41. The middle eighth variation path CR8 extends from the lower right corner to the upper left corner in the image display unit 114. The middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the SP reach performance so as to move from the lower right corner to the upper left corner in the image display unit 114 along the middle eighth variation path CR8.
The middle row decorative pattern 41 passes through the eighth variable path when it is displayed in the twelfth visual mode in the second stage.

FIG. 60-2 (9) is a diagram showing the ninth variation path. The ninth variation path is a variation path used for the variation of the middle row decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness in the fourth stage. In other words, the ninth variation path is a variation path when the SP reach performance is executed in the fourth stage. The ninth variation path includes the middle ninth variation path CR9, which is the variation path of the middle row decorative pattern 41. The middle ninth variation path CR9 is provided so as to extend vertically in the image display unit 114 and to extend so as to incline to the right as it moves downward. The middle row decorative pattern 41 passing through the middle ninth variation path CR9 is displayed in an operational manner so as to move to the right as it moves downward in the image display unit 114.
The middle row decorative pattern 41 passes through the ninth variable path when it is displayed in the twelfth visual mode in the fourth stage.

As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of movement paths are used in each stage.
Here, in any stage (first stage to fourth stage), the number of types of variable paths used when the reach performance is not being executed (the number of types of variable paths of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows or the middle row decorative patterns 41) may be made different from the number of types of variable paths used when the reach performance is being executed (the number of types of variable paths of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows or the middle row decorative patterns 41). In this case, in any stage, the number of types of variable paths used when the reach performance is being executed (the number of types of variable paths of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows or the middle row decorative patterns 41) may be made greater than the number of types of variable paths used when the reach performance is not being executed (the number of types of variable paths of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows or the middle row decorative patterns 41). In addition, in any stage, the number of types of variable paths (the number of types of variable paths of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows or the middle row 41) used when the reach performance is being performed may be less than the number of types of variable paths (the number of types of variable paths of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows or the middle row 41) used when the reach performance is not being performed. In this case, the performance can be made more vivid according to the progress of the game in the variable performance.

In addition, while various change paths are used for the decorative symbols 41 depending on the stage and the progress of the change performance, a single change path is used for the small symbols 56. However, multiple change paths may also be used for the small symbols 56. As an example, different change paths for the small symbols 56 may be used in the normal game state and in the special time-saving game state.

(Example of variation 1)
Next, referring to Fig. 61 to Fig. 63, a variable presentation (variable presentation example 1) performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like will be specifically described. Variable presentation example 1 is a variable presentation example based on a game ball winning in the first start hole 121 in a normal game state. Also, variable presentation example 1 is a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach presentation is not executed, and is a variable presentation based on the number of reserved balls for winning in the first start hole 121 being "1".
The variable performances shown in Figures 61 to 63 are variable performances that are executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 55.
In addition, each of the change performance examples from change performance example 1 to change performance example 19 described later is a change performance example when the change starts in the first stage.

As shown in FIG. 61 (1), the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114 as the previous special pattern is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300. At this time, one reserved image 52, reserved number display 55, small pattern 56, and stage image 61 are displayed on the image display unit 114. In addition, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the first stage (first performance mode). The first stage is a performance mode in the normal game state. At this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first start port 121 indicates "1", which is the reserved number for winning the first start port 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 indicates "0", which is the reserved number for winning the second start port 122. The three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the first viewing mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (2), the change performance starts with the start of the change display of the special pattern. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the change image 51. Also, at this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second visual confirmation mode, and a first start operation, which is an operation when starting the change, is performed. When the first start operation is being executed, the decorative patterns 41 are displayed in an operation to move upward. Also, at this time, a start-time first effect image 501 is displayed above each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41. Also, the change of the small patterns 56 starts. In this embodiment, the left row decorative patterns 41, the middle row decorative patterns 41, the right row decorative patterns 41, and the small patterns 56 change by repeating the display of the numbers from "1" to "9". That is, in this embodiment, the numbers of the left row decorative patterns 41, the middle row decorative patterns 41, the right row decorative patterns 41, and the small patterns 56 can be changed individually. The left row decorative pattern 41, the middle row decorative pattern 41, the right row decorative pattern 41, and the small pattern 56 may display characters other than numbers, such as English letters. At this time, variable BGM, which is a performance sound corresponding to the variable performance being performed, is output from the speaker 156. Although not shown in the figures, in each variable performance example described below, the variable BGM continues to be output from the start to the end of the variable performance, except when otherwise described.

Next, as shown in Fig. 61 (3), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode, and perform a first varying operation, which is an operation when the symbols are varying. When the first varying operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in such a manner that they move downward along a first varying path (see Fig. 60-1 (1)).
Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (4), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first varying operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (5), the button operation performance is executed, and the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first button sound, which is a sound effect of the button operation image 502 being displayed, is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual recognition mode. Note that the effective operation period of the performance button 161 in the button operation performance accompanied by the output of the first button sound is the first period. The first period is, for example, 3 seconds.
If the effect button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period of the effect button 161 in the button operation effect, the button operation image 502 is hidden as shown in Fig. 61 (6). Note that no sound (non-display sound) is output in response to the button operation image 502 being hidden. Also, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 61 (7), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the first variable action.
Next, as shown in Figure 61 (8), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the first variable action.

Next, as shown in Fig. 62 (9), the left-row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode, and performs a first stop action, which is an action when the variation stops. When the first stop action is being performed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed as if it is bounding and moving upward. At this time, a first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left-row decorative pattern 41. At this time, a first stop sound, which is an effect sound indicating that the decorative pattern 41 has stopped, is output from the speaker 156.
Next, as shown in Fig. 62 (10), the right-row decorative pattern 41, "1", is displayed in the fifth visual state and performs the first variable action. At this time, the visual state of the left-row decorative pattern 41 becomes the seventh visual state and performs the first temporary stop action, which is the action when the pattern is temporarily stopped. When the first temporary stop action is being performed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed to move so as to swing left and right in the first cycle.
Next, as shown in Figure 62 (11), the right row decorative pattern 41 "1" passes, and the right row decorative pattern 41 "2" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the first variable action.

Next, as shown in Fig. 62 (12), the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop action. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 62 (13), the "9" which is the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode. At this time, the right row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (14), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "9" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "1" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (15), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the middle row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output. That is, the same sound effect is output when the left row decorative pattern 41 stops, when the right row decorative pattern 41 stops, and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops.
Next, as shown in Figure 62 (16), the visual appearance of the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes the seventh visual appearance, so that all three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual appearance and the first temporary stop operation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (17), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped (displayed in the first viewing mode) with the special symbols being displayed as stopped. This combination of decorative symbols 41, "412", is an example of a combination that occurs when the special symbol lottery result is a miss. Also, with the special symbols stopping to change, the three small symbols 56 are also fixed and stopped. In other words, in this changing performance, all of the small symbols 56 are fixed and stopped without being temporarily stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols 56, "412", matches the combination of decorative symbols 41. Also, with the end of the changing performance, the changing image 51 is erased (displayed).

Figure 64 is a diagram showing another presentation example in variable presentation example 1.
In the variation performance example 1, a performance example in which the performance button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation performance is described. In the following, a performance example in which the performance button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation performance is described.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 61 (1) to (4) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 64 (1), a button operation effect is executed and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first button sound is also output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect, the first operation image 504 is displayed as shown in Fig. 64 (2). At this time, a first operation sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the effect button 161 is operated, is output from the speaker 156.

64(3), the first operation image 504 is turned off, and the three rows of decorative symbols 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 61 (7) and (8), Figures 62 (9) to (16), and Figure 63 (17) are performed.

(Example of variation 2)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 2) of the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. 65. The variable performance example 2 is a variable performance example based on the game ball winning in the first start hole 121 in the normal game state. The variable performance example 2 is a variable performance executed when "ER5" is selected as the "variable performance" in FIG. 55. The variable performance example 2 is a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed, and is a variable performance based on the reserved number for the winning in the first start hole 121 being "1". In the following description, the differences from the above variable performance example 1 will be mainly described, and the explanation of the points that are the same as the variable performance example 1 may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 61 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 65 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 65 (2), a zone teasing effect is executed, and a zone teasing image 505 is displayed. At this time, the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth viewing mode and then in the sixth viewing mode (see Fig. 59-1 (6)), but the display of the left row decorative pattern 41 in the fifth viewing mode and the display in the sixth viewing mode are hidden by the zone teasing image 505, making it difficult or impossible to see. Also, when the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth viewing mode, the first stop sound is not output.

In the variation performance example 2, the zone performance is not performed after the zone promotion performance is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 65 (3), the zone promotion image 505 is not displayed. Also, at this time, the left column decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 62 (10) to (16) and Figure 63 (17) are performed.
In addition, when the zone teasing image 505 is displayed in the zone teasing performance, the left row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the seventh viewing mode without being displayed in the fifth viewing mode or the sixth viewing mode, and when the zone teasing image 505 becomes hidden, the left row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the seventh viewing mode.

(Example of variation 3)
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 3) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 66. The variable performance example 3 is a variable performance example of the decorative pattern 41 based on the game ball winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state. The variable performance example 3 is a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed, and is a variable performance based on the number of reserved balls for winning the first start hole 121 being "4".
In addition, Figure 66 is a variation performance that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 55. In addition, in the following explanation, the points that differ from each of the above-mentioned variation performance examples will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Fig. 66 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the determination of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 in the image display unit 114. In addition, four reserved images 52 are displayed, and "4" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 66(2), the variation effect starts with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. At this time, the three columns of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and perform a second start operation, which is an operation when starting the variation. When the second start operation is being performed, the three columns of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a motion that sways left and right. At this time, second start effect images 555 are displayed on the left and right sides of each of the three columns of decorative symbols 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual appearance and perform the first varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (4), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first varying operation.
Next, as shown in Fig. 66 (5), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fifth viewing mode and perform the first varying operation. The moving speed of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 at this time is faster than the moving speed of the decorative symbols 41 displayed in the fifth viewing mode in the variation performance example 1 and the variation performance example 2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (6), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the sixth viewing mode, and a second stop action, which is the action taken when the fluctuation stops, is performed. When the second stop action is being performed, the decorative patterns 41 are displayed as if they are temporarily stopped and then gradually moving upward. At this time, a second stop effect image 506 is displayed above each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41. At this time, a first stop sound is output from the speaker 156. That is, the same sound effect is output when the decorative patterns 41 stop in fluctuation performance example 1 and fluctuation performance example 2 and when the decorative patterns 41 stop in fluctuation performance example 3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (7), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop motion is performed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 66 (8).

As described above, in this embodiment, in the variation performance example 2, a stop sound is not output when the left column decorative pattern 41 stops. On the other hand, in the variation performance example 3, a stop sound is output when the left column decorative pattern 41 stops. That is, in this embodiment, the output of the stop sound is more likely to be executed when the pattern of a specific column (for example, the left column decorative pattern 41) stops in a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode) when the second variation performance is performed, which is a variation performance based on the reserved number for the first starting port being "4" and is a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is not executed, than when the first variation performance is performed, which is a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is not executed, based on the reserved number for the first starting port being "1".
In this embodiment, it has been described that the output of the stop sound may not be executed when the left row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode in the first variable performance, but this is not limited to this. The output of the stop sound may not be executed when the right row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode in the first variable performance, and the output of the stop sound may not be executed when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode in the first variable performance. That is, the pattern of the specific row may be the right row decorative pattern 41 or the middle row decorative pattern 41.

(Variation of Variation Example 3)
Next, a modified example of Variable Presentation Example 3 will be explained.
It has been explained that the sound effect output when the decorative pattern 41 stops is the same (both are the first stop sound) in the variable performance (variable performance example 1, variable performance example 2) in which the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121 is "1" and a reach performance is not executed, and the variable performance (variable performance example 3) in which the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121 is "4" and a reach performance is not executed, but this is not limited to the above.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 66 (1) to (4) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 67 (1), the three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 67(2), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the second stop operation. At this time, the second stop effect image 506 is displayed on the upper side of each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, the second stop sound, which is the sound effect of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 stopping, is output from the speaker 156. That is, a different sound effect is output from when the decorative symbols 41 stop in the variation performance example 1 and the variation performance example 2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(3), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop motion is performed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, ie, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 67(4).

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the stop sound different when the three rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in the first stop display mode (a mode in which the left row decorative patterns 41, the right row decorative patterns 41, and the middle row decorative patterns 41 temporarily stop in that order) and when they stop in the second stop display mode (a mode in which all three rows of decorative patterns 41 temporarily stop). This makes it easier for the player to recognize whether the decorative patterns 41 have stopped in the first stop display mode or the second stop display mode, making it easier for the player to experience the diverse performances.

In addition, in the variable performance of this embodiment, the variable performance shown in the modified example of variable performance example 3 may be provided instead of the variable performance shown in variable performance example 3, or the variable performance shown in the modified example of variable performance example 3 may be provided together with the variable performance shown in variable performance example 3.

(Example of variation 4)
68 to 70 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 4) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 68 to 70. The variable performance example 4 is a variable performance example in which a reach performance is executed based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state.
In addition, the variable performance example 4 is a variable performance that is executed when "ER6" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 55.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 68 (1), the performance control unit 300 stops the display of the previous special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 "213" are fixed. In addition, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121. In addition, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first viewing mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (2), the display of the special symbols begins, and the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second viewing mode, and the first start operation is performed. At this time, a first start effect image 501 is displayed above each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. The small symbols 56 also begin to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual appearance and perform the first varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68(4), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (5), the reel performance is executed, and the middle movable reel 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the upper part of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel first effect image 507 is displayed. Also, at this time, the first reel sound, which is the sound effect of the reel performance, is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in Fig. 68(6), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, a first step sound, which is a sound effect of the first step performance, is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 68 (7), the second stage step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a second step sound, which is a sound effect of the second stage step performance, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (8), the left row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (9), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 69 (10), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (11), the right row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (12), the right row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the right row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 69 (13), the right-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the first stopping action. As a result, the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 stop with the same numbers, resulting in a reach state. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right-row decorative symbols 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 69 (14), the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the eighth visual mode, and a first reach action is performed, which is the action of the decorative symbols 41 when a reach is achieved (when the reach performance starts). When the first reach action is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed as if they are raising their right hand. At this time, a first reach line image 509 and a first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, a first reach sound, which is a sound effect indicating that a reach has been achieved, is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (15), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first provisional stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 69 (16), the pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed to move downward. This pseudo consecutive image 511 passes through the middle first variation path CR1, which is the same variation path as the middle row decorative pattern 41.
70(17), the pseudo-continuous image 511 is displayed so as to swing up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, a pseudo-continuous image tilting effect image 512 is displayed around the pseudo-continuous image 511.

In the variation performance example 4, the pseudo consecutive performance is not performed after the pseudo consecutive fanning performance is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70 (18), after the pseudo consecutive image 511 passes, the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual recognition mode, and the first variation operation is performed. This middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a larger size than the decorative patterns 41 of the left and right rows.
Next, as shown in Fig. 70 (19), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the middle row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the first stop sound is output. At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size so as to be the same display size as the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (20), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop motion is performed.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 70 (21).

(Example of variation 5)
71 to 74 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 5) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 71 to 74. The variable performance example 5 is a variable performance based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach performance is executed.
The variation performances shown in Figures 71 to 74 are variation performances that are executed when "ER7" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 55. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 61 (1) to (3) is executed, and then, as shown in Figure 71 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 71 (2), the reel performance is executed, and the left movable reel 115A moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel second effect image 513 is displayed around the left movable reel 115A. Also, at this time, the second reel sound, which is the sound effect of the reel performance, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (3), the left row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (4), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 71 (5), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the first stop sound is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in Fig. 71 (6), the right row decorative symbol 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth visual mode. At this time, the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (7), the right row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the right row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 71 (8), the right-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the first stopping action. As a result, the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 stop with the same numbers, resulting in a reach state. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right-row decorative symbols 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 72 (9), the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the first reach action is performed. At this time, the first reach line image 509 and the first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, the first reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (10), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first provisional stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (11), a pseudo consecutive win promotion effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive win image 511 is displayed so as to move downward.
72(12), the pseudo-continuous image 511 is displayed so as to swing up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, a pseudo-continuous fanning effect image 512 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 72 (13), the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. Also, at this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound, which is a sound effect when the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops, is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 72 (14), the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. However, even when the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner, the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and the first temporary stop motion may be continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (15), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "434", are displayed in the seventh viewing mode, and the first temporary stop operation is being performed. Also at this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x2", indicating that the decorative pattern 41 will change for the second time. Also at this time, a first re-change sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the decorative pattern 41 will change again, is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 72 (16), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the re-changing notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and its display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (17), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 73 (18), the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the first variable action.
Next, as shown in Fig. 73 (19), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop action. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 73 (20), the right row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 73 (21), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, and the first stop action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 73 (22), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the first reach action is performed. At this time, the first reach line image 509 and the first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, the first reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (23), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and the first provisional stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in Figure 73 (24), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (25), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (26), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (27), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the middle row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the first stop sound is output. That is, the same sound effect (stop sound) is output when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops.
Next, as shown in Fig. 74 (28), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and the first temporary stop motion is performed. At this time, the display size of the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in such a manner that it is reduced to the same display size as the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, ie, "454", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 74 (29).

(Example of variation 6)
75 to 77 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 6) of the variable performance of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to Figures 75 to 77. The variable performance example 6 is a variable performance based on the winning of the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the SP reach performance is executed.
The variable performances shown in Figures 75 to 77 are variable performances that are executed when "ER8" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 55.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 71 (1) to (8), Figures 72 (9) to (16), and Figures 73 (17) to (24) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 75 (1), the middle row decorative pattern 41, "4," is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode, and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 75(2), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode (see FIG. 59-2(14)).
Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Fig. 75(4), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode (see Fig. 59-2(15)). At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed in place of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in Fig. 75 (5), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode (see Fig. 59-2 (16)), and a second temporary stop motion, which is the motion when the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, is performed. When the second temporary stop motion is being performed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed so as to rotate in a second cycle.
In addition, when the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first and second modes of the eleventh visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(6), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 75 (7), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Fig. 59-3 (17)) and performs a second varying operation, which is an operation when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is being displayed and varying. When the second varying operation is being performed, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in such a manner that it moves from the upper right corner to the lower left corner of the image display unit 114 along the second varying path (see Fig. 60-1 (2)).
Next, as shown in Figure 75 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode (see Figure 59-3 (18)) and performs a second variable operation.

Next, as shown in Fig. 76(9), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Fig. 59-3(19)). At this time, the SP promotion first effect image 518 is displayed on the upper right and lower left sides of the middle row decorative pattern 41 on the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in Figure 76 (10), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode and performs the second variable operation.

76(11), the middle row decorative symbol 41 "4" is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the SP promotion second effect image 519 is displayed on the upper right and lower left sides of the middle row decorative symbol 41 on the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in Fig. 76 (12), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fourth mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Fig. 59-3 (20)). In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in such a way that it returns to the upper right side of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (13), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth mode of the twelfth visual mode (see FIG. 59-3 (21)), and the first temporary stopping operation is performed. At this time, a third stopping sound, which is the sound effect of the middle row decorative pattern 41 stopping, is output. In other words, different sound effects (stopping sounds) are output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops. Furthermore, when the third stopping sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 76 (14), the switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. At this time, a switching display sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the switching image 520 is displayed, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (15), a part of the switching image 520 becomes invisible. More specifically, the switching image 520 is displayed so as to move to the right side of the image display unit 114, and a part of the switching image 520 becomes invisible. At this time, a part of the stage image 61 is redisplayed. Meanwhile, at this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 maintain a state in which they are difficult to see or cannot be seen. At this time, a switching non-display sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the switching image 520 becomes invisible, is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 76 (16), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three highly decorative decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) of the highly decorative decorative patterns 41 stopping is not output. Also, as described above, the variable BGM is not output at this time, so there is no sound.
Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (17), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "434", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of change performance 7)
78 and 79 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 7) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 78 and 79. The variable performance example 7 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SP reach performance is executed.
The variable performances shown in Figures 78 and 79 are variable performances that are executed when "ER9" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 55.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 71(1) to (8), 72(9) to (16), 73(17) to (24), and 75(1) to (5) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 78(1), the SP reach effect starts and the SP reach image 517 is displayed. At this time, the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the 11th visual mode and performs the second temporary stop operation, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 is not displayed (difficult to see or cannot be seen).
Next, as shown in FIG. 78(2), the development teasing performance is started, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth viewing mode (see FIG. 59-3(23)), and performs a third changing operation, which is an operation when changing. When the third changing operation is performed, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in such a manner that it replaces the display position of the development image 521 along the third changing path (see FIG. 60-1(3)). In the illustrated example, the "5" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a layer behind the development image 521 in the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in Fig. 78 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see Fig. 59-3 (24)). At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a layer in front of the developed image 521 in the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 78(4), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see FIG. 59-4(25)).
Next, as shown in Fig. 78(5), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode (see Fig. 59-4(26)). At this time, the developed image 521 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 78 (6), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see Fig. 59-4 (27)), and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a fourth stop sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the middle row decorative pattern 41 has temporarily stopped. In addition, when the fourth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 78 (7), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. At this time, a switching indication sound is output.
78(8), a part of the switching image 520 becomes non-displayed and a part of the stage image 61 is re-displayed. At this time, a switching non-display sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 79 (9), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and the highly decorative three-row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) of the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 stopping is not output, but is silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (10), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "454", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 8)
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 8) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 80. The variable performance example 8 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed.
The change presentation shown in FIG. 80 is executed when "ER4" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in FIG.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 61 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 80 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 80(2), the reach-inducing performance is started, and the left and right decorative symbols 41 of "7" are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode (see Fig. 59-2(9)) and perform the first varying action. At this time, the reach-inducing first effect image 522 is displayed below each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in Fig. 80(3), the left and right decorative symbols 41, "7", are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode (see Fig. 59-2(10)). At this time, the second reach-inducing effect images 523 are displayed above and below each of the left and right decorative symbols 41, respectively.
Next, as shown in Fig. 80(4), the right row decorative pattern 41 and the middle row decorative pattern 41 are displayed in the third mode of the ninth visual recognition mode (see Fig. 59-2(11)). At this time, the left row decorative pattern 41 performs the first temporary stop motion.

Next, as shown in Fig. 80 (5), the right row decorative symbols 41 and the middle row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below each of the right row decorative symbols 41 and the middle row decorative symbols 41. At this time, the first stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 80(6), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 80(7), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "718", are fixed and stopped.

In addition, in variable performance example 8, after the performance shown in FIG. 80(4) is executed, the performance shown in FIG. 80(6) may be executed without executing the performance shown in FIG. 80(5). In other words, if the reach performance is not executed after the reach teasing performance is executed, the display of the decorative pattern 41 in the sixth visual mode and the output of the first stop sound may not be performed.

(Example of variation 9)
FIG. 81 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. As shown in FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 9) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 81. The variable performance example 9 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SP reach performance is executed.
It should be noted that this is a variable performance that is executed when "ER10" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in the variable performance diagram 55 shown in Figure 81.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 61 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 81 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 81 (2), the reach-inducing performance is started, and the "4" decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the reach-inducing first effect image 522 is displayed below each of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows.

81(3), the left and right decorative symbols 41 of "4" are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the second reach-inducing effect images 523 are displayed above and below each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (4), the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode (see FIG. 59-2 (12)), and a third stop motion, which is a motion when the fluctuation stops, is performed. When the third stop motion is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in an enlarged manner, respectively. The third stop motion can also be regarded as a second reach motion, which is a motion of the decorative symbols 41 when a reach is established (when the reach performance starts). At this time, a third effect image 524 at the time of stopping is displayed so as to surround each of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows. At this time, a second reach sound, which is a sound effect indicating that a reach is established, is output. The second reach sound can also be regarded as a fifth stop sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the decorative symbols 41 have stopped.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 75 (1) to (8), 76 (9) to (16), and 77 (17) are performed.

(Example of variation 10)
82 to 86 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 10) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 82 to 86. The variable performance example 10 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SPSP reach performance is executed.
82 to 86 are variation effects that are executed when "ER11" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Fig. 55. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 82(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the determination of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue. The display mode of blue of this reserved image 52 may be the display mode at the start of display, or may be a result of a change in the display mode in the variation performance executed while this reserved image 52 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 82(2), with the start of the change display of the next special pattern, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and a third start operation, which is an operation when the change starts, is performed. When the third start operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, a third effect image 525 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41. The first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the change image 51, and the change image 51 is displayed in blue. At this time, a first start sound, which is an effect sound for starting the change, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the first varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 82(4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 82(5), the reel performance is executed, and the right movable reel 115C moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel third effect image 526 is displayed around the right movable reel 115C on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the third reel sound, which is the sound effect of the reel performance, is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 82 (6), the role production ends and the role third effect image 526 is hidden. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.

Next, as shown in Fig. 82 (7), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, the first step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 82(8), the second step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a second step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 83(9), the third stage step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, a third step sound, which is a sound effect for the third stage step performance, is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 83 (10), the step image 508 is turned off. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 83 (11), a button operation effect is started, and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the first period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect, a second image 527 is displayed at the time of operation as shown in Fig. 83 (12). At this time, a second operation sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the effect button 161 has been operated, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (13), the zone promotion effect is started, and the zone promotion image 505 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 83 (14), the zone performance is started, and a zone notification image 528 is displayed. At this time, a zone effect image 529 is displayed around the zone notification image 528. Also, at this time, a zone start sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the zone performance has started.
Next, as shown in Fig. 83 (15), a zone execution image 530 is displayed. At this time, the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual recognition mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 83 (16), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (17), the right row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 84 (18), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, and the first stop action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (19), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and a third reach action is performed, which is the action of the decorative symbol 41 when the reach is established (when the reach performance starts). When the third reach action is being performed, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed as if both hands are raised. In addition, the third reach action has a higher expectation than the first reach action. At this time, a second reach line image 531 and a second reach notification image 532 are displayed. In addition, at this time, a third reach sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the reach has been established, is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 84 (20), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. Also, at this time, the first change sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the display mode of the variable image 51 has changed, is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 84 (21), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 84 (22), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 84 (23), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 84 (24), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (25), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (26), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (27), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (28), an effect is executed in which the "4" decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye changes to a "3". At this time, the "3" decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye performs a pattern change action, which is the action taken when the pattern changes. When the pattern change action is being executed, each of the decorative patterns 41 of the reach eye is displayed as if it is swaying from side to side. Also, at this time, a change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the decorative patterns 41 of the reach eye. Also, at this time, a pattern change sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the number of the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye has changed, is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 85 (29), the development teasing performance starts, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the "4" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (30), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (31), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (32), the development image 521 stops, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 is hidden. At this time, the development effect image 534 is displayed around the development image 521. At this time, a development stop sound, which is a sound effect when the development image 521 stops, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (33), the development performance is executed. At this time, the role performance is executed, and the middle movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the middle movable role 115B has moved lower than the position shown in FIG. 68 (5). At this time, the role fourth effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the fourth role sound, which is the sound effect of the role performance, is output. The fourth role sound can also be regarded as the sound effect of the development performance.
Next, as shown in Fig. 86 (34), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourteenth visual mode (see Fig. 59-4 (29)). At this time, the SPSP reach effect is started, and the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (35), the button operation performance starts, and the button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Press!", which prompts the user to operate the performance button 161. At this time, the performance button 161 emits white light. At this time, a second button sound, which is a sound effect of the button operation performance, is output. The effective operation period of the performance button 161 in the button operation performance accompanied by the output of the second button sound is the second period. The second period is, for example, five seconds.
Then, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 86 (36), "343", which is three rows of decorative patterns 41, is displayed in the fifteenth visual mode (see FIG. 59-4 (30)). At this time, a sixth stop sound, which is a sound effect when the decorative patterns 41 stop, is output. Also, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 86 (37), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. At this time, a switching indication sound is output.
86(38), a part of the switching image 520 becomes non-displayed and a part of the stage image 61 is re-displayed. At this time, a non-display switching sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 86 (39), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three rows of highly decorative decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) of the highly decorative decorative patterns 41 stopping is not output, and the display becomes silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (40), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "343", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 11)
87 to 92 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 11) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 87 to 92. The variable performance example 11 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SPSP reach performance is executed.
The variation performances shown in Figures 87 to 92 are variation performances that are executed when "ER12" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 55. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 82 (1) to (5) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 87 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.
87(2), a button operation effect is started, and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the first period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation effective period in the button operation effect, the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops as shown in Fig. 87 (3). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become invisible (difficult to see or invisible). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(4), the pseudo-continuous image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 87(5), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x2", which indicates that the second change of the decorative symbols 41 will be performed. At this time, a first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 87 (6), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual recognition mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the re-changing notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and its display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 87(7), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 87 (8), the pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed so as to move downward. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are not displayed (hard to see or cannot be seen).
88(9), the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed so as to swing up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, a pseudo consecutive fanning effect image 512 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 88 (10), the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. Also, at this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output. That is, the same sound effect is output when the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops for the first time (see Fig. 87 (3)) and the second time.
Next, as shown in FIG. 88(11), the pseudo-continuous image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (12), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh viewing mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 displays the text "x3", indicating that the decorative pattern 41 will change for the third time. At this time, a second re-change sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the decorative pattern 41 will change again, is output. That is, in the change performance example 11, the sound effect (change start sound) is different when the decorative pattern 41 starts to change for the first time (see FIG. 82 (2)), when the decorative pattern 41 starts to change for the second time (see FIG. 87 (5)), and when the decorative pattern 41 starts to change for the third time.

Next, as shown in Fig. 88 (13), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the re-changing notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and its display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (14), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Fig. 88 (15), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, the first step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 88 (16), the second step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a second step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 89 (17), the third step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, the third step sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 89 (18), the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 89 (19), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 89 (20), the right row decorative symbol 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode. At this time, the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion.
Next, as shown in Fig. 89 (21), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, and the first stop action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right-row decorative symbol 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 89 (22), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the third reach action is performed. At this time, the second reach line image 531 and the second reach notification image 532 are displayed. Also, at this time, the third reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 89 (23), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to green. Also, at this time, a second change sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the display mode of the variable image 51 has changed, is output. That is, the sound effect (change sound) is different when the display mode of the variable image 51 changes to red (see Fig. 84 (20)) and when it changes to green.

Next, as shown in Figure 89 (24), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (25), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 90 (26), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 90 (27), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (28), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (29), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (30), the SP reach effect starts, and an SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 90 (31), an effect is executed in which the "4" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye changes to a "3". At this time, the "3" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye performs a symbol changing action. Also, at this time, a change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the decorative symbols 41 of the reach eye. Also, at this time, a symbol changing sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 90 (32), the development teasing performance starts, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the "4" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (33), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (34), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (35), the development image 521 stops, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 is hidden. At this time, the development effect image 534 is displayed around the development image 521. At this time, a development stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (36), the development performance is executed. At this time, the role performance is executed, and the middle movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 4 effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the 4th role sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 91 (37), the SPSP reach effect starts, and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourteenth visual recognition mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (38), the button operation effect is started, and the button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Press!", which prompts the user to operate the effect button 161. At this time, the effect button 161 emits white light. At this time, the second button sound is output. The effective operation period of this button operation effect is the second period.
Then, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation effective period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 91 (39), "343", which is three rows of decorative patterns 41, is displayed in the fifteenth visual mode. At this time, the sixth stop sound is output. Also, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 91 (40), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. At this time, a switching indication sound is output.
92(41), a part of the switching image 520 becomes non-displayed and a part of the stage image 61 is re-displayed. At this time, a switching non-display sound is output.
92 (42), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and the highly decorative three-row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect of the highly decorative pattern 41 stopping is not output, and the display becomes silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (43), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "343", are fixed and stopped.

As described above, in this embodiment, as shown in Variable Performance Example 5 (see Figs. 71 to 74), the performance control unit 300 can output a specific sound (stop sound) different from the predetermined sound (variable BGM) when the symbols in a specific row (middle row decorative symbols 41) stop in a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode) in the first specific variable performance (a losing variable performance in which a normal reach performance is performed and a SP reach performance is not performed). On the other hand, as shown in Variable Performance Example 10 (see Figs. 82 to 86) and Variable Performance Example 11 (see Figs. 87 to 92), the performance control unit 300 can not output a specific sound when the symbols in a specific row stop in a specific display mode in the second specific variable performance (a losing variable performance in which a SP reach performance is performed).
In this case, the stopping of the symbols in the specific row when the specific sound is output is likely to attract the player's attention, and the ease with which the stopping of the symbols in the specific row in the specific display mode is noticed can be varied according to the variable performance executed, thereby realizing various variable performances with different meanings of the stopping of the symbols in the specific display mode of the specific row. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the second specific variable performance is executed, the losing decorative pattern 41 including the pattern in the specific row stops in a special display mode (a display mode with low decorativeness) different from the specific display mode (see FIG. 86 (36)), and then stops in the specific display mode. Here, if the losing decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the special display mode and then excessively emphasized when the specific display mode is displayed, there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease due to the repeated emphasis of the losing decorative pattern 41. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the losing decorative pattern 41 stops in the specific display mode, the emphasis of the losing decorative pattern 41 is suppressed, thereby preventing the player's interest from decreasing.

In addition, in this embodiment, even in the second specific variation performance, when the symbols in the specific row stop in a special display mode (a display mode with low decorativeness) different from the specific display mode, a specific sound (see FIG. 86 (36)) can be output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing the stop of the decorative symbols 41.
In the second specific variable presentation, a specific sound can be output when a specific row of symbols (e.g., the decorative symbol 41 in the left row) stops in a specific display mode (see FIG. 83 (16)), but no specific sound is output when the specific row of symbols stops in a special display mode (see FIG. 85 (25), (26)). Therefore, when the specific row of symbols is in a special display mode, it is possible to prevent the player from paying excessive attention to the specific row of symbols, and to make it easier for the player to pay attention to a presentation image different from the specific row of symbols.
In the first specific variable performance, it is possible to make the specific sound output when the symbols in the predetermined row stop in a specific display mode (see FIG. 73 (19)) and when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode (see FIG. 74 (27)). In the second specific variable performance, it is possible to make the specific sound output when the symbols in the predetermined row stop in a specific display mode and when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode (see FIG. 86 (36)). As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of variable performances with diversity in the relationship between the stopping sound of the symbols in the predetermined row and the stopping sound of the symbols in the specific row.
In addition, when the first specific variable performance is executed, both the predetermined sound and the specific sound can be output when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode. On the other hand, when the second specific variable performance is executed, it is possible to output neither the predetermined sound nor the specific sound (no sound) when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode. Therefore, various variable performances can be realized, such as a variable performance in which multiple performance sounds are combined, or a variable performance that has a period that does not incite the player depending on the progress of the game.

In this embodiment, the specific sounds (stop sounds) include a first specific sound (such as a first stop sound) that can be output when a specific row of symbols (middle row decorative symbol 41) stops in a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode), and a second specific sound (such as a pseudo consecutive stop sound) that can be output when a special symbol (such as pseudo consecutive image 511) stops. In one miss variation performance, the output of the first specific sound when a specific row of symbols stops in a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode) is more likely to be executed when no reach performance is performed than when a special symbol stops.
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the special symbol stops, the impression of the special symbol stopping can be strengthened to the extent that it is made less emphasizing that the symbols in a specific row have stopped in a specific display mode, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in one miss variation performance, the fact that the first specific sound is more likely to be output when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) when a reach performance is not performed than when a special pattern stops includes the fact that when a special pattern stops, the first specific sound is not always output when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode (0%), and that when a reach performance is not performed, the first specific sound is always output when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode (100%).
Furthermore, if in one miss variation performance, the output of the first specific sound is more likely to be executed when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) when a reach performance is not performed than when a special pattern stops, the output of the first specific sound may be executed when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode when a special pattern stops, or the output of the first specific sound may not be executed when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode when a reach performance is not performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the output of the first specific sound (such as the first stop sound) when the symbols in the specific row stop is more likely to be executed when the third specific variation performance (a losing variation performance in which the pseudo consecutive performance is not performed) is executed than when the first specific variation performance (a losing variation performance in which the pseudo consecutive performance is stopped) is executed. Therefore, in the first specific variation performance, the impression of the pseudo consecutive image 511 stopping can be strengthened to the extent that it is more difficult to emphasize that the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode than in the third specific variation performance.
The fact that the first specific sound is more likely to be output when the symbols in the specific row stop when the third specific variation performance is executed than when the first specific variation performance is executed includes the fact that the first specific sound is not always output when the symbols in the specific row stop when the first specific variation performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the first specific sound is always output when the symbols in the specific row stop when the third specific variation performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, if it is easier to output the first specific sound when the patterns in the specific row stop when the third specific change performance is executed than when the first specific change performance is executed, the first specific sound may be output when the patterns in the specific row stop when the first specific change performance is executed, and the first specific sound may not be output when the patterns in the specific row stop when the third specific change performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, even when the first specific change performance is executed, the first specific sound may be output when the specific row of symbols stops (see FIG. 74 (27)). On the other hand, in the miss change performance (fourth specific change performance) in which a specific performance (display of the change image 51 or the reserved image 52 in red, execution of multiple pseudo consecutive performances in one change performance, zone performance, development performance, etc.) is performed, the output of the first specific sound when the specific row of symbols stops is not executed (0%). That is, in this embodiment, the output of the first specific sound when the specific row of symbols stops is more likely to be executed when the first specific change performance is executed than when the fourth specific change performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to realize an unexpected performance in which the first specific sound is output even in the first specific change performance.
In addition, the fact that the first specific sound is more likely to be output when the patterns in the specific row stop when the first specific change performance is executed than when the fourth specific change performance is executed includes the fact that the first specific sound is not always output (0%) when the fourth specific change performance is executed, and the fact that the first specific sound is always output (100%) when the first specific change performance is executed.
Furthermore, if the first specific sound is more likely to be output when the patterns in the specific row stop when the first specific change performance is executed than when the fourth specific change performance is executed, the first specific sound may be output when the fourth specific change performance is executed, or the first specific sound may not be output when the first specific change performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the fourth specific variation presentation, the first specific sound is output when a specific row of symbols (e.g., the decorative symbol 41 in the left row) stops in a specific display mode. This prevents the player from noticing that the decorative symbol 41 has stopped.

In addition, when the first or fourth specific variation performance is executed, it is easier to output a specific sound (such as the sixth stop sound (see FIG. 86 (36))) when the symbols in the specific row stop in a special display mode (a display mode with low decorativeness) than when the second specific variation performance (a miss variation performance in which no reach performance is executed) is executed. Therefore, in the first or fourth specific variation performance, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the symbols in the specific row have stopped.
In addition, the fact that the output of a specific sound when the patterns in a specific column stop in a special display mode is more likely when the first specific change performance or the fourth specific change performance is executed than when the second specific change performance is executed includes the fact that the output of a specific sound when the patterns in a specific column stop in a special display mode is not always executed (0%) when the second specific change performance is executed, and the fact that the output of a specific sound when the patterns in a specific column stop in a special display mode is always executed (100%) when the first specific change performance or the fourth specific change performance is executed.
In addition, if it is easier to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific column stop in a special display mode when the first specific change performance or the fourth specific change performance is executed than when the second specific change performance is executed, the output of a specific sound may be executed when the patterns in a specific column stop in a special display mode when the second specific change performance is executed, or the output of a specific sound may not be executed when the patterns in a specific column stop in a special display mode when the first specific change performance or the fourth specific change performance is executed.

In addition, when the first or fourth specific variation performance is executed, the special sound (start sound) is more likely to be output when the variation performance starts than when the second specific variation performance is executed. In this case, the first or fourth specific variation performance can increase the interest in the game from the start of the variation performance.
In addition, the fact that the special sound is more likely to be output when the variation performance starts when the first specific variation performance or the fourth specific variation performance is executed than when the second specific variation performance is executed includes the fact that the special sound is not always output when the second specific variation performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the special sound is always output when the first specific variation performance or the fourth specific variation performance is executed (100%).
In addition, if it is easier to output a special sound when the variation performance starts when the first specific variation performance or the fourth specific variation performance is executed than when the second specific variation performance is executed, the special sound may be output when the second specific variation performance is executed, or the special sound may not be output when the first specific variation performance or the fourth specific variation performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the start sound (first re-fluctuating sound (see FIG. 87 (5))) output when the pseudo-continuous image 511 re-fluctuates after the first stop is different from the start sound (second re-fluctuating sound (see FIG. 88 (12))) output when the pseudo-continuous image 511 re-fluctuates after the second stop. This makes it easier for the player to recognize which re-fluctuating has occurred.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable presentation in which a reach presentation is executed is performed, it is less likely that a stopping sound will be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (see Figure 86 (39)) than when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) (see Figure 83 (16)).
In addition, when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the output of a stop sound is more difficult when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop in a specific display mode, which includes the fact that when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the output of a stop sound is always executed (100%) when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop in a specific display mode, and the fact that when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the output of a stop sound is never executed (0%) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode.
In addition, if it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode when a variable performance in which a reach performance is performed is performed, then it is acceptable that a stopping sound is not output when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode when a variable performance in which a reach performance is performed is performed, and it is acceptable that a stopping sound is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when a variable performance in which a reach performance is performed is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed.
In addition, the fact that it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed than when a variable performance in which a reach performance is not executed is performed includes the fact that when a variable performance in which a reach performance is not executed is performed, the stopping sound is always output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (100%), and that when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the stopping sound is always not output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (0%).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in one miss variation performance, when the reach performance is not executed, it is more likely that a specific sound will be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the SP reach performance is executed.
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the SP reach presentation is executed, the impression that the SP reach presentation is being executed can be strengthened by making it difficult to emphasize that the middle row decorative pattern 41 has stopped in a specific display mode, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in one miss variation performance, the output of a specific sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is more likely to be performed when the reach performance is not executed than when the SP reach performance is executed, including the fact that the output of a specific sound is never executed (0%) when the SP reach performance is executed, and the fact that the output of a specific sound is always executed (100%) when the reach performance is not executed.
Furthermore, if, in one miss variation performance, it is easier to output a specific sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when the reach performance is not executed than when the SP reach performance is executed, then the specific sound may be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when the SP reach performance is executed, or the specific sound may not be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when the reach performance is not executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a third specific variable presentation in which an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is executed is performed, a specific sound (stop sound) is more likely to be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode (see FIG. 86 (36)) than when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a special display mode (highly decorative display mode) (see FIG. 85 (25), (26)). Therefore, when the decorative patterns 41 stop in a special display mode, it is possible to make it easier for a player to notice the stopping of the middle row decorative pattern 41 than the stopping of the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41.
In addition, when the third specific variable performance is performed, the specific sound is more likely to be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode than when the left and right rows decorative patterns 41 stop in a special display mode, which includes the fact that when the third specific variable performance is performed, the specific sound is not always output (0%) when the left and right rows decorative patterns 41 stop in a special display mode, and the fact that when the third specific variable performance is performed, the specific sound is always output (100%) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode.
In addition, if a specific sound is more likely to be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode when the third specific variation performance is performed than when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a special display mode when the third specific variation performance is performed, the specific sound may be output when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a special display mode when the third specific variation performance is performed, or the specific sound may not be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode when the third specific variation performance is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display on the image display unit 114 the identification information (variable image 51, reserved image 52, etc.) corresponding to the judgment information (random number value) judged by the special symbol judgment unit 234 or the judgment information not yet executed. In addition, there is a first stop performance (for example, the performance shown in FIG. 62 (15)) that outputs a specific sound (stop sound) different from a predetermined sound (variable BGM) when a specific row of symbols (for example, the middle row decorative symbol 41) stops in a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode), and a second stop performance (for example, the performance shown in FIG. 86 (39)) that does not output a specific sound when a specific row of symbols stops in a specific display mode. In one variation performance, a change performance (performance shown in FIG. 84 (20)) that changes the display mode of the identification information to a specific mode (for example, red) is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed.
In this case, in a variable presentation in which a change effect is executed, since it is difficult to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, the player can be more impressed with the execution of the change effect than with the fact that the patterns have stopped, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in one variation performance, the fact that a change performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that the change performance will not be executed when the first stop performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the change performance will be executed when the second stop performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, in one variation performance, if a change performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, the change performance may be executed when the first stop performance is executed, and the change performance may not be executed when the second stop performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in one variable performance, the second stage (e.g., the third stage (see Figure 83 (9))) of the stage performance (step performance) is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed.
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the second stage of the stage presentation is executed, since it is difficult to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, the player can be more impressed with the fact that the second stage of the stage presentation has been executed than with the fact that the patterns have stopped, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, the second stage of the stage presentation may be any stage that can be executed after the first stage of the stage presentation.
In addition, in one variable performance, the fact that the second stage of the stage performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that the second stage of the stage performance is never executed (0%) when the first stop performance is executed, and the fact that the second stage of the stage performance is always executed (100%) when the second stop performance is executed.
Furthermore, if in one variable performance, the second stage of the staged performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, the second stage of the staged performance may be executed when the first stop performance is executed, or the second stage of the staged performance may not be executed when the second stop performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in one variation performance, when the second stop performance is executed (for example, when variation performance example 10 is executed), it is easier to execute a change performance (see Figures 84 (24), 85 (25), and (26)) that changes the display position of the temporarily stopped pattern in the image display unit 114 than when the first stop performance is executed (for example, when variation performance example 1 is executed).
In this case, in a variable presentation in which a change effect is executed, since it is difficult to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, the player can be more impressed with the execution of the change effect than with the fact that the patterns have stopped, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in one of the above-mentioned change performances, the fact that the change performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that the change performance will not be executed when the first stop performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the change performance will be executed when the second stop performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, in one of the above-mentioned change performances, if the change performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, the change performance may be executed when the first stop performance is executed, and the change performance may not be executed when the second stop performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in one variation performance, when the second stop performance is executed (for example, when a modified example of variation performance example 10 is executed) than when the first stop performance is executed (for example, when variation performance example 4 is executed), a change performance (see Figures 85 (27) and (28)) in which the characters of the stopped pattern in the reach performance are changed is more likely to be executed.
In this case, in a variable presentation in which a change effect is executed, since it is difficult to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, the player can be more impressed with the execution of the change effect than with the fact that the patterns have stopped, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in one variation performance, the fact that a change performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that the change performance will not be executed when the first stop performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the change performance will be executed when the second stop performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, in one variation performance, if a change performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, the change performance may be executed when the first stop performance is executed, and the change performance may not be executed when the second stop performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the button operation presentation includes a first operation presentation (the button operation presentation shown in FIG. 61 (5)) in which the operation valid period is a first period (e.g., 3 seconds), and a second operation presentation (the button operation presentation shown in FIG. 86 (35)) in which the operation valid period is a second period (e.g., 5 seconds) different from the first period. In one variation presentation, the second operation presentation is more likely to be executed when the second stop presentation is executed (e.g., when variation presentation example 10 is executed) than when the first stop presentation is executed (e.g., when variation presentation example 1 is executed).
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the second operation presentation is executed, since it is difficult to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, the player can be more impressed with the execution of the second operation presentation than with the fact that the patterns have stopped, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in one variable performance, the fact that the second operation performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that the second operation performance is never executed (0%) when the first stop performance is executed, and the fact that the second operation performance is always executed (100%) when the second stop performance is executed.
Furthermore, if, in one variable performance, the second operation performance is easier to execute when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, the second operation performance may be executed when the first stop performance is executed, or the second operation performance may not be executed when the second stop performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the action presentation (game presentation) that operates the presentation body (e.g., movable game piece 115) includes a first action presentation (the game presentation of "CH2" (see FIG. 55) shown in FIG. 68 (5)) and a second action presentation (the game presentation of "CH4" shown in FIG. 86 (33)) that has a higher expectation of a special game (jackpot game) being executed than the first action presentation. In one variable presentation, the second action presentation is more likely to be executed when the second stop presentation is executed (e.g., when variable presentation example 10 is executed) than when the first stop presentation is executed (e.g., when variable presentation example 4 is executed).
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the second action presentation is executed, since it is difficult to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, the player can be more impressed by the execution of the second action presentation than by the fact that the patterns have stopped, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in one variable performance, the fact that the second action performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that the second action performance is never executed when the first stop performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the second action performance is always executed when the second stop performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, if in one variable performance, the second action performance is more easily executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, the second action performance may be executed when the first stop performance is executed, or the second action performance may not be executed when the second stop performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the emphasis effects that emphasize the reach effect include a first emphasis effect (first reach line image 509, first reach notification image 510 (see FIG. 69 (14))) and a second emphasis effect (second reach line image 531, second reach notification image 532 (see FIG. 84 (19))) that has a higher expectation of a special game being executed than the first emphasis effect. In one variable effect, the second emphasis effect is more likely to be executed when the second stop effect is executed (for example, when variable effect example 10 is executed) than when the first stop effect is executed (for example, when variable effect example 4 is executed).
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the second emphasis presentation is executed, since it is difficult to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, the player can be more impressed by the execution of the second emphasis presentation than by the fact that the patterns have stopped, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in one variable performance, the fact that the second emphasis performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that the second emphasis performance is never executed (0%) when the first stop performance is executed, and the fact that the second emphasis performance is always executed (100%) when the second stop performance is executed.
Furthermore, if in one variable performance, the second emphasis performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, the second emphasis performance may be executed when the first stop performance is executed, or the second emphasis performance may not be executed when the second stop performance is executed.

In this embodiment, the emphasis effect (e.g., an effect that activates decorative pattern 41) that emphasizes the displayed pattern when a reach effect is started includes a first emphasis effect (see FIG. 69 (14)) and a second emphasis effect (see FIG. 84 (19)) that has a different pattern emphasis manner from the first emphasis effect. In one variable effect, the second operation effect is more likely to be executed when the second stop effect is executed (e.g., when variable effect example 10 is executed) than when the first stop effect is executed (e.g., when variable effect example 4 is executed).
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the second action presentation is executed, since it is difficult to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, the player can be more impressed by the execution of the second action presentation than by the fact that the patterns have stopped, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in one variable performance, the fact that the second emphasis performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that the second emphasis performance is never executed (0%) when the first stop performance is executed, and the fact that the second emphasis performance is always executed (100%) when the second stop performance is executed.
Furthermore, if in one variable performance, the second emphasis performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, the second emphasis performance may be executed when the first stop performance is executed, or the second emphasis performance may not be executed when the second stop performance is executed.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific performances (reach performances, pseudo consecutive performances, development performances, etc.) and prompting performances that prompt the execution of specific performances (reach prompting performances, pseudo consecutive prompting performances, development prompting performances, etc.). In one variable performance, a specific performance is more likely to be executed after the prompting performance is executed when the second stop performance is executed (for example, when variable performance example 10 is executed) than when the first stop performance is executed (for example, when variable performance example 4 is executed).
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the specific presentation is executed, since it is difficult to output the specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, the player can be more impressed with the execution of the specific presentation than with the fact that the patterns have stopped, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in one variable performance, the fact that a specific performance is more likely to be executed after a teasing performance when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that when the first stop performance is executed, a specific performance is never executed after a teasing performance is executed (0%), and the fact that when the second stop performance is executed, a specific performance is always executed after a teasing performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, if in one variable performance, it is easier for a specific performance to be executed after a teasing performance when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, then the specific performance may be executed after the teasing performance when the first stop performance is executed, and the specific performance may not be executed after the teasing performance when the second stop performance is executed.

(Example of variation 12)
FIG. 93 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 12) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 93. The variable performance example 12 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed.
The variable performance shown in Fig. 93 is a variable performance executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determined performance pattern" in Fig. 53 and "ER2" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 55. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 93(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 93(2), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual confirmation mode, and a third start operation is performed. At this time, a third effect image 525 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. The second reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the first reserved image 52, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. The reserved number display 55 for the first start port 121 is updated to "1". At this time, a first start sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the first varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 93(5), the role production is executed, and the right movable role 115C moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role third effect image 526 is displayed around the right movable role 115C on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the third role sound is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (6), the reel performance ends and the reel third effect image 526 is hidden. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth viewing mode continues. Also, at this time, the display mode of the reserved image 52 changes from the normal display mode to blue. Also, at this time, a third change sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the display mode of the reserved image 52 has changed to blue, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(7), a chance eye effect is executed, and "331" which is three rows of decorative symbols 41 stops. All of these three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in red. At this time, a chance eye first effect image 537 is displayed around the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, a seventh stop sound which is a sound effect when the three rows of decorative symbols 41 stop is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 93(8), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "331", are fixed and stopped.
In the variation performance example 12, the third start operation, the third effect image at the start 525, the first start sound, the role effect, and the chance eye effect are all examples of the pre-determination effect. Also, these pre-determination effects are effects that make the player expect a big win in the variation effect next to the variation effect when these pre-determination effects are being executed.

(Example of variation 13)
94 to 101 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 13) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 94 to Fig. 101. Variable performance example 13 is an example of a variable performance based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. Also, variable performance example 13 is an example of a variable performance executed after the variable performance shown in variable performance example 12. In other words, variable performance example 13 is an example of a variable performance showing the lottery result of the special pattern lottery suggested by the blue reserved image 52 (see Fig. 93 (6)) shown in variable performance example 12.
94 to 101 are variation effects that are executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Fig. 55. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variation effect examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 94(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.

Next, as shown in Fig. 94 (2), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and a third start operation is performed. At this time, a third effect image 525 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51, and the variable image 51 is displayed in blue. Also, at this time, a first start sound is output.
At this time, a vibration effect is started and the effect button 161 vibrates.

Next, as shown in Fig. 94 (3), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual recognition mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the vibration effect is continued.
Next, as shown in Fig. 94(4), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode. At this time, the vibration effect is continued.
Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (5), the reel effect is executed, and the right movable reel 115C moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel third effect image 526 is displayed around the right movable reel 115C on the image display unit 114. At this time, the third reel sound is output. At this time, the vibration effect is also ended. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode is also continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(6), the zone promotion effect is started, and a zone promotion image 505 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 94 (7), the zone presentation starts, and a zone notification image 528 is displayed. At this time, a zone effect image 529 is displayed around the zone notification image 528. Also, at this time, a zone start sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 94 (8), zone execution image 530 is displayed. Also, a button operation effect is started, and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the first period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect, the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops as shown in FIG. 95 (9). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become invisible (difficult to see or impossible to see). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(10), the pseudo-continuous image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (11), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x2", which indicates that the second change of the decorative patterns 41 will be performed. At this time, a first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 95 (12), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the re-changing notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and its display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (13), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (14), the pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed so as to move downward. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are not displayed (hard to see or cannot be seen).
95(15), the pseudo-continuous image 511 is displayed so as to swing up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, a pseudo-continuous fanning effect image 512 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 95 (16), the pseudo consecutive win image 511 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive win stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive win image 511. At this time, a pseudo consecutive win stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (17), the pseudo-continuous image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (18), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x3", which indicates that the decorative symbols 41 will change for the third time. At this time, a second re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 96 (19), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the re-changing notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and its display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (20), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Fig. 96 (21), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, the first step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 96 (22), the second step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a second step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 96 (23), the third step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, a third step sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 96 (24), the step image 508 is hidden. Also, the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and the first varying action is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 97 (25), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 97 (26), the right row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 97 (27), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, and the first stop action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 97 (28), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the third reach action is performed. At this time, the second reach line image 531 and the second reach notification image 532 are displayed. At this time, the third reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (29), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop motion is performed. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. Also, at this time, the first variable sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 97 (30), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 97 (31), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (32), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 98 (33), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (34), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (35), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (36), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (37), an effect is executed in which the "4" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye changes to a "3". At this time, the "3" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye performs a symbol change action. Also, at this time, a change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the decorative symbols 41 of the reach eye. Also, at this time, a symbol change sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (38), the development teasing performance starts, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the "4" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (39), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (40), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (41), the development image 521 stops, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 is hidden. At this time, the development effect image 534 is displayed around the development image 521. At this time, a development stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (42), the development performance is executed. At this time, the role performance is executed, and the middle movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 4 effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the 4th role sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 99 (43), the SPSP reach effect starts, and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourteenth visual recognition mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (44), the button operation performance starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Make it!", which encourages the user to operate the performance button 161. At this time, a button effect image 557 is displayed around the button operation image 502. At this time, the performance button 161 emits a red light. At this time, a third button sound, which is a sound effect for the button operation performance, is output. The effective operation period for this button operation performance is the third period. The third period is, for example, five seconds.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 99 (45), the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "333", are temporarily stopped. At this time, the success image 538 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect is started and the effect button 161 vibrates. At this time, the effect button 161 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a first success sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the success image 538 is displayed, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (46), the reel effect is executed, and the left movable reel 115A, the center movable reel 115B, and the right movable reel 115C each move to a position where they overlap the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel fifth effect image 539 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and the effect button 161 continues to emit light in rainbow colors. At this time, the first jackpot notification sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the special pattern lottery has resulted in a jackpot, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (47), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 is displayed. Also, at this time, the vibration effect continues, and the rainbow light emission of the effect button 161 continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 99 (48), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues, while the effect button 161 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (49), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues, while the effect button 161 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (50), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and stops. At this time, the doublet first effect image 556 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative patterns 41. At this time, the big win first effect image 540 continues to be displayed, the vibration effect continues, and the rainbow light emission of the effect button 161 continues. At this time, the eighth stop sound, which is the sound effect when the doublet decorative pattern 41 stops, is output.
Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 100 (51), the button operation effect is started and the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the effect button 161 emits light in white. Also, at this time, a fourth button sound, which is a sound effect of the button operation effect, is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the effective operation period in the button operation effect, the repeating number decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual recognition mode, as shown in Fig. 100 (52). At this time, the first big win effect image 540 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (53), the repeating decorative pattern 41 "333" is temporarily stopped. That is, the promotion effect is not executed after the promotion hinting effect is executed. At this time, the repeating decorative pattern 41 is surrounded by a repeating second effect image 541. Also, at this time, a ninth stopping sound is output, which is a sound effect when the repeating decorative pattern 41 stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (54), three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "333", are fixed and stopped with the stop display of the special symbols. Also, the first big win effect image 540 is not displayed. Note that the first big win effect image 540 may be displayed when the decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56 are fixed and stopped.
Next, as shown in Fig. 100 (55), a big win game notification image 542 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the big win game notification image 542 displays the text "Bonus!".
Next, as shown in Fig. 100 (56), a right-hit image 543 is displayed. At this time, a round number image 544 and a round-in-progress image 545 are displayed. The round number image 544 displays the text "Round 1."
Next, when the final round is completed, as shown in Fig. 101 (57), a time-saving start image 546 is displayed. The time-saving start image 546 displays the text "Entering special time-saving mode!"

Next, in the special time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 101 (58), the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness, "333", is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. And, like the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56 is also fixed and stopped by the sequence of numbers "333". Also, at this time, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the fourth stage (fourth presentation mode), which is the presentation mode in the special time-saving game state. Also, at this time, the variable presentation is not being executed, but background music corresponding to the fourth stage is being output from the speaker 156.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can output a specific sound (start sound) different from a predetermined sound (variable BGM) when the variable performance starts. Also, the variable performance in which a specific sound is not output, such as variable performance example 1 (see Figs. 61 to 63), is a variable performance based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a miss. On the other hand, the variable performance in which a specific sound is output, such as variable performance example 13 (see Figs. 94 to 101), is a variable performance based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a jackpot. And, in this embodiment, it is made easier to execute a special game (jackpot game) when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed, than when a variable performance in which a specific sound is not output is executed.
In this case, the output of the specific sound can heighten the player's anticipation that a special game will be played, thereby making the game more enjoyable from the start of the variable presentation.

In addition, the fact that a special game is more likely to be executed when a variable presentation in which a specific sound is output is executed than when a variable presentation in which a specific sound is not output includes the fact that a special game will not be executed (0%) when a variable presentation in which a specific sound is not output is executed, and the fact that a special game will be executed (100%) when a variable presentation in which a specific sound is output is executed.
In addition, if a special game is more likely to be executed when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed than when a variable performance in which a specific sound is not output is executed, a special game may be executed when a variable performance in which a specific sound is not output is executed, or a special game may not be executed when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed, the output of a special stop sound (the stop sound of the pseudo consecutive images 511, the stop sound of the development image 521) is more likely to be executed than when a variable performance in which a specific sound (start sound) is not output. Therefore, by outputting a specific sound, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that a performance accompanied by the output of a special stop sound will be executed from the start of the variable performance.
In addition, the fact that the special stop sound is more likely to be output when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed than when a variable performance in which a specific sound is not output includes the fact that the special stop sound will never be output (0%) when a variable performance in which a specific sound is not output is executed, and the fact that the special stop sound will always be output (100%) when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed.
In addition, if the output of a special stop sound is more likely to be performed when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed than when a variable performance in which a specific sound is not output is executed, the output of a special stop sound may be performed when a variable performance in which a specific sound is not output is executed, or the output of a special stop sound may not be performed when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance in which a specific sound (start sound) is not output (see FIG. 61 (2)), it is more difficult to output a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode) when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output (see FIG. 82 (2)) is executed (see FIG. 86 (39)). Therefore, in a variable performance in which a start sound is output, it is possible to prevent excessive output of sound effects and a decrease in interest in the game.
In addition, the fact that it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed than when a variable performance in which a specific sound is not output includes the fact that when a variable performance in which a specific sound is not output is executed, the stopping sound is always output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (100%), and that when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed, the stopping sound is never output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (0%).
In addition, if it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed than when a variable performance in which a specific sound is not output is executed, a stopping sound may be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reach effect is more likely to be executed when a variable performance in which a specific sound (start sound) is output is executed than when a variable performance in which a specific sound (start sound) is not output is executed. Therefore, by outputting the specific sound, the player's expectation that the reach effect will be executed from the start of the variable performance can be increased.
In addition, the fact that a reach effect is more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which a specific sound is output is executed than when a variable effect in which a specific sound is not output includes the fact that a reach effect will always be executed (100%) when a variable effect in which a specific sound is output is executed, and the fact that a reach effect will never be executed (0%) when a variable effect in which a specific sound is not output is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a jackpot game may be executed in a variable performance (such as variable performance example 6 (see Figures 75 to 77)) in which a SP reach performance is executed without outputting a specific sound (start sound). That is, the variable performance in which a specific sound is not output includes a first variable performance in which a stop sound is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode) (see Figure 74 (27)), and a second variable performance in which a stop sound is not output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (see Figure 76 (16)), and a jackpot game is executed more easily when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed.
Here, the fact that a jackpot game is more likely to be executed when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed includes the fact that a jackpot game is not necessarily executed (0%) when the first variable performance is executed. Also, if a jackpot game is more likely to be executed when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed, a jackpot game may be executed when the first variable performance is executed.

In this embodiment, the miss variation performance in which the reach performance is not executed includes a first variation performance in which the start sound is not output (see, for example, FIG. 66(2)), and a second variation performance in which the start sound is output (see, for example, FIG. 93(2)). When a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, it is easier to win the jackpot in the next variation performance when the second variation performance is executed than when the first variation performance is executed (variation performance example 13 is easier to execute).
In addition, when a reservation for the first starting port 121 is stored, it is easier to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variable performance example 13 is easier to execute), which also includes the fact that when the first variable performance is executed, there is no guarantee that there will be a jackpot in the next variable performance (0%) (variable performance example 13 is never executed). Also, when a reservation for the first starting port 121 is stored, if it is easier to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variable performance example 13 is easier to execute), it may be possible to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the first variable performance is executed (variable performance example 13 may be executed), and it may not be possible to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed (variable performance example 13 may not be executed).

In addition, when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, it may be possible to make it more likely that an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) will be executed in the next variable performance (variable performance example 10 or variable performance example 11 will be executed) if the second variable performance in which a start sound is output is executed rather than if the first variable performance in which a start sound is not output is executed.
In addition, when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, the fact that an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is more likely to be executed in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variation performance example 10 or variable performance example 11 is more likely to be executed) also includes the fact that when the first variable performance is executed, an SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance will definitely not be executed (0%) in the next variable performance (variation performance example 10 or variable performance example 11 will definitely not be executed). Furthermore, if a hold is stored for the first starting port 121 and an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is more likely to be executed in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variation performance example 10 or variable performance example 11 is more likely to be executed), then an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) may be executed in the next variable performance when the first variable performance is executed (variation performance example 10 or variable performance example 11 may be executed), and an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) does not have to be executed in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed (variation performance example 10 or variable performance example 11 does not have to be executed).

In addition, in this embodiment, there is a first stop performance (for example, the performance shown in FIG. 62 (15)) that outputs a specific sound (stop sound) different from a predetermined sound (variable BGM) when a specific row of patterns (for example, the middle row decorative pattern 41) stops due to a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode), and a second stop performance (for example, the performance shown in FIG. 86 (39)) that does not output a specific sound when a specific row of patterns stops due to a specific display mode. In addition, the specific sound includes a first specific sound (for example, the first stop sound (see FIG. 83 (16))) and a second specific sound (for example, the seventh stop sound (see FIG. 93 (7))) that is different from the first specific sound. In one variable performance, the output of the second specific sound is more likely to be executed when the first stop performance is executed (for example, when the variable performance example 12 is executed) than when the second stop performance is executed (for example, when the variable performance example 10 is executed).
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the first stop presentation is executed, the output of the second specific sound is more likely to be executed, so that the player can be more impressed that the pattern has stopped in combination with the output of the second specific sound, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in one variable performance, the fact that the second specific sound is more likely to be output when the first stop performance is executed than when the second stop performance is executed includes the fact that the second specific sound is never output when the second stop performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the second specific sound is always output when the first stop performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, if in one variable performance, the output of the second specific sound is more likely to be executed when the first stop performance is executed than when the second stop performance is executed, the second specific sound may be output when the second stop performance is executed, and the second specific sound may not be output when the first stop performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in one variable performance, when the first stop performance is executed (for example, when variable performance example 12 is executed), it is more likely that a specific pre-determined performance (such as a pattern movement performance (see Figure 93 (2)), output of a first start sound, role device performance (see Figure 93 (5)), chance eye performance (see Figure 93 (7)), etc.) will be executed when the first stop performance is executed (for example, when variable performance example 12 is executed) than when the second stop performance is executed (for example, when variable performance example 10 is executed).
In this case, in the variable performance in which the pre-determination performance is performed, the specific sound is likely to be output when the symbols in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, making it easier for the player to recognize the "stop of symbols," which is one of the divisions in the variable performance, and thus, in combination with the pre-determination performance, the expectation of the next and subsequent variable performances can be further increased. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in one variable performance, the fact that a specific pre-determined performance is more likely to be executed when the first stop performance is executed than when the second stop performance is executed includes the fact that a specific pre-determined performance is not always executed when the second stop performance is executed (0%), and the fact that a specific pre-determined performance is always executed when the first stop performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, if in one variable performance, a specific pre-judgment performance is more likely to be executed when the first stop performance is executed than when the second stop performance is executed, the specific pre-judgment performance may be executed when the second stop performance is executed, or the specific pre-judgment performance may not be executed when the first stop performance is executed.

In addition, the pre-determination performance of this embodiment includes a specific pre-determination performance that makes the player expect a jackpot in the next or subsequent variable performance after the currently executed variable performance. Examples of the specific pre-determination performance include the pre-determination performance of the variable performance example 12 (symbol action performance (see FIG. 93 (2)), output of the first start sound, role performance (see FIG. 93 (5)), chance eye performance (see FIG. 93 (7)), etc.). The variable performance that is expected to win a jackpot due to the pre-determination performance of the variable performance example 12 is the variable performance of the variable performance example 13. In this embodiment, the second stop performance is more likely to be executed when a variable performance that is expected to win a jackpot due to a specific pre-determination performance is performed than when a variable performance in which a pre-determination performance (specific pre-determination performance) is performed.
The fact that the second stop performance is more likely to be executed when the target variation performance is performed than when the variation performance in which the pre-determination performance (specific pre-determination performance) is performed includes the fact that the second stop performance is not necessarily executed (0%) when the variation performance in which the pre-determination performance (specific pre-determination performance) is performed, and the fact that the second stop performance is necessarily executed (100%) when the target variation performance is performed. Also, if the second stop performance is more likely to be executed when the target variation performance is performed than when the variation performance in which the pre-determination performance (specific pre-determination performance) is performed, the second stop performance may be executed when the variation performance in which the pre-determination performance (specific pre-determination performance) is performed, or the second stop performance may not be executed when the target variation performance is performed.

(Example of variation 14)
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing one aspect of the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 14) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 102. The variable performance example 14 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
In addition, Figure 102 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA2" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 55. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the above-mentioned variation performance examples will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figs. 93(1)-(8), 94(1)-(8), 95(9)-(16), 96(17)-(24), 97(25)-(32), 98(33)-(40), and 99(41)-(43) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 102(1), the button operation effect starts and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!", which encourages the user to operate the effect button 161. At this time, the effect button 161 lights up in red. At this time, a third button sound is output. The effective operation period of this button operation effect is the third period.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 102 (2), the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "333", are temporarily stopped. Meanwhile, at this time, the success image 538 (see FIG. 99 (45)) is not displayed. Also, at this time, the vibration effect is not executed. Also, at this time, the effect button 161 emits white light. Also, at this time, the first success sound is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(3), a success image 538 is displayed. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect button 161 vibrates. At this time, the effect button 161 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a first success sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 99 (46) to (48), Figures 100 (49) to (56), and Figures 101 (57) and (58) are executed.

As described above, in variable performance example 14, the timing of the display of success image 538, the vibration performance, the rainbow light emission of performance button 161, and the output of the first success sound is delayed relative to the time of operation of performance button 161, compared to variable performance example 13. In other words, in variable performance example 14, the period from when performance button 161 is operated in the button operation performance to the display of success image 538, the start of the vibration performance, the rainbow light emission of performance button 161, and the output of the first success sound is longer than in variable performance example 13.

In addition, in the variation performance example 14, a success image 538 is displayed, but this is not limited to this.
In variable performance example 14, after the performance shown in FIG. 102 (2) is performed, a vibration performance, the illumination of the performance button 161 in rainbow colors, and the output of the first success sound may be executed without the success image 538 being displayed.

(Example of variation 15)
FIG. 103 is a diagram showing one aspect of the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 15) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 103. The variable performance example 15 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
In addition, Figure 103 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA3" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 55. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the above-mentioned variation performance examples will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 93 (1) to (8), 94 (1) to (8), 95 (9) to (16), 96 (17) to (24), 97 (25) to (32), 98 (33) to (40), 99 (41), and (42) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 103 (1), the SPSP reach effect begins, and the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 14th visual mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 103 (2), a button operation effect is started, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!", which encourages the operation of the effect button 161. At this time, a vibration effect is started, the effect button 161 emits white light, and a second button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 103(3), the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "333", are temporarily stopped. At this time, a success image 538 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect is continued. At this time, the effect button 161 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a first success sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 99 (46) to (48), 100 (49) to (56), and 101 (57) and (58) are executed.

(Example of variation 16)
104 and 105 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 16) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 104 and 105. The variable performance example 16 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
104 and 105 are variation effects that are executed when "EB1" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 55. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 104(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the confirmation of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (2), with the start of the variable display of the next special pattern, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second visual mode, and a fourth start operation, which is an operation when the variable starts, is performed. When the fourth start operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are each displayed in a shrinking manner. At this time, a fourth start effect image 547 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51, and the variable image 51 is displayed. Furthermore, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from red to rainbow colors. At this time, a vibration effect is performed. At this time, a fourth change sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the display mode of the variable image 51 has changed, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first varying action is performed.
104(4), the reach prompting performance is started, and the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the reach prompting first effect image 522 is displayed below each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.
104(5), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, a reach-inducing third effect image 548 is displayed on the left and right sides of each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (6), the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode, and a fourth stop action is performed, which is an action when the fluctuation stops. When the fourth stop action is being performed, the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner compared to when the third stop action is being performed (see FIG. 81 (4)). The fourth stop action can also be considered as a fourth reach action, which is an action of the decorative symbols 41 when a reach is established (when the reach performance starts). The fourth reach action has a higher expectation than any of the first reach action to the third reach action. At this time, a fourth effect image 549 is displayed at the time of stopping so as to surround each of the reach-ey decorative symbols 41. At this time, a fourth reach sound, which is an effect sound when a reach is established, is output. The fourth reach sound can also be considered as a tenth stop sound, which is an effect sound when the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (7), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "6" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 105 (9), the middle symbol fanning effect is started, and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 17th visual mode (see Fig. 59-5 (35)). At this time, the doublet fanning first effect image 550 is displayed above and below the middle row decorative symbol 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in Fig. 105 (10), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the 17th visual mode (see Fig. 59-5 (36)). At this time, the doublet-triggering second effect images 551 are displayed on the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.
Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (11), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 17th visual mode (see FIG. 59-5 (37)) and stops. At this time, the fifth effect image 552 at the time of stop is displayed around the middle row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect button 161 emits light in rainbow colors. Also, at this time, an eleventh stop sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the middle row decorative pattern 41 has stopped, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (12), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the sixteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (13), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 105 (14), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and stops. At this time, the sixth stop effect image 553 is displayed so as to surround each of the doublet decorative patterns 41. At this time, the twelfth stop sound, which is the sound effect when the doublet decorative patterns 41 stop, is output.
In the variation performance example 16, even when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 16th visual mode, the stage image 61 is displayed. However, even in the variation performance example 16, when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 16th visual mode, the first big win effect image 540 may be displayed instead of the stage image 61.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (15), the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seven-visual mode and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the vibration effect ends. At this time, the luminous color of the effect button 161 changes from rainbow color to white.
Then, as shown in FIG. 105 (16), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "777", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 17)
106 and 107 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. In FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 17) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 106 and 107. The variable performance example 17 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
106 and 107 are variation effects that are executed when "EB2" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 55. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 104 (1) to (7) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 106 (1), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and a first temporary stopping action is performed, and the middle row decorative pattern 41, "7", is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and a first variable action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (2), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "8" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode.

106(4), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, a transition image 516 is displayed in place of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106(5), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106(6), the SP reach effect starts, and an SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (7), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the twelfth visual mode, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 performs a second varying operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 106 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode and performs the second variable operation.
Next, as shown in Fig. 107 (9), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the SP promotion second effect image 519 is displayed on the upper right side and the lower left side of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in Fig. 107 (10), the button operation effect is started, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Make it!". At this time, a button effect image 557 is displayed around the button operation image 502. At this time, the effect button 161 emits light in red, and a third button sound is output. The operation effective period of this button operation effect is the third period.
Then, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation effective period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 107 (11), the "7" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the seventh effect image 554 at the time of stopping is displayed around the middle row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the vibration effect is started, and the effect button 161 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, the thirteenth stop sound which is the sound effect of the middle row decorative pattern 41 stopping is output.
After this, the same presentation as shown in Figures 99 (46) to (48), 100 (49), and (50) is performed, except that the repeated decorative pattern 41 is "777", and then, as the special patterns stop changing, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 and the small pattern 56, "777", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 18)
FIG. 108 is a diagram showing one aspect of the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 18) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 108. The variable performance example 18 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.
In addition, Figure 108 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA4" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 55. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the above-mentioned variation performance examples will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 82 (1) to (8), Fig. 83 (9) to (16), Fig. 84 (17) to (24), Fig. 85 (25) to (32), Fig. 86 (33), and (34) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 108 (1), the button operation effect starts and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Press!" At this time, the effect button 161 emits white light and a second button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the second period.
Then, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 108 (2), the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "333", perform the first temporary stop operation. At this time, the success image 538 is displayed. The effect button 161 emits light in rainbow colors, and the first success sound is output. Meanwhile, the vibration effect is not performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(3), the role effect is executed, and the left movable role 115A, the center movable role 115B, and the right movable role 115C move to positions where they overlap the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role fifth effect image 539 is displayed. At this time, the performance button 161 continues to emit light in rainbow colors, and the first big win notification sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 108 (4), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 is displayed. Also, at this time, the illumination of the rainbow color of the effect button 161 continues.
108(5), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 continues to be displayed, and the illumination of the rainbow color of the effect button 161 continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 108(6), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 continues to be displayed, and the effect button 161 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in Fig. 108 (7), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and stop. At this time, the doublet first effect image 556 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. Also, at this time, the big win first effect image 540 continues to be displayed, the performance button 161 continues to emit light in rainbow colors, and the eighth stop sound is output.
Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 108(8), the button operation effect is started and the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the effect button 161 emits white light. Also, at this time, the fourth button sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 100 (52) to (56) and Figures 101 (57) and (58) are performed.
In this way, in variation performance example 18, no vibration performance is executed.

(Example of variation 19)
FIG. 109 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 19) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 109. The variable performance example 19 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.
In addition, Figure 109 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA5" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 55. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the above-mentioned variation performance examples will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as each variation performance example may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 93 (1) to (8), Fig. 94 (1) to (8), Fig. 95 (9) to (16), Fig. 96 (17) to (24), Fig. 97 (25) to (32), Fig. 98 (33) to (40), and Fig. 99 (41) to (43) are performed. Next, as shown in Fig. 109 (1), the button operation effect starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!", which prompts the user to operate the effect button 161. At this time, a button effect image 557 is displayed around the button operation image 502. At this time, the effect button 161 emits red light, and a third button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the effective operation period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 109 (2), "343", which is three rows of decorative patterns 41, is displayed in the fifteenth visual mode and temporarily stops. At this time, the sixth stop sound is output. Also, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 109(3), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. At this time, a switching indication sound is output.
109(4), a part of the switching image 520 becomes non-displayed and a part of the stage image 61 is re-displayed. At this time, a non-display switching sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 109 (5), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three rows of highly decorative decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect of the highly decorative decorative patterns 41 stopping is not output, and the display becomes silent.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(6), the revival image 558 is displayed, and the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "333," are temporarily stopped. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect button 161 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a first revival sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the revival image 558 is displayed, is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 109(7), the role effect is executed, and the left movable role 115A, the center movable role 115B, and the right movable role 115C move to positions where they overlap the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role fifth effect image 539 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and the rainbow light emission of the effect button 161 continues. At this time, the first big win notification sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win, is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 99 (47) and (48), Figures 100 (49) to (56), and Figures 101 (57) and (58) are performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are a first stop performance (for example, the performance shown in FIG. 62 (15)) that outputs a specific sound (stop sound) different from a predetermined sound (variable BGM) when a specific row of symbols (for example, the middle row decorative symbol 41) stops in a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode), and a second stop performance (for example, the performance shown in FIG. 109 (5)) that does not output a specific sound when a specific row of symbols stops in a specific display mode. In addition, there are a first specific sound (for example, the first stop sound (see FIG. 62 (15))) and a second specific sound (for example, the eighth stop sound (see FIG. 100 (50)) etc.) that is output when the decorative symbol 41 stops in a specific sequence (double number). In one variable performance, the output of the second specific sound is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed (for example, when the variable performance example 19 (see FIG. 109) is executed) than when the first stop performance is executed (for example, when the variable performance example 1 (see FIG. 61 to FIG. 63) is executed).
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the second stop presentation is executed, when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, a specific sound is not output, but the second specific sound is likely to be output. This, combined with the unexpectedness of the specific sound being output, can increase the degree of excitement of the player when a special game is executed, and can improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in one variable performance, the fact that the second specific sound is more likely to be output when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that the second specific sound is never output when the first stop performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the second specific sound is always output when the second stop performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, if, in one variable performance, the output of the second specific sound is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, the second specific sound may be output when the first stop performance is executed, and the second specific sound may not be output when the second stop performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the second specific variation effect (miss variation effect in which the SP reach effect is performed) is executed, a specific sound (stop sound) is not output when the specific row of symbols (middle row decorative symbol 41) stops after the switching image 520 (see FIG. 86 (37)) is displayed (see FIG. 86 (39), (40)). On the other hand, when the revival effect is executed (see FIG. 109 (6)), a specific sound (eighth stop sound, etc. (see FIG. 100 (50))) can be output when the specific row of symbols stops, even after the switching image 520 is displayed. Therefore, combined with the unexpectedness of the specific sound being output, the degree of excitement of the player when the special game is executed can be increased.

Also, in this embodiment, a big win game is more likely to be played when a variable presentation in which a stop sound is not output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (see FIG. 109 (5)) is executed than when a variable presentation in which a stop sound is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) (see FIG. 62 (15)). Therefore, even when a stop sound is not output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode, the player can be made to expect that a big win game will be executed.
In addition, the fact that a jackpot game is more likely to be executed when a variable presentation in which a stopping sound is not output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is executed than when a variable presentation in which a stopping sound is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode also includes the fact that a jackpot game will not be executed (0%) when a variable presentation in which a stopping sound is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is executed.
In addition, if a jackpot game is easier to execute when a variable presentation in which a stopping sound is not output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is executed than when a variable presentation in which a stopping sound is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is executed, a jackpot game may be executed when a variable presentation in which a stopping sound is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is executed.

(Variation of variation example 10)
Next, a modified example of variation presentation example 10 will be described.
First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 82(1) to (8) and Fig. 83(9) to (14) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 110(1), a zone execution image 530 is displayed. At this time, the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth visual recognition mode and performs the first varying action.
Next, as shown in Fig. 110(2), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the 14th stop sound, which is the sound effect of the decorative pattern 41 stopping, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(3), the right row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 110(4), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, and the first stop action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the 14th stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 110 (5), the reach-ey decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the fifth reach action, which is the action of the decorative pattern 41 when the reach is established (when the reach performance starts), is performed. When the fifth reach action is being performed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed as if raising the left hand. At this time, the first reach line image 509 and the first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, the first reach sound is output.
In this way, different reach actions may be executed for each number of the decorative pattern 41. In other words, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes each of the multiple decorative patterns 41 (1 to 9), and can make the emphasis mode of the emphasis performance different between the first pattern (e.g., 4) and the second pattern (e.g., 3).
In this embodiment, as a variable performance, a variable performance shown as a modified example of variable performance example 10 may be provided instead of variable performance example 10, or a variable performance shown as a modified example of variable performance example 10 may be provided together with variable performance example 10.

(Example of variation 20)
Next, referring to Fig. 111 to Fig. 113, a variable presentation (variable presentation example 20) performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like will be specifically described. The variable presentation example 20 is a variable presentation example based on a game ball winning in the first start hole 121 in a normal game state. The variable presentation example 20 is a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach presentation is not executed, and is a variable presentation based on the number of reserved balls for winning in the first start hole 121 being "1".
The variable performances shown in Figures 111 to 113 are variable performances that are executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 55.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.
In addition, each of the change performance examples from change performance example 20 to change performance example 38 described later is a change performance example when the change starts in the second stage.

As shown in FIG. 111(1), the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114 as the previous special pattern is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300. At this time, one reserved image 52, reserved number display 55, small pattern 56, and stage image 61 are displayed in the image display unit 114. In addition, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the second stage (second performance mode). The second stage is a performance mode in a normal game state. At this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first start port 121 indicates "1", which is the reserved number for winning the first start port 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 indicates "0", which is the reserved number for winning the second start port 122. The three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a first visual mode.
In addition, in the second stage, the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a decorative manner different from the decorative manner in the first stage (see FIG. 61(1)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (2), the change performance starts with the start of the change display of the special pattern. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the change image 51. Also, at this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second viewing mode, and perform the fifth start operation, which is the operation when starting the change. When the fifth start operation is being executed, the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed as moving to the right, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed as rotating clockwise, and the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed as moving to the left. Also, at this time, the fifth start effect image 559 is displayed on the side to which the three rows of decorative patterns 41 move. Also, the change of the small pattern 56 starts. Also, in the second stage, the change BGM continues to be output from the start to the end of the change performance, but this change BGM is a different song from the change BGM in the first stage.

Next, as shown in Fig. 111 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform a fourth variation operation, which is the operation when the patterns are varying. When the fourth variation operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed along a fourth variation path (see Fig. 60-1 (4)). More specifically, when the fourth variation operation is being performed, the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed as moving from the center of the image display unit 114 to the left in the left-right direction, the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed as moving from the center of the image display unit 114 to the right in the left-right direction, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed as rotating in the center of the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (4), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual appearance and perform a fourth varying operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(5), a button operation effect is executed, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The operation effective period of this button operation effect is the first period. At this time, the first button sound is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode.
If the effect button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period of the effect button 161 in the button operation effect, the button operation image 502 is hidden as shown in FIG. 111 (6). Note that no sound (non-display sound) is output in response to the button operation image 502 being hidden. Also, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 111 (7), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the fourth variable action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (8), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the fourth variable action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (9), the left-row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode, and performs the fifth stop action, which is the action when the variation stops. When the fifth stop action is being performed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed as if it is being held down by sudden braking. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed on the left side of the left-row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound, which is the sound effect of the decorative pattern 41 stopping, is output from the speaker 156.
Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (10), the right-row decorative symbol 41, "1", is displayed in the fifth visual state and performs the fourth variable action. At this time, the visual state of the left-row decorative symbol 41 becomes the seventh visual state and performs the first temporary stop action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (11), the right row decorative pattern 41 "1" passes, and the right row decorative pattern 41 "2" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the fourth variable action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (12), the right-row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stop motion. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed on the right side of the right-row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (13), the "9" in the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the fourth variable motion. At this time, the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (14), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "9" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "1" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the fourth variable action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (15), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the fifth stop operation. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed on the right side of the middle row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output. That is, the same sound effect is output when the left row decorative pattern 41 stops, when the right row decorative pattern 41 stops, and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (16), the visual appearance of the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes the seventh visual appearance, so that all three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual appearance and the first temporary stop operation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (17), with the special symbol being displayed stationary, three rows of decorative symbols 41, "412", are fixed and stopped (displayed in the first viewing mode). With the special symbol stopping its variable state, small symbol 56, "412", is fixed and stopped. With the variable effect ending, variable image 51 is erased (displayed).

Figure 114 is a diagram showing another presentation example in variable presentation example 20.
In the variation performance example 20, a performance example in which the performance button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation performance is described. In the following, a performance example in which the performance button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation performance is described.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 111(1) to (4) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 114(1), a button operation effect is executed and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first button sound is also output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect, a first image at operation 504 is displayed as shown in Fig. 114 (2). This first image at operation 504 is displayed in a display mode different from the first image at operation 504 in the first stage (see Fig. 64 (2)). At this time, a third operation sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the effect button 161 has been operated, is output from the speaker 156.

114(3), the first operation image 504 is turned off, and the three rows of decorative symbols 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 111 (7) and (8), Figures 112 (9) to (16), and Figure 113 (17) are performed.

(Example of variation 21)
FIG. 115 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 21) of the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. 115. The variable performance example 21 is a variable performance example based on a game ball winning in the first start hole 121 in a normal game state. The variable performance example 21 is a variable performance executed when "ER5" is selected as the "variable performance" in FIG. 55. The variable performance example 21 is a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed, and is a variable performance based on the number of reserved balls for winning in the first start hole 121 being "1". In the following description, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly described, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 111 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 115 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode and a fourth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 115 (2), a zone teasing effect is executed, and a zone teasing image 505 is displayed. At this time, the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth viewing mode and then in the sixth viewing mode, but the display of the left row decorative pattern 41 in the fifth viewing mode and the display in the sixth viewing mode are hidden by the zone teasing image 505, making it difficult or impossible to see. Also, when the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth viewing mode, the 15th stop sound is not output.

In the variation performance example 21, the zone performance is not performed after the zone promotion performance is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 115 (3), the zone promotion image 505 is not displayed. Also, at this time, the left column decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 112 (10) to (16) and Figure 113 (17) are performed.
In addition, when the zone teasing image 505 is displayed in the zone teasing performance, the left row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the seventh viewing mode without being displayed in the fifth viewing mode or the sixth viewing mode, and when the zone teasing image 505 becomes hidden, the left row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the seventh viewing mode.

(Example of variation 22)
FIG. 116 is a diagram showing one aspect of the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 22) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 116. The variable performance example 22 is a variable performance example of the decorative pattern 41 based on the game ball winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state. The variable performance example 22 is a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed, and is a variable performance based on the number of reserved balls for winning the first start hole 121 being "4".
In addition, Figure 116 is a variation performance that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 55. In addition, in the following explanation, the points that differ from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Fig. 116(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the determination of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 in the image display unit 114. In addition, four reserved images 52 are displayed, and "4" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 116(2), the variation effect starts with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and a sixth start operation, which is the operation when the variation starts, is performed. When the sixth start operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a manner that makes them sway up and down. At this time, a sixth start effect image 561 is also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a third visual appearance and perform a fourth varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (4), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual appearance and perform a fourth varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 116(5), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the fourth variation operation. The movement speed of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 at this time is faster than the movement speed of the decorative symbols 41 displayed in the fifth visual mode in the variation performance example 20 and the variation performance example 21.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (6), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the sixth viewing mode, and a sixth stopping action is performed, which is the action taken when the fluctuation stops. When the sixth stopping action is being performed, the decorative patterns 41 are displayed as if they are swinging in the direction in which they were moving in the fourth fluctuation action. Also, at this time, the ninth effect image 562 is displayed at the time of stopping. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stopping sound is output from the speaker 156. That is, the same sound effect is output when the decorative patterns 41 stop in fluctuation performance example 20 and fluctuation performance example 21, and when the decorative patterns 41 stop in fluctuation performance example 21.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (7), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 116 (8).

(Variation of variation example 22)
Next, a modified example of the variable performance example 22 will be explained.
In this embodiment, it has been explained that the sound effect output when the decorative pattern 41 stops is the same (both are the 15th stop sound) in the variable performance (variable performance example 20, variable performance example 21) in which the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121 is "1" and a reach performance is not executed, and the variable performance (variable performance example 22) in which the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121 is "4" and a reach performance is not executed, but this is not limited to the above.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 116 (1) to (4) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 117 (1), the three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the fourth variable operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 117(2), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the sixth stop operation. At this time, the ninth stop effect image 562 is displayed on the left side of the left row decorative symbol 41 and on the right side of each of the right row decorative symbol 41 and the middle row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the sixteenth stop sound, which is the sound effect of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 stopping, is output from the speaker 156. That is, a different sound effect is output from when the decorative symbols 41 stop in the variation performance example 20 and the variation performance example 21.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 117(4).

In addition, in the variable performance of this embodiment, the variable performance shown in the modified example of variable performance example 22 may be provided instead of the variable performance shown in variable performance example 22, or the variable performance shown in the modified example of variable performance example 22 may be provided together with the variable performance shown in variable performance example 22.

(Example of variation 23)
118 to 120 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 23) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 118 to 120. The variable performance example 23 is a variable performance example in which a reach performance is executed based on a winning into the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state.
In addition, the variable performance example 23 is a variable performance that is executed when "ER6" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 55.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 118 (1), the performance control unit 300 stops the display of the previous special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 "213" are fixed. In addition, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121. In addition, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first viewing mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (2), the display of the special symbols begins, and the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second viewing mode, and the fifth start operation is performed. At this time, the fifth start effect image 559 is also displayed. The small symbols 56 begin to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a third visual appearance and perform a fourth varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 118(4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (5), the reel performance is executed, and the middle movable reel 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the upper part of the image display unit 114. At this time, the sixth reel effect image 563 is displayed. Also, at this time, the fifth reel sound, which is the sound effect of the reel performance, is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in Fig. 118(6), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, a step 1 sound, which is a sound effect of the first step performance, is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 118 (7), the second stage step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, the step 2 sound, which is the sound effect of the second stage step performance, is output.
The step image 508 displayed in the second stage has a different display mode from the step image 508 displayed in the first stage (see Figures 68 (6), (7), etc.).

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (8), the left row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (9), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (10), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stop motion. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the left of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (11), the right row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (12), the right row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the right row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (13), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stopping action, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 119 (14), the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the eighth visual mode, and a sixth reach action is performed, which is the action of the decorative symbols 41 when a reach is achieved (when the reach performance starts). When the sixth reach action is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed as if they are raising their right hand. At this time, a first reach line image 509 and a first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, a first reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (15), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 119 (16), a pseudo consecutive fanning performance is executed, and the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed to move downward. This pseudo consecutive image 511 passes through the middle first moving path CR1 (see Fig. 60-1 (1)). However, in the second stage, the pseudo consecutive image 511 may pass through the middle fourth moving path CR4 (see Fig. 60-1 (4)). At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is not displayed (difficult to see or not visible).
120(17), the pseudo-continuous image 511 is displayed so as to swing up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, a pseudo-continuous image tilting effect image 512 is displayed around the pseudo-continuous image 511.

In the variation performance example 23, the pseudo consecutive performance is not performed after the pseudo consecutive fanning performance is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 120 (18), after the pseudo consecutive image 511 passes, the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual recognition mode and performs the fourth variation operation. This middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a larger size than the decorative patterns 41 of the left and right rows.
Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (19), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stop operation. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed on the right side of the middle row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output. At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size so as to be the same display size as the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (20), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 120 (21).

(Example of variation 24)
121 to 123 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 24) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 121 to 123. The variable performance example 24 is an example of a variable performance based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state, in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach performance is executed.
The variation performance shown in Figures 121 to 123 is a variation performance executed when "ER7" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 55. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 111 (1) to (3) is executed, and then, as shown in Figure 121 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode and a fourth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 121(2), the reel performance is executed, and the left movable reel 115A moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel seventh effect image 564 is displayed around the left movable reel 115A. Also, at this time, the sixth reel sound, which is the sound effect of the reel performance, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(3), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed so as to move downward.
Next, as shown in Fig. 121 (4), the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed so as to swing up and down in the center of the image display unit 114. At this time, the pseudo consecutive fanning effect image 512 is displayed. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed (difficult to see or not visible).

Next, as shown in Fig. 121 (5), the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. Also, at this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound, which is a sound effect when the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops, is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 121(6), the pseudo-continuous image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (7), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "434", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is being performed. Also at this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x2", indicating that the decorative pattern 41 will change a second time. Also at this time, the first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 121 (8), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode, and a fourth variation operation is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size, and the display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 122(9), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 122 (10), the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the fourth variable action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (11), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stop motion. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the left of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (12), the right row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (13), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, and the fifth stopping action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 122 (14), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the sixth reach action is performed. At this time, the first reach line image 509 and the first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, the first reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (15), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and the first provisional stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (16), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (17), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (18), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (19), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual confirmation mode and performs the fifth stopping operation. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed on the right side of the middle row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stopping sound is output. That is, the same sound effect (stopping sound) is output when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops.
Next, as shown in Fig. 123 (20), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the display size of the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in such a manner that it is reduced to the same display size as the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 123 (21).

(Example of variation 25)
124 to 126 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 25) of the variable performance of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to Figures 124 to 126. The variable performance example 25 is an example of a variable performance based on a winning entry to the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state, in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the SP reach performance is executed.
The variable performances shown in Figures 124 to 126 are variable performances that are executed when "ER8" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 55.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 121 (1) to (8) and Figures 122 (9) to (16) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 124 (1), the middle row decorative pattern 41, "4," is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode, and the fourth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 124(2), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode (see FIG. 59-2(14)).
Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Fig. 124(4), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode (see Fig. 59-2(15)). At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed in place of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 124(5), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode (see FIG. 59-2(16)), and a second provisional stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(6), the SP reach performance starts, and an SP reach image 517 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 124 (7), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Fig. 59-3 (17)) and performs a second varying operation, which is the operation when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is being displayed and varying. When the second varying operation is being performed in the second stage, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed to move from the upper right corner to the lower left corner of the image display unit 114 along the second varying path (see Fig. 60-1 (2)).
Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the second mode of the twelfth visual mode (see FIG. 59-3 (18)).

Next, as shown in Fig. 125(9), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Fig. 59-3(19)). At this time, the SP promotion first effect image 518 is displayed on the upper right and lower left sides of the middle row decorative pattern 41 on the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (10), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the second mode of the twelfth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (11), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the SP promotion second effect image 519 is displayed on the upper right side and the lower left side of the middle row decorative pattern 41 on the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in Fig. 125 (12), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fourth mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Fig. 59-3 (20)). In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in such a way that it returns to the upper right side of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (13), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth mode of the twelfth visual mode (see FIG. 59-3 (21)), and the first temporary stopping operation is performed. At this time, the third stopping sound is output. That is, different sound effects (stopping sounds) are output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops. Also, when the third stopping sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 125(14), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. At this time, a switching indication sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (15), a part of the switching image 520 becomes invisible, and a part of the stage image 61 is redisplayed. Meanwhile, at this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 remain in a state where they are difficult to see or cannot be seen. Also, at this time, a switching non-display sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (16), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three highly decorative rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) of the highly decorative decorative patterns 41 stopping is not output. Also, as described above, the variable BGM is not output at this time, so there is no sound.
Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (17), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "434", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 26)
127 and 128 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 26) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 127 and Fig. 128. The variable performance example 26 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SP reach performance is executed.
The variable performances shown in Figures 127 and 128 are variable performances that are executed when "ER9" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 55.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 121(1) to (8), 122(9) to (16), and 124(1) to (5) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 127(1), the SP reach effect starts and an SP reach image 517 is displayed. At this time, the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the 11th visual mode and performs the second temporary stop operation, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 is not displayed (difficult to see or cannot be seen).
Next, as shown in FIG. 127(2), the development teasing performance is started, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth viewing mode (see FIG. 59-3(23)), and performs the third variation operation. When the third variation operation is performed, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in such a manner as to replace the display position of the development image 521 along the third variation path (see FIG. 60-1(3)). In the illustrated example, the "5" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a layer behind the development image 521 in the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in Fig. 127 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see Fig. 59-3 (24)). At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a layer in front of the developed image 521 in the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 127(4), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see FIG. 59-4(25)).
Next, as shown in Fig. 127(5), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode (see Fig. 59-4(26)). At this time, the developed image 521 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(6), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see FIG. 59-4(27)), and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the fourth stop sound is output. Also, when the fourth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 127 (7), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. At this time, a switching indication sound is output.
127(8), a part of the switching image 520 becomes non-displayed and a part of the stage image 61 is re-displayed. At this time, a switching non-display sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 128 (9), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three rows of highly decorative decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) of the highly decorative decorative patterns 41 stopping is not output, but is silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (10), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "454", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 27)
FIG. 129 is a diagram showing one aspect of the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 27) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 129. The variable performance example 27 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed.
The change presentation shown in FIG. 129 is executed when "ER4" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in FIG. 55.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 111 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 129 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode and a fourth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 129(2), the reach teasing performance is started, and the left and right decorative symbols 41 "7" are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode (see Fig. 59-2(9)) and perform the fourth varying motion. In the second stage, the left and right decorative symbols 41 displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode are displayed as if they are swaying left and right. At this time, the reach teasing fourth effect image 565 is also displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 129(3), the left and right decorative symbols 41, "7", are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode (see Fig. 59-2(10)). At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed further outward in the left-right direction of the image 511 than in the first mode of the ninth visual mode (see Fig. 129(2)). At this time, the fourth reach teasing effect image 565 is also displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 129(4), the right row decorative pattern 41 and the middle row decorative pattern 41 are displayed in the third mode of the ninth visual mode (see Fig. 59-2(11)) and perform the fourth varying action. At this time, the left row decorative pattern 41 performs the first temporary stopping action.

Next, as shown in Fig. 129 (5), the right-row decorative pattern 41 and the middle-row decorative pattern 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the fifth stop operation. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed on the right side of each of the right-row decorative pattern 41 and the middle-row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 129(6), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 129(7), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "718", are fixed and stopped.

In addition, in variable performance example 27, after the performance shown in FIG. 129(4) is executed, the performance shown in FIG. 129(6) may be executed without executing the performance shown in FIG. 129(5). In other words, if the reach performance is not executed after the reach teasing performance is executed, the display of the decorative pattern 41 in the sixth visual mode and the output of the 15th stop sound may not be performed.

(Example of variation 28)
FIG. 130 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 28) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 130. The variable performance example 28 is an example of a variable performance based on a winning entry to the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state, in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SP reach performance is executed.
It should be noted that this is a variable performance that is executed when "ER10" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in the variable performance diagram 55 shown in FIG. 130.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 111 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 130 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode and a fourth variable operation is performed.
130(2), the reach-inducing performance is started, and the left and right decorative symbols 41 of "4" are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the reach-inducing fourth effect image 565 is displayed on the left and right sides of each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.

130(3), the left and right decorative symbols 41 of "4" are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual recognition mode. At this time, a fourth reach-inducing effect image 565 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 130(4), the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode (see FIG. 59-2(12)), and a seventh stopping motion, which is the motion when the fluctuation stops, is performed. When the seventh stopping motion is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in an action such that they expand while swinging left and right, respectively. The seventh stopping motion can also be regarded as a seventh reach motion, which is the motion of the decorative symbols 41 when a reach is established (when the reach performance starts). At this time, a tenth effect image 566 at the time of stopping is also displayed. At this time, a fifth reach sound, which is the sound effect when a reach is established, is output. The fifth reach sound can also be regarded as a seventeenth stopping sound, which is the sound effect when the decorative symbols 41 have stopped.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 124 (1) to (8), 125 (9) to (16), and 126 (17) are performed.

(Example of variation 29)
131 to 135 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 29) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 131 to 135. The variable performance example 29 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SPSP reach performance is executed.
131 to 135 are the variation performances executed when "ER11" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 55. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 131(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the determination of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue. The display mode of blue of this reserved image 52 may be the display mode at the start of display, or may be a result of a change in the display mode in the variation performance executed while this reserved image 52 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (2), with the start of the change display of the next special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and a seventh start operation, which is an operation when the change starts, is performed. When the seventh start operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an action such that they move upward. At this time, a seventh start effect image 567 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the change image 51, and the change image 51 is displayed in blue. At this time, a second start sound, which is an effect sound of the start of the change, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a third visual mode and a fourth varying action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 131(4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (5), the reel performance is executed, and the right movable reel 115C moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel 8 effect image 568 is displayed around the right movable reel 115C on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the 7th reel sound, which is the sound effect of the reel performance, is output. At this time, the display of the 3 rows of decorative patterns 41 in the 4th visual recognition mode continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 131(6), the role production ends and the role eighth effect image 568 is hidden. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.

Next, as shown in Fig. 131 (7), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, a step 1 sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 131 (8), the second step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, step 2 sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 132 (9), the third stage step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, a step 3 sound, which is a sound effect for the third stage step performance, is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 132 (10), the step image 508 is turned off. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 132 (11), a button operation effect is started, and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the first period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect, a third operation image 569 is displayed as shown in Fig. 132 (12). At this time, a fourth operation sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the effect button 161 is operated, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (13), the zone promotion effect is started and a zone promotion image 505 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 132 (14), the zone presentation is started, and a zone notification image 528 is displayed. At this time, a zone effect image 529 is displayed around the zone notification image 528. Also, at this time, a zone start sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the zone presentation has started.
Next, as shown in Fig. 132 (15), a zone execution image 530 is displayed. At this time, the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual recognition mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (16), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the fifth stop motion. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the left of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (17), the right row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (18), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual confirmation mode, and the fifth stopping action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (19), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and an eighth reach action, which is the action of the decorative symbol 41 when the reach is established (when the reach performance starts), is performed. When the eighth reach action is being performed, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed as if both hands are raised. In addition, the eighth reach action has a higher expectation than the sixth reach action. At this time, a second reach line image 531 and a second reach notification image 532 are displayed. In addition, at this time, a third reach sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the reach has been established, is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (20), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop motion is performed. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. Also, at this time, the first variable sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (21), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (22), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (23), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (24), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (25), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (26), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (27), the SP reach performance starts, and an SP reach image 517 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (28), an effect is executed in which the "4" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye changes to a "3". At this time, the "3" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye performs a symbol change action. Also, at this time, a change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the decorative symbols 41 of the reach eye. Also, at this time, a symbol change sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (29), the development teasing effect is started, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the "4" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (30), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (31), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (32), the development image 521 stops, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 is hidden. At this time, the development effect image 534 is displayed around the development image 521. At this time, a development stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 135 (33), the development performance is executed. At this time, the role performance is executed, and the center movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the center movable role 115B has moved to a position lower than the position shown in Fig. 118 (5). At this time, the role fourth effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the fourth role sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 135 (34), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourteenth visual mode (see Fig. 59-4 (29)). At this time, the SPSP reach effect is started, and the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (35), a button operation effect is started, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Press!", which prompts the user to operate the effect button 161. At this time, the effect button 161 emits white light. At this time, a second button sound is output. The effective operation period of this button operation effect is the second period.
Then, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation effective period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 135 (36), three rows of decorative patterns 41, "343", are displayed in the fifteenth visual mode (see FIG. 59-4 (30)). At this time, the sixth stop sound is output. Also, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (37), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. At this time, a switching indication sound is output.
135(38), a part of the switching image 520 becomes non-displayed and a part of the stage image 61 is re-displayed. At this time, a non-display switching sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 135 (39), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three rows of highly decorative decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) of the highly decorative decorative patterns 41 stopping is not output, and the display becomes silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (40), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "343", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 30)
136 to 141 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 30) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 136 to 141. The variable performance example 30 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SPSP reach performance is executed.
The variation performances shown in Figures 136 to 141 are variation performances that are executed when "ER12" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 55. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 131 (1) to (5) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 136 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and a fourth variable operation is performed.
136(2), a button operation effect is started, and button operation image 502 is displayed. The effective operation period of this button operation effect is the first period. At this time, a first button sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation effective period in the button operation effect, the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops as shown in FIG. 136 (3). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is also output. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become invisible (difficult to see or impossible to see).

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(4), the pseudo-continuous image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 136(5), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x2", which indicates that the second change of the decorative symbols 41 will be performed. At this time, a first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 136 (6), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode, and a fourth variation operation is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size, and the display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (7), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 136 (8), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed so as to move downward. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are not displayed (hard to see or cannot be seen).
137(9), the pseudo-continuous image 511 is displayed so as to swing up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, a pseudo-continuous fanning effect image 512 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 137 (10), the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. Also, at this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output. That is, the same sound effect is output when the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops for the first time (see Fig. 136 (3)) and the second time.
Next, as shown in FIG. 137(11), the pseudo-continuous image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137 (12), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh viewing mode, and the first temporary stop operation is being performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x3", indicating that the decorative pattern 41 will change for the third time. At this time, a second re-change sound is output. That is, in the change performance example 30, the sound effect (change start sound) is different when the decorative pattern 41 starts to change for the first time (see FIG. 131 (2)), when the decorative pattern 41 starts to change for the second time (see FIG. 136 (5)), and when the decorative pattern 41 starts to change for the third time.

Next, as shown in Fig. 137 (13), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode, and the fourth variation operation is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size, and the display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 137 (14), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Fig. 137 (15), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, a step 1 sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 137 (16), the second step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, step 2 sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 138 (17), the third step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, a step 3 sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (18), the left row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (19), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stop motion. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the left of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 138 (20), the right row decorative symbol 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode. At this time, the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (21), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode, and the fifth stopping action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 138 (22), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the eighth reach action is performed. At this time, the second reach line image 531 and the second reach notification image 532 are displayed. Also, at this time, the third reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (23), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop motion is performed. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to green. Also, at this time, the second variable sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (24), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (25), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (26), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (27), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (28), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (29), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (30), the SP reach performance starts, and an SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (31), an effect is executed in which the "4" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye changes to a "3". At this time, the "3" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye performs a symbol changing action. Also, at this time, a change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the decorative symbols 41 of the reach eye. Also, at this time, a symbol changing sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (32), the development teasing effect is started, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the "4" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (33), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (34), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (35), the development image 521 stops and the middle row decorative pattern 41 is hidden. At this time, the development effect image 534 is displayed around the development image 521. At this time, a development stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (36), the development performance is executed. At this time, the role performance is executed, and the middle movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 4 effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the 4th role sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 140 (37), the SPSP reach effect starts, and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourteenth visual recognition mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (38), a button operation effect is started, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Press!", which prompts the user to operate the effect button 161. At this time, the effect button 161 emits white light. At this time, a second button sound is output. The effective operation period of this button operation effect is the second period.
Then, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation effective period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 140 (39), "343", which is three rows of decorative patterns 41, is displayed in the fifteenth visual mode. At this time, the sixth stop sound is output. Also, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (40), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. At this time, a switching indication sound is output.
141 (41), a part of the switching image 520 becomes non-displayed and a part of the stage image 61 is re-displayed. At this time, a switching non-display sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 141 (42), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three highly decorative decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect of the highly decorative decorative patterns 41 stopping is not output, and the display becomes silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (43), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "343", are fixed and stopped.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the specific sound (first stop sound) output when the left row decorative pattern 41 stops common to the specific sound output when the right row decorative pattern 41 stops in the variable performance of the first performance mode (first stage) (for example, the variable performance of variable performance example 10 (see Figures 82 to 86)), and can make it different from the specific sound (sixth stop sound) output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops. And, the performance control unit 300 can make the specific sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops common between the variable performance of the first performance mode and the variable performance of the second performance mode (second stage) (variable performance example 29 (see Figures 131 to 135)).
In this case, the impression of the decorative pattern 41 stopping is made different depending on the row in which the decorative pattern 41 stops, and the impression of the middle row decorative pattern 41 stopping is suppressed from being different depending on the presentation mode. In other words, it is possible to switch between making the impression of the decorative pattern 41 stopping different depending on the row in which the decorative pattern 41 stops, or giving a common impression to the decorative pattern 41 stopping regardless of the presentation mode, thereby improving the interest of the game.
In addition, in the first presentation mode, the changing presentation in which a specific sound is output when the left row decorative pattern 41 stops, the changing presentation in which a specific sound is output when the right row decorative pattern 41 stops, and the changing presentation in which a specific sound is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops may be a single changing presentation or may be multiple different changing presentations.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific variable presentation in which an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is executed is performed, a common stop sound is more likely to be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode (a display mode with low decorativeness) in the first stage (see FIG. 86 (36)) and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode (see FIG. 135 (36)) than when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode (a display mode with high decorativeness) in the first stage (see FIG. 83 (16)) and when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode in the second stage (see FIG. 132 (16)). Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the stop of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in a special display mode regardless of the stage.
In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to make the stopping sound output when the pseudo consecutive images 511 stop in the first stage and the second stage the same (see FIG. 87(3) and FIG. 136(3)). Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the pseudo consecutive images 511 stop regardless of the stage.

When a specific variable performance is performed, the fact that a common stop sound is more likely to be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode in the first stage and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode in the second stage than when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode in the first stage and when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode in the second stage includes that when a specific variable performance is performed, a common stop sound is not always output (0%) when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode in the first stage and when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode in the second stage, and that when a specific variable performance is performed, a common stop sound is always output (100%) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode in the first stage and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode in the second stage.

(Example of variation 31)
FIG. 142 is a diagram showing one aspect of the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 31) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 142. The variable performance example 31 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed.
The variable performance shown in Fig. 142 is a variable performance executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determined performance pattern" in Fig. 53 and "ER2" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 55. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 142(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 142(2), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and the seventh start operation is performed. At this time, the seventh start effect image 567 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. The second reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the first reserved image 52, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. The reserved number display 55 for the first start port 121 is updated to "1". At this time, the second start sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a third visual appearance and a fourth varying action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode and a fourth varying action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 142(5), the reel performance is executed, and the right movable reel 115C moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel 8 effect image 568 is displayed around the right movable reel 115C on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the 7th reel sound is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the 4th visual recognition mode continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (6), the reel performance ends, and the reel effect image No. 8 568 is hidden. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues. Also, at this time, the display mode of the reserved image 52 changes from the normal display mode to blue. Also, at this time, the third change sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (7), a chance eye effect is executed, and "331" which is three rows of decorative symbols 41 stops. All of these three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in red. At this time, a chance eye second effect image 570 is displayed around the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, an 18th stop sound which is a sound effect when the three rows of decorative symbols 41 stop is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 142(8), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "331", are fixed and stopped.
In the variation performance example 31, the seventh start action, the seventh effect image 567 at the start, the second start sound, the role effect, and the chance eye effect are all examples of the pre-determination effects. Also, these pre-determination effects are effects that make the player expect a big win in the variation effect next to the variation effect when these pre-determination effects are being executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can perform a preparatory operation of the decorative pattern 41 in the first and second stages before the decorative pattern 41 changes along the change path (see FIG. 61(2) and FIG. 111(2)). The performance control unit 300 can also make the preparatory operation of the decorative pattern 41 different between the first and second stages. Therefore, a variety of performances can be realized from the start of the change.
Furthermore, in the first and second stages, after the decorative pattern 41 has fluctuated along the fluctuation path, the performance control unit 300 can stop the decorative pattern 41 (see FIG. 62 (9) and FIG. 112 (9)). The performance control unit 300 can make the stopping operation of the decorative pattern 41 different between the first and second stages. Therefore, a variety of performances can be realized even near the end of the fluctuation performance.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can make the stopping operation (see FIG. 72 (14), FIG. 121 (6), etc.) of the special symbols (pseudo consecutive images 511, development images 521) the same in the first stage and the second stage. In addition, it is possible to make the stopping operation of the decorative symbols 41 and the stopping operation of the special symbols different in both the first stage and the second stage. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the special symbol has stopped, regardless of the stage.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can make the movement path of the small symbols 56 common between the first stage and the second stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first variable path (see FIG. 60-1(1)) or the fourth variable path (see FIG. 60-1(4)) is used in the variable performance, when a specific performance (pseudo consecutive performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, etc.) is executed, the same type of stop operation of the performance pattern is performed (stop operation of the pseudo consecutive image 511, stop operation by the fifth mode (see FIG. 59-4(27)) in the 13th visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41, stop operation by the 15th visual recognition mode (see FIG. 59-4(30)), etc.). Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the stop of the performance pattern regardless of the variable path used.
In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or fourth variable path is used in the variable performance, when the specific performance is executed, a stop action different from the stop action set for each stage (see FIG. 62(9), FIG. 112(9)) is executed. Therefore, regardless of the stage, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the specific performance has been executed.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or fourth variable path is used in the variable presentation, when a stop action (such as the stop action of the pseudo consecutive image 511, the stop action of the fifth mode (see FIG. 59-4 (27)) in the thirteenth visual mode of the decorative pattern 41, or the stop action of the fifteenth visual mode (see FIG. 59-4 (30))) different from the stop action set for each stage (see FIG. 62 (9) and FIG. 112 (9)) is executed, a big win game is likely to be executed. Therefore, the player's expectation that a stop action different from the stop action set for each stage will be executed can be increased.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the variation performance using the first variation path or the variation performance using the fourth variation path is being executed, when a predetermined performance (display of switching image 520) is executed, the performance pattern stops in a specific mode (a mode in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a temporary stopped state without going through the fifth viewing mode and the sixth viewing mode) that is different from the mode when the first variation path and the fourth variation path are used. In particular, this specific mode is a mode common to the variation performance using the first variation path and the variation performance using the second variation path.

In addition, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can limit the output of the stopping sound when the decorative pattern 41 stops when the SP reach presentation or the SPSP reach presentation is executed in both the losing variation presentation using the first variation path and the losing variation presentation using the fourth variation path (see FIG. 86 (39) and FIG. 135 (39)). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reduction in interest in the game by emphasizing the stopping of the decorative pattern 41 more than necessary.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute a first sound performance that outputs a specific sound (stop sound) when a specific row of symbols (middle row decorative symbol 41) stops in both the first and fourth change paths. Also, the performance control unit 300 can execute a second sound performance (output of pseudo consecutive stop sound, development stop sound) when a special symbol (pseudo consecutive image 511, development image 521) stops. And, the first sound performance is made easier to execute in a losing change performance where the special symbol does not stop (reach performance is not executed) than in a losing change performance where the special symbol stops.
In addition, the fact that the first sound effect is more likely to be executed in a losing variation performance in which the special pattern does not stop (the reach effect is not executed) than in a losing variation performance in which the special pattern stops includes the fact that the first sound effect is never executed (0%) in a losing variation performance in which the special pattern stops, and the fact that the first sound effect is always executed (100%) in a losing variation performance in which the special pattern does not stop (the reach effect is not executed).
In addition, if the first sound effect is more likely to be executed in a losing variation performance in which the special symbol does not stop (the reach effect is not executed) than in a losing variation performance in which the special symbol stops, the first sound effect may be executed in the losing variation performance in which the special symbol stops.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or fourth variable path is used, the performance control unit 300 can make the performance mode (type of stopping sound) of the sound performance when a specific row of patterns (middle row decorative pattern 41) stops different between a case where a variable performance in which a reach performance is not executed is executed and a case where a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or fourth fluctuation path is used, when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode).
In addition, regardless of whether the first or fourth fluctuation path is used, when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the output of a stop sound is more difficult when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop in a specific display mode. This includes the fact that the output of a stop sound is always executed (100%) when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop in a specific display mode in a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed, and the fact that the output of a stop sound is always executed (0%) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode in a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed.
Furthermore, regardless of whether the first or fourth fluctuation path is used, when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, if it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop in a specific display mode, then a stopping sound may not be output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop in a specific display mode in a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed, or a stopping sound may be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode in a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or fourth fluctuation path is used, when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the output of a stop sound is less likely to be executed when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) than when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop.
In addition, regardless of whether the first or fourth variation path is used, when a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the output of a stop sound is more difficult when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the left and right row decorative patterns 41 stop. This includes the fact that the output of a stop sound is always executed (100%) when the left and right rows decorative patterns 41 stop in a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed, and the fact that the output of a stop sound is always executed (0%) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode in a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed.
Furthermore, regardless of whether the first or fourth fluctuation path is used, when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, if it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop, then it is acceptable that a stopping sound is not output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop in a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed, or a stopping sound may be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode in a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or fourth fluctuation path is used, when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (a display mode with high decorativeness) than when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode (a display mode with low decorativeness).
In addition, regardless of whether the first or fourth fluctuation path is used, when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the output of a stop sound is more difficult when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode, including the fact that the output of a stop sound is always executed (100%) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode in a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed, and the fact that the output of a stop sound is always executed (0%) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode in a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed.
Furthermore, regardless of whether the first or fourth fluctuation path is used, when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, if it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode, then a stopping sound may not be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode in a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed, or a stopping sound may be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode in a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or fourth fluctuation path is used, it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed than when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is not executed is performed.
In addition, regardless of whether the first or fourth fluctuation path is used, the fact that it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed than when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is not executed is performed includes the fact that when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is not executed is performed, the output of a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is always executed (100%), and the fact that when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the output of a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is always executed (0%).
Regardless of whether the first or fourth fluctuation path is used, if it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed than when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is not executed is performed, then it may be possible that the output of a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is not executed when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is not executed is performed.

(Example of variation 32)
143 to 150 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 32) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 143 to Fig. 150. The variable performance example 32 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. The variable performance example 32 is also an example of a variable performance executed after the variable performance shown in the variable performance example 31. In other words, the variable performance example 32 is an example of a variable performance showing the lottery result of the special symbol lottery suggested by the blue reserved image 52 (see Fig. 142 (6)) shown in the variable performance example 31.
143 to 150 are variation effects that are executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 55. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples are mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 143(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the confirmation of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(2), when the next special symbol starts to change, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and the seventh start operation is performed. At this time, the seventh start effect image 567 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. The first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed in blue. At this time, the second start sound is output.
At this time, a vibration effect is started and the effect button 161 vibrates.

Next, as shown in Fig. 143(3), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual recognition mode and perform the fourth varying action. At this time, the vibration effect is continued.
Next, as shown in Fig. 143(4), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode. At this time, the vibration effect is continued.
Next, as shown in FIG. 143(5), the reel effect is executed, and the right movable reel 115C moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel 8 effect image 568 is displayed around the right movable reel 115C on the image display unit 114. At this time, the 7th reel sound is output. At this time, the vibration effect is also ended. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the 4th visual recognition mode is also continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(6), the zone promotion effect is started and a zone promotion image 505 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 143 (7), the zone presentation starts, and a zone notification image 528 is displayed. At this time, a zone effect image 529 is displayed around the zone notification image 528. Also, at this time, a zone start sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 143 (8), zone execution image 530 is displayed. Also, a button operation effect is started, and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the first period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect, the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops as shown in FIG. 144 (9). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become invisible (difficult to see or impossible to see). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (10), the pseudo-continuous image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (11), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x2", which indicates that the second change of the decorative patterns 41 will be performed. At this time, a first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 144 (12), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode, and the fourth variation operation is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size, and the display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (13), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (14), the pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed so as to move downward. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are not displayed (difficult to see or not visible).
144(15), the pseudo-continuous image 511 is displayed so as to swing up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, a pseudo-continuous fanning effect image 512 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 144 (16), the pseudo consecutive win image 511 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive win stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive win image 511. Also, at this time, a pseudo consecutive win stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (17), the pseudo-continuous image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (18), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x3", which indicates that the decorative symbols 41 will change for the third time. At this time, a second re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 145 (19), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode, and the fourth variation operation is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size, and the display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (20), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Fig. 145 (21), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, a step 1 sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 145 (22), the second step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a step 2 sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 145 (23), the third step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, a step 3 sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 145 (24), the step image 508 is hidden. Also, the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and the fourth varying action is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 146 (25), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stop motion. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the left of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 146 (26), the right row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (27), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode, and the fifth stopping action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 146 (28), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the eighth reach action is performed. At this time, the second reach line image 531 and the second reach notification image 532 are displayed. Also, at this time, the third reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (29), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode, and the first temporary stop motion is performed. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. Also, at this time, the first variable sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (30), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (31), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (32), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (33), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (34), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (35), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (36), the SP reach performance starts, and an SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (37), an effect is executed in which the "4" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye changes to a "3". At this time, the "3" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye performs a symbol change action. Also, at this time, a change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the decorative symbols 41 of the reach eye. Also, at this time, a symbol change sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (38), the development teasing effect is started, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the "4" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (39), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (40), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (41), the development image 521 stops, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 is hidden. At this time, the development effect image 534 is displayed around the development image 521. At this time, a development stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (42), the development performance is executed. At this time, the role performance is executed, and the middle movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 4 effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the 4th role sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 148 (43), the SPSP reach effect starts, and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourteenth visual recognition mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (44), the button operation effect starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Make it!", which prompts the user to operate the effect button 161. At this time, a button effect image 557 is displayed around the button operation image 502. At this time, the effect button 161 emits a red light. At this time, a third button sound is output. The effective operation period of this button operation effect is the third period.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 148 (45), the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "333", are temporarily stopped. At this time, a success image 538 is displayed. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect button 161 vibrates. At this time, the effect button 161 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a first success sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (46), the reel effect is executed, and the left movable reel 115A, the center movable reel 115B, and the right movable reel 115C each move to a position where they overlap the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel fifth effect image 539 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and the rainbow light emission of the effect button 161 continues. At this time, the first jackpot notification sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (47), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and the rainbow light emission of the effect button 161 continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (48), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues, while the effect button 161 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (49), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues, while the effect button 161 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (50), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and stops. At this time, the doublet first effect image 556 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative patterns 41. At this time, the big win first effect image 540 continues to be displayed, the vibration effect continues, and the rainbow light emission of the effect button 161 continues. At this time, the eighth stop sound is output.
Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 149 (51), the button operation effect is started and the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the effect button 161 emits light in white. Also, at this time, the fourth button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the effective operation period in the button operation effect, the repeating number decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual recognition mode, as shown in Fig. 149 (52). At this time, the first big win effect image 540 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (53), the repeating decorative symbols 41 "333" are temporarily stopped. That is, the promotion effect is not executed after the promotion hint effect is executed. At this time, the repeating second effect image 541 is displayed around each of the repeating decorative symbols 41. Also, at this time, the ninth stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (54), three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "333", are fixed and stopped with the stop display of the special symbols. Also, the first big win effect image 540 is not displayed. Note that the first big win effect image 540 may be displayed when the decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56 are fixed and stopped.
Next, as shown in Fig. 149 (55), a big win game notification image 542 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the big win game notification image 542 displays the text "Bonus!".
Next, as shown in Fig. 149 (56), a right-hit image 543 is displayed. At this time, a round number image 544 and a round-in-progress image 545 are displayed. The round number image 544 displays the text "Round 1."
Next, when the final round is completed, as shown in Fig. 150 (57), a time-saving start image 546 is displayed. The text "Special time-saving start!" is displayed on the time-saving start image 546.

Next, in the special time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 150 (58), the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness, "333", is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. And, like the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56 is also fixed and stopped by the sequence of numbers "333". Also, at this time, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the fourth stage (fourth presentation mode), which is the presentation mode in the special time-saving game state. Also, at this time, the variable presentation is not being executed, but background music corresponding to the fourth stage is being output from the speaker 156.

As described above, the variable performance of this embodiment includes a first variable performance in which the path of the change of the pattern in a specific row (e.g., middle row decorative pattern 41) in the first performance mode (first stage) is a first path (e.g., the first variable path (see Figure 60-1 (1)) etc.), and a second variable performance in which the path of the change of the pattern in a specific row in the second performance mode (second stage) is a second path different from the first path (e.g., the fourth variable path (see Figure 60-1 (4)) etc.). The performance control unit 300 can differentiate the specific sound (e.g., the first stop sound) output when the pattern stops in the first variable performance from the specific sound (e.g., the 15th stop sound) output when the pattern stops in the second variable performance.
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of variable performances consisting of various variable paths according to the performance mode. Also, by outputting a specific sound according to the performance mode when the symbols stop, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the symbols without getting bored, and it is possible to make the player easily recognize the "symbol stop", which is one of the divisions in the variable performance, regardless of the performance mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The variable performance of this embodiment includes a first variable performance in which the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in a first display mode (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 61(1)) in the first performance mode (first stage), and a second variable performance in which the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in a second display mode (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 111(1)) in the second performance mode (second stage).The performance control unit 300 can differentiate the specific sound (for example, the first stop sound) output when the pattern stops in the first variable performance from the specific sound (for example, the 15th stop sound) output when the pattern stops in the second variable performance.
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of variable presentations consisting of various display modes of the decorative symbols 41 according to the presentation mode. Also, by outputting a specific sound according to the presentation mode when the symbols stop, the player is not bored with the stopped symbols and is drawn to the attention of the player, so that the player can easily recognize the "stopped symbols", which is one of the divisions in the variable presentation, regardless of the presentation mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Also, in this embodiment, when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the first presentation mode (first stage), the first effect image 503 (see FIG. 62 (9)) is displayed when it stops, and when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the second presentation mode (second stage), the eighth effect image 560 (see FIG. 112 (9)) is displayed when it stops. In other words, the specific sound output and the specific presentation (effect image) executed when the pattern stops in the first variable presentation are both different from the specific sound output and the specific presentation executed when the pattern stops in the second variable presentation.
In addition, the specific sound output and the specific performance executed when the pattern stops in the first variable performance may be common to either the specific sound output and the specific performance executed when the pattern stops in the second variable performance, and the other may be different. In other words, the specific sound output or the specific performance executed when the pattern stops in the first variable performance may be common to either the specific sound output or the specific performance executed when the pattern stops in the second variable performance.

In addition, the variable performance of this embodiment includes a first variable performance in which the path of the change of the pattern in a specific row (e.g., the middle row decorative pattern 41) in the first performance mode (first stage) is a first path (e.g., the first variable path (see FIG. 60-1 (1)) etc.), and a second variable performance in which the path of the change of the pattern in a specific row in the second performance mode (second stage) is a second path different from the first path (e.g., the fourth variable path (see FIG. 60-1 (4)) etc.). In addition, the performance control unit 300 can execute a common performance that is common when a specific performance is executed in both the first variable performance and the second variable performance. Examples of specific performances include reach performances (normal reach performances, SP reach performances, SPSP reach performances), pseudo consecutive performances, zone performances, gimmick performances, button operation performances, vibration performances, etc. In addition, as common effects, images displayed in association with specific effects (decorative pattern 41, button operation image 502, first reach line image 509, first reach notification image 510, pseudo consecutive image 511, transition image 516, SP reach image 517, development image 521, zone notification image 528, zone effect image 529, zone execution image 530, second reach line image 531, second reach notification image 532, SPSP reach image 536, success image 538, role fifth effect image 539, big win first effect image 540, double number fourth effect image 541, etc.) These include the display of sound effects (first effect image 556, repeated number second effect image 541, etc.) output in conjunction with specific performances (first button sound, first role sound, first reach sound, second role sound, pseudo consecutive stop sound, first re-fluctuation sound, third stop sound, fourth stop sound, third role sound, zone start sound, third reach sound, first changing sound, development stop sound, fourth role sound, second button sound, sixth stop sound, second re-fluctuation sound, second changing sound, third changing sound, third button sound, first success sound, first jackpot notification sound, eighth stop sound, fourth button sound, ninth stop sound, fourth changing sound).
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of variable presentations consisting of various variable paths according to the presentation mode. Also, by executing a common presentation in any of the presentation modes, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the presentation effect of the specific presentation being executed even if the specific presentation is executed in any presentation mode, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, a common effect is executed in the first stage and the second stage, but it is possible to make the presentation mode after the common effect is executed different (for example, the display mode of the stage image 61 after the SP reach effect is executed). Therefore, even when a common effect is executed, the player can feel the diversity of the presentation.

In this embodiment, the performance symbols include a first performance symbol (decorative symbol 41) and a second performance symbol (pseudo consecutive image 511, developing image 521). The performance control unit 300 can make the stop sound of the first performance symbol different between the first stage and the second stage (first stop sound, 15th stop sound), but make the stop sound of the second performance symbol the same between the first stage and the second stage (pseudo consecutive stop sound and developing stop sound). This allows for a variety of stop modes of the first performance symbol depending on the stage, and makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second performance symbol has stopped regardless of the stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can output a first specific sound (stop sound of the decorative pattern 41 of the losing number) when the decorative pattern 41 stops when a losing variation performance is executed, regardless of whether the first variation path or the second variation path is used. And, the performance control unit 300 can output a second specific sound (stop sound of the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers) when the decorative pattern 41 stops when a big win variation performance is executed, regardless of whether the first variation path or the second variation path is used, and then output a third specific sound (stop sound of the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers after the promotion teasing performance) when the decorative pattern 41 stops. Therefore, when a big win variation is executed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers has stopped.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or second change path is used, the performance control unit 300 can execute a first start performance by the decorative pattern 41 when the change performance starts (for example, the movement of the decorative pattern 41 shown in FIG. 61(2) and the display of the first effect image 501 at the start) and a second start performance different from the first start performance (for example, the movement of the decorative pattern 41 shown in FIG. 94(2) and the display of the third effect image 525 at the start).The performance control unit 300 makes the execution ratio of a predetermined performance (such as a role performance as a continuous performance (see FIG. 94(5))) in the change performance different between when the first start performance is executed and when the second start performance is executed.
In addition, having different execution rates of the specified performance in the variable performance when the first start performance is executed and when the second start performance is executed includes the fact that the specified performance is not always executed when the first start performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the specified performance is always executed when the second start performance is executed (100%).
In addition, in this embodiment, the specified performance is made easier to execute when the second start performance is executed than when the first start performance is executed, but it may also be made easier to execute the specified performance when the first start performance is executed than when the second start performance is executed.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific sound performance (output of a stop sound) when the decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode) in the variable performance, regardless of whether the first variable path or the second variable path is used, and can limit the specific sound performance when the decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode. The execution rate of the predetermined performance (display of the switching image 520) is different between a case where a variable performance capable of executing a specific sound performance is performed and a case where a variable performance capable of limiting the specific sound performance is performed.
In addition, the different execution rates of the specified performance when a variable performance capable of executing a specific sound performance is performed and when a variable performance capable of restricting a specific sound performance is performed include not always executing the specified performance (0%) when a variable performance capable of executing a specific sound performance is performed, and always executing the specified performance (100%) when a variable performance capable of restricting a specific sound performance is performed.

In this embodiment, the miss variation performance in which the reach performance is not executed includes a first variation performance in which the start sound is not output (see, for example, FIG. 116(2)), and a second variation performance in which the start sound is output (see, for example, FIG. 142(2)). When a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, it is easier to win the jackpot in the next variation performance when the second variation performance is executed than when the first variation performance is executed (variation performance example 32 is easier to execute).
In addition, when a reservation for the first starting port 121 is stored, it is easier to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variable performance example 32 is easier to execute), which also includes the fact that when the first variable performance is executed, there is no guarantee that there will be a jackpot in the next variable performance (0%) (variable performance example 32 is never executed). Also, when a reservation for the first starting port 121 is stored, if it is easier to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variable performance example 32 is easier to execute), it may be possible to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the first variable performance is executed (variable performance example 32 may be executed), and it may not be possible to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed (variable performance example 32 may not be executed).

In addition, when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, it may be possible to make it more likely that an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) will be executed in the next variation performance (variation performance example 29 or variation performance example 30 will be executed) if the second variation performance in which a start sound is output is executed rather than if the first variation performance in which a start sound is not output is executed.
In addition, when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, the fact that an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is more likely to be executed in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variation performance example 29 or variable performance example 30 is more likely to be executed) also includes the fact that when the first variable performance is executed, an SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance will definitely not be executed in the next variable performance (0%) (variation performance example 29 or variable performance example 30 will definitely not be executed). Furthermore, if a hold is stored for the first starting port 121 and an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is more likely to be executed in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variation performance example 29 or variable performance example 30 is more likely to be executed), then an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) may be executed in the next variable performance when the first variable performance is executed (variation performance example 29 or variable performance example 30 may be executed), and an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) does not have to be executed in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed (variation performance example 29 or variable performance example 30 does not have to be executed).

(Example of variation 33)
FIG. 151 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 33) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 151. The variable performance example 33 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
In addition, FIG. 151 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA2" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 55. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figs. 142(1)-(8), 143(1)-(8), 144(9)-(16), 145(17)-(24), 146(25)-(32), 147(33)-(40), and 148(41)-(43) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 151(1), the button operation effect starts and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!", which encourages the user to operate the effect button 161. At this time, the effect button 161 lights up in red. At this time, a third button sound is output. The effective operation period of this button operation effect is the third period.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 151 (2), the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "333", are temporarily stopped. Meanwhile, at this time, the success image 538 (see FIG. 148 (45)) is not displayed. Also, at this time, the vibration effect is not executed. Also, at this time, the effect button 161 emits white light. Also, at this time, the first success sound is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(3), a success image 538 is displayed. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect button 161 vibrates. At this time, the effect button 161 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a first success sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 148 (46) to (48), 149 (49) to (56), and 150 (57) and (58) are executed.

As described above, in variable performance example 33, the timing of the display of success image 538, the vibration performance, the rainbow light emission of performance button 161, and the output of the first success sound is delayed relative to the time of operation of performance button 161, compared to variable performance example 32. In other words, in variable performance example 33, the period from when performance button 161 is operated in the button operation performance to the display of success image 538, the start of the vibration performance, the rainbow light emission of performance button 161, and the output of the first success sound is longer than in variable performance example 32.

In addition, in the variation performance example 33, a success image 538 is displayed, but this is not limited to this.
In variable performance example 33, after the performance shown in FIG. 151 (2) is performed, a vibration performance, the illumination of the performance button 161 in rainbow colors, and the output of the first success sound may be executed without the success image 538 being displayed.

(Example of variation 34)
FIG. 152 is a diagram showing one aspect of the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 34) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 152. The variable performance example 34 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.
In addition, Figure 152 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA3" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 55. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the above-mentioned variation performance examples will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 142 (1) to (8), 143 (1) to (8), 144 (9) to (16), 145 (17) to (24), 146 (25) to (32), 147 (33) to (40), 148 (41), and (42) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 152 (1), the SPSP reach effect begins, and the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 14th visual mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 152 (2), a button operation effect is started, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!", which encourages the operation of the effect button 161. At this time, a vibration effect is started, the effect button 161 emits white light, and a second button sound is output. The effective operation period of this button operation effect is the second period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 152 (3), the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "333", are temporarily stopped. At this time, a success image 538 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect is continued. At this time, the effect button 161 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a first success sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 148 (46) to (48), 149 (49) to (56), and 150 (57) and (58) are executed.

(Variation example 35)
FIG. 153 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 35) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 153. The variable performance example 35 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.
In addition, Figure 153 is a variation performance that is executed when "EB1" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 55. In addition, in the following explanation, the points that differ from each of the above-mentioned variation performance examples will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 153(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the confirmation of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (2), as the display of the next special symbol begins, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual mode, and an eighth start operation, which is the operation performed when the symbol begins to change, is performed. When the eighth start operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in such a way that they move downward. At this time, an eighth start effect image 571 is displayed below each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed. Furthermore, the display mode of the changing image 51 changes from red to rainbow colors. At this time, a vibration effect is performed. At this time, a fourth changing sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode and a fourth variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 153 (4), the reach-inducing performance is started, and the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode, and are displayed so as to sway left and right. At this time, the reach-inducing fourth effect image 565 is also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (5), the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second mode of the ninth viewing mode, and are displayed so as to sway left and right outside the first mode of the ninth viewing mode in the left-right direction of the image 511. At this time, the fourth reach-teasing effect image 565 is also displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 153 (6), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode, and the fourth stopping action is performed. At this time, the fourth stop effect image 549 is displayed so as to surround each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41. At this time, the fourth reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (7), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "6" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 154 (9), the middle symbol fanning effect is started, and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 17th visual mode (see Fig. 59-5 (35)). At this time, the doublet fanning first effect image 550 is displayed above and below the middle row decorative symbol 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in Fig. 154 (10), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the 17th visual mode (see Fig. 59-5 (36)). At this time, the doublet-triggering second effect images 551 are displayed on the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.
Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (11), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 17th visual mode (see FIG. 59-5 (37)) and stops. At this time, the fifth effect image 552 at the time of stopping is displayed around the middle row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect button 161 emits light in rainbow colors. Also, at this time, the 11th stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (12), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the sixteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (13), the repeating number decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 154 (14), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and stopped. At this time, the sixth stop effect image 553 is displayed so as to surround each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twelfth stop sound is output.
In the variation performance example 35, even when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 16th visual mode, the stage image 61 is displayed. However, even in the variation performance example 35, when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 16th visual mode, the first big win effect image 540 may be displayed instead of the stage image 61.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (15), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the vibration effect ends. At this time, the luminous color of the effect button 161 changes from rainbow color to white.
Then, as shown in FIG. 154 (16), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, ie, "777", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 36)
155 and 156 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 36) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 155 and Fig. 156. The variable performance example 36 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
155 and 156 are variation effects that are executed when "EB2" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 55. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 153 (1) to (7) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 155 (1), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and a first temporary stopping action is performed, and the middle row decorative pattern 41, "7", is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and a fourth variable action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (2), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "8" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode.

155(4), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, a transition image 516 is displayed in place of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 155(5), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 155(6), the SP reach performance starts, and an SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (7), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the twelfth visual mode, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 performs a second varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode and performs the second variable operation.
Next, as shown in Fig. 156 (9), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the SP promotion second effect image 519 is displayed on the upper right side and the lower left side of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in Fig. 156 (10), the button operation effect is started, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Make it!". At this time, a button effect image 557 is displayed around the button operation image 502. At this time, the effect button 161 emits light in red, and a third button sound is output. The operation effective period of this button operation effect is the third period.
Then, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation effective period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 156 (11), the "7" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the seventh effect image 554 at the time of stopping is displayed around the middle row decorative pattern 41. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect button 161 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a thirteenth stop sound which is a sound effect when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops is output.
After this, the same presentation as shown in Figures 148 (46) to (48), 149 (49), and (50) is performed, except that the repeated decorative pattern 41 is "777", and then, as the special patterns stop changing, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 and the small pattern 56, "777", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 37)
FIG. 157 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 37) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 157. The variable performance example 37 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
In addition, Figure 157 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA4" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 55. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the above-mentioned variation performance examples will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 131 (1) to (8), Fig. 132 (9) to (16), Fig. 133 (17) to (24), Fig. 134 (25) to (32), Fig. 135 (33), and Fig. 135 (34) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 157 (1), the button operation effect starts and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Press!" At this time, the effect button 161 emits white light and a second button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the second period.
Then, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 157 (2), the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "333", perform the first temporary stop operation. At this time, the success image 538 is displayed. The effect button 161 emits light in rainbow colors, and the first success sound is output. Meanwhile, the vibration effect is not performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(3), the role production is executed, and the left movable role 115A, the center movable role 115B, and the right movable role 115C move to positions where they overlap the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role fifth effect image 539 is displayed. At this time, the performance button 161 continues to emit light in rainbow colors, and the first big win notification sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 157(4), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 is displayed. Also, at this time, the illumination of the rainbow color of the effect button 161 continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 157 (5), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 continues to be displayed, and the illumination of the rainbow color of the effect button 161 continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 157 (6), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 continues to be displayed, and the effect button 161 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in Fig. 157 (7), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and stop. At this time, the doublet first effect image 556 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. Also, at this time, the big win first effect image 540 continues to be displayed, the performance button 161 continues to emit light in rainbow colors, and the eighth stop sound is output.
Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 157(8), the button operation effect is started and the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the effect button 161 emits white light. Also, at this time, the fourth button sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 149 (52) to (56) and Figures 150 (57) and (58) are performed.
In this way, in the variation performance example 37, a vibration performance is not executed.

(Example of variation 38)
FIG. 158 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 38) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 158. The variable performance example 38 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.
In addition, Figure 158 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA5" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 55. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the above-mentioned variation performance examples will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figs. 142(1)-(8), 143(1)-(8), 144(9)-(16), 145(17)-(24), 146(25)-(32), 147(33)-(40), and 148(41)-(43) are performed. Next, as shown in Fig. 158(1), the button operation effect starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!", which prompts the user to operate the effect button 161. At this time, a button effect image 557 is displayed around the button operation image 502. At this time, the effect button 161 emits red light, and a third button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the effective operation period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 158 (2), "343", which is three rows of decorative patterns 41, is displayed in the fifteenth visual mode and temporarily stops. At this time, the sixth stop sound is output. Also, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 158 (3), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. At this time, a switching indication sound is output.
158(4), a part of the switching image 520 becomes non-displayed and a part of the stage image 61 is re-displayed. At this time, a switching non-display sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 158 (5), the entire switching image 520 becomes invisible, and three rows of highly decorative decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect of the highly decorative decorative patterns 41 stopping is not output, and the display becomes silent.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(6), the revival image 558 is displayed, and the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "333," are temporarily stopped. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect button 161 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a first revival sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the revival image 558 is displayed, is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 158(7), the role effect is executed, and the left movable role 115A, the center movable role 115B, and the right movable role 115C move to positions where they overlap the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role fifth effect image 539 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and the rainbow light emission of the effect button 161 continues. At this time, the first big win notification sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win, is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 148 (47) and (48), Figures 149 (49) to (56), and Figures 150 (57) and (58) are performed.

(Variation of Variation Example 29)
Next, a modified example of the variation performance example 29 will be explained.
First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 131 (1) to (8) and Fig. 132 (9) to (14) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 159 (1), a zone execution image 530 is displayed. At this time, the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the fourth variable action.
Next, as shown in Fig. 159 (2), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the fifth stopping operation. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the left of the left row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the nineteenth stop sound, which is the sound effect of the decorative pattern 41 stopping, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(3), the right row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 159 (4), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual confirmation mode, and the fifth stopping action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the nineteenth stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 159 (5), the reach-ey decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the eighth visual confirmation mode, and a ninth reach action, which is the action of the decorative pattern 41 when a reach is established (when the reach performance starts), is performed. When the ninth reach action is being performed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed as if raising the left hand. At this time, a first reach line image 509 and a first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, a first reach sound is output.
In this way, different reach actions may be executed for each number of the decorative pattern 41.
In this embodiment, as a variable performance, a variable performance shown as a modified example of variable performance example 29 may be provided instead of variable performance example 29, or a variable performance shown as a modified example of variable performance example 29 may be provided together with variable performance example 29.

(Variation of normal reach performance)
Next, a modified example of the normal reach effect executed in the second stage will be described. As an example of the modified example, a modified example of the normal reach effect in the variation effect example 29 (see FIG. 133 (20) to (24)) will be described below.
First, when the left and right decorative symbols 41 stop with the same number, as shown in Fig. 160 (1), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the eighth visual recognition mode, and the eighth reach action is performed. At this time, the second reach line image 531 and the second reach notification image 532 are displayed. Also, at this time, the third reach sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160 (2), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop action. Also, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the fifth variation action, which is the action when varying. When the fifth variation action is being executed, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an action such that it moves from the bottom to the top of the image display unit 114 via the middle fifth variation path CR5 (see FIG. 60-1 (5)). Also, at this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. Also, at this time, the first variation sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 160 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and the fifth variable action is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 160 (4), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the fifth variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 160 (5), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the fifth variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 160 (6), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the fifth variable action.
After this, just like in the variation performance example 29, a transition image 516 is displayed and then the SP reach performance begins.

As described above, in the modified example, in a normal reach performance, the movement path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes a movement path different from that before the reach performance starts (see Figure 131 (4)).
In addition, in FIG. 160, the change path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 during the normal reach performance in the change performance example 29 is the middle fifth change path CR5, but it is not limited to this. The change path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 during the normal reach performance in the change performance example 30, the change performance example 32 to the change performance example 38 may be the middle fifth change path CR5.
In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to each of the variable performances shown in variable performance example 29, variable performance example 30, and variable performance example 32 to variable performance example 38, each variable performance may be provided in which the variable path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 during the normal reach performance in variable performance example 29, variable performance example 30, and variable performance example 32 to variable performance example 38 is the middle fifth variable path CR5.

(Example of variation 39)
Next, referring to Fig. 161 to Fig. 163, a variable presentation (variable presentation example 39) performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like will be specifically described. The variable presentation example 39 is a variable presentation example based on a game ball winning in the first start hole 121 in a normal game state. The variable presentation example 39 is a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach presentation is not executed, and is a variable presentation based on the number of reserved balls for winning in the first start hole 121 being "1".
The variable performances shown in Figures 161 to 163 are variable performances that are executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 55.
In addition, each of the change performance examples from change performance example 39 to change performance example 57 described later is an example of a change performance when the change starts in the third stage.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 161 (1), the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 "213" are fixed and stopped by the performance control unit 300 as the previous special pattern is stopped and displayed. This decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the third stage, and is different from the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 in the first stage (see FIG. 61 (1)) and the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 in the second stage (see FIG. 111 (1)). At this time, one reserved image 52, reserved number display 55, and stage image 61 are displayed on the image display unit 114. In addition, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the third stage (third performance mode). The third stage is a performance mode in the normal game state. Also, at this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121 shows "1", which is the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting port 122 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the second starting port 122. Also, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the first visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (2), the change performance starts with the start of the change display of the special symbol. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the change image 51. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second viewing mode, and a ninth start operation, which is an operation when starting the change, is performed. When the ninth start operation is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an action to move to the upper left side. At this time, a ninth start effect image 572 is displayed on the upper left side of each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. The change of the small symbols 56 also starts. At the third stage, the change BGM continues to be output from the start to the end of the change performance, but this change BGM is a different piece of music from both the change BGM in the first stage and the change BGM in the second stage.

Next, as shown in Fig. 161 (3), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode, and perform a sixth varying operation, which is an operation when the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are varying. When the sixth varying operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed to move to the lower right side along a sixth varying path (see Fig. 60-1 (6)).
Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (4), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual appearance and perform a sixth varying operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(5), the button operation performance is executed, and the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first button sound, which is a sound effect when the button operation image 502 is displayed, is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual recognition mode. The operation effective period of this button operation performance is the first period.
If the effect button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period of the effect button 161 in the button operation effect, the button operation image 502 is hidden as shown in FIG. 161 (6). Note that no sound (non-display sound) is output in response to the button operation image 502 being hidden. Also, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 161 (7), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the sixth variable action.
Next, as shown in Figure 161 (8), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the sixth variable action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (9), the left-row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode, and performs the eighth stop action, which is the action when the variation stops. When the eighth stop action is being performed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed as vibrating. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left-row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the first stop sound, which is the sound effect of the decorative pattern 41 stopping, is output from the speaker 156.
Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (10), the right-row decorative symbol 41, "1", is displayed in the fifth visual state and performs the sixth variable action. At this time, the visual state of the left-row decorative symbol 41 becomes the seventh visual state and performs the first temporary stop action.
Next, as shown in Figure 162 (11), the right row decorative pattern 41 "1" passes, and the right row decorative pattern 41 "2" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the sixth variable action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (12), the right-row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eighth stop motion. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the right side of the right-row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 162 (13), the "9" in the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode, and performs the seventh visual motion, which is the motion when the decorative pattern is being changed. When the seventh visual motion is being performed, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in such a way that they rotate counterclockwise along the seventh visual path (see Fig. 60-1 (7)) and then move upward. At this time, the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode, and performs the first temporary stop motion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (14), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "9" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "1" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the seventh variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (15), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eighth stop operation. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the upper left side of the middle row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output. That is, the same sound effect is output when the left row decorative pattern 41 stops, when the right row decorative pattern 41 stops, and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (16), the visual appearance of the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes the seventh visual appearance, so that all three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual appearance and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (17), with the special symbol being stopped, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped. Also, with the end of the variable performance, the variable image 51 is erased (displayed).

Figure 164 is a diagram showing another presentation example in variable presentation example 39.
In the variation performance example 39, a performance example in which the performance button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation performance is described. In the following, a performance example in which the performance button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation performance is described.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 161(1) to (4) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 164(1), a button operation effect is executed and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first button sound is also output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation effective period in the button operation effect, a first image at operation 504 is displayed as shown in Fig. 164 (2). This first image at operation 504 is displayed in a display mode different from both the first image at operation 504 in the first stage (see Fig. 64 (2)) and the first image at operation 504 in the second stage (see Fig. 114 (2)). At this time, a fifth operation sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the effect button 161 has been operated, is output from the speaker 156.

164(3), the first operation image 504 is turned off, and the three rows of decorative symbols 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 161 (7) and (8), Figures 162 (9) to (16), and Figure 163 (17) are performed.

(Example of variation 40)
FIG. 165 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 40) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 165. The variable performance example 40 is a variable performance example based on a game ball winning in the first start port 121 in a normal game state. The variable performance example 40 is a variable performance executed when "ER5" is selected as the "variable performance" in Fig. 55. The variable performance example 40 is a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed, and is a variable performance based on the number of reserved balls for winning in the first start port 121 being "1".
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 161 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 165 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the sixth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 165 (2), a zone tilt effect is executed, and a zone tilt image 505 is displayed. At this time, the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth viewing mode and then in the sixth viewing mode, but the display of the left row decorative pattern 41 in the fifth viewing mode and the display in the sixth viewing mode are hidden by the zone tilt image 505, making it difficult or impossible to see. Also, when the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth viewing mode, the first stop sound is not output.

In the variation performance example 40, the zone performance is not performed after the zone promotion performance is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 165 (3), the zone promotion image 505 is not displayed. Also, at this time, the left column decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 162 (10) to (16) and Figure 163 (17) are performed.
In addition, when the zone teasing image 505 is displayed in the zone teasing performance, the left row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the seventh viewing mode without being displayed in the fifth viewing mode or the sixth viewing mode, and when the zone teasing image 505 becomes hidden, the left row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the seventh viewing mode.

(Example of variation 41)
FIG. 166 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 41) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 166. The variable performance example 41 is a variable performance example of the decorative pattern 41 based on the game ball winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state. The variable performance example 41 is a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed, and is a variable performance based on the number of reserved balls for winning the first start hole 121 being "4".
In addition, Figure 166 is a variation performance that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 55. In addition, in the following explanation, the points that differ from each of the above-mentioned variation performance examples will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Fig. 166 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the determination of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 in the image display unit 114. In addition, four reserved images 52 are displayed, and "4" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 166(2), the variation performance starts with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. At this time, the three columns of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and perform the tenth start operation, which is the operation when starting the variation. When the tenth start operation is being executed, the three columns of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in such a manner that they move alternately between the upper left side and the lower right side. Also, at this time, the tenth start effect image 574 is displayed on the upper left side and the lower right side of each of the three columns of decorative symbols 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual appearance and perform a sixth varying action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual appearance and perform a sixth varying operation.
Next, as shown in Fig. 166 (5), the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the sixth variation operation, and the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the seventh variation operation. The movement speed of the three decorative patterns 41 at this time is faster than the movement speed of the decorative patterns 41 displayed in the fifth visual mode in the variation performance example 39 and the variation performance example 40.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (6), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the sixth viewing mode, and a ninth stop action is performed, which is the action when the fluctuation stops. When the ninth stop action is being performed, the decorative patterns 41 are displayed to move so as to sway to the upper left and lower right. At this time, the twelfth stop effect image 575 is displayed on the upper left and lower right sides of each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41. At this time, the first stop sound is output from the speaker 156. That is, the same sound effect is output when the decorative patterns 41 stop in fluctuation performance example 39 and fluctuation performance example 40 and when the decorative patterns 41 stop in fluctuation performance example 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (7), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 166 (8).

(Variation of Variation Example 41)
Next, a modified example of the variable performance example 41 will be explained.
It has been explained that the sound effect output when the decorative pattern 41 stops is the same (both are the first stop sound) in the variable performance (variable performance example 39, variable performance example 40) where the pending number for winning at the first starting port 121 is "1" and a reach performance is not executed, and the variable performance (variable performance example 41) where the pending number for winning at the first starting port 121 is "4" and a reach performance is not executed, but this is not limited to the above.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 166 (1) to (4) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 167 (1), the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform a sixth variable action, and the decorative patterns 41 in the middle row are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform a seventh variable action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 167(2), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the ninth stop operation. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed on the upper left and lower right sides, respectively, at the time of stopping the twelfth effect image 575. At this time, the second stop sound is output from the speaker 156. That is, a different sound effect is output from when the decorative symbols 41 stop in the variation performance example 39 and the variation performance example 40.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 167(4).

In addition, in the variable performance of this embodiment, the variable performance shown in the modified example of variable performance example 41 may be provided instead of the variable performance shown in variable performance example 41, or the variable performance shown in the modified example of variable performance example 41 may be provided together with the variable performance shown in variable performance example 41.

(Example of variation 42)
168 to 170 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 42) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 168 to Fig. 170. The variable performance example 42 is a variable performance example in which a reach performance is executed based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state.
In addition, the variable performance example 42 is a variable performance that is executed when "ER6" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 55.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 168 (1), the performance control unit 300 stops the display of the previous special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 "213" are fixed. In addition, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121. In addition, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first viewing mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168 (2), the variable performance starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second viewing mode, and a ninth start operation is performed. At this time, a ninth start effect image 572 is displayed on the upper left side of each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. Also, the variable of the small symbols 56 starts.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual appearance and perform a sixth varying action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 168(4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168 (5), the reel performance is executed, and the middle movable reel 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the upper part of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel 9 effect image 576 is displayed. Also, at this time, the reel 8 sound effect, which is the sound effect of the reel performance, is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in Fig. 168(6), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, the first step sound, which is the sound effect of the first step performance, is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 168 (7), the second stage step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, the second stage sound, which is the sound effect of the second stage step performance, is output.
The display manner of the step image 508 displayed in the third stage is different from the display manner of the step image 508 displayed in the first stage (see FIG. 68 (6) etc.) and the display manner of the step image 508 displayed in the second stage (see FIG. 118 (6)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 168 (8), the left row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 169 (9), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 169 (10), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the eighth stop motion. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169 (11), the right row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 169 (12), the right row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the right row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 169 (13), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eighth stopping action. As a result, the left and right decorative symbols 41 stop with the same numbers, resulting in a reach state. At this time, the eleventh stopping effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stopping sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169 (14), the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the eighth visual mode, and a tenth reach action, which is the action of the decorative symbols 41 when a reach is achieved (when the reach performance starts), is performed. When the tenth reach action is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed as if they are raising their left hand. At this time, a first reach line image 509 and a first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, a first reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 169 (15), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode and perform the first temporary stop motion. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first variable motion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169 (16), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed to move downward. This pseudo consecutive image 511 passes through the middle first variation path CR1, which is the same variation path as the middle row decorative pattern 41.
170(17), the pseudo-continuous image 511 is displayed so as to swing up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, a pseudo-continuous image tilting effect image 512 is displayed around the pseudo-continuous image 511.

In the variation performance example 42, the pseudo consecutive performance is not performed after the pseudo consecutive fanning performance is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 170 (18), after the pseudo consecutive image 511 passes, the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual recognition mode, and the first variation operation is performed. This middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a larger size than the decorative patterns 41 of the left and right rows.
Next, as shown in FIG. 170 (19), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the middle row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the first stop sound is output. At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size so as to be the same display size as the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows.

Next, as shown in FIG. 170 (20), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 170 (21).

(Example of variation 43)
171 to 174 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 43) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 171 to 174. The variable performance example 43 is an example of a variable performance based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state, in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach performance is executed.
The variation performance shown in Figures 171 to 174 is a variation performance that is executed when "ER7" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 55. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 161 (1) to (3) is executed, and then, as shown in Figure 171 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the sixth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 171 (2), the reel performance is executed, and the left movable reel 115A moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel 10th effect image 577 is displayed around the left movable reel 115A. Also, at this time, the 9th reel sound, which is the sound effect of the reel performance, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 171 (3), the left row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 171 (4), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 171 (5), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eighth stop operation. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the first stop sound is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 171(6), the right row decorative symbol 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode. At this time, the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 171 (7), the right row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the right row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 171 (8), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eighth stopping action. As a result, the left and right decorative symbols 41 stop with the same numbers, resulting in a reach state. At this time, the eleventh stopping effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stopping sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 172 (9), the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the tenth reach action is performed. At this time, the first reach line image 509 and the first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, the first reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 172 (10), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode and perform the first temporary stop motion. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first variable motion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 172 (11), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed so as to move downward.
172(12), the pseudo-continuous image 511 is displayed so as to swing up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, a pseudo-continuous fanning effect image 512 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 172 (13), the pseudo consecutive win image 511 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive win stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive win image 511. At this time, a pseudo consecutive win stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 172 (14), the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. However, even when the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner, the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and the first temporary stop motion may be continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 172 (15), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "434", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is being performed. Also at this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x2", indicating that the decorative patterns 41 will change for the second time. Also at this time, the first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 172 (16), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode, and the sixth variation operation is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size, and the display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 173 (17), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 173 (18), the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the sixth variable action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 173 (19), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the eighth stop motion. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173 (20), the right row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 173 (21), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, and the eighth stopping action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eleventh stopping effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stopping sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 173 (22), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the tenth reach action is performed. At this time, the first reach line image 509 and the first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, the first reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 173 (23), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable motion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173 (24), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 174 (25), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 174 (26), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 174 (27), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the middle row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the first stop sound is output. That is, the same sound effect (stop sound) is output when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops.
Next, as shown in Fig. 174 (28), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the display size of the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in such a manner that it is reduced to the same display size as the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, ie, "454", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 174 (29).

(Example of variation 44)
175 to 177 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 44) of the variable performance of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to Figures 175 to 177. The variable performance example 44 is an example of a variable performance based on a winning entry to the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state, in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the SP reach performance is executed.
The variable performances shown in Figures 175 to 177 are variable performances that are executed when "ER8" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 55.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 171 (1) to (8), 172 (9) to (16), and 173 (17) to (24) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 175 (1), the middle row decorative pattern 41, "4," is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode, and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (2), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable action.
Next, as shown in Figure 175 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(4), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (5), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stop motion is performed.
In addition, when the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first and second modes of the eleventh visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(6), the SP reach performance starts, and an SP reach image 517 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (7), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 12th visual mode (see FIG. 59-3 (17)), and the second variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode (see FIG. 59-3 (18)) and performs a second variable operation.

Next, as shown in Fig. 176 (9), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Fig. 59-3 (19)). At this time, the SP promotion first effect image 518 is displayed on the upper right and lower left sides of the middle row decorative pattern 41 on the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in Figure 176 (10), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode and performs the second variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (11), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the SP promotion second effect image 519 is displayed on the upper right side and the lower left side of the middle row decorative pattern 41 on the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in Fig. 176 (12), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fourth mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Fig. 59-3 (20)). In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in such a way that it returns to the upper right side of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (13), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth mode of the twelfth visual mode (see FIG. 59-3 (21)), and the first temporary stopping operation is performed. At this time, the third stopping sound is output. That is, different sound effects (stopping sounds) are output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops. Also, when the third stopping sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (14), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. At this time, a switching indication sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (15), a part of the switching image 520 becomes invisible. More specifically, the switching image 520 is displayed in such a way that it moves to the right side of the image display unit 114, and thus a part of the switching image 520 becomes invisible. At this time, a part of the stage image 61 is redisplayed. Meanwhile, at this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 maintain a state in which they are difficult to see or cannot be seen. At this time, a switching non-display sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (16), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three highly decorative decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) of the highly decorative decorative patterns 41 stopping is not output. Also, as described above, the variable BGM is not output at this time, so there is no sound.
Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (17), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "434", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 45)
178 and 179 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 45) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 178 and Fig. 179. The variable performance example 45 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SP reach performance is executed.
The change presentation shown in Figures 178 and 179 is executed when "ER9" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in Figure 55.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 171(1) to (8), Fig. 172(9) to (16), Fig. 173(17) to (24), and Fig. 175(1) to (5) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 178(1), the SP reach effect starts and the SP reach image 517 is displayed. At this time, the reach eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode and performs the second temporary stop operation, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 is not displayed (difficult to see or cannot be seen).
Next, as shown in FIG. 178(2), the development teasing performance is started, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see FIG. 59-3(23)), and the third variation operation is performed. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41, "5", is displayed in a layer behind the development image 521 in the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in Fig. 178 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see Fig. 59-3 (24)). At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a layer in front of the developed image 521 in the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (4), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see FIG. 59-4 (25)).
Next, as shown in Fig. 178(5), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode (see Fig. 59-4(26)). At this time, the developed image 521 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(6), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see FIG. 59-4(27)), and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the fourth stop sound is output. Also, when the fourth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 178(7), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. At this time, a switching indication sound is output.
178(8), a part of the switching image 520 becomes non-displayed and a part of the stage image 61 is re-displayed. At this time, a switching non-display sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 179 (9), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three rows of highly decorative decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) of the highly decorative decorative patterns 41 stopping is not output, and the display becomes silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (10), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "454", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 46)
FIG. 180 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 46) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 180. The variable performance example 46 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed.
The change presentation shown in FIG. 180 is executed when "ER4" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in FIG. 55.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 161 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 180 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and a sixth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 180(2), the reach-inducing performance is started, and the left and right decorative symbols 41 "7" are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode (see Fig. 59-2(9)) and perform the sixth varying action. At this time, the reach-inducing fifth effect image 578 is displayed on the lower right side of each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in Fig. 180(3), the left and right decorative symbols 41 of "7" are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode (see Fig. 59-2(10)). At this time, the sixth reach-inducing effect image 579 is displayed on the upper left and lower right sides of each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.
Next, as shown in Fig. 180(4), the right row decorative pattern 41 and the middle row decorative pattern 41 are displayed in the third mode of the ninth visual mode (see Fig. 59-2(11)). At this time, the right row decorative pattern 41 performs the sixth varying motion, the middle row decorative pattern 41 performs the seventh varying motion, and the left row decorative pattern 41 performs the first temporary stopping motion.

Next, as shown in Fig. 180 (5), the right-row decorative pattern 41 and the middle-row decorative pattern 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the eighth stop operation. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the right-row decorative pattern 41 and the upper left side of the middle-row decorative pattern 41, respectively. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (6), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 180(7), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "718", are fixed and stopped.

In addition, in the variable performance example 46, after the performance shown in FIG. 180(4) is executed, the performance shown in FIG. 180(6) may be executed without executing the performance shown in FIG. 180(5). In other words, if the reach performance is not executed after the reach teasing performance is executed, the display of the decorative pattern 41 in the sixth visual mode and the output of the first stop sound may not be performed.

(Example of variation 47)
FIG. 181 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 47) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 181. The variable performance example 47 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SP reach performance is executed.
The change presentation shown in FIG. 181 is executed when "ER10" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in FIG. 55.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 161 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 181 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and a sixth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 181 (2), the reach-inducing performance is started, and the "4" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode and perform the sixth varying action. At this time, the reach-inducing fifth effect image 578 is displayed on the lower right side of each of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows.

181(3), the left and right decorative symbols 41 of "4" are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the sixth reach-inducing effect image 579 is displayed on the upper left and lower right sides of each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (4), the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode (see FIG. 59-2 (12)), and a tenth stop motion is performed, which is the motion when the fluctuation stops. When the tenth stop motion is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in an action such that they expand while swinging up and down, respectively. The tenth stop motion can also be regarded as an eleventh reach motion, which is the motion of the decorative symbols 41 when a reach is established (when the reach performance starts). At this time, a thirteenth effect image 580 is displayed at the time of stopping, so as to surround each of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows. At this time, a sixth reach sound, which is the sound effect when a reach is established, is output. The sixth reach sound can also be regarded as a twentieth stop sound, which is the sound effect when the decorative symbols 41 are stopped.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 175 (1) to (8), 176 (9) to (16), and 177 (17) are performed.

(Example of variation 48)
182 to 186 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 48) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 182 to 186. The variable performance example 48 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SPSP reach performance is executed.
182 to 186 are variation effects that are executed when "ER11" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 55. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 182(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the determination of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue. The display mode of blue of this reserved image 52 may be the display mode at the start of display, or may be a result of a change in the display mode in the variation performance executed while this reserved image 52 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 182(2), with the start of the change display of the next special pattern, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and an eleventh start operation, which is an operation when the change starts, is performed. When the eleventh start operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in such a manner that they move alternately between the upper right side and the lower left side. At this time, an eleventh effect image 581 is displayed at the start around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the change image 51, and the change image 51 is displayed in blue. Also, at this time, a third start sound, which is an effect sound of the start of the change, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and a sixth varying action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 182(4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 182(5), the reel performance is executed, and the right movable reel 115C moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel 11th effect image 582 is displayed around the right movable reel 115C on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the reel sound 10, which is the sound effect of the reel performance, is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 182(6), the role production ends and the role 11 effect image 582 is hidden. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.

Next, as shown in Fig. 182 (7), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, the first step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 182 (8), the second stage step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, the second stage sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 183 (9), the third stage step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, a third stage sound, which is a sound effect for the third stage step performance, is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 183 (10), the step image 508 is turned off. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 183 (11), a button operation effect is started, and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the first period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect, as shown in Fig. 183 (12), the second image at operation 527 is displayed. The text "Coming?!" is displayed in this second image at operation 527. That is, the display mode of the second image at operation 527 in the second stage is different from the display mode of the second image at operation 527 in the first stage (see Fig. 83 (12)). At this time, a sixth operation sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the effect button 161 has been operated, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (13), the zone promotion effect is started and a zone promotion image 505 is displayed.
183(14), the zone effect is started, and a zone notification image 528 is displayed. At this time, a zone effect image 529 is displayed around the zone notification image 528. At this time, a zone start sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the zone effect has started.
Next, as shown in Fig. 183 (15), a zone execution image 530 is displayed. At this time, the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual recognition mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (16), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the eighth stop motion. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (17), the right row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (18), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, and the eighth stopping action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eleventh stopping effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stopping sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (19), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and a 12th reach action, which is the action of the decorative symbol 41 when a reach is established (when the reach performance starts), is performed. When the 12th reach action is being performed, the ribbon worn by the character in the decorative symbol 41 is displayed as if it is floating. Also, the 12th reach action has a higher expectation than the 10th reach action. At this time, a second reach line image 531 and a second reach notification image 532 are displayed. Also, at this time, a third reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (20), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable motion. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. At this time, the first variable sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (21), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 184 (22), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 184 (23), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 184 (24), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (25), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (26), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (27), the SP reach performance starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (28), an effect is executed in which the "4" decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye changes to a "3". At this time, the "3" decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye performs a pattern change action. Also, at this time, a change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the decorative patterns 41 of the reach eye. Also, at this time, a pattern change sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (29), the development teasing effect is started, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the "4" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (30), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (31), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (32), the development image 521 stops, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 is hidden. At this time, the development effect image 534 is displayed around the development image 521. At this time, a development stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 186 (33), the development performance is executed. At this time, the role performance is executed, and the center movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the center movable role 115B has moved to a position lower than the position shown in FIG. 168 (5). At this time, the role fourth effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the fourth role sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 186 (34), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourteenth visual mode (see Fig. 59-4 (29)). At this time, the SPSP reach effect is started, and the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 186 (35), a button operation effect is started, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Press!", which prompts the user to operate the effect button 161. At this time, the effect button 161 emits white light. At this time, a second button sound is output. The effective operation period of this button operation effect is the second period.
Then, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation effective period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 186 (36), three rows of decorative patterns 41, "343", are displayed in the fifteenth visual mode (see FIG. 59-4 (30)). At this time, the sixth stop sound is output. Also, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 186 (37), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. At this time, a switching indication sound is output.
186 (38), a part of the switching image 520 becomes non-displayed, and a part of the stage image 61 is re-displayed. At this time, a switching non-display sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 186 (39), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three rows of highly decorative decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) of the highly decorative decorative patterns 41 stopping is not output, and the display becomes silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 186 (40), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "343", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 49)
187 to 192 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 49) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 187 to 192. The variable performance example 49 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SPSP reach performance is executed.
The variation performances shown in Figures 187 to 192 are variation performances that are executed when "ER12" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 55. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 182 (1) to (5) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 187 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the sixth variable operation is performed.
187(2), a button operation effect is started, and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the first period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation effective period in the button operation effect, the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops as shown in FIG. 187 (3). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become invisible (difficult to see or impossible to see). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187(4), the pseudo-continuous image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 187(5), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x2", which indicates that the second change of the decorative symbols 41 will be performed. At this time, a first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 187 (6), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode, and the sixth variation operation is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size, and the display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 187(7), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 187 (8), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed so as to move downward. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are not displayed (hard to see or cannot be seen).
188(9), the pseudo-continuous image 511 is displayed so as to swing up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, a pseudo-continuous fanning effect image 512 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 188 (10), the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. Also, at this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output. That is, the same sound effect is output when the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops for the first time (see Fig. 187 (3)) and the second time.
Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (11), the pseudo-continuous image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (12), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh viewing mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 displays the text "x3", indicating that the decorative pattern 41 will change for the third time. At this time, a second re-change sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the decorative pattern 41 will change again, is output. That is, in the change performance example 49, the sound effect (change start sound) is different when the decorative pattern 41 starts to change for the first time (see FIG. 182 (2)), when the decorative pattern 41 starts to change for the second time (see FIG. 187 (5)), and when the decorative pattern 41 starts to change for the third time.

Next, as shown in Fig. 188 (13), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode, and the sixth variation operation is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size, and the display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (14), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Fig. 188 (15), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, the first step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 188 (16), the second step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, the second step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 189 (17), the third step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, the third step sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 189 (18), the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the sixth variable action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (19), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the eighth stop motion. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 189 (20), the right-row decorative symbol 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the sixth varying action. At this time, the left-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stopping action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (21), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, and the eighth stopping action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eleventh stopping effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stopping sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 189 (22), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the twelfth reach action is performed. At this time, the second reach line image 531 and the second reach notification image 532 are displayed. Also, at this time, the third reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (23), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop action. At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable action. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to green. At this time, a second variable sound is output. That is, the sound effect (variable sound) is different when the display mode of the variable image 51 changes to red (see FIG. 184 (20)) and when it changes to green.

Next, as shown in Figure 189 (24), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 190 (25), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 190 (26), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 190 (27), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (28), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (29), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (30), the SP reach performance starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (31), an effect is executed in which the "4" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye changes to a "3". At this time, the "3" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye performs a symbol changing action. Also, at this time, a change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the decorative symbols 41 of the reach eye. Also, at this time, a symbol changing sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (32), the development teasing effect is started, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the "4" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (33), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (34), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (35), the development image 521 stops, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 is hidden. At this time, the development effect image 534 is displayed around the development image 521. At this time, a development stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (36), the development performance is executed. At this time, the role performance is executed, and the middle movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 4 effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the 4th role sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 191 (37), the SPSP reach effect starts, and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourteenth visual recognition mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (38), the button operation effect is started, and the button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Press!", which prompts the user to operate the effect button 161. At this time, the effect button 161 emits white light. At this time, the second button sound is output. The effective operation period of this button operation effect is the second period.
Then, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation effective period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 191 (39), "343", which is three rows of decorative patterns 41, is displayed in the fifteenth visual mode. At this time, the sixth stop sound is output. Also, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (40), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. At this time, a switching indication sound is output.
192 (41), a part of the switching image 520 becomes non-displayed and a part of the stage image 61 is re-displayed. At this time, a switching non-display sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 192 (42), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three highly decorative decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect of the highly decorative decorative patterns 41 stopping is not output, and the display becomes silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 192 (43), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "343", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 50)
FIG. 193 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 50) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 193. The variable performance example 50 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed.
The variable performance shown in Fig. 193 is a variable performance executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determined performance pattern" in Fig. 53 and "ER2" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 55. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 193(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 193(2), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual confirmation mode, and an eleventh start operation is performed. At this time, an eleventh start effect image 581 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. The second reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the first reserved image 52, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. The reserved number display 55 for the first start port 121 is updated to "1". At this time, a third start sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 193 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and a sixth varying action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 193 (4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and a sixth varying action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 193(5), the role performance is executed, and the right movable role 115C moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 11th effect image 582 is displayed around the right movable role 115C on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the 10th role sound is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 193 (6), the reel performance ends, and the reel 11th effect image 582 is hidden. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode continues. Also, at this time, the display mode of the reserved image 52 changes from the normal display mode to blue. Also, at this time, the third change sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 193(7), a chance eye effect is executed, and "331" which is three rows of decorative symbols 41 stops. All of these three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in red. At this time, a chance eye third effect image 583 is displayed around the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, a 21st stop sound which is a sound effect when the three rows of decorative symbols 41 stop is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 193(8), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "331", are fixed and stopped.
In addition, in the variation performance example 50, the seventh stop sound may be output instead of the twenty-first stop sound.
In addition, the eleventh start action, the eleventh effect image 581 at the start, the third start sound, the role effect, and the chance eye effect in the variation effect example 50 are all examples of the pre-determination effect. In addition, these pre-determination effects are effects that make the player expect a big win in the variation effect next to the variation effect when these pre-determination effects are being executed.

(Example of variation 51)
194 to 201 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 51) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 194 to Fig. 201. The variable performance example 51 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. Also, the variable performance example 51 is an example of a variable performance executed after the variable performance shown in the variable performance example 50. In other words, the variable performance example 51 is an example of a variable performance showing the lottery result of the special pattern lottery suggested by the blue reserved image 52 (see Fig. 193 (6)) shown in the variable performance example 50.
In addition, Figures 194 to 201 are the variation performances that are executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 55. In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 194(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 194(2), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and an eleventh start operation is performed. At this time, an eleventh start effect image 581 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51, and the variable image 51 is displayed in blue. Also, at this time, a third start sound is output.
At this time, a vibration effect is started and the effect button 161 vibrates.

Next, as shown in Fig. 194 (3), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual recognition mode and perform the sixth varying action. At this time, the vibration effect is continued.
Next, as shown in Fig. 194(4), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode. At this time, the vibration effect is continued.
Next, as shown in FIG. 194(5), the reel effect is executed, and the right movable reel 115C moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel 11 effect image 582 is displayed around the right movable reel 115C on the image display unit 114. At this time, the 10th reel sound is output. At this time, the vibration effect is also ended. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode is also continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 194(6), the zone promotion effect is started and a zone promotion image 505 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 194 (7), the zone presentation starts, and a zone notification image 528 is displayed. At this time, a zone effect image 529 is displayed around the zone notification image 528. Also, at this time, a zone start sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 194 (8), zone execution image 530 is displayed. Also, a button operation effect is started, and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the first period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect, the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops as shown in FIG. 195 (9). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become invisible (difficult to see or impossible to see). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 195 (10), the pseudo-continuous image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 195 (11), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x2", which indicates that the second change of the decorative symbols 41 will be performed. At this time, a first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 195 (12), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode, and the sixth variation operation is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size, and the display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 195 (13), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 195 (14), the pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed so as to move downward. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are not displayed (hard to see or cannot be seen).
195(15), the pseudo-continuous image 511 is displayed so as to swing up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, a pseudo-continuous fanning effect image 512 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 195 (16), the pseudo consecutive win image 511 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive win stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive win image 511. Also, at this time, a pseudo consecutive win stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 196 (17), the pseudo-continuous image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 196 (18), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x3", which indicates that the decorative symbols 41 will change for the third time. At this time, a second re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 196 (19), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode, and the sixth variation operation is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size, and the display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 196 (20), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Fig. 196 (21), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, the first step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 196 (22), the second step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a second step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 196 (23), the third step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, the third step sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 196 (24), the step image 508 is hidden. Also, the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and a sixth varying action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 197 (25), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the eighth stop motion. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 197 (26), the right row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 197 (27), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, and the eighth stop action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 197 (28), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the twelfth reach action is performed. At this time, the second reach line image 531 and the second reach notification image 532 are displayed. Also, at this time, the third reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 197 (29), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable motion. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. At this time, the first variable sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 197 (30), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 197 (31), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 197 (32), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 198 (33), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 198 (34), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 198 (35), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 198 (36), the SP reach performance starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 198 (37), an effect is executed in which the "4" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye changes to a "3". At this time, the "3" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye performs a symbol change action. Also, at this time, a change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the decorative symbols 41 of the reach eye. Also, at this time, a symbol change sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 198 (38), the development teasing effect starts, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the "4" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 198 (39), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 198 (40), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 199 (41), the development image 521 stops, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 is hidden. At this time, the development effect image 534 is displayed around the development image 521. At this time, a development stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 199 (42), the development performance is executed. At this time, the role performance is executed, and the middle movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 4 effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the 4th role sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 199 (43), the SPSP reach effect starts, and the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourteenth visual recognition mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 199 (44), the button operation effect starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Make it!", which prompts the user to operate the effect button 161. At this time, a button effect image 557 is displayed around the button operation image 502. At this time, the effect button 161 emits a red light. At this time, a third button sound is output. The effective operation period of this button operation effect is the third period.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 199 (45), the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "333", are temporarily stopped. At this time, a success image 538 is displayed. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect button 161 vibrates. At this time, the effect button 161 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a first success sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 199 (46), the reel effect is executed, and the left movable reel 115A, the center movable reel 115B, and the right movable reel 115C each move to a position where they overlap the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel fifth effect image 539 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and the rainbow light emission of the effect button 161 continues. At this time, the first jackpot notification sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 199 (47), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and the rainbow light emission of the effect button 161 continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 199 (48), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues, while the effect button 161 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, as shown in FIG. 200 (49), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues, while the effect button 161 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 200 (50), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and stops. At this time, the doublet first effect image 556 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative patterns 41. At this time, the big win first effect image 540 continues to be displayed, the vibration effect continues, and the rainbow light emission of the effect button 161 continues. At this time, the eighth stop sound is output.
Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 200 (51), the button operation effect is started, and the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the effect button 161 emits light in white. Also, at this time, the fourth button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the effective operation period in the button operation effect, the repeating number decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode, as shown in FIG. 200 (52). At this time, the first big win effect image 540 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 200 (53), the repeating decorative symbols 41 "333" are temporarily stopped. That is, the promotion effect is not executed after the promotion hint effect is executed. At this time, the repeating second effect image 541 is displayed around each of the repeating decorative symbols 41. Also, at this time, the ninth stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 200 (54), three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "333", are fixed and stopped with the stop display of the special symbols. Also, the first big win effect image 540 is not displayed. Note that the first big win effect image 540 may be displayed when the decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56 are fixed and stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 200(55), a big win game notification image 542 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the big win game notification image 542 displays the text "Bonus!".
Next, as shown in FIG. 200 (56), a right-hit image 543 is displayed. At this time, a round number image 544 and a round-in-progress image 545 are displayed. The round number image 544 displays the text "Round 1."
Next, when the final round is over, as shown in FIG. 201 (57), a time-saving start image 546 is displayed. The time-saving start image 546 displays the text "Entering special time-saving mode!"

Next, in the special time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 201 (58), the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness, "333", is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. And, like the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56 is also fixed and stopped by the sequence of numbers "333". Also, at this time, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the fourth stage (fourth presentation mode), which is the presentation mode in the special time-saving game state. Also, at this time, the variable presentation is not being executed, but background music corresponding to the fourth stage is being output from the speaker 156.

As described above, the variable performance of this embodiment includes a first variable performance in which the path of the change of the pattern in a specific row (e.g., middle row decorative pattern 41) in the first performance mode (first stage) is a first path (e.g., the first variable path (see Figure 60-1 (1)) etc.), and a second variable performance in which the path of the change of the pattern in a specific row in the third performance mode (third stage) is a second path different from the first path (e.g., the sixth variable path (see Figure 60-1 (6)) etc.). The performance control unit 300 can make the specific sound output when the pattern stops in the first variable performance and the specific sound output when the pattern stops in the second variable performance the same (both output the first stop sound).
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of variable performances consisting of various variable paths according to the performance mode. Also, by outputting a common specific sound when a pattern stops in any of the multiple performance modes, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the "pattern stop", which is one of the divisions in the variable performance, regardless of the performance mode, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The variable performance of this embodiment includes a first variable performance in which the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in a first display mode (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 61(1)) in the first performance mode (first stage), and a second variable performance in which the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in a second display mode (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 161(1)) in the third performance mode (third stage).The performance control unit 300 can make the specific sound output when the pattern stops in the first variable performance and the specific sound output when the pattern stops in the second variable performance the same (both output the first stop sound).
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of variable presentations consisting of various display modes of the decorative symbols 41 according to the presentation mode. Also, by outputting a common specific sound when a symbol stops in any of the presentation modes, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the "symbol stop", which is one of the divisions in the variable presentation, in any presentation mode, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, it has been explained that when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the first presentation mode (first stage), the first effect image 503 (see FIG. 62 (9)) is displayed when the decorative pattern 41 stops, and when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the third presentation mode (third stage), the eleventh effect image 573 (see FIG. 162 (9)) is displayed when the decorative pattern 41 stops. In other words, the specific presentation (effect image) executed when the pattern stops in the first variable presentation is different from the specific presentation executed when the pattern stops in the second variable presentation, but is not limited to this.
The specific effect (effect image) executed when the pattern stops in the first variable performance may be common to the specific effect executed when the pattern stops in the second variable performance. That is, the specific sound output and the specific effect executed when the pattern stops in the first variable performance may be common to both the specific sound output and the specific effect executed when the pattern stops in the second variable performance. Also, either the specific sound output and the specific effect executed when the pattern stops in the first variable performance or the specific sound output and the specific effect executed when the pattern stops in the second variable performance may be common, and the other may be different. That is, the specific sound output or the specific effect executed when the pattern stops in the first variable performance may be common to both the specific sound output or the specific effect executed when the pattern stops in the second variable performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute a first display (for example, a display in the viewing mode shown in Figure 59-1 (4)) in which the pattern of a specific row (for example, the middle row decorative pattern 41) is difficult to see after the start of the variable performance, a second display (for example, a display in the viewing mode shown in Figures 59-1 (5) to (7), Figure 59-2 (13), Figure 59-3 (18) etc.) in which the pattern of the specific row is easier to see than the first display after the first display, and a third display (for example, a display in the viewing mode shown in Figure 59-1 (1)) in which the pattern of the specific row stops after the second display. In addition, in a specific presentation mode (such as the third presentation mode (third stage)), the presentation control unit 300 can differentiate the movement mode of the first column pattern when the first column pattern (left column decorative pattern 41) is in the second display (for example, a movement mode to the lower right along the left sixth movement path LR6) from the movement mode of the second column pattern when the second column pattern (for example, the middle column decorative pattern 41) is in the second display. In addition, the second display of the second column pattern in a specific presentation mode has a first mode (a movement mode in which the pattern rotates counterclockwise along the middle seventh movement path CR7 (see FIG. 60-1 (7)) and then rises), and a second mode (a movement mode to the lower left along the middle second movement path CR2 (see FIG. 60-1 (2))) which is different from the first mode.
In this case, the movement patterns of the decorative patterns 41 can be made diverse depending on the row of the decorative patterns 41 displayed, and the movement patterns of the decorative patterns 41 in one row can also be made diverse, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, a big win game is more likely to be executed when the variable presentation in which the second row symbols are displayed in the second mode of the second viewing mode is executed than when the variable presentation in which the second row symbols are displayed in the first mode of the second viewing mode is executed. Therefore, even if the second row symbols are displayed in the same second viewing mode, the player's interest in whether the second row symbols are displayed in the first mode or the second mode can be increased.
In addition, the fact that a jackpot game is more likely to be executed when a variable presentation in which the patterns in the second column are displayed in the second mode of the second viewing mode is executed than when a variable presentation in which the patterns in the second column are displayed in the first mode of the second viewing mode is executed includes the fact that a jackpot game will not be executed (0%) when a variable presentation in which the patterns in the second column are displayed in the first mode of the second viewing mode is executed, and the fact that a jackpot game will be executed (100%) when a variable presentation in which the patterns in the second column are displayed in the second mode of the second viewing mode is executed.
Furthermore, if a jackpot game is more likely to be executed when a variable presentation in which the patterns in the second row are displayed in the second mode of the second viewing mode is executed than when a variable presentation in which the patterns in the second row are displayed in the first mode of the second viewing mode is executed, a jackpot game may be executed when a variable presentation in which the patterns in the second row are displayed in the first mode of the second viewing mode is executed, or a jackpot game may not be executed when a variable presentation in which the patterns in the second row are displayed in the second mode of the second viewing mode is executed.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute display of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in a specific mode that makes the change path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 different during high-speed movement and low-speed movement. The specific mode includes a first specific mode that is a specific mode in the third stage (for example, a mode in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the middle sixth change path CR6 (see FIG. 60-1 (6)) during high-speed movement and is displayed by the middle seventh change path CR7 (see FIG. 60-1 (7)) during low-speed movement), and a second specific mode that is a specific mode in the first stage (for example, a mode in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the middle first change path CR1 (see FIG. 60-1 (1)) during high-speed movement and is displayed by the middle second change path CR2 (see FIG. 60-1 (2)) during low-speed movement). And, it is easier to execute a big win game when a change performance in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the second specific mode is executed than when a change performance in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the first specific mode is executed. Therefore, even if the display is in the same specific mode, the player's interest can be heightened as to whether the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first specific mode or the second specific mode.
In addition, the fact that a jackpot game is more likely to be executed when a variable presentation in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second specific mode is executed than when a variable presentation in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first specific mode includes the fact that a jackpot game will not be executed (0%) when a variable presentation in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first specific mode is executed, and the fact that a jackpot game will be executed (100%) when a variable presentation in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second specific mode is executed.
Furthermore, if a jackpot game is more likely to be executed when a variable presentation in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second specific mode is executed than when a variable presentation in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first specific mode is executed, a jackpot game may be executed when a variable presentation in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first specific mode is executed, or a jackpot game may not be executed when a variable presentation in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second specific mode is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in variable performance example 1, the first start operation (see FIG. 61 (2)) is executed, and then the decorative pattern 41 changes along the first variable path, and in variable performance example 10, variable performance example 11, and variable performance example 13, the third start operation (see FIG. 94 (2)) is executed, and then the decorative pattern 41 changes along the first variable path. It may also be configured so that a jackpot or SP reach performance is more likely to be executed (it is more difficult to output a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops due to a highly decorative display mode) when the variable performances of variable performance example 10, variable performance example 11, and variable performance example 13 are executed than when the variable performance of variable performance example 1 is executed. That is, even if the change path is the same for each stage (presentation mode), it is easier to execute a jackpot or SP reach presentation when a second change presentation (such as change presentation example 10, change presentation example 11, and change presentation example 13) is executed in which the action at the start of the change presentation is the second action (e.g. the third start action) than when a first change presentation (such as change presentation example 1) is executed in which the action at the start of the change presentation is the first action (e.g. the first start action) (it is harder to execute the output of the stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops due to a highly decorative display mode).

In addition, even if the fluctuation path is common to each stage (presentation mode), a jackpot or SP reach presentation is more likely to be executed (the output of a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is less likely to be executed) when the second fluctuation presentation is executed in which the action when the fluctuation presentation is started is the second action than when the first fluctuation presentation is executed in which the action when the fluctuation presentation is started is the first action, including the fact that a jackpot or SP reach presentation is never executed (0%) when the first fluctuation presentation is executed (the output of a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is always executed (100%)) and that a jackpot or SP reach presentation is always executed (100%) when the second fluctuation presentation is executed (the output of a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is never executed (0%)). Furthermore, even if the fluctuation path is common to each stage (presentation mode), as long as it is made easier for a jackpot or SP reach presentation to be executed when the second fluctuation presentation is executed than when the first fluctuation presentation is executed (the output of a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is less likely to be executed), it may be the case that a jackpot or SP reach presentation is executed in the first fluctuation presentation (the output of a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is not executed) or that a jackpot or SP reach presentation is not executed in the second fluctuation presentation (the output of a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is executed).
The first action can also be regarded as a first movement, which is the movement of the decorative pattern 41 when the variable performance starts. The second action can also be regarded as a second movement, which is the movement of the decorative pattern 41 when the variable performance starts.

In addition, between the first variable performance (variable performance example 1, etc.) and the second variable performance (variable performance example 10, variable performance example 11, and variable performance example 13, etc.), not only the behavior (movement) of the decorative pattern 41 when the variable performance starts, but also the behavior (movement) when the variable performance starts and the order in which the changes start may be different. For example, in the first variable performance, the behavior (movement) and the change when the variable performance starts are performed in the order of the left row decorative pattern 41, the right row decorative pattern 41, and the middle row decorative pattern 41. On the other hand, in the second variable performance, the behavior (movement) and the change when the variable performance starts may be performed in the order of the right row decorative pattern 41, the middle row decorative pattern 41, and the left row decorative pattern 41. In this way, the difference in the behavior (movement) behavior when the variable performance starts includes the difference in the order of the behavior (movement) when the variable performance starts and the order in which the changes start.

In this embodiment, the miss variation performance in which the reach performance is not executed includes a first variation performance in which the start sound is not output (see, for example, FIG. 166(2)), and a second variation performance in which the start sound is output (see, for example, FIG. 193(2)). When a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, it is easier to win the jackpot in the next variation performance when the second variation performance is executed than when the first variation performance is executed (variation performance example 51 is easier to execute).
In addition, when a reservation for the first starting port 121 is stored, it is easier to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variable performance example 51 is easier to execute), which also includes the fact that when the first variable performance is executed, there is no guarantee that there will be a jackpot in the next variable performance (0%) (variable performance example 51 is never executed). Also, when a reservation for the first starting port 121 is stored, if it is easier to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variable performance example 51 is easier to execute), then when the first variable performance is executed, there may be a jackpot in the next variable performance (variable performance example 51 may be executed), and when the second variable performance is executed, there may not be a jackpot in the next variable performance (variable performance example 51 may not be executed).

In addition, when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, it may be possible to make it more likely that an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) will be executed in the next variation performance (variation performance example 48 or variation performance example 49 will be executed) if the second variation performance in which a start sound is output is executed rather than if the first variation performance in which a start sound is not output is executed.
In addition, when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, the fact that an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is more likely to be executed in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variation performance example 48 or variable performance example 49 is more likely to be executed) also includes the fact that when the first variable performance is executed, an SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance will definitely not be executed (0%) in the next variable performance (variation performance example 48 or variable performance example 49 will definitely not be executed). Furthermore, when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, if it is made so that an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is more likely to be executed in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variation performance example 48 or variable performance example 49 is more likely to be executed), then an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) may be executed in the next variable performance when the first variable performance is executed (variation performance example 48 or variable performance example 49 may be executed), and an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) does not have to be executed in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed (variation performance example 48 or variable performance example 49 does not have to be executed).

(Example of variation 52)
FIG. 202 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 52) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 202. The variable performance example 52 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.
In addition, FIG. 202 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA2" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 55. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figs. 193(1)-(8), 194(1)-(8), 195(9)-(16), 196(17)-(24), 197(25)-(32), 198(33)-(40), and 199(41)-(43) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 202(1), the button operation effect starts and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!", which encourages the user to operate the effect button 161. At this time, the effect button 161 lights up in red. At this time, a third button sound is output. The effective operation period of this button operation effect is the third period.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 202 (2), the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "333", are temporarily stopped. Meanwhile, at this time, the success image 538 (see FIG. 199 (45)) is not displayed. Also, at this time, the vibration effect is not executed. Also, at this time, the effect button 161 emits white light. Also, at this time, the first success sound is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 202(3), a success image 538 is displayed. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect button 161 vibrates. At this time, the effect button 161 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a first success sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 199 (46) to (48), 200 (49) to (56), and 201 (57) and (58) are executed.

As described above, in variable performance example 52, the timing of the display of success image 538, the vibration performance, the rainbow light emission of performance button 161, and the output of the first success sound is delayed relative to the time of operation of performance button 161, compared to variable performance example 51. In other words, in variable performance example 52, the period from when performance button 161 is operated in the button operation performance to the display of success image 538, the start of the vibration performance, the rainbow light emission of performance button 161, and the output of the first success sound is longer than in variable performance example 51.

In addition, in the variation performance example 52, a success image 538 is displayed, but this is not limited to this.
In variable performance example 52, after the performance shown in FIG. 202 (2) is performed, a vibration performance, the illumination of the performance button 161 in rainbow colors, and the output of the first success sound may be executed without the success image 538 being displayed.

(Example of variation 53)
FIG. 203 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 53) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 203. The variable performance example 53 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.
In addition, FIG. 203 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA3" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 55. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figs. 193 (1) to (8), 194 (1) to (8), 195 (9) to (16), 196 (17) to (24), 197 (25) to (32), 198 (33) to (40), 199 (41), and (42) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 203 (1), the SPSP reach effect starts, and the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 14th visual mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 203(2), a button operation effect is started, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!", which encourages the operation of the effect button 161. At this time, a vibration effect is started, the effect button 161 emits white light, and a second button sound is output. The effective operation period of this button operation effect is the second period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 203(3), the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "333", are temporarily stopped. At this time, a success image 538 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues. At this time, the effect button 161 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a first success sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 199 (46) to (48), 200 (49) to (56), and 201 (57) and (58) are executed.

(Variation example 54)
FIG. 204 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 54) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 204. The variable performance example 54 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
In addition, FIG. 204 is a variation performance that is executed when "EB1" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 55. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 204(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the confirmation of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 204 (2), as the display of the next special symbol begins, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual mode, and a twelfth start operation, which is the operation when the change starts, is performed. When the twelfth start operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are each displayed as moving to the left. At this time, a start-time twelfth effect image 584 is displayed to the left of each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed. Furthermore, the display mode of the changing image 51 changes from red to rainbow. At this time, a vibration effect is performed. At this time, a fourth changing sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 204 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and a sixth varying action is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 204 (4), the reach-inducing performance is started, and the "7" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode and perform the sixth varying action. At this time, the reach-inducing fifth effect image 578 is displayed on the lower right side of each of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows.
204(5), the left and right decorative symbols 41 of "7" are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the sixth reach-inducing effect image 579 is displayed on the upper left and lower right sides of each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in Fig. 204 (6), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode, and the fourth stopping action is performed. At this time, the fourth stop effect image 549 is displayed so as to surround each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41. Also, at this time, the fourth reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 204 (7), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "6" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 204 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Fig. 205 (9), the middle symbol fanning effect is started, and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 17th visual mode (see Fig. 59-5 (35)). At this time, the doublet fanning first effect image 550 is displayed above and below the middle row decorative symbol 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in Fig. 205 (10), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the 17th visual mode (see Fig. 59-5 (36)). At this time, the doublet second effect images 551 are displayed on the upper, lower, left and right sides of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.
Next, as shown in FIG. 205 (11), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 17th visual mode (see FIG. 59-5 (37)) and stops. At this time, the fifth effect image 552 at the time of stopping is displayed around the middle row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect button 161 emits light in rainbow colors. Also, at this time, the 11th stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 205 (12), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the sixteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 205 (13), the repeating number decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 205 (14), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and stopped. At this time, the sixth stop effect image 553 is displayed so as to surround each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twelfth stop sound is output.
In the variation performance example 54, even when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 16th visual mode, the stage image 61 is displayed. However, also in the variation performance example 54, when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 16th visual mode, the first big win effect image 540 may be displayed instead of the stage image 61.

Next, as shown in FIG. 205 (15), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the vibration effect ends. At this time, the light color of the effect button 161 changes from rainbow color to white.
Then, as shown in FIG. 205 (16), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "777", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 55)
206 and 207 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 55) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 206 and Fig. 207. The variable performance example 55 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
206 and 207 are variation effects that are executed when "EB2" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 55. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 204 (1) to (7) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 206 (1), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and a first temporary stopping action is performed, and the middle row decorative pattern 41, "7", is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and a first variable action is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 206 (2), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "8" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 206 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.

206(4), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, a transition image 516 is displayed in place of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 206 (5), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 206(6), the SP reach performance starts, and an SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 206 (7), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the twelfth visual mode, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 performs a second varying operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 206 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode and performs the second variable operation.
Next, as shown in Fig. 207 (9), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the SP promotion second effect image 519 is displayed on the upper right side and the lower left side of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in Fig. 207 (10), the button operation effect is started, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Make it!". At this time, a button effect image 557 is displayed around the button operation image 502. At this time, the effect button 161 emits light in red, and a third button sound is output. The effective operation period of this button operation effect is the third period.
Then, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation effective period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 207 (11), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" is displayed in the sixth mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the seventh effect image 554 at the time of stopping is displayed around the middle row decorative pattern 41. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect button 161 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, the thirteenth stop sound is output.
After this, the same presentation as shown in Figures 199 (46) to (48), 200 (49), and (50) is performed, except that the repeated decorative pattern 41 is "777", and then, as the special patterns stop changing, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 and the small pattern 56, "777", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 56)
FIG. 208 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 56) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 208. The variable performance example 56 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.
In addition, Figure 208 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA4" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 55. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the above-mentioned variation performance examples will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 182 (1) to (8), Fig. 183 (9) to (16), Fig. 184 (17) to (24), Fig. 185 (25) to (32), Fig. 186 (33), and (34) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 208 (1), the button operation effect starts and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Press!" At this time, the effect button 161 emits white light and a second button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the second period.
Then, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 208 (2), the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "333", perform the first temporary stop operation. At this time, the success image 538 is displayed. The effect button 161 emits light in rainbow colors, and the first success sound is output. Meanwhile, the vibration effect is not performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 208(3), the role production is executed, and the left movable role 115A, the center movable role 115B, and the right movable role 115C move to positions where they overlap the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role fifth effect image 539 is displayed. At this time, the performance button 161 continues to emit light in rainbow colors, and the first big win notification sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 208(4), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 is displayed. Also, at this time, the illumination of the rainbow color of the effect button 161 continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 208 (5), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 continues to be displayed, and the illumination of the rainbow color of the effect button 161 continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 208(6), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 continues to be displayed, and the illumination of the rainbow color of the effect button 161 continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 208(7), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and stop. At this time, the doublet first effect image 556 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. Also, at this time, the big win first effect image 540 continues to be displayed, the performance button 161 continues to emit light in rainbow colors, and the eighth stop sound is output.
Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 208(8), the button operation effect is started and the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the effect button 161 emits white light. Also, at this time, the fourth button sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 200 (52) to (56) and Figures 201 (57) and (58) are performed.
In this way, in the variation performance example 56, a vibration performance is not executed.

(Example of variation 57)
FIG. 209 is a diagram showing one aspect of a presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 57) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 209. The variable performance example 57 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.
In addition, FIG. 209 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA5" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 55. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the above-mentioned variation performance examples will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as each variation performance example may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 193 (1) to (8), Fig. 194 (1) to (8), Fig. 195 (9) to (16), Fig. 196 (17) to (24), Fig. 197 (25) to (32), Fig. 198 (33) to (40), and Fig. 199 (41) to (43) are performed. Next, as shown in Fig. 209 (1), the button operation effect starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!", which prompts the user to operate the effect button 161. At this time, a button effect image 557 is displayed around the button operation image 502. At this time, the effect button 161 emits red light, and a third button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the effective operation period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 209 (2), "343", which is three rows of decorative patterns 41, is displayed in the fifteenth visual mode and temporarily stops. At this time, the sixth stop sound is output. Also, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 209(3), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. At this time, a switching indication sound is output.
209(4), a part of the switching image 520 becomes non-displayed and a part of the stage image 61 is re-displayed. At this time, a switching non-display sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 209 (5), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three rows of highly decorative decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect of the highly decorative decorative patterns 41 stopping is not output, and the display becomes silent.

Next, as shown in FIG. 209(6), the revival image 558 is displayed, and the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "333," are temporarily stopped. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect button 161 is illuminated in rainbow colors. At this time, the first revival sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 209(7), the role effect is executed, and the left movable role 115A, the center movable role 115B, and the right movable role 115C move to positions where they overlap the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role fifth effect image 539 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and the rainbow light emission of the effect button 161 continues. At this time, the first big win notification sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win, is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 199 (47) and (48), Figures 200 (49) to (56), and Figures 201 (57) and (58) are performed.

(Variation of Variation Example 48)
Next, a modified example of the variation performance example 48 will be explained.
First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 182(1) to (8) and Fig. 183(9) to (14) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 210(1), a zone execution image 530 is displayed. At this time, the left column decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the sixth variable action.
Next, as shown in Fig. 210 (2), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eighth stopping operation. At this time, the eleventh stopping effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the twenty-second stopping sound, which is the sound effect of the decorative pattern 41 stopping, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 210(3), the right row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 210(4), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode, and the eighth stopping action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eleventh stopping effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the twenty-second stopping sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 210 (5), the reach-ey decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the eighth visual confirmation mode, and a 13th reach action, which is the action of the decorative pattern 41 when a reach is established (when the reach performance starts), is performed. When the 13th reach action is being performed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed as if raising the right hand. At this time, a first reach line image 509 and a first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, a first reach sound is output.
In this way, different reach actions may be executed for each number of the decorative pattern 41.
In addition, in a modified example of the variable performance example 48, the 14th stop sound (see Figure 110 (2)) may be output instead of the 22nd stop sound.
In addition, in this embodiment, as a variable performance, a variable performance shown as a modified example of variable performance example 48 may be provided instead of variable performance example 48, or a variable performance shown as a modified example of variable performance example 48 may be provided together with variable performance example 48.

(Example of variation 58)
211 and 212 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 58) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 211 and Fig. 212. The variable performance example 58 is a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery based on the winning of the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state is a miss, and is an example of a variable performance in which the stage (performance mode) controlled by the performance control unit 300 changes.
In the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in FIG. 211(1), the effect control unit 300 stops the display of the previous special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "213", are fixed. Also, one reserved image 52 is displayed. Also, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the first stage (first effect mode).
Next, as shown in FIG. 211(2), the variable performance starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and the first start operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 211 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a third visual appearance and perform a first varying operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 211(4), a stage change image 585 is displayed.
Next, the stage (presentation mode) controlled by the presentation control unit 300 changes from the first stage (first presentation mode) to the second stage (second presentation mode), and the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the second stage, as shown in Fig. 211 (5). At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth viewing mode, and a fourth changing operation is performed.

Next, as shown in Figure 211 (6), the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and a fourth variable action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 211 (7), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the fifth stop motion. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the left of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 211 (8), the right row decorative pattern 41 "2" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and the fourth variable action is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 212(9), the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stop motion. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the right row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 212 (10), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "1" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and the fourth variable action is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 212 (11), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the fifth stopping operation. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed on the right side of the middle row decorative symbol 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stopping sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 212 (12), the visual appearance of the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes the seventh visual appearance, so that all three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual appearance and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 212 (13), in conjunction with the stopping display of the special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, ie, "412", are fixed and stopped (displayed in the first visual mode).

(Example of variation performance 59)
FIG. 213 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 59) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 213. The variable performance example 59 is a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery based on the winning of the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state is a miss, and is an example of a variable performance in which the stage (performance mode) controlled by the performance control unit 300 changes.
In the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 211 (1) and (2) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 213 (1), in the first stage, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 213(2), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 213(3), the role production is executed, and the right movable role 115C moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role third effect image 526 is displayed around the right movable role 115C on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the third role sound is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.
The role effect shown in FIG. 213(3) is a pre-determination effect for the reserved ball that occurs due to winning the first starting hole 121. Although not shown, the same role effect as that shown in FIG. 213(3) is executed in the variable performance for this reserved ball. Therefore, the role effect shown in FIG. 213(3) can also be regarded as a continuous performance. A continuous performance is a performance that is executed across multiple reserved memories.

Next, as shown in FIG. 213(4), the button operation effect is executed, and the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first button sound is output. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual recognition mode. The operation effective period of this button operation effect is the first period.
When effect button 161 is operated during the operation effective period in the button operation effect, first operation image 504 is displayed as shown in Fig. 213 (5). At this time, a first operation sound is output.
213(6), the first operation image 504 is turned off, and the three rows of decorative symbols 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 213(7), a stage change image 585 is displayed.
Next, the stage (presentation mode) controlled by the presentation control unit 300 changes from the first stage (first presentation mode) to the second stage (second presentation mode), and the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the second stage, as shown in Fig. 213 (8). At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth viewing mode, and a fourth changing operation is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, as shown in the variation performance example 58, when the stage controlled by the performance control unit 300 changes, the display of the stage change image 585 and the change path switching (switching from the change path shown in FIG. 211(3) to the change path shown in FIG. 211(5)) are executed. More specifically, after the change performance starts and before the specific performance starts, the display of the stage change image 585 and the change path switching are executed. Examples of the specific performance include a display in the fourth viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41, a display in the fifth viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41, a display in the sixth viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41, and a display in the seventh viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the variation performance example 59, even if a specific performance starts after the variation performance starts, when a role-play performance or a button operation performance (continuous performance) is being executed, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path are not executed. That is, in this embodiment, when a role-play performance or a button operation performance (continuous performance) is being executed, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path are restricted.
In this case, compared to when the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the change path are executed while a reel effect or a button operation effect (continuous effect) is being executed, it is possible to prevent the player from losing focus of either the display of the stage change image 585, the switching of the change path, or the reel effect or the button operation effect (continuous effect).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the change performance starts in the first stage, the first change path (see FIG. 60-1 (1)) is used, and when the change performance starts in the second stage, the second change path (see FIG. 60-1 (4)) is used, but when the special performance (display of stage change image 585) is executed after the change performance starts in the first mode, the second change path is used. In this case, the player can be made to feel a sense of surprise that the second change path is used.

In addition, in the variable performance example 58 and the variable performance example 59, examples have been described in which the stage controlled by the performance control unit 300 changes from the first stage to the second stage, but this is not limited to this.
The stage may be changed from the first stage to the third stage, from the second stage to the third stage, from the third stage to the first stage, or from the third stage to the second stage. In this case, the decorative pattern 41 is changed according to a change mode corresponding to the stage before the change and the stage after the change. Also, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed according to a visual mode in the same manner as shown in the change performance example 58 and the change performance example 59.

In addition, the display of stage change image 585, the switching of the display mode of stage image 61, and the switching of the change path shown in change performance example 58 and change performance example 59 may be performed in any of the change performance examples and modified examples described above. In this case, the display of stage change image 585, the switching of the display mode of stage image 61, and the switching of the change path may be performed or restricted at the same timing as shown in change performance example 58 and change performance example 59 (before a specific performance starts after a change performance starts, when a role device performance or button operation performance (continuous performance) is not being performed, etc.).

In addition, in the variation performance example 59, in a variation performance in which the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path are determined, when a reel performance or button operation performance (continuous performance) is being executed, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path are restricted, and when a reel performance or button operation performance (continuous performance) is not being executed, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path are executed, but this is not limited to the above.
In a variation performance in which the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path are determined, when a role-play performance or a button operation performance (continuous performance) is executed, the performance control unit 300 may not execute the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path in this variation performance. Then, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path may be executed in the next variation performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, in one change performance, when a reel performance or button operation performance (continuous performance) is being executed, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the change path are restricted, and when a reel performance or button operation performance (continuous performance) is not being executed, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the change path are executed, but this is not limited to this.
In a variation performance in which the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path were supposed to be executed (the execution of the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path was set in the variation performance pattern), if a role-play performance or a button operation performance (continuous performance) is executed, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path may be restricted in this variation performance. In this case, in a variation performance in which a role-play performance or a button operation performance (continuous performance) is not executed among the next and subsequent variation performances, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path may be executed.

(Example of effects when effect button 161 is not operated)
Figure 214 is a diagram showing an example of a button operation presentation in which the presentation button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period.
First, the variation performance example 10 described with reference to Figures 82 to 86 will be described. After the performance shown in Figure 83 (10) is executed, as shown in Figure 214 (1), the button operation performance starts and the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first button sound is output.

If the effect button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect, as shown in Fig. 214 (2), the display of the second image 527 during operation (see Fig. 83 (12)) and the output of the second operation sound are not executed. That is, the manner of the sound output differs between when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period and when it is not operated.
In addition, the performance shown in Fig. 214 (2) is not limited to the performance when the performance button 161 is not operated in the variable performance example 10. In the variable performance in which the same performance as that shown in Fig. 83 (11) is performed, if the performance button 161 is not operated during the operation effective period in the button operation performance shown in Fig. 83 (11), the performance shown in Fig. 214 (2) may be performed.
In addition, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in FIG. 132 (11) is performed, if the presentation button 161 is not operated during the effective operation period in the button operation presentation shown in FIG. 132 (11), the fourth operation sound (see FIG. 132 (12)) may not be output, as in the presentation shown in FIG. 214 (2).
In addition, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in FIG. 183 (11) is performed, if presentation button 161 is not operated during the effective operation period in the button operation presentation shown in FIG. 183 (11), the sixth operation sound (see FIG. 183 (12)) may not be output, as in the presentation shown in FIG. 214 (2).

Next, we will explain the variation effect example 11 described with reference to Figures 87 to 92. After the effect shown in Figure 87 (1) is performed, as shown in Figure 214 (3), the button operation effect starts and the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first button sound is output.

If the effect button 161 is not operated during the effective operation period in the button operation effect, the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops, as shown in FIG. 214 (4). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. Also, at this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become invisible (difficult to see or not visible), and a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output. In other words, the manner of the sound output is the same whether the effect button 161 is operated during the effective operation period (see FIG. 87 (3)) or not.

In addition, the performance shown in Fig. 214 (4) is not limited to the performance when the performance button 161 is not operated in the variable performance example 11. In the variable performance in which the same performance as that shown in Fig. 87 (2) is performed, if the performance button 161 is not operated during the operation effective period in the button operation performance shown in Fig. 87 (2), the performance shown in Fig. 214 (4) may be performed.
Also, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in Fig. 94(8) is performed, if the presentation button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation presentation shown in Fig. 94(8), the pseudo consecutive image 511 may stop, the pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 may be displayed, and a pseudo consecutive stop sound may be output, as in the presentation shown in Fig. 214(4). In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether the presentation button 161 is operated or not during the operation valid period in the button operation presentation shown in Fig. 94(8).

Also, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in Fig. 136(2) is performed, if the presentation button 161 is not operated during the operation effective period in the button operation presentation shown in Fig. 136(2), the pseudo consecutive image 511 may stop, the pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 may be displayed, and a pseudo consecutive stop sound may be output, as in the presentation shown in Fig. 214(4). In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether the presentation button 161 is operated or not during the operation effective period in the button operation presentation shown in Fig. 136(2).
Also, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in Fig. 143(8) is performed, if the presentation button 161 is not operated during the operation effective period in the button operation presentation shown in Fig. 143(8), the pseudo consecutive image 511 may stop, the pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 may be displayed, and a pseudo consecutive stop sound may be output, as in the presentation shown in Fig. 214(4). In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether the presentation button 161 is operated or not during the operation effective period in the button operation presentation shown in Fig. 143(8).
Also, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in Fig. 187(2) is performed, if the presentation button 161 is not operated during the operation effective period in the button operation presentation shown in Fig. 187(2), the pseudo consecutive image 511 may stop, the pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 may be displayed, and a pseudo consecutive stop sound may be output, as in the presentation shown in Fig. 214(4). In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether the presentation button 161 is operated or not during the operation effective period in the button operation presentation shown in Fig. 187(2).
Also, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in Fig. 194(8) is performed, if the presentation button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation presentation shown in Fig. 194(8), the pseudo consecutive image 511 may stop, the pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 may be displayed, and a pseudo consecutive stop sound may be output, as in the presentation shown in Fig. 214(4). In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether the presentation button 161 is operated or not during the operation valid period in the button operation presentation shown in Fig. 194(8).

Next, we will explain the variation effect example 11 described with reference to Figures 87 to 92. After the effect shown in Figure 91 (37) is performed, as shown in Figure 214 (5), the button operation effect starts and the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the second button sound is output.

If the effect button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 of the mismatch is displayed in the 15th visual mode and the 6th stop sound is output, as shown in Fig. 214 (6). Also, when the 6th stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output. That is, the manner of the sound output is the same whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period (see Fig. 91 (39)) or not.
In addition, the performance shown in Fig. 214 (6) is not limited to the performance when the performance button 161 is not operated in the variable performance example 11. In the variable performance in which the same performance as that shown in Fig. 91 (38) is performed, if the performance button 161 is not operated during the operation effective period in the button operation performance shown in Fig. 91 (38), the performance shown in Fig. 214 (6) may be performed.
109(1), if the performance button 161 is not operated during the operation effective period in the button operation performance shown in FIG. 109(1), the decorative pattern 41 of the miss may be displayed in the 15th visual mode, the 6th stop sound may be output, and then the variable BGM may not be output, and the display of the switching image 520 may be followed by silence, as in the performance shown in FIG. 214(6). In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether the performance button 161 is operated or not during the operation effective period in the button operation performance shown in FIG. 109(1).

Next, we will explain the variation effect example 13 explained with reference to Figures 94 to 101. After the effect shown in Figure 99 (43) is performed, as shown in Figure 214 (7), the button operation effect starts, the button operation image 502 and the button effect image 557 are displayed, the effect button 161 lights up in red, and the third button sound is output.

If the effect button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect, the repeated number decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, a success image 538 is displayed, a vibration effect is started, the effect button 161 emits rainbow light, and a first success sound is output, as shown in Fig. 214 (8). In other words, the manner of the sound output is the same whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period (see Fig. 99 (45)) or not.
In addition, the performance shown in Fig. 214 (8) is not limited to the performance when the performance button 161 is not operated in the variable performance example 13. In the variable performance in which the same performance as that shown in Fig. 99 (44) is performed, if the performance button 161 is not operated during the operation effective period in the button operation performance shown in Fig. 99 (44), the performance shown in Fig. 214 (8) may be performed.

102(1) in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in Fig. 102(1) is performed, if the presentation button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation presentation shown in Fig. 102(1), then, after a delay with respect to the provisional stop of the repeated number decorative pattern 41, the success image 538 may be displayed, the vibration presentation may be started, the presentation button 161 may emit rainbow light, and a first success sound may be output, similar to the presentation shown in Fig. 214(8). In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether the presentation button 161 is operated or not during the operation valid period in the button operation presentation shown in Fig. 102(1).
103(2), if the effect button 161 is not operated during the effective operation period in the button operation effect shown in FIG. 103(2), the decorative pattern 41 of the repeated numbers may temporarily stop, the success image 538 may be displayed, a vibration effect may be executed, the effect button 161 may emit rainbow light, and a first success sound may be output, as in the effect shown in FIG. 214(8). In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether the effect button 161 is operated or not during the effective operation period in the button operation effect shown in FIG. 103(2).

Also, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in Fig. 148 (44) is performed, if presentation button 161 is not operated during the effective operation period in the button operation presentation shown in Fig. 148 (44), similar to the presentation shown in Fig. 214 (8), decorative pattern 41 of the repeated numbers may temporarily stop, success image 538 may be displayed, a vibration presentation may start, presentation button 161 may emit rainbow light, and a first success sound may be output. In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether presentation button 161 is operated or not during the effective operation period in the button operation presentation shown in Fig. 148 (44).
151(1) in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in FIG. 151(1) is performed, if the presentation button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation presentation shown in FIG. 151(1), then, after a delay with respect to the provisional stop of the repeated number decorative pattern 41, the success image 538 may be displayed, the vibration presentation may be started, the presentation button 161 may emit rainbow light, and a first success sound may be output, similar to the presentation shown in FIG. 214(8). In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether the presentation button 161 is operated or not during the operation valid period in the button operation presentation shown in FIG. 151(1).
152(2), if the effect button 161 is not operated during the effective operation period in the button operation effect shown in FIG. 152(2), the decorative pattern 41 of the repeated numbers may temporarily stop, the success image 538 may be displayed, a vibration effect may be executed, the effect button 161 may emit rainbow light, and a first success sound may be output, as in the effect shown in FIG. 214(8). In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether the effect button 161 is operated or not during the effective operation period in the button operation effect shown in FIG. 152(2).

199(44) in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in FIG. 199(44) is performed, if presentation button 161 is not operated during the effective operation period in the button operation presentation shown in FIG. 199(44), similar to the presentation shown in FIG. 214(8), decorative pattern 41 of the repeated numbers may temporarily stop, success image 538 may be displayed, vibration presentation may start, presentation button 161 may emit rainbow light, and a first success sound may be output. In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether presentation button 161 is operated or not during the effective operation period in the button operation presentation shown in FIG. 199(44).
Also, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in Fig. 202(1) is performed, if the presentation button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation presentation shown in Fig. 202(1), then, after a delay with respect to the provisional stop of the repeated number decorative pattern 41, the success image 538 may be displayed, the vibration presentation may be started, the presentation button 161 may emit rainbow light, and a first success sound may be output, similar to the presentation shown in Fig. 214(8). In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether the presentation button 161 is operated or not during the operation valid period in the button operation presentation shown in Fig. 202(1).
203(2) in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in Fig. 203(2) is performed, if presentation button 161 is not operated during the effective operation period in the button operation presentation shown in Fig. 203(2), similar to the presentation shown in Fig. 214(8), decorative pattern 41 of the repeated numbers may temporarily stop, success image 538 may be displayed, a vibration presentation may be executed, presentation button 161 may emit rainbow light, and a first success sound may be output. In other words, the manner of the output sound may be the same whether presentation button 161 is operated or not during the effective operation period in the button operation presentation shown in Fig. 203(2).

As described above, in this embodiment, the button operation performance includes a first operation performance that can be executed before the start of the specific performance, and a second operation performance that can be executed after the start of the specific performance. The specific performance includes predetermined performances executed in the variable performance, such as a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, a reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), a pseudo consecutive performance, a zone performance, a step performance, and a role performance. In the variable performance (variable performance example 10, etc.) in which the first operation performance is executed, the performance control unit 300 can output different types of sounds depending on whether the performance button 161 is operated (see FIG. 83 (12)) or not (see FIG. 214 (2)) during the operation valid period in the first operation performance. In addition, in a variable presentation (such as variable presentation example 13) in which a special game (jackpot game) is played and a second operation presentation is executed, the presentation control unit 300 can make the type of sound output common when the presentation button 161 is operated (see Figure 99 (45)) during the effective operation period in the second operation presentation and when it is not operated (see Figure 214 (8)).
In this case, before the start of the specific performance, an original sound effect when the performance button 161 is operated in the button operation performance is output, so that the interest in the button operation performance can be increased even before the start of the specific performance. Also, after the start of the specific performance, even if the player forgets to operate the performance button 161 in the button operation performance, the same sound as when the performance button 161 is operated is output, so that the player can enjoy the performance with high importance more reliably in the final stage of the variable performance. Therefore, the interest in the game can be increased.

Also, in this embodiment, it has been explained that in the big win variation presentation, the manner of the sound output may be the same when the presentation button 161 is operated during the operation effective period in the first operation presentation (see FIG. 94 (8) and FIG. 95 (9)) and when it is not operated. On the other hand, in the loss variation presentation, it has been explained that the manner of the sound output may be different when the presentation button 161 is operated during the operation effective period in the first operation presentation (see FIG. 64 (2)) and when it is not operated (see FIG. 61 (6)).
In this embodiment, the manner of the sound output when the effect button 161 is operated during the effective operation period in the first operation effect is more likely to be different when the miss variation effect is executed than when the jackpot variation effect is executed. Therefore, even if the effect button 161 is not operated during the effective operation period in the first operation effect, it is easy for the player to recognize which effect was used to reach the jackpot.

In addition, the fact that the type of sound output when the effect button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period in the first operation presentation is more likely to be different when a miss variation presentation is executed than when a jackpot variation presentation is executed includes the fact that when a jackpot variation presentation is executed, the type of sound output when the effect button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period in the first operation presentation is always the same (0%), and that when a miss variation presentation is executed, the type of sound output when the effect button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period in the first operation presentation is always different (100%).
Furthermore, if the type of sound output when effect button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period in the first operation presentation is more likely to be different when a miss variation presentation is executed than when a jackpot variation presentation is executed, the type of sound output when effect button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period in the first operation presentation may be the same when a miss variation presentation is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the big win variation presentation is executed, the sound output when the presentation button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation presentation and when it is not operated is more likely to be the same than when the miss variation presentation is executed. Therefore, even if the presentation button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the first operation presentation, it is easy for the player to recognize which presentation led to the big win.
In addition, the fact that the manner of the sound output when the effect button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect is more likely to be common when a jackpot variation effect is executed than when a miss variation effect is executed includes the fact that when a miss variation effect is executed, the manner of the sound output when the effect button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect is always different (0%), and when a jackpot variation effect is executed, the manner of the sound output when the effect button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect is always the same (100%).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a miss variation performance is executed, the output sound may be made to be always the same (100%) when the performance button 161 is operated during the operation effective period in the button operation performance during the SPSP reach performance (see FIG. 86 (35)) and when it is not operated. Also, when a big win variation performance is executed, the output sound may be made to be always the same (100%) when the performance button 161 is operated during the operation effective period in the button operation performance during the SPSP reach performance (see FIG. 99 (44)).
In other words, when a miss variation presentation is executed and when a jackpot variation presentation is executed, the tendency for the type of sound output to be common to both cases where the presentation button 161 is operated and where it is not operated during the effective operation period in the button operation presentation during the SPSP reach presentation may be the same.

In addition, in this embodiment, the type of sound output when the effect button 161 is operated or not operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect is more likely to be different when a miss variation effect (second variation effect) in which a button operation effect (see Figure 61 (5)) is performed without a reach effect is executed than when a miss variation effect (first variation effect) in which a reach effect (see Figure 84 (19)) and a button operation effect (see Figure 86 (35)) are executed.
In addition, the fact that the type of sound output when the performance button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period in the button operation performance is more likely to be different when the second variation performance is executed than when the first variation performance is executed includes the fact that when the first variation performance is executed, the type of sound output when the performance button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period in the button operation performance is always the same (0%), and that when the second variation performance is executed, the type of sound output when the performance button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period in the button operation performance is always different (100%).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the button operation image 502 is displayed, a sound effect (see FIG. 61 (5)) is output, but if the effect button 161 is not operated during the effective operation period in the button operation effect, no sound effect is output (see FIG. 61 (6)). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game caused by a sound effect being output even when the player has not intentionally operated the effect button 161.

(Example of change performance 60)
FIG. 215 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 60) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 215. The variable performance example 60 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
In addition, FIG. 215 is a variation performance that is executed when "EB3" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 55. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 93 (1) to (8), Fig. 94 (1) to (8), Fig. 95 (9) to (16), Fig. 96 (17) to (24), Fig. 97 (25) to (32), Fig. 98 (33) to (40), Fig. 99 (41) to (48), and Fig. 100 (49) are performed. Next, as shown in Fig. 215 (1), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth mode of the 16th visual mode and stops. At this time, the doublet first effect image 556 is displayed, the vibration effect continues, and the light emission in rainbow colors of the effect button 161 continues. At this time, the eighth stop sound is also output.
Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 215(2), the button operation effect is started and the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the effect button 161 emits light in white. Also, at this time, the fourth button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect, the promotion effect is executed, and the decorative symbol 41 of the number "777" is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode, as shown in FIG. 215(3). At this time, the first big win effect image 540 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 215(4), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped. At this time, the 14th stop effect image 586 is displayed so as to surround each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the 23rd stop sound, which is the sound effect of the doublet decorative symbols 41 stopping, is output.
Then, with the special symbol being displayed, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbol 56, ie, "777", are displayed and fixed.

In addition, in the variable performance example 60, even if the performance button 161 is not operated during the effective operation period in the button operation performance shown in Figure 215 (2), the same performance as that shown in Figures 215 (3) and (4) may be performed.
In addition, a variable presentation may be provided in which the same presentation as shown in Figures 142 (1) to (8), 143 (1) to (8), 144 (9) to (16), 145 (17) to (24), 146 (25) to (32), 147 (33) to (40), 148 (41) to (48), and 149 (49) is performed, and then the same presentation as shown in Figures 215 (1) to (4) is performed.
First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 193 (1) to (8), 194 (1) to (8), 195 (9) to (16), 196 (17) to (24), 197 (25) to (32), 198 (33) to (40), 199 (41) to (48), and 200 (49) may be performed, and then a variable presentation may be provided in which the same presentation as shown in Figures 215 (1) to (4) is performed.

(Variations of the pattern change effects)
In the present embodiment, the symbol change effect is described as the change in the number of the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 (see FIG. 85 (28)). Here, the symbol change effect is not limited to the change in the number of the reach-eye decorative symbol 41.
FIG. 216 shows a modified example of the pattern change presentation.
First, as shown in Fig. 216(1), in the variable presentation, the SP reach presentation starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed. Also, the "4" which is the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in Fig. 216(2), the display color of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 changes from white to red. At this time, change effect images 533 are displayed around each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41, and a symbol change sound is output.
In this way, the pattern change effect may be an effect in which the display color of the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye changes.
216(2) shows an example in which the display color of the entire reach-eye decorative pattern 41 changes, but is not limited to this. The pattern change effect may be any effect in which the display color of at least a part of the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 changes.

Also, for example, from the state shown in Fig. 216(1), as shown in Fig. 216(3), each of the symbol effect images 587 is displayed so as to surround each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41. At this time, a symbol change sound is output.
In this way, the symbol change effect may be an effect in which the display mode of the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 changes. In other words, the change in the decorative mode of the symbol may include a change in the display color of the symbol or the addition of a new decorative image to the symbol.

(Variation of SP reach effect in the second stage)
Next, a modified example of the SP reach effect executed in the second stage will be described. In the following, a modified example of the SP reach effect in the variation effect example 25 described with reference to Figs. 124 to 126 will be described.
First, as shown in FIG. 217(1), the SP reach performance starts, and an SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 217 (2), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Fig. 59-3 (17)) and performs the eighth varying operation, which is the operation when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is being displayed and varying. When the eighth varying operation is being performed, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed to move from the lower right corner to the upper left corner of the image display unit 114 along the eighth varying path (see Fig. 60-1 (8)).
Next, as shown in Figure 217 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode and performs the eighth variable action.
Next, as shown in Fig. 217 (4), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the SP promotion second effect image 519 is displayed on the upper right side and the lower left side of the middle row decorative pattern 41 on the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in Fig. 217 (5), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fourth mode of the twelfth visual mode. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in such a manner that it returns to the lower right corner of the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 217(6), the "4" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 passes, and the "3" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth mode of the twelfth visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the 24th stop sound, which is the sound effect of the middle row decorative pattern 41 stopping, is output. Also, when the 24th stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 125 (14) to (16) and Figure 126 (17) are performed.

In this way, in the second stage, SP reach effects and variable paths that are not used in the first or third stage may be used.
In addition, the effect shown in Fig. 217 is not limited to the SP reach effect. The effect shown in Fig. 217 may be performed as the SPSP reach effect in the second stage.

In addition, the effect shown in Fig. 217 may be an SP reach effect and a variable path that are not used in the second stage or the third stage, but are used only in the first stage. In this case, the effect shown in Fig. 217 may be performed as the SPSP reach effect in the first stage.
In addition, the effect shown in Fig. 217 may be an SP reach effect and a variable path that are not used in the first stage or the second stage, but are used only in the third stage. In this case, the effect shown in Fig. 217 may be performed as the SPSP reach effect in the third stage.

(Example of variation 61)
Next, referring to Fig. 218, a specific explanation will be given of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 61) performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like. The variable presentation example 61 is a variable presentation example based on a game ball winning the second start hole 122 in a special time-saving game state. The variable presentation example 61 is also a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach presentation is not executed, and is a variable presentation based on the number of reserved balls for winning the second start hole 122 being "1".
The change presentation shown in FIG. 218 is executed when "EH1" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in FIG. 57.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.
In addition, each of the change performance examples from change performance example 61 to change performance example 70 described later is a change performance example when the change starts in the fourth stage.

As shown in FIG. 218 (1), the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114 as the previous special pattern is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300. This decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the fourth stage, and is less decorative than the highly decorative decorative patterns 41 in the first to third stages (see FIG. 61 (1), etc.). At this time, one reserved image 52, reserved number display 55, small pattern 56, and stage image 61 are displayed on the image display unit 114. In addition, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the fourth stage (fourth performance mode). The fourth stage is a performance mode in the special time-saving game state. At this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting port 122 shows "1", which is the reserved number for winning at the second starting port 122. Also, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the first visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 218(2), the variable performance starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second viewing mode, and a thirteenth start operation, which is the operation when starting the variable, is performed. When the thirteenth start operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an action such that they move upward while swinging left and right. At this time, a thirteenth start effect image 588 is displayed above each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. Also, in the second stage, the variable BGM continues to be output from the start to the end of the variable performance, but this variable BGM is a different piece of music from any of the variable BGM in the first stage to the third stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 218 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a third visual mode and perform a first varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 218 (4), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first varying operation.
Next, as shown in Fig. 218 (5), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the first varying operation. The moving speed of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 at this time is faster than the moving speed of any of the decorative symbols 41 displayed in the fifth visual mode in stages 1 to 3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 218(6), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode, and perform the eleventh stop action, which is the action when the variation stops. When the eleventh stop action is being executed, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed to move so as to vibrate up and down. At this time, the fifteenth stop effect image 589 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twenty-fifth stop sound, which is the sound effect when the decorative symbols 41 stop, is output.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 218 (7).
As described above, in the variable presentation in which the reach presentation is not executed in the fourth stage, the decorative pattern 41 may stop without being displayed in the seventh visual mode.

(Example of variation 62)
FIG. 219 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 62) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 219. The variable performance example 62 is a variable performance example of the decorative pattern 41 based on the game ball winning the second start hole 122 in the special time-saving game state. The variable performance example 62 is a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed, and is a variable performance based on the number of reserved balls for winning the second start hole 122 being "4".
In addition, FIG. 219 is a variation performance that is executed when "EH3" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 57. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Fig. 219(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the determination of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 in the image display unit 114. In addition, four reserved images 52 are displayed, and "4" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the second starting port 122.
Next, as shown in FIG. 219(2), the variable presentation starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbols. At this time, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and the thirteenth start operation is performed. At this time, the thirteenth start effect image 588 is also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 219 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the first varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 219 (4), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first varying operation.
Next, as shown in Fig. 219 (5), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the first varying operation. The moving speed of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 at this time is faster than the moving speed of any of the decorative symbols 41 displayed in the fifth visual mode in stages 1 to 3.

Next, as shown in Fig. 219 (6), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the eleventh stop operation. At this time, the fifteenth stop effect image 589 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twenty-fifth stop sound is output.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 219(7).

(Example of variation 63)
FIG. 220 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 63) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 220. The variable performance example 63 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state, in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed.
The change presentation shown in FIG. 220 is executed when "EH4" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in FIG. 57.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 218 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 220 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 220(2), the reach-inducing performance is started, and the "4" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the reach-inducing seventh effect image 590 is displayed below each of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows.

Next, as shown in Fig. 220 (3), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed lower than when they are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the eighth reach-inducing effect image 591 is displayed above and below each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.
Next, as shown in Fig. 220(4), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third aspect of the ninth visual aspect and perform the first varying action. At this time, the left decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual aspect and performs the first temporary stopping action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 220(5), the right-row decorative pattern 41 and the middle-row decorative pattern 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the eleventh stop operation. At this time, the fifteenth stop effect image 589 is displayed around each of the right-row decorative pattern 41 and the middle-row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the twenty-fifth stop sound is output.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 220(6).

(Example of variation 64)
221 to 223 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 64) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 221 to 223. The variable performance example 64 is a variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SP reach performance is executed.
In addition, the variable performance shown in Figures 221 to 223 is the variable performance that is executed when "EH5" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 57.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 221(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the determination of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue. The display mode of blue of this reserved image 52 may be the display mode at the start of display, or may be a result of a change in the display mode in the variation performance executed while this reserved image 52 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 221(2), with the start of the change display of the next special pattern, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second visual confirmation mode, and a fourteenth start operation, which is an operation when the change starts, is performed. When the fourteenth start operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in an action such that they expand while shaking up and down and left and right. At this time, a fourteenth effect image 592 is displayed at the start around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the change image 51, and the change image 51 is displayed in blue. Also, at this time, a fourth start sound, which is a sound effect of starting the change, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and the first varying operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 221(4), the role performance is executed, and the center movable role 115B and the right movable role 115C move to a position where they overlap with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 12 effect image 593 is displayed around the center movable role 115B and the right movable role 115C in the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the 11th role sound, which is the sound effect of the role performance, is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode continues.

Next, as shown in Fig. 221 (5), the reach-inducing performance is started, and the "4" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the reach-inducing seventh effect image 590 is displayed below each of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows.
Next, as shown in Fig. 221 (6), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed lower than when they are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the eighth reach-inducing effect image 591 is displayed above and below each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (7), the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode, and a twelfth stopping action is performed, which is the action taken when the fluctuation stops. When the twelfth stopping action is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed so as to expand while vibrating, respectively. The twelfth stopping action can also be considered as a fourteenth reach action, which is the action taken by the decorative symbols 41 when a reach is achieved (when the reach performance starts). At this time, a sixteenth effect image 594 is displayed around each of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows. At this time, a seventh reach sound, which is the sound effect indicating that a reach has been achieved, is output. The seventh reach sound can also be considered as a twenty-sixth stopping sound, which is the sound effect indicated when the decorative symbols 41 have stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 221(8), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a shrinking manner. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are hidden (hard to see or cannot be seen).
Next, as shown in FIG. 222(9), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode. At this time, the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in such a manner that it moves toward the upper left corner and the upper right corner of the image display unit 114 while shrinking. That is, the operation mode (movement mode) when the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode is different between the normal game state and the special time-saving game state. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed. The display mode of this transition image 516 is different from that of the transition image 516 in the normal game state (see FIG. 75(4)).
Next, as shown in FIG. 222 (10), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 222 (11), the SP reach effect starts, and an SP reach image 517 is displayed. This SP reach image 517 has a different display form from the SP reach image 517 in the normal gaming state (see Fig. 75 (6)).
Next, as shown in Fig. 222 (12), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the twelfth visual mode, and performs a ninth varying operation, which is an operation when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is being displayed and varying. When the ninth varying operation is being performed, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an operational manner so as to move to the right as it moves downward on the image display unit 114 along a ninth varying path (see Fig. 60-2 (9)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 222 (13), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the SP third effect image 595 is displayed on the left and right sides of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.
Next, as shown in FIG. 222 (14), the button operation performance starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Operate!". At this time, a fifth button sound, which is a sound effect of the button operation performance, is output. At this time, the performance button 161 emits white light. The effective operation period of this button operation performance is the fourth period. The fourth period is, for example, four seconds.

Then, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation effective period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 222 (15), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the fifth mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the 27th stop sound, which is the sound effect of the middle row decorative pattern 41 stopping, is output. Note that even after the 27th stop sound is output, the variable BGM continues to be output.
In addition, even if the effect button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect shown in Fig. 222 (14), the same effect as that shown in Fig. 222 (15) may be performed. That is, a common effect may be executed whether or not the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect shown in Fig. 222 (14).

Next, as shown in Fig. 222 (16), a switching image 520 is displayed. This switching image 520 has a different display mode from the switching image 520 in the normal game state (see Fig. 76 (14)). In addition, no sound effect is output in conjunction with the display of the switching image 520, and the output of the variable BGM continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 223 (17), the decorative pattern 41 of the missing number is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode in the display size (see Fig. 221 (1)) when the variable performance started, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. Also, at this time, the output of the variable BGM is continued.
Next, as shown in FIG. 223(18), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 and small patterns 56, "454", are fixed and stopped with the stopping of the special patterns. Note that the output of the variable BGM continues at the end of the variable performance and after the end of the variable performance.

In the variable performance example 64, it has been explained that the variable BGM continues to be output from the start to the end of the variable performance, but this is not limited to this.
When the switching image 520 is displayed (see FIG. 222(16)), the variable BGM does not have to be output. Then, when the stage image 61 is displayed again (see FIG. 223(17)), the variable BGM may be output again.

(Example of variation 65)
FIG. 224 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 65) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 224. The variable performance example 12 is a variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed.
The variable performance shown in Fig. 224 is executed when "AF1" is selected as the "pre-determined performance pattern" in Fig. 54 and "EH2" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 57. In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 224(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the determination of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. In addition, two reserved images 52 are displayed. At this time, "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the second starting port 122.
Next, as shown in FIG. 224(2), when the next special symbol starts to be displayed, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and a fourteenth start operation is performed. At this time, a fourteenth start effect image 592 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, a fourth start sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and the first varying operation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 224(4), the role performance is executed, and the center movable role 115B and the right movable role 115C move to a position where they overlap with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 12 effect image 593 is displayed around the center movable role 115B and the right movable role 115C in the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the third role sound is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 224 (5), the display mode of the reserved image 52 changes from the normal display mode to blue. At this time, a fifth change sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the display mode of the reserved image 52 has changed to blue. That is, when the display mode of the reserved image 52 changes to blue in the special time-saving game state, a sound effect different from the sound effect indicating that the display mode of the reserved image 52 has changed to blue in the normal game state (see Fig. 93 (6)) is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 224(6), a chance eye effect is executed, and "331" which is three rows of decorative symbols 41 stops. All of these three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in red. At this time, a fourth chance eye effect image 596 is displayed so as to surround the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, a 28th stop sound which is a sound effect when the three rows of decorative symbols 41 stop is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (7), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "331", are fixed and stopped.
In the variation performance example 65, the 14th start action, the 14th effect image 592 at the start, the 4th start sound, the role effect, and the chance eye effect are all examples of the pre-determination effects. Also, these pre-determination effects are effects that make the player expect a big win in the variation effect next to the variation effect when these pre-determination effects are being executed.

(Example of variation 66)
Figures 225 to 228 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 66) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 225 to Fig. 228. The variable performance example 66 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Also, the variable performance example 66 is an example of a variable performance executed after the variable performance shown in the variable performance example 65. In other words, the variable performance example 66 is an example of a variable performance showing the lottery result of the special symbol lottery suggested by the blue reserved image 52 (see Fig. 224 (5)) shown in the variable performance example 65.
225 to 228 are the variation performances executed when "EF1" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Fig. 57. In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Fig. 225(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the determination of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 225(2), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode and perform the fourteenth start operation. At this time, the fourteenth effect image 592 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51, and the variable image 51 is displayed in blue. Also, at this time, the fourth start sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 225 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and the first varying operation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 225(4), the role performance is executed, and the center movable role 115B and the right movable role 115C move to a position where they overlap with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 12 effect image 593 is displayed around the center movable role 115B and the right movable role 115C in the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the third role sound is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 225 (5), the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. At this time, a sixth variable sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the display mode of the variable image 51 changes, is output.

225(6), the reach-inducing performance is started, and the left and right decorative symbols 41, "4", are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the reach-inducing seventh effect image 590 is displayed below each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.
Next, as shown in Fig. 225 (7), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed lower than when they are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the eighth reach-inducing effect image 591 is displayed above and below each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in Fig. 225 (8), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode, and the twelfth stopping action is performed. At this time, the sixteenth stop effect image 594 is displayed around each of the left and right decorative symbols 41. At this time, the seventh reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 226(9), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a shrinking manner. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are hidden (hard to see or cannot be seen).
Next, as shown in Fig. 226 (10), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode. At this time, the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in such a manner that it shrinks and moves toward the upper left corner and the upper right corner of the image display section 114. At this time, a transition image 516 is also displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 226 (11), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 226 (12), the SP reach performance starts, and an SP reach image 517 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 226 (13), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 12th visual mode, and the 9th variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 226 (14), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the SP third effect image 595 is displayed on the left and right sides of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 226 (15), the button operation performance starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Operate!". At this time, the performance button 161 emits red light. At this time, a sixth button sound, which is a sound effect of the button operation performance, is output. The effective operation period of this button operation performance is the fourth period.
Then, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation effective period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 226 (16), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, a success image 538 is displayed. This success image 538 is displayed in a display mode different from the success image 538 (see FIG. 99 (45)) displayed in the normal game state. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect button 161 vibrates. At this time, the effect button 161 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a second success sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the success image 538 is displayed, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (17), the reel effect is executed, and the left movable reel 115A, the center movable reel 115B, and the right movable reel 115C each move to a position where they overlap the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel 13th effect image 597 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and the effect button 161 continues to emit light in rainbow colors. At this time, a second jackpot notification sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (18), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the second big win effect image 598 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and the rainbow light emission of the effect button 161 continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 227 (19), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the second big win effect image 598 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues, while the effect button 161 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, as shown in Fig. 227 (20), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the second big win effect image 598 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues, while the effect button 161 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (21), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and stops. At this time, the seventeenth effect image 599 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative patterns 41. At this time, the second big win effect image 598 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues, while the rainbow light emission of the effect button 161 continues. At this time, the twenty-ninth stop sound, which is the sound effect when the doublet decorative pattern 41 stops, is output.
Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 227 (22), the button operation effect is started and the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the effect button 161 emits light in white. Also, at this time, the seventh button sound, which is the sound effect of the button operation effect, is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the effective operation period in the button operation effect, the repeating number decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual recognition mode, as shown in Fig. 227 (23). At this time, the second big win effect image 598 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (24), the "444" decorative pattern 41 of the same number is temporarily stopped. That is, the promotion effect is not executed after the promotion hint effect is executed. At this time, the 17th stop effect image 599 is displayed around each of the decorative patterns 41 of the same number. Also, at this time, the 30th stop sound, which is the sound effect of the stopping of the decorative patterns 41 of the same number, is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 228 (25), in conjunction with the stopping display of the special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "444", are fixed and stopped.
After this, the same presentation as shown in Figures 100 (55), (56), 101 (57), and (58) is performed, except that the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 displayed are "444".

As described above, in this embodiment, the specific sounds (stop sounds) different from the predetermined sounds (variable BGM) include the first specific sound (e.g., the first stop sound (see Figure 62 (15)) and the second specific sound (e.g., the eighth stop sound (see Figure 100 (50)), the 29th stop sound (see Figure 227 (21)), etc.) that is output when the decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific sequence (double number).
In this embodiment, the reach effect is more likely to be executed (the reach effect is more likely to succeed) when the reach effect is executed in the normal game state than when the reach effect is executed in the special time-saving game state. On the other hand, it is easier to win a jackpot when the reach effect is successful (the reach effect is executed) in the special time-saving game state than when the reach effect is successful (the reach effect is executed) in the normal game state. That is, in this embodiment, the output of the second specific sound is more likely to be executed when the variable effect (variable effect example 66 (see Figures 225 to 228) etc.) in which the reach effect is executed after the second provocation effect (the reach effect in the special time-saving game state) is executed than when the variable effect (variable effect example 9 (see Figure 81) etc.) in which the reach effect is executed after the first provocation effect (the reach effect in the normal game state) is executed.
In this case, in the variable presentation in which a reach presentation is executed after the second teasing presentation, combined with the second specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the stopping of the decorative pattern 41, which notifies the player that a special game will be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The fact that the second specific sound is more likely to be output when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed after the second provocation performance is performed than when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed after the first provocation performance includes the fact that the second specific sound will always be output (100%) when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed after the second provocation performance is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specific sounds (stop sounds) different from the predetermined sounds (variable BGM) include a first specific sound (e.g., the first stop sound (see Figure 62 (15)) and a second specific sound (e.g., the eighth stop sound (see Figure 100 (50)), the 29th stop sound (see Figure 227 (21)), etc.) that is output when the decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific sequence (double number).
In this embodiment, there is a first prompting effect (such as variable performance example 9 (see Figure 81)) in which a reach performance is executed after prompting the execution of a reach performance in a normal gaming state, and a second prompting effect (such as variable performance example 66 (see Figures 225 to 228)) in which a reach performance is executed after prompting the execution of a reach performance in a special time-saving gaming state. In one variable performance, the second specific sound is more likely to be output when the second prompting effect is executed than when the first prompting effect is executed.
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the second teasing presentation is executed, combined with the second specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the stopping of the decorative pattern 41, which notifies the player that a special game is being played, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in one variable performance, the fact that the second specific sound is more likely to be output when the second titling performance is executed than when the first titling performance is executed includes the fact that the second specific sound is never output when the first titling performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the second specific sound is always output when the second titling performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, if, in one variable performance, the output of the second specific sound is more likely to be performed when the second titling performance is executed than when the first titling performance is executed, the output of the second specific sound may be performed when the first titling performance is executed, or the output of the second specific sound may not be performed when the second titling performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific effect (such as a reach effect or an effect that notifies a jackpot) is executed in the first to third stages, it is possible to make the effect different (such as outputting different sound effects or displaying different effect images) in the fourth stage. Therefore, the unique effect of the fourth stage can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can make the operation mode (see FIG. 98 (37) and FIG. 226 (12)) of the decorative pattern 41 in the reach presentation temporary stop the same regardless of whether the game is in the normal game state or the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the state of the decorative pattern 41 in the reach presentation regardless of the game state.

In this embodiment, the miss variation performance in which the reach performance is not executed includes a first variation performance in which the start sound is not output (see, for example, FIG. 219(2)), and a second variation performance in which the start sound is output (see, for example, FIG. 224(2)). When a hold is stored for the second starting port 122, it is easier to win the jackpot in the next variation performance when the second variation performance is executed than when the first variation performance is executed (variation performance example 66 is easier to execute).
In addition, when a reservation for the second starting port 122 is stored, it is easier to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed (variable performance example 66 is easier to execute) than when the first variable performance is executed, which also includes the fact that when the first variable performance is executed, there is no guarantee that there will be a jackpot in the next variable performance (0%) (variable performance example 66 is never executed). Also, when a reservation for the second starting port 122 is stored, if it is easier to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed (variable performance example 66 is easier to execute) than when the first variable performance is executed, then it is possible to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the first variable performance is executed (variable performance example 66 may be executed), and it is not necessary to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed (variable performance example 66 may not be executed).

In addition, when a hold is stored for the second starting port 122, it may be possible to make it easier for an SP reach performance to be executed in the next variation performance (variation performance example 64 to be executed) when the second variation performance in which a start sound is output is executed than when the first variation performance in which a start sound is not output is executed.
In addition, when a hold is stored for the second starting port 122, the SP reach performance is more likely to be executed in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (the variable performance example 64 is more likely to be executed), which also includes the fact that when the first variable performance is executed, the SP reach performance is not necessarily executed (0%) in the next variable performance (the variable performance example 64 is not necessarily executed). Also, when a hold is stored for the second starting port 122, if it is made so that the SP reach performance is more likely to be executed in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (the variable performance example 64 is more likely to be executed), the SP reach performance may be executed in the next variable performance when the first variable performance is executed (the variable performance example 64 may be executed), and the SP reach performance may not be executed in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed (the variable performance example 64 may not be executed).

(Example of variation 67)
FIG. 229 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 67) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 229. The variable performance example 67 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
In addition, FIG. 229 is a variation performance that is executed when "EF2" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 57. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 224(1) to (8), Fig. 225(1) to (8), and Fig. 226(9) to (14) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 229(1), the button operation effect starts and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Operation!". At this time, the effect button 161 emits red light. At this time, the sixth button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the fourth period.
Then, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation effective period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 229 (2), the "5" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the 27th stop sound is output. Note that even after the 27th stop sound is output, the variable BGM continues to be output.
In addition, even if the effect button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect shown in Fig. 229(1), the same effect as that shown in Fig. 229(2) may be performed. That is, a common effect may be executed whether or not the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect shown in Fig. 229(1).

Next, as shown in Fig. 229(3), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the output of the variable BGM continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 229(4), the decorative pattern 41 of the mismatch is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode, and the first temporary stop motion is performed. At this time, the output of the variable BGM is continued.
Next, as shown in Fig. 229(5), a revival image 558 is displayed. This revival image 558 has a different display mode from the revival image 558 (see Fig. 109(6)) displayed in the normal game mode. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect button 161 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a second revival sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the revival image 558 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 229(6), the role effect is executed, and the left movable role 115A, the center movable role 115B, and the right movable role 115C move to positions where they overlap the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 13 effect image 597 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and the rainbow light emission of the effect button 161 continues. At this time, the second big win notification sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 227 (18) to (24) and Fig. 228 (25) are performed. After that, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 100 (55), (56), Fig. 101 (57), and (58) are performed, except that the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 displayed are "444".

(Example of variation 68)
Next, referring to Fig. 230, a specific explanation will be given of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 68) performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like. The variable presentation example 68 is a variable presentation example based on a game ball winning the first start hole 121 in a special time-saving game state. The variable presentation example 68 is also a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach presentation is not executed, and is a variable presentation based on the number of reserved balls for winning the first start hole 121 being "1".
The change presentation shown in FIG. 230 is executed when "EJ1" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in FIG. 58.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 230 (1), as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" are fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121 shows "1", which is the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting port 122 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the second starting port 122. Meanwhile, the reserved image 52 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 230(2), the special symbol starts to be displayed and the display starts. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual recognition mode and perform the first display operation. Meanwhile, the display image 51 is not displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 230 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first varying operation.
Next, as shown in Fig. 230(4), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the first varying operation. The moving speed of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 at this time is faster than the moving speed of any of the decorative symbols 41 displayed in the fifth visual mode in stages 1 to 3.

Next, as shown in Fig. 230 (5), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the eleventh stop operation. At this time, the fifteenth stop effect image 589 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twenty-fifth stop sound is output.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 230(6).
As described above, in the variable presentation based on winning at the first starting hole 121 during the special time-saving play state, the decorative pattern 41 may stop without being displayed in the second viewing mode or the seventh viewing mode.

(Example of change performance 69)
Next, referring to Fig. 231, a specific explanation will be given of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 69) performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like. The variable presentation example 69 is a variable presentation example based on a game ball winning the first start hole 121 in a special time-saving game state. The variable presentation example 69 is also a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach presentation is not executed, and is a variable presentation based on the number of reserved balls for winning the first start hole 121 being "4".
The change presentation shown in FIG. 231 is executed when "EJ1" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in FIG. 58.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 231 (1), as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" are fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121 shows "4", which is the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting port 122 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the second starting port 122. Meanwhile, the reserved image 52 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 231(2), the variable performance starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual recognition mode and perform the first variable operation. Also, the reserved number display 55 of the first start port 121 is updated to "3". Meanwhile, neither the variable image 51 nor the reserved image 52 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 231 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first varying operation.
Next, as shown in Fig. 231 (4), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the first varying operation. The moving speed of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 at this time is faster than the moving speed of any of the decorative symbols 41 displayed in the fifth visual mode in stages 1 to 3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 231(5), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the eleventh stop operation. At this time, the fifteenth stop effect image 589 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twenty-fifth stop sound is output.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 231 (6).

(Example of change performance 70)
Next, referring to Fig. 232, a variable performance (variable performance example 70) performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like will be specifically described. The variable performance example 70 is a variable performance example based on a game ball entering the first start hole 121 in a special time-saving game state. The variable performance example 70 is also a variable performance based on the result of a special pattern lottery being a jackpot.
The change presentation shown in FIG. 231 is executed when "EI1" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in FIG. 58.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 232 (1), as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" are fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121 shows "1", which is the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting port 122 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the second starting port 122. Meanwhile, the reserved image 52 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 232(2), the variation effect starts with the start of the variation display of the special symbols. At this time, the big win suggestion image 600 is displayed. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are not displayed, or are hidden by the big win suggestion image 600 and are difficult or impossible to see. Meanwhile, the variation of the small symbols 56 starts.
Then, as the special symbol stops varying, the small symbol 56, "444", is fixed and stopped. On the other hand, a stopping sound (sound effect) accompanying the stopping of the small symbol 56 is not output.
After this, the same presentation as shown in Figures 100 (55), (56), 101 (57), and (58) is performed, except that the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 displayed are "444".

As described above, in this embodiment, it is more difficult to output the start sound when a miss variation effect based on a win in the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving game state is executed than when a miss variation effect based on a win in the second start hole 122 in the special time-saving game state is executed. Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game ball should be placed in the second start hole 122 rather than the first start hole 121.
In addition, the fact that it is more difficult to output the start sound when a miss variation effect based on a win at the first start port 121 is executed in the special time-saving play state than when a miss variation effect based on a win at the second start port 122 in the special time-saving play state also includes the fact that the start sound is not output (0%) when a miss variation effect based on a win at the first start port 121 in the special time-saving play state is executed.
In addition, if it is more difficult to output the start sound when a miss variation presentation based on a win at the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is executed than when a miss variation presentation based on a win at the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is executed, the start sound may be output when a miss variation presentation based on a win at the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the output of the start sound is made less likely when a miss variation effect based on a win in the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving game state is executed than when a miss variation effect based on a win in the first start hole 121 in the normal game state is executed. Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the player can be made to recognize that the game ball should be placed in the second start hole 122 rather than the first start hole 121.
In addition, the fact that it is more difficult to output the start sound when a miss variation effect based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 is executed in the special time-saving play state than when a miss variation effect based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 is executed in the normal play state also includes the fact that the start sound is not output (0%) when a miss variation effect based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 is executed in the special time-saving play state.
In addition, if it is more difficult to output the start sound when a miss variation presentation based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 is executed in the special time-saving game state than when a miss variation presentation based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 is executed in the normal game state, the start sound may be output when a miss variation presentation based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 is executed in the special time-saving game state.

(Display timing of each visual appearance in variable performance)
Next, the timing at which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in various visual modes during the variable performance will be described.
Figure 233 is a chart showing the timing at which decorative pattern 41 is displayed in various visual modes during the variable performance.

Figure 233 (1) shows the display timing according to each visual state of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the variable performance (variable performance examples 1, 20, 39) executed when the variable performance pattern "ER1" is selected. Note that the display timings shown in Figure 233 (1) are not limited to the display timings in the variable performance executed when the variable performance pattern "ER1" is selected. The display timings shown in Figure 233 (1) may be the average display timings of all variable performance patterns that can be selected when a variable performance is executed in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a reach performance is not executed, based on the number of reserved numbers for the first starting port 121 being "1" in the normal game state.

First, at time t1, a variable presentation is started in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a reach presentation is not executed, based on the fact that the reserved number for the first starting port 121 is "1" in the normal game state.
Next, at time t2, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode (see FIG. 61(2)). At this time, the first start effect image 501 is also displayed.
Next, at time t3, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode (see FIG. 61(3)).
Next, at time t4, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode (see FIG. 61(4)).

Next, at time t5, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode (see Figure 62 (13)).
Next, at time t6, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode (see FIG. 62 (15)). At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is also displayed.
Next, at time t7, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode (see Figure 62 (16)).
Next, at time t8, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first visual mode (see Figure 63 (17)).

Here, the time from time t1 to time t2, i.e., the time from when the variable performance starts to when the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second visual mode (when the first effect image 501 is displayed at the start), is time T1.
Furthermore, the time from time t2 to time t3, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the second visual mode (the display time of the first effect image 501 at the start), is time T2.
Furthermore, the time from time t3 to time t4, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the third visual mode, is time T3.
In addition, the time from time t4 to time t5, i.e., the display time of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode, is time T4.

In addition, the time from time t5 to time t6, i.e., the display time of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the fifth visual mode, is time T5.
In addition, the time from time t6 to time t7, i.e., the display time of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the sixth visual mode (the display time of the first effect image 503 at stop), is time T6.
In addition, the time from time t7 to time t8, i.e., the display time of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the seventh visual recognition mode, is time T7.
Here, time T3 is shorter than time T2. Time T5 is longer than time T3. Time T6 is shorter than time T5. Time T6 is shorter than time T2. Time T7 is shorter than time T2.

Figure 233 (2) shows the display timing according to each visual state of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the variable performance (variable performance examples 3, 22, 41) executed when the variable performance pattern "ER3" is selected. Note that the display timings shown in Figure 233 (2) are not limited to the display timings in the variable performance executed when the variable performance pattern "ER3" is selected. The display timings shown in Figure 233 (2) may be the average display timing of all variable performance patterns that can be selected when a variable performance is executed in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a reach performance is not executed, based on the fact that the reserved number for the first starting port 121 is "4" in the normal game state.

First, at time t11, based on the fact that the reserved number for the first starting hole 121 is "4" in the normal game state, a variable presentation is started in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a reach presentation is not executed.
Next, at time t12, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual mode (see FIG. 66(2)). At this time, a second start effect image 555 is also displayed.
Next, at time t13, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode (see FIG. 66(3)).
Next, at time t14, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode (see FIG. 66 (4)).

Next, at time t15, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode (see Figure 66 (5)).
Next, at time t16, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode (see FIG. 66(6)). At this time, the second stop effect image 506 is also displayed.
Next, at time t17, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode (see Figure 66 (7)).
Next, at time t18, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first visual mode (see Figure 66 (8)).

Here, the time from time t11 to time t12, that is, the time from when the variable performance starts to when the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second visual mode (when the second effect image 555 is displayed at the start), is time T11.
Furthermore, the time from time t12 to time t13, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the second visual mode (the display time of the start-time second effect image 555), is time T12.
In addition, the time from time t13 to time t14, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the third visual mode, is time T13.
In addition, the time from time t14 to time t15, i.e., the display time of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode, is time T14.

In addition, the time from time t15 to time t16, i.e., the display time of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the fifth visual mode, is time T15.
In addition, the time from time t16 to time t17, i.e., the display time of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the sixth visual recognition mode (the display time of the second effect image 506 at stop), is time T16.
In addition, the time from time t17 to time t18, i.e., the display time of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the seventh visual recognition mode, is time T17.

Here, time T13 is shorter than time T12. Furthermore, time T15 is longer than time T13. Furthermore, time T16 is shorter than time T15. Furthermore, time T16 is shorter than time T12. Furthermore, time T17 is shorter than time T12.
Furthermore, time T12 is shorter than time T2. Furthermore, time T14 is shorter than time T4. Furthermore, time T15 is shorter than time T5. Furthermore, time T16 is shorter than time T6. Furthermore, time T17 is shorter than time T7.

Figure 233 (3) shows the display timing according to each visual state of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the variable performance (variable performance example 61) executed when the variable performance pattern "EH1" is selected. Note that the display timings shown in Figure 233 (3) are not limited to the display timings in the variable performance executed when the variable performance pattern "EH1" is selected. The display timings shown in Figure 233 (1) may be the average display timings of all variable performance patterns that can be selected when a variable performance is executed in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a reach performance is not executed, based on the reserved number for the second starting port 122 being "1" in the special time-saving play state.

First, at time t21, in the special time-saving game state, based on the fact that the reserved number for the second starting port 122 is "1", the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a variable presentation is started in which a reach presentation is not executed.
Next, at time t22, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual mode (see FIG. 218(2)). At this time, a thirteenth effect image 588 is also displayed at the start.
Next, at time t23, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode (see Figure 218 (3)).
Next, at time t24, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode (see Figure 218 (4)).

Next, at time t25, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode (see Figure 218 (5)).
Next, at time t26, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode (see FIG. 218(6)). At this time, a fifteenth stop effect image 589 is also displayed.
Next, at time t27, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the first visual mode (see Figure 218 (7)).

Here, the time from time t21 to time t22, that is, the time from when the variable performance starts to when the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second visual mode (the 13th effect image 588 is displayed at the start), is time T21.
In addition, the time from time t22 to time t23, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the second visual mode (the display time of the 13th effect image 588 at the start), is time T22.
In addition, the time from time t23 to time t24, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the third visual mode, is time T23.
Furthermore, the time from time t24 to time t25, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode, is time T24.

In addition, the time from time t25 to time t26, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fifth visual mode, is time T25.
In addition, the time from time t26 to time t27, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the sixth visual mode (the display time of the 15th effect image 589 when stopped), is time T26.

Here, time T23 is shorter than time T22. Furthermore, time T25 is longer than time T23. Furthermore, time T26 is shorter than time T25. Furthermore, time T26 is shorter than time T22.
Furthermore, time T22 is shorter than time T12, time T24 is shorter than time T14, time T25 is shorter than time T15, and time T26 is shorter than time T16.
Note that time T12 may be shorter than time T22. Furthermore, time T14 may be shorter than time T24. Furthermore, time T15 may be shorter than time T25. Furthermore, time T16 may be shorter than time T26.

Figure 233 (4) shows the display timing according to each visual state of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the variable performance (variable performance example 62) executed when the variable performance pattern "EH3" is selected. Note that the display timings shown in Figure 233 (4) are not limited to the display timings in the variable performance executed when the variable performance pattern "EH3" is selected. The display timings shown in Figure 233 (4) may be the average display timings of all variable performance patterns that can be selected when a variable performance is executed in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a reach performance is not executed, based on the fact that the reserved number for the second starting port 122 is "4" in the special time-saving play state.

First, at time t31, in the special time-saving game state, based on the fact that the reserved number for the second starting port 122 is "4", the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a variable presentation is started in which a reach presentation is not executed.
Next, at time t32, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual mode (see FIG. 219(2)). At this time, a thirteenth effect image 588 is also displayed.
Next, at time t33, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode (see Figure 219 (3)).
Next, at time t34, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode (see Figure 219 (4)).

Next, at time t35, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode (see Figure 219 (5)).
Next, at time t36, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode (see FIG. 219(6)). At this time, the fifteenth stop effect image 589 is also displayed.
Next, at time t37, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first visual mode (see Figure 219 (7)).

Here, the time from time t31 to time t32, that is, the time from when the variable performance starts to when the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second visual mode (the 13th effect image 588 is displayed at the start), is time T31.
In addition, the time from time t32 to time t33, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the second visual mode (the display time of the 13th effect image 588 at the start), is time T32.
In addition, the time from time t33 to time t34, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the third visual mode, is time T33.
In addition, the time from time t34 to time t35, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode, is time T34.

In addition, the time from time t35 to time t36, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fifth visual mode, is time T35.
In addition, the time from time t36 to time t37, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the sixth visual mode (the display time of the 15th effect image 589 when stopped), is time T36.
Here, time T33 is shorter than time T32. Furthermore, time T35 is longer than time T33. Furthermore, time T36 is shorter than time T35. Furthermore, time T36 is shorter than time T32.
Furthermore, time T32 is shorter than time T22, time T34 is shorter than time T24, time T35 is shorter than time T25, and time T36 is shorter than time T26.

Figure 233 (5) shows the display timing according to each visual state of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the variable performance (variable performance example 68) executed when the variable performance pattern "EJ1" is selected. Note that the display timings shown in Figure 233 (5) are not limited to the display timings in the variable performance executed when the variable performance pattern "EJ1" is selected. The display timings shown in Figure 233 (5) may be the average display timings of all variable performance patterns that can be selected when a variable performance is executed in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a reach performance is not executed, based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being "1" in the special time-saving play state.

First, at time t41, in the special time-saving game state, based on the fact that the reserved number for the first starting port 121 is "1", the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a variable presentation is started in which a reach presentation is not executed.
Next, at time t42, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode (see Figure 230 (2)).
Next, at time t43, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode (see Figure 230 (3)).

Next, at time t44, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode (see Figure 230 (4)).
Next, at time t45, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode (see FIG. 230(5)). At this time, a fifteenth stop effect image 589 is also displayed.
Next, at time t46, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the first visual mode (see Figure 230 (6)).

Here, the time from time t41 to time t42, that is, the time from when the variable presentation starts to when the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode, is time T41.
Furthermore, the time from time t42 to time t43, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the third visual mode, is time T42.
In addition, the time from time t43 to time t44, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode, is time T43.
In addition, the time from time t44 to time t45, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fifth visual mode, is time T44.

In addition, the time from time t45 to time t46, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the sixth visual mode (the display time of the 15th effect image 589 when stopped), is time T45.

Here, time T42 is longer than time T33. Time T43 is longer than time T34. Time T44 is longer than time T35. Time T45 is longer than time T36.

Figure 233 (6) shows the display timing according to each visual state of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the variable performance (variable performance example 69) executed when the variable performance pattern "EJ1" is selected. Note that the display timings shown in Figure 233 (6) are not limited to the display timings in the variable performance executed when the variable performance pattern "EJ1" is selected. The display timings shown in Figure 233 (6) may be the average display timings of all variable performance patterns that can be selected when a variable performance is executed in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a reach performance is not executed, based on the fact that the reserved number for the first starting port 121 is "4" in the special time-saving play state.

First, at time t51, in the special time-saving game state, based on the fact that the reserved number for the first starting port 121 is "4", the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a variable presentation is started in which a reach presentation is not executed.
Next, at time t52, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode (see Figure 231 (2)).
Next, at time t53, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode (see Figure 231 (3)).

Next, at time t54, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode (see Figure 231 (4)).
Next, at time t55, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode (see FIG. 231(5)). At this time, a fifteenth stop effect image 589 is also displayed.
Next, at time t56, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the first visual mode (see Figure 231 (6)).

Here, the time from time t51 to time t52, that is, the time from when the variable performance starts to when the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode, is time T51.
In addition, the time from time t52 to time t53, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the third visual mode, is time T52.
In addition, the time from time t53 to time t54, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode, is time T53.
In addition, the time from time t54 to time t55, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fifth visual mode, is time T54.

In addition, the time from time t55 to time t56, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the sixth visual mode (the display time of the 15th effect image 589 when stopped), is time T55.

Here, time T42 and time T52 are the same time, time T43 and time T53 are the same time, time T44 and time T54 are the same time, and time T45 and time T55 are the same time.
Furthermore, times T1, T11, T21, T31, T41, and T51 are all the same time.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can execute the following viewing modes for the patterns: a first display (fourth viewing mode) in which the pattern in a specific row (e.g., middle row decorative pattern 41) is difficult to view after the start of the variable performance, and a second display (e.g., display using the fifth viewing mode, sixth viewing mode, seventh viewing mode, first viewing mode, etc.) in which the pattern in the specific row is easier to view after the first display than the first display. In the first mode (e.g., normal game state), when a specific variable effect (a miss variable effect in which no reach effect is performed) is executed based on the number of first pending memories (the number of pending memories for the first starting port 121) being a specific number (e.g., "1") (when variable effect example 1 (see Figures 61 to 63) or the like is executed), the average time from when the patterns in the specific column become the second display to when they stop (the average time from when the patterns in the specific column become the second state to when they stop in all variable effect patterns that can be selected when a specific variable effect is executed based on the number of first pending memories being a specific number in the first mode) is the first time (time T5 + time T6 + time T7). In addition, when a specific variable performance (such as variable performance example 61 (see Figure 218)) is performed based on the number of second reserved memories (the number of reserved memories for the second starting port 122) being a specific number in the second mode (for example, a special time-saving play state), the average time from when the patterns in a specific column become the second display to when they stop (the average time from when the patterns in a specific column become the second state to when they stop in all variable performance patterns that can be selected when a specific variable performance is executed based on the number of second reserved memories being a specific number in the second mode) is a second time (time T25 + time T26) that is shorter than the first time.
In this case, in the second mode, the player can be given the impression that the symbols in the specific row stop at high speed after changing to the second mode, compared to the first mode, and a speedy change presentation can be realized in the second mode, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a normal game state, in a specific variation presentation based on the first reserved memory being "1" (a miss variation presentation in which no reach presentation is performed), from the time the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes a slow visual appearance until it stops, multiple symbols (e.g., "9" and "1" (see FIG. 62 (13) and (14))) that are varying in the middle row decorative pattern 41 become visible. On the other hand, in a special time-saving game state, in a specific variation presentation based on the second reserved memory being "1", from the time the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes a slow visual appearance until it stops, only a single symbol (e.g., "1" (see FIG. 218 (5))) that is varying in the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes visible.
That is, in this embodiment, when a specific variation presentation is executed based on the first reserved memory being a specific number in the first mode, it is easier to execute a presentation in which a plurality of patterns that change in the specific row patterns (such as the middle row decorative pattern 41) are visible from the time the specific row patterns become the second state (the fifth viewing state, the sixth viewing state, the seventh viewing state, etc.) until they stop, when a specific variation presentation is executed based on the second reserved memory being a specific number (such as "1") in the second mode. Therefore, even when a deviation variation presentation is executed in the first mode, it is possible to show the player a variety of variations in the decorative pattern 41.

The fact that a performance in which multiple patterns changing in the pattern of the specific row are visible from when the pattern of the specific row becomes the second state until it stops is more likely to be executed when a specific change performance is executed in the first mode based on the first reserved memory being a specific number than when a specific change performance is executed in the second mode based on the second reserved memory being a specific number includes that when a specific change performance is executed in the first mode based on the first reserved memory being a specific number, a performance in which multiple patterns changing in the pattern of the specific row are visible from when the pattern of the specific row becomes the second state until it stops is always executed (100%), and that when a specific change performance is executed in the second mode based on the second reserved memory being a specific number, a performance in which multiple patterns changing in the pattern of the specific row are visible from when the pattern of the specific row becomes the second state until it stops is always executed (0%).

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute a first display (for example, a display in the fourth viewing mode (see Figure 59-1 (4))) in which the pattern of a specific row (for example, the middle row decorative pattern 41) is difficult to see after the start of the variable performance, a second display (for example, a display in the sixth viewing mode (see Figure 59-1 (6)), seventh viewing mode (see Figure 59-1 (7)) or the like) in which the pattern of the specific row is easier to see after the first display than in the first display, and a third display (display in the first viewing mode (see Figure 59-1 (1))) in which the pattern of the specific row stops after the second display. Furthermore, in a second variable presentation (a losing variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed) in the first mode (normal gaming state), the display time according to the second aspect of the pattern in the specific column (time T5 + time T6 + time T7 (see Figure 233) in the second variable presentation based on the first specific number, and time T15 + time T16 + time T17 in the second variable presentation based on the second specific number) is more likely to be shorter when the second variable presentation (a losing variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed) is executed based on the number of first pending memories being a first specific number (for example, "1"). Furthermore, in one second variable presentation, the display time due to the second aspect of the pattern in a specific column (time T35 + time T36 in the second variable presentation based on the second specific number in the second mode) is more likely to be shorter when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of second reserved memories being a second specific number in the second mode (special time-saving play state) than when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number in the first mode.
In this case, by displaying the slow visual appearance of the decorative pattern 41 at various display times according to the number of first reserved memories in the first mode, it is possible to realize a variety of sharp and varied variations in the display of the decorative pattern 41. Furthermore, in the second mode, the high-speed variations of the decorative pattern 41 can be more strongly impressed on the player than in the first mode, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in a second variable performance in the first mode, the display time in the second aspect of the pattern in the specific column is more likely to be shorter when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number that is greater than the first specific number than when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the first specific number includes the fact that in a second variable performance in the first mode, the display time in the second aspect of the pattern in the specific column is always shorter (100%) when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number that is greater than the first specific number than when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the first specific number.
Furthermore, if, in a second variable performance in the first mode, the display time of the second aspect of the pattern in the specific column is likely to be shorter when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number greater than the first specific number than when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the first specific number, then, in a second variable performance in the first mode, the display time of the second aspect of the pattern in the specific column may be longer when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number greater than the first specific number than when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the first specific number.

In addition, the fact that the display time in the second aspect of the pattern in a specific column is more likely to be shorter when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of second reserved memories being the second specific number in the second mode than when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the second specific number in one second variable performance in the first mode also includes the fact that the display time in the second aspect of the pattern in a specific column is always shorter (100%) when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of second reserved memories being the second specific number in the second mode than when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the second specific number in one second variable performance in the first mode.
Furthermore, if the display time of the second aspect of the pattern in the specific column is likely to be shorter when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of second reserved memories being the second specific number in the second mode than when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the second specific number in one second variable performance in the first mode, the display time of the second aspect of the pattern in the specific column may be longer when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of second reserved memories being the second specific number in the second mode than when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the second specific number in one second variable performance in the first mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display time according to the second aspect of the specific column is more likely to be shorter (time T25+time T26) when the number of the second reserved memories is the first specific number (e.g., "1") in the second mode (special time-saving game state) and the second variable performance (miss variable performance in which the reach performance is not executed) is executed (time T15+time T16+time T17) in the first mode (normal game state) and the number of the first reserved memories is the second specific number (e.g., "4"). Therefore, in the second mode, regardless of the number of reserved memories, the player can be more strongly impressed that the decorative pattern 41 changes at a higher speed than in the first mode.
In addition, the fact that the display time due to the second aspect of the specific column is more likely to be shorter when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of second pending memories being the first specific number in the second mode than when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of first pending memories being the second specific number in the first mode also includes the fact that when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of second pending memories being the first specific number in the second mode, the display time due to the second aspect of the specific column will always be shorter (100%) than when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of first pending memories being the second specific number in the first mode.
Furthermore, if the display time due to the second aspect of the specific column is likely to be shorter when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of first pending memories being the first specific number in the second mode than when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of first pending memories being the second specific number in the first mode, then the display time due to the second aspect of the specific column may be shorter when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of first pending memories being the second specific number in the first mode than when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of first pending memories being the first specific number in the second mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the first mode, the operation time when the decorative pattern 41 stops is different between the case where the second variable performance is executed based on the number of the first reserved memories being the first specific number and the case where the second variable performance is executed based on the number of the first reserved memories being the second specific number (time T6, time T16). Therefore, it is possible to realize a variable performance having various operation modes of the decorative pattern 41 according to the reserved number.
In this embodiment, the operation time when the decorative pattern 41 stops is longer when the second change performance is executed based on the number of the first reserved memories being the second specific number than when the second change performance is executed based on the number of the first reserved memories being the first specific number, but this is not limited to this. The operation time when the decorative pattern 41 stops may be longer when the second change performance is executed based on the number of the first reserved memories being the first specific number than when the second change performance is executed based on the number of the first reserved memories being the second specific number. Also, the operation time when the decorative pattern 41 stops may be the same between the case where the second change performance is executed based on the number of the first reserved memories being the first specific number and the case where the second change performance is executed based on the number of the first reserved memories being the second specific number.

In addition, FIG. 233 shows the timings at which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in various visual modes in the variable performance, but is not limited to this. Each timing shown in FIG. 233 may be the timings at which the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in various visual modes, or the timings at which the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in various visual modes.

(Variation of Variation Example 61)
Figure 234 shows a modified example of the variable performance example 61.
In the variable presentation example 61, in the special time-saving play state, the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the reach presentation is not executed, and in the variable presentation based on the number of reserved symbols for winning in the second starting port 122 being "1", three rows of decorative symbols 41 are simultaneously displayed in the fifth viewing mode and simultaneously displayed in the sixth viewing mode, but this is not limited to this.
In the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 218 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 234 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 234 (2), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 234 (3), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eleventh stopping action. At this time, the twenty-fifth stopping sound is output. At this time, the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the first changing action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 234(4), the right row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eleventh stopping action. At this time, the twenty-fifth stopping sound is output. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the first changing action.
Next, as shown in Fig. 234 (5), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the eleventh stopping action. At this time, the twenty-fifth stopping sound is output.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 234(6).
In this way, even in a variable presentation in which the result of the special pattern lottery in the special time-saving play state is a miss and a reach presentation is not executed, and the variable presentation is based on the number of reserved symbols for winning at the second starting port 122 being "1", three rows of decorative symbols 41 may be displayed in sequence in the fifth viewing mode and then in sequence in the sixth viewing mode.

In addition, in a variable presentation in which the result of the special pattern lottery during the special time-saving game state is a miss and a reach presentation is not executed, and the variable presentation is based on a winning entry into the first starting port 121, even if the variable presentation is based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being any of "1" to "4," the three rows of decorative patterns 41 may be displayed in sequence in the fifth viewing mode, and then in sequence in the sixth viewing mode (see Figures 234 (1) to (7)).

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute a first display (e.g., a display using the fourth viewing mode) in which the pattern in a specific row (e.g., the middle row decorative pattern 41) is difficult to see after the start of the variable performance, and a second display (e.g., a display using the fifth viewing mode, sixth viewing mode, seventh viewing mode, first viewing mode, etc.) in which the pattern in the specific row is easier to see than the first display after the first display. Furthermore, in one variable presentation in the first mode (e.g., normal game state), a display in the first stop display mode (a mode in which the three rows of decorative patterns 41 successively become the sixth visual mode and the seventh visual mode) is more likely to be executed when a specific variable presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number (e.g., "1") is executed (when variable presentation example 1 (see Figures 61 to 63), etc. is executed) than when a specific variable presentation (a miss variable presentation in which no reach presentation is executed) based on the number of first reserved memories (the reserved number for the first starting port 121) being a first specific number (e.g., "4") is executed (when variable presentation example 3 (see Figure 66), etc. is executed). Furthermore, in one variable presentation in the second mode (for example, a special time-saving play state), a display in the second stop display mode (a mode in which three rows of decorative patterns 41 all become the sixth or seventh visual mode at the same time) is more likely to be executed when a specific variable presentation (such as variable presentation example 62 (see FIG. 219)) based on the number of second reserved memories (reserved number for the second starting port 122) being the first specific number is executed than when a specific variable presentation (such as a modified example of variable presentation example 61 (see FIG. 234)) based on the number of second reserved memories being the first specific number is executed.
In this case, a variable presentation can be realized in which decorative patterns 41 are displayed in various stop display modes according to the relationship between the mode and the number of reserved memories, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the symbols in a specific row may be displayed in the fourth viewing mode, and then displayed in the sixth viewing mode without being displayed in the fifth viewing mode. In this case, the second display is the sixth viewing mode.
In addition, the symbols in a specific row may be displayed in the fourth viewing mode, and then displayed in the seventh viewing mode without being displayed in the fifth and sixth viewing modes. In this case, the second display is the seventh viewing mode.
In addition, the symbols in a specific row may be displayed in the fourth viewing mode, and then displayed in the first viewing mode without being displayed in any of the fifth to seventh viewing modes. In this case, the second display is the first viewing mode.

Furthermore, in one variation presentation in the first mode, the fact that display in the first stop display mode is more likely to be executed when a specific variation presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed than when a specific variation presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number includes the fact that display in the first stop display mode is not always executed (0%) when a specific variation presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number is executed in one variation presentation in the first mode, and the fact that display in the first stop display mode is always executed (100%) when a specific variation presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed in the first mode.
Furthermore, if, in one variation presentation in the first mode, display using the first stop display mode is more likely to be executed when a specific variation presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed than when a specific variation presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number is executed, then display using the first stop display mode may be executed when a specific variation presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number is executed in one variation presentation in the first mode, or display using the first stop display mode may not be executed when a specific variation presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed in one variation presentation in the first mode.

Furthermore, in one variation presentation in the second mode, the fact that display using the second stop display mode is more likely to be executed when a specific variation presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the first specific number is executed than when a specific variation presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the second specific number includes the fact that display using the second stop display mode is always not executed (0%) when a specific variation presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the second specific number is executed in one variation presentation in the second mode, and the fact that display using the second stop display mode is always executed (100%) when a specific variation presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the first specific number is executed in one variation presentation in the second mode.
Furthermore, if, in one variation presentation in the second mode, a display using the second stop display mode is more likely to be executed when a specific variation presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the first specific number is executed than when a specific variation presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the second specific number is executed, then a display using the second stop display mode may be executed when a specific variation presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the second specific number is executed in one variation presentation in the second mode, or a display using the second stop display mode may not be executed when a specific variation presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the first specific number is executed in one variation presentation in the second mode.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is easier for a display to be performed using a common stop display mode in the second mode (e.g., a special time-saving gaming state) when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number is executed and when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed than in the first mode (e.g., a normal gaming state) when a specific change presentation (a miss change presentation in which no reach presentation is performed) is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number (e.g., "4") and when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number (e.g., "1") is executed.
In addition, in the second mode, when a specific change presentation is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number, and when a specific change presentation is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number, it is easier to execute a display using a common stop display mode than when a specific change presentation is executed based on the number of second reserved memories being a first specific number, and when a specific change presentation is executed based on the number of second reserved memories being a second specific number.
In this case, since the variable presentation based on a winning entry into the first starting hole 121 in the second mode tends to become monotonous, it is possible to make the player recognize that in the second mode, the game ball should be allowed to win into the second starting hole 122.

In addition, the fact that a display using a common stop display mode is more likely to be executed when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number and when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed in the second mode than when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number and when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed in the first mode includes that when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number and when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed in the second mode, a display using a common stop display mode is always executed (100%) and that when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being the first specific number and when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being the second specific number is executed in the first mode, a display using a common stop display mode is not always executed (0%).
Furthermore, the fact that a display based on a common stop display mode is more likely to be executed when, in the second mode, a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number is executed and when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed than when, in the second mode, a specific change presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being a first specific number is executed and when a specific change presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being a second specific number is executed includes that, in the second mode, a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number is executed and when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed, a display based on a common stop display mode is always executed (100%) and that, in the second mode, a specific change presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the first specific number is executed and when a specific change presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being a second specific number is executed, a display based on a common stop display mode is always not executed (0%).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, the execution time of the action performed when the decorative pattern 41 stops (the sixth visual recognition mode and the display time T6 and time T16 of the first effect image 503 at the time of stopping) is different between the miss variation performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "1" and the miss variation performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "4". Therefore, it is possible to realize a variation performance consisting of various stop modes of the decorative pattern 41 according to the reserved number.
It has been described that in the normal game state, the execution time of the operation performed when the decorative pattern 41 stops is shorter in the miss variation performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "4" than in the miss variation performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "1" (time T6>time T16), but this is not limited to this. In the normal game state, the execution time of the operation performed when the decorative pattern 41 stops may be longer in the miss variation performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "4" than in the miss variation performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "1" (time T6<time T16). In other words, in the normal game state, the execution time of the operation performed when the decorative pattern 41 stops may be different between the miss variation performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "1" and the miss variation performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "4". In addition, in the normal game state, the execution time of the operation performed when the decorative pattern 41 stops may be the same for a miss change presentation based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being "1" and a miss change presentation based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being "4".

In addition, in this embodiment, in the special time-saving game state, the execution time (time T26, time T36) of the action performed when the decorative pattern 41 stops is different between a miss change presentation based on the reserved number for the second start port 122 being "1" and a miss change presentation based on the reserved number for the second start port 122 being "4", but this is not limited to this. In the special time-saving game state, the execution time of the action performed when the decorative pattern 41 stops may be the same between a miss change presentation based on the reserved number for the second start port 122 being "1" and a miss change presentation based on the reserved number for the second start port 122 being "4".

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, the operation time of the decorative pattern when the variation effect starts (the second visual recognition mode and the display time T2 and time T12 of the first effect image 501 at the start) is different between the miss variation effect based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "1" and the miss variation effect based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "4". Therefore, it is possible to realize a variation effect consisting of various variation start modes of the decorative pattern 41 according to the reserved number.
In addition, in the normal game state, the operation time of the decorative pattern when the variation presentation starts may be the same for a loss variation presentation based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being "1" and a loss variation presentation based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being "4". Also, in the normal game state, the operation mode of the decorative pattern when the variation presentation starts may be the same for a loss variation presentation based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being "1" and a loss variation presentation based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being "4".

(Relationship between button operation effects and vibration effects in variable effects)
Next, the timing of execution of the vibration effect in response to the button operation effect will be described.
Figure 235 is a chart showing the execution timing of vibration effects in response to button operation effects.
Figure 235 (1) shows the timing of button operation and vibration in the variation performance example 13 (see Figures 94 to 101). Note that Figure 235 (1) may be the timing of button operation and vibration in the variation performance example 32 (see Figures 143 to 150) or the variation performance example 51 (see Figures 194 to 201).

First, at time t61, the button operation presentation begins (see Figure 99 (44)).
Next, at time t62, the vibration effect begins (see FIG. 99 (45)).
Then, at time t63, the vibration effect ends.
Here, the time from time t61 to time t62, that is, the time from when the button operation presentation starts to when the vibration presentation starts, is time T61.
Furthermore, the time from time t62 to time t63, i.e., the execution time of the vibration effect, is time T62.

Figure 235 (2) shows the timing of execution of the button operation effect and the vibration effect in the variation effect example 14 (see Figure 102). Note that Figure 235 (2) may also be the timing of execution of the button operation effect and the vibration effect in the variation effect example 33 (see Figure 151) or the variation effect example 52 (see Figure 202).

First, at time t71, the button operation presentation begins (see FIG. 102 (1)).
Next, at time t72, a vibration effect is started (see FIG. 102 (3)).
Then, at time t73, the vibration effect ends.
Here, the time from time t71 to time t72, that is, the time from when the button operation effect starts to when the vibration effect starts, is time T71.
Furthermore, the time from time t72 to time t73, i.e., the execution time of the vibration effect, is time T72.

Figure 235 (3) shows the timing of execution of the button operation effect and vibration effect in variable performance example 19 (see Figure 109). Note that Figure 235 (3) may also be the timing of execution of the button operation effect and vibration effect in variable performance example 38 (see Figure 158) or variable performance example 57 (see Figure 209).

First, at time t81, the button operation presentation begins (see Figure 109 (1)).
Next, at time t82, a vibration effect is started (see FIG. 109 (6)).
Then, at time t83, the vibration effect ends.
Here, the time from time t81 to time t82, that is, the time from when the button operation presentation starts to when the vibration presentation starts, is time T81.
Furthermore, the time from time t82 to time t83, i.e., the execution time of the vibration effect, is time T82.

Figure 235 (4) shows the timing of execution of button operation effects and vibration effects in the variable effect example 66 (see Figures 225 to 228).
First, at time t91, the button operation presentation begins (see FIG. 226 (15)).
Next, at time t92, the vibration effect begins (see FIG. 226 (16)).
Then, at time t93, the vibration effect ends.
Here, the time from time t91 to time t92, that is, the time from when the button operation presentation starts to when the vibration presentation starts, is time T91.
Furthermore, the time from time t92 to time t93, i.e., the execution time of the vibration effect, is time T92.

Figure 235 (5) shows the timing of execution of button operation effects and vibration effects in the variable effect example 67 (see Figure 229).
First, at time t101, the button operation presentation begins (see Figure 229 (1)).
Next, at time t102, the vibration effect begins (see FIG. 229 (5)).
Then, at time t103, the vibration effect ends.
Here, the time from time t101 to time t102, that is, the time from the start of the button operation presentation to the start of the vibration presentation, is time T101.
The time from time t102 to time t103, that is, the execution time of the vibration effect, is time T102.

Here, time T71 is longer than time T61, and time T81 is longer than time T71.
Furthermore, time T72 is shorter than time T62, and time T62 and time T82 are the same length of time.
Furthermore, time T101 is longer than time T91.
Furthermore, time T92 and time T102 are the same time.
Furthermore, time T101 is shorter than time T81. In this case, time T82 and time T102 may be the same time or different times. When time T82 and time T102 are different times, time T102 may be shorter than time T82 or may be longer than time T82.

As described above, in this embodiment, the expectation level is higher for the button operation presentation of "BU5" (see FIG. 99 (44)) than for the button operation presentation of "BU4" (see FIG. 55) (see FIG. 86 (35)). In other words, the expectation level of a special game (jackpot game) is higher when the second operation display (display of the button operation image 502 shown in FIG. 99 (44)) is executed than when the first operation display (display of the button operation image 502 shown in FIG. 86 (35)) is executed. The presentation control unit 300 can make the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration presentation when a predetermined condition is satisfied different from the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration presentation when a predetermined condition is not satisfied. Examples of cases where a predetermined condition is satisfied include a case where a vibration presentation in the variation presentation example 13 is executed (see FIG. 99 (45), FIG. 235 (1)) and a case where a revival presentation is executed (see FIG. 109 (6), FIG. 235 (3)). In addition, examples of cases where the specified conditions are not met include cases where the vibration effect or revival effect in variable performance example 13 is not executed, and the vibration effect in variable performance example 14 is executed (see Figures 102 (3) and 235 (2)).
In this case, the player can be given an element of surprise regarding the timing of the execution of the vibration effect, and coupled with the execution of the second operation display, which has a particularly high degree of expectation, the anticipation of the vibration effect being executed can be heightened, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specified conditions include a first specified condition (execution of a vibration effect in variable performance example 13 (see Figure 99 (45) and Figure 235 (1))) and a second specified condition (execution of a vibration effect in a revival performance (see Figure 109 (6) and Figure 235 (3))).
Furthermore, the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration presentation when the first specified condition is satisfied is longer than the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration presentation when the specified condition is not satisfied.
In addition, the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration presentation when the second specified condition is satisfied is longer than the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration presentation when the first specified condition is satisfied.
In addition, the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration presentation when the second specified condition is met is longer than the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration presentation when the specified condition is not met.
In this case, various vibration effects with different start timings are realized depending on the conditions under which the vibration effects are executed, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation that the vibration effects will be executed.

In this embodiment, in the variable performance example 14, the variable performance example 33, and the variable performance example 52, when the performance lever 163 is operated in the lever operation performance, the performance lever 163 emits light in white (see Figure 102 (2) etc.) and then emits light in rainbow colors, but this is not limited to this.
In the variation performance example 14, the variation performance example 33, and the variation performance example 52, even if the performance lever 163 is operated in the lever operation performance, the performance lever 163 may continue to emit red light. Then, when the vibration performance starts, the performance lever 163 may emit light in rainbow colors. In this case, the length of time that the performance lever 163 emits red light is the time T71 shown in FIG. 235 (2).

(Modification of the visual recognition mode of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the normal gaming state)
Next, a modified example of the visual recognition state of the middle row decorative pattern 41 until the start of the SP reach performance in the normal gaming state will be described.
In this embodiment, in the normal game state, it has been explained that the SP reach presentation starts after the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 10th visual mode in the normal reach presentation, but this is not limited to this.

First, as shown in Fig. 236 (1), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the eighth visual mode, the first reach action is performed, the first reach line image 509 and the first reach notification image 510 are displayed, and the first reach sound is output. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 236 (2), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 11th visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is hidden, and a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 236 (3), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 236 (4), the SP reach performance starts, and an SP reach image 517 is displayed.
In this way, even in the normal game state, the SP reach presentation may be started without the middle row decorative pattern 41 being displayed in the tenth visual mode in the normal reach presentation.

As described above, in this embodiment, in a variable performance in which the SP reach performance is executed in a normal game state (e.g., variable performance example 10, etc.), the display of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in a slow visual mode is executed before the start of the SP reach performance (see FIG. 84 (21)). On the other hand, in a variable performance in which the SP reach performance is executed in a special time-saving game state (e.g., variable performance example 64 (see FIG. 221 to FIG. 223) etc.), the display of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in a slow visual mode is not executed before the start of the SP reach performance.
That is, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute, as the viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41, a first display (for example, a display using the fourth viewing mode (see FIG. 59-1 (4))) in which the pattern of a specific row (for example, the middle row decorative pattern 41) is difficult to view after the start of the variable performance, a second display (for example, a display using the fifth viewing mode (see FIG. 59-1 (5)), sixth viewing mode (see FIG. 59-1 (6)), seventh viewing mode (see FIG. 59-1 (7)), tenth viewing mode (see FIG. 59-2 (13)), etc.) in which the pattern of the specific row is easier to view after the first display than in the first display, and a third display (for example, a display using the first viewing mode (see FIG. 250-1 (1))) in which the pattern of the specific row stops after the second display. Furthermore, in one variable presentation, the second display of the patterns in a specific column before the start of a specific presentation is more likely to be executed when a specific presentation (SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation) is executed in the second mode (special time-saving play state) than when a specific presentation (SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation) is executed in the first mode (for example, normal play state).
In this case, in the normal game state, the special performance is likely to start after the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a slow visual mode to prompt the player that the variable performance is ending, so that the interest in the special performance can be improved. Also, in the special time-saving game state, the special performance is likely to start without displaying the middle row decorative pattern 41 in a slow visual mode, so that even in the variable performance in which the special performance is performed, the execution time of the variable performance can be set to be suitable for the special time-saving game state. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in one variable performance, the second display of the patterns in the specific column before the start of the specific performance is more likely to be executed when a specific performance in the second mode is executed than when a specific performance in the first mode is executed, which includes the fact that when a specific performance in the first mode is executed, the display in the second aspect of the patterns in the specific column before the start of the specific performance is never executed (0%), and the fact that when a specific performance in the second mode is executed, the display in the second aspect of the patterns in the specific column before the start of the specific performance is always executed (100%).
Furthermore, if, in one variable performance, the second display of the patterns in a specific column before the start of a specific performance is more likely to be executed when a specific performance is executed in the second mode than when a specific performance is executed in the first mode, the display in the second aspect of the patterns in a specific column before the start of a specific performance may be executed when a specific performance is executed in the first mode, and the display in the second aspect of the patterns in a specific column before the start of a specific performance may not be executed when a specific performance is executed in the second mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, in both the normal game state and the special time-saving game state, when the SP reach performance is executed, it is possible to make the middle row decorative pattern 41 invisible (difficult to see or invisible) (see FIG. 85 (25) and FIG. 222 (9)). In this embodiment, the time from the start of the variable performance or reach performance until the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes invisible (difficult to see or invisible) is likely to be shorter when the variable performance in which the SP reach performance is executed is executed in the special time-saving game state than when the variable performance in which the SP reach performance is executed is executed in the normal game state. Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the player can be made aware that the performance is progressing quickly through the speed of switching the visibility state of the decorative pattern 41.
In addition, the fact that the time from the start of the variable performance or reach performance to the middle row decorative pattern 41 becoming invisible (difficult to see or unseeable) is more likely to be shorter when a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed is performed in a special time-saving play state than when a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed is performed in a normal play state includes the fact that when a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed is performed in a special time-saving play state, the time from the start of the variable performance or reach performance to the middle row decorative pattern 41 becoming invisible (difficult to see or unseeable) is always shorter (100%) than when a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed is performed in a normal play state.
Furthermore, if the time from the start of a variable performance or reach performance to the middle row decorative pattern 41 becoming invisible (difficult to see or unseeable) is likely to be shorter when a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed is performed in a special time-saving play state than when a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed is performed in a normal play state, the time from the start of a variable performance or reach performance to the middle row decorative pattern 41 becoming invisible (difficult to see or unseeable) may also be shorter when a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed is performed in a normal play state than when a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed in a special time-saving play state.

(Variation of Variation Example 5)
Next, a modified example of Variable Presentation Example 5 (see Figures 71 to 74) will be explained.
Figure 237 shows a modified example of variable performance example 5.
First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 61 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 237 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.

237(2), a button operation effect is started, button operation image 502 is displayed, and a first button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the first period.
Then, when effect button 161 is operated during the effective operation period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 237 (3), second image 527 is displayed upon operation and a second operation sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 237 (4), the role production is executed, and the left movable role 115A moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role second effect image 513 is displayed around the left movable role 115A, and the second role sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 71 (3) to (8), Figures 72 (9) to (16), Figures 73 (17) to (24), and Figures 74 (25) to (29) are performed.

In this way, a button operation performance and a gimmick performance are executed after the decorative pattern 41 starts to change and before it temporarily stops, and after the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, a change performance may be executed in which the button operation performance and the gimmick performance are not executed.
In addition, the example shown in FIG. 237 is not limited to the modified example of the variation performance example 5. As a modified example of the variation performance example 24 (see FIG. 121 to FIG. 123), the button operation performance and the role performance are executed as in the example shown in FIG. 237 before the decorative pattern 41 starts to vary and temporarily stops, and the button operation performance and the role performance are not executed after the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops. In addition, as a modified example of the variation performance example 43 (see FIG. 171 to FIG. 174), the button operation performance and the role performance are executed as in the example shown in FIG. 237 before the decorative pattern 41 starts to vary and temporarily stops, and the button operation performance and the role performance are not executed after the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops.

(Variation of variation example 10)
Next, a modified example of the variable performance example 10 (see Figures 82 to 86) will be described.
Figure 238 shows a modified example of variable performance example 10.
First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 82 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 238 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 238(2), the first step performance is executed, step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed, and the first step sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 238(3), the second stage of step performance is executed, step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed, and a second step sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 238(4), the third step performance is executed, step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed, and the third step sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 238 (5), the step image 508 is no longer displayed, and the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 238(6), the zone promotion effect is started and a zone promotion image 505 is displayed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 83 (14) to (16), Figures 84 (17) to (24), Figures 85 (25) to (32), and Figures 86 (33) to (40) are performed.

In this way, the button operation performance and the gimmick performance are not executed after the decorative pattern 41 starts to change and before it temporarily stops, and after the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, a change performance in which the button operation performance and the gimmick performance are executed may be executed.
In addition, the example shown in FIG. 238 is not limited to the modified example of the variation performance example 10. As a modified example of the variation performance example 29 (see FIG. 131 to FIG. 135), the button operation performance and the role performance are not executed before the decorative pattern 41 starts to vary and stops temporarily, and the button operation performance (see FIG. 135 (35)) and the role performance (see FIG. 135 (33)) may be executed after the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. In addition, as a modified example of the variation performance example 48 (see FIG. 182 to FIG. 186), the button operation performance and the role performance are not executed before the decorative pattern 41 starts to vary and stops temporarily, and the button operation performance (see FIG. 186 (35)) and the role performance (see FIG. 186 (33)) may be executed after the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

(Variation of variation example 11)
Next, a modified example of the variable performance example 11 (see Figures 87 to 92) will be explained.
Figure 239 shows a modified example of variable performance example 11.
First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 82 (1) to (5) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 239 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 239(2), the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become invisible (difficult to see or invisible). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 87 (4) to (8), 88 (9) to (16), 89 (17) to (24), 90 (25) to (32), 91 (33) to (40), and 92 (41) to (43) are performed.

In this way, the button operation performance and the gimmick performance are not executed after the decorative pattern 41 starts to change and before it temporarily stops, and after the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, a change performance in which the button operation performance and the gimmick performance are executed may be executed.
In addition, the example shown in FIG. 239 is not limited to the modified example of the variation performance example 11. As a modified example of the variation performance example 30 (see FIG. 136 to FIG. 141), the button operation performance and the role performance are not executed before the decorative pattern 41 starts to vary and stops temporarily, and the button operation performance (see FIG. 140 (38)) and the role performance (see FIG. 140 (36)) may be executed after the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. In addition, as a modified example of the variation performance example 49 (see FIG. 187 to FIG. 192), the button operation performance and the role performance are not executed before the decorative pattern 41 starts to vary and stops temporarily, and the button operation performance (see FIG. 191 (38)) and the role performance (see FIG. 191 (36)) may be executed after the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

(Variation of variation example 13)
Next, a modified example of the variable performance example 13 (see Figures 94 to 101) will be explained.
Figure 240 shows a modified example of variable performance example 13.
First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 93 (1) to (8) and Figures 94 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 240 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 240(2), the zone promotion effect is started and a zone promotion image 505 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 240(3), the zone presentation is started, and a zone notification image 528 is displayed. At this time, a zone effect image 529 is displayed around the zone notification image 528, and a zone start sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 240 (4), the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become invisible (difficult to see or invisible), and a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 95 (10) to (16), 96 (17) to (24), 97 (25) to (32), 98 (33) to (40), 99 (41) to (48), 100 (49) to (56), and 101 (57) and (58) are performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the expectation of the button operation effect executed before the start of the specific performance (temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41) is 3% (see FIG. 55), and the expectation of the button operation effect executed after the start of the specific performance is 25%. Therefore, it is easier to execute a special game (jackpot game) when a variable performance (such as a modified example of the variable performance example 10 (see FIG. 82 to FIG. 86, FIG. 238)) in which a button operation effect is not performed before the start of the specific performance and a button operation effect is performed after the start of the specific performance is executed, than when a variable performance (such as a variable performance example 1 (see FIG. 61 to FIG. 63)) in which a button operation effect is performed before the start of the specific performance and a button operation effect is not performed after the start of the specific performance is executed. Also, in this embodiment, the expectation of the vibration effect executed before the start of the specific performance is 65%, and the expectation of the button operation effect executed after the start of the specific performance is 25%. In other words, special games are easier to execute when a variable performance in which a button operation performance is performed without a vibration performance is executed before the start of a specific performance (such as a modified example of variable performance example 13 (see Figures 94 to 101, Figure 240)) is executed, rather than when a variable performance in which a button operation performance is executed without a vibration performance is executed after the start of a specific performance (such as a modified example of variable performance example 10 (see Figures 82 to 86, Figure 238)).
In this case, the player's sense of expectation for the button operation performance can be increased as the variable performance progresses. Also, even in the first half of the variable performance, if a vibration performance is executed, the player's sense of expectation can be significantly increased, so that the player can be kept in expectation throughout the entire period of the variable performance, and the interest of the game can be increased.

In addition, the fact that a special game is more likely to be executed when a variable performance is executed in which a button operation performance is performed before the start of a specific performance and a button operation performance is performed after the start of a specific performance than when a variable performance is executed in which a button operation performance is performed before the start of a specific performance and a button operation performance is not performed after the start of a specific performance includes the fact that a special game will not be executed (0%) when a variable performance is executed in which a button operation performance is performed before the start of a specific performance and a button operation performance is not performed after the start of a specific performance.
In addition, the fact that a special game is more likely to be executed when a variable performance in which a vibration performance is performed without a button operation performance is executed before the start of a specific performance than when a variable performance in which a button operation performance is executed without a vibration performance after the start of a specific performance includes the fact that a special game will not be executed (0%) when a variable performance in which a button operation performance is executed without a vibration performance after the start of a specific performance, and the fact that a special game will be executed (100%) when a variable performance in which a vibration performance is performed without a button operation performance is executed before the start of a specific performance.
In addition, if a special game is more easily executed when a variable performance in which a vibration effect is performed without a button operation performance is executed before the start of a specific performance than when a variable performance in which a vibration effect is performed without a button operation performance is executed after the start of a specific performance, a special game may be executed when a variable performance in which a button operation performance is executed without a vibration effect is executed after the start of a specific performance, or a special game may not be executed when a variable performance in which a vibration effect is performed without a button operation performance is executed before the start of a specific performance.

In this embodiment, the expectation of the special feature performance executed before the start of the specific performance (temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41) is 11% (see FIG. 55), and the expectation of the special feature performance executed after the start of the specific performance is 35%. Therefore, the special game is more likely to be executed when a variable performance in which a special feature performance is not performed before the start of the specific performance and a special feature performance is performed after the start of the specific performance (such as a modified example of variable performance example 10 (see FIGS. 82 to 86, FIG. 238)) is executed, compared with a variable performance in which a special feature performance is performed before the start of the specific performance and a special feature performance is not performed after the start of the specific performance (such as variable performance example 4 (see FIGS. 68 to 70)). Furthermore, special games are easier to execute when a variable performance in which a reel performance is performed without a vibration performance before the start of a specific performance (such as a modified example of variable performance 13 (see Figures 94 to 101, Figure 240)) is executed, rather than when a variable performance in which a reel performance is performed without a vibration performance after the start of a specific performance (such as a modified example of variable performance example 10 (see Figures 82 to 86, Figure 238)).
In this case, the player's sense of expectation for the special effects can be increased as the variable effects progress. Even in the first half of the variable effects, if a vibration effect is executed, the player's sense of expectation can be significantly increased, so that the player can be kept in expectation throughout the entire period of the variable effects, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, the fact that a special game is more likely to be executed when a variable performance is executed in which a reel performance is performed before the start of a specific performance and a reel performance is performed after the start of a specific performance than when a variable performance is executed in which a reel performance is performed before the start of a specific performance and a reel performance is not performed after the start of the specific performance includes the fact that a special game will not be executed (0%) when a variable performance is executed in which a reel performance is performed before the start of a specific performance and a reel performance is not performed after the start of the specific performance.
In addition, the fact that a special game is more likely to be executed when a variable performance in which a vibration performance is performed without a reel performance is executed before the start of a specific performance than when a variable performance in which a reel performance is executed without a vibration performance after the start of a specific performance is executed includes the fact that a special game will not be executed (0%) when a variable performance in which a reel performance is executed without a vibration performance after the start of a specific performance is executed, and the fact that a special game will be executed (100%) when a variable performance in which a vibration performance is performed without a reel performance is executed before the start of a specific performance.
In addition, if a special game is more likely to be executed when a variable performance in which a vibration performance is performed without a reel performance is executed before the start of a specific performance than when a variable performance in which a reel performance is performed without a vibration performance after the start of a specific performance is executed, a special game may be executed when a variable performance in which a vibration performance is performed without a reel performance is executed after the start of a specific performance, or a special game may not be executed when a variable performance in which a vibration performance is performed without a reel performance is executed before the start of a specific performance.

In this embodiment, the specific effect is described as the temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41, but this is not limited to this.
The specific performance may be any performance executed in the variable performance, such as reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), pseudo consecutive performance, zone performance, step performance, role performance, etc. In this case, the expectation degree before the temporary stop of the role performance, button operation performance, and vibration performance shown in FIG. 55 and the expectation degree after the temporary stop may be the expectation degree before any of the specific performances described above and the expectation degree after the specific performance.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a jackpot game, vibration effect, and red illumination of the effect button 161 are more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which the third button sound (see FIG. 99 (44)) is output is executed than when a variable effect in which the second button sound (see FIG. 86 (35)) is output is executed.
In addition, in this embodiment, a jackpot game and a vibration effect are more likely to be executed when a variable effect is performed in which the special light-emitting effect (red light emission) of the effect button 161 and the output of the third button sound are executed than when a variable effect is performed in which the specific light-emitting effect (white light emission) of the effect button 161 and the output of the second button sound are executed.
Also, a first variation effect in which a specific light emission effect and a third button sound are output, and a second variation effect in which a special light emission effect and a second button sound are output may be provided. In this case, a jackpot game or a vibration effect may be more easily executed when the second variation effect is executed than when the first variation effect is executed. Also, a jackpot game or a vibration effect may be more easily executed when the first variation effect is executed than when the second variation effect is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a special game and special light emission caused by the effect button 161 emitting red light are more likely to be executed when a variable effect is executed in which a second effect (see FIG. 94(2) etc.) is executed in which a vibration effect is executed without a button operation effect, than when a variable effect is executed in which a first effect (see FIG. 83(11) etc.) is executed in which a button operation effect is executed without a vibration effect. Therefore, even when a vibration effect is executed without the player operating the effect button 161, the player can be made to expect that a special game will be executed.
In addition, the fact that special lighting is more likely to be performed when a variable performance in which the second performance is executed is performed than when a variable performance in which the first performance is executed includes the fact that special lighting is never executed (0%) when a variable performance in which the first performance is executed is performed, and the fact that special lighting is always executed (100%) when a variable performance in which the second performance is executed is performed.
Furthermore, if special lighting is more likely to be performed when a variable performance in which the second performance is executed is performed than when a variable performance in which the first performance is executed is performed, special lighting may be performed when a variable performance in which the first performance is executed is performed, and special lighting may not be performed when a variable performance in which the second performance is executed is performed.

Next, the relationship between the stage (performance mode) controlled by the performance control unit 300 and the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 that the performance control unit 300 causes to be output from the speaker 156 will be described.
Figure 241 is a diagram showing the relationship between the stage controlled by the performance control unit 300 and the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41.

First, the stopping sound output from the speaker 156 when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the first stage (first performance mode) will be described.
The stop sounds output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop during execution of the reach performance include a first stop sound, a second stop sound, a seventh stop sound, and a fourteenth stop sound.
In addition, the stop sounds output when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops during the execution of the reach performance include a first stop sound, a second stop sound, and a seventh stop sound. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive image 511 is regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the pseudo consecutive stop sound is also included.
In addition, the stop sounds output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop during the execution of the normal reach performance include a fifth stop sound and a tenth stop sound.
In addition, during the execution of the normal reach performance, the stop sounds output when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops include the first stop sound, the eleventh stop sound, and the twelfth stop sound. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive image 511 is regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the pseudo consecutive stop sound is also included.
In addition, during the execution of the SP reach performance, the stop sounds outputted when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops include the third stop sound, the fourth stop sound, and the thirteenth stop sound. In addition, when the development image 521 is regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the development stop sound is also included.
In addition, the stop sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops during execution of the SPSP reach performance includes a sixth stop sound.
In addition, during the execution of an effect suggesting or notifying that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the stopping sounds output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop include the eighth stopping sound, the ninth stopping sound, and the twenty-third stopping sound.
In addition, during the execution of an effect suggesting or notifying that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the stopping sounds output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops include the eighth stopping sound, the ninth stopping sound, the thirteenth stopping sound, and the twenty-third stopping sound.

Next, the stopping sound output from the speaker 156 when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the second stage (second performance mode) will be described.
The stop sounds output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop during execution of the reach performance include a 15th stop sound, a 16th stop sound, an 18th stop sound, and a 19th stop sound.
In addition, the stop sounds output when the middle row decorative symbols 41 stop during the execution of the reach performance include a 15th stop sound, a 16th stop sound, and an 18th stop sound. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive images 511 are regarded as the decorative symbols 41, the pseudo consecutive stop sounds are also included.
In addition, the stop sounds output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop during the execution of the normal reach performance include a tenth stop sound and a seventeenth stop sound.
In addition, during the execution of the normal reach performance, the stop sounds output when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops include the 12th stop sound and the 15th stop sound. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive image 511 is regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the pseudo consecutive stop sound is also included.
In addition, during the execution of the SP reach performance, the stop sounds outputted when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops include the third stop sound, the fourth stop sound, the thirteenth stop sound, and the twenty-fourth stop sound. In addition, when the development image 521 is regarded as the decorative pattern 41, the development stop sound is also included.
In addition, the stop sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops during execution of the SPSP reach performance includes a sixth stop sound.
In addition, during the execution of an effect suggesting or notifying that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the stopping sounds output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop include the eighth stopping sound, the ninth stopping sound, and the twenty-third stopping sound.
In addition, during the execution of an effect suggesting or announcing that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the stopping sounds output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops include the eighth stopping sound, the ninth stopping sound, the thirteenth stopping sound, and the twenty-third stopping sound.

Next, the stopping sound output from the speaker 156 when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the third stage (third performance mode) will be described.
The stop sounds output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop during execution of the reach performance include a first stop sound, a second stop sound, a 21st stop sound, and a 22nd stop sound.
In addition, the stop sounds output when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops during the execution of the reach performance include a first stop sound, a second stop sound, and a 21st stop sound. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive image 511 is regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the pseudo consecutive stop sound is also included.
In addition, the stop sounds output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop during the execution of the normal reach performance include a tenth stop sound and a twentieth stop sound.
In addition, during the execution of the normal reach performance, the stop sounds output when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops include the first stop sound, the eleventh stop sound, and the twelfth stop sound. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive image 511 is regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the pseudo consecutive stop sound is also included.
In addition, during the execution of the SP reach performance, the stop sounds outputted when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops include the third stop sound, the fourth stop sound, and the thirteenth stop sound. In addition, when the development image 521 is regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the development stop sound is also included.
In addition, the stop sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops during execution of the SPSP reach performance includes a sixth stop sound.
In addition, during the execution of an effect suggesting or notifying that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the stopping sounds output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop include the eighth stopping sound, the ninth stopping sound, and the twenty-third stopping sound.
In addition, during the execution of an effect suggesting or notifying that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the stopping sounds output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops include the eighth stopping sound, the ninth stopping sound, the thirteenth stopping sound, and the twenty-third stopping sound.

Next, the stopping sound output from the speaker 156 when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the fourth stage (fourth performance mode) will be described.
The stop sounds output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop during execution of the reach performance include a 25th stop sound and a 28th stop sound.
In addition, the stop sounds output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops during the execution of the reach performance include the 25th stop sound and the 28th stop sound.
In addition, the stop sound output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop during the execution of the normal reach performance includes a 26th stop sound.
In addition, the stopping sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops during the execution of the SP reach performance includes the 27th stopping sound.
In addition, during the execution of the performance suggesting or notifying that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win, the stop sounds output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop include the 29th stop sound and the 30th stop sound.
In addition, during the execution of the performance suggesting or notifying that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the stopping sounds outputted when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops include the 29th stopping sound and the 30th stopping sound.

As described above, in this embodiment, the stopping sounds of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows are different from the stopping sounds of the middle row decorative patterns 41, or the number of types of stopping sounds of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows is different from the number of types of stopping sounds of the middle row decorative patterns 41.
In this case, a variety of effects can be realized depending on the symbols that stop, which can increase the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can output a first stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a losing variable performance in which the reach performance is not executed in the first stage. Also, the performance control unit 300 can output a sixth stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a losing variable performance in which the reach performance is executed in the first stage. That is, in this embodiment, it is possible to make the manner of the sound effect output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops different between the first specific variable performance (losing variable performance in which the reach performance is not executed) and the losing variable performance in which the reach performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the impression given to the player by the stopping of the middle row decorative pattern 41 different between the variable performance in which the reach performance is executed and the variable performance in which the reach performance is not executed.
In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the sound effect output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops common (for example, output the first stop sound in both cases) for the first specific variation performance and the second specific variation performance (a losing variation performance in which a normal reach performance is executed and neither an SP reach performance nor an SPSP reach performance is executed). Therefore, in the second specific variation performance, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations even though it is a losing variation performance.
In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the sound effect output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop common (for example, output the first stop sound in all cases) in the first specific variable performance, the second specific variable performance, and the third specific variable performance (miss variable performance in which the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is executed). Therefore, the stop of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows can be easily recognized by the player regardless of the variable performance.
In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the stop sound output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop in a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode) common between the third specific change performance and the fourth specific change performance (jackpot change performance) (for example, outputting the first stop sound in both), and can make the stop sound output when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops in a special display mode (low decorative display mode) different (outputting the sixth stop sound in the third specific change performance, and the eighth stop sound in the fourth specific change performance). Therefore, even if the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops in the same display mode, the impression that the middle row decorative symbol 41 gives to the player can be made different between the third specific change performance and the fourth specific change performance.

In this embodiment, the number of types of stop sounds for the middle row decorative patterns 41 is greater than the number of types of stop sounds for the left and right rows decorative patterns 41 in the first to third stages. In this way, by providing more variety in the stop modes of the middle row decorative patterns 41 than the stop modes of the left and right rows decorative patterns 41, the player can be more likely to notice the stops of the middle row decorative patterns 41. Note that the number of types of stop sounds for the left and right rows decorative patterns 41 may be greater than the number of types of stop sounds for the middle row decorative patterns 41 in the first to third stages. In other words, it is sufficient that the number of types of stop sounds for the left and right rows decorative patterns 41 and the number of types of stop sounds for the middle row decorative patterns 41 are different in the first to third stages.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to make the stop sounds output when the left and right decorative patterns 41 stop in the first stage and the second stage different (for example, the first stop sound and the fifteenth stop sound), and to make the stop sound output when the middle decorative pattern 41 stops the same (for example, the third stop sound). And, it is possible to make the stop sounds output when the left and right decorative patterns 41 stop in the first stage and the fourth stage different (for example, the first stop sound and the twenty-fifth stop sound), and to make the stop sound output when the middle decorative pattern 41 stops different (for example, the third stop sound and the twenty-seventh stop sound). Therefore, it is easier for the player to recognize the fourth stage as a stage with a different presentation from the first stage than the second stage.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, special play and red illumination of the effect button 161 are more likely to be executed when a variable effect (such as a modified example of variable effect 13 (see Figures 94 to 101, Figure 240)) in which a vibration effect is performed without a button operation effect is executed before the start of a specific effect (temporary stop of decorative pattern 41, reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, zone effect, step effect, etc.)) is executed than when a variable effect (such as a modified example of variable effect example 10 (see Figures 82 to 86, Figure 238)) in which a vibration effect is performed without a button operation effect is executed before the start of a specific effect.
In this case, even if it is in the first half of the variable performance, if a vibration performance is executed, the player's sense of expectation can be significantly increased, so that the player can be kept in anticipation throughout the entire period of the variable performance, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, if it is easier to execute a special game and the illumination of the effect button 161 in red when a variable effect in which a vibration effect is performed without a button operation effect is executed before the start of a specific effect in a normal game state than when a variable effect in which a button operation effect is executed without a vibration effect is executed after the start of a specific effect until the SPSP reach effect in a normal game state, a special game and the illumination of the effect button 161 in red may be executed when a variable effect in which a button operation effect is executed without a vibration effect is executed after the start of a specific effect until the SPSP reach effect in a normal game state, or a special game and the illumination of the effect button 161 in red may not be executed when a variable effect in which a vibration effect is executed without a button operation effect is executed before the start of a specific effect in a normal game state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, special play and the illumination of the effect button 161 in red are more likely to be executed when a variable effect (such as a modified example of variable effect 13 (see Figures 94 to 101, Figure 240)) in which a vibration effect is performed without a reel effect is executed before the start of a specific effect (temporary stop of decorative pattern 41, reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, zone effect, step effect, etc.)) is executed than when a variable effect (such as a modified example of variable effect example 10 (see Figures 82 to 86, Figure 238)) in which a reel effect is executed without a vibration effect from the start of a specific effect (temporary stop of decorative pattern 41, reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, zone effect, step effect, etc.) to the SPSP reach effect.
In this case, even if it is in the first half of the variable performance, if a vibration performance is executed, the player's sense of expectation can be significantly increased, so that the player can be kept in anticipation throughout the entire period of the variable performance, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, if it is easier to execute a special game and the effect button 161 to light up in red when a variable effect in which a reel effect is performed without a vibration effect is executed before the start of a specific effect in a normal game state than when a variable effect in which a reel effect is performed without a vibration effect is executed after the start of a specific effect until the SPSP reach effect in a normal game state, the special game and the effect button 161 may light up in red when a variable effect in which a reel effect is performed without a vibration effect is executed after the start of a specific effect until the SPSP reach effect in a normal game state, or the special game and the effect button 161 may not light up in red when a variable effect in which a reel effect is performed without a vibration effect is executed before the start of a specific effect in a normal game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of types of variable paths used is greater in the normal game state than in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, even in the normal game state, the excitement of the game can be increased by a variety of presentations.

In this embodiment, it has been explained that in a miss-changing performance in which a normal reach performance is executed and an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is not executed, the stopping sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is the same as the stopping sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode in a miss-changing performance in which a reach performance is not executed, but this is not limited to the above.
In a losing variable performance in which a normal reach performance is executed and an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is not executed, the stopping sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode may be an original stopping sound different from either the stopping sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode in a losing variable performance in which a reach performance is not executed, or the stopping sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode in a variable performance in which an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is executed.

Also, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 can make the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration performance when a specified condition is met different from the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration performance when the specified condition is not met. Here, when the specified condition is not met, this may include a case where the performance button 161 is not operated during the operation effective period in the button operation performance (see Figures 214 (7) and (8)). In other words, the relationship between the above-mentioned time t71 and time t72 may be the relationship between the timing (time t71) when the button operation performance is started in the variable performance example 13 and the timing (time t72) when the vibration performance is started when the performance button 161 is not operated during the operation effective period in the button operation performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are caused to move along the first movement path in the fourth stage, but this is not limited to the above. In the fourth stage, when no reach effect is being performed, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 may be caused to move along a movement path different from any of the movement paths used in the first to third stages. In this case, it can be emphasized that the fourth stage is a performance mode unique to the special time-saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, in one variable performance, the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye has the same number before and after the execution of the pseudo-consecutive performance (see Figure 72 (9), Figure 73 (22), etc.), but this is not limited to this.
In one variation performance, the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 may be different before and after the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance (for example, the number of the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is "4" before the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance, and the number of the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is "3" after the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance). Here, the change performance that changes the character of the pattern stopped in the reach performance also includes a performance that changes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 before and after the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the action presentation in which some of the stopped symbols in a column (e.g., the left column decorative symbol 41) are made to move in a reach performance includes a first action presentation (see FIG. 69 (14)) and a second action presentation (see FIG. 84 (19)) in which the action mode of the symbols is different from that of the first action presentation. Here, for example, the first action presentation may be the action of the decorative symbol 41 "4" (see FIG. 69 (14), FIG. 84 (19)), and the second action presentation may be the action of the decorative symbol 41 "3" (see FIG. 110 (5)). In other words, the first action presentation and the second action presentation may be the action of decorative symbols of different characters.

In addition, the expectation of a jackpot game when a specific effect (such as a normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, pseudo consecutive effect, zone effect, gimmick effect, development effect, vibration effect, step effect, effect that changes the display mode of the reserved image 52 or the variable image 51) is executed may be varied depending on the stage. As an example, a jackpot game may be made easier to execute when a variable effect in which a specific effect is executed is executed in the second stage than when a variable effect in which a specific effect is executed is executed in the first stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the presentation control unit 300 can make the operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 when it is temporarily stopped in the reach presentation the same whether in the normal game state or the special time-saving game state. Here, whether in the normal game state or the special time-saving game state, the operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 when it is temporarily stopped in the reach presentation being the same includes not only that the operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 when it is temporarily stopped in the reach presentation being completely the same in the normal game state and the special time-saving game state, but also that part of the operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 when it is temporarily stopped in the reach presentation is the same in the normal game state and the special time-saving game state (such as the size and display mode being different but the direction of the operation when it is temporarily stopped being the same).

In addition, in the present embodiment, a li-zhi effect is executed when two rows of decorative symbols 41 are aligned, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, a reach effect may be executed by temporarily stopping one column of the decorative symbols 41 with a specific character. At this time, the remaining two columns of the decorative symbols 41 may continue to change.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sound effects output from the speaker 156 include the first button sound, the first stop sound, the first operation sound, the second stop sound, the first role sound, the first step sound, the second step sound, the first reach sound, the second role sound, the pseudo consecutive stop sound, the first re-variation sound, the third stop sound, the switching display sound, the switching non-display sound, the fourth stop sound, the second reach sound (fifth stop sound), the first start sound, the third role sound, the third step sound, the 2. Operation sound, zone start sound, 3rd reach sound, 1st change sound, pattern change sound, development stop sound, 4th role sound, 2nd button sound, 6th stop sound, 2nd re-variation sound, 2nd change sound, 3rd change sound, 7th stop sound, 3rd button sound, 1st success sound, 1st jackpot notification sound, 8th stop sound, 4th button sound, 9th stop sound, 4th change sound, 4th reach sound (10th stop sound), 11th stop sound, 12th stop sound, 13th stop sound, 1st revival Sound, 14th stop sound, 15th stop sound, 3rd operation sound, 16th stop sound, 5th role sound, step 1 sound, step 2 sound, 6th role sound, 5th reach sound (17th stop sound), 2nd start sound, 7th role sound, step 3 sound, 4th operation sound, 18th stop sound, 19th stop sound, 5th operation sound, 8th role sound, 1st stage sound, 2nd stage sound, 9th role sound, 6th reach sound (20th stop sound), 10th role sound, 3rd stage sound, 6th operation The sound, 21st stop sound, 22nd stop sound, 23rd stop sound, 24th stop sound, 25th stop sound, 4th start sound, 11th role sound, 7th reach sound (26th stop sound), 5th button sound, 27th stop sound, 5th changing sound, 28th stop sound, 6th changing sound, 6th button sound, 2nd success sound, 2nd jackpot notification sound, 29th stop sound, 7th button sound, 30th stop sound, and 2nd revival sound are all different sound effects (different sounds).

In addition, in this embodiment, there are a first start operation, a first fluctuation operation, a first stop operation, a first provisional stop operation, a second start operation, a second stop operation, a first reach operation, a second provisional stop operation, a second fluctuation operation, a third fluctuation operation, a third stop operation (second reach operation), a third start operation, a third reach operation, a pattern change operation, a fourth start operation, a fourth stop operation (fourth reach operation), a fifth reach operation, a fifth start operation, a fourth fluctuation operation, a fifth stop operation, a sixth start operation, a sixth stop operation, a sixth reach operation, a seventh stop The first motion, the seventh start motion, the eighth reach motion, the eighth start motion, the ninth reach motion, the fifth change motion, the ninth start motion, the sixth change motion, the eighth stop motion, the seventh change motion, the tenth start motion, the ninth stop motion, the tenth reach motion, the tenth stop motion, the eleventh start motion, the twelfth reach motion, the twelfth start motion, the thirteenth reach motion, the eighth change motion, the thirteenth start motion, the eleventh stop motion, the fourteenth start motion, the twelfth stop motion, and the ninth change motion are all different motion modes (display modes). In addition, even if the motion is the same "raise the right hand" as in the first reach motion (see FIG. 69 (14)) and the sixth reach motion (see FIG. 119 (14)), the decorative patterns 41 with different display modes are operated, resulting in different motion modes (display modes).

In addition, when there is no reservation for the winning of the first starting hole 121 and the special pattern has not changed, a game ball may win the first starting hole 121. In this case, first, a reservation for the winning of the first starting hole 121 occurs. Then, in this state, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table (see FIG. 24). Therefore, the "reserved number" when the variation pattern is selected is "1". Then, when a variation pattern is selected, the reserved number for the winning of the first starting hole 121 is subtracted. In addition, when there is no reservation for the winning of the second starting hole 122 and the special pattern has not changed, if a game ball wins the second starting hole 122, first, a reservation for the winning of the second starting hole 122 occurs. Then, in this state, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table. Therefore, the "reserved number" when the variation pattern is selected is "1". Then, when a variation pattern is selected, the reserved number for the winning of the second starting hole 122 is subtracted.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 in a state where no reservation has been made for the winning of the first starting hole 121 and the special symbol has not changed, "1" is displayed in the reservation number display 55 of the first starting hole 121, and the reservation image 52 is displayed. Then, "0" is displayed in the reservation number display 55 of the first starting hole 121. In addition, the reservation image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51.
In addition, when a game ball enters the second start port 122 in a state where no reservation has been made for the winning of the second start port 122 and the special symbol has not changed, "1" is displayed in the reservation number display 55 of the second start port 122 and the reservation image 52 is displayed. Then, "0" is displayed in the reservation number display 55 of the second start port 122. In addition, the reservation image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51.

Therefore, each of the above-mentioned change effects performed based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being "1" may also be a change effect performed based on a game ball entering the first starting port 121 in a state where no reservation has occurred for a winning entry at the first starting port 121 and the special pattern has not changed.
In addition, each of the above-mentioned change effects performed based on the reserved number for the second starting port 122 being "1" may also be a change effect performed based on a game ball entering the second starting port 122 in a state where no reservation has been made for a winning entry at the second starting port 122 and the special pattern has not changed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the variable performance examples 4 to 11, 13 to 19, 23 to 30, 32 to 38, 42 to 49, 51 to 57, and 67 to 70 are all variable performances that are performed based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being "1", but are not limited to this. Each of these variable performance examples may be a variable performance that is performed based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being any number from "2" to "4".
In addition, although it has been described that the variable performance example 63, the variable performance example 64, and the variable performance example 66 are all variable performances that are performed based on the reserved number for the second starting port 122 being "1", the present invention is not limited to this. Each of these variable performance examples may be a variable performance that is performed based on the reserved number for the second starting port 122 being any number from "2" to "4".

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the development prompting performance and the development performance are executed in the SP reach performance, but this is not limited to this.
During the execution of the normal reach performance or when the reach performance is not being executed, the development prompting performance and the development performance may be executed. In this case, the execution of the development performance may result in the execution of the SP reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the effective operation period in the button operation presentation includes the first period to the fourth period.
Here, the effective operation period may be set so that the later the first period, the second period, the third period, and the fourth period, the longer the effective operation period.Also, the earlier the first period, the second period, the third period, and the fourth period, the longer the effective operation period.Also, the first period, the second period, the third period, and the fourth period may all be the same length of time.
In addition, the operation valid period of the button operation effect in the SPSP reach effect and the operation valid period of the button operation effect in the promotion prompting effect may be different times.

In addition, in this embodiment, different change paths are used for the SP reach performance and the SPSP reach performance, but this is not limited to this.
In an SPSP reach performance in a specific change performance, the middle row decorative pattern 41 may change along the same change path as the SP reach performance in this specific change performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, a distinction is made between the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect, but this is not limited to this.
The SP reach performance and the SPSP reach performance in one variable performance may be collectively regarded as the SP reach performance.

Also, in this embodiment, in the third stage, the middle row decorative pattern 41 performs the sixth fluctuation action (fluctuation along the sixth fluctuation path) at the start of the reach performance (see Figure 169 (14)), and then performs the first fluctuation action (fluctuation along the first fluctuation path) (see Figure 169 (15)), but is not limited to this.
In the third stage, the middle row decorative pattern 41 may execute the first variation action from the start of the reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the second stage, the movement path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 when a normal reach performance is being executed (see Figure 119 (15)) is different from the movement path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 when a normal reach performance is being executed in the first stage or the third stage (see Figure 69 (15), Figure 169 (15)), but is not limited to this.
The change path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 when the normal reach performance is being executed in the second stage may be the same as the change path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 when the normal reach performance is being executed in the first stage or the third stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the change path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 when a normal reach performance is being executed in the third stage is the same as the change path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 when a normal reach performance is being executed in the first stage, but this is not limited to this.
The change path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 when the normal reach performance is being executed in the third stage may be made different from any of the change paths of the middle row decorative pattern 41 when the normal reach performance is being executed in the first and second stages.

Also, in this embodiment, it has been described that variable BGM is output during the variable performance. Here, the type of sound output for the variable BGM may differ depending on the progress of the performance. As one example, the type of sound in the variable BGM may differ before the start of the reach performance, while a normal reach performance is being executed, while an SP reach performance is being executed, while an SPSP reach performance is being executed, and after the reach performance is executed when a missing number decorative pattern 41 or a repeat number decorative pattern 41 is being displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that each of the variable performances from variable performance example 61 to variable performance example 70 is a variable performance in a special time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this.
Each of the variable performance examples 61 to 70 may be a variable performance in a specific time-saving game state.

The above-mentioned "second visual recognition mode in which the symbols in the specific row move at a slower speed after the first mode and become visible" also includes a visual recognition mode when the decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped. In other words, the "slow speed" of the symbols in the specific row after the first mode also includes the speed of the symbols becoming "0".
In the present embodiment, the display time in the fifth visual recognition mode and the sixth visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41 is provided even in the special time-saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the special time-saving game state, the display in the fifth visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41 may not be executed. In the special time-saving game state, the display in the sixth visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41 may not be executed.
In the special time-saving game state, neither the fifth visual recognition mode nor the sixth visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41 may be executed. In other words, in the special time-saving game state, the display time of the "second visual recognition mode in which the patterns in the specific row slow down after the first mode and become visible" may be 0 seconds.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the pseudo consecutive image 511 and the development image 521 are displayed. Here, the pseudo consecutive image 511 and the development image 521 are images displayed in place of the middle row decorative pattern 41. Therefore, in a broad sense, the pseudo consecutive image 511 and the development image 521 are also included in the middle row decorative pattern 41.
In addition, the pseudo-series image 511 and the developed image 521 may be displayed instead of the left row decorative pattern 41 or may be displayed instead of the right row decorative pattern 41. In other words, the pseudo-series image 511 and the developed image 521 may be regarded as the left row decorative pattern 41 or may be regarded as the right row decorative pattern 41.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that in the normal game state, after the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is executed, there is no sound when the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed again (see Figure 76 (16)), but this is not limited to this.
In the normal game state, when a highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed again after an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is executed, the output of a switching non-display sound (see FIG. 76 (15)) may continue and then become silent.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that various stop sounds are output when the decorative pattern 41 stops.
Here, the timing of outputting the stop sound is not limited to the same time as the stopping of the decorative pattern 41. If the stop sound is output when the decorative pattern 41 is stopped, the output of the stop sound may start before the decorative pattern 41 stops, or may start after the decorative pattern 41 stops.

In addition, in this embodiment, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are arranged in the left-right direction, but this is not limited to this.
The three rows of decorative patterns 41 may be arranged vertically.
Furthermore, the decorative patterns 41 in a particular row among the three rows of decorative patterns 41 may be displayed shifted vertically or horizontally relative to the decorative patterns 41 in the other rows.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the decorative patterns 41 stop in the order of the left row decorative pattern 41, the right row decorative pattern 41, and the middle row decorative pattern 41, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the decorative patterns 41 may stop in the order of the left row decorative pattern 41, the middle row decorative pattern 41, and the right row decorative pattern 41. In this case, the relationship between the operation of the decorative patterns 41 and the output of the stop sound in each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples is reversed between the right row decorative pattern 41 and the middle row decorative pattern 41.
Also, for example, the decorative patterns 41 may stop in the order of the right row decorative pattern 41, the middle row decorative pattern 41, and the left row decorative pattern 41. In this case, the relationship between the operation of the decorative patterns 41 and the output of the stop sound in each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples is reversed between the left row decorative pattern 41 and the middle row decorative pattern 41.
In other words, the "design of a specific row" mentioned above using the middle row decorative design 41 as an example may be the left row decorative design 41 or the right row decorative design 41.

In addition, in this embodiment, the relationship between the change performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "1" and the change performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "4" (see FIG. 233, etc.) has been described, but is not limited to this. The relationship between the two change performances described above may be a relationship between a change performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "1" and a change performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "3". The relationship between the two change performances described above may be a relationship between a change performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "1" and a change performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "2". The relationship between the two above-mentioned variable performances may be a relationship between a variable performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "2" and a variable performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "4". The relationship between the two above-mentioned variable performances may be a relationship between a variable performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "3" and a variable performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "4". The relationship between the two above-mentioned variable performances may be a relationship between a variable performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "2" and a variable performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "3".

In addition, in this embodiment, when the development teasing performance is being executed, one of the middle row decorative patterns 41 and the development image 521 change (see Figures 178 (2) and (3)), but this is not limited to this.
When the development teasing performance is being executed, a plurality of middle row decorative patterns 41 (e.g., "4" and "5") and the development image 521 may change.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that when three rows of decorative patterns 41 consisting of highly decorative display modes come to a stop in unison, a single stopping sound is output (see Figure 66 (6)), but this is not limited to this.
When three rows of highly decorative decorative patterns 41 are aligned and stopped, a stop sound may be output three times. In this case, the three stop sounds may be output so that consecutive stop sounds overlap each other.

In addition, in this embodiment, the highly decorative pattern 41 in the first stage (see Figure 61 (1)), the highly decorative pattern 41 in the second stage (see Figure 111 (1)), and the highly decorative pattern 41 in the third stage (see Figure 161 (1)) have different display modes for the character portions, but the display modes for the letter (number) portions are the same, but are not limited to this.
The highly decorative pattern 41 in the first stage (see Figure 61 (1)), the highly decorative pattern 41 in the second stage (see Figure 111 (1)), and the highly decorative pattern 41 in the third stage (see Figure 161 (1)) may have the same display mode for the character portion, but may have different display modes for the letter (number) portion.
In addition, the highly decorative pattern 41 in the first stage (see Figure 61 (1)), the highly decorative pattern 41 in the second stage (see Figure 111 (1)), and the highly decorative pattern 41 in the third stage (see Figure 161 (1)) may all have different display modes for the character portion and the letter (number) portion.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display size of the middle row decorative pattern 41 differs when the reach performance is not being executed (see Figure 68 (2), Figure 79 (9), etc.) from when the normal reach performance is being executed (see Figure 70 (18)). Here, the middle row decorative pattern 41 when the reach performance is not being executed and the middle row decorative pattern 41 when the normal reach performance is being executed are regarded as display modes that are the same decorative mode (both are specific display modes).
In addition, in this embodiment, the display size of the middle row decorative symbol 41 is made different before the start of the reach performance and during the execution of the normal reach performance, but this is not limited to this. The display size of the middle row decorative symbol 41 may be the same before the start of the reach performance and during the execution of the normal reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that a change effect (the effect shown in FIG. 84 (20)) is executed in which the display mode of the identification information (variable image 51, pending image 52) is changed to a specific mode (e.g., red). Here, the specific mode may be green or blue. In other words, the specific mode may be any display mode as long as it is a display mode that is different from the normal display mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the expectation level (ease of winning) of various effects has been described. Here, the expectation level of a effect may be an expectation level that suggests or notifies that a performance image will be displayed when the effect is being executed. The expectation level of a effect may also be an expectation level that suggests or notifies that a sound effect will be output when the effect is being executed. The expectation level of a effect may also be an expectation level that suggests or notifies that a performance body (performance button 161, movable role object 115) will emit light or operate when the effect is being executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the following change performance of the change performance example 12 is described as the change performance example 13, but is not limited thereto. The following change performance of the change performance example 12 may be the change performance example 10 or the change performance example 11. In this case, the role performance, the third start operation, and the start time third effect image 525 performed in the change performance example 12 and the change performance example 10 or the change performance example 11 are each regarded as a continuous performance and as a pre-determination performance.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the following change performance of the change performance example 31 is described as the change performance example 32, but is not limited thereto. The following change performance of the change performance example 31 may be the change performance example 29 or the change performance example 30. In this case, the role performance, the seventh start operation, and the seventh effect image at the start 567 performed in the change performance example 31 and the change performance example 29 or the change performance example 30 are each regarded as a continuous performance and as a pre-determination performance.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the following change performance of the change performance example 50 is described as the change performance example 51, but is not limited thereto. The following change performance of the change performance example 50 may be the change performance example 48 or the change performance example 49. In this case, the role performance, the eleventh start operation, and the eleventh effect image 581 at the start performed in the change performance example 50 and the change performance example 48 or the change performance example 49 are regarded as continuous performances and as pre-determination performances, respectively.

Also, in this embodiment, the SPSP reach presentation is not executed in the variable presentation in the special time-saving gaming state (specific time-saving gaming state), but this is not limited to this.
In the variable performance in the special time-saving game state (specific time-saving game state), the SPSP reach performance may be executed. For example, the button operation performance in the variable performance example 64, the variable performance example 66, and the variable performance example 67 (see FIG. 222 (14), FIG. 226 (15), FIG. 229 (1)) may be the button operation performance in the SPSP reach performance. That is, in the variable performance example 64, the variable performance example 66, and the variable performance example 67, the SPSP reach performance may be executed after the SP reach performance. Also, in the variable performance example 64, the variable performance example 66, and the variable performance example 67, the SPSP reach performance may be executed instead of the SP reach performance. That is, in the variable performance in the special time-saving game state (specific time-saving game state), the SPSP reach performance may be executed without executing the SP reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, when an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is executed in each stage (performance mode), the image displayed as the background on the image display unit 114 changes from a stage image 61 corresponding to each stage (performance mode) to a performance image corresponding to the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance.
Here, the SP reach performance and the SPSP reach performance are not performances that change the stage (performance mode), unlike the performance in which the stage change image 585 is displayed. Therefore, in one variable performance in which the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is executed, the stage (performance mode) before the start of the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance and the stage (performance mode) during the execution of the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance may be regarded as the same stage (performance mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the stopping sounds of the performance symbols include the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing number in a variable performance in which a reach performance is not executed (see Figure 62 (15) etc.), the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing number in a variable performance in which a normal reach is executed and an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is not executed (see Figure 70 (19) etc.), the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing number in a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed (see Figure 76 (13), Figure 78 (6) etc.), the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing number in a variable performance in which an SPSP reach performance is executed (see Figure 86 (36) etc.), the stopping sound of the pseudo consecutive image 511 (see Figure 72 (13) etc.), the stopping sound of the development image 521 (see Figure 85 (32) etc.), the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a double number (see Figure 100 (50), Figure 100 (53) etc.), etc.
Here, in each stage (each presentation mode), the output time (execution time of the stop sound) of the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing eye in a variable presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed, and the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing eye in a variable presentation in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed may be made longer than the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing eye in a variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed, and the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing eye in a variable presentation in which a normal reach is executed and an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is executed.
In addition, in each stage (each presentation mode), the output time (execution time of the stop sound) of the stopping sound of the pseudo-consecutive image 511 and the stopping sound of the developing image 521 may be longer than the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing eye in a variable presentation where a reach presentation is not executed, the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing eye in a variable presentation where a normal reach is executed and an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is not executed, the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing eye in a variable presentation where an SP reach presentation is executed, and the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing eye in a variable presentation where an SPSP reach presentation is executed.
In addition, in each stage (each presentation mode), the output time (execution time of the stop sound) of the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a double number may be longer than the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing number in a variable presentation where a reach presentation is not executed, the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing number in a variable presentation where a normal reach is executed and an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is not executed, the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing number in a variable presentation where an SP reach presentation is executed, the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing number in a variable presentation where an SPSP reach presentation is executed, etc.
In addition, in each stage (each presentation mode), the output time (execution time of the stop sound) of the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with the repeated numbers may be longer than the stopping sound of the pseudo-consecutive image 511 or the stopping sound of the developing image 521.
In addition, in each stage (each presentation mode), the output time (execution time of the stop sound) of the stopping sound of the pseudo-consecutive images 511 and the stopping sound of the developing image 521 may be longer than the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of the repeated numbers.

In addition, in each stage (each presentation mode), in a variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed, the time from when the stopping sound of the deviating decorative pattern 41 is output (from when the output of the stopping sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the variable presentation ends) may be longer than the time from when the stopping sound of the deviating decorative pattern 41 is output (from when the output of the stopping sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the variable presentation ends) in a variable presentation in which a normal reach is executed and an SP reach presentation or SPSP reach presentation is not executed.
In addition, in each stage (each presentation mode), the time from when the stop sound of the deviating decorative pattern 41 is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed, or the time from when the stop sound of the deviating decorative pattern 41 is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a variable presentation in which a normal reach is executed and an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is executed, may be longer than the time from when the stop sound of the deviating decorative pattern 41 is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a variable presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed, or the time from when the stop sound of the deviating decorative pattern 41 is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a variable presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed.
In addition, in each stage (each presentation mode), the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a miss is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a jackpot fluctuation presentation may be longer than the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a miss is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a fluctuation presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed, or the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a miss is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a fluctuation presentation in which a normal reach is executed and an SP reach presentation or SPSP reach presentation is not executed.
In addition, in each stage (each presentation mode), the time from when the stopping sound of the deviating decorative pattern 41 is output (from when the output of the stopping sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (when the fluctuation presentation ends) in a variable presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed may be longer than the time from when the stopping sound of the deviating decorative pattern 41 is output (from when the output of the stopping sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (when the fluctuation presentation ends) in a variable presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed.
In addition, in each stage (each presentation mode), the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with a miss is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a jackpot fluctuation presentation may be longer than the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with a miss is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a fluctuation presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed, or the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with a miss is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a fluctuation presentation in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed.
Furthermore, in each stage (each presentation mode), the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 for a miss is output (after the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a fluctuation presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed may be longer than the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 for a miss is output (after the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a fluctuation presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed, or the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 for a miss is output (after the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a fluctuation presentation in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the SPSP reach presentation is executed in the variable presentation in which the development image 521 is displayed, but this is not limited to this.
In the variable performance, the SPSP reach performance may be executed without displaying the development image 521.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the variation performance is based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 being "2" or more, and in which a reach performance is not executed, there are miss variation performances in which no start sound is output (see Figure 66 (2), Figure 219 (2), etc.), and variation performances in which a start sound is output (see Figure 93 (2), Figure 224 (2), etc.).
Here, in each stage (each presentation mode), when a miss-changing performance in which a reach performance is not executed based on the reserved number being "2" or more is executed, it may be easier to win in the next changing performance when a changing performance in which a start sound is output is executed than when a changing performance in which a start sound is not output is executed. Also, in each stage (each presentation mode), when a miss-changing performance in which a reach performance is not executed based on the reserved number being "2" or more is executed, it may be easier to execute an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance in the next changing performance when a changing performance in which a start sound is output is executed than when a changing performance in which a start sound is not output is executed. In other words, in each stage (each presentation mode), when a miss-changing performance in which a reach performance is not executed based on the reserved number being "2" or more is executed, it may be harder to execute the sound effect (stop sound) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode in the next changing performance when a changing performance in which a start sound is output is executed than when a changing performance in which a start sound is not output is executed.

In addition, in each stage (each performance mode), when a miss-type variation performance in which a reach performance is not executed based on the reserved number being "2" or more is executed, it is easier to win a jackpot in the next variation performance when a variation performance in which a start sound is output is executed than when a variation performance in which a start sound is not output is executed, which includes the fact that a jackpot is not necessarily won (0%) in the variation performance next to the variation performance in which a start sound is not output. Also, in each stage (each performance mode), when a miss-type variation performance in which a reach performance is not executed based on the reserved number being "2" or more is executed, if a jackpot is easier to win in the next variation performance when a variation performance in which a start sound is output is executed than when a variation performance in which a start sound is not output is executed, it may be possible to win a jackpot in the variation performance next to the variation performance in which a start sound is not output, or it may be possible not to win a jackpot in the variation performance next to the variation performance in which a start sound is output.
In addition, in each stage (each presentation mode), when a miss variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed based on the reserved number being "2" or more, it is easier for an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation to be executed in the next variable presentation when a variable presentation in which a start sound is output is executed than when a variable presentation in which a start sound is not output (it is harder for a sound effect (stop sound) to be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode to be executed). This includes the fact that an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is not always executed (0%) in the variable presentation next to a variable presentation in which a start sound is not output (the sound effect (stop sound) is always output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode (100%)) and that an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is always executed (100%) in the variable presentation next to a variable presentation in which a start sound is output (the sound effect (stop sound) is always not output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode (0%)). In addition, in each stage (each presentation mode), when a miss variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed based on the reserved number being "2" or more, if it is made so that an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is more likely to be executed in the next variable presentation when a variable presentation in which a start sound is output is executed than when a variable presentation in which a start sound is not output is executed (the output of a sound effect (stop sound) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is less likely to be executed), it is possible that an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is executed in the next variable presentation after a variable presentation in which a start sound is not output (the output of a sound effect (stop sound) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is not executed), or it is possible that an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is not executed in the next variable presentation after a variable presentation in which a start sound is output (the output of a sound effect (stop sound) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is executed).

Also, in this embodiment, it has been described that the displayed effect image changes depending on the stage of the step performance. Here, the effect image displayed depending on the step performance may be an effect image made of a specific color. As an example, a blue effect image may be displayed when the first stage of step performance is being performed, a green effect image may be displayed when the second stage of step performance is being performed, and a red effect image may be displayed when the third stage of step performance is being performed. In other words, the color of the displayed effect image may change as the stage of the step performance progresses.

In addition, in this embodiment, a change performance (the performance shown in FIG. 84 (20)) in which the display mode of the identification information is changed to a specific mode (for example, red) is more likely to be executed when a change performance (for example, change performance example 10) in which the second stop performance is executed is executed than when a change performance (for example, change performance example 1) in which the first stop performance is executed is executed. And, although it has been explained that the identification information includes the change image 51 and the reserved image 52, it is not limited to this.
For example, the step performance is a performance that suggests or notifies the expectation level according to the stage being executed. Therefore, the performance image displayed according to the step performance is regarded as identification information corresponding to the determination information (random number value) determined by the special symbol determination unit 234. Also, the performance that changes from the performance image corresponding to the step performance of the first or second stage to the performance image corresponding to the step performance of the third stage is regarded as a change performance that changes the display mode of the identification information to a specific mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a variable presentation (such as variable presentation example 4) in which a normal reach presentation is executed and an SP reach presentation and an SPSP reach presentation are not executed, a button operation presentation is not executed, but this is not limited to this.
In each of the variable performances in which the normal reach performance is executed and the SP reach performance and the SPSP reach performance are not executed, the button operation performance may be executed. In this case, the execution timing of the button operation performance may be after the start of the variable performance and before any of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 is temporarily stopped, or may be during the execution of the normal reach performance and before the middle row decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
In addition, in the button operation presentation in the variable presentation in which the normal reach presentation is executed and the SP reach presentation and the SPSP reach presentation are not executed, a common presentation (common presentation image, common sound, etc.) may be executed between the case where the presentation button 161 is operated and the case where it is not operated during the operation valid period. In addition, if a different presentation (different presentation image, different sound, etc.) is executed more easily between the case where the presentation button 161 is operated and the case where it is not operated during the operation valid period when any of the SP reach presentation, the SPSP reach presentation, and the big win is executed and a variable presentation in which the button operation presentation is executed is executed than when the normal reach presentation is executed and the SP reach presentation and the SPSP reach presentation are not executed and a variable presentation in which the button operation presentation is executed is executed, in the button operation presentation in the variable presentation in which the normal reach presentation is executed and the SP reach presentation and the SPSP reach presentation are not executed, a different presentation (different presentation image, different sound, etc.) may be executed between the case where the presentation button 161 is operated and the case where it is not operated during the operation valid period. In addition, the fact that a different effect (different effect image, different sound, etc.) is more likely to be executed between the case where the effect button 161 is operated and the case where the effect button 161 is not operated during the effective operation period when a variable effect is executed in which either an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, or a jackpot is executed and a button operation effect is executed than when a variable effect is executed in which either a normal reach effect is executed and neither an SP reach effect nor an SPSP reach effect is executed and a button operation effect is executed includes the fact that, in the button operation effect in a variable effect in which a normal reach effect is executed and neither an SP reach effect nor an SPSP reach effect is executed, a different effect (different effect image, different sound, etc.) is always executed between the case where the effect button 161 is operated and the case where it is not operated during the effective operation period (0%), and the fact that, in the button operation effect in a variable effect in which either an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, or a jackpot is executed, a different effect (different effect image, different sound, etc.) is always executed between the case where the effect button 161 is operated and the case where it is not operated during the effective operation period (100%).

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same reference numerals may be used to denote different configurations in the first and second embodiments. In the second embodiment, configurations different from the first embodiment will be described, and descriptions of configurations identical to those in the first embodiment will be omitted.
Figure 242 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the second embodiment.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is provided with a performance lever 163 that can be operated by a player. The performance lever 163 is provided on the frame member 150 to the left of the performance button 161.
The effect lever 163 may be provided on the frame member 150 to the right of the effect button 161. The effect lever 163 may also be provided integrally with the effect button 161. As an example, an upper portion of the effect lever 163 may be provided as the effect button 161 that can be pressed.

Figure 243 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the control unit of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment.
The performance control unit 300 sets the performance contents based on, for example, the result of the determination of whether or not a special symbol lottery has been won and the variation pattern sent from the game control unit 200. At that time, the performance contents corresponding to the operation input may be set in response to an operation input from a user using the performance lever 163. In this case, for example, a signal corresponding to the operation (operation signal) is received from a controller (not shown) such as the performance lever 163, and the operation contents identified by this operation signal are reflected in the performance settings.

Figure 244 is a diagram showing the positions of the performance lever 163 when the performance lever 163 is not operated and when the operation of the performance lever 163 is accepted by the performance control unit 300. Note that, below, the position of the performance lever 163 when the performance lever 163 is not operated may be referred to as the non-operation position. Also, below, the position of the performance lever 163 when the operation of the performance lever 163 is accepted by the performance control unit 300 may be referred to as the acceptance position.

The position of the effect lever 163 shown in Fig. 244(1) is the non-operation position. In this state, when the player pulls the effect lever 163 to the front side (player side) of the pachinko gaming machine 100, the effect lever 163 moves to the acceptance position as shown in Fig. 244(2).
In addition, the position to which the performance lever 163 can be moved may be from the non-operation position to the reception position, or from the non-operation position to a position forward of the reception position.

Figure 245 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the interrupt processing by the performance control unit 300 in this embodiment.
The interrupt process is performed periodically according to the cycle set in S3602. Referring to FIG. 245(a), in this interrupt process, the performance control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200 and performs a command reception process (S3611). In this command reception process, a performance content (performance pattern) is selected. In addition, the performance control unit 300 performs a specific time-saving related performance process for executing a performance related to a specific time-saving game state (S3612). In addition, the performance control unit 300 performs a performance button process for accepting the operation of the performance button 161 by the player (S3613). Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 performs a performance lever process for accepting the operation of the performance lever 163 by the player (S3613-2). After this, the performance control unit 300 performs a command transmission process for transmitting a command including information on the selected performance pattern to the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 (S3614). This results in effects such as image display on the image display unit 114, sound output, operation of the movable props 115, and illumination of the board lamp 116 and frame lamp 157.

Figure 245 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the performance lever processing (S3613-2 in Figure 245 (a)).
In this effect lever process, the effect control unit 300 first judges whether or not the effect lever 163 has been operated by the player during a predetermined acceptance period (effective operation period described later) (S4301). Here, the operation of the effect lever 163 means that the effect lever 163 is pulled so as to move from the non-operation position (see FIG. 244(1)) to the acceptance position (see FIG. 244(2)) and turned ON. The effect control unit 300 receives an operation signal from this effect lever 163 and detects that an operation has been performed.
If the effect lever 163 has not been operated (No in S4301), the effect lever processing is terminated.
Also, if the performance lever 163 is operated (Yes in S4301), the performance control unit 300 sets a performance lever command including information indicating the operation content of the performance lever 163 in the RAM 303 and terminates the performance lever processing (S4302).

Then, the performance control unit 300 performs the command sending process (S3614) of FIG. 245(a) and sends the command set in the RAM 303 in the command receiving process and performance lever process to the image/audio control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320. Then, based on the received command, the image/audio control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 control the image display on the image display unit 114, the sound output, the operation of the movable prop 115, the illumination of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, etc., to execute the set performance.

[Variable performance pattern table]
246 to 249 are diagrams showing examples of setting of the variable presentation pattern and the table used in the variable presentation pattern selection (S3813) in the presentation selection process of FIG. 35(b). FIG. 246 shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state is performed. FIG. 247 shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning the second start port 122 in the normal game state is performed. FIG. 248 shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is performed. FIG. 249 shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is performed.

As shown in FIG. 246, a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on a winning entry into the first starting hole 121 in normal game mode has multiple variable presentation patterns set. Variable presentation patterns "EA1" to "EA6", "EB1" to "EB6", and "ER1" to "ER13" correspond one-to-one to the variable presentation patterns "PA1" to "PA6", "PB1" to "PB6", and "PR1" to "PR13" set using FIG. 24 above.

In addition, a plurality of variable presentation patterns are set in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the second starting hole 122 in the normal game state is performed as shown in Fig. 247. The variable presentation patterns "EC1", "EC2", "ED1" to "ED3" and "EE1" correspond one-to-one to the variable presentation patterns "PC1", "PC2", "PD1" to "PD3" and "PE1" set using Fig. 25 above.
In addition, a plurality of variable presentation patterns are set in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning into the second starting hole 122 in the special time-saving game state shown in Fig. 248. The variable presentation patterns "PF1", "PF2", "PG1" to "PG3", and "PH1" to "PH8" set using Fig. 26 above are associated one-to-one with the variable presentation patterns "EF1", "EF2", "EG1" to "EG3", and "EH1" to "EH8".
In addition, a plurality of variable presentation patterns are set in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning into the first starting hole 121 in the special time-saving game state shown in Fig. 249 is performed. Variable presentation patterns "EI1" to "EI3" and "EJ1" are associated one-to-one with the variable presentation patterns "PI1" to "PI3" and "PJ1" set using Fig. 27 above.

In addition, the number of variable performance patterns is not limited to the numbers shown in Figures 246 to 249.
For example, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a miss may be greater than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a jackpot. Also, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is a miss may be greater than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot. In this case, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is a miss may be less than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot.
In this case, when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, or when a game ball enters the second start hole 122 in the special time-saving game state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a miss, the interest in the game can be increased by various presentations. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the entry into the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving game state is a miss, the interest in the game is difficult to increase because the number of variable presentation patterns is small. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game ball should enter the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and that the game ball should enter the second start hole 122 in the special time-saving game state.

Also, for example, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a miss may be greater than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a jackpot. Also, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on winning the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is a miss may be greater than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on winning the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is a miss. And in this case, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on winning the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is a miss may be less than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery based on winning the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot.

Here, the variable effect is an effect in which the result of the special pattern lottery (i.e., whether or not a jackpot has been won) is notified in a dramatic manner by varying and then stopping the display of the effect symbols.
In addition, the variable presentation patterns shown in the figure include the following settings: "final display color,""pseudoprompt,""pseudo consecutive number of times,""reachprompt,""normal,""SPreach,""SPSPreach,""zoneprompt,""zone,""step,""developmentprompt,""development,""gimmick,""lever,""levervibration,""promotionprompt,""promotion,""revivalprompt," and "revival." Note that a "-" in each column of the table shown indicates that the corresponding presentation will not be executed.

Here, "final display color" refers to the final display color of the variable image (described later). In this embodiment, the display color of the variable image is changed to notify or suggest to the player the expectation of winning the jackpot. In the illustrated example, one of "blue," "green," "red," and "rainbow" is selected as the final display color. For example, the display colors of the variable image may be set in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow, with the expectation increasing the later the order. Furthermore, a variable presentation in which a rainbow-colored variable image is displayed may be a variable presentation in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. In other words, a rainbow-colored variable image may have a 100% expectation.

"Pseudo-stimulation" refers to a pseudo consecutive stimulation performance. The pseudo consecutive stimulation performance is a performance that stimulates the execution of a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive performance). The pseudo consecutive performance is a performance that makes it look as if multiple decorative pattern variations are being performed in the variation display (one variation performance) of one variation of the special pattern. In the pseudo consecutive performance, the performance control unit 300 varies the decorative pattern before the reach state, temporarily stops the decorative pattern, and then starts the variation display of the decorative pattern again. In other words, in the pseudo consecutive performance, after the variation of the decorative pattern starts, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and re-varied a set number of times, and then the decorative pattern is stopped to be confirmed, thereby completing the variation display of one variation of the special pattern. Here, the provisional stop is a pseudo stop state in which the pattern appears to be stopped at first glance, but in reality the pattern is slightly swaying. In other words, the provisional stop of the pattern is a state in which the variation is treated as continuing in terms of game control. Here, the stop includes not only a fixed stop but also a provisional stop. The fixed stop of the pattern refers to a state where the special pattern is stopped as a fixed pattern in the variable display of one variation of the special pattern.
In addition, in the pseudo consecutive performance, the performance control unit 300 may start the variable display of the decorative symbols again after the reach state is reached. Furthermore, in the pseudo consecutive performance, after starting the variation of the decorative symbols (variation performance), the performance control unit 300 may start the variable display of the decorative symbols again without temporarily stopping the decorative symbols.

Here, the "pseudo consecutive number of times" is the number of times the pseudo consecutive performance occurs. In the illustrated example, the "pseudo consecutive number of times" is set to "-", "1", "2", or "3", i.e., between 0 and 3 times. The pseudo consecutive number of times is also set in association with the expectation (reliability) of a jackpot, which is the degree to which one can expect to win. In other words, the higher the pseudo consecutive number of times, the higher the expectation is set.

"Reach prompting" indicates the type of reach prompting effect. A reach prompting effect is an effect that prompts the execution of a reach effect. In the illustrated example, either "RE1" or "RE2" is executed as the type of reach prompting effect. Also, in the order of "RE1" and "RE2", the higher the number, the higher the expectation level when a reach effect is executed (when the reach prompting effect is successful).
"Normal" indicates the type of normal reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "N1", "N2", and "N3" is executed as the reach effect type. Also, the higher the number in the order of "N1", "N2", and "N3", the higher the expectation level is set.
"SP Reach" indicates the type of SP Reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3" is executed as the type of SP Reach effect. Also, the order of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3" is set so that the larger the number, the higher the expectation.
"SPSP Reach" indicates the type of SPSP Reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3" is executed as the type of SPSP Reach effect. In addition, the order of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3" is set such that the larger the number, the higher the expectation.

The term "zone stimulation" refers to a zone stimulation effect. The zone stimulation effect is an effect that stimulates the execution of a zone effect.
"Zone" refers to a zone presentation.
"Step" indicates the number of stages executed in the step performance. A step performance is a performance (stage performance) that can be developed stepwise up to a predetermined number. In the illustrated example, the number of step performances executed is either "1", "2", or "3". A step performance of "1" means that only the first stage is executed as a step performance. A step performance of "2" means that the first and second stages are executed as a step performance. A step performance of "3" means that the first, second, and third stages are executed as a step performance.

The "development prompt" refers to a development prompting performance. The development prompting performance is a performance that prompts the execution of a development performance. The development performance is a performance that suggests or notifies the player that the performance will develop to the SPSP reach.
"Development" refers to developmental presentation.

"Gem" indicates the type of gem performance. More specifically, "before temporary stop" of "Gem" indicates the type of gem performance performed before the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable performance, and "after temporary stop" of "Gem" indicates the type of gem performance performed after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable performance. In the illustrated example, one of "CH2", "CH3", and "CH4" is executed as the type of gem performance. In addition, the higher the number, the higher the expectation, in the order of "CH2", "CH3", and "CH4". In this embodiment, the expectation of the gem performance of "CH2" is 10%, the expectation of the gem performance of "CH3" is 15%, and the expectation of the gem performance of "CH4" is 35%. In addition, the expectation of the gem performance "before temporary stop" (the average expectation of the gem performance before temporary stop in all variable patterns in which the gem performance is performed before temporary stop) is 11%. In addition, the expectation of a special feature performance "after a temporary stop" (the average expectation of a special feature performance after a temporary stop in all fluctuation patterns in which a special feature performance occurs after a temporary stop) is 35%.

"Lever" indicates the type of lever operation presentation. More specifically, "before temporary stop" of "lever" indicates the type of lever operation presentation performed before the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable presentation, and "after temporary stop" of "lever" indicates the type of lever operation presentation performed after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable presentation. Also, the lever operation presentation is a presentation that encourages the player to operate the presentation lever 163. The lever operation presentation may be executed based on the result of a pre-determination process. The lever operation presentation performed based on the result of a pre-determination may be a presentation that makes the player expect a jackpot in the special pattern variation that started the lever operation presentation, or a presentation that makes the player expect a jackpot in the special pattern variation next to the special pattern variation that started the lever operation presentation. In the illustrated example, any of "BU1", "BU2", "BU3", "BU4", and "BU5" is executed as the type of lever operation presentation. Also, the order of "BU1", "BU2", "BU3", "BU4", and "BU5" is set so that the higher the number, the higher the expectation. In this embodiment, the lever operation presentation of "BU1" has an expectation of 0%, the lever operation presentation of "BU2" has an expectation of 3%, the lever operation presentation of "BU3" has an expectation of 5%, the lever operation presentation of "BU4" has an expectation of 20%, and the lever operation presentation of "BU5" has an expectation of 65%. In addition, the expectation of the lever operation presentation "before the temporary stop" (the average value of the expectation of the lever operation presentation before the temporary stop in all fluctuation patterns in which the lever operation presentation is performed before the temporary stop) is 3%. In addition, the expectation of the lever operation presentation "after the temporary stop" (the average value of the expectation of the lever operation presentation after the temporary stop in all fluctuation patterns in which the lever operation presentation is performed after the temporary stop) is 25%.

"Lever vibration" indicates the type of vibration effect. More specifically, "before temporary stop" of "lever vibration" indicates the type of vibration effect performed before the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable effect, and "after temporary stop" of "lever vibration" indicates the type of vibration effect performed after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable effect. Also, the vibration effect is an effect that vibrates the effect lever 163. The vibration effect may be executed based on the result of a pre-determination by a pre-determination process. The lever vibration effect performed based on the result of a pre-determination is an effect that makes the player expect a jackpot in the special pattern change following the special pattern change in which the vibration effect was started. In other words, the vibration effect may be an effect that suggests or notifies the expectation level in one or more side Otsu effects. In the illustrated example, any of "V1", "V2", "V3", "V4", and "V5" is executed as the type of vibration effect. Also, the higher the number in the order of "V1", "V2", "V3", "V4", and "V5", the higher the expectation level. In this embodiment, the expectation of the vibration effect of "V1" is 60%, and the expectation of the vibration effect of "V4" is 100%. In addition, the expectation of the vibration effect "before the temporary stop" (the average expectation of the vibration effect before the temporary stop in all fluctuation patterns in which a vibration effect is performed before the temporary stop) is 60%. In addition, the expectation of the vibration effect "after the temporary stop" (the average expectation of the vibration effect after the temporary stop in all fluctuation patterns in which a vibration effect is performed after the temporary stop) is 99%.

The "promotion teasing" refers to a promotion teasing performance. The promotion teasing performance is a performance in which, after a decorative pattern that notifies the player that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot is temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern is changed to a decorative pattern that notifies the player that the game state will be more advantageous to the player.
"Promotion" means a promotion effect. The promotion effect is an effect in which a decorative pattern that indicates that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win is temporarily stopped, and then changed to a decorative pattern that indicates that the game state will be more advantageous for the player. In this promotion effect, for example, after "333" is temporarily stopped as a decorative pattern, a decorative pattern of "777" is displayed as a stopped pattern.

The term "revival teasing" refers to a revival teasing performance. The revival teasing performance is a performance that teases the execution of a revival performance. The revival performance is a performance in which the decoration pattern 41 of a losing number is temporarily stopped and then the decoration pattern 41 of a double number is stopped.
"Resurrection" refers to a resurrection performance.

Now, the performance control unit 300 determines the variable performance pattern based on the tables shown in Figures 246 to 249. Specifically, the performance control unit 300 selects a variable performance pattern corresponding to the variable pattern set in the variable pattern selection process (see Figure 15) based on the tables shown in Figures 246 to 249.
For example, in FIG. 246, when the "jackpot pattern" is the "jackpot pattern A" and the change pattern is "PA1", "EA1" is selected as the change performance pattern. In this change performance pattern "EA1", "pseudo-stimulation", "reach-stimulation", "promotion", "revival-stimulation", and "revival" are set to "-". In other words, when "EA1" is selected as the change performance pattern, the pseudo-stimulation performance, the reach-stimulation performance, the promotion performance, and the revival performance are not executed. In addition, in the variable performance pattern "EA1", "red" is displayed as the "final display color", "2" is executed as the "pseudo consecutive number of times", "N2" is executed as "normal", "SP2" is executed as the "SP reach", "SPSP1" is executed as the "SPSP reach", "zone teasing" and "zone" are executed, "3" is executed as the "step", "development teasing" and "development" are executed, "CH2" and "CH4" are executed as "roles""before the temporary stop" and "after the temporary stop", "BU3" and "BU5" are executed as "levers""before the temporary stop" and "after the temporary stop", "V1" and "V2" are executed as "lever vibration""before the temporary stop" and "after the temporary stop", and "promotion teasing" is executed.

In this embodiment, as described later, the presentation control unit 300 controls one of a plurality of stages (presentation modes) in the normal game state, but the same table of variable presentation patterns shown in FIG. 246 is used regardless of the stage in the normal game state. However, different tables of variable presentation patterns may be used for each stage in the normal game state.

[Production image]
Next, the performance image that the performance control unit 300 causes to be displayed on the image display unit 114 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 250-1, the effect control unit 300 controls to display the effect image on the image display unit 114. In this embodiment, the effect images displayed on the image display unit 114 include the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, the small pattern 56, and the stage image 61. The image display unit 114 also includes a first effect image at start 501, a lever operation image 502, a first effect image at stop 503, a first image at operation 504, a zone promotion image 505, a second effect image at start 555, a second effect image at stop 506, a first effect image for a reel 507, a step image 508, a first reach line image 509, a first reach notification image 510, a pseudo consecutive promotion effect image 512, a second ... step image 509, a step image 509, a step image 510, a step image 511, a step image 512, a step image 513, a step image 514, a step image 515, a step image 516, a step image 517, a step image 518, a step image 519, a step image 520, a step image 521, a step image 522, a step image 523, a step image 524, a step image 525, a step image 526, a step image 527, a step image 528, a step image 529 effect image 513, pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514, re-change notification image 515, transition image 516, SP reach image 517, SP tease first effect image 518, SP tease second effect image 519, revival tease image 520, reach tease first effect image 522, reach tease second effect image 523, stop time third effect image 524, start time third effect image 525, role third effect image 526, operation time third effect image 527, 2 image 527, zone notification image 528, zone effect image 529, zone execution image 530, second reach line image 531, second reach notification image 532, change effect image 533, development effect image 534, fourth effect image of reel 535, SPSP reach image 536, first chance effect image 537, lever effect image 557, success image 538, fifth effect image of reel 539, first jackpot effect image 540, first double numbers effect image 556, second double numbers effect image 541, jackpot game notification image 542, right hit image 543, number of rounds image 544, during round image 545, time-saving start image 546, fourth effect image at start 547, third reach teasing effect image 548, fourth effect image at stop 549, first double numbers teasing effect image 550, second double numbers teasing effect image 551, Fifth effect image 552, sixth effect image at stop 553, eighth effect image at stop 554, revival image 558, fifth effect image at start 559, eighth effect image at stop 560, sixth effect image at start 561, ninth effect image at stop 562, sixth effect image of reel 563, seventh effect image of reel 564, fourth effect image of reach teasing 565, tenth effect image at stop 566, seventh effect image at start 567, eighth effect image of reel 568, third image at operation 569, second effect image of chance eye 570, eighth effect image at start 571, ninth effect image at start 572, eleventh effect image at stop 573, tenth effect image at start 574, twelfth effect image at stop 575, ninth effect image of reel 576, tenth effect image of reel 577, fifth effect image of reach teasing 57 8. A sixth reach teasing effect image 579, a thirteenth effect image 580 at the time of stopping, an eleventh effect image 581 at the start, an eleventh role effect image 582, a third chance eye effect image 583, a twelfth effect image at the start 584, a stage change image 585, a fourteenth effect image 586 at the time of stopping, a pattern effect image 587, a thirteenth effect image 588 at the start, a fifteenth effect image 589 at the time of stopping, a seventh reach teasing effect image 590, an eighth reach teasing effect image 591, a fourteenth effect image 592 at the start, a twelfth role effect image 593, a sixteenth effect image 594 at the time of stopping, a third SP teasing effect image 595, a fourth chance eye effect image 596, a thirteenth role effect image 597, a second jackpot effect image 598, a seventeenth effect image 599 at the time of stopping, and a jackpot suggestion image 600 may be displayed.

(Decorative design 41)
As shown in FIG. 250-1(1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed on the image display unit 114. When describing the three rows of patterns constituting the decorative pattern 41 individually, the pattern arranged in the left row may be referred to as the "left row decorative pattern 41", the pattern arranged in the center row may be referred to as the "middle row decorative pattern 41", and the pattern arranged in the right row may be referred to as the "right row decorative pattern 41". When describing the left row decorative pattern 41 and the right row decorative pattern 41 together, they may be referred to as the "left and right rows of decorative patterns 41". When describing the left row decorative pattern 41, the middle row decorative pattern 41, and the right row decorative pattern 41 together, they may be referred to as the "three rows of decorative patterns 41". When describing the left row decorative pattern 41, the middle row decorative pattern 41, and the right row decorative pattern 41 together, they may be referred to as the "three rows of decorative patterns 41". When describing the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 with matching numbers, that is, the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 with a reach, they may be referred to as the "reach eye decorative pattern 41". In addition, three rows of decorative patterns 41 including different numbers may be referred to as "decorative patterns 41 with no matching numbers." Furthermore, three rows of decorative patterns 41 with matching numbers may be referred to as "decorative patterns 41 with matching numbers."

In this embodiment, the display modes of the decorative pattern 41 include a highly decorative display mode (see FIG. 250-1(1)) in which character images and the like are displayed in addition to letters such as numbers, and a less decorative display mode (see FIG. 266(6), FIG. 277(34), FIG. 293(58), etc.) in which letters such as numbers are the main display. The images of characters and the like provided in the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 are different for each letter of the decorative pattern 41, and it is possible to identify which pattern it is by the images of the characters and the like. Furthermore, the less decorative decorative pattern 41 has a higher proportion of the area of the letters in the decorative pattern 41 compared to the more decorative decorative pattern 41.
Here, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 is switched according to the change in the game state or the progress of the presentation, etc. Although the details will be described later, for example, the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is displayed in the SP reach presentation, the SPSP reach presentation, and the time-saving game state, and the decorative pattern 41 with high decorativeness is displayed in other cases.
In addition, in addition to characters such as numbers, simple pictures, images such as characters, etc. may be displayed in the less decorative decorative pattern 41. In other words, the "less decorative decorative pattern 41" shown in Figure 266 (6), Figure 277 (34), Figure 293 (58), etc. may be less decorative than the "highly decorative decorative pattern 41" shown in Figure 250-1 (1), etc.

In the variable presentation, the presentation control unit 300 displays three rows of decorative patterns 41 in a variable manner, for example by vertical scrolling (scrolling downwards), and then first temporarily stops the left row decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number "2"), then temporarily stops the right row decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number "3"), and then temporarily stops the center decorative pattern (for example, the number "1"). After all decorative patterns 41 have been temporarily stopped in this manner, all decorative patterns 41 are finally stopped in accordance with the stopped display of the special patterns. The combination "213" of stopped decorative patterns 41 shown in Figure 250-1 (1) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a miss. The decorative patterns 41 are also an example of a presentation pattern.

(Variable image 51)
As shown in FIG. 250-1 (2), the image display unit 114 displays a variable image 51 indicating that the special symbol is being displayed (the performance symbol is being displayed) by the special symbol change control unit 233 (see FIG. 6, etc.). In other words, the variable image 51 is displayed as an image related to the variable display of the special symbol during the variable display of the special symbol. When the variable display of the special symbol starts, the variable image 51 is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed (in the illustrated example, the lower side of the display area of the image display unit 114), and when the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the display disappears. In the illustrated example, the variable image 51 has a spherical shape. Also, a variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.
In addition, the variable image 51 may be erased (not displayed) when the variable performance ends, or may be erased (not displayed) before the variable performance ends (in the middle of the variable performance).

The variable image 51 also changes its display mode, such as its display color, to notify or suggest the likelihood of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, it is set so that a color with a higher likelihood of winning is displayed when the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, rather than a miss. For example, when the colors of the variable image 51 are set to white, blue, green, red, and rainbow, it may be set so that the later the order, the higher the likelihood of winning. Furthermore, the likelihood of winning a rainbow-colored variable image 51 may be 100%.

(Reserved image 52)
As shown in FIG. 250-1(1), the image display unit 114 displays the reserved image 52 based on the information of the memory area in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 4, etc.) corresponding to the currently reserved ball. In other words, the reserved image 52 is an image indicating that the right to determine the big win is reserved. In this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image 52 on the screen is determined based on the result of the pre-determination process.
The reserved image 52 has a smaller display size than the variable image 51. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 52 has a spherical shape. A reserved pedestal is displayed in the area where the reserved image 52 is displayed. The variable pedestal of the variable image 51 and the reserved pedestal of the reserved image 52 are displayed in different modes. In the following, the display mode of the variable image 51, which is white, and the display mode of the reserved image 52, which is white, may be referred to as a normal display mode.

As described above, a maximum of four pending images 52 are generated by winning the first starting port 121. Therefore, a maximum of four pending images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114 by winning the first starting port 121. In this embodiment, the multiple pending images 52 generated by winning the first starting port 121 are displayed in the area to the left of the variable image 51, in order from a position closer to the variable image 51 to a position farther away, that is, from the right side to the left side.

Although detailed description is omitted, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are also generated by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 122. Therefore, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114 by the entry into the second starting hole 122. In this embodiment, the multiple reserved images 52 generated by the entry into the second starting hole 122 are displayed in an area to the right of the variable image 51 in order from a position closer to the variable image 51 to a position farther away, that is, from the left side to the right side.
In addition, in this embodiment, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are basically configured in the same or similar form. However, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be configured in different forms. In addition, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 displayed by winning the first start port 121 may be displayed in a different form from the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 displayed by winning the second start port 122.

In addition, in the following description, the four pending images 52 displayed at maximum may be referred to as the "first pending image 52," the "second pending image 52," the "third pending image 52," and the "fourth pending image 52," in order of proximity to the variable image 51.

(Number of reserved items displayed: 55)
As shown in FIG. 250-1(1), the image display unit 114 displays a reserved number display 55 based on information in a memory area corresponding to reserved balls in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 4, etc.). This reserved number display 55 is an image showing the reserved number. Here, the reserved image 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes in number according to the reserved number for winning balls in the first starting hole 121 and the second starting hole 122. In the reserved number display 55, the reserved number for winning balls in the first starting hole 121 is displayed on the left side, and the reserved number for winning balls in the second starting hole 122 is displayed on the right side.

(Small design 56)
As shown in Fig. 250-1 (1), the image display unit 114 displays a small symbol 56 indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed (the decorative symbol 41 is being variably displayed) based on winning at the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 by the special symbol variably control unit 233 (see Fig. 6, etc.). The small symbol 56 is controlled by the performance control unit 300 to variably display in accordance with the variably displayed special symbol and to stop display in accordance with the stop of the special symbol.

In the illustrated example, the small patterns 56 are three images each corresponding to the decorative patterns 41, and are displayed on the right side of the image display area of the image display unit 114. The small patterns 56 are displayed as images smaller in size than the decorative patterns 41. As described above, the decorative patterns 41 may be displayed in a highly decorative display mode or a less decorative display mode, but the small patterns 56 are displayed only in a less decorative display mode that mainly consists of characters. However, the small patterns 56 may be displayed in a display mode in which images such as pictures and characters are displayed in addition to characters. In other words, the small patterns 56 may be less decorative than the highly decorative decorative patterns 41.

The small symbols 56 are displayed (vertically scrolled) in a manner that indicates that the special symbols are being displayed in a changing manner in response to winning at the first starting gate 121 or the second starting gate 122. During scrolling, the small symbols 56 display number images incrementing by one from "1" to "9," and then displaying the numbers incrementing by one from "1" again, repeatedly. When the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the small symbols 56 are displayed in a stopped state. In the illustrated example, the number indicated by the stopped small symbols 56 matches the number indicated by the decorative symbols 41. To explain further, in the example of FIG. 250-1(1), the number corresponding to the "213" of the decorative symbols 41 is displayed as the small symbols 56. The small symbols 56 can also be regarded as performance symbols.

(Stage image 61)
As shown in FIG. 250-1(1), a stage image 61 is displayed on the image display unit 114 as a background for the decorative pattern 41 and the like. This stage image 61 is, for example, an image (such as a stage) related to the content (such as an idol or an anime character) that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The stage image 61 may also be a moving image. In the illustrated example, a space-themed moving image is displayed as the stage image 61.
In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 selects one of the multiple performance modes and executes a variable performance in the selected performance mode. The performance control unit 300 then displays the stage image 61 in a display mode corresponding to the selected performance mode. The performance modes in this embodiment are provided for each game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and the performance control unit 300 sets the performance mode according to the switched game state each time the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is switched, and displays the stage image 61 in a display mode corresponding to the set performance mode. In addition, when a variable performance in one performance mode has been performed a predetermined number of times, the performance control unit 300 switches the performance mode and displays the stage image 61 in a display mode corresponding to the switched performance mode. Therefore, the performance mode can also be regarded as a stage displayed in the stage image 61. In addition, the stage image 61 (display mode of the stage image 61) may be switched, for example, when a specific variable performance (for example, a variable performance in which an SP reach or SPSP reach performance is performed) is performed.
In this embodiment, the stage image 61 is displayed on a layer behind other performance images such as the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51, the pending image 52, the pending number display 55, and the small pattern 56.

(First effect image 501 at start)
252(2), a start-time first effect image 501 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The start-time first effect image 501 is an image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 that starts to vary. In the illustrated example, the start-time first effect image 501 is displayed above each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(Lever operation image 502)
As shown in FIG. 252 (5), a lever operation image 502 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The lever operation image 502 is an image that is displayed when a lever operation effect is being executed. By displaying this lever operation image 502, the player can recognize that it is time to operate the effect lever 163. In the illustrated example, an image imitating the effect lever 163 and a gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed as the lever operation image 502. The effective operation period is a period during which the operation of the effect lever 163 is accepted by the effect control unit 300 as being valid. If the lever operation image 502 is displayed during the effective operation period, and the effect lever 163 is operated between the display of the lever operation image 502 and the lapse of the effective operation period, a predetermined effect is executed.

(First effect image 503 when stopped)
253(9), the image display unit 114 displays a first effect image 503 at stop. The first effect image 503 at stop is an image that emphasizes the stopped decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the first effect image 503 at stop is displayed below the stopped left row decorative pattern 41.

(First image during operation 504)
As shown in FIG. 255 (2), the image display unit 114 displays the first image 504 during operation. The first image 504 during operation is an image that is displayed when the effect lever 163 is operated during execution of the lever operation effect (during the display of the lever operation image 502, during the operation effective period). In the illustrated example, the first image 504 during operation is displayed in a layer on the near side (player side) of the layer in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the image display unit 114, and is displayed in a display area that overlaps with the three columns of decorative patterns 41. Therefore, when the first image 504 during operation is displayed, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible for the player to see.

(Zone teaser image 505)
As shown in FIG. 256 (2), a zone teasing image 505 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The zone teasing image 505 is an image that teases the execution of a zone performance. In this embodiment, the zone teasing image 505 is displayed when the zone teasing performance is being executed. In the illustrated example, the zone teasing image 505 is displayed in a layer on the near side (player side) of the layer in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed on the image display unit 114, in a display area that overlaps with the three columns of decorative patterns 41. Therefore, when the zone teasing image 505 is displayed, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible for the player to see.

(Start time second effect image 555)
257(2), the image display unit 114 displays a start-time second effect image 555. The start-time second effect image 555 is an image that highlights the decorative pattern 41 that starts to vary. In the illustrated example, the start-time second effect image 555 is displayed on the left and right sides of each of the three columns of decorative patterns 41.

(Second effect image when stopped 506)
257(6), the image display unit 114 displays a second stop effect image 506. The second stop effect image 506 is an image that emphasizes the stopped decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, the second stop effect image 506 is displayed above each of the three rows of stopped decorative patterns 41.

(First effect image 507)
As shown in FIG. 259 (5), the image display unit 114 displays a first effect image 507. The first effect image 507 is an image that emphasizes the middle movable part 115B. In the illustrated example, the first effect image 507 is displayed around the middle movable part 115B in the shape of the middle movable part 115B.

(Step image 508)
As shown in FIG. 259 (6), a step image 508 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The step image 508 is an image that notifies the stage being executed in the step performance. In this embodiment, the display manner of the step image 508 changes depending on the stage being executed in the step performance. In the illustrated example, the step image 508 displays the text "Step 1," which indicates that the stage in the step performance is the first stage.

(First reach line image 509)
260 (14), a first reach line image 509 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first reach line image 509 is a linear image that crosses the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the first reach line image 509 is displayed in white.

(First reach notification image 510)
As shown in FIG. 260 (14), a first reach notification image 510 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first reach notification image 510 is an image that notifies that a reach has been achieved. In the example shown, the first reach notification image 510 is displayed between the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41, above the first reach line image 509. The first reach notification image 510 also displays the text "Reach!", which indicates that a reach has been achieved.

(Pseudo consecutive pattern 41)
As shown in FIG. 260 (16), the image display unit 114 displays a pseudo consecutive pattern 41. The pseudo consecutive pattern 41 is a decorative pattern 41 that notifies the user that a pseudo consecutive performance will be performed by stopping. In this embodiment, the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 is displayed as one of the decorative patterns 41 in the middle row. In the illustrated example, the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 moves from the top to the bottom of the image display unit 114.

(Pseudo-continuous teasing effect image 512)
As shown in FIG. 261 (17), the image display unit 114 displays a pseudo-repeat fanning effect image 512. The pseudo-repeat fanning effect image 512 is an image that emphasizes the pseudo-repeat pattern 41, and is an image that fanns that the pseudo-repeat pattern 41 will stop, that is, that a pseudo-repeat performance will be executed. In this embodiment, when the pseudo-repeat fanning performance is executed, the pseudo-repeat fanning effect image 512 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the pseudo-repeat fanning effect image 512 is displayed around the pseudo-repeat pattern 41.

(Second effect image 513)
As shown in FIG. 262(2), the image display unit 114 displays a second reel effect image 513. The second reel effect image 513 is an image that emphasizes the left movable reel 115A. In the illustrated example, the second reel effect image 513 is displayed around the left movable reel 115A.

(Effect image 514 when pseudo consecutive stops)
As shown in FIG. 263 (13), a pseudo-consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The pseudo-consecutive stop effect image 514 is an image that emphasizes the stopped pseudo-consecutive pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the pseudo-consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the stopped pseudo-consecutive pattern 41.

(Re-change notification image 515)
As shown in FIG. 263 (15), a re-change notification image 515 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The re-change notification image 515 is an image that notifies that the decorative pattern 41 will change again due to the pseudo consecutive performance. In the illustrated example, the re-change notification image 515 is displayed at the center of the image display unit 114 in the left-right direction, above the three columns of decorative patterns 41. In addition, the re-change notification image 515 displays the text "x2" indicating the number of times that the decorative pattern 41 will change in the change performance due to the re-change.

(Transition Image 516)
As shown in FIG. 266(4), a transition image 516 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The transition image 516 is an image that suggests or notifies that the effect to be executed will transition from a normal reach effect to an SP reach effect. In this embodiment, the transition image 516 is displayed on the entire display area of the image display unit 114. Also, in this embodiment, the transition image 516 is displayed as a background for the decorative pattern 41, etc., instead of the stage image 61. Therefore, the transition image 516 can also be regarded as the stage image 61. The stage (effect mode) in this case is a stage (effect mode) specific to when the transition image 516 is displayed.

(SP reach image 517)
As shown in FIG. 266(6), the image display unit 114 displays an SP reach image 517. The SP reach image 517 is an image indicating that the SP reach performance is being executed. The SP reach image 517 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini-game. In this embodiment, the SP reach image 517 is displayed on the entire display area of the image display unit 114. In addition, in this embodiment, the SP reach image 517 is displayed as a background of the decorative pattern 41, etc., instead of the stage image 61. Therefore, the SP reach image 517 can also be regarded as the stage image 61. The stage (performance mode) in this case is a stage (performance mode) specific to when the SP reach performance is being executed.

(SP promotion first effect image 518)
As shown in Fig. 267 (9), the image display unit 114 displays a SP teasing first effect image 518. The SP teasing first effect image 518 is an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is a different number from the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows in the SP reach performance. In the illustrated example, the SP teasing first effect image 518 is displayed on the side where the middle row decorative pattern 41 advances and the side where it returns.

(SP teaser second effect image 519)
As shown in Fig. 267 (11), the image display unit 114 displays a SP fanning second effect image 519. The SP fanning second effect image 519 is an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41, which has the same number as the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows in the SP reach performance. In the illustrated example, the SP fanning second effect image 519 is displayed on the side where the middle row decorative pattern 41 advances and the side where it returns.

(Revival teaser image 520)
As shown in FIG. 267 (14), the image display unit 114 displays a revival teasing image 520. The revival teasing image 520 is an image that is displayed when a revival teasing performance is being executed. The revival teasing image 520 is displayed on the entire display area of the image display unit 114. The revival teasing image 520 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, and the stage image 61, and on a layer behind the reserved number display 55 and the small pattern 56.

(Development design 41)
As shown in FIG. 269(2), the image display unit 114 displays a development symbol 41. The development symbol 41 is a decorative symbol 41 that indicates that a development performance will be performed by stopping. In this embodiment, the development symbol 41 is displayed as one of the middle row decorative symbols 41. In the illustrated example, the development symbol 41 changes so that the display position is exchanged with the other middle row decorative symbols 41.

(Reach teasing first effect image 522)
271(2), the image display unit 114 displays a reach prompting first effect image 522. The reach prompting first effect image 522 is an image that emphasizes the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 in the reach prompting performance. In the illustrated example, the reach prompting first effect image 522 is displayed below each of the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41.

(Reach teasing second effect image 523)
As shown in Fig. 271 (3), the image display unit 114 displays a reach prompting second effect image 523. The reach prompting second effect image 523 is an image that emphasizes the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows in the reach prompting performance. In this embodiment, the reach prompting second effect image 523 is displayed after the reach prompting first effect image 522 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the reach prompting second effect image 523 is displayed above and below each of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows, respectively.

(Third effect image 524 when stopped)
272(4), the image display unit 114 displays a third effect image 524 at stop. The third effect image 524 at stop is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 that has stopped after the reach-inducing performance has started. In the example shown in the figure, the third effect image 524 at stop is displayed so as to surround each of the reach-eye decorative patterns 41.

(Third effect image at start 525)
273(2), the image display unit 114 displays a start-up third effect image 525. The start-up third effect image 525 is an image that highlights the decorative pattern 41 that starts to vary. In the illustrated example, the start-up third effect image 525 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(Third effect image 526)
As shown in FIG. 273(5), the image display unit 114 displays a third reel effect image 526. The third reel effect image 526 is an image that emphasizes the right movable reel 115C. In the illustrated example, the third reel effect image 526 is displayed around the right movable reel 115C.

(Second image during operation 527)
As shown in FIG. 274 (12), the image display unit 114 displays the second image 527 at the time of operation. The second image 527 at the time of operation is an image that is displayed when the performance lever 163 is operated during execution of the lever operation performance (during the display of the lever operation image 502, during the operation effective period). In the illustrated example, the second image 527 at the time of operation is displayed in a layer on the front side (player side) of the layer in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the image display unit 114, and is displayed in a display area that overlaps with the three columns of decorative patterns 41. Therefore, when the second image 527 at the time of operation is displayed, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible for the player to see. However, the decorative patterns 41 may be visible even during the display of the second image 527 at the time of operation by displaying the second image 527 at the time of operation in a display area different from the display area of the decorative patterns 41. In addition, in the illustrated example, the second image 527 at the time of operation displays the text "Hot!?" which makes the player expect that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot.

(Zone notification image 528)
274 (14), a zone notification image 528 is displayed on the image display unit 114. This zone notification image 528 is an image that notifies the execution of a zone effect. In the illustrated example, the text "Entering the zone!" is displayed as the zone notification image 528.

(Zone effect image 529)
274 (14), a zone effect image 529 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The zone effect image 529 is an image that emphasizes the zone notification image 528. In the example shown in the figure, the zone effect image 529 is displayed around the zone notification image 528.

(Zone execution image 530)
274 (15), a zone execution image 530 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The zone execution image 530 is an image that notifies that a zone effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, the word "Zone" is displayed on the upper side of the display area of the image display unit 114 as the zone execution image 530.

(Second reach line image 531)
As shown in Fig. 275 (19), a second reach line image 531 is displayed on the image display section 114. The second reach line image 531 is a linear image that crosses the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. The second reach line image 531 has a higher expectation than the first reach line image 509 (see Fig. 260 (14)). In the illustrated example, the second reach line image 531 is displayed in red.

(Second reach notification image 532)
As shown in FIG. 275 (19), a second reach notification image 532 is displayed on the image display section 114. The second reach notification image 532 is an image that notifies that a reach has been achieved. The second reach notification image 532 has a higher expectation than the first reach notification image 510 (see FIG. 260 (14)). In the illustrated example, the second reach notification image 532 is displayed between the decorative patterns 41 on the left and right rows, above the second reach line image 531. The second reach notification image 532 also displays the text "Chance!"

(Change effect image 533)
276 (28), a change effect image 533 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The change effect image 533 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 whose number has changed. In the illustrated example, the change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the reach-eye decorative patterns 41.

(Development effect image 534)
276 (32), a development effect image 534 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The development effect image 534 is an image that emphasizes the stopped development pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the development effect image 534 is displayed around the stopped development pattern 41.

(Fourth effect image 535)
As shown in FIG. 277 (33), the image display unit 114 displays the fourth reel effect image 535. The fourth reel effect image 535 is an image that emphasizes the middle movable reel 115B in the development performance. In the illustrated example, the fourth reel effect image 535 is a radial image centered on the middle movable reel 115B.

(SPSP reach image 536)
As shown in FIG. 277 (34), the image display unit 114 displays an SPSP reach image 536. The SPSP reach image 536 is an image indicating that the SPSP reach performance is being executed. The SPSP reach image 536 is, for example, a moving image in which characters appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko game machine 100 fight. In this embodiment, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed on the entire display area of the image display unit 114. In this embodiment, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed as a background of the decorative pattern 41, etc., instead of the stage image 61. Therefore, the SPSP reach image 536 can also be regarded as the stage image 61. The stage (performance mode) in this case is a stage (performance mode) specific to when the SPSP reach performance is being executed.

(Chance eye first effect image 537)
285(7), a chance eye first effect image 537 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The chance eye first effect image 537 is an image that emphasizes the chance eye decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the chance eye first effect image 537 is displayed around the chance eye decorative pattern 41.

(Lever effect image 557)
As shown in FIG. 291 (44), a lever effect image 557 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The lever effect image 557 is an image that emphasizes the image that imitates the effect lever 163 in the lever operation image 502. In this embodiment, the lever operation effect in which the lever effect image 557 is displayed is more promising than the lever operation effect in which the lever effect image 557 is not displayed. In the illustrated example, the lever effect image 557 is displayed around the image that imitates the effect lever 163 in the lever operation image 502.

(Success image 538)
As shown in FIG. 291 (45), a success image 538 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The success image 538 is an image that suggests or notifies that the performance performed in the SPSP reach performance has been successful. In this embodiment, the success image 538 is displayed only when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

(5th effect image 539)
As shown in FIG. 291 (46), the image display unit 114 displays a fifth reel effect image 539. The fifth reel effect image 539 is an image that emphasizes the three movable reels 115. In the illustrated example, the fifth reel effect image 539 is a radial image centered on the middle movable reel 115, which is displayed in rainbow colors.

(First big win effect image 540)
As shown in FIG. 291 (47), the image display unit 114 displays a first big win effect image 540. The first big win effect image 540 is an image that suggests or notifies that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. In the illustrated example, a radial image with the middle row decorative symbol 41 at the center is displayed in rainbow colors as the first big win effect image 540.

(Double number first effect image 556)
292 (50), a duplicate first effect image 556 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The duplicate first effect image 556 is an image that emphasizes the duplicate decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, the duplicate first effect image 556 is displayed around each of the duplicate decorative patterns 41.

(Double number second effect image 541)
As shown in Fig. 292 (53), the image display unit 114 displays a doublet second effect image 541. The doublet second effect image 541 is an image that highlights the doublet decorative patterns 41 that were not promoted after the promotion teasing performance. In the illustrated example, the doublet second effect image 541 is displayed so as to surround each of the doublet decorative patterns 41.

(Big win game notification image 542)
As shown in FIG. 292 (55), the image display unit 114 displays a jackpot game notification image 542. The jackpot game notification image 542 is an image that notifies the start of a jackpot game or a small jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the jackpot game notification image 542 displays the text "Bonus!" indicating the start of a jackpot game. The jackpot game notification image 542 indicates the type of jackpot (e.g., the total number of rounds) and the game status after the jackpot game ends.

(Right-handed image 543)
As shown in FIG. 292 (56), a right-hit image 543 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The right-hit image 543 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. In the illustrated example, a mark of an arrow pointing to the right is displayed as the right-hit image 543. The right-hit image 543 is displayed, for example, during the execution of a jackpot game and in a time-saving game state.

(Round number image 544)
As shown in FIG. 292 (56), a round number image 544 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The round number image 544 is an image for notifying the player of the number of rounds currently being executed in the big win game. In the illustrated example, the text "Round 1" is displayed as the round number image 544.

(Round image 545)
As shown in Fig. 292 (56), a round-in-progress image 545 is displayed on the image display unit 114. This round-in-progress image 545 is a moving image of a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The round-in-progress image 545 is displayed during a round in a big win game.

(Time-saving start image 546)
As shown in FIG. 293 (57), a time-saving start image 546 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The time-saving start image 546 is an image that notifies the start of a time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, the time-saving start image 546 displays the text "Entering special time-saving!!" which suggests or notifies that the game state will be controlled to a special time-saving game state.

(Start time fourth effect image 547)
296(2), the image display unit 114 displays a fourth start effect image 547. The fourth start effect image 547 is an image that highlights the decorative pattern 41 that starts to vary. In the illustrated example, the fourth start effect image 547 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(Reach teasing third effect image 548)
As shown in FIG. 296 (5), the image display unit 114 displays a reach prompting third effect image 548. The reach prompting third effect image 548 is an image that emphasizes the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows in the reach prompting performance. In this embodiment, the reach prompting third effect image 548 may be displayed only when the target of the reach prompting performance is the "7" decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the reach prompting third effect image 548 is displayed on the left and right sides of each of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows, respectively.

(Fourth effect image when stopped 549)
As shown in Fig. 296 (6), the image display unit 114 displays a fourth effect image 549 at stop. The fourth effect image 549 at stop is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 that has stopped after the reach prompting performance has started. In this embodiment, the fourth effect image 549 at stop may be displayed only when the target of the reach prompting performance is the "7" decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the fourth effect image 549 at stop is displayed so as to surround each of the reach-eye decorative patterns 41.

(Double number teasing first effect image 550)
As shown in FIG. 297 (9), the image display unit 114 displays a first effect image 550 of the double numbers. The first effect image 550 of the double numbers is an image that indicates that the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is the same decorative pattern 41 as the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 in the normal reach performance, will be stopped. In other words, the first effect image 550 of the double numbers is an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is the same decorative pattern 41 as the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 in the normal reach performance. In the illustrated example, the first effect image 550 of the double numbers is displayed on the upper side and the lower side of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.

(Double number teasing second effect image 551)
As shown in FIG. 297 (10), the image display unit 114 displays a doublet teasing second effect image 551. The doublet teasing second effect image 551 is an image teasing that the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is the same decorative pattern 41 as the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 in the normal reach performance, will be stopped. In other words, the doublet teasing second effect image 551 is an image emphasizing the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is the same decorative pattern 41 as the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 in the normal reach performance. In the illustrated example, the doublet teasing second effect image 551 is displayed on the upper side, lower side, left side, and right side of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.

(Fifth effect image 552 when stopped)
297(11), the image display unit 114 displays a fifth effect image 552 at stop. The fifth effect image 552 at stop is an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41 that stops with the same number as the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye. In the illustrated example, the fifth effect image 552 at stop is displayed around the middle row decorative pattern 41.

(Sixth effect image 553 when stopped)
297(14), the sixth effect image 553 at stop is displayed on the image display unit 114. The sixth effect image 553 at stop is an image that emphasizes the doublet decorative pattern 41 that has stopped in the normal reach performance. In the illustrated example, the sixth effect image 553 at stop is displayed so as to surround each of the doublet decorative patterns 41.

(Seventh effect image 554 when stopped)
As shown in FIG. 299 (11), the seventh effect image 554 at stop is displayed on the image display unit 114. The seventh effect image 554 at stop is an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41 that has stopped in the SP reach performance. In the illustrated example, the seventh effect image 554 at stop is displayed around the middle row decorative pattern 41 that has low decorativeness.

(Resurrected image 558)
As shown in FIG. 301 (7), a revival image 558 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The revival image 558 is an image that suggests or notifies that a revival performance will be performed. In the example shown in the figure, the revival image 558 displays the text "Revival!!" indicating a revival performance.

(5th effect image at start 559)
309(2), a fifth start effect image 559 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fifth start effect image 559 is an image that highlights the decorative pattern 41 that starts to change. In the illustrated example, the fifth start effect image 559 is displayed on the side where each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 moves.

(Eighth effect image 560 when stopped)
As shown in Fig. 310 (9), the image display unit 114 displays an eighth effect image 560 at stop. The eighth effect image 560 at stop is an image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 that is stopped. The eighth effect image 560 at stop is displayed ahead in the direction in which the decorative pattern 41 has been moving. In the illustrated example, the eighth effect image 560 at stop is displayed to the left of the left row decorative pattern 41 that is stopped.

(Starting sixth effect image 561)
314(2), the image display unit 114 displays a sixth start effect image 561. The sixth start effect image 561 is an image that highlights the decorative patterns 41 that start to vary. In the illustrated example, the sixth start effect image 561 is displayed above and below each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(9th effect image 562 when stopped)
As shown in Fig. 314 (6), a ninth effect image 562 at stop is displayed on the image display unit 114. The ninth effect image 562 at stop is an image that emphasizes the stopped decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the ninth effect image 562 at stop is displayed in the direction in which the three rows of decorative patterns 41 at stop were moving when they were changing.

(6th effect image 563)
As shown in FIG. 316 (5), the image display unit 114 displays a sixth effect image 563. The sixth effect image 563 is an image that emphasizes the middle movable part 115B. In the illustrated example, the sixth effect image 563 is displayed around the middle movable part 115B in the shape of the middle movable part 115B.

(7th effect image 564)
As shown in FIG. 319 (2), the image display unit 114 displays a seventh reel effect image 564. The seventh reel effect image 564 is an image that emphasizes the left movable reel 115A. In the illustrated example, the seventh reel effect image 564 is displayed around the left movable reel 115A.

(Reach teasing fourth effect image 565)
327(2), a reach prompting fourth effect image 565 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The reach prompting fourth effect image 565 is an image that emphasizes the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 in the reach prompting performance. In the illustrated example, the reach prompting fourth effect image 565 is displayed on the left and right sides of each of the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41, respectively.

(10th effect image 566 when stopped)
As shown in Fig. 328 (4), a tenth effect image at stop 566 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The tenth effect image at stop 566 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 that has stopped after the start of the reach teasing performance. In the example shown in the figure, the tenth effect image at stop 566 is displayed so as to surround each of the reach-eye decorative patterns 41.

(Start time 7th effect image 567)
329(2), the image display unit 114 displays a seventh start effect image 567. The seventh start effect image 567 is an image that highlights the decorative pattern 41 that starts to vary. In the illustrated example, the seventh start effect image 567 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(Effect image 8 of the reel 568)
As shown in FIG. 329(5), the image display unit 114 displays the eighth reel effect image 568. The eighth reel effect image 568 is an image that emphasizes the right movable reel 115C. In the illustrated example, the eighth reel effect image 568 is displayed around the right movable reel 115C.

(Third image during operation 569)
As shown in FIG. 330 (12), the image display unit 114 displays the third image 569 at the time of operation. The third image 569 at the time of operation is an image that is displayed when the performance lever 163 is operated during execution of the lever operation performance (during the display of the lever operation image 502, during the operation effective period). In the illustrated example, the third image 569 at the time of operation is displayed in a layer on the front side (player side) of the layer in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the image display unit 114, and is displayed in a display area that overlaps with the three columns of decorative patterns 41. Therefore, when the third image 569 at the time of operation is displayed, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 are difficult or impossible for the player to see. However, the decorative patterns 41 may be visible even during the display of the third image 569 at the time of operation by displaying the third image 569 at the time of operation in a display area different from the display area of the decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, the third image 569 at the time of operation displays the text "Chance!?", which makes the player expect that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot.

(Chance eye second effect image 570)
341(7), the image display unit 114 displays a second chance eye effect image 570. The second chance eye effect image 570 is an image that emphasizes the chance eye decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the second chance eye effect image 570 is displayed around the chance eye decorative pattern 41.

(Start time 8th effect image 571)
352(2), the image display unit 114 displays an eighth start effect image 571. The eighth start effect image 571 is an image that highlights the decorative pattern 41 that starts to vary. In the illustrated example, the eighth start effect image 571 is displayed below each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(9th effect image at start 572)
366(2), the image display unit 114 displays a ninth start effect image 572. The ninth start effect image 572 is an image that highlights the decorative pattern 41 that starts to vary. In the illustrated example, the ninth start effect image 572 is displayed on the upper left side of each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(11th effect image 573 when stopped)
As shown in Fig. 367 (9), an eleventh effect image 573 at the time of stopping is displayed on the image display unit 114. The eleventh effect image 573 at the time of stopping is an image that emphasizes the stopped decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the eleventh effect image 573 at the time of stopping is displayed on the lower right side of the stopped left row decorative pattern 41.

(Start time 10th effect image 574)
371(2), a start-time tenth effect image 574 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The start-time tenth effect image 574 is an image that highlights the decorative pattern 41 that starts to vary. In the illustrated example, the start-time tenth effect image 574 is displayed on the upper left side and the lower right side of each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(12th effect image when stopped 575)
As shown in Fig. 371 (6), the image display unit 114 displays a twelfth effect image 575 at stop. The twelfth effect image 575 at stop is an image that emphasizes the stopped decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the twelfth effect image 575 at stop is displayed on the upper left side and the lower right side of each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 at stop.

(Effect image 9 576)
As shown in FIG. 373 (5), the image display unit 114 displays a ninth effect image 576. The ninth effect image 576 is an image that emphasizes the middle movable part 115B. In the illustrated example, the ninth effect image 576 is displayed around the middle movable part 115B in the shape of the middle movable part 115B.

(Effect image 10 577)
As shown in FIG. 376 (2), the image display unit 114 displays a tenth reel effect image 577. The tenth reel effect image 577 is an image that emphasizes the left movable reel 115A. In the illustrated example, the tenth reel effect image 577 is displayed around the left movable reel 115A.

(Reach teasing effect number 5 image 578)
385(2), a reach prompting fifth effect image 578 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The reach prompting fifth effect image 578 is an image that emphasizes the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 in the reach prompting performance. In the illustrated example, the reach prompting fifth effect image 578 is displayed on the lower right side of each of the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41.

(Reach teasing effect number 6 image 579)
As shown in FIG. 385 (3), the image display unit 114 displays a reach prompting sixth effect image 579. The reach prompting sixth effect image 579 is an image that emphasizes the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows in the reach prompting performance. In this embodiment, the reach prompting sixth effect image 579 is displayed after the reach prompting fifth effect image 578 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the reach prompting sixth effect image 579 is displayed on the upper left and lower right sides of each of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows, respectively.

(13th effect image 580 when stopped)
As shown in Fig. 386 (4), a thirteenth effect image 580 at stop is displayed on the image display unit 114. The thirteenth effect image 580 at stop is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 that has stopped after the start of the reach teasing performance. In the example shown in the figure, the thirteenth effect image 580 at stop is displayed so as to surround each of the reach-eye decorative patterns 41.

(Start time 11th effect image 581)
387(2), an eleventh start effect image 581 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The eleventh start effect image 581 is an image that highlights the decorative pattern 41 that starts to vary. In the illustrated example, the eleventh start effect image 581 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(Effect image 11 of the role 582)
As shown in FIG. 387 (5), the image display unit 114 displays the eleventh reel effect image 582. The eleventh reel effect image 582 is an image that emphasizes the right movable reel 115C. In the illustrated example, the eleventh reel effect image 582 is displayed around the right movable reel 115C.

(Chance eye third effect image 583)
399(7), the image display unit 114 displays a third chance eye effect image 583. The third chance eye effect image 583 is an image that emphasizes the chance eye decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the third chance eye effect image 583 is displayed around the chance eye decorative pattern 41.

(Start time 12th effect image 584)
410(2), a start-time twelfth effect image 584 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The start-time twelfth effect image 584 is an image that highlights the decorative pattern 41 that starts to vary. In the illustrated example, the start-time twelfth effect image 584 is displayed on the left side of each of the three columns of decorative patterns 41.

(Stage change image 585)
As shown in FIG. 423(4), the image display unit 114 displays a stage change image 585. The stage change image 585 is an image that suggests or notifies that the stage (performance mode) controlled by the performance control unit 300 will change. The stage change image 585 is displayed on the entire display area of the image display unit 114. The stage change image 585 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, and the stage image 61, and on a layer behind the reserved number display 55 and the small pattern 56. In the illustrated example, the stage change image 585 displays the text "change" that suggests or notifies that the stage (performance mode) will change.

(14th effect image when stopped 586)
As shown in Fig. 427 (4), a fourteenth effect image 586 at stop is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourteenth effect image 586 at stop is an image that emphasizes the doublet decorative pattern 41 displayed by the promotion performance. In the illustrated example, the fourteenth effect image 586 at stop is displayed so as to surround each of the doublet decorative patterns 41.

(Pattern effect image 587)
428(3), a pattern effect image 587 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The pattern effect image 587 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 that is the target of the pattern change presentation. In the illustrated example, the pattern effect image 587 is displayed so as to surround each of the reach-eye decorative patterns 41.

(Start time 13th effect image 588)
430(2), a start-time thirteenth effect image 588 is displayed on the image display section 114. The start-time thirteenth effect image 588 is an image that emphasizes the less decorative decorative pattern 41 that starts to vary. In the illustrated example, the start-time thirteenth effect image 588 is displayed above each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(15th effect image when stopped 589)
430(6), a fifteenth effect image 589 at stop is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fifteenth effect image 589 at stop is an image that emphasizes the less decorative decorative patterns 41 that are stopped. In the illustrated example, the fifteenth effect image 589 at stop is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 that are stopped.

(Reach teasing effect number 7 image 590)
432(2), a reach prompting seventh effect image 590 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The reach prompting seventh effect image 590 is an image that emphasizes the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 in the reach prompting performance. In the illustrated example, the reach prompting seventh effect image 590 is displayed below each of the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41.

(Reach teasing effect number 8 image 591)
As shown in Fig. 432 (3), the image display unit 114 displays a reach prompting eighth effect image 591. The reach prompting eighth effect image 591 is an image that emphasizes the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows in the reach prompting performance. In this embodiment, the reach prompting eighth effect image 591 is displayed after the reach prompting seventh effect image 590 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the reach prompting eighth effect image 591 is displayed above and below each of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows, respectively.

(Start time 14th effect image 592)
433(2), a start-time fourteenth effect image 592 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The start-time fourteenth effect image 592 is an image that highlights the decorative pattern 41 that starts to vary. In the illustrated example, the start-time fourteenth effect image 592 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(Effect image 12 of the role 593)
As shown in FIG. 433 (4), the image display unit 114 displays a twelfth effect image 593. The twelfth effect image 593 is an image that emphasizes the center movable part 115B and the right movable part 115C. In the illustrated example, the twelfth effect image 593 is displayed around the center movable part 115B and the right movable part 115C by the shape of the movable part 115, respectively.

(16th effect image 594 when stopped)
433(7), the image display unit 114 displays a sixteenth effect image 594 at stop. The sixteenth effect image 594 at stop is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative patterns 41 that have stopped after the start of the reach teasing performance. In the example shown in the figure, the sixteenth effect image 594 at stop is displayed around each of the reach-eye decorative patterns 41.

(SP teaser third effect image 595)
As shown in Fig. 434 (13), the image display unit 114 displays a SP provocation third effect image 595. The SP provocation third effect image 595 is an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41, which has the same number as the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows in the SP reach performance. In the illustrated example, the SP provocation third effect image 595 is displayed on the left and right sides of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.

(Chance Eye 4th Effect Image 596)
436(6), a fourth chance eye effect image 596 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourth chance eye effect image 596 is an image that emphasizes the chance eye decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the fourth chance eye effect image 596 is displayed so as to surround the chance eye decorative pattern 41.

(Effect image 13 of the feature 597)
As shown in FIG. 439 (17), the image display unit 114 displays a thirteenth reel effect image 597. The thirteenth reel effect image 597 is an image that emphasizes the three movable reels 115. In the illustrated example, an image that spreads from the center movable reel 115B is displayed in rainbow colors as the thirteenth reel effect image 597.

(Second big win effect image 598)
As shown in FIG. 439 (18), the image display unit 114 displays a second big win effect image 598. The second big win effect image 598 is an image that suggests or notifies that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. In the illustrated example, the second big win effect image 598 is an image that spreads from the middle row decorative symbol 41 in the center in rainbow colors.

(17th effect image when stopped 599)
439 (21), a seventeenth effect image 599 at stop is displayed on the image display unit 114. The seventeenth effect image 599 at stop is an image that emphasizes the stopped doublet decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the seventeenth effect image 599 at stop is displayed around each of the doublet decorative patterns 41.

(Big win suggestion image 600)
As shown in FIG. 444(2), a jackpot suggestion image 600 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The jackpot suggestion image 600 is an image that suggests or notifies that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. The jackpot suggestion image 600 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and the stage image 61, and on a layer behind the reserved number display 55 and the small pattern 56. In the illustrated example, the jackpot suggestion image 600 displays the text "Jackpot!?"

In this embodiment, the first effect image at start 501, the first effect image at stop 503, the second effect image at start 555, the second effect image at stop 506, the first effect image of the reel 507, the pseudo consecutive promotion effect image 512, the second effect image of the reel 513, the effect image at pseudo consecutive stop 514, the first effect image of the SP promotion 518, the second effect image of the SP promotion 519, the first effect image of the reach promotion 522, the second effect image of the reach promotion 523, the third effect image at stop 524, the third effect image at start 525, the third effect image of the reel 526, the zone effect image 529, the change effect image 533, the development effect image 534, the fourth effect image of the reel 535, chance eye first effect image 537, lever effect image 557, role object fifth effect image 539, big win first effect image 540, double numbers first effect image 556, double numbers second effect image 541, start time fourth effect image 547, reach teasing third effect image 548, stop time fourth effect image 549, double numbers teasing first effect image 550, double numbers teasing second effect image 551, stop time fifth effect image 552, stop time sixth effect image 553, stop time eighth effect image 554, start time fifth effect image 559, stop time eighth effect image 560, start time sixth effect image 561, stop time ninth effect image 562, role object sixth effect image 563, the seventh effect image of the reel 564, the fourth effect image of the reach tease 565, the tenth effect image at the time of stopping 566, the seventh effect image at the time of starting 567, the eighth effect image of the reel 568, the second effect image of the chance eye 570, the eighth effect image at the time of starting 571, the ninth effect image at the time of starting 572, the eleventh effect image at the time of stopping 573, the tenth effect image at the time of starting 574, the twelfth effect image at the time of stopping 575, the ninth effect image of the reel 576, the tenth effect image of the reel 577, the fifth effect image of the reach tease 578, the sixth effect image of the reach tease 579, the thirteenth effect image at the time of stopping 580, the eleventh effect image at the time of starting 581, the eleventh effect image of the reel The image 582, the third chance effect image 583, the twelfth effect image at start 584, the fourteenth effect image at stop 586, the pattern effect image 587, the thirteenth effect image at start 588, the fifteenth effect image at stop 589, the seventh reach tease effect image 590, the eighth reach tease effect image 591, the fourteenth effect image at start 592, the twelfth role effect image 593, the sixteenth effect image at stop 594, the third SP tease effect image 595, the fourth chance effect image 596, the thirteenth role effect image 597, the second big win effect image 598, and the seventeenth effect image at stop 599 are all different images (having different display modes).

(Visual recognition mode of decorative pattern 41)
Next, a description will be given of the visual recognition mode of the decorative symbol 41. The visual recognition mode of the decorative symbol 41 refers to the mode in which the decorative symbol 41 is visually recognized by a player.
In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 displays the decorative pattern 41 in various visual forms according to the progress of the performance.
Figures 250-1 to 250-5 are figures showing the visual appearance of the decorative pattern 41 controlled by the performance control unit 300.

Figure 250-1 (1) is a diagram showing the first viewing mode. The first viewing mode is the viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 that is fixed and stopped. In the first viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 is opaque (has low transparency) and is visible to the player. Furthermore, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first viewing mode, the stage image 61 is difficult to view, difficult to view, or impossible to view through the display area of the decorative pattern 41. Furthermore, in the first viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 is stationary. However, even in the first viewing mode, characters in the decorative pattern 41 and images that emphasize the number portion of the decorative pattern 41 (such as the outline portion surrounding the number) may be displayed in motion.

FIG. 250-1(2) is a diagram showing the second viewing mode. The second viewing mode is a viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 that starts to change immediately after the start of the change performance. In the second viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 is opaque (has low transparency) and is visible to the player. Also, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second viewing mode, the stage image 61 is difficult to view, difficult to view, or impossible to view through the display area of the decorative pattern 41. Also, in the second viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an operational state. In the example shown in the figure, in the second viewing mode, three rows of the decorative pattern 41 are displayed in an operational state so as to move upward. Also, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second viewing mode, an image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 is displayed, such as the first effect image 501 at the start.
In this embodiment, the operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 in the second visual mode includes a plurality of operation modes with different degrees of expectation, and the degree of expectation is suggested or indicated depending on which operation mode causes the decorative pattern 41 to be displayed.

Figure 250-1 (3) is a diagram showing the third viewing mode. The third viewing mode is a viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 that accelerates after the start of fluctuation. In the third viewing mode, the transparency of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same as that of the second viewing mode, or may be higher than that of the second viewing mode. If the transparency of the decorative pattern 41 is higher in the third viewing mode than in the second viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 is more difficult for the player to see when displayed in the third viewing mode than when displayed in the second viewing mode, and the stage image 61 becomes easier to see through the display area of the decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 in the third viewing mode is displayed in an action that moves downward.

FIG. 250-1(4) is a diagram showing the fourth viewing mode. The fourth viewing mode is the viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 that changes at the highest speed in the variable performance. In the fourth viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 has a higher transparency than the second viewing mode, and is difficult to view, difficult to view, or impossible for the player. More specifically, each of the decorative patterns 41 in the row of the fourth viewing mode is difficult to view, difficult to view, or impossible to view compared to the second viewing mode. Also, in the fourth viewing mode, the stage image 61 is easier to view through the display area of the decorative pattern 41 than in the second viewing mode. In the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 in the fourth viewing mode is displayed in an action such that it moves downward. Also, when the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 in the drawing are displayed (scrolled) at a particularly high speed to show that they are difficult to view or impossible to view, the target performance pattern is displayed by an arrow for easy understanding.
In addition, the transparency of the decorative pattern 41 in the third viewing mode may be the same as that of the decorative pattern 41 in the fourth viewing mode, or it may be higher than that of the decorative pattern in the second viewing mode and lower than that of the decorative pattern 41 in the fourth viewing mode.

Figure 250-1 (5) is a diagram showing the fifth viewing mode. The fifth viewing mode is a viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 that fluctuates at a slower speed than the fourth viewing mode. In the fifth viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 has a lower transparency than the fourth viewing mode, and is visible to the player. More specifically, each of the decorative patterns 41 in the row of the fifth viewing mode is visible. In other words, the fifth viewing mode is a viewing mode that is easier for the player to view than the fourth viewing mode. Also, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth viewing mode, the stage image 61 is difficult to view, difficult to view, or impossible to view through the display area of the decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 in the fifth viewing mode is displayed in an action such that it moves downward.

Figure 250-1 (6) is a diagram showing the sixth viewing mode. The sixth viewing mode is a viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 that stops. In the sixth viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 is opaque (has low transparency) and is visible to the player. In other words, the sixth viewing mode is a viewing mode that is easier for the player to view than the fourth viewing mode. When the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth viewing mode, the stage image 61 is difficult to view, difficult to view, or impossible to view through the display area of the decorative pattern 41. In addition, in the sixth viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion. In the example shown in the figure, in the sixth viewing mode, the left row decorative pattern 41 that was moving downward is displayed in motion so as to bound and move upward. In addition, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth viewing mode, an image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 is displayed, such as the first effect image 503 when stopped.

Figure 250-1 (7) is a diagram showing the seventh viewing mode. The seventh viewing mode is a viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 that is temporarily stopped. In the seventh viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 is opaque (has low transparency) and is visible to the player. In other words, the seventh viewing mode is a viewing mode that is easier for the player to view than the fourth viewing mode. When the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh viewing mode, the stage image 61 is difficult to view, difficult to view, or impossible to view through the display area of the decorative pattern 41. In addition, in the seventh viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion. In the example shown in the figure, in the seventh viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion so as to sway left and right at a predetermined cycle. This predetermined cycle may be referred to as the first cycle below. The first cycle is, for example, one second.

Figure 250-1 (8) is a diagram showing the eighth visual mode. The eighth visual mode is the visual mode of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows when a reach is achieved (when the reach performance starts). In the eighth visual mode, the decorative patterns 41 are displayed in motion. In the example shown, in the eighth visual mode, the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in motion as if raising the right hand. In this embodiment, the motion mode of the decorative patterns 41 in the eighth visual mode includes multiple motion modes with different degrees of expectation, and the degree of expectation is suggested or indicated depending on which motion mode the decorative patterns 41 are displayed in.

The ninth visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the decorative symbol 41 in the reach prompting performance. The ninth visual recognition mode includes a first mode to a fourth mode.
FIG. 250-2 (9) is a diagram showing the first mode of the ninth viewing mode. The first mode of the ninth viewing mode is a viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 in the beginning of the reach-inciting performance. In the first mode of the ninth viewing mode, the left-row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in its entirety, while the number portion of the right-row decorative pattern 41 is displayed and the character portion is not displayed. In addition, in the first mode of the ninth viewing mode, the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in motion. In the illustrated example, in the first mode of the ninth viewing mode, the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in motion so as to move downward at a slower speed than in the fifth viewing mode. In addition, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the ninth viewing mode, an image emphasizing the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows is displayed, such as the reach-inciting first effect image 522.

Figure 250-2 (10) is a diagram showing the second mode of the ninth viewing mode. The second mode of the ninth viewing mode is a viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 in the middle of the reach teasing performance. In the second mode of the ninth viewing mode, both of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in their entirety. In addition, in the second mode of the ninth viewing mode, the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the center of the image display unit 114 in the vertical direction, and the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed above the left row decorative pattern 41. In addition, in the second mode of the ninth viewing mode, the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in motion. In the illustrated example, in the second mode of the ninth viewing mode, the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion so as to swing up and down, and the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion so as to move downward at a slower speed than in the first mode of the ninth viewing mode. In addition, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode, an image that highlights the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows is displayed, such as the reach teasing second effect image 523.

Figure 250-2 (11) is a diagram showing the third mode of the ninth visual mode. The third mode of the ninth visual mode is the visual mode of the decorative pattern 41 at the end of the reach-stimulating performance. In the third mode of the ninth visual mode, the left row decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in such a manner that the number that was the target of the reach-stimulating performance passes below and the next number to the number that was the target of the reach-stimulating performance moves from the top to the bottom. In other words, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the ninth visual mode in the reach-stimulating performance, the left row decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped without being displayed in the sixth visual mode (see Figure 250-1 (6)). Also, in the third mode of the ninth visual mode, the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in such a manner that it moves downward at a higher speed than in the first mode of the ninth visual mode.

As shown in FIG. 250-2 (12), the fourth mode of the ninth viewing mode is the viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 at the end of the reach teasing performance. In the fourth mode of the ninth viewing mode, the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop, establishing a reach. Also, in the fourth mode of the ninth viewing mode, each of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows is displayed in an enlarged manner. Also, when the decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth viewing mode, an image that emphasizes the decorative patterns 41 of the reach eye is displayed, as in the third effect image 524 at the time of stop.

In this embodiment, when a reach prompting performance is executed, if the reach performance is not executed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the third aspect of the ninth viewing aspect, and if the reach performance is executed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the fourth aspect of the ninth viewing aspect. That is, in the reach prompting performance, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by either the third aspect of the ninth viewing aspect or the fourth aspect of the ninth viewing aspect. However, when a reach performance is executed after a reach prompting performance, after the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the third aspect of the ninth viewing aspect, the number that has passed in the right column decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an action to return to the upper side, thereby establishing a reach, and the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed by the fourth aspect of the ninth viewing aspect. On the other hand, after the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the fourth aspect of the ninth viewing aspect, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed by the third aspect of the ninth viewing aspect.

The tenth visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the middle row decorative symbol 41 in the normal reach performance. The tenth visual recognition mode includes a first mode and a second mode.
FIG. 250-2 (13) is a diagram showing the first mode of the tenth viewing mode. The first mode of the tenth viewing mode is a viewing mode of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the first half of the normal reach performance. In the first mode of the tenth viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 has a lower transparency than the fourth viewing mode (see FIG. 250-1 (4)), and is visible to the player. More specifically, each of the middle row decorative patterns 41 is visible. In other words, the first mode of the tenth viewing mode is a viewing mode that is easier for the player to view than the fourth viewing mode. Also, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the tenth viewing mode, the stage image 61 is difficult to view, difficult to view, or impossible to view through the display area of the decorative pattern 41. Also, in the first mode of the tenth viewing mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is enlarged and displayed. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 of the first aspect of the tenth visual aspect is displayed as moving downward.

Figure 250-2 (14) is a diagram showing the second mode of the tenth visual mode. The second mode of the tenth visual mode is the visual mode of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the latter half of the normal reach performance. In the second mode of the tenth visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed moving downward at a higher speed than in the first mode of the tenth visual mode. Also, in the second mode of the tenth visual mode, after the same number as the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 passes, the next number moves from above to below the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 in the middle row decorative pattern 41.

The eleventh visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the transition image 516 is displayed. The eleventh visual recognition mode includes a first mode and a second mode. In the eleventh visual recognition mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is not displayed (is difficult to see or cannot be seen).
FIG. 250-2 (15) is a diagram showing the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. The first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 in the first half of the display of the transition image 516. In the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode, the character portion of the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is erased, thereby reducing the decorativeness, and the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner. Also, in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode, each of the reach-eye decorative patterns 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner, moving in the left-right direction toward the center of the image display unit 114 and upward.

FIG. 250-2 (16) is a diagram showing the second mode of the eleventh visual mode. The second mode of the eleventh visual mode is a visual mode of the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 in the latter half of the display of the transition image 516. In the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, each of the reach-eye decorative patterns 41 is displayed in a manner to shrink. Also, in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, each of the reach-eye decorative patterns 41 is displayed in a manner to move to both upper corners of the image display unit 114. Also, in the illustrated example, the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a manner to rotate at a predetermined period. This predetermined period may be referred to as the second period hereinafter. The second period is, for example, 1.5 seconds. That is, the second period is longer than the first period (see FIG. 250-1 (7)).
The second period may be shorter than the first period, or the first period and the second period may be the same in length.

The twelfth visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the decorative symbol 41 when the SP reach effect is being executed. In the twelfth visual recognition mode, the reach eye decorative symbol 41 is the same visual recognition mode as the second mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. The twelfth visual recognition mode includes first to sixth modes.
FIG. 250-3 (17) is a diagram showing the first mode of the twelfth visual mode. The first mode of the twelfth visual mode is a visual mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is fluctuating at high speed. In the first mode of the twelfth visual mode, the decorative pattern 41 has a higher transparency than the second visual mode (see FIG. 250-1 (2)), and is difficult for the player to see, difficult to see, or impossible to see. More specifically, each of the middle row decorative patterns 41 is difficult to see, difficult to see, or impossible to see compared to the second visual mode. Also, in the first mode of the twelfth visual mode, the background (SP reach image 517) is easier to see through the display area of the middle row decorative pattern 41 than in the second visual mode. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an action such that it moves from the upper right side to the lower left side in the image display unit 114.

Figure 250-3 (18) is a diagram showing the second mode of the 12th visual mode. The second mode of the 12th visual mode is a visual mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is fluctuating at a low speed. In the second mode of the 12th visual mode, the decorative pattern 41 has a lower transparency than the first mode of the 12th visual mode, and is easier for the player to see. In other words, the second mode of the 12th visual mode is a visual mode that is easier for the player to see than the fourth visual mode. Also, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode, it is more difficult to see the background (SP reach image 517) through the display area of the middle row decorative pattern 41 than when it is displayed in the first mode of the 12th visual mode. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in such a manner that it moves from the upper right side to the lower left side of the image display unit 114.

Figure 250-3 (19) is a diagram showing the third mode of the 12th viewing mode. The third mode of the 12th viewing mode is the viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 when a performance is being executed to incite whether the middle row decorative pattern 41 will stop. In the third mode of the 12th viewing mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the center of the image display unit 114 and is displayed as if it is swaying. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the third mode of the 12th viewing mode is displayed as if it is swaying to the forward side (lower left side) and the return side (upper right side). In addition, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 12th viewing mode, an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed, such as the SP instigation second effect image 519.

FIG. 250-3 (20) is a diagram showing the fourth mode of the twelfth visual mode. The fourth mode of the twelfth visual mode is a visual mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in such a way that it returns to the opposite side of the moving direction. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the fourth mode of the twelfth visual mode is displayed in such a way that it moves to the upper right side of the image display unit 114 at a higher speed than the third mode of the twelfth visual mode.
FIG. 250-3 (21) is a diagram showing the fifth mode of the twelfth visual mode. The fifth mode of the twelfth visual mode is a visual mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is a number different from the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye, is stopped. In the fifth mode of the twelfth visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped and is displayed as if it is swinging. Note that, between the fifth mode of the twelfth visual mode and the seventh visual mode (see FIG. 250-1 (7)), the motion mode of the decorative pattern 41 may be different, such as the direction in which the decorative pattern 41 swings being different, or the motion mode of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same, such as the direction in which the decorative pattern 41 swings being the same.

250-3 (22) is a diagram showing the sixth mode of the twelfth visual mode. The sixth mode of the twelfth visual mode is a visual mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the middle row decorative pattern 41, which has the same number as the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye, is stopped. When the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth mode of the twelfth visual mode, an image emphasizing the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed, such as the seventh effect image 554 when stopped.
In this embodiment, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 12th viewing mode, if the doublet decorative pattern 41 is not displayed, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth and fifth modes of the 12th viewing mode, and if the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth mode of the 12th viewing mode. However, when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed, the middle row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the fourth and fifth modes of the 12th viewing mode, and then may change again and be displayed in the sixth mode of the 12th viewing mode. On the other hand, after the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth mode of the 12th viewing mode, it is not displayed in either the fourth or fifth mode of the 12th viewing mode.

The thirteenth visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the development prompting performance is executed in the SP reach performance. In the thirteenth visual recognition mode, the reach eye decorative pattern 41 is the same visual recognition mode as the first mode of the twelfth visual recognition mode. In addition, the thirteenth visual recognition mode includes the first mode to the sixth mode.
FIG. 250-3 (23) is a diagram showing the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode. The first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the development pattern 41 is displayed in front of the middle decorative pattern 41. In the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, the middle decorative pattern 41 and the development pattern 41 are displayed in a rotating manner so that the display positions of the two are exchanged. In addition, in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, the middle decorative pattern 41 with a number different from the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed. At this time, the number of the middle decorative pattern 41 may be visible to the player, or may be hidden by the development pattern 41 and difficult or impossible to see.

Figure 250-3 (24) is a diagram showing the second mode of the thirteenth viewing mode. The second mode of the thirteenth viewing mode is a viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed forward of the developed pattern 41. In the second mode of the thirteenth viewing mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 and the developed pattern 41 are displayed in a rotating motion such that their display positions are swapped.

Figure 250-4 (25) is a diagram showing the third mode of the thirteenth viewing mode. The third mode of the thirteenth viewing mode is a viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the developed pattern 41 and the middle row decorative pattern 41 are displayed side by side. The third mode of the thirteenth viewing mode is a viewing mode that is easier for the player to view than the fourth viewing mode. In the third mode of the thirteenth viewing mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 and the developed pattern 41 are displayed in such a way that they push each other toward the center of the image display unit 114.

FIG. 250-4 (26) is a diagram showing the fourth mode of the thirteenth visual mode. The fourth mode of the thirteenth visual mode is a visual mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the development pattern 41 is not displayed. In the fourth mode of the thirteenth visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in such a way that it moves to the center of the image display unit 114.
FIG. 250-4 (27) is a diagram showing the fifth mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode. The fifth mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is a number different from the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye, is stopped. In the fifth mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped and is displayed as if it is swinging. Note that the fifth mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode and the seventh visual recognition mode (see FIG. 250-1 (7)) may have different motion modes of the decorative pattern 41, such as different swing directions of the decorative pattern 41, or may have the same motion modes of the decorative pattern 41, such as the same swing directions of the decorative pattern 41. Also, the fifth mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode and the fifth mode of the twelfth visual recognition mode (see FIG. 250-3 (21)) may have different motion modes of the decorative pattern 41, or may have the same motion modes of the decorative pattern 41.

FIG. 250-4 (28) is a diagram showing the sixth mode of the thirteenth visual mode. The sixth mode of the thirteenth visual mode is a visual mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the development pattern 41 stops. In the sixth mode of the thirteenth visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. Also, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth mode of the thirteenth visual mode, an image emphasizing the development pattern 41 is displayed, such as the development effect image 534.
In this embodiment, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 13th viewing mode during the SP reach performance, if the development pattern 41 does not stop, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth and fifth modes of the 13th viewing mode, and if the development pattern 41 stops, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth mode of the 13th viewing mode.

FIG. 250-4 (29) is a diagram showing the 14th visual mode. The 14th visual mode is a visual mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the SPSP reach performance is being executed. In the 14th visual mode, the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a line in the corner of the image display unit 114, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. However, in the 14th visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is difficult or impossible for the player to see because it fluctuates at high speed between the reach-eye decorative patterns 41, but it does not have to be hidden. In addition, in the 14th visual mode, the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a smaller size than the second mode of the 11th visual mode (see FIG. 250-2 (16)) and the first mode of the 12th visual mode (see FIG. 250-3 (17)). In the fourteenth visual mode, the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is temporarily stopped in the same operation mode as the second mode of the eleventh visual mode and the second mode of the twelfth visual mode.
In the 14th visual recognition mode, the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the same size as the second mode of the 11th visual recognition mode or the second mode of the 12th visual recognition mode. In the 14th visual recognition mode, the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 may be temporarily stopped in an operation mode different from the second mode of the 11th visual recognition mode or the second mode of the 12th visual recognition mode.

Figure 250-4 (30) is a diagram showing the 15th viewing mode. The 15th viewing mode is a viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 of the missing eye in the SPSP reach performance. In the 15th viewing mode, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a size larger than that of the 14th viewing mode. In the 15th viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 of the missing eye is temporarily stopped by an operation mode different from that of the 14th viewing mode. Note that the operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 may be different between the 15th viewing mode and the 7th viewing mode (see Figure 250-1 (7)), such as the direction in which the decorative pattern 41 swings being different, or the operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same, such as the direction in which the decorative pattern 41 swings being the same.

The 16th visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the doublet decorative pattern 41. The 16th visual recognition mode includes the first to fourth modes. In the 16th visual recognition mode, an image emphasizing the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed, such as the first big win effect image 540.
250-4 (31) is a diagram showing the first aspect of the 16th visual aspect. The first aspect of the 16th visual aspect is a visual aspect of the doublet decorative pattern 41 displayed in a small size.

FIG. 250-4 (32) is a diagram showing the second aspect of the 16th visual mode. The second aspect of the 16th visual mode is a visual mode of the doublet decorative pattern 41 displayed in a size larger than that of the first aspect of the 16th visual mode. When the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second aspect of the 16th visual mode, the display size of each of the doublet decorative patterns 41 may be the same, or the display size of the middle decorative pattern 41 may be larger than that of each of the left and right decorative patterns 41.
FIG. 250-5 (33) is a diagram showing the third mode of the 16th visual mode. The third mode of the 16th visual mode is a visual mode of the decorative pattern 41 of the doublet displayed at the largest size and temporarily stopped. In the third mode of the 16th visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in its entirety, whereas each of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows is displayed only partially. In other words, in the third mode of the 16th visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 has a larger display size than each of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows.

Figure 250-5 (34) is a diagram showing the fourth mode of the 16th viewing mode. The fourth mode of the 16th viewing mode is a viewing mode of the doublet decorative pattern 41 that is displayed in a smaller size than in the third mode of the 16th viewing mode and temporarily stopped. In the fourth mode of the 16th viewing mode, each of the doublet decorative patterns 41 is displayed in its entirety, and the display size of each of the doublet decorative patterns 41 is the same. However, even when the doublet decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the 16th viewing mode, the display size of the middle row decorative pattern 41 may be larger than each of the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41.

The 17th visual confirmation mode is a visual confirmation mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the middle symbol projection effect is executed in the normal reach effect. The middle symbol projection effect is an effect that projections the middle row decorative pattern 41, which has the same number as the reach-eye decorative pattern 41, to stop. The 17th visual confirmation mode includes the first to third modes. In the 17th visual confirmation mode, the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode.
FIG. 250-5 (35) is a diagram showing the first mode of the 17th visual mode. The first mode of the 17th visual mode is the visual mode of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the first half of the middle pattern tilting performance. In the first mode of the 17th visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is the same number as the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye, is displayed in motion. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion so as to move from the upper side to the lower side. In addition, the moving speed of the middle row decorative pattern 41 is slower when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 17th visual mode than when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 10th visual mode (see FIG. 250-2 (13)). In addition, in the first mode of the 17th visual mode, an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed, such as the first effect image 550 of the double-digit tilting.

FIG. 250-5 (36) is a diagram showing the second mode of the 17th visual mode. The second mode of the 17th visual mode is a visual mode of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the latter half of the middle pattern tilting performance. In the second mode of the 17th visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion so as to swing up and down. In addition, in the second mode of the 17th visual mode, an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed, such as the double-digit tilting second effect image 551.
FIG. 250-5 (37) is a diagram showing the third mode of the 17th visual mode. The third mode of the 17th visual mode is a visual mode of the middle row decorative pattern 41 that stops with the same number as the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye after the middle pattern tilting performance. In the third mode of the 17th visual mode, an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed, like the fifth effect image 552 at the time of stopping.
The above-mentioned first to seventeenth viewing modes are displays of the decorative pattern 41 when the decorative pattern 41 is in various viewing modes. Therefore, the first to seventeenth viewing modes can also be regarded as the first to seventeenth displays.

(Variation path of decorative pattern 41)
Next, the movement path of the decorative pattern 41 will be described.
In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 executes a variable performance using various variable paths for each column of the decorative pattern 41. The variable path is a path through which the decorative pattern 41 passes in the display area of the image display unit 114 when the decorative pattern 41 is variable.
251-1 and 251-2 are diagrams showing the fluctuation path.

Figure 251-1 (1) is a diagram showing the first variation path. The first variation path is a variation path used for the variation of the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 in the first stage (first presentation mode) and the third stage (third presentation mode), and for the variation of the decorative pattern 41 in the fourth stage (fourth presentation mode). In other words, the first variation path is a variation path when no reach performance is being performed or when a normal reach performance is being performed in the first stage, when a normal reach performance is being performed in the third stage, and when no reach performance is being performed in the fourth stage.

The first movement path includes a left first movement path LR1 which is the movement path of the left row decorative pattern 41, a middle first movement path CR1 which is the movement path of the middle row decorative pattern 41, and a right first movement path RR1 which is the movement path of the right row decorative pattern 41. The left first movement path LR1, the middle first movement path CR1, and the right first movement path RR1 are arranged in the left-right direction. In addition, the left first movement path LR1, the middle first movement path CR1, and the right first movement path RR1 all extend in the up-down direction of the image display unit 114. The three rows of decorative patterns 41 passing through the first movement path are all displayed as moving from the top to the bottom of the image display unit 114 in a common movement manner.
The decorative pattern 41 passes through the first variable path when it is displayed in any one of the third, fourth, fifth, ninth, tenth, and seventeenth viewing modes in the first stage. The middle row decorative pattern 41 passes through the first variable path when it is displayed in the tenth viewing mode in the third stage. The decorative pattern 41 passes through the first variable path when it is displayed in any one of the third, fourth, and fifth viewing modes in the fourth stage.

FIG. 251-1 (2) is a diagram showing the second variation path. The second variation path is a variation path when the SP reach performance is executed in the normal game state. The second variation path includes the middle second variation path CR2 which is a variation path of the middle row decorative pattern 41. The middle second variation path CR2 extends from the upper right corner to the lower left corner of the image display unit 114. The middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the SP reach performance so as to move from the upper right corner to the lower left corner of the image display unit 114 along the middle second variation path CR2.
The middle row decorative pattern 41 passes through the second variable path when displayed in the twelfth visual mode.

FIG. 251-1 (3) is a diagram showing the third variation path. The third variation path is a variation path when a development prompting performance is executed during a SP reach performance in a normal game state. The third variation path includes a middle third variation path CR3 which is a variation path of the middle row decorative pattern 41. The middle third variation path CR3 extends in a circular shape. The middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a rotational manner along the middle third variation path CR3 in the development prompting performance.
The middle row decorative pattern 41 passes through the third variation path when displayed in the thirteenth visual mode.

FIG. 251-1 (4) is a diagram showing the fourth variation path. The fourth variation path is a variation path used for the variation of the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 in the second stage (second performance mode). In other words, the fourth variation path is a variation path when the reach performance is not executed in the second stage or when the normal reach performance is executed. The fourth variation path includes a left fourth variation path LR4 which is a variation path of the left row decorative pattern 41, a middle fourth variation path CR4 which is a variation path of the middle row decorative pattern 41, and a right fourth variation path RR4 which is a variation path of the right row decorative pattern 41. The left fourth variation path LR4, the middle fourth variation path CR4, and the right fourth variation path RR4 are arranged in the left-right direction. In addition, the left fourth variation path LR4 and the right fourth variation path RR4 are provided extending in the left-right direction. The left row decorative pattern 41 passing through the left fourth variation path LR4 is displayed in an action so as to move from the center of the image display unit 114 to the left side in the left-right direction. In addition, the right row decorative pattern 41 passing through the right fourth change path RR4 is displayed so as to move from the center to the right side in the left-right direction of the image display unit 114. In addition, the middle row decorative pattern 41 passing through the middle fourth change path CR4 is displayed so as to rotate in the center of the image display unit 114.
The decorative pattern 41 passes through the fourth variation path when it is displayed in any one of the third viewing mode, the fourth viewing mode, the fifth viewing mode, the ninth viewing mode, the tenth viewing mode, and the seventeenth viewing mode in the second stage.

FIG. 251-1 (5) is a diagram showing the fifth variation path. The fifth variation path is a variation path used for the variation of the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 in the second stage. In other words, the fifth variation path is a variation path when a normal reach performance is executed in the second stage. The fifth variation path includes a middle fifth variation path CR5 which is a variation path of the middle row decorative pattern 41. The middle fifth variation path CR5 is provided so as to extend in the vertical direction in the display area of the image display unit 114. The middle row decorative pattern 41 passing through the middle fifth variation path CR5 is displayed in such a manner as to move from the bottom to the top in the image display unit 114.
The middle row decorative pattern 41 passes through the fifth variation path when it is displayed in the fourth viewing mode and the tenth viewing mode in the second stage.

FIG. 251-1 (6) is a diagram showing the sixth variation path. The sixth variation path is a variation path used for the variation of the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 in the third stage. In other words, the sixth variation path is a variation path when the reach performance is not executed in the third stage. The sixth variation path includes a left sixth variation path LR6 which is a variation path of the left row decorative pattern 41, a middle sixth variation path CR6 which is a variation path of the middle row decorative pattern 41, and a right sixth variation path RR6 which is a variation path of the right row decorative pattern 41. The left sixth variation path LR6, the middle sixth variation path CR6, and the right sixth variation path RR6 are all provided so as to extend vertically in the image display unit 114 and to incline to the right as they move downward. The three rows of decorative patterns 41 passing through the sixth variation path are all displayed in an operational manner so as to move to the right as they move downward in the image display unit 114.
The left and right decorative patterns 41 pass through the sixth variation path when they are displayed in any one of the third viewing mode, the fourth viewing mode, the fifth viewing mode, and the ninth viewing mode in the third stage. The middle decorative pattern 41 passes through the sixth variation path when they are displayed in any one of the third viewing mode and the fourth viewing mode in the third stage.

FIG. 251-1 (7) is a diagram showing the seventh variation path. The seventh variation path is a variation path used for the variation of the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 in the third stage. In other words, the seventh variation path is a variation path when the reach performance is not executed in the third stage. The seventh variation path includes the middle seventh variation path CR7, which is the variation path of the middle row decorative pattern 41. The middle seventh variation path CR7 is provided by extending upward through a curved surface extending in a counterclockwise direction. The middle row decorative pattern 41 passing through the middle seventh variation path CR7 is displayed in an action such that it rotates in a counterclockwise direction and then moves upward.
The middle row decorative pattern 41 passes through the seventh variation path when it is displayed in the fifth visual mode in the third stage.

FIG. 251-1 (8) is a diagram showing the eighth variation path. The eighth variation path is a variation path used for the variation of the middle row decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness in the second stage. In other words, the eighth variation path is a variation path when the SP reach performance is executed in the second stage. The eighth variation path includes the middle eighth variation path CR8, which is the variation path of the middle row decorative pattern 41. The middle eighth variation path CR8 extends from the lower right corner to the upper left corner in the image display unit 114. The middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the SP reach performance so as to move from the lower right corner to the upper left corner in the image display unit 114 along the middle eighth variation path CR8.
The middle row decorative pattern 41 passes through the eighth variable path when it is displayed in the twelfth visual mode in the second stage.

FIG. 251-2 (9) is a diagram showing the ninth variation path. The ninth variation path is a variation path used for the variation of the middle row decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness in the fourth stage. In other words, the ninth variation path is a variation path when the SP reach performance is executed in the fourth stage. The ninth variation path includes the middle ninth variation path CR9, which is the variation path of the middle row decorative pattern 41. The middle ninth variation path CR9 is provided so as to extend vertically in the image display unit 114 and to extend so as to incline to the right as it moves downward. The middle row decorative pattern 41 passing through the middle ninth variation path CR9 is displayed in an operational manner so as to move to the right as it moves downward in the image display unit 114.
The middle row decorative pattern 41 passes through the ninth variation path when it is displayed in the twelfth visual mode in the fourth stage.

As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of movement paths are used in each stage.
Here, in any stage (first stage to fourth stage), the number of types of variable paths used when the reach performance is not being executed (the number of types of variable paths of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows or the middle row decorative patterns 41) may be made different from the number of types of variable paths used when the reach performance is being executed (the number of types of variable paths of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows or the middle row decorative patterns 41). In this case, in any stage, the number of types of variable paths used when the reach performance is being executed (the number of types of variable paths of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows or the middle row decorative patterns 41) may be made greater than the number of types of variable paths used when the reach performance is not being executed (the number of types of variable paths of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows or the middle row decorative patterns 41). In addition, in any stage, the number of types of variable paths (the number of types of variable paths of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows or the middle row 41) used when the reach performance is being performed may be less than the number of types of variable paths (the number of types of variable paths of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows or the middle row 41) used when the reach performance is not being performed. In this case, it is possible to add a sharpness to the performance according to the progress of the game in the variable performance.

In addition, while various change paths are used for the decorative symbols 41 depending on the stage and the progress of the change performance, a single change path is used for the small symbols 56. However, multiple change paths may also be used for the small symbols 56. As an example, different change paths for the small symbols 56 may be used in the normal game state and in the special time-saving game state.

(Example of variation 1)
Next, referring to Fig. 252 to Fig. 254, a variable presentation (variable presentation example 1) performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like will be specifically described. Variable presentation example 1 is a variable presentation example based on a game ball winning in the first start hole 121 in a normal game state. Also, variable presentation example 1 is a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach presentation is not executed, and is a variable presentation based on the number of reserved balls for winning in the first start hole 121 being "1".
In addition, the variable performance shown in Figures 252 to 254 is the variable performance that is executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 246.
In addition, each of the change performance examples from change performance example 1 to change performance example 19 described later is an example of a change performance when the change starts in the first stage.

As shown in FIG. 252 (1), the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114 as the previous special pattern is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300. At this time, one reserved image 52, reserved number display 55, small pattern 56, and stage image 61 are displayed on the image display unit 114. In addition, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the first stage (first performance mode). The first stage is a performance mode in the normal game state. At this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first start port 121 indicates "1", which is the reserved number for winning the first start port 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 indicates "0", which is the reserved number for winning the second start port 122. The three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the first viewing mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 252 (2), the change performance starts with the start of the change display of the special pattern. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the change image 51. Also, at this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second visual confirmation mode, and a first start operation, which is an operation when starting the change, is performed. When the first start operation is being executed, the decorative patterns 41 are displayed in an operation to move upward. Also, at this time, a start-time first effect image 501 is displayed above each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41. Also, the change of the small patterns 56 starts. In this embodiment, the left row decorative patterns 41, the middle row decorative patterns 41, the right row decorative patterns 41, and the small patterns 56 change by repeating the display of the numbers from "1" to "9". That is, in this embodiment, the numbers of the left row decorative patterns 41, the middle row decorative patterns 41, the right row decorative patterns 41, and the small patterns 56 can be changed individually. The left row decorative pattern 41, the middle row decorative pattern 41, the right row decorative pattern 41, and the small pattern 56 may display characters other than numbers, such as English letters. At this time, variable background music, which is a performance sound corresponding to the variable performance being performed, is output from the speaker 156. Although not shown in the figures, in each variable performance example described below, the variable background music continues to be output from the start to the end of the variable performance, except when otherwise described.

Next, as shown in Fig. 252(3), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform a first varying operation, which is an operation when the symbols are varying. When the first varying operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in such a manner that they move downward along a first varying path (see Fig. 251-1(1)).
Next, as shown in FIG. 252 (4), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first varying operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 252 (5), a lever operation performance is executed, and the lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first lever sound, which is a sound effect of the lever operation image 502 being displayed, is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode. Note that the effective operation period of the performance lever 163 in the lever operation performance accompanied by the output of the first lever sound is the first period. The first period is, for example, three seconds.
If the lever 163 is not operated during the effective operation period of the lever operation performance, the lever operation image 502 is hidden as shown in FIG. 252 (6). No sound (non-display sound) is output in response to the lever operation image 502 being hidden. The three rows of decorative patterns 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 252 (7), the left row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the first variable action.
Next, as shown in Figure 252 (8), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 253 (9), the left-row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual confirmation mode, and performs a first stop action, which is an action when the variation stops. When the first stop action is being performed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed as if it is bounding and moving upward. At this time, a first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left-row decorative pattern 41. At this time, a first stop sound, which is an effect sound indicating that the decorative pattern 41 has stopped, is output from the speaker 156.
Next, as shown in FIG. 253 (10), the right-row decorative pattern 41, "1", is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the first variable motion. At this time, the visual mode of the left-row decorative pattern 41 becomes the seventh visual mode, and performs the first temporary stop motion, which is the motion when the pattern is temporarily stopped. When the first temporary stop motion is being performed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed to move so as to swing left and right in the first cycle.
Next, as shown in Figure 253 (11), the right row decorative pattern 41 "1" passes, and the right row decorative pattern 41 "2" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 253 (12), the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop action. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 253 (13), the middle row decorative symbol 41, "9", is displayed in the fifth visual mode. At this time, the right row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 253 (14), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "9" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "1" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 253 (15), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the middle row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the first stop sound is output. That is, the same sound effect is output when the left row decorative pattern 41 stops, when the right row decorative pattern 41 stops, and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 253 (16), the visual appearance of the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes the seventh visual appearance, so that all three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual appearance and the first temporary stop operation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 254 (17), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped with the display of the special symbols (displayed in the first viewing mode). This combination of decorative symbols 41, "412", is an example of a combination when the special symbol lottery result is a miss. Also, with the special symbols stopping to change, three small symbols 56 are also fixed and stopped. In other words, in this changing performance, all of the small symbols 56 are fixed and stopped without being temporarily stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols 56, "412", matches the combination of decorative symbols 41. Also, with the end of the changing performance, the changing image 51 is erased (displayed).

Figure 255 is a diagram showing another presentation example in variable presentation example 1.
In the variation performance example 1, a performance example in which the performance lever 163 is not operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation performance is described. In the following, a performance example in which the performance lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation performance is described.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 252(1) to (4) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 255(1), a lever operation effect is executed and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first lever sound is also output.
When the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, a first operation image 504 is displayed as shown in Fig. 255 (2). At this time, a first operation sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the effect lever 163 has been operated, is output from the speaker 156.

255(3), the first operation image 504 is turned off, and the three rows of decorative symbols 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 252 (7) and (8), Figures 253 (9) to (16), and Figure 254 (17) are performed.

(Example of variation 2)
FIG. 256 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 2) of the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. 256. The variable performance example 2 is a variable performance example based on the game ball winning in the first start port 121 in the normal game state. The variable performance example 2 is a variable performance executed when "ER5" is selected as the "variable performance" in FIG. 246. The variable performance example 2 is a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed, and is a variable performance based on the number of reserved balls for winning in the first start port 121 being "1". In the following description, the differences from the above variable performance example 1 will be mainly described, and the same points as the variable performance example 1 may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 252 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 256 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 256 (2), a zone teasing effect is executed, and a zone teasing image 505 is displayed. At this time, the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth viewing mode and then in the sixth viewing mode (see Fig. 250-1 (6)), but the display of the left row decorative pattern 41 in the fifth viewing mode and the display in the sixth viewing mode are hidden by the zone teasing image 505, making it difficult or impossible to see. Also, when the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth viewing mode, the first stop sound is not output.

In the variation performance example 2, the zone performance is not performed after the zone promotion performance is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 256 (3), the zone promotion image 505 is not displayed. Also, at this time, the left column decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and is performing the first temporary stop operation.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 253 (10) to (16) and Figure 254 (17) are performed.
In addition, when the zone teasing image 505 is displayed in the zone teasing performance, the left row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the seventh viewing mode without being displayed in the fifth viewing mode or the sixth viewing mode, and when the zone teasing image 505 becomes hidden, the left row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the seventh viewing mode.

(Example of variation 3)
FIG. 257 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 3) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 257. The variable performance example 3 is a variable performance example of the decorative pattern 41 based on the game ball winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state. The variable performance example 3 is a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed, and is a variable performance based on the number of reserved balls for winning the first start hole 121 being "4".
In addition, FIG. 257 is a variation performance that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, the points that differ from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Fig. 257 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the determination of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 in the image display unit 114. In addition, four reserved images 52 are displayed, and "4" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 257(2), the variation performance starts with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. At this time, the three columns of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and perform a second start operation, which is an operation when starting the variation. When the second start operation is being performed, the three columns of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a motion that sways left and right. At this time, second start effect images 555 are displayed on the left and right sides of each of the three columns of decorative symbols 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 257 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual appearance and perform the first varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 257 (4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 257(5), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fifth viewing mode and perform the first varying operation. The moving speed of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 at this time is faster than the moving speed of the decorative symbols 41 displayed in the fifth viewing mode in the variation performance example 1 and the variation performance example 2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 257 (6), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the sixth viewing mode, and a second stop action, which is the action taken when the fluctuation stops, is performed. When the second stop action is being performed, the decorative patterns 41 are displayed as if they are temporarily stopped and then gradually moving upward. At this time, a second effect image 506 is displayed above each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41. At this time, a first stop sound is output from the speaker 156. That is, the same sound effect is output when the decorative patterns 41 stop in fluctuation performance example 1 and fluctuation performance example 2, and when the decorative patterns 41 stop in fluctuation performance example 3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 257 (7), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 257 (8).

As described above, in this embodiment, in the variation performance example 2, a stop sound is not output when the left column decorative pattern 41 stops. On the other hand, in the variation performance example 3, a stop sound is output when the left column decorative pattern 41 stops. That is, in this embodiment, the output of the stop sound is more likely to be executed when the pattern of a specific column (for example, the left column decorative pattern 41) stops in a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode) when the second variation performance is performed, which is a variation performance based on the reserved number for the first starting port being "4" and is a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is not executed, than when the first variation performance is performed, which is a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is not executed, based on the reserved number for the first starting port being "1".
In this embodiment, it has been described that the output of the stop sound may not be executed when the left row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode in the first variable performance, but this is not limited to this. The output of the stop sound may not be executed when the right row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode in the first variable performance, and the output of the stop sound may not be executed when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode in the first variable performance. That is, the pattern of the specific row may be the right row decorative pattern 41 or the middle row decorative pattern 41.

(Variation of Variation Example 3)
Next, a modified example of Variable Presentation Example 3 will be explained.
It has been explained that the sound effect output when the decorative pattern 41 stops is the same (both are the first stop sound) in the variable performance (variable performance example 1, variable performance example 2) in which the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121 is "1" and a reach performance is not executed, and the variable performance (variable performance example 3) in which the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121 is "4" and a reach performance is not executed, but this is not limited to the above.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 257 (1) to (4) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 258 (1), the three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 258(2), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the second stop operation. At this time, the second stop effect image 506 is displayed on the upper side of each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, the second stop sound, which is the sound effect of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 stopping, is output from the speaker 156. That is, a different sound effect is output from when the decorative symbols 41 stop in the variation performance example 1 and the variation performance example 2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 258 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 258(4).

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the stop sound different when the three rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in the first stop display mode (a mode in which the left row decorative patterns 41, the right row decorative patterns 41, and the middle row decorative patterns 41 temporarily stop in that order) and when they stop in the second stop display mode (a mode in which all three rows of decorative patterns 41 temporarily stop). This makes it easier for the player to recognize whether the decorative patterns 41 have stopped in the first stop display mode or the second stop display mode, making it easier for the player to experience the diverse performances.

In addition, in the variable performance of this embodiment, the variable performance shown in the modified example of variable performance example 3 may be provided instead of the variable performance shown in variable performance example 3, or the variable performance shown in the modified example of variable performance example 3 may be provided together with the variable performance shown in variable performance example 3.

(Example of variation 4)
259 to 261 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 4) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 259 to Fig. 261. The variable performance example 4 is a variable performance example in which a reach performance is executed based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state.
In addition, variable performance example 4 is a variable performance that is executed when "ER6" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 246.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 259 (1), the performance control unit 300 stops the display of the previous special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 "213" are fixed. In addition, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121. In addition, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first viewing mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 259 (2), the display of the special symbols begins, and the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second viewing mode, and the first start operation is performed. At this time, a first start effect image 501 is displayed above each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. The small symbols 56 also begin to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 259 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a third visual appearance and perform a first varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 259(4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 259 (5), the reel performance is executed, and the middle movable reel 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the upper part of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel first effect image 507 is displayed. Also, at this time, the first reel sound, which is the sound effect of the reel performance, is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in Fig. 259(6), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, a first step sound, which is a sound effect of the first step performance, is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 259 (7), the second stage step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a second step sound, which is a sound effect of the second stage step performance, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 259 (8), the left row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 260 (9), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 260 (10), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 260 (11), the right row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 260 (12), the right row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the right row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 260 (13), the right-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the first stopping action. As a result, the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 stop with the same numbers, resulting in a reach state. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right-row decorative symbols 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 260 (14), the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the eighth visual mode, and a first reach action is performed, which is the action of the decorative symbols 41 when a reach is achieved (when the reach performance starts). When the first reach action is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed as if they are raising their right hand. At this time, a first reach line image 509 and a first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, a first reach sound, which is a sound effect indicating that a reach has been achieved, is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 260 (15), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 260 (16), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive symbol 41 is displayed to move downward. This pseudo consecutive symbol 41 passes through the first middle moving path CR1.
261 (17), the pseudo-repeated pattern 41 is displayed so as to swing up and down in the center of the image display unit 114. At this time, a pseudo-repeated fanning effect image 512 is displayed around the pseudo-repeated pattern 41.

In the variation performance example 4, the pseudo consecutive performance is not performed after the pseudo consecutive fanning performance is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 261 (18), after the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 passes, the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual recognition mode and performs the first variation operation. This middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a larger size than the decorative patterns 41 of the left and right rows.
Next, as shown in FIG. 261 (19), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the middle row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the first stop sound is output. At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size so as to be the same display size as the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows.

Next, as shown in FIG. 261 (20), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 261 (21).

(Example of variation 5)
Figures 262 to 265 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 5) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 262 to Fig. 265. The variable performance example 5 is a variable performance based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach performance is executed.
The variation performance shown in Figures 262 to 265 is a variation performance that is executed when "ER7" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 246. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 252 (1) to (3) is executed, and then, as shown in Figure 262 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 262(2), the reel performance is executed, and the left movable reel 115A moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel second effect image 513 is displayed around the left movable reel 115A. Also, at this time, the second reel sound, which is the sound effect of the reel performance, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 262 (3), the left row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 262 (4), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 262(5), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the first stop sound is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 262(6), the right row decorative symbol 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode. At this time, the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 262 (7), the right row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the right row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 262(8), the right-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the first stopping action. As a result, the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 stop with the same numbers, resulting in a reach state. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right-row decorative symbols 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 263 (9), the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the first reach action is performed. At this time, the first reach line image 509 and the first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, the first reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 263 (10), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 263 (11), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 is displayed moving downward.
263(12), the pseudo consecutive symbol 41 is displayed so as to swing up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, the pseudo consecutive fanning effect image 512 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 263 (13), the pseudo consecutive symbol 41 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive symbol 41. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound, which is a sound effect when the pseudo consecutive symbol 41 stops, is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 263 (14), the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. However, even when the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner, the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 may be displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and the first temporary stop motion may be continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 263 (15), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "434", are displayed in the seventh viewing mode, and the first temporary stop operation is being performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x2", indicating that the decorative pattern 41 will change for the second time. At this time, a first re-change sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the decorative pattern 41 will change again, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 263 (16), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the re-changing notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and its display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 264 (17), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 264 (18), the left row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the first variable action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 264 (19), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 264 (20), the right row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 264 (21), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, and the first stop action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 264 (22), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the first reach action is performed. At this time, the first reach line image 509 and the first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, the first reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 264 (23), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and the first temporary stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 264 (24), the middle row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 265 (25), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 265 (26), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 265 (27), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the middle row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the first stop sound is output. That is, the same sound effect (stop sound) is output when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops.
Next, as shown in Fig. 265 (28), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the display size of the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in such a manner that it is reduced to the same display size as the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 265 (29).

(Example of variation 6)
Figures 266 to 268 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 6) of the variable performance of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to Fig. 266 to Fig. 268. The variable performance example 6 is an example of a variable performance based on a winning entry to the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state, in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the SP reach performance is executed.
In addition, the change presentation shown in Figures 266 to 268 is the change presentation executed when "ER8" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in Figure 246.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 262 (1) to (8), 263 (9) to (16), and 264 (17) to (24) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 266 (1), the middle row decorative pattern 41, "4," is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode, and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 266 (2), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode (see FIG. 250-2 (14)).
Next, as shown in FIG. 266 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 266(4), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode (see FIG. 250-2(15)). At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed in place of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in Fig. 266(5), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode (see Fig. 250-2(16)), and a second temporary stop action, which is the action taken when the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, is performed. When the second temporary stop action is being performed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed so as to rotate in a second cycle.
In addition, when the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first and second modes of the eleventh visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 266 (6), the SP reach performance starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 266 (7), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Fig. 250-3 (17)), and performs a second varying operation, which is an operation when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is being displayed and varying. When the second varying operation is being performed, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed to move from the upper right corner to the lower left corner of the image display unit 114 along the second varying path (see Fig. 251-1 (2)).
Next, as shown in FIG. 266 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode (see FIG. 250-3 (18)) and performs a second variable operation.

Next, as shown in Fig. 267(9), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Fig. 250-3(19)). At this time, the SP promotion first effect image 518 is displayed on the upper right and lower left sides of the middle row decorative pattern 41 on the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in Figure 267 (10), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode and performs the second variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 267 (11), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the SP promotion second effect image 519 is displayed on the upper right side and the lower left side of the middle row decorative pattern 41 on the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in Fig. 267 (12), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fourth mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Fig. 250-3 (20)). In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in such a way that it returns to the upper right side of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in FIG. 267 (13), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth mode of the twelfth visual mode (see FIG. 250-3 (21)), and the first temporary stopping operation is performed. At this time, a third stopping sound, which is the sound effect of the middle row decorative pattern 41 stopping, is output. In other words, different sound effects (stopping sounds) are output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops. Also, when the third stopping sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 267 (14), the revival promotion effect is started, and the revival promotion image 520 is displayed. The revival promotion image 520 displays the text "Revival Challenge!" At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult to see or cannot be seen. Also, at this time, a revival challenge sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the revival promotion image 520 is displayed, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 267 (15), the less decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed again and is displayed in a manner that causes it to sway up and down.
Next, as shown in Figure 267 (16), the middle row decorative pattern 41 moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 268 (17), a revival teasing image 520 is displayed. The revival teasing image 520 displays the text "Revival Failed..." which suggests or notifies that the revival performance is not executed (the revival teasing performance is a failure). At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are difficult or impossible to see. Also, at this time, a revival failure sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the revival teasing performance has failed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 268 (18), the revival teasing image 520 is hidden and the stage image 61 is displayed again. At this time, the highly decorative reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Also, the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" moves from the top to the bottom. Also, as described above, the variable BGM is not output at this time, so it becomes silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 268 (19), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) of the middle row decorative pattern 41 stopping is not output. In addition, the silent state continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 268 (20), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "454", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of change performance 7)
269 and 270 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 7) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 269 and Fig. 270. The variable performance example 7 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SP reach performance is executed.
It should be noted that the change presentation shown in Figures 269 and 270 is executed when "ER9" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in Figure 246.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 262(1) to (8), Fig. 263(9) to (16), Fig. 264(17) to (24), and Fig. 266(1) to (5) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 269(1), the SP reach effect starts and the SP reach image 517 is displayed. At this time, the reach eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the 11th visual mode and performs the second temporary stop operation, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 is not displayed (difficult to see or cannot be seen).
Next, as shown in FIG. 269(2), the development teasing performance is started, and the development pattern 41 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see FIG. 250-3(23)), and performs a third change operation, which is an operation when changing. When the third change operation is performed, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in such a manner that it replaces the display position of the development pattern 41 along the third change path (see FIG. 251-1(3)). In the illustrated example, the "5" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a layer behind the development pattern 41 in the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in Fig. 269(3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see Fig. 250-3(24)). At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a layer in front of the development pattern 41 in the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 269(4), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see FIG. 250-4(25)).
Next, as shown in Fig. 269(5), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode (see Fig. 250-4(26)). At this time, the development symbol 41 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 269(6), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see FIG. 250-4(27)), and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a fourth stop sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the middle row decorative pattern 41 has temporarily stopped. In addition, when the fourth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 269(7), the revival prompting effect starts, and the revival prompting image 520 is displayed. The revival prompting image 520 displays the text "Revival Challenge!" At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult to see or cannot be seen. At this time, a revival challenge sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 269 (8), the less decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed again and is displayed in a manner that causes it to sway up and down.
Next, as shown in Figure 270 (9), the middle row decorative pattern 41 moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 270(10), a revival prompting image 520 is displayed. The revival prompting image 520 displays the text "revival failed...". At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are difficult to see or cannot be seen. Also, at this time, a revival failure sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 270 (11), the revival teasing image 520 is hidden and the stage image 61 is displayed again. At this time, the highly decorative reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Also, the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" moves from the top to the bottom. Also, as described above, the variable BGM is not output at this time, so it becomes silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 270 (12), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) of the middle row decorative pattern 41 stopping is not output. In addition, the silent state continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 270 (13), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "454", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 8)
FIG. 271 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 8) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 271. The variable performance example 8 is a variable performance based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed.
The change presentation shown in FIG. 271 is executed when "ER4" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in FIG. 246.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 252 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 271 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 271(2), the reach-inducing performance is started, and the left and right decorative symbols 41 of "7" are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode (see Fig. 250-2(9)) and perform the first varying action. At this time, the reach-inducing first effect image 522 is displayed below each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in Fig. 271(3), the left and right decorative symbols 41 of "7" are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode (see Fig. 250-2(10)). At this time, the second reach-inducing effect image 523 is displayed above and below each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.
Next, as shown in Fig. 271 (4), the right row decorative pattern 41 and the middle row decorative pattern 41 are displayed in the third mode of the ninth visual recognition mode (see Fig. 250-2 (11)). At this time, the left row decorative pattern 41 performs the first temporary stop motion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 271(5), the right-row decorative pattern 41 and the middle-row decorative pattern 41 are displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and perform the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below each of the right-row decorative pattern 41 and the middle-row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the first stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 271 (6), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 271 (7), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "718", are fixed and stopped.

In addition, in variable performance example 8, after the performance shown in FIG. 271(4) is executed, the performance shown in FIG. 271(6) may be executed without executing the performance shown in FIG. 271(5). In other words, if the reach performance is not executed after the reach teasing performance is executed, the display of the decorative pattern 41 in the sixth visual mode and the output of the first stop sound may not be performed.

(Example of variation 9)
FIG. 272 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 9) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 272. The variable performance example 9 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SP reach performance is executed.
It should be noted that this is a variable performance that is executed when "ER10" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in the variable performance diagram 246 shown in FIG. 272.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 252 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 272 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 272 (2), the reach-inducing performance is started, and the "4" decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the reach-inducing first effect image 522 is displayed below each of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows.

272(3), the left and right decorative symbols 41, "4", are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the second reach-inducing effect images 523 are displayed above and below each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 272(4), the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode (see FIG. 250-2(12)), and a third stop motion, which is a motion when the fluctuation stops, is performed. When the third stop motion is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in an enlarged manner, respectively. The third stop motion can also be regarded as a second reach motion, which is a motion of the decorative symbols 41 when a reach is established (when the reach performance starts). At this time, a third effect image 524 at the time of stopping is displayed so as to surround each of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows. At this time, a second reach sound, which is a sound effect indicating that a reach is established, is output. The second reach sound can also be regarded as a fifth stop sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the decorative symbols 41 have stopped.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 266 (1) to (8), Figures 267 (9) to (16), and Figure 268 (17) are performed.

(Example of variation 10)
273 to 278 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 10) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 273 to 278. The variable performance example 10 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the SPSP reach performance is executed.
273 to 278 are variation effects that are executed when "ER11" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 273(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the determination of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue. The display mode of blue of this reserved image 52 may be the display mode at the start of display, or may be a result of a change in the display mode in the variation performance executed while this reserved image 52 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 273(2), with the start of the change display of the next special pattern, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and a third start operation, which is an operation when the change starts, is performed. When the third start operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, a third effect image 525 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the change image 51, and the change image 51 is displayed in blue. Also, at this time, a first start sound, which is a sound effect for starting the change, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 273 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the first varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 273 (4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 273(5), the reel performance is executed, and the right movable reel 115C moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel third effect image 526 is displayed around the right movable reel 115C on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the third reel sound, which is the sound effect of the reel performance, is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 273(6), the role production ends and the role third effect image 526 is hidden. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.

Next, as shown in Fig. 273 (7), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, the first step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 273 (8), the second step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a second step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 274 (9), the third stage step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, a third step sound, which is a sound effect of the third stage step performance, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 274(10), the step image 508 is turned off. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 274 (11), the lever operation presentation starts, and lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation presentation is the first period.
When the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, a second image 527 is displayed at the time of operation as shown in Fig. 274 (12). At this time, a second operation sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the effect lever 163 has been operated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 274 (13), the zone promotion effect is started and a zone promotion image 505 is displayed.
274 (14), the zone presentation is started, and a zone notification image 528 is displayed. At this time, a zone effect image 529 is displayed around the zone notification image 528. Also, at this time, a zone start sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the zone presentation has started.
Next, as shown in Fig. 274 (15), a zone execution image 530 is displayed. At this time, the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual recognition mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 274 (16), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 275 (17), the right row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 275 (18), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, and the first stop action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 275 (19), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and a third reach action is performed, which is the action of the decorative symbol 41 when the reach is established (when the reach performance starts). When the third reach action is being performed, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed as if both hands are raised. In addition, the third reach action has a higher expectation than the first reach action. At this time, a second reach line image 531 and a second reach notification image 532 are displayed. In addition, at this time, a third reach sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the reach has been established, is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 275 (20), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. Also, at this time, the first change sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the display mode of the variable image 51 has changed, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 275 (21), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 275 (22), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 275 (23), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 275 (24), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 276 (25), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 276 (26), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 276 (27), the SP reach performance starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 276 (28), an effect is executed in which the "4" decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye changes to a "3". At this time, the "3" decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye performs a pattern change action, which is the action taken when the pattern changes. When the pattern change action is being executed, each of the decorative patterns 41 of the reach eye is displayed as if it is swaying from side to side. Also, at this time, a change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the decorative patterns 41 of the reach eye. Also, at this time, a pattern change sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the number of the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye has changed, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 276 (29), the development teasing effect starts, and the development symbol 41 is displayed. At this time, the "4" which is the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 276 (30), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 276 (31), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 276 (32), the development symbol 41 stops, and the middle row decorative symbol 41 becomes invisible. At this time, the development effect image 534 is displayed around the development symbol 41. At this time, a development stop sound, which is a sound effect when the development symbol 41 stops, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 277 (33), the development performance is executed. At this time, the role performance is executed, and the center movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the center movable role 115B has moved lower than the position shown in FIG. 259 (5). At this time, the role fourth effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the fourth role sound, which is the sound effect of the role performance, is output. The fourth role sound can also be regarded as the sound effect of the development performance.
Next, as shown in Fig. 277 (34), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 14th visual confirmation mode (see Fig. 250-4 (29)). At this time, the SPSP reach effect is started, and the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 277 (35), the lever operation performance starts, and the lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Pull!", which encourages the operation of the performance lever 163. At this time, the performance lever 163 emits a white light. At this time, a second lever sound, which is a sound effect of the lever operation performance, is output. The effective operation period of the performance lever 163 in the lever operation performance accompanied by the output of the second lever sound is the second period. The second period is, for example, 5 seconds.
Then, when the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 277 (36), "343", which is three rows of decorative patterns 41, is displayed in the fifteenth visual mode (see FIG. 250-4 (30)). At this time, a sixth stop sound, which is a sound effect when the decorative patterns 41 stop, is output. Also, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 277 (37), the revival teaser performance starts, and the revival teaser image 520 is displayed. The revival teaser image 520 displays the text "Revival Challenge!" At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. Also, at this time, a revival challenge sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 277 (38), the less decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed and moves in an up and down motion.
Next, as shown in Figure 277 (39), the middle row decorative pattern 41 moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 277 (40), a revival prompting image 520 is displayed. The revival prompting image 520 displays the text "revival failed...". At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are difficult to see or cannot be seen. Also, at this time, a revival failure sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 278 (41), the revival teasing image 520 is hidden and the stage image 61 is displayed again. At this time, the highly decorative reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Also, the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" moves from the top to the bottom. Also, as described above, the variable BGM is not output, so it becomes silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 278 (42), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) of the middle row decorative pattern 41 stopping is not output, and the silent state continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 278 (43), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "343", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 11)
279 to 284 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 11) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 279 to 284. The variable performance example 11 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SPSP reach performance is executed.
The variation performances shown in Figures 279 to 284 are variation performances that are executed when "ER12" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 246. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 273 (1) to (5) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 279 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 279(2), a lever operation presentation starts, and lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation presentation is the first period.
When the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 stop as shown in FIG. 279 (3). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive symbols 41. At this time, the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows become invisible (difficult to see or invisible). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 279(4), the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 279(5), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x2", which indicates that the second change of the decorative symbols 41 will be performed. At this time, a first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 279 (6), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the re-changing notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and its display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 279 (7), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 279(8), the pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 are displayed to move downward. At this time, the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are not displayed (difficult to see or not visible).
280(9), the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 are displayed so as to swing up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, a pseudo consecutive fanning effect image 512 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 280(10), the pseudo consecutive symbol 41 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive symbol 41. Also, at this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output. That is, the same sound effect is output when the pseudo consecutive symbol 41 stops for the first time (see FIG. 279(3)) and the second time.
Next, as shown in FIG. 280 (11), the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 280 (12), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 displays the text "x3", indicating that the decorative pattern 41 will change for the third time. At this time, a second re-change sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the decorative pattern 41 will change again, is output. That is, in the change performance example 11, the sound effect (change start sound) is different when the decorative pattern 41 starts changing for the first time (see FIG. 273 (2)), when the decorative pattern 41 starts changing for the second time (see FIG. 279 (5)), and when the decorative pattern 41 starts changing for the third time.

Next, as shown in Fig. 280 (13), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the re-changing notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and its display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 280 (14), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Fig. 280 (15), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, the first step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 280 (16), the second step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a second step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 281 (17), the third step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, the third step sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 281 (18), the left row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 281 (19), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop motion. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 281 (20), the right row decorative symbol 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode. At this time, the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 281 (21), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, and the first stop action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right-row decorative symbol 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 281 (22), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the third reach action is performed. At this time, the second reach line image 531 and the second reach notification image 532 are displayed. Also, at this time, the third reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 281 (23), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to green. Also, at this time, a second change sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the display mode of the variable image 51 has changed, is output. That is, the sound effect (change sound) is different when the display mode of the variable image 51 changes to red (see Fig. 275 (20)) and when it changes to green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 281 (24), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 282 (25), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 282 (26), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 282 (27), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282 (28), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 282 (29), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 282 (30), the SP reach performance starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282 (31), an effect is executed in which the "4" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye changes to a "3". At this time, the "3" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye performs a symbol changing action. Also, at this time, a change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the decorative symbols 41 of the reach eye. Also, at this time, a symbol changing sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 282 (32), the development teasing effect is started, and the development symbol 41 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41, "4", is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 283 (33), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 283 (34), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 283 (35), the development symbol 41 stops and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is hidden. At this time, the development effect image 534 is displayed around the development symbol 41. At this time, a development stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 283 (36), the development performance is executed. At this time, the role performance is executed, and the middle movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 4 effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the 4th role sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 283 (37), the SPSP reach effect starts, and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourteenth visual recognition mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 283 (38), the lever operation effect starts, and the lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Pull!", which encourages the operation of the effect lever 163. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits white light. At this time, the second lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation effect is the second period.
Then, when the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 283 (39), "343", which is three rows of decorative patterns 41, is displayed in the 15th visual mode. At this time, the sixth stop sound is output. Also, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 283 (40), the revival prompting performance starts, and the revival prompting image 520 is displayed. The revival prompting image 520 displays the text "Revival Challenge!" At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult to see or cannot be seen. Also, at this time, a revival challenge sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 284 (41), a less decorative middle row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed and moves in an up and down motion.
Next, as shown in Figure 284 (42), the middle row decorative pattern 41 moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 284 (43), a revival prompting image 520 is displayed. The revival prompting image 520 displays the text "revival failed...". At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are difficult to see or cannot be seen. Also, at this time, a revival failure sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 284 (44), the revival teasing image 520 is hidden and the stage image 61 is displayed again. At this time, the highly decorative reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Also, the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" moves from the top to the bottom. Also, as described above, the variable BGM is not output, so it becomes silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 284 (45), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) of the middle row decorative pattern 41 stopping is not output, and the silent state continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 284 (46), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "343", are fixed and stopped.

As described above, in this embodiment, as shown in Variable Performance Example 5 (see Figs. 262 to 265), the performance control unit 300 can output a specific sound (stop sound) different from the predetermined sound (variable BGM) when the specific row of symbols (middle row decorative symbols 41) stops in a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode) in the first specific variable performance (miss variable performance in which a normal reach performance is performed and a SP reach performance is not performed). On the other hand, as shown in Variable Performance Example 10 (see Figs. 273 to 278) and Variable Performance Example 11 (see Figs. 279 to 284), the performance control unit 300 can not output a specific sound when the specific row of symbols stops in a specific display mode in the second specific variable performance (miss variable performance in which a SP reach performance is performed).
In this case, the stopping of the symbols in the specific row when the specific sound is output is likely to attract the player's attention, and the ease with which the stopping of the symbols in the specific row in the specific display mode is noticed can be varied according to the variable performance executed, thereby realizing various variable performances with different meanings of the stopping of the symbols in the specific display mode of the specific row. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the second specific variable performance is executed, the losing decorative pattern 41 including the pattern in the specific row stops in a special display mode (a display mode with low decorativeness) different from the specific display mode (see FIG. 277 (36)), and then stops in the specific display mode. Here, if the losing decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the special display mode and then excessively emphasized when the specific display mode is displayed, there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease due to the repeated emphasis of the losing decorative pattern 41. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the losing decorative pattern 41 stops in the specific display mode, the emphasis of the losing decorative pattern 41 is suppressed, thereby preventing the player's interest from decreasing.

In addition, in this embodiment, even in the second specific variable performance, when the symbols in the specific row stop in a special display mode (a display mode with low decorativeness) different from the specific display mode, a specific sound (see FIG. 277 (36)) can be output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing the stop of the decorative symbols 41.
In the second specific variable presentation, a specific sound can be output when a specific row of symbols (e.g., the decorative symbol 41 in the left row) stops in a specific display mode (see FIG. 274 (16)), but no specific sound is output when the specific row of symbols stops in a special display mode (see FIG. 276 (25), (26)). Therefore, when the specific row of symbols is in a special display mode, it is possible to prevent the player from paying excessive attention to the specific row of symbols, and to make it easier for the player to pay attention to a presentation image different from the specific row of symbols.
In the first specific variable performance, it is possible to make the specific sound output when the symbols in the predetermined row stop in a specific display mode (see FIG. 264 (19)) and when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode (see FIG. 265 (27)). In the second specific variable performance, it is possible to make the specific sound output when the symbols in the predetermined row stop in a specific display mode and when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode (see FIG. 277 (36)). Therefore, it is possible to realize various variable performances with diversity in the relationship between the stopping sound of the symbols in the predetermined row and the stopping sound of the symbols in the specific row.
In addition, when the first specific variable performance is executed, both the predetermined sound and the specific sound can be output when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode. On the other hand, when the second specific variable performance is executed, it is possible to output neither the predetermined sound nor the specific sound (no sound) when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode. Therefore, various variable performances can be realized, such as a variable performance in which multiple performance sounds are combined, or a variable performance that has a period that does not incite the player depending on the progress of the game.

In this embodiment, the specific sounds (stop sounds) include a first specific sound (such as a first stop sound) that can be output when a specific row of symbols (middle row decorative symbol 41) stops in a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode), and a second specific sound (such as a pseudo consecutive stop sound) that can be output when a special symbol (such as pseudo consecutive symbol 41) stops. In one losing variable performance, the output of the first specific sound when a specific row of symbols stops in a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode) is more likely to be executed when no reach performance is performed than when a special symbol stops.
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the special symbol stops, the impression of the special symbol stopping can be strengthened to the extent that it is made less emphasizing that the symbols in a specific row have stopped in a specific display mode, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in one miss variation performance, the fact that the first specific sound is more likely to be output when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) when a reach performance is not performed than when a special pattern stops includes the fact that when a special pattern stops, the first specific sound is not always output when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode (0%), and that when a reach performance is not performed, the first specific sound is always output when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode (100%).
Furthermore, if in one miss variation performance, the output of the first specific sound is more likely to be executed when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) when a reach performance is not performed than when a special pattern stops, the output of the first specific sound may be executed when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode when a special pattern stops, or the output of the first specific sound may not be executed when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode when a reach performance is not performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the output of the first specific sound (such as the first stop sound) when the specific row of symbols stops is more likely to be executed when the third specific variation performance (a losing variation performance in which the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 are stopped) is executed than when the first specific variation performance (a losing variation performance in which the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 are stopped). Therefore, in the first specific variation performance, the impression of the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 stopping can be strengthened to the extent that it is more difficult to emphasize that the specific row of symbols is stopped in a specific display mode than in the third specific variation performance.
The fact that the first specific sound is more likely to be output when the symbols in the specific row stop when the third specific variation performance is executed than when the first specific variation performance is executed includes the fact that the first specific sound is not always output when the symbols in the specific row stop when the first specific variation performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the first specific sound is always output when the symbols in the specific row stop when the third specific variation performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, if it is easier to output the first specific sound when the patterns in the specific row stop when the third specific change performance is executed than when the first specific change performance is executed, the first specific sound may be output when the patterns in the specific row stop when the first specific change performance is executed, and the first specific sound may not be output when the patterns in the specific row stop when the third specific change performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, even when the first specific change performance is executed, the first specific sound may be output when the specific row of symbols stops (see FIG. 265 (27)). On the other hand, in the miss change performance (fourth specific change performance) in which a specific performance (display of the change image 51 or the reserved image 52 in red, execution of multiple pseudo consecutive performances in one change performance, zone performance, development performance, etc.) is performed, the output of the first specific sound when the specific row of symbols stops is not executed (0%). That is, in this embodiment, the output of the first specific sound when the specific row of symbols stops in a specific display mode is more likely to be executed when the first specific change performance is executed than when the fourth specific change performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to realize an unexpected performance in which the first specific sound is output even in the first specific change performance.
In addition, the fact that the first specific sound is more likely to be output when the patterns in the specific column stop in a specific display mode when the first specific change performance is executed than when the fourth specific change performance is executed includes the fact that the first specific sound is not always output when the patterns in the specific column stop in a specific display mode when the fourth specific change performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the first specific sound is always output when the patterns in the specific column stop in a specific display mode when the first specific change performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, if the output of the first specific sound when the patterns in a specific column stop in a specific display mode is more likely to be executed when the first specific change performance is executed than when the fourth specific change performance is executed, the output of the first specific sound when the patterns in a specific column stop in a specific display mode may be executed when the fourth specific change performance is executed, or the output of the first specific sound when the patterns in a specific column stop in a specific display mode may not be executed when the first specific change performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the fourth specific variable presentation, the first specific sound is output when a specific row of symbols (e.g., the left row decorative symbol 41) stops in a specific display mode. This prevents the player from noticing that the decorative symbol 41 has stopped.

Also, when the first or fourth specific variation performance is executed, it is easier to output a specific sound (such as the sixth stop sound (see FIG. 277 (36))) when the symbols in the specific row stop in a special display mode (a display mode with low decorativeness) than when the second specific variation performance (a miss variation performance in which no reach performance is executed) is executed. Therefore, in the first or fourth specific variation performance, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the symbols in the specific row have stopped.
In addition, the fact that the output of a specific sound when the patterns in a specific column stop in a special display mode is more likely when the first specific change performance or the fourth specific change performance is executed than when the second specific change performance is executed includes the fact that the output of a specific sound when the patterns in a specific column stop in a special display mode is not always executed (0%) when the second specific change performance is executed, and the fact that the output of a specific sound when the patterns in a specific column stop in a special display mode is always executed (100%) when the first specific change performance or the fourth specific change performance is executed.
In addition, if it is easier to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific column stop in a special display mode when the first specific change performance or the fourth specific change performance is executed than when the second specific change performance is executed, the output of a specific sound may be executed when the patterns in a specific column stop in a special display mode when the second specific change performance is executed, or the output of a specific sound may not be executed when the patterns in a specific column stop in a special display mode when the first specific change performance or the fourth specific change performance is executed.

In addition, when the first or fourth specific variation performance is executed, the special sound (start sound) is more likely to be output when the variation performance starts than when the second specific variation performance is executed. In this case, the first or fourth specific variation performance can increase the interest in the game from the start of the variation performance.
In addition, the fact that the special sound is more likely to be output when the variation performance starts when the first specific variation performance or the fourth specific variation performance is executed than when the second specific variation performance is executed includes the fact that the special sound is not always output when the second specific variation performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the special sound is always output when the first specific variation performance or the fourth specific variation performance is executed (100%).
In addition, if it is easier to output a special sound when the variation performance starts when the first specific variation performance or the fourth specific variation performance is executed than when the second specific variation performance is executed, the special sound may be output when the second specific variation performance is executed, or the special sound may not be output when the first specific variation performance or the fourth specific variation performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the start sound (first re-change sound (see FIG. 279 (5))) output when the pseudo-consecutive pattern 41 re-fluctuates after stopping for the first time is different from the start sound (second re-fluctuate sound (see FIG. 280 (12))) output when the pseudo-consecutive pattern 41 re-fluctuates after stopping for the second time. This makes it easier for the player to recognize which re-fluctuate is being executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a variable presentation in which a reach presentation is executed is performed, it is less likely that a stopping sound will be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (see FIG. 278 (42)) than when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) (see FIG. 274 (16)).
In addition, when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the output of a stop sound is more difficult when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop in a specific display mode, which includes the fact that when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the output of a stop sound is always executed (100%) when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop in a specific display mode, and the fact that when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the output of a stop sound is never executed (0%) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode.
In addition, if it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode when a variable performance in which a reach performance is performed is performed, then it is acceptable that a stopping sound is not output when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode when a variable performance in which a reach performance is performed is performed, and it is acceptable that a stopping sound is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when a variable performance in which a reach performance is performed is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed.
In addition, the fact that it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed than when a variable performance in which a reach performance is not executed is performed includes the fact that when a variable performance in which a reach performance is not executed is performed, the stopping sound is always output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (100%), and that when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the stopping sound is always not output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (0%).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in one miss variation performance, when the reach performance is not executed, it is more likely that a specific sound will be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the SP reach performance is executed.
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the SP reach presentation is executed, the impression that the SP reach presentation is being executed can be strengthened by making it difficult to emphasize that the middle row decorative pattern 41 has stopped in a specific display mode, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in one miss variation performance, the output of a specific sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is more likely to be performed when the reach performance is not executed than when the SP reach performance is executed, including the fact that the output of a specific sound is never executed (0%) when the SP reach performance is executed, and the fact that the output of a specific sound is always executed (100%) when the reach performance is not executed.
Furthermore, if, in one miss variation performance, it is easier to output a specific sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when the reach performance is not executed than when the SP reach performance is executed, then the specific sound may be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when the SP reach performance is executed, or the specific sound may not be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when the reach performance is not executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a third specific variable presentation in which an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is executed is performed, a specific sound (stop sound) is more likely to be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode (see FIG. 277 (36)) than when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a special display mode (highly decorative display mode) (see FIG. 276 (25) and (26)). Therefore, when the decorative patterns 41 stop in a special display mode, it is possible to make it easier for a player to notice the stopping of the middle row decorative pattern 41 than the stopping of the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41.
In addition, when the third specific variable performance is performed, the specific sound is more likely to be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode than when the left and right rows decorative patterns 41 stop in a special display mode, which includes the fact that when the third specific variable performance is performed, the specific sound is not always output (0%) when the left and right rows decorative patterns 41 stop in a special display mode, and the fact that when the third specific variable performance is performed, the specific sound is always output (100%) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode.
In addition, if a specific sound is more likely to be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode when the third specific variation performance is performed than when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a special display mode when the third specific variation performance is performed, the specific sound may be output when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a special display mode when the third specific variation performance is performed, or the specific sound may not be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode when the third specific variation performance is performed.

(Example of variation 12)
Figure 285 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 12) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 285. The variable performance example 12 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed.
The variable performance shown in Fig. 285 is a variable performance executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determined performance pattern" in Fig. 53 and "ER2" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 285(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 285(2), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual confirmation mode, and a third start operation is performed. At this time, a third effect image 525 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. The second reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the first reserved image 52, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. The reserved number display 55 for the first start port 121 is updated to "1". At this time, a first start sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 285 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the first varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 285 (4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 285(5), the role production is executed, and the right movable role 115C moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role third effect image 526 is displayed around the right movable role 115C on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the third role sound is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 285 (6), the reel performance ends and the reel third effect image 526 is hidden. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth viewing mode continues. Also, at this time, the display mode of the reserved image 52 changes from the normal display mode to blue. Also, at this time, a third change sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the display mode of the reserved image 52 has changed to blue, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 285(7), a chance eye effect is executed, and "331" which is three rows of decorative symbols 41 stops. All of these three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in red. At this time, a chance eye first effect image 537 is displayed around the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, a seventh stop sound which is a sound effect when the three rows of decorative symbols 41 stop is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 285(8), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "331", are fixed and stopped.
In addition, the third start operation, the third effect image 525 at the start, the first start sound, the role effect, and the chance eye effect in the variation effect example 12 are all examples of the pre-determination effect. Also, these pre-determination effects are effects that make the player expect a big win in the variation effect next to the variation effect when these pre-determination effects are being executed.

(Example of variation 13)
286 to 293 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 13) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 286 to Fig. 293. Variable performance example 13 is an example of a variable performance based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. Also, variable performance example 13 is an example of a variable performance executed after the variable performance shown in variable performance example 12. In other words, variable performance example 13 is an example of a variable performance showing the lottery result of the special pattern lottery suggested by the blue reserved image 52 (see Fig. 285 (6)) shown in variable performance example 12.
286 to 293 are variation effects that are executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 286(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the confirmation of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 286(2), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and a third start operation is performed. At this time, a third effect image 525 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. The first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51, and the variable image 51 is displayed in blue. At this time, a first start sound is output.
At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect lever 163 vibrates.

Next, as shown in Fig. 286 (3), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual recognition mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the vibration effect is continued.
Next, as shown in Fig. 286(4), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode. At this time, the vibration effect is continued.
Next, as shown in FIG. 286 (5), the reel effect is executed, and the right movable reel 115C moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel third effect image 526 is displayed around the right movable reel 115C on the image display unit 114. At this time, the third reel sound is output. At this time, the vibration effect is also ended. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode is also continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 286 (6), the zone promotion effect is started and a zone promotion image 505 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 286 (7), the zone presentation starts, and a zone notification image 528 is displayed. At this time, a zone effect image 529 is displayed around the zone notification image 528. Also, at this time, a zone start sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 286 (8), zone execution image 530 is displayed. Also, the lever operation presentation starts, and lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation presentation is the first period.
When the lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 stop as shown in FIG. 287 (9). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive symbols 41. At this time, the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows become invisible (difficult to see or impossible to see). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 287 (10), the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 287 (11), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x2", which indicates that the second change of the decorative patterns 41 will be performed. At this time, a first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 287 (12), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the re-changing notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and its display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 287 (13), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 287(14), the pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 are displayed to move downward. At this time, the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are not displayed (difficult to see or not visible).
287(15), the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 are displayed so as to swing up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, a pseudo consecutive fanning effect image 512 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 287 (16), the pseudo consecutive symbol 41 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive symbol 41. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 288 (17), the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 288 (18), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x3", which indicates that the decorative symbols 41 will change for the third time. At this time, a second re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 288 (19), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the re-changing notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and its display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 288 (20), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Fig. 288 (21), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, the first step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 288 (22), the second step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a second step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 288 (23), the third step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, the third step sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 288 (24), the step image 508 is hidden. Also, the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and the first varying action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 289 (25), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 289 (26), the right row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 289 (27), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, and the first stop action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right-row decorative symbol 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 289 (28), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the third reach action is performed. At this time, the second reach line image 531 and the second reach notification image 532 are displayed. Also, at this time, the third reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 289 (29), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. Also, at this time, the first variable sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 289 (30), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 289 (31), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 289 (32), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 290 (33), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 290 (34), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 290 (35), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 290 (36), the SP reach performance starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 290 (37), an effect is executed in which the "4" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye changes to a "3". At this time, the "3" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye performs a symbol change action. Also, at this time, a change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the decorative symbols 41 of the reach eye. Also, at this time, a symbol change sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 290 (38), the development teasing effect is started, and the development symbol 41 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41, "4", is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 290 (39), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 290 (40), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 291 (41), the development symbol 41 stops and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is hidden. At this time, the development effect image 534 is displayed around the development symbol 41. At this time, a development stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 291 (42), the development performance is executed. At this time, the role performance is executed, and the middle movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 4 effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the 4th role sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 291 (43), the SPSP reach effect starts, and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourteenth visual recognition mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 291 (44), the lever operation performance starts, and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Make it!", which encourages the player to operate the performance lever 163. At this time, a lever effect image 557 is displayed around the lever operation image 502. At this time, the performance lever 163 emits a red light. At this time, a third lever sound, which is a sound effect for the lever operation performance, is output. The effective operation period for this lever operation performance is the third period. The third period is, for example, five seconds.

When the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 291 (45), the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "333", are temporarily stopped. At this time, the success image 538 is displayed. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect lever 163 vibrates. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a first success sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the success image 538 is displayed, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 291 (46), the reel effect is executed, and the left movable reel 115A, the center movable reel 115B, and the right movable reel 115C each move to a position where they overlap the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel fifth effect image 539 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors. At this time, the first jackpot notification sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 291 (47), the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and the rainbow-colored light emission of the effect lever 163 continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 291 (48), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues, while the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, as shown in Fig. 292 (49), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues, while the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 292 (50), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and stops. At this time, the doublet first effect image 556 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative patterns 41. At this time, the big win first effect image 540 continues to be displayed, the vibration effect continues, and the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors. At this time, the eighth stop sound, which is the sound effect when the doublet decorative pattern 41 stops, is output.
Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 292 (51), the lever operation effect is started, and the lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits white light. Also, at this time, the fourth lever sound, which is the sound effect of the lever operation effect, is output. The operation effective period of this lever operation effect is the third period.

When the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, the decoration pattern 41 of the repeated numbers is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode, as shown in Fig. 292 (52). At this time, the first big win effect image 540 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 292 (53), the repeating decorative pattern 41 "333" is temporarily stopped. That is, the promotion effect is not executed after the promotion hinting effect is executed. At this time, the repeating decorative pattern 41 is surrounded by a repeating second effect image 541. Also, at this time, a ninth stopping sound is output, which is a sound effect when the repeating decorative pattern 41 stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 292 (54), three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "333", are fixed and stopped with the stop display of the special symbols. Also, the first big win effect image 540 is not displayed. Note that the first big win effect image 540 may be displayed when the decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56 are fixed and stopped.
Next, as shown in Fig. 292 (55), a big win game notification image 542 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the big win game notification image 542 displays the text "Bonus!".
Next, as shown in Fig. 292 (56), a right-hit image 543 is displayed. At this time, a round number image 544 and a round-in-progress image 545 are displayed. The round number image 544 displays the text "Round 1."
Next, when the final round is completed, as shown in FIG. 293 (57), a time-saving start image 546 is displayed. The time-saving start image 546 displays the text "Entering special time-saving mode!"

Next, in the special time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 293 (58), the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness, "333", is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. And, like the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56 is also fixed and stopped by the sequence of numbers "333". Also, at this time, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the fourth stage (fourth presentation mode), which is the presentation mode in the special time-saving game state. Also, at this time, the variable presentation is not being executed, but background music corresponding to the fourth stage is being output from the speaker 156.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can output a specific sound (start sound) different from a predetermined sound (variable BGM) when the variable performance starts. Also, the variable performance in which a specific sound is not output, such as variable performance example 1 (see Figs. 252 to 254), is a variable performance based on the result of the special pattern lottery being a miss. On the other hand, the variable performance in which a specific sound is output, such as variable performance example 13 (see Figs. 286 to 293), is a variable performance based on the result of the special pattern lottery being a jackpot. And, in this embodiment, it is made easier to execute a special game (jackpot game) when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed than when a variable performance in which a specific sound is not output is executed.
In this case, the output of the specific sound can heighten the player's anticipation that a special game will be played, thereby making the game more enjoyable from the start of the variable presentation.

In addition, the fact that a special game is more likely to be executed when a variable presentation in which a specific sound is output is executed than when a variable presentation in which a specific sound is not output includes the fact that a special game will not be executed (0%) when a variable presentation in which a specific sound is not output is executed, and the fact that a special game will be executed (100%) when a variable presentation in which a specific sound is output is executed.
In addition, if a special game is more likely to be executed when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed than when a variable performance in which a specific sound is not output is executed, a special game may be executed when a variable performance in which a specific sound is not output is executed, or a special game may not be executed when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the output of a special stop sound (the stop sound of the pseudo consecutive pattern 41, the stop sound of the development pattern 41) is more likely to be executed when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed than when a variable performance in which a specific sound (start sound) is not output. Therefore, by outputting a specific sound, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that a performance accompanied by the output of a special stop sound will be executed from the start of the variable performance.
In addition, the fact that the output of a special stop sound is more likely when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed than when a variable performance in which a specific sound is not output includes the fact that the output of a special stop sound is never executed (0%) when a variable performance in which a specific sound is not output is executed, and the fact that the output of a special stop sound is always executed (100%) when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed.
In addition, if the output of a special stop sound is more likely to be performed when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed than when a variable performance in which a specific sound is not output is executed, the output of a special stop sound may be performed when a variable performance in which a specific sound is not output is executed, or the output of a special stop sound may not be performed when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance in which a specific sound (start sound) is not output (see FIG. 252(2)), it is more difficult to output a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode) when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output (see FIG. 273(2)) is executed (see FIG. 278(42)). Therefore, in a variable performance in which a start sound is output, it is possible to prevent excessive sound effect output and a decrease in interest in the game.
In addition, the fact that it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed than when a variable performance in which a specific sound is not output includes the fact that when a variable performance in which a specific sound is not output is executed, the stopping sound is always output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (100%), and that when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed, the stopping sound is never output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (0%).
In addition, if it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed than when a variable performance in which a specific sound is not output is executed, a stopping sound may be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reach effect is more likely to be executed when a variable performance in which a specific sound (start sound) is output is executed than when a variable performance in which a specific sound (start sound) is not output is executed. Therefore, by outputting the specific sound, the player's expectation that the reach effect will be executed from the start of the variable performance can be increased.
In addition, the fact that a reach effect is more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which a specific sound is output is executed than when a variable effect in which a specific sound is not output includes the fact that a reach effect will always be executed (100%) when a variable effect in which a specific sound is output is executed, and the fact that a reach effect will never be executed (0%) when a variable effect in which a specific sound is not output is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a jackpot game may be executed in a variable performance (such as variable performance example 6 (see Figs. 266 to 268)) in which a SP reach performance is executed without outputting a specific sound (start sound). That is, the variable performance in which a specific sound is not output includes a first variable performance in which a stop sound is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode) (see Fig. 265 (27)), and a second variable performance in which a stop sound is not output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (see Fig. 267 (16)), and a jackpot game is executed more easily when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed.
Here, the fact that a jackpot game is more likely to be executed when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed includes the fact that a jackpot game is not necessarily executed (0%) when the first variable performance is executed. Also, if a jackpot game is more likely to be executed when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed, a jackpot game may be executed when the first variable performance is executed.

In this embodiment, the miss variation performance in which the reach performance is not executed includes a first variation performance in which the start sound is not output (see, for example, FIG. 257(2)), and a second variation performance in which the start sound is output (see, for example, FIG. 285(2)). In addition, when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, it is easier to win the jackpot in the next variation performance when the second variation performance is executed than when the first variation performance is executed (variation performance example 13 is easier to execute).
In addition, when a reservation for the first starting port 121 is stored, it is easier to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variable performance example 13 is easier to execute), which also includes the fact that when the first variable performance is executed, there is no guarantee that there will be a jackpot in the next variable performance (0%) (variable performance example 13 is never executed). Also, when a reservation for the first starting port 121 is stored, if it is easier to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variable performance example 13 is easier to execute), it may be possible to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the first variable performance is executed (variable performance example 13 may be executed), and it may not be possible to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed (variable performance example 13 may not be executed).

In addition, when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, it may be possible to make it more likely that an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) will be executed in the next variable performance (variable performance example 10 or variable performance example 11 will be executed) if the second variable performance in which a start sound is output is executed rather than if the first variable performance in which a start sound is not output is executed.
In addition, when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, the fact that an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is more likely to be executed in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variation performance example 10 or variable performance example 11 is more likely to be executed) also includes the fact that when the first variable performance is executed, an SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance will definitely not be executed (0%) in the next variable performance (variation performance example 10 or variable performance example 11 will definitely not be executed). Furthermore, if a hold is stored for the first starting port 121 and an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is more likely to be executed in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variation performance example 10 or variable performance example 11 is more likely to be executed), then an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) may be executed in the next variable performance when the first variable performance is executed (variation performance example 10 or variable performance example 11 may be executed), and an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) does not have to be executed in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed (variation performance example 10 or variable performance example 11 does not have to be executed).

In addition, in this embodiment, there is a first stop performance (for example, the performance shown in FIG. 253 (15)) that outputs a specific sound (stop sound) different from a predetermined sound (variable BGM) when a specific row of patterns (for example, the middle row decorative pattern 41) stops due to a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode), and a second stop performance (for example, the performance shown in FIG. 278 (42)) that does not output a specific sound when a specific row of patterns stops due to a specific display mode. In addition, there are a first specific sound (for example, the first stop sound (see FIG. 274 (16))) and a second specific sound (for example, the seventh stop sound (see FIG. 285 (7))) that is different from the first specific sound. In one variable performance, the output of the second specific sound is more likely to be executed when the first stop performance is executed (for example, when the variable performance example 12 is executed) than when the second stop performance is executed (for example, when the variable performance example 10 is executed).
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the first stop presentation is executed, the output of the second specific sound is more likely to be executed, so that the player can be more impressed that the pattern has stopped in combination with the output of the second specific sound, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in one variable performance, the fact that the second specific sound is more likely to be output when the first stop performance is executed than when the second stop performance is executed includes the fact that the second specific sound is never output when the second stop performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the second specific sound is always output when the first stop performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, if in one variable performance, the output of the second specific sound is more likely to be executed when the first stop performance is executed than when the second stop performance is executed, the second specific sound may be output when the second stop performance is executed, and the second specific sound may not be output when the first stop performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in one variable performance, when the first stop performance is executed (for example, when variable performance example 12 is executed), it is more likely that a specific pre-determined performance (such as a pattern movement performance (see FIG. 285 (2)), output of a first start sound, role device performance (see FIG. 285 (5)), chance eye performance (see FIG. 285 (7)), etc.) will be executed when the first stop performance is executed (for example, when variable performance example 12 is executed) than when the second stop performance is executed (for example, when variable performance example 10 is executed).
In this case, in the variable performance in which the pre-determination performance is performed, the specific sound is likely to be output when the symbols in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, making it easier for the player to recognize the "stop of symbols," which is one of the divisions in the variable performance, and thus, in combination with the pre-determination performance, the expectation of the next and subsequent variable performances can be further increased. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in one variable performance, the fact that a specific pre-determined performance is more likely to be executed when the first stop performance is executed than when the second stop performance is executed includes the fact that a specific pre-determined performance is not always executed when the second stop performance is executed (0%), and the fact that a specific pre-determined performance is always executed when the first stop performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, if in one variable performance, a specific pre-judgment performance is more likely to be executed when the first stop performance is executed than when the second stop performance is executed, the specific pre-judgment performance may be executed when the second stop performance is executed, or the specific pre-judgment performance may not be executed when the first stop performance is executed.

In addition, the pre-determination performance of this embodiment includes a specific pre-determination performance that makes the player expect a jackpot in the next or subsequent variable performance after the currently executed variable performance. Examples of the specific pre-determination performance include the pre-determination performance of the variable performance example 12 (symbol action performance (see FIG. 285(2)), output of the first start sound, role performance (see FIG. 285(5)), chance eye performance (see FIG. 285(7)), etc.). The variable performance that is expected to win a jackpot due to the pre-determination performance of the variable performance example 12 is the variable performance of the variable performance example 13. In this embodiment, the second stop performance is more likely to be executed when a variable performance that is expected to win a jackpot due to a specific pre-determination performance is performed than when a variable performance in which a pre-determination performance (specific pre-determination performance) is performed.
The fact that the second stop performance is more likely to be executed when the target variation performance is performed than when the variation performance in which the pre-determination performance (specific pre-determination performance) is performed includes the fact that the second stop performance is not necessarily executed (0%) when the variation performance in which the pre-determination performance (specific pre-determination performance) is performed, and the fact that the second stop performance is necessarily executed (100%) when the target variation performance is performed. Also, if the second stop performance is more likely to be executed when the target variation performance is performed than when the variation performance in which the pre-determination performance (specific pre-determination performance) is performed, the second stop performance may be executed when the variation performance in which the pre-determination performance (specific pre-determination performance) is performed, or the second stop performance may not be executed when the target variation performance is performed.

(Example of variation 14)
FIG. 294 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 14) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 294. The variable performance example 14 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
In addition, FIG. 294 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA2" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 285 (1) to (8), Fig. 286 (1) to (8), Fig. 287 (9) to (16), Fig. 288 (17) to (24), Fig. 289 (25) to (32), Fig. 290 (33) to (40), and Fig. 291 (41) to (43) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 294 (1), the lever operation effect starts and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Make it!", which encourages the operation of the effect lever 163. At this time, the effect lever 163 is illuminated in red. At this time, a third lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation effect is the third period.

When the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 294 (2), the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "333", are temporarily stopped. However, at this time, the success image 538 (see FIG. 291 (45)) is not displayed. Also, at this time, the vibration effect is not being executed. Also, at this time, the effect lever 163 emits a white light. Also, at this time, the first success sound is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 294(3), a success image 538 is displayed. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect lever 163 vibrates. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a first success sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 291 (46) to (48), Figures 292 (49) to (56), and Figures 293 (57) and (58) are executed.

As described above, in variable performance example 14, the timing of the display of success image 538, the vibration performance, the rainbow light emission of performance lever 163, and the output of the first success sound is delayed relative to the time of operation of performance lever 163, compared to variable performance example 13. In other words, in variable performance example 14, the period from when performance lever 163 is operated in the lever operation performance to the display of success image 538, the start of the vibration performance, the rainbow light emission of performance lever 163, and the output of the first success sound is longer than in variable performance example 13.

In addition, in the variation performance example 14, a success image 538 is displayed, but this is not limited to this.
In variable performance example 14, after the performance shown in FIG. 294 (2) is performed, a vibration performance, the illumination of the performance lever 163 in rainbow colors, and the output of the first success sound may be executed without the success image 538 being displayed.

(Example of variation 15)
Figure 295 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 15) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 295. The variable performance example 15 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.
In addition, FIG. 295 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA3" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figs. 285 (1) to (8), 286 (1) to (8), 287 (9) to (16), 288 (17) to (24), 289 (25) to (32), 290 (33) to (40), 291 (41), and (42) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 295 (1), the SPSP reach effect starts, and the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 14th visual mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 295(2), the lever operation effect starts, and the lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Make it!", which encourages the operation of the effect lever 163. At this time, the vibration effect starts, the effect lever 163 emits white light, and the second lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation effect is the third period.
Then, when the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation valid period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 295 (3), the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "333", are temporarily stopped. At this time, a success image 538 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a first success sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 291 (46) to (48), Figures 292 (49) to (56), and Figures 293 (57) and (58) are executed.

(Example of variation 16)
296 and 297 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 16) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 296 and Fig. 297. The variable performance example 16 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
296 and 297 are variation effects that are executed when "EB1" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 296(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the confirmation of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 296 (2), with the start of the variable display of the next special pattern, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and a fourth start operation, which is an operation when the variable starts, is performed. When the fourth start operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a shrinking manner. At this time, a fourth start effect image 547 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51, and the variable image 51 is displayed. Furthermore, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from red to rainbow colors. At this time, a vibration effect is performed. At this time, a fourth change sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the display mode of the variable image 51 has changed, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 296 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.
296(4), the reach-inducing performance is started, and the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the reach-inducing first effect image 522 is displayed below each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.
296(5), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, a reach-inducing third effect image 548 is displayed on the left and right sides of each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 296 (6), the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode, and a fourth stop action is performed, which is an action when the fluctuation stops. When the fourth stop action is being performed, the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner compared to when the third stop action is being performed (see FIG. 272 (4)). The fourth stop action can also be considered as a fourth reach action, which is an action of the decorative symbols 41 when a reach is established (when the reach performance starts). The fourth reach action has a higher expectation than any of the first reach action to the third reach action. At this time, the fourth effect image 549 at the time of stopping is displayed so as to surround each of the reach-ey decorative symbols 41. At this time, a fourth reach sound, which is a sound effect indicating that a reach has been established, is output. The fourth reach sound can also be considered as a tenth stop sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 296 (7), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "6" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 296 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 297(9), the middle symbol fanning effect is started, and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 17th visual mode (see Fig. 250-5(35)). At this time, the doublet fanning first effect image 550 is displayed above and below the middle row decorative symbol 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in Fig. 297 (10), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the 17th visual mode (see Fig. 250-5 (36)). At this time, the doublet second effect image 551 is displayed on the upper side, lower side, left side, and right side of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.
Next, as shown in FIG. 297 (11), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 17th visual mode (see FIG. 250-5 (37)) and stops. At this time, the fifth effect image 552 at the time of stop is displayed around the middle row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect lever 163 emits light in rainbow colors. Also, at this time, an eleventh stop sound, which is the sound effect of the middle row decorative pattern 41 stopping, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 297 (12), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the sixteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 297 (13), the repeating number decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 297 (14), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and stops. At this time, the sixth stop effect image 553 is displayed so as to surround each of the doublet decorative patterns 41. At this time, the twelfth stop sound, which is the sound effect when the doublet decorative patterns 41 stop, is output.
In the variation performance example 16, even when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 16th visual mode, the stage image 61 is displayed. However, even in the variation performance example 16, when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 16th visual mode, the first big win effect image 540 may be displayed instead of the stage image 61.

Next, as shown in FIG. 297 (15), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seven-visual mode and the first temporary stop motion is performed. At this time, the vibration effect ends. At this time, the light color of the effect lever 163 changes from rainbow color to white.
Then, as shown in FIG. 297 (16), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, ie, "777", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 17)
298 and 299 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 17) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 298 and Fig. 299. The variable performance example 17 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
298 and 299 are variation effects that are executed when "EB2" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 296 (1) to (7) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 298 (1), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and a first temporary stopping action is performed, and the middle row decorative pattern 41, "7", is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and a first variable action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 298 (2), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "8" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 298 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode.

298(4), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, a transition image 516 is displayed in place of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 298 (5), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 298(6), the SP reach performance starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 298 (7), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the twelfth visual mode, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 performs a second varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 298 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode and performs the second variable operation.
Next, as shown in Fig. 299 (9), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the SP promotion second effect image 519 is displayed on the upper right side and the lower left side of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 299 (10), the lever operation effect starts, and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Make it!". At this time, a lever effect image 557 is displayed around the lever operation image 502. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits red light, and a third lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation effect is the third period.
Then, when the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 299 (11), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" is displayed in the sixth mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the seventh effect image 554 at the time of stopping is displayed around the middle row decorative pattern 41. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect lever 163 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a thirteenth stop sound, which is a sound effect when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops, is output.
After this, the same presentation as shown in Figures 291 (46) to (48), 292 (49), and (50) is performed, except that the repeated decorative pattern 41 is "777", and then, as the special patterns stop changing, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 and the small pattern 56, "777", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 18)
FIG. 300 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 18) of the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. 300. The variable performance example 18 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
In addition, FIG. 300 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA4" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 273 (1) to (8), Fig. 274 (9) to (16), Fig. 275 (17) to (24), Fig. 276 (25) to (32), Fig. 277 (33), and Fig. 277 (34) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 300 (1), the lever operation effect starts and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Pull!" At this time, the effect lever 163 emits white light and a second lever sound is output. The operation effective period of this lever operation effect is the second period.
Then, when the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 300(2), the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "333", perform the first temporary stop operation. At this time, the success image 538 is displayed. The effect lever 163 emits light in rainbow colors, and the first success sound is output. Meanwhile, the vibration effect is not performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 300(3), the role effect is executed, and the left movable role 115A, the center movable role 115B, and the right movable role 115C move to positions where they overlap with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role fifth effect image 539 is displayed. At this time, the performance lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors, and the first big win notification sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 300(4), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 is displayed. Also, at this time, the illumination of the rainbow colors of the effect lever 163 continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 300(5), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 continues to be displayed, and the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, as shown in FIG. 300(6), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 continues to be displayed, and the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 300(7), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and stop. At this time, the doublet first effect image 556 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the big win first effect image 540 continues to be displayed, the performance lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors, and the eighth stop sound is output.
Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 300(8), the lever operation effect is started, and the lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits white light. Also, at this time, the fourth lever sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 292 (52) to (56), 293 (57), and (58) are performed.
In this way, in variation performance example 18, no vibration performance is executed.

(Example of variation 19)
FIG. 301 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 19) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 301. The variable performance example 19 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
In addition, FIG. 301 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA5" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 285 (1) to (8), Fig. 286 (1) to (8), Fig. 287 (9) to (16), Fig. 288 (17) to (24), Fig. 289 (25) to (32), Fig. 290 (33) to (40), and Fig. 291 (41) to (43) are performed. Next, as shown in Fig. 301 (1), the lever operation effect starts, and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Make it!", which encourages the operation of the effect lever 163. At this time, a lever effect image 557 is displayed around the lever operation image 502. At this time, the effect lever 163 is illuminated in red, and a third lever sound is output. The operation effective period of this lever operation effect is the third period.

When the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 301 (2), "343", which is three rows of decorative patterns 41, is displayed in the 15th visual mode and temporarily stops. At this time, the 6th stop sound is output. Also, when the 6th stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 301(3), a revival prompt image 520 is displayed. The revival prompt image 520 displays the text "Revival Challenge!" At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult to see or cannot be seen. At this time, a revival challenge sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 301(4), the revival teasing image 520 is hidden and the stage image 61 is redisplayed. Also, the highly decorative reach-eye decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and performs the first temporary stop motion. Also, the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" moves from the top to the bottom.
Next, as shown in FIG. 301(5), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode and performs the first temporary stop motion. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect of the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 stopping is not output, and it is silent.

Next, as shown in Figure 301 (6), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" moves upward again and passes by, and then the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" moves from the bottom to the top.
Next, as shown in FIG. 301 (7), the revival image 558 is displayed, and the three rows of low-decorative decorative symbols 41, "333," are temporarily stopped. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect lever 163 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a first revival sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the revival image 558 is displayed, is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 301 (8), the role effect is executed, and the left movable role 115A, the center movable role 115B, and the right movable role 115C move to positions where they overlap the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role fifth effect image 539 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and the rainbow light emission of the effect lever 163 continues. At this time, the first big win notification sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win, is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 291 (47) and (48), Figures 292 (49) to (56), and Figures 293 (57) and (58) are performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, there is a first stop effect (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 253(15)) that outputs a specific sound (stop sound) different from a predetermined sound (variable BGM) when a specific row of symbols (for example, the middle row decorative symbol 41) stops in a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode), and a second stop effect (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 301(5)) that does not output a specific sound when a specific row of symbols stops in a specific display mode. In addition, the specific sound includes a first specific sound (for example, the first stop sound (see FIG. 253(15))) and a second specific sound (for example, the eighth stop sound (see FIG. 292(50))) that is output when the decorative symbol 41 stops in a specific sequence (double number). Furthermore, in one variable performance, the second specific sound is more likely to be output when the second stop performance is executed (for example, when variable performance example 19 (see Figure 301) is performed) than when the first stop performance is executed (for example, when variable performance example 1 (see Figures 252 to 254) is performed).
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the second stop presentation is executed, when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, a specific sound is not output, but the second specific sound is likely to be output. This, combined with the unexpectedness of the specific sound being output, can increase the player's level of excitement when a special game is executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in one variable performance, the fact that the second specific sound is more likely to be output when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that the second specific sound is never output when the first stop performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the second specific sound is always output when the second stop performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, if, in one variable performance, the output of the second specific sound is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, the second specific sound may be output when the first stop performance is executed, and the second specific sound may not be output when the second stop performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the second specific variation effect (miss variation effect in which the SP reach effect is performed) is executed, a specific sound (stop sound) is not output when the specific row of symbols (middle row decorative symbol 41) stops after the revival teasing image 520 (see FIG. 277 (37)) is displayed (see FIG. 278 (42), (43)). On the other hand, when the revival effect is executed (see FIG. 301 (7)), a specific sound (eighth stop sound, etc. (see FIG. 292 (50))) can be output when the specific row of symbols stops, even after the revival teasing image 520 is displayed. Therefore, combined with the unexpectedness of the specific sound being output, the degree of excitement of the player when the special game is executed can be increased.

Also, in this embodiment, a big win game is more likely to be played when a variable presentation in which a stop sound is not output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (see FIG. 253 (15)) is executed than when a variable presentation in which a stop sound is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) (see FIG. 253 (15)). Therefore, even if a stop sound is not output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode, the player can be made to expect that a big win game will be played.
In addition, the fact that a jackpot game is more likely to be executed when a variable presentation in which a stopping sound is not output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is executed than when a variable presentation in which a stopping sound is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode also includes the fact that a jackpot game will not be executed (0%) when a variable presentation in which a stopping sound is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is executed.
In addition, if a jackpot game is easier to execute when a variable presentation in which a stopping sound is not output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is executed than when a variable presentation in which a stopping sound is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is executed, a jackpot game may be executed when a variable presentation in which a stopping sound is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is executed.

(Variation of variation example 11)
302 to 307 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, a modified example of the variable performance example 11 (see Figs. 279 to 284) will be described with reference to Figs. 302 to 307. In this modified example, when the "7" that is the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops, a pseudo consecutive performance is executed. In addition, in this modified example, the expectation level is suggested depending on whether the stopping sound of the middle row decorative pattern 41 is output or not.
In the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 273 (1) to (5) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 302 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 302(2), a lever operation presentation starts, and lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation presentation is the first period.
Then, when the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 302 (3), the "7" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness performs the first temporary stop operation. At this time, the decorative patterns 41 on the left and right rows become invisible (difficult to see or impossible to see). Also, at this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 302(4), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 302(5), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, "213", which is a highly decorative three rows of decorative patterns 41, is displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x2", which indicates that the second change of the decorative pattern 41 will be performed. At this time, a first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 302 (6), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the re-changing notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and its display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 302 (7), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 302 (8), the left row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 303(9), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 303 (10), the right row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 303 (11), the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, and the first stop action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative symbol 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 303 (12), the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the first reach action is performed. At this time, the first reach line image 509 and the first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, the first reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 303 (13), the "7" in the middle row decorative pattern 41 moves from the top to the bottom. At this time, the "7" in the middle row decorative pattern 41 swings up and down, creating a pseudo consecutive fanning effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 303(14), the middle row decorative symbol 41 "7" performs the first temporary stop operation, and the pseudo consecutive performance starts. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (pseudo consecutive stop sound) of the middle row decorative symbol 41 "7" stopping is not output. And, in this modified example, it is suggested that the expectation is higher when the pseudo consecutive stop sound is not output than when the pseudo consecutive stop sound is output (see FIG. 302(3)).
Next, as shown in FIG. 303 (15), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 continue the first temporary stop motion. The execution time of this first temporary stop motion of the middle row decorative symbol 41 "7" is longer than the execution time of the temporary stop motion of the middle row decorative symbol 41 in a losing variable performance in which a reach performance is not performed, or the execution time of the temporary stop motion of the middle row decorative symbol 41 in a losing variable performance in which a normal reach performance is performed and a SP reach performance is not performed. In other words, the execution time of this first temporary stop motion of the middle row decorative symbol 41 "7" shown in FIG. 303 (15) is longer than the execution time of the temporary stop motion of the middle row decorative symbol 41 accompanied by the output of a stop sound.

Next, as shown in FIG. 303 (16), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "474", are displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x3" indicating that the decorative pattern 41 will change for the third time. At this time, a second re-change sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the decorative pattern 41 changes again, is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 304 (17), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the re-changing notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and its display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 304 (18), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Fig. 304 (19), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, the first step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 304 (20), the second step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a second step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 304 (21), the third step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, a third step sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 304 (22), the left row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 304 (23), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 304 (24), the right row decorative symbol 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode. At this time, the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 305 (25), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, and the first stop action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 305 (26), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the third reach action is performed. At this time, the second reach line image 531 and the second reach notification image 532 are displayed. Also, at this time, the third reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 305 (27), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode and the first temporary stop motion is performed. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to green. Also, at this time, the second variable sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 305 (28), the middle row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 305 (29), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 305 (30), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 305 (31), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 305 (32), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 306 (33), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 306 (34), the SP reach performance starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 306 (35), an effect is executed in which the "4" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye changes to a "3". At this time, the "3" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye performs a symbol changing action. Also, at this time, a change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the decorative symbols 41 of the reach eye. Also, at this time, a symbol changing sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 306 (36), the development teasing effect is started, and the development symbol 41 is displayed. At this time, the "4" which is the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 306 (37), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 306 (38), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 306 (39), the development symbol 41 stops and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is hidden. At this time, the development effect image 534 is displayed around the development symbol 41. At this time, a development stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 306 (40), the development performance is executed. At this time, the role performance is executed, and the middle movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 4 effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the 4th role sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 307 (41), the SPSP reach effect starts, and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourteenth visual recognition mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 307 (42), the lever operation effect starts, and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Pull!", which encourages the operation of the effect lever 163. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits white light. At this time, a second lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation effect is the second period.
When the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "343", are displayed in the fifteenth visual mode as shown in FIG. 307 (43). At this time, the sixth stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 307 (44), the highly decorative three-row decorative pattern 41 "343" performs the first temporary stop motion. At this time, the variable BGM is no longer output and is silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 307 (45), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "343", are fixed and stopped.

In this way, the execution condition of the pseudo consecutive performance may be not only the stopping of the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 but also the stopping of the predetermined middle row decorative symbols 41. In this case, the "7" which is the predetermined middle row decorative symbol 41 is also regarded as a special symbol.
In addition, if no sound effect (pseudo consecutive stop sound) is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is the trigger for the pseudo consecutive performance, stops at "7", various performances that have a high expectation of a jackpot game being executed may be performed thereafter.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display, on the image display unit 114, the identification information (such as the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52) corresponding to the judgment information (random number value) judged by the special symbol judgment unit 234 or the judgment information not yet executed. In addition, there is a first stop performance (for example, the performance shown in FIG. 253 (15)) that outputs a specific sound (stop sound) different from the predetermined sound (variable BGM) when a specific row of symbols (for example, the middle row decorative symbol 41) stops due to a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode), and a second stop performance (for example, the performance shown in FIG. 303 (14)) that does not output a specific sound when a specific row of symbols stops due to a specific display mode. Furthermore, in one variation performance, when the second stop performance is executed (for example, when a modified version of variation performance example 11 is executed) it is more likely that a variation performance (the performance shown in Figure 305 (27)) in which the display state of the identification information (variable image 51, pending image 52) is changed to a specific state (for example, green) is executed.
In this case, the player will be more likely to expect that the specific sound will not be output when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode than that the specific sound will be output when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode. Therefore, the player can be made to look forward to the innovative presentation of the presentation mode when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in one variation performance, the fact that a change performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that the change performance will not be executed when the first stop performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the change performance will be executed when the second stop performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, in one variation performance, if a change performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, the change performance may be executed when the first stop performance is executed, and the change performance may not be executed when the second stop performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in one variable performance, the second stage (e.g., the third stage (see Figure 304 (21))) of the variable performance (step performance) is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed (e.g., when a modified version of variable performance example 11 is executed) than when the first stop performance is executed (e.g., when variable performance example 1 is executed).
In this case, the player will be more likely to expect that the specific sound will not be output when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode than that the specific sound will be output when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode. Therefore, the player can be made to look forward to the innovative presentation of the presentation mode when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the second stage of the stage presentation may be any stage that can be executed after the first stage of the stage presentation.
In addition, in one variable performance, the fact that the second stage of the stage performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that the second stage of the stage performance is never executed (0%) when the first stop performance is executed, and the fact that the second stage of the stage performance is always executed (100%) when the second stop performance is executed.
Furthermore, if in one variable performance, the second stage of the staged performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, the second stage of the staged performance may be executed when the first stop performance is executed, or the second stage of the staged performance may not be executed when the second stop performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in one variation performance, when the second stop performance is executed (for example, when a modified example of variation performance example 11 is executed) than when the first stop performance is executed (for example, when variation performance example 1 is executed), a change performance (see Figures 305 (31), (32), and 306 (33)) that changes the display position of the temporarily stopped pattern in the image display unit 114 is more likely to be executed.
In this case, the player will be more likely to expect that the specific sound will not be output when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode than that the specific sound will be output when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode. Therefore, the player can be made to look forward to the innovative presentation of the presentation mode when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in one of the above-mentioned change performances, the fact that the change performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that the change performance will not be executed when the first stop performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the change performance will be executed when the second stop performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, in one of the above-mentioned change performances, if the change performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, the change performance may be executed when the first stop performance is executed, and the change performance may not be executed when the second stop performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in one variation performance, when the second stop performance is executed (for example, when a modified example of variation performance example 11 is executed) than when the first stop performance is executed (for example, when variation performance example 4 is executed), a change performance (see Figures 306 (34) and (35)) that changes the characters of the pattern displayed as a reach is more likely to be executed.
In this case, the player will be more likely to expect that the specific sound will not be output when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode than that the specific sound will be output when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode. Therefore, the player can be made to look forward to the innovative presentation of the presentation mode when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in one variation performance, the fact that a change performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that the change performance will not be executed when the first stop performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the change performance will be executed when the second stop performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, in one variation performance, if a change performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, the change performance may be executed when the first stop performance is executed, and the change performance may not be executed when the second stop performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lever operation presentation includes a first operation presentation (the lever operation presentation shown in FIG. 252 (5)) in which the operation effective period is a first period (e.g., 3 seconds), and a second operation presentation (for example, the lever operation presentation shown in FIG. 307 (42)) in which the operation effective period is a second period (e.g., 5 seconds) different from the first period. In one variation presentation, the second operation presentation is more likely to be executed when the second stop presentation is executed (for example, when a modified version of variation presentation example 11 is performed) than when the first stop presentation is executed (for example, when variation presentation example 1 is performed).
In this case, the player will be more likely to expect that the specific sound will not be output when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode than that the specific sound will be output when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode. Therefore, the player can be made to look forward to the innovative presentation of the presentation mode when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in one variable performance, the fact that the second operation performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that the second operation performance is never executed when the first stop performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the second operation performance is always executed when the second stop performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, if, in one variable performance, the second operation performance is easier to execute when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, the second operation performance may be executed when the first stop performance is executed, or the second operation performance may not be executed when the second stop performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the action presentation (game device presentation) that operates the presentation body (e.g., movable game device 115) includes a first action presentation (game device presentation of "CH2" (see FIG. 246) shown in FIG. 259 (5)) and a second action presentation (game device presentation of "CH4" shown in FIG. 306 (40)) that has a higher expectation of a special game (jackpot game) being executed than the first action presentation. In one variable presentation, the second action presentation is more likely to be executed when the second stop presentation is executed (e.g., when a modified example of variable presentation example 11 is executed) than when the first stop presentation is executed (e.g., when variable presentation example 4 is executed).
In this case, the player will be more likely to expect that the specific sound will not be output when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode than that the specific sound will be output when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode. Therefore, the player can be made to look forward to the innovative presentation of the presentation mode when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in one variable performance, the fact that the second action performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that the second action performance is never executed when the first stop performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the second action performance is always executed when the second stop performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, if in one variable performance, the second action performance is more easily executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, the second action performance may be executed when the first stop performance is executed, or the second action performance may not be executed when the second stop performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the emphasis effects that emphasize the reach effect include a first emphasis effect (first reach line image 509, first reach notification image 510 (see Figure 260 (14))) and a second emphasis effect (second reach line image 531, second reach notification image 532 (see Figure 305 (26))) that has a higher expectation of a special game being executed than the first emphasis effect. In one variable effect, the second emphasis effect is more likely to be executed when the second stop effect is executed (for example, when a modified example of variable effect example 11 is executed) than when the first stop effect is executed (for example, when variable effect example 4 is executed).
In this case, the player will be more likely to expect that the specific sound will not be output when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode than that the specific sound will be output when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode. Therefore, the player can be made to look forward to the innovative presentation of the presentation mode when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in one variable performance, the fact that the second emphasis performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that the second emphasis performance is never executed (0%) when the first stop performance is executed, and the fact that the second emphasis performance is always executed (100%) when the second stop performance is executed.
Furthermore, if in one variable performance, the second emphasis performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, the second emphasis performance may be executed when the first stop performance is executed, or the second emphasis performance may not be executed when the second stop performance is executed.

In this embodiment, the emphasis effect (e.g., an effect that activates decorative pattern 41) that emphasizes the displayed pattern when a reach effect is started includes a first emphasis effect (see FIG. 260 (14)) and a second emphasis effect (see FIG. 305 (26)) that has a different emphasis pattern mode from the first emphasis effect. In one variable effect, the second emphasis effect is more likely to be executed when the second stop effect is executed (e.g., when a modified version of variable effect example 11 is executed) than when the first stop effect is executed (e.g., when variable effect example 4 is executed).
In this case, the player will be more likely to expect that the specific sound will not be output when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode than that the specific sound will be output when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode. Therefore, the player can be made to look forward to the innovative presentation of the presentation mode when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in one variable performance, the fact that the second emphasis performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that the second emphasis performance is never executed (0%) when the first stop performance is executed, and the fact that the second emphasis performance is always executed (100%) when the second stop performance is executed.
Furthermore, if in one variable performance, the second emphasis performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, the second emphasis performance may be executed when the first stop performance is executed, or the second emphasis performance may not be executed when the second stop performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance (e.g., a pseudo consecutive performance) and a prompting performance that prompts the execution of the specific performance (e.g., a pseudo consecutive prompting performance). In one variable performance, the specific performance is more likely to be executed after the prompting performance is executed when the second stop performance is executed (e.g., when a modified example of the variable performance example 11 is executed) than when the first stop performance is executed (e.g., when the variable performance example 4 is executed).
In this case, the player will be more likely to expect that the specific sound will not be output when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode than that the specific sound will be output when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode. Therefore, the player can be made to look forward to the innovative presentation of the presentation mode when the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode, which can increase the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, the specific performance is a pseudo consecutive performance, and the teasing performance is a pseudo consecutive teasing performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. In a modified example of variable performance example 11, the reach teasing performance may be executed before the start of the reach performance. Furthermore, the reach performance may be more easily executed when a variable performance in which a second stop performance and a reach teasing performance are executed (for example, a modified example of variable performance example 11) is executed than when a variable performance in which a first stop performance and a reach teasing performance are executed. In other words, the specific performance may be a reach performance, and the teasing performance may be a reach teasing performance.

In addition, in one variable performance, the fact that a specific performance is more likely to be executed after a teasing performance when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that when the first stop performance is executed, a specific performance is never executed after a teasing performance is executed (0%), and the fact that when the second stop performance is executed, a specific performance is always executed after a teasing performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, if in one variable performance, it is easier for a specific performance to be executed after a teasing performance when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, then the specific performance may be executed after the teasing performance when the first stop performance is executed, and the specific performance may not be executed after the teasing performance when the second stop performance is executed.

In addition, in the variation performance example 5 (see Fig. 262 to Fig. 265), the pseudo consecutive performance may be executed by stopping the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" instead of the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 (see Fig. 263 (13)). In this case, in the variation performance example 5, when the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" stops, a sound effect (pseudo consecutive stop sound) may be output.
Also, in the variable performance example 13 (see Figs. 286 to 293), the pseudo consecutive performance may be executed by stopping the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" instead of the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 (see Figs. 287 (9) and 287 (16)). In this case, in the variable performance example 13, when the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" stops, the sound effect (pseudo consecutive stop sound) may not be output.

(Variation of variation example 10)
Next, a modified example of variation presentation example 10 will be described.
First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 273(1) to (8) and Fig. 274(9) to (14) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 308(1), a zone execution image 530 is displayed. At this time, the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth visual recognition mode and performs the first variable action.
Next, as shown in Fig. 308 (2), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the 14th stop sound, which is the sound effect of the decorative pattern 41 stopping, is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 308 (3), the right row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 308 (4), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, and the first stop action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the 14th stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 308 (5), the reach-ey decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the eighth visual confirmation mode, and the fifth reach action, which is the action of the decorative pattern 41 when the reach is established (when the reach performance starts), is performed. When the fifth reach action is being performed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed as if raising the left hand. At this time, the first reach line image 509 and the first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, the first reach sound is output.
In this way, different reach actions may be executed for each number of the decorative pattern 41. In other words, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes each of the multiple decorative patterns 41 (1 to 9), and can make the emphasis mode of the emphasis performance different between the first pattern (e.g., 4) and the second pattern (e.g., 3).
In this embodiment, as a variable performance, a variable performance shown as a modified example of variable performance example 10 may be provided instead of variable performance example 10, or a variable performance shown as a modified example of variable performance example 10 may be provided together with variable performance example 10.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a sound effect (pseudo consecutive stop sound) is not output when the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is the trigger for the pseudo consecutive performance, stops at "7", various performances that have a high expectation of a jackpot game being executed are then performed.
Here, when various effects that have a high expectation of a jackpot game are executed, it can be understood that the more likely a revival stimulation effect is executed, the more likely it is that an effect in which no sound effect (stopping sound) is output when the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 stops (see Figure 278 (42)) is executed.

(Example of variation 20)
Next, referring to Fig. 309 to Fig. 311, a variable presentation (variable presentation example 20) performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like will be specifically described. The variable presentation example 20 is a variable presentation example based on a game ball winning in the first start hole 121 in a normal game state. The variable presentation example 20 is a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach presentation is not executed, and is a variable presentation based on the number of reserved balls for winning in the first start hole 121 being "1".
In addition, the change presentation shown in Figures 309 to 311 is the change presentation executed when "ER1" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in Figure 246.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.
In addition, each of the change performance examples from change performance example 20 to change performance example 38 described later is a change performance example when the change starts in the second stage.

As shown in FIG. 309(1), the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114 as the previous special pattern is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300. At this time, one reserved image 52, reserved number display 55, small pattern 56, and stage image 61 are displayed in the image display unit 114. In addition, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the second stage (second performance mode). The second stage is a performance mode in the normal game state. At this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first start port 121 indicates "1", which is the reserved number for winning the first start port 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 indicates "0", which is the reserved number for winning the second start port 122. The three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the first visual mode.
In addition, in the second stage, a highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a decorative manner different from the decorative manner in the first stage (see Figure 252 (1)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 309 (2), the change performance starts with the start of the change display of the special pattern. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the change image 51. Also, at this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second viewing mode, and perform the fifth start operation, which is the operation when starting the change. When the fifth start operation is being executed, the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed as moving to the right, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed as rotating clockwise, and the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed as moving to the left. Also, at this time, the fifth start effect image 559 is displayed on the side to which the three rows of decorative patterns 41 move. Also, the change of the small pattern 56 starts. Also, in the second stage, the change BGM continues to be output from the start to the end of the change performance, but this change BGM is a different song from the change BGM in the first stage.

Next, as shown in Fig. 309 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode, and perform a fourth variation operation, which is an operation when the patterns are varying. When the fourth variation operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed along a fourth variation path (see Fig. 251-1 (4)). More specifically, when the fourth variation operation is being performed, the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed as moving from the center of the image display unit 114 to the left in the left-right direction, the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed as moving from the center of the image display unit 114 to the right in the left-right direction, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed as rotating in the center of the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 309 (4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual appearance and perform a fourth varying operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 309(5), a lever operation effect is executed, and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The effective operation period of this lever operation effect is the first period. At this time, the first lever sound is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode.
If the lever 163 is not operated during the effective operation period of the lever operation performance, the lever operation image 502 is hidden as shown in FIG. 309(6). No sound (non-display sound) is output in response to the lever operation image 502 being hidden. The three rows of decorative patterns 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 309 (7), the left row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the fourth variable action.
Next, as shown in Figure 309 (8), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the fourth variable action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 310(9), the left-row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode, and performs the fifth stop action, which is the action when the variation stops. When the fifth stop action is being performed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed as if it is being held down by sudden braking. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed on the left side of the left-row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound, which is the sound effect of the decorative pattern 41 stopping, is output from the speaker 156.
Next, as shown in Fig. 310 (10), the right-row decorative symbol 41, "1", is displayed in the fifth visual state and performs the fourth variable action. At this time, the visual state of the left-row decorative symbol 41 becomes the seventh visual state and performs the first temporary stop action.
Next, as shown in Figure 310 (11), the right row decorative pattern 41 "1" passes, and the right row decorative pattern 41 "2" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the fourth variable action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 310 (12), the right-row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stop motion. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed on the right side of the right-row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 310(13), the "9" in the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the fourth variable motion. At this time, the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion.
Next, as shown in Figure 310 (14), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "9" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "1" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the fourth variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 310 (15), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the fifth stop operation. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed on the right side of the middle row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output. That is, the same sound effect is output when the left row decorative pattern 41 stops, when the right row decorative pattern 41 stops, and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops.
Next, as shown in Figure 310 (16), the visual appearance of the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes the seventh visual appearance, so that all three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual appearance and the first temporary stop operation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 311 (17), with the special symbol being displayed as a stopped symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41, "412", are fixed and stopped (displayed in the first viewing mode). With the special symbol stopping its variable motion, small symbol 56, "412", is fixed and stopped. With the variable performance ending, variable image 51 is erased (displayed).

Figure 312 is a diagram showing another presentation example in variable presentation example 20.
In the variation performance example 20, a performance example in which the performance lever 163 is not operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation performance is described. In the following, a performance example in which the performance lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation performance is described.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 309(1) to (4) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 312(1), a lever operation effect is executed and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first lever sound is also output.
When the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, a first image at operation 504 is displayed as shown in Fig. 312 (2). This first image at operation 504 is displayed in a display mode different from the first image at operation 504 in the first stage (see Fig. 255 (2)). At this time, a third operation sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the effect lever 163 has been operated, is output from the speaker 156.

312(3), the first operation image 504 is turned off, and the three rows of decorative symbols 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 309 (7) and (8), Figures 310 (9) to (16), and Figure 311 (17) are performed.

(Example of variation 21)
Figure 313 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 21) of the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. 313. The variable performance example 21 is a variable performance example based on the game ball winning in the first start hole 121 in the normal game state. The variable performance example 21 is a variable performance executed when "ER5" is selected as the "variable performance" in FIG. 246. The variable performance example 21 is a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed, and is a variable performance based on the number of reserved balls for winning in the first start hole 121 being "1". In the following description, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly described, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 309 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 313 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and a fourth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 313(2), a zone teasing effect is executed, and a zone teasing image 505 is displayed. At this time, the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth viewing mode and then in the sixth viewing mode, but the display of the left row decorative pattern 41 in the fifth viewing mode and the display in the sixth viewing mode are hidden by the zone teasing image 505, making it difficult or impossible to see. Also, when the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth viewing mode, the 15th stop sound is not output.

In the variation performance example 21, the zone performance is not performed after the zone promotion performance is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 313 (3), the zone promotion image 505 is not displayed. Also, at this time, the left column decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and is performing the first temporary stop operation.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 310 (10) to (16) and Figure 311 (17) are performed.
In addition, when the zone teasing image 505 is displayed in the zone teasing performance, the left row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the seventh viewing mode without being displayed in the fifth viewing mode or the sixth viewing mode, and when the zone teasing image 505 becomes hidden, the left row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the seventh viewing mode.

(Example of variation 22)
Figure 314 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 22) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 314. The variable performance example 22 is a variable performance example of the decorative pattern 41 based on the game ball winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state. The variable performance example 22 is a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed, and is a variable performance based on the number of reserved balls for winning the first start hole 121 being "4".
In addition, FIG. 314 is a variation performance that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 314(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the determination of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 in the image display unit 114. In addition, four reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "4".
Next, as shown in FIG. 314(2), the variation effect starts with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and a sixth start operation, which is the operation when the variation starts, is performed. When the sixth start operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a manner that makes them sway up and down. At this time, a sixth start effect image 561 is also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 314 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a third visual appearance and perform a fourth varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 314 (4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual appearance and perform a fourth varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 314(5), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the fourth variation operation. The movement speed of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 at this time is faster than the movement speed of the decorative symbols 41 displayed in the fifth visual mode in the variation performance example 20 and the variation performance example 21.

Next, as shown in FIG. 314 (6), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the sixth viewing mode, and a sixth stopping action is performed, which is the action taken when the fluctuation stops. When the sixth stopping action is being performed, the decorative patterns 41 are displayed as if they are swinging in the direction in which they were moving in the fourth fluctuation action. Also, at this time, the ninth effect image 562 is displayed at the time of stopping. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stopping sound is output from the speaker 156. That is, the same sound effect is output when the decorative patterns 41 stop in fluctuation performance example 20 and fluctuation performance example 21, and when the decorative patterns 41 stop in fluctuation performance example 21.

Next, as shown in FIG. 314 (7), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 314(8).

(Variation of variation example 22)
Next, a modified example of the variable performance example 22 will be explained.
It has been explained that the sound effect output when the decorative pattern 41 stops is the same (both are the 15th stop sound) in the variable performance (variable performance example 20, variable performance example 21) in which the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121 is "1" and a reach performance is not executed, and the variable performance (variable performance example 22) in which the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121 is "4" and a reach performance is not executed, but this is not limited to the above.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 314 (1) to (4) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 315 (1), the three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the fourth variable operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 315(2), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the sixth stop operation. At this time, the ninth effect image 562 is displayed on the left side of the left row decorative symbol 41 and on the right side of each of the right row decorative symbol 41 and the middle row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the sixteenth stop sound, which is the sound effect of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 stopping, is output from the speaker 156. That is, a different sound effect is output from when the decorative symbol 41 stops in the variation performance example 20 and the variation performance example 21.

Next, as shown in FIG. 315 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 315(4).

In addition, in the variable performance of this embodiment, the variable performance shown in the modified example of variable performance example 22 may be provided instead of the variable performance shown in variable performance example 22, or the variable performance shown in the modified example of variable performance example 22 may be provided together with the variable performance shown in variable performance example 22.

(Example of variation 23)
Figures 316 to 318 are figures showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 23) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 316 to 318. The variable performance example 23 is a variable performance example in which a reach performance is executed based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state.
In addition, the variable performance example 23 is a variable performance that is executed when "ER6" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 246.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 316 (1), the performance control unit 300 stops the display of the previous special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 "213" are fixed. In addition, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121. In addition, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first viewing mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 316 (2), the display of the special symbols begins, and the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second viewing mode, and the fifth start operation is performed. At this time, the fifth start effect image 559 is also displayed. The small symbols 56 begin to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 316 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a third visual appearance and perform a fourth varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 316(4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 316 (5), the reel performance is executed, and the middle movable reel 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the upper part of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel sixth effect image 563 is displayed. Also, at this time, the fifth reel sound, which is the sound effect of the reel performance, is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in Fig. 316(6), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, a step 1 sound, which is a sound effect of the first step performance, is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 316 (7), the second stage step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, the step 2 sound, which is the sound effect of the second stage step performance, is output.
The step image 508 displayed in the second stage has a different display mode from the step image 508 displayed in the first stage (see Figures 259 (6), (7), etc.).

Next, as shown in FIG. 316 (8), the left row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 317 (9), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 317 (10), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stop motion. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the left of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 317 (11), the right row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 317 (12), the right row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the right row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 317 (13), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stopping action, starting the reach effect. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbol 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 317 (14), the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the eighth visual mode, and a sixth reach action is performed, which is the action of the decorative symbols 41 when a reach is achieved (when the reach performance starts). When the sixth reach action is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed as if they are raising their right hand. At this time, a first reach line image 509 and a first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, a first reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 317 (15), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 317 (16), a pseudo consecutive fanning performance is executed, and the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 is displayed to move downward. This pseudo consecutive pattern 41 passes through the middle first moving path CR1 (see Fig. 251-1 (1)). However, in the second stage, the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 may pass through the middle fourth moving path CR4 (see Fig. 251-1 (4)).
Next, as shown in Fig. 318 (17), the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 is displayed so as to swing up and down in the center of the image display unit 114. At this time, a pseudo consecutive fanning effect image 512 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive pattern 41.

In the variation performance example 23, the pseudo consecutive performance is not performed after the pseudo consecutive fanning performance is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 318 (18), after the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 passes, the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual recognition mode and performs the fourth variation operation. This middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a larger size than the decorative patterns 41 of the left and right rows.
Next, as shown in FIG. 318 (19), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the fifth stop operation. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed on the right side of the middle row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output. At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size so as to be the same display size as the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows.

Next, as shown in FIG. 318 (20), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 318 (21).

(Example of variation 24)
Figures 319 to 321 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 24) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 319 to 321. The variable performance example 24 is an example of a variable performance based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state, in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach performance is executed.
The variation performance shown in Figures 319 to 321 is a variation performance that is executed when "ER7" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 246. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 309 (1) to (3) is executed, and then, as shown in Figure 319 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and a fourth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 319(2), the reel performance is executed, and the left movable reel 115A moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel seventh effect image 564 is displayed around the left movable reel 115A. Also, at this time, the sixth reel sound, which is the sound effect of the reel performance, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 319(3), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 is displayed moving downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 319(4), the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 is displayed so as to swing up and down in the center of the image display unit 114. At this time, the pseudo consecutive fanning effect image 512 is displayed. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed (difficult to see or not visible).

Next, as shown in FIG. 319(5), the pseudo consecutive symbol 41 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive symbol 41. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound, which is a sound effect when the pseudo consecutive symbol 41 stops, is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 319(6), the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 319 (7), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "434", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is being performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x2", indicating that the decorative patterns 41 will change for the second time. At this time, the first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 319 (8), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode, and a fourth variation operation is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size, and the display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 320 (9), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 320 (10), the left row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the fourth variable action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 320(11), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stop motion. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the left of the left row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 320 (12), the right row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 320 (13), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual confirmation mode, and the fifth stopping action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 320 (14), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the sixth reach action is performed. At this time, the first reach line image 509 and the first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, the first reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 320 (15), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and the first temporary stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 320 (16), the middle row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 321 (17), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 321 (18), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 321 (19), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual confirmation mode and performs the fifth stopping operation. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed on the right side of the middle row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stopping sound is output. That is, the same sound effect (stopping sound) is output when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops.
Next, as shown in Fig. 321 (20), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the display size of the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in such a manner that it is reduced to the same display size as the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 321 (21).

(Example of variation 25)
Figures 322 to 324 are figures showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 25) of the variable performance of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to Fig. 322 to Fig. 324. The variable performance example 25 is an example of a variable performance based on a winning entry to the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state, in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the SP reach performance is executed.
In addition, the change presentation shown in Figures 322 to 324 is executed when "ER8" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in Figure 246.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 319 (1) to (8) and Figures 320 (9) to (16) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 322 (1), the middle row decorative pattern 41, "4," is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode, and the fourth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 322(2), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode (see FIG. 250-2(14)).
Next, as shown in FIG. 322 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 322(4), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode (see FIG. 250-2(15)). At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed in place of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 322(5), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode (see FIG. 250-2(16)) and a second provisional stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 322(6), the SP reach performance starts, and an SP reach image 517 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 322 (7), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Fig. 250-3 (17)), and performs a second varying operation, which is the operation performed when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is varying. When the second varying operation is being performed in the second stage, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed moving from the upper right corner to the lower left corner of the image display unit 114 along the second varying path (see Fig. 251-1 (2)).
Next, as shown in FIG. 322 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode (see FIG. 250-3 (18)).

Next, as shown in Fig. 323(9), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Fig. 250-3(19)). At this time, the SP promotion first effect image 518 is displayed on the upper right and lower left sides of the middle row decorative pattern 41 on the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 323 (10), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 323 (11), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the SP promotion second effect image 519 is displayed on the upper right side and the lower left side of the middle row decorative pattern 41 on the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in Fig. 323 (12), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fourth mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Fig. 250-3 (20)). In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in such a way that it returns to the upper right side of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in FIG. 323 (13), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth mode of the twelfth visual mode (see FIG. 250-3 (21)), and the first temporary stopping operation is performed. At this time, the third stopping sound is output. That is, different sound effects (stopping sounds) are output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops. Also, when the third stopping sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 323 (14), the revival prompting effect starts, and the revival prompting image 520 is displayed. The revival prompting image 520 displays the text "Revival Challenge!" At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult to see or cannot be seen. At this time, a revival challenge sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 323 (15), the less decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed again and is displayed in a manner that causes it to sway up and down.
Next, as shown in Figure 323 (16), the middle row decorative pattern 41 moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 323 (17), a revival prompting image 520 is displayed. The revival prompting image 520 displays the text "revival failed...". At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are difficult to see or cannot be seen. Also, at this time, a revival failure sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 323 (18), the revival teasing image 520 is hidden and the stage image 61 is displayed again. At this time, the highly decorative reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Also, the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" moves from the top to the bottom. Also, as described above, the variable BGM is not output at this time, so it becomes silent.

Next, as shown in FIG. 324 (19), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) of the middle row decorative pattern 41 stopping is not output. In addition, the silent state continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 323 (20), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "454", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 26)
Figures 325 and 326 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 26) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 325 and Fig. 326. The variable performance example 26 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SP reach performance is executed.
It should be noted that the change presentation shown in Figures 325 and 326 is executed when "ER9" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in Figure 246.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 319(1) to (8), Fig. 320(9) to (16), and Fig. 322(1) to (5) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 325(1), the SP reach effect starts and the SP reach image 517 is displayed. At this time, the reach eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the 11th visual mode and performs the second temporary stop operation, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 is not displayed (difficult to see or not visible).
Next, as shown in FIG. 325(2), the development teasing performance is started, and the development pattern 41 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see FIG. 250-3(23)), and the third variation operation is performed. When the third variation operation is performed, the middle row decorative pattern 41 different from the development pattern 41 is displayed in such a manner as to replace the display position of the development pattern 41 along the third variation path (see FIG. 251-1(3)). In the illustrated example, the "5" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a layer behind the development pattern 41 in the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in Fig. 325(3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see Fig. 250-3(24)). At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a layer in front of the development pattern 41 in the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 325(4), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see FIG. 250-4(25)).
Next, as shown in Fig. 325(5), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode (see Fig. 250-4(26)). At this time, the development symbol 41 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 325(6), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see FIG. 250-4(27)), and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the fourth stop sound is output. Also, when the fourth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 325(7), the revival prompting effect starts, and the revival prompting image 520 is displayed. The revival prompting image 520 displays the text "Revival Challenge!" At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. At this time, a revival challenge sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 325 (8), the less decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed again and is displayed in a manner that causes it to sway up and down.
Next, as shown in Figure 326 (9), the middle row decorative pattern 41 moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 326 (10), a revival prompting image 520 is displayed. The revival prompting image 520 displays the text "revival failed...". At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are difficult to see or cannot be seen. Also, at this time, a revival failure sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 326 (11), the revival teasing image 520 is hidden and the stage image 61 is displayed again. At this time, the highly decorative reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Also, the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" moves from the top to the bottom. Also, as described above, the variable BGM is not output at this time, so it becomes silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 326 (12), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) of the middle row decorative pattern 41 stopping is not output. In addition, the silent state continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 326 (13), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely, "454", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 27)
Figure 327 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 27) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 327. The variable performance example 27 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed.
The change presentation shown in FIG. 327 is executed when "ER4" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in FIG. 246.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 309 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 327 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and a fourth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 327(2), the reach teasing performance is started, and the left and right decorative symbols 41 "7" are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode (see Fig. 250-2(9)) and perform the fourth varying motion. In the second stage, the left and right decorative symbols 41 displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode are displayed as if they are swaying left and right. At this time, the reach teasing fourth effect image 565 is also displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 327(3), the left and right decorative symbols 41, "7", are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode (see Fig. 250-2(10)). At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed further outboard in the left-right direction of the image 511 than in the first mode of the ninth visual mode (see Fig. 327(2)). At this time, the fourth reach teasing effect image 565 is also displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 327(4), the right row decorative pattern 41 and the middle row decorative pattern 41 are displayed in the third mode of the ninth visual mode (see Fig. 250-2(11)) and perform the fourth varying action. At this time, the left row decorative pattern 41 performs the first temporary stopping action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 327(5), the right-row decorative pattern 41 and the middle-row decorative pattern 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the fifth stop operation. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed on the right side of each of the right-row decorative pattern 41 and the middle-row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 327 (6), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 327(7), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "718", are fixed and stopped.

In addition, in variable performance example 27, after the performance shown in FIG. 327(4) is executed, the performance shown in FIG. 327(6) may be executed without executing the performance shown in FIG. 327(5). In other words, if the reach performance is not executed after the reach teasing performance is executed, the display of the decorative pattern 41 in the sixth visual mode and the output of the 15th stop sound may not be performed.

(Example of variation 28)
Figure 328 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 28) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 328. The variable performance example 28 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SP reach performance is executed.
It should be noted that this is a variable performance that is executed when "ER10" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in the variable performance diagram 246 shown in FIG. 328.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 309 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 328 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and a fourth variable operation is performed.
328(2), the reach-inducing performance is started, and the left and right decorative symbols 41 of "4" are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the reach-inducing fourth effect image 565 is displayed on the left and right sides of each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.

328(3), the left and right decorative symbols 41 of "4" are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual recognition mode. At this time, a fourth reach-inducing effect image 565 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 328(4), the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode (see FIG. 250-2(12)), and a seventh stopping motion, which is the motion when the fluctuation stops, is performed. When the seventh stopping motion is being performed, the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in an action such that they expand while swinging left and right, respectively. The seventh stopping motion can also be regarded as a seventh reach motion, which is the motion of the decorative patterns 41 when a reach is established (when the reach performance starts). At this time, a tenth effect image 566 at the time of stopping is also displayed. At this time, a fifth reach sound, which is the sound effect when a reach is established, is output. The fifth reach sound can also be regarded as a seventeenth stopping sound, which is the sound effect when the decorative patterns 41 have stopped.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 322 (1) to (8), Figures 323 (9) to (16), and Figure 324 (17) are performed.

(Example of variation 29)
Figures 329 to 334 are figures showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 29) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 329 to Fig. 334. The variable performance example 29 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SPSP reach performance is executed.
329 to 334 are the variation performances executed when "ER11" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 329(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the determination of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue. The display mode of blue of this reserved image 52 may be the display mode at the start of display, or may be a result of a change in the display mode in the variation performance executed while this reserved image 52 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 329(2), with the start of the change display of the next special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and a seventh start operation, which is an operation when the change starts, is performed. When the seventh start operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an action such that they move upward. At this time, a seventh effect image 567 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 at the start. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the change image 51, and the change image 51 is displayed in blue. At this time, a second start sound, which is an effect sound of the start of the change, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 329 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a third visual appearance and a fourth variable action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 329(4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 329(5), the reel performance is executed, and the right movable reel 115C moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel 8 effect image 568 is displayed around the right movable reel 115C on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the 7th reel sound, which is the sound effect of the reel performance, is output. At this time, the display of the 3 rows of decorative patterns 41 in the 4th visual recognition mode continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 329(6), the role production ends and the role eighth effect image 568 is hidden. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.

Next, as shown in Fig. 329(7), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, a step 1 sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 329(8), the second step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, step 2 sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 330(9), the third stage step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, the step 3 sound, which is the sound effect of the third stage step performance, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 330(10), the step image 508 is turned off. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 330 (11), the lever operation presentation starts, and lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation presentation is the first period.
When the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, a third operation image 569 is displayed as shown in Fig. 330 (12). At this time, a fourth operation sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the effect lever 163 has been operated, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 330 (13), the zone promotion effect is started and a zone promotion image 505 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 330 (14), the zone presentation is started, and a zone notification image 528 is displayed. At this time, a zone effect image 529 is displayed around the zone notification image 528. Also, at this time, a zone start sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the zone presentation has started.
Next, as shown in Fig. 330 (15), a zone execution image 530 is displayed. At this time, the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual recognition mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 330 (16), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the fifth stopping operation. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the left of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stopping sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 331 (17), the right row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 331 (18), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode, and the fifth stop action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 331 (19), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and an eighth reach action, which is the action of the decorative symbol 41 when the reach is established (when the reach performance starts), is performed. When the eighth reach action is being performed, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed as if both hands are raised. In addition, the eighth reach action has a higher expectation than the sixth reach action. At this time, a second reach line image 531 and a second reach notification image 532 are displayed. In addition, at this time, a third reach sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the reach has been established, is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 331 (20), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop motion is performed. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. Also, at this time, the first variable sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 331 (21), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 331 (22), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 331 (23), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 331 (24), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 332 (25), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 332 (26), the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stopping action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 332 (27), the SP reach performance starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 332 (28), an effect is executed in which the "4" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye changes to a "3". At this time, the "3" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye performs a symbol change action. Also, at this time, a change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the decorative symbols 41 of the reach eye. Also, at this time, a symbol change sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 332 (29), the development teasing effect is started, and the development symbol 41 is displayed. At this time, the "4" which is the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 332 (30), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 332 (31), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 332 (32), the development symbol 41 stops and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is hidden. At this time, the development effect image 534 is displayed around the development symbol 41. At this time, a development stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 333 (33), the development performance is executed. At this time, the role performance is executed, and the center movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the center movable role 115B has moved to a position lower than the position shown in FIG. 316 (5). At this time, the role fourth effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the fourth role sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 333 (34), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 14th visual confirmation mode (see Fig. 250-4 (29)). At this time, the SPSP reach effect is started, and the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 333 (35), the lever operation effect starts, and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Pull!", which encourages the operation of the effect lever 163. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits white light. At this time, a second lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation effect is the second period.
Then, when the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 333 (36), three rows of decorative patterns 41, "343", are displayed in the fifteenth visual mode (see FIG. 250-4 (30)). At this time, the sixth stop sound is output. Also, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 333 (37), the revival teaser performance starts, and the revival teaser image 520 is displayed. The revival teaser image 520 displays the text "Revival Challenge!" At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. Also, at this time, a revival challenge sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 333 (38), the less decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed and moves in an up and down motion.
Next, as shown in Figure 333 (39), the middle row decorative pattern 41 moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 333 (40), a revival prompting image 520 is displayed. The revival prompting image 520 displays the text "revival failed...". At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are difficult to see or cannot be seen. Also, at this time, a revival failure sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 334 (41), the revival teasing image 520 is hidden and the stage image 61 is displayed again. At this time, the highly decorative reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Also, the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" moves from the top to the bottom. Also, as described above, the variable BGM is not output, so it becomes silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 334 (42), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) of the middle row decorative pattern 41 stopping is not output, and the silent state continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 334 (43), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "343", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 30)
Figures 335 to 340 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 30) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 335 to 340. The variable performance example 30 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SPSP reach performance is executed.
The variation performance shown in Figures 335 to 340 is a variation performance that is executed when "ER12" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 246. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 329 (1) to (5) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 335 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and a fourth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 335 (2), the lever operation presentation starts, and lever operation image 502 is displayed. The effective operation period of this lever operation presentation is the first period. At this time, a first lever sound is output.
When the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 stop as shown in FIG. 335 (3). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive symbols 41. Also, at this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output. At this time, the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows become invisible (difficult to see or impossible to see).

Next, as shown in FIG. 335(4), the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 335(5), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x2", which indicates that the second change of the decorative patterns 41 will be performed. At this time, a first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 335 (6), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode and perform the fourth variation action. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and the display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 335 (7), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 335(8), the pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 are displayed to move downward. At this time, the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are not displayed (difficult to see or not visible).
Next, as shown in Fig. 336 (9), the pseudo consecutive symbol 41 is displayed so as to swing up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, a pseudo consecutive fanning effect image 512 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 336 (10), the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive pattern 41. Also, at this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output. That is, the same sound effect is output when the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 stops for the first time (see FIG. 335 (3)) and the second time.
Next, as shown in FIG. 336 (11), the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 336 (12), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh viewing mode, and the first temporary stop operation is being performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x3", indicating that the decorative pattern 41 will change for the third time. At this time, a second re-change sound is output. That is, in the change performance example 30, the sound effect (change start sound) is different when the decorative pattern 41 starts to change for the first time (see FIG. 329 (2)), when the decorative pattern 41 starts to change for the second time (see FIG. 335 (5)), and when the decorative pattern 41 starts to change for the third time.

Next, as shown in Fig. 336 (13), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode, and the fourth variation operation is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size, and the display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 336 (14), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Fig. 336 (15), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, a step 1 sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 336 (16), the second step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, step 2 sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 337 (17), the third step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, a step 3 sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 337 (18), the left row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 337 (19), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the fifth stop motion. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the left of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 337 (20), the right row decorative symbol 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode. At this time, the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 337 (21), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual confirmation mode, and the fifth stopping action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 337 (22), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the eighth reach action is performed. At this time, the second reach line image 531 and the second reach notification image 532 are displayed. Also, at this time, the third reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 337 (23), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode, and the first temporary stop motion is performed. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to green. Also, at this time, the second variable sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 337 (24), the middle row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 338 (25), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 338 (26), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 338 (27), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 338 (28), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 338 (29), the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stopping action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 338 (30), the SP reach performance starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 338 (31), an effect is executed in which the "4" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye changes to a "3". At this time, the "3" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye performs a symbol changing action. Also, at this time, a change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the decorative symbols 41 of the reach eye. Also, at this time, a symbol changing sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 338 (32), the development teasing effect starts, and the development symbol 41 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41, "4", is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 339 (33), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 339 (34), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 339 (35), the development symbol 41 stops and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is hidden. At this time, the development effect image 534 is displayed around the development symbol 41. At this time, a development stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 339 (36), the development performance is executed. At this time, the role performance is executed, and the middle movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 4 effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the 4th role sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 339 (37), the SPSP reach effect starts, and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourteenth visual mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 339 (38), the lever operation effect starts, and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Pull!", which encourages the operation of the effect lever 163. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits white light. At this time, a second lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation effect is the second period.
Then, when the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 339 (39), "343", which is three rows of decorative patterns 41, is displayed in the 15th visual mode. At this time, the sixth stop sound is output. Also, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 339 (40), the revival prompting performance starts, and the revival prompting image 520 is displayed. The revival prompting image 520 displays the text "Revival Challenge!" At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. Also, at this time, a revival challenge sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 340 (41), a less decorative middle row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed and moves in an up and down motion.
Next, as shown in Figure 340 (42), the middle row decorative pattern 41 moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 340 (43), a revival prompting image 520 is displayed. The revival prompting image 520 displays the text "revival failed...". At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are difficult to see or cannot be seen. Also, at this time, a revival failure sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 340 (44), the revival teasing image 520 is hidden and the stage image 61 is displayed again. At this time, the highly decorative reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Also, the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" moves from the top to the bottom. Also, as described above, the variable BGM is not output, so it becomes silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 340 (45), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) of the middle row decorative pattern 41 stopping is not output, and the silent state continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 340 (46), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "343", are fixed and stopped.

Also, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the specific sound (first stop sound) output when the left row decorative pattern 41 stops common to the specific sound output when the right row decorative pattern 41 stops in the variable performance of the first performance mode (first stage) (for example, the variable performance of variable performance example 10 (see Figures 273 to 278)), and can make it different from the specific sound (sixth stop sound) output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops. And, the performance control unit 300 can make the specific sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops common between the variable performance of the first performance mode and the variable performance of the second performance mode (second stage) (variable performance example 29 (see Figures 329 to 334)).
In this case, the impression of the decorative pattern 41 stopping is made different depending on the row in which the decorative pattern 41 stops, and the impression of the middle row decorative pattern 41 stopping is suppressed from being different depending on the presentation mode. In other words, it is possible to switch between making the impression of the decorative pattern 41 stopping different depending on the row in which the decorative pattern 41 stops, or giving a common impression to the decorative pattern 41 stopping regardless of the presentation mode, thereby improving the interest of the game.
In addition, in the first presentation mode, the changing presentation in which a specific sound is output when the left row decorative pattern 41 stops, the changing presentation in which a specific sound is output when the right row decorative pattern 41 stops, and the changing presentation in which a specific sound is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops may be a single changing presentation or may be multiple different changing presentations.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific variable performance in which an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is performed is performed, a common stop sound is more likely to be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode (a display mode with low decorativeness) in the first stage (see FIG. 277 (36)) and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode (see FIG. 333 (36)) than when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode (a display mode with high decorativeness) in the first stage (see FIG. 274 (16)) and when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode in the second stage (see FIG. 330 (16)). Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the stop of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in a special display mode regardless of the stage.
In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to make the stopping sound output when the pseudo consecutive patterns 41 stop in the first stage and the second stage common (see FIG. 279(3) and FIG. 335(3)). Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the pseudo consecutive patterns 41 stop regardless of the stage.

When a specific variable performance is performed, the fact that a common stop sound is more likely to be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode in the first stage and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode in the second stage than when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode in the first stage and when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode in the second stage includes that when a specific variable performance is performed, a common stop sound is not always output (0%) when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode in the first stage and when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode in the second stage, and that when a specific variable performance is performed, a common stop sound is always output (100%) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode in the first stage and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode in the second stage.

(Example of variation 31)
Figure 341 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 31) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 341. The variable performance example 31 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed.
The variable performance shown in Fig. 341 is a variable performance executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determined performance pattern" in Fig. 53 and "ER2" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 341(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 341 (2), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual confirmation mode, and the seventh start operation is performed. At this time, the seventh start effect image 567 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. The second reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the first reserved image 52, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. The reserved number display 55 for the first start port 121 is updated to "1". At this time, the second start sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 341 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a third visual appearance and a fourth variable action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 341 (4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode and a fourth variable action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 341 (5), the role production is executed, and the right movable role 115C moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the eighth role effect image 568 is displayed around the right movable role 115C on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the seventh role sound is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 341 (6), the reel performance ends, and the reel effect image No. 8 568 is hidden. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode continues. Also, at this time, the display mode of the reserved image 52 changes from the normal display mode to blue. Also, at this time, the third change sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 341 (7), a chance eye effect is executed, and "331" which is three rows of decorative symbols 41 stops. All of these three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in red. At this time, a chance eye second effect image 570 is displayed around the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, an 18th stop sound which is a sound effect when the three rows of decorative symbols 41 stop is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 341 (8), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "331", are fixed and stopped.
In the variation performance example 31, the seventh start action, the seventh effect image 567 at the start, the second start sound, the role effect, and the chance eye effect are all examples of the pre-determination effects. Also, these pre-determination effects are effects that make the player expect a big win in the variation effect next to the variation effect when these pre-determination effects are being executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can perform preparatory operations for the decorative pattern 41 in the first and second stages before the decorative pattern 41 changes along the change path (see FIG. 252 (2) and FIG. 309 (2)). The performance control unit 300 can also make the preparatory operations for the decorative pattern 41 different between the first and second stages. This makes it possible to realize a variety of performances from the start of the change.
Furthermore, in the first and second stages, after the decorative pattern 41 has fluctuated along the fluctuation path, the performance control unit 300 can stop the decorative pattern 41 (see Figures 253 (9) and 310 (9)). The performance control unit 300 can make the stopping operation of the decorative pattern 41 different between the first and second stages. This makes it possible to realize a variety of performances even near the end of the fluctuating performance.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can make the stopping operation (see FIG. 263 (14), FIG. 319 (6), etc.) of the special symbols (pseudo consecutive symbols 41, development symbols 41) the same in the first stage and the second stage. In addition, it is possible to make the stopping operation of the decorative symbols 41 and the stopping operation of the special symbols different in both the first stage and the second stage. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the special symbols have stopped, regardless of the stage.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can make the movement path of the small symbols 56 common between the first stage and the second stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first variable path (see FIG. 251-1(1)) or the fourth variable path (see FIG. 251-1(4)) is used in the variable performance, when a specific performance (pseudo consecutive performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, etc.) is executed, the same type of stop operation of the performance pattern is performed (stop operation of the pseudo consecutive pattern 41, stop operation by the fifth mode (see FIG. 250-4(27)) in the 13th visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41, stop operation by the 15th visual recognition mode (see FIG. 250-4(30)), etc.). Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the stop of the performance pattern regardless of the variable path used.
In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or fourth variable path is used in the variable performance, when the specific performance is executed, a stop action different from the stop action set for each stage (see FIG. 253(9) and FIG. 310(9)) is executed. Therefore, regardless of the stage, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the specific performance has been executed.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or fourth variable path is used in the variable presentation, a jackpot game is likely to be executed when a stop operation (such as the stop operation of the pseudo consecutive pattern 41, the stop operation of the fifth mode (see FIG. 250-4 (27)) in the thirteenth visual mode of the decorative pattern 41, or the stop operation of the fifteenth visual mode (see FIG. 250-4 (30))) different from the stop operation set for each stage (see FIG. 253 (9), FIG. 310 (9)) is executed. Therefore, the player's anticipation for the execution of a stop operation different from the stop operation set for each stage can be increased.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the variation performance using the first variation path or the variation performance using the fourth variation path is being executed, when a predetermined performance (display of the revival teasing image 520) is executed, the performance pattern stops in a specific manner (the middle row decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops without going through the sixth visual recognition manner) different from the manner in which the first variation path and the fourth variation path are used. In particular, this specific manner is a manner common to the variation performance using the first variation path and the variation performance using the second variation path.

In addition, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can limit the output of the stopping sound when the decorative pattern 41 stops when the SP reach presentation or the SPSP reach presentation is executed in both the losing variation presentation using the first variation path and the losing variation presentation using the fourth variation path (see FIG. 278 (42) and FIG. 334 (42)). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reduction in interest in the game by emphasizing the stopping of the decorative pattern 41 more than necessary.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute a first sound performance that outputs a specific sound (stop sound) when a specific row of symbols (middle row decorative symbols 41) stops in both the first and fourth change paths. Also, the performance control unit 300 can execute a second sound performance (output of pseudo consecutive stop sound, development stop sound) when a special symbol (pseudo consecutive symbol 41, development symbol 41) stops. And, the first sound performance is made easier to execute in a loss change performance where the special symbol does not stop (reach performance is not executed) than in a loss change performance where the special symbol stops.
In addition, the fact that the first sound effect is more likely to be executed in a losing variation performance in which the special pattern does not stop (the reach effect is not executed) than in a losing variation performance in which the special pattern stops includes the fact that the first sound effect is never executed (0%) in a losing variation performance in which the special pattern stops, and the fact that the first sound effect is always executed (100%) in a losing variation performance in which the special pattern does not stop (the reach effect is not executed).
In addition, if the first sound effect is more likely to be executed in a losing variation performance in which the special symbol does not stop (the reach effect is not executed) than in a losing variation performance in which the special symbol stops, the first sound effect may be executed in the losing variation performance in which the special symbol stops.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or fourth variable path is used, the performance control unit 300 can make the performance mode (type of stopping sound) of the sound performance when a specific row of patterns (middle row decorative pattern 41) stops different between a case where a variable performance in which a reach performance is not executed is executed and a case where a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or fourth fluctuation path is used, when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode).
In addition, regardless of whether the first or fourth fluctuation path is used, when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the output of a stop sound is more difficult when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop in a specific display mode. This includes the fact that the output of a stop sound is always executed (100%) when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop in a specific display mode in a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed, and the fact that the output of a stop sound is always executed (0%) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode in a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed.
Furthermore, regardless of whether the first or fourth fluctuation path is used, when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, if it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode, then it is acceptable that a stopping sound is not output when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode in a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed, or a stopping sound may be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode in a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or fourth fluctuation path is used, when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the output of a stop sound is less likely to be executed when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) than when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop.
In addition, regardless of whether the first or fourth variation path is used, when a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the output of a stop sound is more difficult when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the left and right row decorative patterns 41 stop. This includes the fact that the output of a stop sound is always executed (100%) when the left and right rows decorative patterns 41 stop in a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed, and the fact that the output of a stop sound is always executed (0%) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode in a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed.
Furthermore, regardless of whether the first or fourth fluctuation path is used, when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, if it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop, then it is acceptable that a stopping sound is not output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop in a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed, or a stopping sound may be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode in a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or fourth fluctuation path is used, when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (a display mode with high decorativeness) than when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode (a display mode with low decorativeness).
In addition, regardless of whether the first or fourth fluctuation path is used, when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the output of a stop sound is more difficult when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode, including the fact that the output of a stop sound is always executed (100%) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode in a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed, and the fact that the output of a stop sound is always executed (0%) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode in a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed.
Furthermore, regardless of whether the first or fourth fluctuation path is used, when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, if it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode, then a stopping sound may not be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode in a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed, or a stopping sound may be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode in a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or fourth fluctuation path is used, it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed than when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is not executed is performed.
In addition, regardless of whether the first or fourth fluctuation path is used, the fact that it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed than when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is not executed is performed includes the fact that when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is not executed is performed, the output of a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is always executed (100%), and the fact that when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the output of a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is always executed (0%).
Regardless of whether the first or fourth fluctuation path is used, if it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed than when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is not executed is performed, then it may be possible that the output of a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is not executed when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is not executed is performed.

(Example of variation 32)
Figures 342 to 349 are figures showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 32) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 342 to Fig. 349. The variable performance example 32 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. Also, the variable performance example 32 is an example of a variable performance executed after the variable performance shown in the variable performance example 31. In other words, the variable performance example 32 is an example of a variable performance showing the lottery result of the special pattern lottery suggested by the blue reserved image 52 (see Fig. 341 (6)) shown in the variable performance example 31.
In addition, Figure 342 to Figure 349 are the variation performances that are executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 246. In addition, in the following explanation, the points that differ from each of the above-mentioned variation performance examples will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 342(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the confirmation of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 342(2), when the next special symbol starts to change, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and the seventh start operation is performed. At this time, the seventh start effect image 567 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. The first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed in blue. At this time, the second start sound is output.
At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect lever 163 vibrates.

Next, as shown in Fig. 342 (3), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual recognition mode and perform the fourth varying action. At this time, the vibration effect is continued.
Next, as shown in Fig. 342(4), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode. At this time, the vibration effect is continued.
Next, as shown in FIG. 342 (5), the reel effect is executed, and the right movable reel 115C moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel 8 effect image 568 is displayed around the right movable reel 115C on the image display unit 114. At this time, the 7th reel sound is output. At this time, the vibration effect is also ended. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the 4th visual recognition mode is also continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 342 (6), the zone promotion effect is started and a zone promotion image 505 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 342 (7), the zone presentation starts, and a zone notification image 528 is displayed. At this time, a zone effect image 529 is displayed around the zone notification image 528. Also, at this time, a zone start sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 342 (8), zone execution image 530 is displayed. Also, the lever operation presentation starts, and lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first lever sound is output. The operation effective period of this lever operation presentation is the first period.
When the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 stop as shown in FIG. 343 (9). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive symbols 41. At this time, the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows become invisible (difficult to see or impossible to see). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 343 (10), the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 343 (11), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x2", which indicates that the second change of the decorative symbols 41 will be performed. At this time, a first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 343 (12), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode and perform the fourth variation action. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and the display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 343 (13), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 343 (14), the pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 are displayed to move downward. At this time, the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are not displayed (hard to see or cannot be seen).
Next, as shown in Fig. 343 (15), the pseudo consecutive symbol 41 is displayed so as to swing up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, a pseudo consecutive fanning effect image 512 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 343 (16), the pseudo consecutive symbol 41 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive symbol 41. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 344 (17), the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 344 (18), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x3", which indicates that the decorative symbols 41 will change for the third time. At this time, a second re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 344 (19), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode and perform the fourth variation action. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and the display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 344 (20), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Fig. 344 (21), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, step 1 sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 344 (22), the second step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a step 2 sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 344 (23), the third step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, a step 3 sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 344 (24), the step image 508 is hidden. Also, the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and the fourth variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 345 (25), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the fifth stop motion. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the left of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 345 (26), the right row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 345 (27), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual confirmation mode, and the fifth stopping action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 345 (28), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the eighth reach action is performed. At this time, the second reach line image 531 and the second reach notification image 532 are displayed. Also, at this time, the third reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 345 (29), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. Also, at this time, the first variable sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 345 (30), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 345 (31), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 345 (32), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 346 (33), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 346 (34), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 346 (35), the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second temporary stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 346 (36), the SP reach performance starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 346 (37), an effect is executed in which the "4" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye changes to a "3". At this time, the "3" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye performs a symbol change action. Also, at this time, a change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the decorative symbols 41 of the reach eye. Also, at this time, a symbol change sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 346 (38), the development prompting performance starts, and the development symbol 41 is displayed. At this time, the "4" which is the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 346 (39), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 346 (40), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 347 (41), the development symbol 41 stops and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is hidden. At this time, the development effect image 534 is displayed around the development symbol 41. At this time, a development stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 347 (42), the development performance is executed. At this time, the role performance is executed, and the middle movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 4 effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the 4th role sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 347 (43), the SPSP reach effect starts, and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the 14th visual recognition mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 347 (44), the lever operation effect starts, and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Make it!", which encourages the player to operate the effect lever 163. At this time, a lever effect image 557 is displayed around the lever operation image 502. At this time, the effect lever 163 lights up in red. At this time, a third lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation effect is the third period.

When the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 347 (45), the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "333", are temporarily stopped. At this time, a success image 538 is displayed. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect lever 163 vibrates. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a first success sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 347 (46), the reel effect is executed, and the left movable reel 115A, the center movable reel 115B, and the right movable reel 115C each move to a position where they overlap the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel fifth effect image 539 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors. At this time, the first jackpot notification sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 347 (47), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, as shown in FIG. 347 (48), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues, while the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, as shown in FIG. 348 (49), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues, while the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 348 (50), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and stops. At this time, the doublet first effect image 556 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative patterns 41. At this time, the big win first effect image 540 continues to be displayed, the vibration effect continues, and the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors. At this time, the eighth stop sound is output.
Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 348 (51), the lever operation effect is started, and the lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits white light. Also, at this time, the fourth lever sound is output. The operation effective period of this lever operation effect is the third period.

When the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 of the repeated numbers is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual recognition mode, as shown in Fig. 348 (52). At this time, the first big win effect image 540 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 348 (53), the repeating decorative symbols 41, "333", are temporarily stopped. That is, the promotion effect is not executed after the promotion hint effect is executed. At this time, the repeating second effect image 541 is displayed around each of the repeating decorative symbols 41. Also, at this time, the ninth stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 348 (54), three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "333", are fixed and stopped with the stop display of the special symbols. Also, the first big win effect image 540 is not displayed. Note that the first big win effect image 540 may be displayed when the decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56 are fixed and stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 348 (55), a big win game notification image 542 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the big win game notification image 542 displays the text "Bonus!".
Next, as shown in FIG. 348 (56), a right-hit image 543 is displayed. At this time, a round number image 544 and a round-in-progress image 545 are displayed. The round number image 544 displays the text "Round 1."
Next, when the final round is completed, as shown in FIG. 349 (57), a time-saving start image 546 is displayed. The time-saving start image 546 displays the text "Entering special time-saving mode!"

Next, in the special time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 349 (58), the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness, "333", is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. And, like the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56 is also fixed and stopped by the sequence of numbers "333". Also, at this time, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the fourth stage (fourth presentation mode), which is the presentation mode in the special time-saving game state. Also, at this time, the variable presentation is not being executed, but background music corresponding to the fourth stage is being output from the speaker 156.

As described above, the variable performance of this embodiment includes a first variable performance in which the path of the change of the pattern in a specific row (e.g., middle row decorative pattern 41) in the first performance mode (first stage) is a first path (e.g., the first variable path (see FIG. 251-1 (1)) etc.), and a second variable performance in which the path of the change of the pattern in a specific row in the second performance mode (second stage) is a second path different from the first path (e.g., the fourth variable path (see FIG. 251-1 (4)) etc.). The performance control unit 300 can differentiate the specific sound (e.g., the first stop sound) output when the pattern stops in the first variable performance from the specific sound (e.g., the 15th stop sound) output when the pattern stops in the second variable performance.
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of variable performances consisting of various variable paths according to the performance mode. Also, by outputting a specific sound according to the performance mode when the symbols stop, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the symbols without getting bored, and it is possible to make the player easily recognize the "symbol stop", which is one of the divisions in the variable performance, regardless of the performance mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The variable performance of this embodiment includes a first variable performance in which the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in a first display mode (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 252(1)) in the first performance mode (first stage), and a second variable performance in which the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in a second display mode (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 309(1)) in the second performance mode (second stage).The performance control unit 300 can differentiate the specific sound (for example, the first stop sound) output when the pattern stops in the first variable performance from the specific sound (for example, the 15th stop sound) output when the pattern stops in the second variable performance.
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of variable presentations consisting of various display modes of the decorative symbols 41 according to the presentation mode. Also, by outputting a specific sound according to the presentation mode when the symbols stop, the player is not bored with the stopped symbols and is drawn to the attention of the player, so that the player can easily recognize the "stopped symbols", which is one of the divisions in the variable presentation, regardless of the presentation mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Also, in this embodiment, when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the first presentation mode (first stage), the first effect image 503 (see FIG. 253 (9)) is displayed when it stops, and when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the second presentation mode (second stage), the eighth effect image 560 (see FIG. 310 (9)) is displayed when it stops. In other words, the specific sound output and the specific presentation (effect image) executed when the pattern stops in the first variable presentation are both different from the specific sound output and the specific presentation executed when the pattern stops in the second variable presentation.
In addition, the specific sound output and the specific performance executed when the pattern stops in the first variable performance may be common to either the specific sound output and the specific performance executed when the pattern stops in the second variable performance, and the other may be different. In other words, the specific sound output or the specific performance executed when the pattern stops in the first variable performance may be common to either the specific sound output or the specific performance executed when the pattern stops in the second variable performance.

In addition, the variable performance of this embodiment includes a first variable performance in which the path of the variation of the pattern in a specific row (for example, the middle row decorative pattern 41) in the first performance mode (first stage) is a first path (for example, the first variable path (see FIG. 251-1 (1)) etc.), and a second variable performance in which the path of the variation of the pattern in a specific row in the second performance mode (second stage) is a second path different from the first path (for example, the fourth variable path (see FIG. 251-1 (4)) etc.). In addition, the performance control unit 300 can execute a common performance that is common when a specific performance is executed in both the first variable performance and the second variable performance. Examples of specific performances include reach performances (normal reach performances, SP reach performances, SPSP reach performances), pseudo consecutive performances, zone performances, role device performances, lever operation performances, vibration performances, etc. In addition, as common effects, images displayed in association with specific effects (decorative pattern 41, lever operation image 502, first reach line image 509, first reach notification image 510, pseudo consecutive pattern 41, transition image 516, SP reach image 517, development pattern 41, zone notification image 528, zone effect image 529, zone execution image 530, second reach line image 531, second reach notification image 532, SPSP reach image 536, success image 538, role fifth effect image 539, big win first effect image 540, double number first effect image 541, These include the display of a specific effect image 556, a double number second effect image 541, etc.), and sound effects output in conjunction with a specific performance (first lever sound, first role sound, first reach sound, second role sound, pseudo consecutive stop sound, first re-fluctuation sound, third stop sound, fourth stop sound, third role sound, zone start sound, third reach sound, first changing sound, development stop sound, fourth role sound, second lever sound, sixth stop sound, second re-fluctuation sound, second changing sound, third changing sound, third lever sound, first success sound, first jackpot notification sound, eighth stop sound, fourth lever sound, ninth stop sound, fourth changing sound).
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of variable presentations consisting of various variable paths according to the presentation mode. Also, by executing a common presentation in any of the presentation modes, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the presentation effect of the specific presentation being executed even if the specific presentation is executed in any presentation mode, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, a common effect is executed in the first stage and the second stage, but it is possible to make the presentation mode after the common effect is executed different (for example, the display mode of the stage image 61 after the SP reach effect is executed). Therefore, even when a common effect is executed, the player can feel the diversity of the presentation.

In this embodiment, the performance symbols include a first performance symbol (decorative symbol 41) and a second performance symbol (pseudo consecutive symbol 41, developing symbol 41). The performance control unit 300 can make the stop sound of the first performance symbol different between the first stage and the second stage (first stop sound, fifteenth stop sound), but make the stop sound of the second performance symbol the same between the first stage and the second stage (pseudo consecutive stop sound and developing stop sound). This allows for a variety of stop modes of the first performance symbol depending on the stage, and makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second performance symbol has stopped regardless of the stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can output a first specific sound (stop sound of the decorative pattern 41 of the losing number) when the decorative pattern 41 stops when a losing variation performance is executed, regardless of whether the first variation path or the second variation path is used. And, the performance control unit 300 can output a second specific sound (stop sound of the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers) when the decorative pattern 41 stops when a big win variation performance is executed, regardless of whether the first variation path or the second variation path is used, and then output a third specific sound (stop sound of the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers after the promotion teasing performance) when the decorative pattern 41 stops. Therefore, when a big win variation is executed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers has stopped.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or second change path is used, the performance control unit 300 can execute a first start performance by the decorative pattern 41 when the change performance starts (for example, the movement of the decorative pattern 41 shown in FIG. 252(2) and the display of the first effect image 501 at the start) and a second start performance different from the first start performance (for example, the movement of the decorative pattern 41 shown in FIG. 286(2) and the display of the third effect image 525 at the start).The performance control unit 300 makes the execution ratio of a predetermined performance (such as a role performance as a continuous performance (see FIG. 286(5))) in the change performance different between when the first start performance is executed and when the second start performance is executed.
In addition, having different execution rates of the specified performance in the variable performance when the first start performance is executed and when the second start performance is executed includes the fact that the specified performance is not always executed when the first start performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the specified performance is always executed when the second start performance is executed (100%).
In addition, in this embodiment, the specified performance is made easier to execute when the second start performance is executed than when the first start performance is executed, but it may also be made easier to execute the specified performance when the first start performance is executed than when the second start performance is executed.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific sound performance (output of a stop sound) when the decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode) in the variable performance, regardless of whether the first variable path or the second variable path is used, and can limit the specific sound performance when the decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode. The execution rate of the predetermined performance (display of the revival teasing image 520) is different between a case where a variable performance capable of executing a specific sound performance is performed and a case where a variable performance capable of limiting the specific sound performance is performed.
In addition, the different execution rates of the specified performance when a variable performance capable of executing a specific sound performance is performed and when a variable performance capable of restricting a specific sound performance is performed include not always executing the specified performance (0%) when a variable performance capable of executing a specific sound performance is performed, and always executing the specified performance (100%) when a variable performance capable of restricting a specific sound performance is performed.

In this embodiment, the miss variation performance in which the reach performance is not executed includes a first variation performance in which the start sound is not output (see, for example, FIG. 314(2)), and a second variation performance in which the start sound is output (see, for example, FIG. 341(2)). When a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, it is easier to win the jackpot in the next variation performance when the second variation performance is executed than when the first variation performance is executed (variation performance example 32 is easier to execute).
In addition, when a reservation for the first starting port 121 is stored, it is easier to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variable performance example 32 is easier to execute), which also includes the fact that when the first variable performance is executed, there is no guarantee that there will be a jackpot in the next variable performance (0%) (variable performance example 32 is never executed). Also, when a reservation for the first starting port 121 is stored, if it is easier to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variable performance example 32 is easier to execute), it may be possible to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the first variable performance is executed (variable performance example 32 may be executed), and it may not be possible to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed (variable performance example 32 may not be executed).

In addition, when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, it may be possible to make it more likely that an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) will be executed in the next variation performance (variation performance example 29 or variation performance example 30 will be executed) if the second variation performance in which a start sound is output is executed rather than if the first variation performance in which a start sound is not output is executed.
In addition, when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, the fact that an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is more likely to be executed in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variation performance example 29 or variable performance example 30 is more likely to be executed) also includes the fact that when the first variable performance is executed, an SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance will definitely not be executed in the next variable performance (0%) (variation performance example 29 or variable performance example 30 will definitely not be executed). Furthermore, if a hold is stored for the first starting port 121 and an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is more likely to be executed in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variation performance example 29 or variable performance example 30 is more likely to be executed), then an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) may be executed in the next variable performance when the first variable performance is executed (variation performance example 29 or variable performance example 30 may be executed), and an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) does not have to be executed in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed (variation performance example 29 or variable performance example 30 does not have to be executed).

(Example of variation 33)
Figure 350 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 33) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 350. The variable performance example 33 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
In addition, FIG. 350 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA2" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 341 (1) to (8), Fig. 342 (1) to (8), Fig. 343 (9) to (16), Fig. 344 (17) to (24), Fig. 345 (25) to (32), Fig. 346 (33) to (40), and Fig. 347 (41) to (43) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 350 (1), the lever operation effect starts and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Make it!", which encourages the operation of the effect lever 163. At this time, the effect lever 163 is illuminated in red. At this time, a third lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation effect is the third period.

When the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 350 (2), the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "333", are temporarily stopped. Meanwhile, at this time, the success image 538 (see FIG. 347 (45)) is not displayed. Also, at this time, the vibration effect is not being executed. Also, at this time, the effect lever 163 emits a white light. Also, at this time, the first success sound is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 350(3), a success image 538 is displayed. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect lever 163 vibrates. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a first success sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 347 (46) to (48), Figures 348 (49) to (56), and Figures 349 (57) and (58) are executed.

As described above, in variable performance example 33, the timing of the display of success image 538, the vibration performance, the rainbow light emission of performance lever 163, and the output of the first success sound is delayed relative to the time of operation of performance lever 163 compared to variable performance example 32. In other words, in variable performance example 33, the period from when performance lever 163 is operated in the lever operation performance to the display of success image 538, the start of the vibration performance, the rainbow light emission of performance lever 163, and the output of the first success sound is longer than in variable performance example 32.

In addition, in the variation performance example 33, a success image 538 is displayed, but this is not limited to this.
In the variable performance example 33, after the performance shown in FIG. 350 (2) is performed, a vibration performance, the illumination of the performance lever 163 in rainbow colors, and the output of the first success sound may be executed without the success image 538 being displayed.

(Example of variation 34)
Figure 351 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 34) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 351. The variable performance example 34 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
In addition, FIG. 351 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA3" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 341 (1) to (8), 342 (1) to (8), 343 (9) to (16), 344 (17) to (24), 345 (25) to (32), 346 (33) to (40), 347 (41), and (42) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 351 (1), the SPSP reach effect begins, and the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 14th visual mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 351 (2), the lever operation effect starts, and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Make it!", which encourages the user to operate the effect lever 163. At this time, a vibration effect starts, the effect lever 163 emits white light, and a second lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation effect is the second period.
Then, when the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation valid period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 351 (3), the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "333", are temporarily stopped. At this time, a success image 538 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect is continued. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a first success sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 347 (46) to (48), Figures 348 (49) to (56), and Figures 349 (57) and (58) are executed.

(Variation example 35)
FIG. 352 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 35) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 352. The variable performance example 35 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.
In addition, FIG. 352 is a variation performance that is executed when "EB1" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 352(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the confirmation of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 352 (2), as the display of the next special symbol begins, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual mode, and an eighth start operation, which is the operation performed when the symbol begins to change, is performed. When the eighth start operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in such a way that they move downward. At this time, an eighth start effect image 571 is displayed below each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed. Furthermore, the display mode of the changing image 51 changes from red to rainbow colors. At this time, a vibration effect is performed. At this time, a fourth changing sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 352 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode and a fourth variable action is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 352 (4), the reach-inducing performance is started, and the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode, and are displayed so as to sway left and right. At this time, the reach-inducing fourth effect image 565 is also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 352 (5), the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second mode of the ninth viewing mode, and are displayed so as to sway left and right outside the first mode of the ninth viewing mode in the left-right direction of the image 511. At this time, the fourth reach-teasing effect image 565 is also displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 352 (6), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode, and the fourth stopping action is performed. At this time, the fourth stop effect image 549 is displayed so as to surround each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41. Also, at this time, the fourth reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 352 (7), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "6" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 352 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 353(9), the middle symbol fanning effect is started, and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 17th visual mode (see Fig. 250-5(35)). At this time, the doublet fanning first effect image 550 is displayed above and below the middle row decorative symbol 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in Fig. 353 (10), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the 17th visual mode (see Fig. 250-5 (36)). At this time, the doublet-triggering second effect image 551 is displayed on the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.
Next, as shown in FIG. 353 (11), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 17th visual mode (see FIG. 250-5 (37)) and stops. At this time, the fifth effect image 552 at the time of stop is displayed around the middle row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect lever 163 emits light in rainbow colors. Also, at this time, the 11th stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 353 (12), the repeating number decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the 16th visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 353 (13), the repeating number decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 353 (14), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and stopped. At this time, the sixth stop effect image 553 is displayed so as to surround each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twelfth stop sound is output.
In the variation performance example 35, even when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 16th visual mode, the stage image 61 is displayed. However, even in the variation performance example 35, when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 16th visual mode, the first big win effect image 540 may be displayed instead of the stage image 61.

Next, as shown in FIG. 353 (15), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and the first temporary stop motion is performed. At this time, the vibration effect ends. At this time, the light color of the effect lever 163 changes from rainbow color to white.
Then, as shown in FIG. 353 (16), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "777", stop being fixed.

(Example of variation 36)
354 and 355 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 36) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 354 and Fig. 355. The variable performance example 36 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
354 and 355 are variation effects that are executed when "EB2" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 352 (1) to (7) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 354 (1), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and a first temporary stopping action is performed, and the middle row decorative pattern 41, "7", is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and a fourth variable action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 354 (2), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "8" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 354 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode.

354(4), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, a transition image 516 is displayed in place of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 354 (5), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 354 (6), the SP reach performance starts, and an SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 354 (7), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 12th visual mode, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 performs the second varying operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 354 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode and performs the second variable operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 355(9), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the SP promotion second effect image 519 is displayed on the upper right side and the lower left side of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 355 (10), the lever operation effect starts, and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Make it!". At this time, a lever effect image 557 is displayed around the lever operation image 502. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits red light, and a third lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation effect is the third period.
Then, when the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 355 (11), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" is displayed in the sixth mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the seventh effect image 554 at the time of stopping is displayed around the middle row decorative pattern 41. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect lever 163 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a thirteenth stop sound, which is a sound effect when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops, is output.
After this, the same presentation as shown in Figures 347 (46) to (48), 348 (49), and (50) is performed, except that the repeated decorative pattern 41 is "777", and then, as the special patterns stop changing, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 and the small pattern 56, "777", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 37)
Figure 356 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 37) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 356. The variable performance example 37 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
In addition, FIG. 356 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA4" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 329 (1) to (8), Fig. 330 (9) to (16), Fig. 331 (17) to (24), Fig. 332 (25) to (32), Fig. 333 (33), and (34) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 356 (1), the lever operation effect starts and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Pull!" At this time, the effect lever 163 emits white light and a second lever sound is output. The operation effective period of this lever operation effect is the second period.
Then, when the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 356 (2), the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "333", perform the first temporary stop operation. At this time, the success image 538 is displayed. The effect lever 163 emits light in rainbow colors, and the first success sound is output. Meanwhile, the vibration effect is not performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 356 (3), the role production is executed, and the left movable role 115A, the center movable role 115B, and the right movable role 115C move to positions where they overlap with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role fifth effect image 539 is displayed. At this time, the performance lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors, and the first big win notification sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 356(4), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 is displayed. Also, at this time, the illumination of the rainbow color of the effect lever 163 continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 356 (5), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 continues to be displayed, and the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, as shown in Fig. 356 (6), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 continues to be displayed, and the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 356 (7), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and stop. At this time, the doublet first effect image 556 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the big win first effect image 540 continues to be displayed, the performance lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors, and the eighth stop sound is output.
Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 356 (8), the lever operation effect is started, and the lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits white light. Also, at this time, the fourth lever sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 348 (52) to (56), 349 (57), and (58) are performed.
In this way, in the variation performance example 37, a vibration performance is not executed.

(Example of variation 38)
Figure 357 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 38) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 357. The variable performance example 38 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.
In addition, FIG. 357 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA5" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 341 (1) to (8), Fig. 342 (1) to (8), Fig. 343 (9) to (16), Fig. 344 (17) to (24), Fig. 345 (25) to (32), Fig. 346 (33) to (40), and Fig. 347 (41) to (43) are performed. Next, as shown in Fig. 357 (1), the lever operation effect starts, and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Make it!", which encourages the operation of the effect lever 163. At this time, a lever effect image 557 is displayed around the lever operation image 502. At this time, the effect lever 163 is illuminated in red, and a third lever sound is output. The operation effective period of this lever operation effect is the third period.

When the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 357 (2), three rows of decorative patterns 41, "343", are displayed in the 15th visual mode and temporarily stopped. At this time, the 6th stop sound is output. Also, when the 6th stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 357(3), a revival prompt image 520 is displayed. The revival prompt image 520 displays the text "Revival Challenge!" At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult to see or cannot be seen. At this time, a revival challenge sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 357(4), the revival teasing image 520 is hidden and the stage image 61 is redisplayed. Also, the highly decorative reach-eye decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and performs the first temporary stop motion. Also, the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is moving from the top to the bottom.
Next, as shown in FIG. 357(5), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode and performs the first temporary stop motion. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect of the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 stopping is not output, and it is silent.

Next, as shown in Figure 357 (6), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" moves upward again and passes, and then the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" moves from the bottom to the top.
Next, as shown in FIG. 357(7), the revival image 558 is displayed, and the three rows of low-decorative decorative symbols 41, "333," are temporarily stopped. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect lever 163 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a first revival sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the revival image 558 is displayed, is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 357 (8), the role effect is executed, and the left movable role 115A, the center movable role 115B, and the right movable role 115C move to positions where they overlap the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role fifth effect image 539 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and the rainbow light emission of the effect lever 163 continues. At this time, the first big win notification sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 347 (47) and (48), Figures 348 (49) to (56), and Figures 349 (57) and (58) are performed.

(Variation of variation example 30)
Figures 358 to 363 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, a modified example of the variable performance example 30 (see Figs. 335 to 340) will be described with reference to Figs. 358 to 363. In this modified example, when the "7" that is the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops, a pseudo consecutive performance is executed. In addition, in this modified example, the expectation level is suggested depending on whether the stopping sound of the middle row decorative pattern 41 is output or not.
In the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 329 (1) to (5) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 358 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and a fourth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 358(2), the lever operation presentation starts, and lever operation image 502 is displayed. The effective operation period of this lever operation presentation is the first period. At this time, a first lever sound is output.
Then, when the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 358 (3), the "7" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness performs the first temporary stop operation. At this time, the decorative patterns 41 on the left and right rows become invisible (difficult to see or cannot be seen). Also, at this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 358 (4), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 358(5), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x2", which indicates that the second change of the decorative symbols 41 will be performed. At this time, a first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 358 (6), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode and perform the fourth variation action. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and the display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 358 (7), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 358 (8), the left row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the fourth variable action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 359(9), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stop motion. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the left of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 359 (10), the right row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 359 (11), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual confirmation mode, and the fifth stopping action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 359 (12), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the sixth reach action is performed. At this time, the first reach line image 509 and the first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, the first reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 359 (13), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and performs the first temporary stop motion. Also, the middle row decorative symbol 41, "7", moves from the top to the bottom.

Next, as shown in FIG. 359(14), the "7" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 performs the first temporary stop operation, and the pseudo consecutive performance starts. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (pseudo consecutive stop sound) of the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" stopping is not output. And, in this modified example, it is suggested that the expectation is higher when the pseudo consecutive stop sound is not output than when the pseudo consecutive stop sound is output (see FIG. 358(3)).
Next, as shown in FIG. 359 (15), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 continue the first temporary stop motion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 359 (16), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "474", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is being performed. Also at this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x3", indicating that the decorative pattern 41 will change for the third time. Also at this time, a second re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 360 (17), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode, and the fourth variation operation is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size, and the display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 360 (18), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Fig. 360 (19), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, a step 1 sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 360 (20), the second step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a step 2 sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 360 (21), the third step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, a step 3 sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 360 (22), the left row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 360 (23), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stop motion. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the left of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 360 (24), the right row decorative symbol 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode. At this time, the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 361 (25), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode, and the fifth stop action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 361 (26), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the eighth reach action is performed. At this time, the second reach line image 531 and the second reach notification image 532 are displayed. Also, at this time, the third reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 361 (27), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode, and the first temporary stop motion is performed. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to green. Also, at this time, the second variable sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 361 (28), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 361 (29), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 361 (30), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 361 (31), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 361 (32), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 362 (33), the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second temporary stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 362 (34), the SP reach performance starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 362 (35), an effect is executed in which the "4" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye changes to a "3". At this time, the "3" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye performs a symbol changing action. Also, at this time, a change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the decorative symbols 41 of the reach eye. Also, at this time, a symbol changing sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 362 (36), the development prompting performance starts, and the development symbol 41 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41, "4", is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 362 (37), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 362 (38), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 362 (39), the development symbol 41 stops and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is hidden. At this time, the development effect image 534 is displayed around the development symbol 41. At this time, a development stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 362 (40), the development performance is executed. At this time, the role performance is executed, and the middle movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 4 effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the 4th role sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 363 (41), the SPSP reach effect starts, and the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 14th visual recognition mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 363 (42), the lever operation effect starts, and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Pull!", which encourages the operation of the effect lever 163. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits white light. At this time, a second lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation effect is the second period.
Then, when the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 363 (43), "343", which is three rows of decorative symbols 41, is displayed in the 15th visual mode. At this time, the sixth stop sound is output. Also, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 363 (44), the highly decorative three-row decorative pattern 41 "343" performs the first temporary stop motion. At this time, the variable BGM is no longer output and is silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 363 (45), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "343", are fixed and stopped.

In this way, the execution condition of the pseudo consecutive performance may be not only the stopping of the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 but also the stopping of the predetermined middle row decorative symbols 41. In this case, the "7" which is the predetermined middle row decorative symbol 41 is also regarded as a special symbol.
In addition, if no sound effect (pseudo consecutive stop sound) is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is the trigger for the pseudo consecutive performance, stops at "7", various performances that have a high expectation of a jackpot game being executed may be performed thereafter.

In addition, in the variable performance example 24 (see Fig. 319 to Fig. 321), the pseudo consecutive performance may be executed by stopping the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" instead of the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 (see Fig. 319 (5)). In this case, in the variable performance example 24, when the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" stops, a sound effect (pseudo consecutive stop sound) may be output.
Also, in the variable performance example 32 (see Figs. 342 to 349), the pseudo consecutive performance may be executed by stopping the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" instead of the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 (see Figs. 343 (9), (16)). In this case, in the variable performance example 32, when the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" stops, the sound effect (pseudo consecutive stop sound) may not be output.

(Variation of Variation Example 29)
Next, a modified example of the variation performance example 29 will be explained.
First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 329(1) to (8) and Fig. 330(9) to (14) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 364(1), a zone execution image 530 is displayed. At this time, the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth visual recognition mode and performs the fourth variable action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 364(2), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the fifth stopping operation. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the left of the left row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the nineteenth stop sound, which is the sound effect of the decorative pattern 41 stopping, is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 364 (3), the right row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 364(4), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual confirmation mode, and the fifth stopping action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the nineteenth stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 364 (5), the reach-ey decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the eighth visual confirmation mode, and a ninth reach action is performed, which is the action of the decorative pattern 41 when a reach is achieved (when the reach performance starts). When the ninth reach action is being performed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed as if raising the left hand. At this time, a first reach line image 509 and a first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, a first reach sound is output.
In this way, different reach actions may be executed for each number of the decorative pattern 41.
In this embodiment, as a variable performance, a variable performance shown as a modified example of variable performance example 29 may be provided instead of variable performance example 29, or a variable performance shown as a modified example of variable performance example 29 may be provided together with variable performance example 29.

(Variation of normal reach effect)
Next, a modified example of the normal reach effect executed in the second stage will be described. In the following, as an example of the modified example, a modified example of the normal reach effect in the variation effect example 29 (see FIG. 331 (20) to (24)) will be described.
First, when the left and right decorative symbols 41 stop with the same number, as shown in Fig. 365 (1), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the eighth visual recognition mode, and the eighth reach action is performed. At this time, the second reach line image 531 and the second reach notification image 532 are displayed. Also, at this time, the third reach sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 365 (2), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop action. Also, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the fifth variation action, which is the action when varying. When the fifth variation action is being executed, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an action such that it moves from the bottom to the top of the image display unit 114 through the middle fifth variation path CR5 (see FIG. 251-1 (5)). Also, at this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. Also, at this time, the first variation sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 365 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and the fifth variable action is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 365 (4), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the fifth variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 365 (5), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the fifth variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 365 (6), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the fifth variable operation.
After this, just like in the variation performance example 29, a transition image 516 is displayed and then the SP reach performance begins.

As described above, in the modified example, in a normal reach performance, the movement path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes a movement path different from that before the reach performance starts (see Figure 329 (4)).
In addition, in FIG. 365, the change path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 during the normal reach performance in the change performance example 29 is the middle fifth change path CR5, but is not limited to this. The change path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 during the normal reach performance in the change performance example 30, the change performance example 32 to the change performance example 38 may be the middle fifth change path CR5.
In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to each of the variable performances shown in variable performance example 29, variable performance example 30, and variable performance example 32 to variable performance example 38, each variable performance may be provided in which the variable path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 during the normal reach performance in variable performance example 29, variable performance example 30, and variable performance example 32 to variable performance example 38 is the middle fifth variable path CR5.

(Example of variation 39)
Next, referring to Fig. 366 to Fig. 368, a specific explanation will be given of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 39) performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like. The variable presentation example 39 is a variable presentation example based on a game ball winning in the first start hole 121 in a normal game state. The variable presentation example 39 is also a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach presentation is not executed, and is a variable presentation based on the number of reserved balls for winning in the first start hole 121 being "1".
In addition, the change presentation shown in Figures 366 to 368 is the change presentation executed when "ER1" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in Figure 246.
In addition, each of the change performance examples from change performance example 39 to change performance example 57 described later is a change performance example when the change starts in the third stage.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 366 (1), the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 "213" are fixed and stopped by the performance control unit 300 as the previous special pattern is stopped and displayed. This decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the third stage, and is different from the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 in the first stage (see FIG. 252 (1)) and the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 in the second stage (see FIG. 309 (1)). At this time, one reserved image 52, reserved number display 55, and stage image 61 are displayed on the image display unit 114. In addition, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the third stage (third performance mode). The third stage is a performance mode in the normal game state. Also, at this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121 shows "1", which is the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting port 122 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the second starting port 122. Also, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the first visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 366 (2), the change performance starts with the start of the change display of the special symbol. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the change image 51. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second viewing mode, and a ninth start operation, which is an operation when starting the change, is performed. When the ninth start operation is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an action to move to the upper left side. At this time, the ninth start effect image 572 is displayed on the upper left side of each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. The change of the small symbols 56 also starts. At the third stage, the change BGM continues to be output from the start to the end of the change performance, but this change BGM is a different piece of music from both the change BGM in the first stage and the change BGM in the second stage.

Next, as shown in Fig. 366 (3), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode, and perform a sixth varying operation, which is an operation when the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are varying. When the sixth varying operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed to move to the lower right side along a sixth varying path (see Fig. 251-1 (6)).
Next, as shown in FIG. 366 (4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform a sixth varying action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 366(5), the lever operation effect is executed, and the lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first lever sound is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode. The effective operation period of this lever operation effect is the first period.
If the lever 163 is not operated during the effective operation period of the lever operation performance, the lever operation image 502 is hidden as shown in FIG. 366 (6). No sound (non-display sound) is output in response to the lever operation image 502 being hidden. The three rows of decorative patterns 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 366 (7), the left row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the sixth variable action.
Next, as shown in Figure 366 (8), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the sixth variable action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 367 (9), the left-row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual confirmation mode, and performs the eighth stop action, which is the action when the variation stops. When the eighth stop action is being performed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed to vibrate. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left-row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the first stop sound, which is the sound effect that the decorative pattern 41 has stopped, is output from the speaker 156.
Next, as shown in FIG. 367(10), the right-row decorative symbol 41, "1", is displayed in the fifth visual state and performs the sixth variable action. At this time, the visual state of the left-row decorative symbol 41 becomes the seventh visual state and performs the first temporary stop action.
Next, as shown in Figure 367 (11), the right row decorative pattern 41 "1" passes, and the right row decorative pattern 41 "2" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the sixth variable action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 367 (12), the right-row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eighth stop motion. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the right side of the right-row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 367 (13), the "9" in the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode, and performs the seventh visual motion, which is the motion when the decorative pattern is being changed. When the seventh visual motion is being performed, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in such a way that they rotate counterclockwise along the seventh visual path (see Fig. 251-1 (7)) and then move upward. At this time, the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode, and performs the first temporary stop motion.
Next, as shown in Figure 367 (14), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "9" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "1" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the seventh variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 367 (15), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the eighth stop operation. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the upper left side of the middle row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output. That is, the same sound effect is output when the left row decorative pattern 41 stops, when the right row decorative pattern 41 stops, and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 367 (16), the visual appearance of the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes the seventh visual appearance, so that all three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual appearance and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 368 (17), with the stop display of the special symbol, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped. Also, with the end of the variable performance, the variable image 51 is erased (displayed).

Figure 369 is a diagram showing another example of presentation in variable presentation example 39.
In the variation performance example 39, a performance example in which the performance lever 163 is not operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation performance is described. In the following, a performance example in which the performance lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation performance is described.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 366(1) to (4) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 369(1), a lever operation effect is executed and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first lever sound is also output.
When the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, a first image at operation 504 is displayed as shown in Fig. 369 (2). This first image at operation 504 is displayed in a display mode different from both the first image at operation 504 in the first stage (see Fig. 255 (2)) and the first image at operation 504 in the second stage (see Fig. 312 (2)). At this time, a fifth operation sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the effect lever 163 has been operated, is output from the speaker 156.

369(3), the first operation image 504 is not displayed. Also, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 366 (7) and (8), Figures 367 (9) to (16), and Figure 368 (17) are performed.

(Example of variation 40)
Figure 370 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 40) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 370. Variable performance example 40 is a variable performance example based on a game ball winning in the first start port 121 in a normal game state. Note that variable performance example 40 is a variable performance executed when "ER5" is selected as the "variable performance" in Fig. 246. Also, variable performance example 40 is a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach performance is not executed, and is a variable performance based on the number of reserved balls for winning in the first start port 121 being "1".
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 366 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 370 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the sixth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 370(2), the zone tilt effect is executed, and the zone tilt image 505 is displayed. At this time, the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth viewing mode and then in the sixth viewing mode, but the display of the left row decorative pattern 41 in the fifth viewing mode and the display in the sixth viewing mode are hidden by the zone tilt image 505, making it difficult or impossible to see. Also, when the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth viewing mode, the first stop sound is not output.

In the variation performance example 40, the zone performance is not performed after the zone promotion performance is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 370 (3), the zone promotion image 505 is not displayed. Also, at this time, the left column decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 367 (10) to (16) and Figure 368 (17) are performed.
In addition, when the zone teasing image 505 is displayed in the zone teasing performance, the left row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the seventh viewing mode without being displayed in the fifth viewing mode or the sixth viewing mode, and when the zone teasing image 505 becomes hidden, the left row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the seventh viewing mode.

(Example of variation 41)
Figure 371 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 41) of the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. 371. The variable performance example 41 is a variable performance example of the decorative pattern 41 based on the game ball winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state. The variable performance example 41 is a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed, and is a variable performance based on the number of reserved balls for winning the first start hole 121 being "4".
In addition, FIG. 371 is a variation performance that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 371(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the determination of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 in the image display unit 114. In addition, four reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "4".
Next, as shown in FIG. 371 (2), the variation performance starts with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. At this time, the three columns of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and perform the tenth start operation, which is the operation when starting the variation. When the tenth start operation is being executed, the three columns of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in such a manner that they move alternately between the upper left side and the lower right side. Also, at this time, the start-time tenth effect image 574 is displayed on the upper left side and the lower right side of each of the three columns of decorative symbols 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 371 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual appearance and perform a sixth varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 371 (4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual appearance and perform a sixth varying operation.
Next, as shown in Fig. 371 (5), the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the sixth variation operation, and the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the seventh variation operation. The movement speed of the three decorative patterns 41 at this time is faster than the movement speed of the decorative patterns 41 displayed in the fifth visual mode in the variation performance example 39 and the variation performance example 40.

Next, as shown in FIG. 371 (6), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the sixth viewing mode, and a ninth stop action, which is the action taken when the fluctuation stops, is performed. When the ninth stop action is being performed, the decorative patterns 41 are displayed so as to sway to the upper left and lower right. At this time, the twelfth stop effect image 575 is displayed on the upper left and lower right sides of each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41. At this time, the first stop sound is output from the speaker 156. That is, the same sound effect is output when the decorative patterns 41 stop in fluctuation performance example 39 and fluctuation performance example 40 and when the decorative patterns 41 stop in fluctuation performance example 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 371 (7), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 371 (8).

(Variation of variation example 41)
Next, a modified example of the variable performance example 41 will be described.
It has been explained that the sound effect output when the decorative pattern 41 stops is the same (both are the first stop sound) in the variable performance (variable performance example 39, variable performance example 40) where the pending number for winning at the first starting port 121 is "1" and a reach performance is not executed, and the variable performance (variable performance example 41) where the pending number for winning at the first starting port 121 is "4" and a reach performance is not executed, but this is not limited to the above.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 371 (1) to (4) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 372 (1), the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform a sixth variable action, and the decorative patterns 41 in the middle row are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform a seventh variable action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 372 (2), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the ninth stop operation. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed on the upper left and lower right sides, respectively, at the time of stopping the twelfth effect image 575. At this time, the second stop sound is output from the speaker 156. That is, a different sound effect is output from when the decorative symbols 41 stop in the variation performance example 39 and the variation performance example 40.

Next, as shown in FIG. 372 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 372(4).

In addition, in the variable performance of this embodiment, the variable performance shown in the modified example of variable performance example 41 may be provided instead of the variable performance shown in variable performance example 41, or the variable performance shown in the modified example of variable performance example 41 may be provided together with the variable performance shown in variable performance example 41.

(Example of variation 42)
Figures 373 to 375 are figures showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 42) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 373 to Fig. 375. The variable performance example 42 is a variable performance example in which a reach performance is executed based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state.
In addition, the variable performance example 42 is a variable performance that is executed when "ER6" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 246.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 373 (1), the performance control unit 300 stops the display of the previous special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 "213" are fixed. In addition, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121. In addition, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first viewing mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 373 (2), the variable performance starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second viewing mode, and a ninth start operation is performed. At this time, a ninth start effect image 572 is displayed on the upper left side of each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. Also, the variable of the small symbols 56 starts.

Next, as shown in FIG. 373 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual appearance and perform the sixth varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 373 (4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 373 (5), the reel performance is executed, and the middle movable reel 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the upper part of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel 9 effect image 576 is displayed. Also, at this time, the reel 8 sound effect, which is the sound effect of the reel performance, is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in Fig. 373(6), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, the first step sound, which is the sound effect of the first step performance, is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 373 (7), the second stage step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, the second stage sound, which is the sound effect of the second stage step performance, is output.
The display manner of the step image 508 displayed in the third stage is different from the display manner of the step image 508 displayed in the first stage (see FIG. 259 (6) etc.) and the display manner of the step image 508 displayed in the second stage (see FIG. 316 (6)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 373 (8), the left row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 374 (9), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 374 (10), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual confirmation mode and performs the eighth stop operation. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 374 (11), the right row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 374 (12), the right row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the right row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 374 (13), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eighth stopping action. As a result, the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 stop with the same numbers, resulting in a reach state. At this time, the eleventh stopping effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stopping sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 374 (14), the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the eighth visual mode, and a tenth reach action, which is the action of the decorative symbols 41 when a reach is achieved (when the reach performance starts), is performed. When the tenth reach action is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed as if they are raising their left hand. At this time, a first reach line image 509 and a first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, a first reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 374 (15), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable motion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 374 (16), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive symbol 41 is displayed to move downward. This pseudo consecutive symbol 41 passes through the first middle moving path CR1.
Next, as shown in FIG. 375 (17), the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 is displayed so as to swing up and down in the center of the image display unit 114. At this time, a pseudo consecutive fanning effect image 512 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive pattern 41.

In the variation performance example 42, the pseudo consecutive performance is not performed after the pseudo consecutive performance is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 375 (18), after the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 passes, the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual recognition mode and performs the first variation operation. This middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a larger size than the decorative patterns 41 of the left and right rows.
Next, as shown in FIG. 375 (19), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the middle row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the first stop sound is output. At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size so as to be the same display size as the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows.

Next, as shown in FIG. 375 (20), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 375 (21).

(Example of variation 43)
Figures 376 to 379 are figures showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 43) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 376 to 379. The variable performance example 43 is an example of a variable performance based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state, in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach performance is executed.
The variation performance shown in Figures 376 to 379 is a variation performance that is executed when "ER7" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 246. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 366 (1) to (3) is executed, and then, as shown in Figure 376 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the sixth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 376(2), the reel performance is executed, and the left movable reel 115A moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel 10th effect image 577 is displayed around the left movable reel 115A. Also, at this time, the 9th reel sound, which is the sound effect of the reel performance, is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 376 (3), the left row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 376 (4), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 376 (5), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual confirmation mode and performs the eighth stop operation. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 376(6), the right row decorative symbol 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode. At this time, the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion.
Next, as shown in Figure 376 (7), the right row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the right row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 376 (8), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eighth stopping action. As a result, the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 stop with the same numbers, resulting in a reach state. At this time, the eleventh stopping effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stopping sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 377 (9), the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the tenth reach action is performed. At this time, the first reach line image 509 and the first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, the first reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 377 (10), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable motion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 377 (11), a pseudo-consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo-consecutive pattern 41 is displayed moving downward.
Next, as shown in Fig. 377 (12), the pseudo consecutive symbol 41 is displayed so as to swing up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, the pseudo consecutive fanning effect image 512 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 377 (13), the pseudo consecutive symbol 41 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive symbol 41. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 377 (14), the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 are displayed so as to be enlarged. At this time, the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. However, even when the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner, the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 may be displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode and the first temporary stop operation may be continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 377 (15), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "434", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is being performed. Also at this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x2", indicating that the second change of the decorative patterns 41 will be performed. Also at this time, the first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 377 (16), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode, and the sixth variation operation is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size, and the display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 378 (17), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 378 (18), the left row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the sixth variable action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 378 (19), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eighth stop motion. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 378 (20), the right row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 378 (21), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, and the eighth stop action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 378 (22), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the tenth reach action is performed. At this time, the first reach line image 509 and the first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, the first reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 378 (23), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable motion.

Next, as shown in Figure 378 (24), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 379 (25), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 379 (26), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 379 (27), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the middle row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the first stop sound is output. That is, the same sound effect (stop sound) is output when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 379 (28), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the display size of the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in such a manner that it is reduced to the same display size as the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 379 (29).

(Example of variation 44)
Figures 380 to 382 are figures showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 44) of the variable performance of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to Fig. 380 to Fig. 382. The variable performance example 44 is an example of a variable performance based on a winning entry to the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state, in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the SP reach performance is executed.
In addition, the change presentation shown in Figures 380 to 382 is the change presentation executed when "ER8" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in Figure 246.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 376 (1) to (8), 377 (9) to (16), and 378 (17) to (24) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 380 (1), the middle row decorative pattern 41, "4," is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode, and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 380 (2), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 380 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 380(4), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 380 (5), the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stopping action is performed.
In addition, when the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first and second modes of the eleventh visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 380(6), the SP reach performance starts, and an SP reach image 517 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 380 (7), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 12th visual mode (see FIG. 250-3 (17)), and the second variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 380 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode (see Figure 250-3 (18)) and performs a second variable operation.

Next, as shown in Fig. 381 (9), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Fig. 250-3 (19)). At this time, the SP promotion first effect image 518 is displayed on the upper right and lower left sides of the middle row decorative pattern 41 on the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in Figure 381 (10), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode and performs the second variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 381 (11), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the SP promotion second effect image 519 is displayed on the upper right side and the lower left side of the middle row decorative pattern 41 on the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in Fig. 381 (12), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fourth mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Fig. 250-3 (20)). In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in such a way that it returns to the upper right side of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in FIG. 381 (13), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth mode of the twelfth visual mode (see FIG. 250-3 (21)), and the first temporary stopping operation is performed. At this time, the third stopping sound is output. That is, different sound effects (stopping sounds) are output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops. Also, when the third stopping sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 381 (14), the revival prompting effect starts, and the revival prompting image 520 is displayed. The revival prompting image 520 displays the text "Revival Challenge!" At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. Also, at this time, a revival challenge sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 381 (15), the less decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed again and is displayed in a manner that causes it to sway up and down.
Next, as shown in Figure 381 (16), the middle row decorative pattern 41 moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 381 (17), a revival prompting image 520 is displayed. The revival prompting image 520 displays the text "revival failed..." which suggests or notifies that the revival performance is not executed (the revival prompting performance is unsuccessful). At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are difficult or impossible to see. Also, at this time, a revival failure sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 381 (18), the revival teasing image 520 is hidden and the stage image 61 is displayed again. At this time, the highly decorative reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Also, the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" moves from the top to the bottom. Also, as described above, the variable BGM is not output at this time, so it becomes silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 382 (19), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) of the middle row decorative pattern 41 stopping is not output. In addition, the silent state continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 382 (20), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "454", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 45)
383 and 384 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 45) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 383 and Fig. 384. The variable performance example 45 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SP reach performance is executed.
It should be noted that the change presentation shown in Figures 383 and 384 is executed when "ER9" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in Figure 246.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 376(1) to (8), Fig. 377(9) to (16), Fig. 378(17) to (24), and Fig. 380(1) to (5) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 383(1), the SP reach effect starts and the SP reach image 517 is displayed. At this time, the reach eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the 11th visual mode and performs the second temporary stop operation, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 is not displayed (difficult to see or not visible).
Next, as shown in FIG. 383(2), the development teasing performance is started, and the development symbol 41 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode (see FIG. 250-3(23)), and the third variation operation is performed. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative symbol 41, "5", is displayed in a layer behind the development symbol 41 in the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in Fig. 383(3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see Fig. 250-3(24)). At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a layer in front of the development pattern 41 in the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 383(4), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see FIG. 250-4(25)).
Next, as shown in Fig. 383(5), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode (see Fig. 250-4(26)). At this time, the development symbol 41 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 383(6), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see FIG. 250-4(27)), and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the fourth stop sound is output. Also, when the fourth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 383(7), the revival prompting effect starts, and the revival prompting image 520 is displayed. The revival prompting image 520 displays the text "Revival Challenge!" At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult to see or cannot be seen. At this time, a revival challenge sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 383 (8), the less decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed again and is displayed in a manner that causes it to sway up and down.
Next, as shown in Figure 383 (9), the middle row decorative pattern 41 moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 383 (10), a revival prompting image 520 is displayed. The revival prompting image 520 displays the text "revival failed...". At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are difficult to see or cannot be seen. Also, at this time, a revival failure sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 383 (11), the revival teasing image 520 is hidden and the stage image 61 is displayed again. At this time, the highly decorative reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Also, the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" moves from the top to the bottom. Also, as described above, the variable BGM is not output at this time, so it becomes silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 383 (12), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) of the middle row decorative pattern 41 stopping is not output. In addition, the silent state continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 383 (13), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "454", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 46)
Figure 385 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 46) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 385. The variable performance example 46 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed.
The change presentation shown in FIG. 385 is executed when "ER4" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in FIG. 246.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 366 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 385 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the sixth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 385(2), the reach-inducing performance is started, and the left and right decorative symbols 41 "7" are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode (see Fig. 250-2(9)) and perform the sixth varying action. At this time, the reach-inducing fifth effect image 578 is displayed on the lower right side of each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in Fig. 385(3), the left and right decorative symbols 41 of "7" are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode (see Fig. 250-2(10)). At this time, the sixth reach-inducing effect image 579 is displayed on the upper left and lower right sides of each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.
Next, as shown in Fig. 385(4), the right row decorative pattern 41 and the middle row decorative pattern 41 are displayed in the third mode of the ninth visual mode (see Fig. 250-2(11)). At this time, the right row decorative pattern 41 performs the sixth varying action, the middle row decorative pattern 41 performs the seventh varying action, and the left row decorative pattern 41 performs the first temporary stopping action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 385(5), the right-row decorative pattern 41 and the middle-row decorative pattern 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the eighth stop operation. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the right-row decorative pattern 41 and the upper left side of the middle-row decorative pattern 41, respectively. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 385 (6), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 385(7), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "718", are fixed and stopped.

In addition, in the variable performance example 46, after the performance shown in FIG. 385(4) is executed, the performance shown in FIG. 385(6) may be executed without executing the performance shown in FIG. 385(5). In other words, if the reach performance is not executed after the reach teasing performance is executed, the display of the decorative pattern 41 in the sixth visual mode and the output of the first stop sound may not be performed.

(Example of variation 47)
Figure 386 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 47) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 386. The variable performance example 47 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SP reach performance is executed.
The change presentation shown in FIG. 386 is executed when "ER10" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in FIG. 246.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 366 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 386 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the sixth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 386 (2), the reach-inducing performance is started, and the "4" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode and perform the sixth varying action. At this time, the reach-inducing fifth effect image 578 is displayed on the lower right side of each of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows.

386(3), the left and right decorative symbols 41 of "4" are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the sixth reach-inducing effect image 579 is displayed on the upper left and lower right sides of each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 386(4), the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode (see FIG. 250-2(12)), and a tenth stop motion is performed, which is the motion when the fluctuation stops. When the tenth stop motion is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in an action such that they expand while swinging up and down, respectively. The tenth stop motion can also be regarded as an eleventh reach motion, which is the motion of the decorative symbols 41 when a reach is established (when the reach performance starts). At this time, a thirteenth effect image 580 is displayed at the time of stopping, surrounding each of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows. At this time, a sixth reach sound, which is the sound effect when a reach is established, is output. The sixth reach sound can also be regarded as a twentieth stop sound, which is the sound effect when the decorative symbols 41 are stopped.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 380 (1) to (8), Figures 381 (9) to (16), and Figure 382 (17) are performed.

(Example of variation 48)
Figures 387 to 392 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 48) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 387 to 392. The variable performance example 48 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SPSP reach performance is executed.
387 to 392 are the variation performances executed when "ER11" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 387(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the determination of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue. The display mode of blue of this reserved image 52 may be the display mode at the start of display, or may be a result of a change in the display mode in the variation performance executed while this reserved image 52 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 387(2), with the start of the change display of the next special pattern, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second visual confirmation mode, and an eleventh start operation, which is an operation when the change starts, is performed. When the eleventh start operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in such a manner that they move alternately between the upper right side and the lower left side. At this time, an eleventh effect image 581 is displayed at the start around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the change image 51, and the change image 51 is displayed in blue. Also, at this time, a third start sound, which is an effect sound of the start of the change, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 387 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and a sixth varying action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 387(4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 387(5), the reel performance is executed, and the right movable reel 115C moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel 11th effect image 582 is displayed around the right movable reel 115C on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the 10th reel sound, which is the sound effect of the reel performance, is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 387(6), the role production ends and the role 11 effect image 582 is hidden. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.

Next, as shown in Fig. 387 (7), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, the first step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 387(8), the second step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, the second step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 388 (9), the third stage step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, the third stage sound, which is the sound effect of the third stage step performance, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 388(10), the step image 508 is turned off. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 388 (11), the lever operation presentation starts, and lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation presentation is the first period.
When the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, the second image at operation 527 is displayed as shown in Fig. 388 (12). The text "Coming?!" is displayed in this second image at operation 527. That is, the display mode of the second image at operation 527 in the second stage is different from the display mode of the second image at operation 527 in the first stage (see Fig. 274 (12)). At this time, a sixth operation sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the effect lever 163 has been operated, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 388 (13), the zone promotion effect is started and a zone promotion image 505 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 388 (14), the zone performance is started, and a zone notification image 528 is displayed. At this time, a zone effect image 529 is displayed around the zone notification image 528. Also, at this time, a zone start sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the zone performance has started.
Next, as shown in Fig. 388 (15), a zone execution image 530 is displayed. At this time, the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual recognition mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 388 (16), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the eighth stop motion. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 389 (17), the right row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 389 (18), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, and the eighth stopping action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eleventh stopping effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stopping sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 389 (19), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and a 12th reach action, which is the action of the decorative symbol 41 when a reach is established (when the reach performance starts), is performed. When the 12th reach action is being performed, the ribbon worn by the character in the decorative symbol 41 is displayed as if it is floating. In addition, the 12th reach action has a higher expectation than the 10th reach action. At this time, a second reach line image 531 and a second reach notification image 532 are displayed. In addition, a third reach sound is output at this time.
Next, as shown in FIG. 389 (20), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable motion. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. At this time, the first variable sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 389 (21), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 389 (22), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 389 (23), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 389 (24), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 390 (25), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 390 (26), the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stopping action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 390 (27), the SP reach performance starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 390 (28), an effect is executed in which the "4" decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye changes to a "3". At this time, the "3" decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye performs a pattern change action. Also, at this time, a change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the decorative patterns 41 of the reach eye. Also, at this time, a pattern change sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 390 (29), the development teasing effect starts, and the development symbol 41 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41, "4", is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 390 (30), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 390 (31), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 390 (32), the development symbol 41 stops and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is hidden. At this time, the development effect image 534 is displayed around the development symbol 41. At this time, a development stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 391 (33), the development performance is executed. At this time, the role performance is executed, and the center movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the center movable role 115B has moved to a position lower than the position shown in FIG. 373 (5). At this time, the role fourth effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the fourth role sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 391 (34), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 14th visual confirmation mode (see Fig. 250-4 (29)). At this time, the SPSP reach effect is started, and the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 391 (35), the lever operation effect starts, and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Pull!", which encourages the operation of the effect lever 163. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits white light. At this time, a second lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation effect is the second period.
Then, when the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 391 (36), three rows of decorative patterns 41, "343", are displayed in the fifteenth visual mode (see FIG. 250-4 (30)). At this time, the sixth stop sound is output. Also, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 391 (37), the revival teaser performance starts, and the revival teaser image 520 is displayed. The revival teaser image 520 displays the text "Revival Challenge!" At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. Also, at this time, a revival challenge sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 391 (38), the less decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed and moves in an up and down motion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 391 (39), the middle row decorative pattern 41 moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 391 (40), a revival prompting image 520 is displayed. The revival prompting image 520 displays the text "revival failed...". At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are difficult to see or cannot be seen. Also, at this time, a revival failure sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 392 (41), the revival teasing image 520 is hidden and the stage image 61 is displayed again. At this time, the highly decorative reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Also, the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" moves from the top to the bottom. Also, as described above, the variable BGM is not output, so it becomes silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 392 (42), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) of the middle row decorative pattern 41 stopping is not output, and the silent state continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 392 (43), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "343", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 49)
Figures 393 to 398 are figures showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 49) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 393 to 398. The variable performance example 49 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SPSP reach performance is executed.
The variation performances shown in Figures 393 to 398 are variation performances that are executed when "ER12" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 246. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 387 (1) to (5) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 393 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the sixth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 393(2), a lever operation presentation starts, and lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation presentation is the first period.
When the lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation performance, the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 stop as shown in FIG. 393 (3). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive symbols 41. At this time, the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows become invisible (difficult to see or impossible to see). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 393(4), the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 393(5), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x2", which indicates that the second change of the decorative symbols 41 will be performed. At this time, a first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 393 (6), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode, and the sixth variation operation is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size, and the display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 393 (7), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 393(8), the pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 are displayed to move downward. At this time, the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are not displayed (difficult to see or not visible).
Next, as shown in Fig. 394 (9), the pseudo consecutive symbol 41 is displayed so as to swing up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, a pseudo consecutive fanning effect image 512 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 394 (10), the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive pattern 41. Also, at this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output. That is, the same sound effect is output when the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 stops for the first time (see FIG. 393 (3)) and the second time.
Next, as shown in FIG. 394 (11), the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 394 (12), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 displays the text "x3", indicating that the decorative pattern 41 will change for the third time. At this time, a second re-change sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the decorative pattern 41 will change again, is output. That is, in the change performance example 49, the sound effect (change start sound) is different when the decorative pattern 41 starts changing for the first time (see FIG. 387 (2)), when the decorative pattern 41 starts changing for the second time (see FIG. 393 (5)), and when the decorative pattern 41 starts changing for the third time.

Next, as shown in Fig. 394 (13), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode, and the sixth variation operation is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size, and the display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 394 (14), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Fig. 394 (15), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, the first step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 394 (16), the second stage step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a second stage sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 395 (17), the third step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, the third step sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 395 (18), the left row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the sixth variable action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 395 (19), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the eighth stop motion. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 395 (20), the right-row decorative symbol 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the sixth variable action. At this time, the left-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 395 (21), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, and the eighth stop action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 395 (22), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the twelfth reach action is performed. At this time, the second reach line image 531 and the second reach notification image 532 are displayed. Also, at this time, the third reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 395 (23), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop action. At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable action. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to green. At this time, the second variable sound is output. That is, the sound effect (variable sound) is different when the display mode of the variable image 51 changes to red (see FIG. 389 (20)) and when it changes to green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 395 (24), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 396 (25), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 396 (26), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 396 (27), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 396 (28), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 396 (29), the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stopping action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 396 (30), the SP reach performance starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 396 (31), an effect is executed in which the "4" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye changes to a "3". At this time, the "3" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye performs a symbol change action. Also, at this time, a change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the decorative symbols 41 of the reach eye. Also, at this time, a symbol change sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 396 (32), the development teasing effect starts, and the development symbol 41 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41, "4", is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 397 (33), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 397 (34), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 397 (35), the development symbol 41 stops and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is hidden. At this time, the development effect image 534 is displayed around the development symbol 41. At this time, a development stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 397 (36), the development performance is executed. At this time, the role performance is executed, and the middle movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 4 effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the 4th role sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 397 (37), the SPSP reach effect starts, and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the 14th visual recognition mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 397 (38), the lever operation effect starts, and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Pull!", which encourages the operation of the effect lever 163. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits white light. At this time, a second lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation effect is the second period.
Then, when the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 397 (39), "343", which is three rows of decorative symbols 41, is displayed in the 15th visual mode. At this time, the sixth stop sound is output. Also, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 397 (40), the revival prompting performance starts, and the revival prompting image 520 is displayed. The revival prompting image 520 displays the text "Revival Challenge!" At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult to see or cannot be seen. Also, at this time, a revival challenge sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 398 (41), a less decorative middle row decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed and moves in an up and down motion.
Next, as shown in Figure 398 (42), the middle row decorative pattern 41 moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 398 (43), a revival prompting image 520 is displayed. The revival prompting image 520 displays the text "revival failed...". At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are difficult to see or cannot be seen. Also, at this time, a revival failure sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 398 (44), the revival teasing image 520 is hidden and the stage image 61 is displayed again. At this time, the highly decorative reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Also, the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" moves from the top to the bottom. Also, as described above, the variable BGM is not output, so it becomes silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 398 (45), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) of the middle row decorative pattern 41 stopping is not output, and the silent state continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 398 (46), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "343", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 50)
Figure 399 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 50) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 399. The variable performance example 50 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed.
The variable performance shown in Fig. 399 is a variable performance executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determined performance pattern" in Fig. 53 and "ER2" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 399(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 399(2), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual confirmation mode, and an eleventh start operation is performed. At this time, an eleventh start effect image 581 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. The second reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the first reserved image 52, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. The reserved number display 55 for the first start port 121 is updated to "1". At this time, a third start sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 399 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and a sixth varying action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 399 (4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform a sixth varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 399(5), the role performance is executed, and the right movable role 115C moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 11th effect image 582 is displayed around the right movable role 115C in the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the 10th role sound is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 399 (6), the reel performance ends, and the reel 11th effect image 582 is hidden. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode continues. Also, at this time, the display mode of the reserved image 52 changes from the normal display mode to blue. Also, at this time, the third change sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 399(7), a chance eye effect is executed, and "331" which is three rows of decorative symbols 41 stops. All of these three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in red. At this time, a chance eye third effect image 583 is displayed around the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, a 21st stop sound which is a sound effect when the three rows of decorative symbols 41 stop is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 399(8), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "331", are fixed and stopped.
In addition, in the variation performance example 50, the seventh stop sound may be output instead of the twenty-first stop sound.
In addition, the eleventh start action, the eleventh effect image 581 at the start, the third start sound, the role effect, and the chance eye effect in the variation effect example 50 are all examples of the pre-determined effects. In addition, these pre-determined effects are effects that make the player expect a big win in the variation effect next to the variation effect when these pre-determined effects are being executed.

(Example of variation 51)
Figures 400 to 407 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 51) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figs. 400 to 407. The variable performance example 51 is an example of a variable performance based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. The variable performance example 51 is also an example of a variable performance executed after the variable performance shown in the variable performance example 50. In other words, the variable performance example 51 is an example of a variable performance showing the lottery result of the special pattern lottery suggested by the blue reserved image 52 (see Fig. 399 (6)) shown in the variable performance example 50.
In addition, Figure 400 to Figure 407 are the variation performances that are executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 246. In addition, in the following explanation, the points that differ from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 400(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 400(2), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and an eleventh start operation is performed. At this time, an eleventh start effect image 581 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51, and the variable image 51 is displayed in blue. Also, at this time, a third start sound is output.
At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect lever 163 vibrates.

Next, as shown in FIG. 400(3), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual recognition mode and perform the sixth varying action. At this time, the vibration effect is continued.
Next, as shown in FIG. 400(4), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode. At this time, the vibration effect is continued.
Next, as shown in FIG. 400(5), the reel effect is executed, and the right movable reel 115C moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel 11 effect image 582 is displayed around the right movable reel 115C on the image display unit 114. At this time, the 10th reel sound is output. At this time, the vibration effect is also ended. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode is also continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 400(6), the zone promotion effect is started and a zone promotion image 505 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 400(7), the zone presentation starts, and a zone notification image 528 is displayed. At this time, a zone effect image 529 is displayed around the zone notification image 528. Also, at this time, a zone start sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 400(8), zone execution image 530 is displayed. Also, a lever operation presentation is started, and lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation presentation is the first period.
When the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 stop as shown in FIG. 401 (9). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive symbols 41. At this time, the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows become invisible (difficult to see or impossible to see). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 401 (10), the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 401 (11), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x2", which indicates that the second change of the decorative patterns 41 will be performed. At this time, a first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 401 (12), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode, and the sixth variation operation is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size, and the display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 401 (13), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 401 (14), the pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 are displayed to move downward. At this time, the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are not displayed (difficult to see or not visible).
Next, as shown in Fig. 401 (15), the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 is displayed so as to swing up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, a pseudo consecutive fanning effect image 512 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 401 (16), the pseudo consecutive symbol 41 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive symbol 41. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 402 (17), the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 402 (18), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x3", which indicates that the decorative symbols 41 will change for the third time. At this time, a second re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 402 (19), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode, and the sixth variation operation is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size, and the display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 402 (20), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 402 (21), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, the first step sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 402 (22), the second step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a second step sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 402 (23), the third step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, the third step sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 402 (24), the step image 508 is hidden. Also, the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and a sixth varying action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 403 (25), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the eighth stop motion. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 403 (26), the right row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 403 (27), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, and the eighth stopping action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eleventh stopping effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stopping sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 403 (28), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the twelfth reach action is performed. At this time, the second reach line image 531 and the second reach notification image 532 are displayed. Also, at this time, the third reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 403 (29), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable motion. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. At this time, the first variable sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 403 (30), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 403 (31), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 403 (32), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 404 (33), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 404 (34), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 404 (35), the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second temporary stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 404 (36), the SP reach performance starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 404 (37), an effect is executed in which the "4" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye changes to a "3". At this time, the "3" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye performs a symbol change action. Also, at this time, a change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the decorative symbols 41 of the reach eye. Also, at this time, a symbol change sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 404 (38), the development teasing effect is started, and the development symbol 41 is displayed. At this time, the "4" which is the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 404 (39), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 404 (40), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 405 (41), the development symbol 41 stops and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is hidden. At this time, the development effect image 534 is displayed around the development symbol 41. At this time, a development stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 405 (42), the development performance is executed. At this time, the role performance is executed, and the middle movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 4 effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the 4th role sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 405 (43), the SPSP reach effect starts, and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourteenth visual recognition mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 405 (44), the lever operation effect starts, and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Make it!", which encourages the player to operate the effect lever 163. At this time, a lever effect image 557 is displayed around the lever operation image 502. At this time, the effect lever 163 lights up in red. At this time, a third lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation effect is the third period.

When the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 405 (45), the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "333", are temporarily stopped. At this time, a success image 538 is displayed. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect lever 163 vibrates. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a first success sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 405 (46), the reel effect is executed, and the left movable reel 115A, the center movable reel 115B, and the right movable reel 115C each move to a position where they overlap the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel fifth effect image 539 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors. At this time, the first jackpot notification sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 405 (47), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, as shown in FIG. 405 (48), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues, while the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, as shown in FIG. 406 (49), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues, while the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 406 (50), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and stops. At this time, the doublet first effect image 556 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative patterns 41. At this time, the big win first effect image 540 continues to be displayed, the vibration effect continues, and the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors. At this time, the eighth stop sound is output.
Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 406 (51), the lever operation effect is started, and the lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits white light. Also, at this time, the fourth lever sound is output. The operation effective period of this lever operation effect is the third period.

When the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 of the repeated numbers is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode, as shown in Fig. 406 (52). At this time, the first big win effect image 540 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 406 (53), the repeating decorative symbols 41, "333", are temporarily stopped. That is, the promotion effect is not executed after the promotion hint effect is executed. At this time, the repeating second effect image 541 is displayed around each of the repeating decorative symbols 41. Also, at this time, the ninth stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 406 (54), three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "333", are fixed and stopped with the stop display of the special symbols. Also, the first big win effect image 540 is not displayed. Note that the first big win effect image 540 may be displayed when the decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56 are fixed and stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 406 (55), a big win game notification image 542 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the big win game notification image 542 displays the text "Bonus!".
Next, as shown in FIG. 406 (56), a right-hit image 543 is displayed. At this time, a round number image 544 and a round-in-progress image 545 are displayed. The round number image 544 displays the text "Round 1."
Next, when the final round is completed, as shown in FIG. 407 (57), a time-saving start image 546 is displayed. The time-saving start image 546 displays the text "Entering special time-saving mode!"

Next, in the special time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 407 (58), the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness, "333", is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. And, like the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56 is also fixed and stopped by the sequence of numbers "333". Also, at this time, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the fourth stage (fourth presentation mode), which is the presentation mode in the special time-saving game state. Also, at this time, the variable presentation is not being executed, but background music corresponding to the fourth stage is being output from the speaker 156.

As described above, the variable performance of this embodiment includes a first variable performance in which the path of the change of the pattern in a specific row (e.g., middle row decorative pattern 41) in the first performance mode (first stage) is a first path (e.g., the first variable path (see FIG. 251-1 (1)) etc.), and a second variable performance in which the path of the change of the pattern in a specific row in the third performance mode (third stage) is a second path different from the first path (e.g., the sixth variable path (see FIG. 251-1 (6)) etc.). The performance control unit 300 can make the specific sound output when the pattern stops in the first variable performance and the specific sound output when the pattern stops in the second variable performance the same (both output the first stop sound).
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of variable performances consisting of various variable paths according to the performance mode. Also, by outputting a common specific sound when a pattern stops in any of the multiple performance modes, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the "pattern stop", which is one of the divisions in the variable performance, regardless of the performance mode, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The variable performance of this embodiment includes a first variable performance in which the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in a first display mode (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 252(1)) in the first performance mode (first stage), and a second variable performance in which the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in a second display mode (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 366(1)) in the third performance mode (third stage).The performance control unit 300 can make the specific sound output when the pattern stops in the first variable performance and the specific sound output when the pattern stops in the second variable performance the same (both output the first stop sound).
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of variable presentations consisting of various display modes of the decorative symbols 41 according to the presentation mode. Also, by outputting a common specific sound when a symbol stops in any of the presentation modes, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the "symbol stop", which is one of the divisions in the variable presentation, in any presentation mode, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, it has been explained that when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the first presentation mode (first stage), the first effect image 503 (see FIG. 253 (9)) is displayed when the decorative pattern 41 stops, and when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the third presentation mode (third stage), the eleventh effect image 573 (see FIG. 367 (9)) is displayed when the decorative pattern 41 stops. In other words, the specific presentation (effect image) executed when the pattern stops in the first variable presentation is different from the specific presentation executed when the pattern stops in the second variable presentation, but is not limited to this.
The specific effect (effect image) executed when the pattern stops in the first variable performance may be common to the specific effect executed when the pattern stops in the second variable performance. That is, the specific sound output and the specific effect executed when the pattern stops in the first variable performance may be common to both the specific sound output and the specific effect executed when the pattern stops in the second variable performance. Also, either the specific sound output and the specific effect executed when the pattern stops in the first variable performance or the specific sound output and the specific effect executed when the pattern stops in the second variable performance may be common, and the other may be different. That is, the specific sound output or the specific effect executed when the pattern stops in the first variable performance may be common to both the specific sound output or the specific effect executed when the pattern stops in the second variable performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute a first display (for example, a display in the viewing mode shown in Figure 250-1 (4)) in which the pattern of a specific row (for example, the middle row decorative pattern 41) is difficult to see after the start of the variable performance, a second display (for example, a display in the viewing mode shown in Figures 250-1 (5) to (7), Figure 250-2 (13), Figure 250-3 (18) etc.) in which the pattern of the specific row is easier to see than the first display after the first display, and a third display (for example, a display in the viewing mode shown in Figure 250-1 (1)) in which the pattern of the specific row stops after the second display. In addition, in a specific presentation mode (such as the third presentation mode (third stage)), the presentation control unit 300 can differentiate the movement mode of the first column pattern when the first column pattern (left column decorative pattern 41) is in the second display (for example, a movement mode to the lower right along the left sixth moving path LR6) from the movement mode of the second column pattern when the second column pattern (for example, the middle column decorative pattern 41) is in the second display. In addition, the second display of the second column pattern in a specific presentation mode has a first movement mode (a movement mode in which the pattern rotates counterclockwise along the middle seventh moving path CR7 (see FIG. 251-1 (7)) and then rises), and a second movement mode (a movement mode to the lower left along the middle second moving path CR2 (see FIG. 251-1 (2))) which is different from the first movement mode.
In this case, the movement patterns of the decorative patterns 41 can be made diverse depending on the row of the decorative patterns 41 displayed, and the movement patterns of the decorative patterns 41 in one row can also be made diverse, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, a big win game is more likely to be executed when the variable presentation in which the second row symbols are displayed in the second mode of the second viewing mode is executed than when the variable presentation in which the second row symbols are displayed in the first mode of the second viewing mode is executed. Therefore, even if the second row symbols are displayed in the same second viewing mode, the player's interest in whether the second row symbols are displayed in the first mode or the second mode can be increased.
In addition, the fact that a jackpot game is more likely to be executed when a variable presentation in which the patterns in the second column are displayed in the second mode of the second viewing mode is executed than when a variable presentation in which the patterns in the second column are displayed in the first mode of the second viewing mode is executed includes the fact that a jackpot game will not be executed (0%) when a variable presentation in which the patterns in the second column are displayed in the first mode of the second viewing mode is executed, and the fact that a jackpot game will be executed (100%) when a variable presentation in which the patterns in the second column are displayed in the second mode of the second viewing mode is executed.
Furthermore, if a jackpot game is more likely to be executed when a variable presentation in which the patterns in the second row are displayed in the second mode of the second viewing mode is executed than when a variable presentation in which the patterns in the second row are displayed in the first mode of the second viewing mode is executed, a jackpot game may be executed when a variable presentation in which the patterns in the second row are displayed in the first mode of the second viewing mode is executed, or a jackpot game may not be executed when a variable presentation in which the patterns in the second row are displayed in the second mode of the second viewing mode is executed.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display the middle row decorative pattern 41 in a specific mode that changes the variation path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 during high-speed movement and low-speed movement. The specific mode includes a first specific mode that is a specific mode in the third stage (for example, a mode in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the middle row sixth variation path CR6 (see FIG. 251-1 (6)) during high-speed movement and the middle row seventh variation path CR7 (see FIG. 251-1 (7)) during low-speed movement), and a second specific mode that is a specific mode in the first stage (for example, a mode in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the middle row first variation path CR1 (see FIG. 251-1 (1)) during high-speed movement and the middle row second variation path CR2 (see FIG. 251-1 (2)) during low-speed movement). In addition, a big win game is more likely to be executed when the variable presentation in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second specific mode is executed than when the variable presentation in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first specific mode. Therefore, even if the display is in the same specific mode, the player's interest in whether the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first specific mode or the second specific mode can be increased.
In addition, the fact that a jackpot game is more likely to be executed when a variable presentation in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second specific mode is executed than when a variable presentation in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first specific mode includes the fact that a jackpot game will not be executed (0%) when a variable presentation in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first specific mode is executed, and the fact that a jackpot game will be executed (100%) when a variable presentation in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second specific mode is executed.
Furthermore, if a jackpot game is more likely to be executed when a variable presentation in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second specific mode is executed than when a variable presentation in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first specific mode is executed, a jackpot game may be executed when a variable presentation in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first specific mode is executed, or a jackpot game may not be executed when a variable presentation in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second specific mode is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in variable performance example 1, the first start operation (see FIG. 252 (2)) is executed, and then the decorative pattern 41 changes along the first variable path, and in variable performance example 10, variable performance example 11, and variable performance example 13, the third start operation (see FIG. 286 (2)) is executed, and then the decorative pattern 41 changes along the first variable path. And, it may be configured so that a jackpot or SP reach performance is more likely to be executed (it is more difficult to output a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops due to a highly decorative display mode) when the variable performances of variable performance example 10, variable performance example 11, and variable performance example 13 are executed than when the variable performance of variable performance example 1 is executed. That is, even if the change path is the same for each stage (presentation mode), it is easier to execute a jackpot or SP reach presentation when a second change presentation (such as change presentation example 10, change presentation example 11, and change presentation example 13) is executed in which the action at the start of the change presentation is the second action (e.g. the third start action) than when a first change presentation (such as change presentation example 1) is executed in which the action at the start of the change presentation is the first action (e.g. the first start action) (it is harder to execute the output of the stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops due to a highly decorative display mode).

In addition, even if the fluctuation path is common to each stage (presentation mode), a jackpot or SP reach presentation is more likely to be executed (the output of a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is less likely to be executed) when the second fluctuation presentation is executed in which the action when the fluctuation presentation is started is the second action than when the first fluctuation presentation is executed in which the action when the fluctuation presentation is started is the first action, including the fact that a jackpot or SP reach presentation is never executed (0%) when the first fluctuation presentation is executed (the output of a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is always executed (100%)) and that a jackpot or SP reach presentation is always executed (100%) when the second fluctuation presentation is executed (the output of a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is never executed (0%)). Furthermore, even if the fluctuation path is common to each stage (presentation mode), as long as it is made easier for a jackpot or SP reach presentation to be executed when the second fluctuation presentation is executed than when the first fluctuation presentation is executed (the output of a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is less likely to be executed), it may be the case that a jackpot or SP reach presentation is executed in the first fluctuation presentation (the output of a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is not executed) or that a jackpot or SP reach presentation is not executed in the second fluctuation presentation (the output of a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is executed).
The first action can also be regarded as a first movement, which is the movement of the decorative pattern 41 when the variable performance starts. The second action can also be regarded as a second movement, which is the movement of the decorative pattern 41 when the variable performance starts.

In addition, between the first variable performance (variable performance example 1, etc.) and the second variable performance (variable performance example 10, variable performance example 11, and variable performance example 13, etc.), not only the behavior (movement) of the decorative pattern 41 when the variable performance starts, but also the behavior (movement) when the variable performance starts and the order in which the changes start may be different. For example, in the first variable performance, the behavior (movement) and the change when the variable performance starts are performed in the order of the left row decorative pattern 41, the right row decorative pattern 41, and the middle row decorative pattern 41. On the other hand, in the second variable performance, the behavior (movement) and the change when the variable performance starts may be performed in the order of the right row decorative pattern 41, the middle row decorative pattern 41, and the left row decorative pattern 41. In this way, the difference in the behavior (movement) behavior when the variable performance starts includes the difference in the order of the behavior (movement) when the variable performance starts and the order in which the changes start.

In this embodiment, the miss variation performance in which the reach performance is not executed includes a first variation performance in which the start sound is not output (see, for example, FIG. 371(2)), and a second variation performance in which the start sound is output (see FIG. 399(2)). When a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, it is easier to win the jackpot in the next variation performance when the second variation performance is executed than when the first variation performance is executed (variation performance example 51 is easier to execute).
In addition, when a reservation for the first starting port 121 is stored, it is easier to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variable performance example 51 is easier to execute), which also includes the fact that when the first variable performance is executed, there is no guarantee that there will be a jackpot in the next variable performance (0%) (variable performance example 51 is never executed). Also, when a reservation for the first starting port 121 is stored, if it is easier to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variable performance example 51 is easier to execute), then when the first variable performance is executed, there may be a jackpot in the next variable performance (variable performance example 51 may be executed), and when the second variable performance is executed, there may not be a jackpot in the next variable performance (variable performance example 51 may not be executed).

In addition, when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, it may be made easier for an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) to be executed in the next variable performance (variation performance example 48 or variation performance example 49 to be executed) when the second variable performance in which a start sound is output is executed than when the first variable performance in which a start sound is not output is executed.
In addition, when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, the fact that an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is more likely to be executed in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variation performance example 48 or variable performance example 49 is more likely to be executed) also includes the fact that when the first variable performance is executed, an SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance will definitely not be executed (0%) in the next variable performance (variation performance example 48 or variable performance example 49 will definitely not be executed). Furthermore, when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, if it is made so that an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is more likely to be executed in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variation performance example 48 or variable performance example 49 is more likely to be executed), then an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) may be executed in the next variable performance when the first variable performance is executed (variation performance example 48 or variable performance example 49 may be executed), and an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) does not have to be executed in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed (variation performance example 48 or variable performance example 49 does not have to be executed).

(Variation example 52)
Figure 408 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 52) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 408. The variable performance example 52 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
In addition, FIG. 408 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA2" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 399 (1) to (8), Fig. 400 (1) to (8), Fig. 401 (9) to (16), Fig. 402 (17) to (24), Fig. 403 (25) to (32), Fig. 404 (33) to (40), and Fig. 405 (41) to (43) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 408 (1), the lever operation effect starts and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Make it!", which encourages the operation of the effect lever 163. At this time, the effect lever 163 is illuminated in red. At this time, a third lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation effect is the third period.

When the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 408 (2), the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "333", are temporarily stopped. However, at this time, the success image 538 (see FIG. 405 (45)) is not displayed. Also, at this time, the vibration effect is not being executed. Also, at this time, the effect lever 163 emits a white light. Also, at this time, the first success sound is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 408(3), a success image 538 is displayed. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect lever 163 vibrates. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a first success sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 405 (46) to (48), 406 (49) to (56), and 407 (57) and (58) are executed.

As described above, in variable performance example 52, the timing of the display of success image 538, the vibration performance, the rainbow light emission of performance lever 163, and the output of the first success sound is delayed relative to the time of operation of performance lever 163, compared to variable performance example 51. In other words, in variable performance example 52, the period from when performance lever 163 is operated in the lever operation performance to the display of success image 538, the start of the vibration performance, the rainbow light emission of performance lever 163, and the output of the first success sound is longer than in variable performance example 51.

In addition, in the variation performance example 52, a success image 538 is displayed, but this is not limited to this.
In variable performance example 52, after the performance shown in FIG. 408 (2) is performed, a vibration performance, the illumination of the performance lever 163 in rainbow colors, and the output of the first success sound may be executed without the success image 538 being displayed.

(Example of variation 53)
Figure 409 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 53) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 409. The variable performance example 53 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
In addition, FIG. 409 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA3" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 399 (1) to (8), Fig. 400 (1) to (8), Fig. 401 (9) to (16), Fig. 402 (17) to (24), Fig. 403 (25) to (32), Fig. 404 (33) to (40), Fig. 405 (41), and (42) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 409 (1), the SPSP reach effect starts, and the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 14th visual mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 409(2), the lever operation effect starts, and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Make it!", which encourages the user to operate the effect lever 163. At this time, a vibration effect starts, the effect lever 163 emits white light, and a second lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation effect is the second period.
When the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation valid period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 409(3), the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "333", are temporarily stopped. At this time, a success image 538 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect is continued. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a first success sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 405 (46) to (48), 406 (49) to (56), and 407 (57) and (58) are executed.

(Variation example 54)
Figure 410 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 54) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 410. The variable performance example 54 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
In addition, FIG. 410 is a variation performance that is executed when "EB1" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, the points that differ from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 410(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 410(2), as the display of the next special symbol begins, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual mode, and a twelfth start operation, which is the operation when the change starts, is performed. When the twelfth start operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are each displayed as moving to the left. At this time, a twelfth start effect image 584 is displayed to the left of each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed. Furthermore, the display mode of the changing image 51 changes from red to rainbow colors. At this time, a vibration effect is performed. At this time, a fourth changing sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 410 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and a sixth varying action is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 410(4), the reach-inducing performance is started, and the "7" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode and perform the sixth varying action. At this time, the reach-inducing fifth effect image 578 is displayed on the lower right side of each of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows.
Next, as shown in Fig. 410(5), the "7" decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, a sixth reach-inducing effect image 579 is displayed on the upper left and lower right sides of each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in Fig. 410(6), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode, and the fourth stopping action is performed. At this time, the fourth stop effect image 549 is displayed so as to surround each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41. Also, at this time, the fourth reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 410 (7), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "6" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 410 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Fig. 411 (9), the middle symbol fanning effect is started, and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 17th visual mode (see Fig. 250-5 (35)). At this time, the doublet fanning first effect image 550 is displayed above and below the middle row decorative symbol 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in Fig. 411 (10), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the 17th visual mode (see Fig. 250-5 (36)). At this time, the doublet-triggering second effect image 551 is displayed on the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.
Next, as shown in FIG. 411 (11), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 17th visual mode (see FIG. 250-5 (37)) and stops. At this time, the fifth effect image 552 at stop is displayed around the middle row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect lever 163 emits light in rainbow colors. Also, at this time, the 11th stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 411 (12), the repeating number decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the 16th visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 411 (13), the repeating number decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 411 (14), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and stopped. At this time, the sixth stop effect image 553 is displayed so as to surround each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twelfth stop sound is output.
In the variation performance example 54, even when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 16th visual mode, the stage image 61 is displayed. However, also in the variation performance example 54, when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 16th visual mode, the first big win effect image 540 may be displayed instead of the stage image 61.

Next, as shown in FIG. 411 (15), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and the first temporary stop motion is performed. At this time, the vibration effect ends. At this time, the light color of the effect lever 163 changes from rainbow color to white.
Then, as shown in FIG. 411 (16), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbol 56, "777", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 55)
412 and 413 are diagrams showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 55) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 412 and Fig. 413. The variable performance example 55 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
412 and 413 are variation effects that are executed when "EB2" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 410 (1) to (7) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 412 (1), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and a first temporary stopping action is performed, and the middle row decorative pattern 41, "7", is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and a first variable action is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 412 (2), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "8" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 412 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.

412(4), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, a transition image 516 is displayed in place of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 412(5), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 412(6), the SP reach performance starts, and an SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 412 (7), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the twelfth visual mode, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 performs a second varying operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 412 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode and performs the second variable operation.
Next, as shown in Fig. 413 (9), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the SP promotion second effect image 519 is displayed on the upper right side and the lower left side of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 413 (10), the lever operation effect starts, and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Make it!". At this time, a lever effect image 557 is displayed around the lever operation image 502. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits red light, and a third lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation effect is the third period.
When the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 413 (11), the middle row decorative pattern 41, "7", is displayed in the sixth mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the seventh effect image 554 at the time of stopping is displayed around the middle row decorative pattern 41. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect lever 163 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, the thirteenth stop sound is output.
After this, the same presentation as shown in Figures 405 (46) to (48), 406 (49), and (50) is performed, except that the repeated decorative pattern 41 is "777", and then, as the special patterns stop changing, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 and the small pattern 56, "777", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 56)
Figure 414 is a diagram showing one form of presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 56) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 414. The variable performance example 56 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
In addition, FIG. 414 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA4" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 387 (1) to (8), Fig. 388 (9) to (16), Fig. 389 (17) to (24), Fig. 390 (25) to (32), Fig. 391 (33), and (34) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 414 (1), the lever operation effect starts and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Pull!" At this time, the effect lever 163 emits white light and a second lever sound is output. The operation effective period of this lever operation effect is the second period.
Then, when the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 414 (2), the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "333", perform the first temporary stop operation. At this time, the success image 538 is displayed. The effect lever 163 emits light in rainbow colors, and the first success sound is output. Meanwhile, the vibration effect is not performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 414(3), the role effect is executed, and the left movable role 115A, the center movable role 115B, and the right movable role 115C move to positions where they overlap with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role fifth effect image 539 is displayed. At this time, the performance lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors, and the first big win notification sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 414(4), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 is displayed. Also, at this time, the illumination of the rainbow colors of the effect lever 163 continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 414 (5), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 continues to be displayed, and the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, as shown in Fig. 414(6), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first big win effect image 540 continues to be displayed, and the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 414(7), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and stop. At this time, the doublet first effect image 556 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the big win first effect image 540 continues to be displayed, the performance lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors, and the eighth stop sound is output.
Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 414 (8), the lever operation effect is started, and the lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits white light. Also, at this time, the fourth lever sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 406 (52) to (56), 407 (57), and (58) are performed.
In this way, in the variation performance example 56, a vibration performance is not executed.

(Example of variation 57)
Figure 415 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 57) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 415. The variable performance example 57 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.
In addition, FIG. 415 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA5" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 399 (1) to (8), Fig. 400 (1) to (8), Fig. 401 (9) to (16), Fig. 402 (17) to (24), Fig. 403 (25) to (32), Fig. 404 (33) to (40), and Fig. 405 (41) to (43) are performed. Next, as shown in Fig. 415 (1), the lever operation effect starts, and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Make it!", which encourages the operation of the effect lever 163. At this time, a lever effect image 557 is displayed around the lever operation image 502. At this time, the effect lever 163 is illuminated in red, and a third lever sound is output. The operation effective period of this lever operation effect is the third period.

When the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 415 (2), three rows of decorative patterns 41, "343", are displayed in the fifteenth visual mode and temporarily stopped. At this time, the sixth stop sound is output. Also, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 415(3), a revival prompt image 520 is displayed. The revival prompt image 520 displays the text "Revival Challenge!" At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult to see or cannot be seen. At this time, a revival challenge sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 415(4), the revival teasing image 520 is hidden and the stage image 61 is redisplayed. Also, the highly decorative reach-eye decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and performs the first temporary stop motion. Also, the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is moving from the top to the bottom.
Next, as shown in FIG. 415(5), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode and performs the first temporary stop motion. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect of the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 stopping is not output, and it is silent.

Next, as shown in Figure 415 (6), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" moves upward again and passes, and then the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" moves from the bottom to the top.
Next, as shown in FIG. 415(7), the revival image 558 is displayed, and the three rows of low-decorative decorative symbols 41, "333", are temporarily stopped. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect lever 163 is illuminated in rainbow colors. At this time, the first revival sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 415(8), the role effect is executed, and the left movable role 115A, the center movable role 115B, and the right movable role 115C move to positions where they overlap the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role fifth effect image 539 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and the rainbow light emission of the effect lever 163 continues. At this time, the first big win notification sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 405 (47) and (48), Figures 406 (49) to (56), and Figures 407 (57) and (58) are performed.

(Variation of Variation Example 49)
Figures 416 to 421 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, a modified example of the variable performance example 49 (see 393 to 398) will be described with reference to Figs. 416 to 421. In this modified example, when the "7" that is the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops, a pseudo consecutive performance is executed. In addition, in this modified example, the expectation level is suggested depending on whether the stopping sound of the middle row decorative pattern 41 is output or not.
In the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 387 (1) to (5) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 416 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the sixth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 416(2), a lever operation presentation starts, and lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation presentation is the first period.
Then, when the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 416 (3), the "7" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness performs the first temporary stop operation. At this time, the decorative patterns 41 on the left and right rows become invisible (difficult to see or cannot be seen). Also, at this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 416 (4), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 416(5), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "213", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x2", which indicates that the second change of the decorative patterns 41 will be performed. At this time, a first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 416 (6), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode, and the sixth variation operation is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size, and the display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 416 (7), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 416 (8), the left row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the sixth variable action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 417(9), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eighth stop motion. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 417 (10), the right row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 417 (11), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, and the eighth stopping action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eleventh stopping effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stopping sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 417 (12), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the tenth reach action is performed. At this time, the first reach line image 509 and the first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, the first reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 417 (13), the middle row decorative pattern 41, "7", moves from the top to the bottom.

Next, as shown in FIG. 417(14), the "7" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 performs the first temporary stop operation, and the pseudo consecutive performance starts. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (pseudo consecutive stop sound) of the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" stopping is not output. And, in this modified example, it is suggested that the expectation is higher when the pseudo consecutive stop sound is not output than when the pseudo consecutive stop sound is output (see FIG. 416(3)).
Next, as shown in FIG. 417 (15), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 continue the first temporary stop motion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 417 (16), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "474", are displayed in the seventh viewing mode, and the first temporary stop operation is being performed. Also at this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 shows the text "x3", indicating that the decorative pattern 41 will change for the third time. Also at this time, a second re-change sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the decorative pattern 41 will change again, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 418 (17), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual confirmation mode, and the sixth variation operation is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size, and the display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 418 (18), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Fig. 418 (19), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, the first step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 418 (20), the second step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a second step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 418 (21), the third step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, the third step sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 418 (22), the left row decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the sixth variable action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 418 (23), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the eighth stop motion. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the first stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 418 (24), the right-row decorative symbol 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the sixth varying action. At this time, the left-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stopping action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 419 (25), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode, and the eighth stopping action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eleventh stopping effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stopping sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 419 (26), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the twelfth reach action is performed. At this time, the second reach line image 531 and the second reach notification image 532 are displayed. Also, at this time, the third reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 419 (27), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop action. At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable action. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to green. At this time, a second variable sound is output. That is, the sound effect (variable sound) is different when the display mode of the variable image 51 changes to red (see FIG. 389 (20)) and when it changes to green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 419 (28), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 419 (29), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 419 (30), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 419 (31), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 419 (32), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 420 (33), the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stopping action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 420 (34), the SP reach performance starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 420 (35), an effect is executed in which the "4" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye changes to a "3". At this time, the "3" decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye performs a symbol change action. Also, at this time, a change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the decorative symbols 41 of the reach eye. Also, at this time, a symbol change sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 420 (36), the development teasing effect is started, and the development symbol 41 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41, "4", is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 420 (37), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 420 (38), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 420 (39), the development symbol 41 stops and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is hidden. At this time, the development effect image 534 is displayed around the development symbol 41. At this time, a development stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 420 (40), the development performance is executed. At this time, the role performance is executed, and the middle movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 4 effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the 4th role sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 421 (41), the SPSP reach effect starts, and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourteenth visual recognition mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 421 (42), the lever operation effect starts, and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Pull!", which encourages the operation of the effect lever 163. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits white light. At this time, a second lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation effect is the second period.
Then, when the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 421 (43), "343", which is three rows of decorative patterns 41, is displayed in the 15th visual mode. At this time, the sixth stop sound is output. Also, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 421 (44), the highly decorative three-row decorative pattern 41 "343" performs the first temporary stop motion. Also, at this time, there is no sound.
Next, as shown in FIG. 421 (45), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "343", are fixed and stopped.

In this way, the execution condition of the pseudo consecutive performance may be not only the stopping of the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 but also the stopping of the predetermined middle row decorative symbols 41. In this case, the "7" which is the predetermined middle row decorative symbol 41 is also regarded as a special symbol.
In addition, if no sound effect (pseudo consecutive stop sound) is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is the trigger for the pseudo consecutive performance, stops at "7", various performances that have a high expectation of a jackpot game being executed may be performed thereafter.

In addition, in the variable performance example 43 (see Fig. 376 to Fig. 379), the pseudo consecutive performance may be executed by stopping the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" instead of the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 (see Fig. 377 (13)). In this case, in the variable performance example 43, when the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" stops, a sound effect (pseudo consecutive stop sound) may be output.
Also, in the variable performance example 51 (see Figs. 400 to 407), the pseudo consecutive performance may be executed by stopping the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" instead of the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 (see Figs. 401 (9) and (16)). In this case, in the variable performance example 51, when the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" stops, the sound effect (pseudo consecutive stop sound) may not be output.

(Variation of Variation Example 48)
Next, a modified example of the variation performance example 48 will be explained.
First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 387(1) to (8) and Fig. 388(9) to (14) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 422(1), a zone execution image 530 is displayed. At this time, the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth visual recognition mode and performs the sixth variable action.
Next, as shown in Fig. 422 (2), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eighth stopping operation. At this time, the eleventh stopping effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the twenty-second stopping sound, which is the sound effect of the decorative pattern 41 stopping, is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 422 (3), the right row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 422 (4), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode, and the eighth stopping action is performed, starting the reach performance. At this time, the eleventh stopping effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the twenty-second stopping sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 422 (5), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and a 13th reach action, which is the action of the decorative pattern 41 when a reach is achieved (when the reach performance starts), is performed. When the 13th reach action is being performed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed as if raising the right hand. At this time, a first reach line image 509 and a first reach notification image 510 are displayed. Also, at this time, a first reach sound is output.
In this way, different reach actions may be executed for each number of the decorative pattern 41.
In addition, in a modified example of variable performance example 48, the 14th stop sound (see Figure 308 (2)) may be output instead of the 22nd stop sound.
In addition, in this embodiment, as a variable performance, a variable performance shown as a modified example of variable performance example 48 may be provided instead of variable performance example 48, or a variable performance shown as a modified example of variable performance example 48 may be provided together with variable performance example 48.

(Example of variation 58)
Figures 423 and 424 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 58) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 423 and Fig. 424. The variable performance example 58 is a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery based on the winning of the first start hole 121 in the normal game state is a miss, and is an example of a variable performance in which the stage (performance mode) controlled by the performance control unit 300 changes.
In the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in FIG. 423(1), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56, "213", are fixed and stopped by the performance control unit 300 as the previous special pattern is stopped and displayed. Also, one reserved image 52 is displayed. Also, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the first stage (first performance mode).
Next, as shown in FIG. 423(2), the variable performance starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and the first start operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 423 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a third visual appearance and perform a first varying operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 423(4), a stage change image 585 is displayed.
Next, the stage (presentation mode) controlled by the presentation control unit 300 changes from the first stage (first presentation mode) to the second stage (second presentation mode), and the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the second stage, as shown in Fig. 423 (5). At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth viewing mode, and a fourth changing operation is performed.

Next, as shown in Figure 423 (6), the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and a fourth variable action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 423(7), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stop motion. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the left of the left row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 423 (8), the right row decorative pattern 41 "2" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and the fourth variable action is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 424(9), the right-row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stop motion. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 424 (10), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "1" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and the fourth variable action is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 424 (11), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the fifth stop operation. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed on the right side of the middle row decorative symbol 41. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 424 (12), the visual appearance of the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes the seventh visual appearance, so that all three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual appearance and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 424 (13), along with the stopped display of the special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, namely "412", are fixed and stopped (displayed in the first visual mode).

(Example of variation performance 59)
Figure 425 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 59) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 425. The variable performance example 59 is a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery based on the winning of the first start hole 121 in the normal game state is a miss, and is an example of a variable performance in which the stage (performance mode) controlled by the performance control unit 300 changes.
In the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 423 (1) and (2) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 425 (1), in the first stage, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 425(2), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 425(3), the role production is executed, and the right movable role 115C moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role third effect image 526 is displayed around the right movable role 115C on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the third role sound is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.
The role effect shown in FIG. 425(3) is a pre-determination effect for the reserved ball that occurs due to winning the first starting hole 121. Although not shown, the same role effect as that shown in FIG. 425(3) is executed in the variable performance for this reserved ball. Therefore, the role effect shown in FIG. 425(3) can also be regarded as a continuous performance. A continuous performance is a performance that is executed across multiple reserved memories.

Next, as shown in FIG. 425(4), the lever operation effect is executed, and the lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first lever sound is output. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode. The effective operation period of this lever operation effect is the first period.
When the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, a first operation image 504 is displayed as shown in Fig. 425 (5). At this time, a first operation sound is output.
425(6), the first operation image 504 is not displayed. Also, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 425(7), a stage change image 585 is displayed.
Next, the stage (presentation mode) controlled by the presentation control unit 300 changes from the first stage (first presentation mode) to the second stage (second presentation mode), and the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the second stage, as shown in Fig. 425 (9). At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth viewing mode, and a fourth changing operation is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, as shown in the variation performance example 58, when the stage controlled by the performance control unit 300 changes, the display of the stage change image 585 and the change path switching (switching from the change path shown in FIG. 423(3) to the change path shown in FIG. 423(5)) are executed. More specifically, after the change performance starts and before the specific performance starts, the display of the stage change image 585 and the change path switching are executed. Examples of the specific performance include a display in the fourth viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41, a display in the fifth viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41, a display in the sixth viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41, and a display in the seventh viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the variation performance example 59, even if a specific performance starts after the variation performance starts, when a role-play performance or a lever operation performance (continuous performance) is being executed, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path are not executed. That is, in this embodiment, when a role-play performance or a lever operation performance (continuous performance) is being executed, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path are restricted.
In this case, compared to when the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the change path are executed while a reel effect or lever operation effect (continuous effect) is being executed, it is possible to prevent the player from losing focus of either the display of the stage change image 585, the switching of the change path, or the reel effect or lever operation effect (continuous effect).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the change performance starts in the first stage, the first change path (see FIG. 251-1 (1)) is used, and when the change performance starts in the second stage, the second change path (see FIG. 251-1 (4)) is used, but when the special performance (display of stage change image 585) is executed after the change performance starts in the first mode, the second change path is used. In this case, the player can be made to feel the surprise of the second change path being used.

In addition, in the variable performance example 58 and the variable performance example 59, examples have been described in which the stage controlled by the performance control unit 300 changes from the first stage to the second stage, but this is not limited to this.
The stage may be changed from the first stage to the third stage, from the second stage to the third stage, from the third stage to the first stage, or from the third stage to the second stage. In this case, the decorative pattern 41 is changed according to a change mode corresponding to the stage before the change and the stage after the change. Also, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed according to a visual mode in the same manner as shown in the change performance example 58 and the change performance example 59.

In addition, the display of stage change image 585, the switching of the display mode of stage image 61, and the switching of the change path shown in change performance example 58 and change performance example 59 may be performed in any of the change performance examples and modified examples described above. In this case, the display of stage change image 585, the switching of the display mode of stage image 61, and the switching of the change path may be performed or restricted at the same timing as shown in change performance example 58 and change performance example 59 (before a specific performance starts after a change performance starts, when a role device performance or lever operation performance (continuous performance) is not being performed, etc.).

In addition, in the variation performance example 59, in a variation performance in which the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path are determined, when a reel performance or lever operation performance (continuous performance) is being executed, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path are restricted, and when a reel performance or lever operation performance (continuous performance) is not being executed, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path are executed, but this is not limited to the above.
In a variation performance in which the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path are determined, when a role-play performance or a lever operation performance (continuous performance) is executed, the performance control unit 300 may not execute the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path in this variation performance. Then, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path may be executed in the next variation performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, in one change performance, when a reel performance or lever operation performance (continuous performance) is being executed, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the change path are restricted, and when a reel performance or lever operation performance (continuous performance) is not being executed, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the change path are executed, but this is not limited to this.
In a variation performance in which the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path were supposed to be executed (the execution of the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path was set in the variation performance pattern), if a role-play performance or a lever operation performance (continuous performance) is executed, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path may be restricted in this variation performance. In this case, in a variation performance in which a role-play performance or a lever operation performance (continuous performance) is not executed among the next and subsequent variation performances, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path may be executed.

(Example of effects when the effect lever 163 is not operated)
Figure 426 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation when the presentation lever 163 is not operated during the valid operation period in the lever operation presentation.
First, we will explain the variation performance example 10 described with reference to Figures 273 to 278. After the performance shown in Figure 274 (10) is executed, the lever operation performance starts as shown in Figure 426 (1), and the lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first lever sound is output.

If the effect lever 163 is not operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, as shown in Fig. 426(2), the display of the second image 527 during operation (see Fig. 274(12)) and the output of the second operation sound are not executed. That is, the manner of the sound output differs depending on whether the effect lever 163 is operated or not during the effective operation period.
In addition, the performance shown in Fig. 426 (2) is not limited to the performance when the performance lever 163 is not operated in the variable performance example 10. In the variable performance in which the same performance as that shown in Fig. 274 (11) is performed, if the performance lever 163 is not operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation performance shown in Fig. 274 (11), the performance shown in Fig. 426 (2) may be performed.
In addition, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in FIG. 330 (11) is performed, if the presentation lever 163 is not operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation presentation shown in FIG. 330 (11), the fourth operation sound (see FIG. 330 (12)) may not be output, as in the presentation shown in FIG. 426 (2).
In addition, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in FIG. 388 (11) is performed, if the presentation lever 163 is not operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation presentation shown in FIG. 388 (11), the sixth operation sound (see FIG. 388 (12)) may not be output, as in the presentation shown in FIG. 426 (2).

Next, we will explain the variation performance example 11 described with reference to Figures 279 to 284. After the performance shown in Figure 279 (1) is performed, as shown in Figure 426 (3), the lever operation performance starts and lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first lever sound is output.

If the effect lever 163 is not operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 stop, as shown in FIG. 426 (4). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive symbols 41. Also, at this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 become invisible (difficult to see or invisible), and a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output. In other words, the type of sound output is the same whether the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period (see FIG. 279 (3)) or not.

In addition, the performance shown in Fig. 426 (4) is not limited to the performance when the performance lever 163 is not operated in the variable performance example 11. In the variable performance in which the same performance as that shown in Fig. 279 (2) is performed, if the performance lever 163 is not operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation performance shown in Fig. 279 (2), the performance shown in Fig. 426 (4) may be performed.
Also, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in Fig. 286(8) is performed, if the presentation lever 163 is not operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 286(8), the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 may stop, the pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 may be displayed, and a pseudo consecutive stop sound may be output, as in the presentation shown in Fig. 426(4). In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether the presentation lever 163 is operated or not during the operation effective period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 286(8).

Also, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in Fig. 335(2) is performed, if the presentation lever 163 is not operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 335(2), the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 may stop, the pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 may be displayed, and a pseudo consecutive stop sound may be output, as in the presentation shown in Fig. 426(4). In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether the presentation lever 163 is operated or not during the operation effective period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 335(2).
Also, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in Fig. 342(8) is performed, if the presentation lever 163 is not operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 342(8), the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 may stop, the pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 may be displayed, and a pseudo consecutive stop sound may be output, as in the presentation shown in Fig. 426(4). In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether the presentation lever 163 is operated or not during the operation effective period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 342(8).
Also, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in Fig. 393(2) is performed, if the presentation lever 163 is not operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 393(2), the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 may stop, the pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 may be displayed, and a pseudo consecutive stop sound may be output, as in the presentation shown in Fig. 426(4). In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether the presentation lever 163 is operated or not during the operation effective period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 393(2).
Also, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in Fig. 400(8) is performed, if the presentation lever 163 is not operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 400(8), the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 may stop, the pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 may be displayed, and a pseudo consecutive stop sound may be output, as in the presentation shown in Fig. 426(4). In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether the presentation lever 163 is operated or not during the operation effective period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 400(8).

Next, we will explain the variation performance example 11 described with reference to Figures 279 to 284. After the performance shown in Figure 283 (37) is performed, the lever operation performance starts as shown in Figure 426 (5), and lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the second lever sound is output.

If the effect lever 163 is not operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation effect, as shown in Fig. 426 (6), the decorative pattern 41 of the missing number is displayed in the 15th visual mode, and the 6th stop sound is output. Also, when the 6th stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output. That is, the manner of the sound output is the same whether the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period (see Fig. 283 (39)) or not.
In addition, the performance shown in Fig. 426 (6) is not limited to the performance when the performance lever 163 is not operated in the variable performance example 11. In the variable performance in which the same performance as that shown in Fig. 283 (38) is performed, if the performance lever 163 is not operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation performance shown in Fig. 283 (38), the performance shown in Fig. 426 (6) may be performed.
Also, in a variable performance in which the same performance as that shown in Fig. 301(1) is performed, if the performance lever 163 is not operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation performance shown in Fig. 301(1), the decorative pattern 41 of the miss may be displayed in the 15th visual mode, a 6th stop sound may be output, and then the variable BGM may not be output, and the revival teasing image 520 may be displayed, followed by silence, as in the performance shown in Fig. 426(6). In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether the performance lever 163 is operated or not during the operation effective period in the lever operation performance shown in Fig. 301(1).

Next, we will explain the variation effect example 13, which has been explained with reference to Figures 286 to 293. After the effect shown in Figure 291 (43) is performed, as shown in Figure 426 (7), the lever operation effect starts, the lever operation image 502 and the lever effect image 557 are displayed, the effect lever 163 lights up in red, and the third lever sound is output.

If the effect lever 163 is not operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, the doublet decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, a success image 538 is displayed, a vibration effect starts, the effect lever 163 emits rainbow light, and a first success sound is output, as shown in Fig. 426 (8). That is, the manner of the sound output is the same whether the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period (see Fig. 291 (45)) or not.
In addition, the performance shown in Fig. 426 (8) is not limited to the performance when the performance lever 163 is not operated in the variable performance example 13. In the variable performance in which the same performance as that shown in Fig. 291 (44) is performed, if the performance lever 163 is not operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation performance shown in Fig. 291 (44), the performance shown in Fig. 426 (8) may be performed.

Also, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in Fig. 294(1) is performed, if the presentation lever 163 is not operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 294(1), a success image 538 may be displayed, a vibration presentation may be started, the presentation lever 163 may emit rainbow light, and a first success sound may be output, similar to the presentation shown in Fig. 426(8), after a delay from the provisional stop of the decorative pattern 41 of the doublet. In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether the presentation lever 163 is operated or not during the operation effective period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 294(1).
295(2) in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in Fig. 295(2) is performed, if the presentation lever 163 is not operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 295(2), the decorative pattern 41 of the repeated numbers may temporarily stop, the success image 538 may be displayed, a vibration presentation may be executed, the presentation lever 163 may emit rainbow light, and a first success sound may be output, as in the presentation shown in Fig. 426(8). In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether the presentation lever 163 is operated or not during the effective operation period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 295(2).

Also, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in Fig. 347 (44) is performed, if the presentation lever 163 is not operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 347 (44), the decorative pattern 41 of the repeated numbers may temporarily stop, the success image 538 may be displayed, a vibration presentation may start, the presentation lever 163 may emit rainbow light, and a first success sound may be output, as in the presentation shown in Fig. 426 (8). In other words, the type of sound output may be the same whether the presentation lever 163 is operated or not during the effective operation period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 347 (44).
Also, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in Fig. 350(1) is performed, if the presentation lever 163 is not operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 350(1), a success image 538 may be displayed, a vibration presentation may be started, the presentation lever 163 may emit rainbow light, and a first success sound may be output, similar to the presentation shown in Fig. 426(8), after a delay from the provisional stop of the double-digit decorative pattern 41. In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether the presentation lever 163 is operated or not during the operation effective period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 350(1).
Also, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in Fig. 351(2) is performed, if the presentation lever 163 is not operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 351(2), the decorative pattern 41 of the repeated numbers may temporarily stop, the success image 538 may be displayed, a vibration presentation may be executed, the presentation lever 163 may emit rainbow light, and a first success sound may be output, as in the presentation shown in Fig. 426(8). In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether the presentation lever 163 is operated or not during the effective operation period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 351(2).

Also, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in Fig. 405 (44) is performed, if the presentation lever 163 is not operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 405 (44), the decorative pattern 41 of the repeated numbers may temporarily stop, the success image 538 may be displayed, a vibration presentation may start, the presentation lever 163 may emit rainbow light, and a first success sound may be output, as in the presentation shown in Fig. 426 (8). In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether the presentation lever 163 is operated or not during the effective operation period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 405 (44).
Also, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in Fig. 408(1) is performed, if the presentation lever 163 is not operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 408(1), then, after a delay with respect to the provisional stop of the doublet decorative pattern 41, a success image 538 may be displayed, a vibration presentation may be started, the presentation lever 163 may emit rainbow light, and a first success sound may be output, similar to the presentation shown in Fig. 426(8). In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether the presentation lever 163 is operated or not during the operation effective period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 408(1).
Also, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in Fig. 409(2) is performed, if the presentation lever 163 is not operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 409(2), the decorative pattern 41 of the repeated numbers may temporarily stop, the success image 538 may be displayed, a vibration presentation may be executed, the presentation lever 163 may emit rainbow light, and a first success sound may be output, as in the presentation shown in Fig. 426(8). In other words, the type of sound output may be the same whether the presentation lever 163 is operated or not during the effective operation period in the lever operation presentation shown in Fig. 409(2).

As described above, in this embodiment, the lever operation performance includes a first operation performance that can be executed before the start of the specific performance, and a second operation performance that can be executed after the start of the specific performance. The specific performance includes predetermined performances executed in the variable performance, such as a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, a reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), a pseudo consecutive performance, a zone performance, a step performance, and a role performance. In the variable performance (variable performance example 10, etc.) in which the first operation performance is executed, the performance control unit 300 can output different types of sounds depending on whether the performance lever 163 is operated (see FIG. 274 (12)) or not (see FIG. 426 (2)) during the operation effective period in the first operation performance. In addition, in a variable presentation (such as variable presentation example 13) in which a special game (jackpot game) is played and a second operation presentation is executed, the presentation control unit 300 can make the type of sound output common when the presentation lever 163 is operated (see Figure 291 (45)) during the effective operation period in the second operation presentation and when it is not operated (see Figure 426 (8)).
In this case, before the start of the specific performance, an original sound effect when the performance lever 163 is operated in the lever operation performance is output, so that the interest in the lever operation performance can be increased even before the start of the specific performance. Also, after the start of the specific performance, even if the player forgets to operate the performance lever 163 in the lever operation performance, the same sound as when the performance lever 163 is operated is output, so that the player can enjoy the performance with high importance more reliably in the final stage of the variable performance. Therefore, the interest in the game can be increased.

Also, in this embodiment, it has been explained that in the big win variation presentation, the manner of the sound output may be the same when the presentation lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the first operation presentation (see FIG. 286 (8) and FIG. 287 (9)) and when it is not operated. On the other hand, in the loss variation presentation, it has been explained that the manner of the sound output may be different when the presentation lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the first operation presentation (see FIG. 255 (2)) and when it is not operated (see FIG. 252 (6)).
In this embodiment, the manner of the sound output when the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the first operation effect is more likely to be different when the loss variation effect is executed than when the big win variation effect is executed. Therefore, even if the effect lever 163 is not operated during the effective operation period in the first operation effect, it is easy for the player to recognize which effect was used to reach the big win.

In addition, the fact that the type of sound output when the performance lever 163 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period in the first operation presentation is more likely to be different when a miss variation presentation is executed than when a jackpot variation presentation is executed includes the fact that when a jackpot variation presentation is executed, the type of sound output when the performance lever 163 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period in the first operation presentation is always the same (0%), and that when a miss variation presentation is executed, the type of sound output when the performance lever 163 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period in the first operation presentation is always different (100%).
Furthermore, if the type of sound output when the performance lever 163 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period in the first operation presentation is more likely to be different when a miss variation presentation is executed than when a jackpot variation presentation is executed, the type of sound output when the performance lever 163 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period in the first operation presentation may be the same when a miss variation presentation is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the manner of the sound output when the performance lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation performance is more likely to be the same when the big win variation performance is executed than when the miss variation performance is executed. Therefore, even if the performance lever 163 is not operated during the effective operation period in the first operation performance, it is easy for the player to recognize which performance was used to reach the big win.
In addition, the fact that the type of sound output when the performance lever 163 is operated and when it is not operated during the effective operation period of the lever operation performance is more likely to be common when a jackpot variation performance is executed than when a miss variation performance is executed includes the fact that when a miss variation performance is executed, the type of sound output when the performance lever 163 is operated and when it is not operated during the effective operation period of the lever operation performance is always different (0%), and when a jackpot variation performance is executed, the type of sound output when the performance lever 163 is operated and when it is not operated during the effective operation period of the lever operation performance is always the same (100%).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a miss variation performance is executed, the output sound may be made to be always the same (100%) when the performance lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation performance during the SPSP reach performance (see FIG. 277 (35)) and when it is not operated. Also, when a big win variation performance is executed, the output sound may be made to be always the same (100%) when the performance lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation performance during the SPSP reach performance (see FIG. 291 (44)).
In other words, when a miss variation presentation is executed and when a jackpot variation presentation is executed, the tendency for the type of sound output to be common to both cases where the presentation lever 163 is operated and where it is not operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation presentation during the SPSP reach presentation may be the same.

In addition, in this embodiment, the type of sound output when the performance lever 163 is operated and when it is not operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation performance is more likely to be different when a miss variation performance (second variation performance) in which a lever operation performance (see Figure 252 (5)) is performed without a reach performance is executed than when a miss variation performance (first variation performance) in which a reach performance (see Figure 275 (19)) and a lever operation performance (see Figure 277 (35)) are executed.
In addition, the fact that the type of sound output when the performance lever 163 is operated and when it is not operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation performance is more likely to be different when the second variation performance is executed than when the first variation performance is executed includes the fact that when the first variation performance is executed, the type of sound output when the performance lever 163 is operated and when it is not operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation performance is always the same (0%), and that when the second variation performance is executed, the type of sound output when the performance lever 163 is operated and when it is not operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation performance is always different (100%).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the lever operation image 502 is displayed, a sound effect (see FIG. 252 (5)) is output, but if the effect lever 163 is not operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, no sound effect is output (see FIG. 252 (6)). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to sound effects being output even when the player has not intentionally operated the effect lever 163.

(Example of change performance 60)
Figure 427 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 60) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 427. The variable performance example 60 is a variable performance based on winning the first start hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
In addition, FIG. 427 is a variation performance that is executed when "EB3" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 246. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that match each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 285 (1) to (8), Fig. 286 (1) to (8), Fig. 287 (9) to (16), Fig. 288 (17) to (24), Fig. 289 (25) to (32), Fig. 290 (33) to (40), Fig. 291 (41) to (48), and Fig. 292 (49) are performed. Next, as shown in Fig. 427 (1), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth mode of the 16th visual mode and stops. At this time, the doublet first effect image 556 is displayed, the vibration effect continues, and the light emission in rainbow colors of the effect lever 163 continues. At this time, the eighth stop sound is output.
Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 427 (2), the lever operation effect is started, and the lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits light in white. Also, at this time, the fourth lever sound is output. The operation effective period of this lever operation effect is the third period.

When the lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, the promotion effect is executed, and the repeating decorative pattern 41 "777" is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode, as shown in FIG. 427(3). At this time, the first big win effect image 540 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 427 (4), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped. At this time, the 14th stop effect image 586 is displayed so as to surround each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the 23rd stop sound, which is the sound effect of the doublet decorative symbols 41 stopping, is output.
Then, with the special symbol being displayed, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbol 56, ie, "777", are displayed and fixed.

In addition, in the variable performance example 60, even if the performance lever 163 is not operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation performance shown in Figure 427 (2), the same performance as that shown in Figures 427 (3) and (4) may be performed.
In addition, a variable presentation may be provided in which the same presentation as shown in Figures 341 (1) to (8), 342 (1) to (8), 343 (9) to (16), 344 (17) to (24), 345 (25) to (32), 346 (33) to (40), 347 (41) to (48), and 348 (49) is performed, and then the same presentation as shown in Figures 427 (1) to (4) is performed.
In addition, a variable presentation may be provided in which the same presentation as shown in Figures 399 (1) to (8), 400 (1) to (8), 401 (9) to (16), 402 (17) to (24), 403 (25) to (32), 404 (33) to (40), 405 (41) to (48), and 406 (49) is performed, and then the same presentation as shown in Figures 427 (1) to (4) is performed.

(Variations of the pattern change effects)
In the present embodiment, the symbol change effect is described as the change in the number of the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 (see FIG. 276 (28)). Here, the symbol change effect is not limited to the change in the number of the reach-eye decorative symbol 41.
Figure 428 shows a modified example of the pattern change presentation.
First, as shown in Fig. 428 (1), in the variable presentation, the SP reach presentation starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed. Also, the "4" which is the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in Fig. 428 (2), the display color of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 changes from white to red. At this time, change effect images 533 are displayed around each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41, and a symbol change sound is output.
In this way, the pattern change effect may be an effect in which the display color of the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye changes.
In addition, although an example in which the display color of the entire reach-eye decorative pattern 41 changes is shown in Fig. 428 (2), the present invention is not limited to this. The pattern change effect may be an effect in which the display color of at least a part of the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 changes.

Also, for example, from the state shown in Fig. 428(1), as shown in Fig. 428(3), each of the symbol effect images 587 is displayed so as to surround each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41. At this time, a symbol change sound is output.
In this way, the symbol change effect may be an effect in which the display mode of the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 changes. In other words, the change in the decorative mode of the symbol may include a change in the display color of the symbol or the addition of a new decorative image to the symbol.

(Variation of SP reach effect in the second stage)
Next, a modified example of the SP reach effect executed in the second stage will be described. Below, a modified example of the SP reach effect in the variation effect example 25 described with reference to Figs. 322 to 324 will be described.
First, as shown in FIG. 429(1), the SP reach performance starts, and an SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 429(2), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Fig. 250-3(17)) and performs the eighth varying operation, which is the operation when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is being displayed and varying. When the eighth varying operation is being performed, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed to move from the lower right corner to the upper left corner of the image display unit 114 along the eighth varying path (see Fig. 251-1(8)).
Next, as shown in Figure 429 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode and performs the eighth variable action.
Next, as shown in Fig. 429 (4), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the SP promotion second effect image 519 is displayed on the upper right side and the lower left side of the middle row decorative pattern 41 on the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in FIG. 429(5), the middle row decorative pattern 41, “4”, is displayed in the fourth mode of the twelfth visual mode. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in such a manner that it returns to the lower right corner of the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 429(6), the "4" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 passes, and the "3" which is the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth mode of the twelfth visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the 24th stop sound, which is the sound effect of the middle row decorative pattern 41 stopping, is output. Also, when the 24th stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 323 (14) to (16) and Figure 324 (17) are performed.

In this way, in the second stage, SP reach effects and variable paths that are not used in the first or third stage may be used.
In addition, the effect shown in Fig. 429 is not limited to the SP reach effect. The effect shown in Fig. 429 may be performed as the SPSP reach effect in the second stage.

In addition, the effect shown in Fig. 429 may be an SP reach effect and a variable path that are not used in the second stage or the third stage, but are used only in the first stage. In this case, the effect shown in Fig. 429 may be performed as the SPSP reach effect in the first stage.
In addition, the effect shown in Fig. 429 may be an SP reach effect and a variable path that are not used in the first stage or the second stage, but are used only in the third stage. In this case, the effect shown in Fig. 429 may be performed as the SPSP reach effect in the third stage.

(Example of variation 61)
Next, referring to Fig. 430, a specific explanation will be given of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 61) performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like. The variable presentation example 61 is a variable presentation example based on a game ball winning the second start port 122 in a special time-saving game state. The variable presentation example 61 is also a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach presentation is not executed, and is a variable presentation based on the number of reserved balls for winning the second start port 122 being "1".
The change performance shown in FIG. 430 is executed when "EH1" is selected as the "change performance pattern" in FIG. 248.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.
In addition, each of the change performance examples from change performance example 61 to change performance example 70 described later is a change performance example when the change starts in the fourth stage.

As shown in FIG. 430 (1), the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114 as the previous special pattern is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300. This decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the fourth stage, and is displayed in a display mode that is less decorative than the highly decorative decorative patterns 41 in the first to third stages (see FIG. 252 (1), etc.). At this time, one reserved image 52, reserved number display 55, small pattern 56, and stage image 61 are displayed on the image display unit 114. In addition, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the fourth stage (fourth performance mode). The fourth stage is a performance mode in the special time-saving game state. At this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting port 122 shows "1", which is the reserved number for winning at the second starting port 122. Also, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the first visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 430(2), the variable performance starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second viewing mode, and a thirteenth start operation, which is the operation when starting the variable, is performed. When the thirteenth start operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an action such that they move upward while swinging left and right. At this time, a thirteenth start effect image 588 is displayed above each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. Also, in the second stage, the variable BGM continues to be output from the start to the end of the variable performance, but this variable BGM is a different piece of music from any of the variable BGM in the first stage to the third stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 430 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a third visual mode and perform a first varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 430 (4), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first varying operation.
Next, as shown in Fig. 430(5), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the first varying operation. The moving speed of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 at this time is faster than the moving speed of any of the decorative symbols 41 displayed in the fifth visual mode in stages 1 to 3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 430(6), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode, and perform an eleventh stop action, which is the action when the variation stops. When the eleventh stop action is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed to move so as to vibrate up and down. At this time, a fifteenth stop effect image 589 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, a twenty-fifth stop sound, which is the sound effect when the decorative symbols 41 stop, is output.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 430(7).
As described above, in the variable presentation in which the reach presentation is not executed in the fourth stage, the decorative pattern 41 may stop without being displayed in the seventh visual mode.

(Example of variation 62)
Figure 431 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 62) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 431. The variable performance example 62 is a variable performance example of the decorative pattern 41 based on the game ball winning the second start hole 122 in the special time-saving game state. The variable performance example 62 is a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed, and is a variable performance based on the number of reserved balls for winning the second start hole 122 being "4".
In addition, FIG. 431 is a variation performance that is executed when "EH3" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 248. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 431(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the determination of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 in the image display unit 114. In addition, four reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the second starting port 122 shows "4".
Next, as shown in FIG. 431 (2), the variable performance starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol. At this time, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and the thirteenth start operation is performed. At this time, the thirteenth start effect image 588 is also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 431 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the first varying operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 431 (4), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first varying operation.
Next, as shown in Fig. 431 (5), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the first varying action. The moving speed of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 at this time is faster than the moving speed of any of the decorative symbols 41 displayed in the fifth visual mode in stages 1 to 3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 431 (6), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the eleventh stop operation. At this time, the fifteenth stop effect image 589 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twenty-fifth stop sound is output.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 431 (7).

(Example of variation 63)
Figure 432 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 63) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 432. The variable performance example 63 is a variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed.
The change presentation shown in FIG. 432 is executed when "EH4" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in FIG. 248.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 430 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 432 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 432 (2), the reach-inducing performance is started, and the "4" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the reach-inducing seventh effect image 590 is displayed below each of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows.

Next, as shown in Fig. 432 (3), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed lower than when they are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the eighth reach-inducing effect image 591 is displayed above and below each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.
Next, as shown in Fig. 432 (4), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third mode of the ninth visual mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the left decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stopping action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 432(5), the right row decorative pattern 41 and the middle row decorative pattern 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the eleventh stop operation. At this time, the fifteenth stop effect image 589 is displayed around each of the right row decorative pattern 41 and the middle row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the twenty-fifth stop sound is output.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 432(6).

(Example of variation 64)
Figures 433 to 435 are figures showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 64) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 433 to Fig. 435. The variable performance example 64 is a variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SP reach performance is executed.
In addition, the change presentation shown in Figures 433 to 435 is executed when "EH5" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in Figure 248.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 433(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the determination of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue. The display mode of blue of this reserved image 52 may be the display mode at the start of display, or may be a result of a change in the display mode in the variation performance executed while this reserved image 52 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 433(2), with the start of the change display of the next special pattern, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second visual confirmation mode, and a fourteenth start operation, which is an operation when the change starts, is performed. When the fourteenth start operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in an action such that they expand while shaking up and down and left and right. At this time, a fourteenth effect image 592 is displayed at the start around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the change image 51, and the change image 51 is displayed in blue. Also, at this time, a fourth start sound, which is a sound effect of starting the change, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 433 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 433(4), the role performance is executed, and the center movable role 115B and the right movable role 115C move to a position where they overlap with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 12th effect image 593 is displayed around the center movable role 115B and the right movable role 115C in the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the 11th role sound, which is the sound effect of the role performance, is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.

Next, as shown in Fig. 433 (5), the reach-inducing performance is started, and the "4" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the reach-inducing seventh effect image 590 is displayed below each of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows.
Next, as shown in Fig. 433 (6), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed lower than when they are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the eighth reach-inducing effect image 591 is displayed above and below each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 433 (7), the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode, and a twelfth stopping action is performed, which is the action taken when the fluctuation stops. When the twelfth stopping action is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed so as to expand while vibrating, respectively. The twelfth stopping action can also be considered as a fourteenth reach action, which is the action taken by the decorative symbols 41 when a reach is achieved (when the reach performance starts). At this time, a sixteenth effect image 594 is displayed around each of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows. At this time, a seventh reach sound, which is the sound effect indicating that a reach has been achieved, is output. The seventh reach sound can also be considered as a twenty-sixth stopping sound, which is the sound effect indicated when the decorative symbols 41 have stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 433(8), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a shrinking manner. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are hidden (hard to see or cannot be seen).
Next, as shown in FIG. 434(9), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode. At this time, the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in such a manner that it moves toward the upper left corner and the upper right corner of the image display unit 114 while shrinking. That is, the operation mode (movement mode) when the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode is different between the normal game state and the special time-saving game state. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed. The display mode of this transition image 516 is different from that of the transition image 516 in the normal game state (see FIG. 266(4)).
Next, as shown in FIG. 434 (10), the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second temporary stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 434 (11), the SP reach effect starts, and an SP reach image 517 is displayed. This SP reach image 517 has a different display form from the SP reach image 517 in the normal gaming state (see Fig. 266 (6)).
Next, as shown in Fig. 434 (12), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the twelfth visual mode, and performs a ninth varying operation, which is an operation when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is being displayed and varying. When the ninth varying operation is being performed, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an operation such that it moves to the right as it moves downward on the image display unit 114 along the ninth varying path (see Fig. 251-2 (9)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 434 (13), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the SP third effect image 595 is displayed on the left and right sides of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.
Next, as shown in FIG. 434 (14), the lever operation presentation starts, and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Operate!". At this time, a fifth lever sound, which is a sound effect of the lever operation presentation, is output. At this time, the presentation lever 163 emits white light. The effective operation period of this lever operation presentation is the fourth period. The fourth period is, for example, four seconds.

Then, when the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 434 (15), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the fifth mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the 27th stop sound, which is the sound effect of the middle row decorative pattern 41 stopping, is output. Note that even after the 27th stop sound is output, the variable BGM continues to be output.
In addition, even if the effect lever 163 is not operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect shown in Fig. 434 (14), the same effect as that shown in Fig. 434 (15) may be performed. In other words, a common effect may be executed whether or not the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect shown in Fig. 434 (14).

Next, as shown in FIG. 434 (16), the revival prompting effect is started and the revival prompting image 520 is displayed. This revival prompting image 520 has a different display mode from the revival prompting image 520 in the normal game mode (see FIG. 267 (14)). In addition, no sound effect is output in conjunction with the display of the revival prompting image 520, and the output of the variable BGM continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 435 (17), the less decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed and moves up and down.
Next, as shown in Figure 435 (18), the less decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" moves downward and passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" moves from the top to the bottom.

Next, as shown in FIG. 435 (19), the decorative pattern 41 of the mismatch is displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode and the first temporary stop motion is performed. At this time, the stage image 61 is displayed again. Also, at this time, the output of the variable BGM is continued.
Next, as shown in FIG. 435 (20), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 and small patterns 56, "454", are fixed and stopped with the stopping of the special patterns. Note that the output of the variable BGM continues at the end of the variable performance and after the end of the variable performance.

In the variable performance example 64, it has been explained that the variable BGM continues to be output from the start to the end of the variable performance, but this is not limited to this.
When the revival teaser image 520 is displayed (see FIG. 434(16)), the variable BGM does not have to be output. Then, when the stage image 61 is displayed again (see FIG. 435(19)), the variable BGM may be output again.

(Example of variation 65)
Figure 436 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 65) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 436. The variable performance example 12 is a variable performance based on winning the second start hole 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed.
The variation performance shown in Fig. 436 is a variation performance executed when "AF1" is selected as the "pre-determined performance pattern" in Fig. 54 and "EH2" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Fig. 248. In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 436(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. In addition, two reserved images 52 are displayed. At this time, "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the second starting port 122.
Next, as shown in FIG. 436(2), when the next special symbol starts to be displayed, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and a fourteenth start operation is performed. At this time, a fourteenth start effect image 592 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, a fourth start sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 436 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and the first varying operation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 436 (4), the role performance is executed, and the center movable role 115B and the right movable role 115C move to a position where they overlap with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 12 effect image 593 is displayed around the center movable role 115B and the right movable role 115C in the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the third role sound is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 436(5), the display mode of the reserved image 52 changes from the normal display mode to blue. At this time, a fifth change sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the display mode of the reserved image 52 has changed to blue. That is, when the display mode of the reserved image 52 changes to blue in the special time-saving game state, a sound effect different from the sound effect indicating that the display mode of the reserved image 52 has changed to blue in the normal game state (see FIG. 285(6)) is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 436(6), a chance eye effect is executed, and "331" which is three rows of decorative symbols 41 stops. All of these three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in red. At this time, a fourth chance eye effect image 596 is displayed so as to surround the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, a 28th stop sound which is a sound effect when the three rows of decorative symbols 41 stop is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 436 (7), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "331", are fixed and stopped.
In the variation performance example 65, the 14th start action, the 14th effect image 592 at the start, the 4th start sound, the role effect, and the chance eye effect are all examples of the pre-determination effects. Also, these pre-determination effects are effects that make the player expect a big win in the variation effect next to the variation effect when these pre-determination effects are being executed.

(Example of change performance 66)
Figures 437 to 440 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 66) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 437 to Fig. 440. The variable performance example 66 is an example of a variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. Also, the variable performance example 66 is an example of a variable performance executed after the variable performance shown in the variable performance example 65. In other words, the variable performance example 66 is an example of a variable performance showing the lottery result of the special pattern lottery suggested by the blue reserved image 52 (see Fig. 436 (5)) shown in the variable performance example 65.
437 to 440 are variation effects that are executed when "EF1" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 248. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Fig. 437(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the performance control unit 300 stops the determination of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 437(2), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode and perform the fourteenth start operation. At this time, the fourteenth effect image 592 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51, and the variable image 51 is displayed in blue. Also, at this time, the fourth start sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 437 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and the first varying operation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 437(4), the role performance is executed, and the center movable role 115B and the right movable role 115C move to a position where they overlap with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 12 effect image 593 is displayed around the center movable role 115B and the right movable role 115C in the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the third role sound is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 437(5), the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. At this time, a sixth variable sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the display mode of the variable image 51 changes.

437(6), the reach-inducing performance is started, and the left and right decorative symbols 41, "4", are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the reach-inducing seventh effect image 590 is displayed below each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.
Next, as shown in Fig. 437 (7), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed lower than when they are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the eighth reach-inducing effect image 591 is displayed above and below each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in Fig. 437 (8), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode, and the twelfth stopping action is performed. At this time, the sixteenth stop effect image 594 is displayed around each of the left and right decorative symbols 41. At this time, the seventh reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 438(9), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a shrinking manner. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are hidden (hard to see or cannot be seen).
Next, as shown in Fig. 438 (10), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode. At this time, the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in such a manner that it shrinks and moves toward the upper left corner and the upper right corner of the image display section 114. At this time, a transition image 516 is also displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 438 (11), the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second temporary stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 438 (12), the SP reach performance starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 438 (13), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 12th visual mode, and the 9th variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 438 (14), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the SP third effect image 595 is displayed on the left and right sides of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 438 (15), the lever operation presentation starts, and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Operate!". At this time, the presentation lever 163 emits red light. At this time, a sixth lever sound, which is a sound effect of the lever operation presentation, is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation presentation is the fourth period.
Then, when the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 438 (16), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, a success image 538 is displayed. This success image 538 is displayed in a display mode different from the success image 538 (see FIG. 291 (45)) displayed in the normal game state. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect lever 163 vibrates. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a second success sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the success image 538 is displayed, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 439 (17), the reel effect is executed, and the left movable reel 115A, the center movable reel 115B, and the right movable reel 115C each move to a position where they overlap the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel 13th effect image 597 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors. At this time, a second jackpot notification sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 439 (18), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the second big win effect image 598 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, as shown in Fig. 439 (19), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the second big win effect image 598 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues, while the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, as shown in Fig. 439 (20), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the second big win effect image 598 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues, while the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 439 (21), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and stops. At this time, the seventeenth effect image 599 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative patterns 41. At this time, the second big win effect image 598 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues, while the effect lever 163 continues to emit light in rainbow colors. At this time, the twenty-ninth stop sound, which is the sound effect when the doublet decorative pattern 41 stops, is output.
Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 439 (22), the lever operation effect is started and the lever operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the effect lever 163 emits white light. Also, at this time, the seventh lever sound, which is the sound effect of the lever operation effect, is output. The operation effective period of this lever operation effect is the third period.

When the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 of the repeated numbers is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual recognition mode, as shown in Fig. 439 (23). At this time, the second big win effect image 598 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 439 (24), the "444" decorative pattern 41 of the same number is temporarily stopped. That is, the promotion effect is not executed after the promotion hinting effect is executed. At this time, the 17th stop effect image 599 is displayed around each of the decorative patterns 41 of the same number. Also, at this time, the 30th stop sound, which is the sound effect of the stopping of the decorative patterns 41 of the same number, is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 440 (25), in conjunction with the stopping display of the special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "444", are fixed and stopped.
After this, the same presentation as shown in Figures 292 (55), (56), 293 (57), and (58) is performed, except that the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 displayed are "444".

As described above, in this embodiment, the specific sounds (stop sounds) different from the predetermined sounds (variable BGM) include the first specific sound (e.g., the first stop sound (see FIG. 253 (15)) and the second specific sound (e.g., the eighth stop sound (see FIG. 292 (50)), the 29th stop sound (see FIG. 439 (21)), etc.) that is output when the decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific sequence (double number).
In this embodiment, the reach effect is more likely to be executed (the reach effect is more likely to succeed) when the reach effect is executed in the normal game state than when the reach effect is executed in the special time-saving game state. On the other hand, it is easier to win a jackpot when the reach effect is successful (the reach effect is executed) in the special time-saving game state than when the reach effect is successful (the reach effect is executed) in the normal game state. That is, in this embodiment, the output of the second specific sound is more likely to be executed when the variable effect (variable effect example 66 (see FIG. 437 to FIG. 440)) in which the reach effect is executed after the second provocation effect (the reach effect in the special time-saving game state) is executed than when the variable effect (variable effect example 9 (see FIG. 272)) in which the reach effect is executed after the first provocation effect (the reach effect in the normal game state) is executed.
In this case, in the variable presentation in which a reach presentation is executed after the second teasing presentation, combined with the second specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the stopping of the decorative pattern 41, which notifies the player that a special game will be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the fact that the second specific sound is more likely to be output when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed after the second provoking performance than when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed after the first provoking performance includes the fact that the second specific sound will always be output (100%) when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed after the second provoking performance.
In addition, it may be arranged so that the reach effect is easier to execute (the reach encouraging effect is easier to succeed) when the reach encouraging effect is executed in a special time-saving play state than when the reach encouraging effect is executed in a normal play state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specific sounds (stop sounds) different from the predetermined sounds (variable BGM) include a first specific sound (e.g., the first stop sound (see FIG. 253 (15)) and a second specific sound (e.g., the eighth stop sound (see FIG. 292 (50)), the 29th stop sound (see FIG. 439 (21)), etc.) that is output when the decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific sequence (double number).
In this embodiment, there is a first prompting effect (such as variable performance example 9 (see Figure 272)) in which a reach performance is executed after prompting the execution of a reach performance in a normal gaming state, and a second prompting effect (such as variable performance example 66 (see Figures 437 to 440)) in which a reach performance is executed after prompting the execution of a reach performance in a special time-saving gaming state. In one variable performance, the second specific sound is more likely to be output when the second prompting effect is executed than when the first prompting effect is executed.
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the second teasing presentation is executed, combined with the second specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the stopping of the decorative pattern 41, which notifies the player that a special game is being played, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in one variable performance, the fact that the second specific sound is more likely to be output when the second titling performance is executed than when the first titling performance is executed includes the fact that the second specific sound is never output when the first titling performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the second specific sound is always output when the second titling performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, if, in one variable performance, the output of the second specific sound is more likely to be performed when the second titling performance is executed than when the first titling performance is executed, the output of the second specific sound may be performed when the first titling performance is executed, or the output of the second specific sound may not be performed when the second titling performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to make the presentation mode different (outputting different sound effects, displaying different presentation images, etc.) when a specific presentation (such as a reach presentation or a presentation to notify a jackpot) is executed in the first to third stages and in the fourth stage. Therefore, the entertainment value of the fourth stage can be enhanced.

In addition, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can make the operation mode (see FIG. 290 (37) and FIG. 438 (12)) of the decorative pattern 41 in the reach presentation temporary stop the same regardless of whether the game is in a normal game state or a special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the state of the decorative pattern 41 in the reach presentation regardless of the game state.

In this embodiment, the miss variation performance in which the reach performance is not executed includes a first variation performance in which the start sound is not output (see, for example, FIG. 431(2)), and a second variation performance in which the start sound is output (see, for example, FIG. 436(2)). When a hold is stored for the second starting port 122, it is easier to win the jackpot in the next variation performance when the second variation performance is executed than when the first variation performance is executed (variation performance example 66 is easier to execute).
In addition, when a hold is stored for the second starting port 122, it is easier to get a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed (variable performance example 66 is easier to execute) than when the first variable performance is executed, which also includes the fact that when the first variable performance is executed, there is no guarantee that there will be a jackpot in the next variable performance (0%) (variable performance example 66 is never executed). Also, when a hold is stored for the second starting port 122, if it is easier to get a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed (variable performance example 66 is easier to execute) than when the first variable performance is executed, then a jackpot may be obtained in the next variable performance when the first variable performance is executed (variable performance example 66 may be executed), and it is not necessary to get a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed (variable performance example 66 may not be executed).

In addition, when a hold is stored for the second starting port 122, it may be possible to make it easier for an SP reach performance to be executed in the next variation performance (variation performance example 64 to be executed) when the second variation performance in which a start sound is output is executed than when the first variation performance in which a start sound is not output is executed.
In addition, when a hold is stored for the second starting port 122, the SP reach performance is more likely to be executed in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (the variable performance example 64 is more likely to be executed), which also includes the fact that when the first variable performance is executed, the SP reach performance is not necessarily executed (0%) in the next variable performance (the variable performance example 64 is not necessarily executed). Also, when a hold is stored for the second starting port 122, if it is made so that the SP reach performance is more likely to be executed in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (the variable performance example 64 is more likely to be executed), the SP reach performance may be executed in the next variable performance when the first variable performance is executed (the variable performance example 64 may be executed), and the SP reach performance may not be executed in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed (the variable performance example 64 may not be executed).

(Example of variation 67)
Figure 441 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 67) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 441. The variable performance example 67 is a variable performance based on winning the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable performance in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.
In addition, FIG. 441 is a variation performance that is executed when "EF2" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 248. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 436(1) to (8), Fig. 437(1) to (8), and Fig. 438(9) to (14) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 441(1), the lever operation effect starts and a lever operation image 502 is displayed. The lever operation image 502 displays the text "Operate!". At this time, the effect lever 163 emits red light. At this time, the sixth lever sound is output. The effective operation period of this lever operation effect is the fourth period.
Then, when the effect lever 163 is operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 441 (2), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the fifth mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, the 27th stop sound is output. Note that even after the 27th stop sound is output, the variable BGM continues to be output.
In addition, even if the effect lever 163 is not operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect shown in Fig. 441 (1), the same effect as that shown in Fig. 441 (2) may be performed. In other words, a common effect may be executed whether or not the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect shown in Fig. 441 (1).

Next, as shown in Fig. 441 (3), a revival promotion effect is started, and a revival promotion image 520 is displayed. Moreover, no sound effect is output in conjunction with the display of the revival promotion image 520, and the output of the variable BGM continues.
Next, as shown in Figure 441 (4), the less decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" moves from the top to the bottom.
Next, as shown in FIG. 441(5), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode and performs the first temporary stop motion. At this time, the sound effect (stop sound) accompanying the stop of the middle row decorative symbol 41 is not output.

Next, as shown in Figure 441 (6), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" moves upward and passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" moves from the bottom to the top.
Next, as shown in Fig. 441 (7), a revival image 558 is displayed. This revival image 558 has a different display mode from the revival image 558 (see Fig. 301 (7)) displayed in the normal gaming state. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and the effect lever 163 emits light in rainbow colors. At this time, a second revival sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the revival image 558 is displayed, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 441 (8), the role effect is executed, and the left movable role 115A, the center movable role 115B, and the right movable role 115C move to positions where they overlap the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role 13 effect image 597 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and the rainbow-colored light emission of the effect lever 163 continues. At this time, the second big win notification sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 439 (18) to (24) and Fig. 440 (25) are performed. After that, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 292 (55), (56), Fig. 293 (57), and (58) are performed, except that the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 displayed are "444".

(Example of variation 68)
Next, referring to Fig. 442, a specific explanation will be given of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 68) performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like. The variable presentation example 68 is a variable presentation example based on a game ball winning the first start hole 121 in a special time-saving game state. The variable presentation example 68 is also a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach presentation is not executed, and is a variable presentation based on the number of reserved balls for winning the first start hole 121 being "1".
The change presentation shown in FIG. 442 is executed when "EJ1" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in FIG. 249.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 442 (1), as the previous special symbol is frozen and displayed by the performance control unit 300, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" are frozen and displayed in the image display unit 114. At this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121 shows "1", which is the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting port 122 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the second starting port 122. Meanwhile, the reserved image 52 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 442(2), the special symbol starts to be displayed, and the display of the special symbol starts. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual recognition mode and perform the first display operation. Meanwhile, the display of the display of the special symbol 51 does not display the display of the special symbol 51.
Next, as shown in FIG. 442 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first varying operation.
Next, as shown in Fig. 442 (4), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the first varying operation. The moving speed of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 at this time is faster than the moving speed of any of the decorative symbols 41 displayed in the fifth visual mode in stages 1 to 3.

Next, as shown in Fig. 442 (5), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the eleventh stop operation. At this time, the fifteenth stop effect image 589 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twenty-fifth stop sound is output.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 442(6).
As described above, in the variable presentation based on winning at the first starting hole 121 during the special time-saving play state, the decorative pattern 41 may stop without being displayed in the second viewing mode or the seventh viewing mode.

(Example of change performance 69)
Next, referring to Fig. 443, a specific explanation will be given of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 69) performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like. The variable presentation example 69 is a variable presentation example based on a game ball winning in the first start hole 121 in a special time-saving game state. The variable presentation example 69 is also a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach presentation is not executed, and is a variable presentation based on the number of reserved balls for winning in the first start hole 121 being "4".
The change presentation shown in FIG. 443 is executed when "EJ1" is selected as the "change presentation pattern" in FIG. 249.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 443 (1), as the previous special symbol is frozen and displayed by the performance control unit 300, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" are frozen and displayed in the image display unit 114. At this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121 shows "4", which is the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting port 122 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the second starting port 122. Meanwhile, the reserved image 52 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 443(2), the variable performance starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual recognition mode and perform the first variable operation. Also, the reserved number display 55 of the first start port 121 is updated to "3". Meanwhile, neither the variable image 51 nor the reserved image 52 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 443 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first varying operation.
Next, as shown in Fig. 443 (4), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the first varying operation. The moving speed of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 at this time is faster than the moving speed of any of the decorative symbols 41 displayed in the fifth visual mode in stages 1 to 3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 443(5), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the eleventh stop operation. At this time, the fifteenth stop effect image 589 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twenty-fifth stop sound is output.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 443(6).

(Example of change performance 70)
Next, referring to Fig. 444, a variable performance (variable performance example 70) performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like will be specifically described. The variable performance example 70 is a variable performance example based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 121 in a special time-saving game state. The variable performance example 70 is also a variable performance based on the result of a special pattern lottery being a jackpot.
The change performance shown in FIG. 443 is executed when "EI1" is selected as the "change performance pattern" in FIG. 249.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 444 (1), as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" are fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121 shows "1", which is the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting port 122 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the second starting port 122. Meanwhile, the reserved image 52 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 444(2), the variable presentation starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbols. At this time, the big win suggestion image 600 is displayed. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are not displayed, or are hidden by the big win suggestion image 600 and are difficult or impossible to see. Meanwhile, the variation of the small symbols 56 starts.
Then, as the special symbol stops varying, the small symbol 56, "444", is fixed and stopped. On the other hand, a stopping sound (sound effect) accompanying the stopping of the small symbol 56 is not output.
After this, the same presentation as shown in Figures 292 (55), (56), 293 (57), and (58) is performed, except that the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 displayed are "444".

As described above, in this embodiment, it is more difficult to output the start sound when a miss variation effect based on a win in the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving game state is executed than when a miss variation effect based on a win in the second start hole 122 in the special time-saving game state is executed. Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game ball should be placed in the second start hole 122 rather than the first start hole 121.
In addition, the fact that it is more difficult to output the start sound when a miss variation effect based on a win at the first start port 121 is executed in the special time-saving play state than when a miss variation effect based on a win at the second start port 122 in the special time-saving play state also includes the fact that the start sound is not output (0%) when a miss variation effect based on a win at the first start port 121 in the special time-saving play state is executed.
In addition, if it is more difficult to output the start sound when a miss variation presentation based on a win at the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is executed than when a miss variation presentation based on a win at the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is executed, the start sound may be output when a miss variation presentation based on a win at the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the output of the start sound is made less likely when a miss variation effect based on a win in the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving game state is executed than when a miss variation effect based on a win in the first start hole 121 in the normal game state is executed. Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the player can be made to recognize that the game ball should be placed in the second start hole 122 rather than the first start hole 121.
In addition, the fact that it is more difficult to output the start sound when a miss variation effect based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 is executed in the special time-saving play state than when a miss variation effect based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 is executed in the normal play state also includes the fact that the start sound is not output (0%) when a miss variation effect based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 is executed in the special time-saving play state.
In addition, if it is more difficult to output the start sound when a miss variation presentation based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 is executed in the special time-saving game state than when a miss variation presentation based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 is executed in the normal game state, the start sound may be output when a miss variation presentation based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 is executed in the special time-saving game state.

(Display timing of each visual appearance in variable performance)
Next, the timing at which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in various visual modes during the variable performance will be described.
Figure 445 is a chart showing the timing at which decorative pattern 41 is displayed in various visual modes during the variable performance.

Figure 445 (1) shows the display timing according to each visual state of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the variable performance (variable performance examples 1, 20, 39) executed when the variable performance pattern "ER1" is selected. Note that the display timings shown in Figure 445 (1) are not limited to the display timings in the variable performance executed when the variable performance pattern "ER1" is selected. The display timings shown in Figure 445 (1) may be the average display timings of all variable performance patterns that can be selected when a variable performance is executed in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a reach performance is not executed, based on the number of reserved numbers for the first starting port 121 being "1" in the normal game state.

First, at time t1, a variable presentation is started in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a reach presentation is not executed, based on the fact that the reserved number for the first starting port 121 is "1" in the normal game state.
Next, at time t2, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual mode (see FIG. 252(2)). At this time, the first start effect image 501 is also displayed.
Next, at time t3, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode (see Figure 252 (3)).
Next, at time t4, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode (see Figure 252 (4)).

Next, at time t5, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode (see Figure 253 (13)).
Next, at time t6, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode (see FIG. 253 (15)). At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is also displayed.
Next, at time t7, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode (see Figure 253 (16)).
Next, at time t8, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first visual mode (see Figure 254 (17)).

Here, the time from time t1 to time t2, i.e., the time from when the variable performance starts to when the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second visual mode (when the first effect image 501 is displayed at the start), is time T1.
Furthermore, the time from time t2 to time t3, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the second visual mode (the display time of the first effect image 501 at the start), is time T2.
Furthermore, the time from time t3 to time t4, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the third visual mode, is time T3.
In addition, the time from time t4 to time t5, i.e., the display time of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode, is time T4.

In addition, the time from time t5 to time t6, i.e., the display time of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the fifth visual mode, is time T5.
In addition, the time from time t6 to time t7, i.e., the display time of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the sixth visual mode (the display time of the first effect image 503 at stop), is time T6.
In addition, the time from time t7 to time t8, i.e., the display time of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the seventh visual recognition mode, is time T7.
Here, time T3 is shorter than time T2. Time T5 is longer than time T3. Time T6 is shorter than time T5. Time T6 is shorter than time T2. Time T7 is shorter than time T2.

Figure 445 (2) shows the display timing according to each visual state of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the variable performance (variable performance examples 3, 22, 41) executed when the variable performance pattern "ER3" is selected. Note that the display timings shown in Figure 445 (2) are not limited to the display timings in the variable performance executed when the variable performance pattern "ER3" is selected. The display timings shown in Figure 445 (2) may be the average display timings of all variable performance patterns that can be selected when a variable performance is executed in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a reach performance is not executed, based on the fact that the reserved number for the first starting port 121 is "4" in the normal game state.

First, at time t11, based on the fact that the reserved number for the first starting hole 121 is "4" in the normal game state, a variable presentation is started in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a reach presentation is not executed.
Next, at time t12, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual mode (see FIG. 257(2)). At this time, a second start effect image 555 is also displayed.
Next, at time t13, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode (see Figure 257 (3)).
Next, at time t14, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode (see Figure 257 (4)).

Next, at time t15, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode (see Figure 257 (5)).
Next, at time t16, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode (see FIG. 257(6)). At this time, the second stop effect image 506 is also displayed.
Next, at time t17, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode (see Figure 257 (7)).
Next, at time t18, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first visual mode (see Figure 257 (8)).

Here, the time from time t11 to time t12, that is, the time from when the variable performance starts to when the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second visual mode (when the second effect image 555 is displayed at the start), is time T11.
Furthermore, the time from time t12 to time t13, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the second visual mode (the display time of the start-time second effect image 555), is time T12.
In addition, the time from time t13 to time t14, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the third visual mode, is time T13.
In addition, the time from time t14 to time t15, i.e., the display time of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode, is time T14.

In addition, the time from time t15 to time t16, i.e., the display time of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the fifth visual mode, is time T15.
In addition, the time from time t16 to time t17, i.e., the display time of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the sixth visual recognition mode (the display time of the second effect image 506 at stop), is time T16.
In addition, the time from time t17 to time t18, i.e., the display time of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the seventh visual recognition mode, is time T17.

Here, time T13 is shorter than time T12. Furthermore, time T15 is longer than time T13. Furthermore, time T16 is shorter than time T15. Furthermore, time T16 is shorter than time T12. Furthermore, time T17 is shorter than time T12.
Furthermore, time T12 is shorter than time T2. Furthermore, time T14 is shorter than time T4. Furthermore, time T15 is shorter than time T5. Furthermore, time T16 is shorter than time T6. Furthermore, time T17 is shorter than time T7.

Figure 445 (3) shows the display timing according to each visual state of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the variable performance (variable performance example 61) executed when the variable performance pattern "EH1" is selected. Note that the display timings shown in Figure 445 (3) are not limited to the display timings in the variable performance executed when the variable performance pattern "EH1" is selected. The display timings shown in Figure 445 (1) may be the average display timings of all variable performance patterns that can be selected when a variable performance is executed in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a reach performance is not executed, based on the reserved number for the second starting port 122 being "1" in the special time-saving play state.

First, at time t21, in the special time-saving game state, based on the fact that the reserved number for the second starting port 122 is "1", the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a variable presentation is started in which a reach presentation is not executed.
Next, at time t22, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual mode (see FIG. 430(2)). At this time, a thirteenth effect image 588 is also displayed.
Next, at time t23, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode (see Figure 430 (3)).
Next, at time t24, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode (see Figure 430 (4)).

Next, at time t25, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode (see Figure 430 (5)).
Next, at time t26, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode (see FIG. 430(6)). At this time, a fifteenth stop effect image 589 is also displayed.
Next, at time t27, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the first visual mode (see Figure 430 (7)).

Here, the time from time t21 to time t22, that is, the time from when the variable performance starts to when the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second visual mode (the 13th effect image 588 is displayed at the start), is time T21.
In addition, the time from time t22 to time t23, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the second visual mode (the display time of the 13th effect image 588 at the start), is time T22.
In addition, the time from time t23 to time t24, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the third visual mode, is time T23.
Furthermore, the time from time t24 to time t25, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode, is time T24.

In addition, the time from time t25 to time t26, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fifth visual mode, is time T25.
In addition, the time from time t26 to time t27, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the sixth visual mode (the display time of the 15th effect image 589 when stopped), is time T26.

Here, time T23 is shorter than time T22. Furthermore, time T25 is longer than time T23. Furthermore, time T26 is shorter than time T25. Furthermore, time T26 is shorter than time T22.
Furthermore, time T22 is shorter than time T12, time T24 is shorter than time T14, time T25 is shorter than time T15, and time T26 is shorter than time T16.
Note that time T12 may be shorter than time T22. Furthermore, time T14 may be shorter than time T24. Furthermore, time T15 may be shorter than time T25. Furthermore, time T16 may be shorter than time T26.

Figure 445 (4) shows the display timing according to each visual state of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the variable performance (variable performance example 62) executed when the variable performance pattern "EH3" is selected. Note that the display timings shown in Figure 445 (4) are not limited to the display timings in the variable performance executed when the variable performance pattern "EH3" is selected. The display timings shown in Figure 445 (4) may be the average display timings of all variable performance patterns that can be selected when a variable performance is executed in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a reach performance is not executed, based on the fact that the reserved number for the second starting port 122 is "4" in the special time-saving play state.

First, at time t31, in the special time-saving game state, based on the fact that the reserved number for the second starting port 122 is "4", the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a variable presentation is started in which a reach presentation is not executed.
Next, at time t32, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual mode (see FIG. 431(2)). At this time, a thirteenth effect image 588 is also displayed.
Next, at time t33, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode (see Figure 431 (3)).
Next, at time t34, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode (see Figure 431 (4)).

Next, at time t35, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode (see Figure 431 (5)).
Next, at time t36, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode (see FIG. 431(6)). At this time, the fifteenth stop effect image 589 is also displayed.
Next, at time t37, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first visual mode (see Figure 431 (7)).

Here, the time from time t31 to time t32, that is, the time from when the variable performance starts to when the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second visual mode (the 13th effect image 588 is displayed at the start), is time T31.
In addition, the time from time t32 to time t33, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the second visual mode (the display time of the 13th effect image 588 at the start), is time T32.
In addition, the time from time t33 to time t34, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the third visual mode, is time T33.
In addition, the time from time t34 to time t35, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode, is time T34.

In addition, the time from time t35 to time t36, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fifth visual mode, is time T35.
In addition, the time from time t36 to time t37, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the sixth visual mode (the display time of the 15th effect image 589 when stopped), is time T36.
Here, time T33 is shorter than time T32. Furthermore, time T35 is longer than time T33. Furthermore, time T36 is shorter than time T35. Furthermore, time T36 is shorter than time T32.
Furthermore, time T32 is shorter than time T22, time T34 is shorter than time T24, time T35 is shorter than time T25, and time T36 is shorter than time T26.

Figure 445 (5) shows the display timing according to each visual state of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the variable performance (variable performance example 68) executed when the variable performance pattern "EJ1" is selected. Note that the display timings shown in Figure 445 (5) are not limited to the display timings in the variable performance executed when the variable performance pattern "EJ1" is selected. The display timings shown in Figure 445 (5) may be the average display timings of all variable performance patterns that can be selected when a variable performance is executed in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a reach performance is not executed, based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being "1" in the special time-saving play state.

First, at time t41, in the special time-saving game state, based on the fact that the reserved number for the first starting port 121 is "1", the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a variable presentation is started in which a reach presentation is not executed.
Next, at time t42, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode (see Figure 442 (2)).
Next, at time t43, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode (see Figure 442 (3)).

Next, at time t44, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode (see Figure 442 (4)).
Next, at time t45, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode (see FIG. 442(5)). At this time, a fifteenth stop effect image 589 is also displayed.
Next, at time t46, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the first visual mode (see Figure 442 (6)).

Here, the time from time t41 to time t42, that is, the time from when the variable presentation starts to when the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode, is time T41.
Furthermore, the time from time t42 to time t43, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the third visual mode, is time T42.
In addition, the time from time t43 to time t44, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode, is time T43.
In addition, the time from time t44 to time t45, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fifth visual mode, is time T44.

In addition, the time from time t45 to time t46, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the sixth visual mode (the display time of the 15th effect image 589 when stopped), is time T45.

Here, time T42 is longer than time T33. Time T43 is longer than time T34. Time T44 is longer than time T35. Time T45 is longer than time T36.

Figure 445 (6) shows the display timing according to each visual state of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the variable performance (variable performance example 69) executed when the variable performance pattern "EJ1" is selected. Note that the display timings shown in Figure 445 (6) are not limited to the display timings in the variable performance executed when the variable performance pattern "EJ1" is selected. The display timings shown in Figure 445 (6) may be the average display timings of all variable performance patterns that can be selected when a variable performance is executed in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a reach performance is not executed, based on the fact that the reserved number for the first starting port 121 is "4" in the special time-saving play state.

First, at time t51, in the special time-saving game state, based on the fact that the reserved number for the first starting port 121 is "4", the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a variable presentation is started in which a reach presentation is not executed.
Next, at time t52, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode (see Figure 443 (2)).
Next, at time t53, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode (see Figure 443 (3)).

Next, at time t54, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode (see Figure 443 (4)).
Next, at time t55, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode (see FIG. 443(5)). At this time, a fifteenth stop effect image 589 is also displayed.
Next, at time t56, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the first visual mode (see Figure 443 (6)).

Here, the time from time t51 to time t52, that is, the time from when the variable performance starts to when the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode, is time T51.
In addition, the time from time t52 to time t53, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the third visual mode, is time T52.
In addition, the time from time t53 to time t54, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode, is time T53.
In addition, the time from time t54 to time t55, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fifth visual mode, is time T54.

In addition, the time from time t55 to time t56, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the sixth visual mode (the display time of the 15th effect image 589 when stopped), is time T55.

Here, time T42 and time T52 are the same time, time T43 and time T53 are the same time, time T44 and time T54 are the same time, and time T45 and time T55 are the same time.
Furthermore, times T1, T11, T21, T31, T41, and T51 are all the same time.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can execute the following viewing modes for the patterns: a first display (fourth viewing mode) in which the pattern in a specific row (e.g., middle row decorative pattern 41) is difficult to view after the start of the variable performance, and a second display (e.g., display using the fifth viewing mode, sixth viewing mode, seventh viewing mode, first viewing mode, etc.) in which the pattern in the specific row is easier to view after the first display than the first display. In the first mode (e.g., normal game state), when a specific variable effect (a miss variable effect in which no reach effect is performed) is executed based on the number of first pending memories (the number of pending memories for the first starting port 121) being a specific number (e.g., "1") (when variable effect example 1 (see Figures 252 to 254) or the like is executed), the average time from when the patterns in a specific column become the second display to when they stop (the average time from when the patterns in a specific column become the second state to when they stop in all variable effect patterns that can be selected when a specific variable effect is executed based on the number of first pending memories being a specific number in the first mode) is the first time (time T5 + time T6 + time T7). In addition, when a specific variable performance (such as variable performance example 61 (see Figure 430)) is performed based on the number of second reserved memories (the reserved number for the second starting port 122) being a specific number in the second mode (for example, a special time-saving play state), the average time from when the patterns in a specific column become the second display to when they stop (the average time from when the patterns in a specific column become the second state to when they stop in all variable performance patterns that can be selected when a specific variable performance is performed based on the number of second reserved memories being a specific number in the second mode) is a second time (time T25 + time T26) that is shorter than the first time.
In this case, in the second mode, the player can be given the impression that the symbols in the specific row stop at high speed after changing to the second mode, compared to the first mode, and a speedy change presentation can be realized in the second mode, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a normal game state, in a specific variation presentation based on the first reserved memory being "1" (a miss variation presentation in which no reach presentation is performed), from the time the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes a slow visual appearance until it stops, multiple symbols (e.g., "9" and "1" (see FIG. 253 (13) and (14))) that are varying in the middle row decorative pattern 41 become visible. On the other hand, in a special time-saving game state, in a specific variation presentation based on the second reserved memory being "1", from the time the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes a slow visual appearance until it stops, only a single symbol (e.g., "1" (see FIG. 430 (5))) that is varying in the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes visible.
That is, in this embodiment, when a specific variation presentation is executed based on the first reserved memory being a specific number in the first mode, it is easier to execute a presentation in which a plurality of patterns that change in the specific row patterns (such as the middle row decorative pattern 41) are visible from the time the specific row patterns become the second state (the fifth viewing state, the sixth viewing state, the seventh viewing state, etc.) until they stop, when a specific variation presentation is executed based on the second reserved memory being a specific number (such as "1") in the second mode. Therefore, even when a deviation variation presentation is executed in the first mode, it is possible to show the player a variety of variations in the decorative pattern 41.

The fact that a performance in which multiple patterns changing in the pattern of the specific row are visible from when the pattern of the specific row becomes the second state until it stops is more likely to be executed when a specific change performance is executed in the first mode based on the first reserved memory being a specific number than when a specific change performance is executed in the second mode based on the second reserved memory being a specific number includes that when a specific change performance is executed in the first mode based on the first reserved memory being a specific number, a performance in which multiple patterns changing in the pattern of the specific row are visible from when the pattern of the specific row becomes the second state until it stops is always executed (100%), and that when a specific change performance is executed in the second mode based on the second reserved memory being a specific number, a performance in which multiple patterns changing in the pattern of the specific row are visible from when the pattern of the specific row becomes the second state until it stops is always executed (0%).

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute a first display (for example, a display in the fourth viewing mode (see Figure 250-1 (4))) in which the pattern of a specific row (for example, the middle row decorative pattern 41) is difficult to see after the start of the variable performance, a second display (for example, a display in the fifth viewing mode (see Figure 250-1 (5)), sixth viewing mode (see Figure 250-1 (6)), seventh viewing mode (see Figure 250-1 (7)), etc.) in which the pattern of the specific row is easier to see after the first display than in the first display, and a third display (display in the first viewing mode (see Figure 250-1 (1))) in which the pattern of the specific row stops after the second display. Furthermore, in a second variable presentation (a losing variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed) in the first mode (normal gaming state), the display time according to the second aspect of the pattern in a specific column (time T5 + time T6 + time T7 (see Figure 445) in the second variable presentation based on the first specific number, and time T15 + time T16 + time T17 in the second variable presentation based on the second specific number) is more likely to be shorter when the second variable presentation (a losing variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed) is executed based on the number of first pending memories being a first specific number (for example, "1"). Furthermore, in one second variable presentation, the display time due to the second aspect of the pattern in a specific column (time T35 + time T36 in the second variable presentation based on the second specific number in the second mode) is more likely to be shorter when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of second reserved memories being a second specific number in the second mode (special time-saving play state) than when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number in the first mode.
In this case, by displaying the slow visual appearance of the decorative pattern 41 at various display times according to the number of first reserved memories in the first mode, it is possible to realize a variety of sharp and varied variations in the display of the decorative pattern 41. Furthermore, in the second mode, the high-speed variations of the decorative pattern 41 can be more strongly impressed on the player than in the first mode, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in a second variable performance in the first mode, the display time in the second aspect of the pattern in the specific column is more likely to be shorter when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number that is greater than the first specific number than when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the first specific number includes the fact that in a second variable performance in the first mode, the display time in the second aspect of the pattern in the specific column is always shorter (100%) when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number that is greater than the first specific number than when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the first specific number.
Furthermore, if, in a second variable performance in the first mode, the display time of the second aspect of the pattern in the specific column is likely to be shorter when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number greater than the first specific number than when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the first specific number, then, in a second variable performance in the first mode, the display time of the second aspect of the pattern in the specific column may be longer when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number greater than the first specific number than when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the first specific number.

In addition, the fact that the display time in the second aspect of the pattern in a specific column is more likely to be shorter when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of second reserved memories being the second specific number in the second mode than when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the second specific number in one second variable performance in the first mode also includes the fact that the display time in the second aspect of the pattern in a specific column is always shorter (100%) when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of second reserved memories being the second specific number in the second mode than when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the second specific number in one second variable performance in the first mode.
Furthermore, if the display time of the second aspect of the pattern in the specific column is likely to be shorter when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of second reserved memories being the second specific number in the second mode than when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the second specific number in one second variable performance in the first mode, the display time of the second aspect of the pattern in the specific column may be longer when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of second reserved memories being the second specific number in the second mode than when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the second specific number in one second variable performance in the first mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display time according to the second aspect of the specific column is more likely to be shorter (time T25+time T26) when the number of the second reserved memories is the first specific number (e.g., "1") in the second mode (special time-saving game state) and the second variable performance (miss variable performance in which the reach performance is not executed) is executed (time T15+time T16+time T17) in the first mode (normal game state) and the number of the first reserved memories is the second specific number (e.g., "4"). Therefore, in the second mode, regardless of the number of reserved memories, the player can be more strongly impressed that the decorative pattern 41 changes at a higher speed than in the first mode.
In addition, the fact that the display time due to the second aspect of the specific column is more likely to be shorter when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of second pending memories being the first specific number in the second mode than when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of first pending memories being the second specific number in the first mode also includes the fact that when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of second pending memories being the first specific number in the second mode, the display time due to the second aspect of the specific column will always be shorter (100%) than when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of first pending memories being the second specific number in the first mode.
Furthermore, if the display time due to the second aspect of the specific column is likely to be shorter when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of first pending memories being the first specific number in the second mode than when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of first pending memories being the second specific number in the first mode, then the display time due to the second aspect of the specific column may be shorter when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of first pending memories being the second specific number in the first mode than when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of first pending memories being the first specific number in the second mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the first mode, the operation time when the decorative pattern 41 stops is different between the case where the second variable performance is executed based on the number of the first reserved memories being the first specific number and the case where the second variable performance is executed based on the number of the first reserved memories being the second specific number (time T6, time T16). Therefore, it is possible to realize a variable performance having various operation modes of the decorative pattern 41 according to the reserved number.
In this embodiment, the operation time when the decorative pattern 41 stops is longer when the second change performance is executed based on the number of the first reserved memories being the second specific number than when the second change performance is executed based on the number of the first reserved memories being the first specific number, but this is not limited to this. The operation time when the decorative pattern 41 stops may be longer when the second change performance is executed based on the number of the first reserved memories being the first specific number than when the second change performance is executed based on the number of the first reserved memories being the second specific number. Also, the operation time when the decorative pattern 41 stops may be the same between the case where the second change performance is executed based on the number of the first reserved memories being the first specific number and the case where the second change performance is executed based on the number of the first reserved memories being the second specific number.

In addition, FIG. 445 shows the timings at which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in various visual modes in the variable performance, but is not limited to this. Each timing shown in FIG. 445 may be the timings at which the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in various visual modes, or the timings at which the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in various visual modes.

(Variation of Variation Example 61)
Figure 446 shows a modified example of the variable performance example 61.
In the variable presentation example 61, in the special time-saving play state, the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the reach presentation is not executed, and in the variable presentation based on the number of reserved symbols for winning in the second starting port 122 being "1", three rows of decorative symbols 41 are simultaneously displayed in the fifth viewing mode and simultaneously displayed in the sixth viewing mode, but this is not limited to this.
In the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 430 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 446 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 446 (2), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 446 (3), the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eleventh stopping action. At this time, the twenty-fifth stopping sound is output. At this time, the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the first changing action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 446 (4), the right row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eleventh stopping action. At this time, the twenty-fifth stopping sound is output. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the first changing action.
Next, as shown in Fig. 446 (5), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the eleventh stopping action. At this time, the twenty-fifth stopping sound is output.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 446(6).
In this way, even in a variable presentation in which the result of the special pattern lottery in the special time-saving play state is a miss and a reach presentation is not executed, and the variable presentation is based on the number of reserved symbols for winning at the second starting port 122 being "1", three rows of decorative symbols 41 may be displayed in sequence in the fifth viewing mode and then in sequence in the sixth viewing mode.

In addition, in a variable presentation in which the result of the special pattern lottery during the special time-saving game state is a miss and a reach presentation is not executed, in a variable presentation based on a winning entry into the first starting port 121, even if the variable presentation is based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being any of "1" to "4," the three rows of decorative patterns 41 may be displayed in sequence in the fifth viewing mode, and then in sequence in the sixth viewing mode (see Figures 446 (1) to (7)).

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute a first display (e.g., a display using the fourth viewing mode) in which the pattern in a specific row (e.g., the middle row decorative pattern 41) is difficult to see after the start of the variable performance, and a second display (e.g., a display using the fifth viewing mode, sixth viewing mode, seventh viewing mode, first viewing mode, etc.) in which the pattern in the specific row is easier to see than the first display after the first display. Furthermore, in one variable presentation in the first mode (e.g., normal game playing state), a display in the first stop display mode (a mode in which the three rows of decorative patterns 41 successively become the sixth visual mode and the seventh visual mode) is more likely to be executed when a specific variable presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number (e.g., "1") is executed (when variable presentation example 1 (see Figures 252 to 254) is executed, etc.) than when a specific variable presentation (a miss variable presentation in which no reach presentation is executed) based on the number of first reserved memories (the reserved number for the first starting port 121) being a first specific number (e.g., "4") is executed (when variable presentation example 3 (see Figure 257) is executed, etc.). Furthermore, in one variable presentation in the second mode (for example, a special time-saving game state), a display in the second stop display mode (a mode in which three rows of decorative patterns 41 all become the sixth or seventh visual mode at the same time) is more likely to be executed when a specific variable presentation (such as variable presentation example 62 (see FIG. 431)) based on the number of second reserved memories (reserved number for the second starting port 122) being the first specific number is executed than when a specific variable presentation (such as a modified example of variable presentation example 61 (see FIG. 446)) based on the number of second reserved memories being the first specific number is executed.
In this case, a variable presentation can be realized in which decorative patterns 41 are displayed in various stop display modes according to the relationship between the mode and the number of reserved memories, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the symbols in a specific row may be displayed in the fourth viewing mode, and then displayed in the sixth viewing mode without being displayed in the fifth viewing mode. In this case, the second display is the sixth viewing mode.
In addition, the symbols in a specific row may be displayed in the fourth viewing mode, and then displayed in the seventh viewing mode without being displayed in the fifth and sixth viewing modes. In this case, the second display is the seventh viewing mode.
In addition, the symbols in a specific row may be displayed in the fourth viewing mode, and then displayed in the first viewing mode without being displayed in any of the fifth to seventh viewing modes. In this case, the second display is the first viewing mode.

Furthermore, in one variation presentation in the first mode, the fact that display in the first stop display mode is more likely to be executed when a specific variation presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed than when a specific variation presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number includes the fact that display in the first stop display mode is not always executed (0%) when a specific variation presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number is executed in one variation presentation in the first mode, and the fact that display in the first stop display mode is always executed (100%) when a specific variation presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed in the first mode.
Furthermore, if, in one variation presentation in the first mode, display using the first stop display mode is more likely to be executed when a specific variation presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed than when a specific variation presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number is executed, then display using the first stop display mode may be executed when a specific variation presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number is executed in one variation presentation in the first mode, or display using the first stop display mode may not be executed when a specific variation presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed in one variation presentation in the first mode.

Furthermore, in one variation presentation in the second mode, the fact that display using the second stop display mode is more likely to be executed when a specific variation presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the first specific number is executed than when a specific variation presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the second specific number includes the fact that display using the second stop display mode is always not executed (0%) when a specific variation presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the second specific number is executed in one variation presentation in the second mode, and the fact that display using the second stop display mode is always executed (100%) when a specific variation presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the first specific number is executed in one variation presentation in the second mode.
Furthermore, if, in one variation presentation in the second mode, a display using the second stop display mode is more likely to be executed when a specific variation presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the first specific number is executed than when a specific variation presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the second specific number is executed, then a display using the second stop display mode may be executed when a specific variation presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the second specific number is executed in one variation presentation in the second mode, or a display using the second stop display mode may not be executed when a specific variation presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the first specific number is executed in one variation presentation in the second mode.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is easier for a display to be performed using a common stop display mode in the second mode (e.g., a special time-saving gaming state) when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number is executed and when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed than in the first mode (e.g., a normal gaming state) when a specific change presentation (a miss change presentation in which no reach presentation is performed) is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number (e.g., "4") and when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number (e.g., "1") is executed.
In addition, in the second mode, when a specific change presentation is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number, and when a specific change presentation is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number, it is easier for a display to be executed using a common stop display mode than when a specific change presentation is executed based on the number of second reserved memories being a first specific number, and when a specific change presentation is executed based on the number of second reserved memories being a second specific number.
In this case, since the variable presentation based on a winning ball entering the first starting hole 121 in the second mode tends to become monotonous, it is possible to make the player recognize that in the second mode the game ball should enter the second starting hole 122.

In addition, the fact that a display using a common stop display mode is more likely to be executed when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number and when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed in the second mode than when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number and when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed in the first mode includes that when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number and when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed in the second mode, a display using a common stop display mode is always executed (100%) and that when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being the first specific number and when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being the second specific number is executed in the first mode, a display using a common stop display mode is not always executed (0%).
Furthermore, the fact that a display based on a common stop display mode is more likely to be executed when, in the second mode, a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number is executed and when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed than when, in the second mode, a specific change presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being a first specific number is executed and when a specific change presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being a second specific number is executed includes that, in the second mode, a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number is executed and when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed, a display based on a common stop display mode is always executed (100%) and that, in the second mode, a specific change presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the first specific number is executed and when a specific change presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being a second specific number is executed, a display based on a common stop display mode is always not executed (0%).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, the execution time of the action performed when the decorative pattern 41 stops (the sixth visual recognition mode and the display time T6 and time T16 of the first effect image 503 at the time of stopping) is different between the miss variation performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "1" and the miss variation performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "4". Therefore, it is possible to realize a variation performance consisting of various stop modes of the decorative pattern 41 according to the reserved number.
It has been described that in the normal game state, the execution time of the operation performed when the decorative pattern 41 stops is shorter in the miss variation performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "4" than in the miss variation performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "1" (time T6>time T16), but this is not limited to this. In the normal game state, the execution time of the operation performed when the decorative pattern 41 stops may be longer in the miss variation performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "4" than in the miss variation performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "1" (time T6<time T16). In other words, in the normal game state, the execution time of the operation performed when the decorative pattern 41 stops may be different between the miss variation performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "1" and the miss variation performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "4". In addition, in the normal game state, the execution time of the operation performed when the decorative pattern 41 stops may be the same for a miss change presentation based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being "1" and a miss change presentation based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being "4".

In addition, in this embodiment, in the special time-saving game state, the execution time (time T26, time T36) of the action performed when the decorative pattern 41 stops is different between a miss change presentation based on the reserved number for the second start port 122 being "1" and a miss change presentation based on the reserved number for the second start port 122 being "4", but this is not limited to this. In the special time-saving game state, the execution time of the action performed when the decorative pattern 41 stops may be the same between a miss change presentation based on the reserved number for the second start port 122 being "1" and a miss change presentation based on the reserved number for the second start port 122 being "4".

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, the operation time of the decorative pattern when the variation effect starts (the second visual recognition mode and the display time T2 and time T12 of the first effect image 501 at the start) is different between the miss variation effect based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "1" and the miss variation effect based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "4". Therefore, it is possible to realize a variation effect consisting of various variation start modes of the decorative pattern 41 according to the reserved number.
In addition, in the normal game state, the operation time of the decorative pattern when the variation effect starts may be the same for a loss variation effect based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being "1" and a loss variation effect based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being "4". Also, in the normal game state, the operation mode of the decorative pattern when the variation effect starts may be the same for a loss variation effect based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being "1" and a loss variation effect based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being "4".

(Relationship between lever operation and vibration effects in fluctuation effects)
Next, the timing of execution of the vibration effect in response to the lever operation effect will be explained.
Figure 447 is a chart showing the execution timing of vibration effects in response to lever operation effects.
Fig. 447 (1) shows the timing of lever operation and vibration in the variation performance example 13 (see Figs. 286 to 293). Note that Fig. 447 (1) may be the timing of lever operation and vibration in the variation performance example 32 (see Figs. 342 to 349) or the variation performance example 51 (see Figs. 400 to 407).

First, at time t61, the lever operation presentation begins (see Figure 291 (44)).
Next, at time t62, the vibration effect begins (see FIG. 291 (45)).
Then, at time t63, the vibration effect ends.
Here, the time from time t61 to time t62, that is, the time from when the lever operation effect starts to when the vibration effect starts, is time T61.
Furthermore, the time from time t62 to time t63, i.e., the execution time of the vibration effect, is time T62.

Figure 447 (2) shows the execution timing of the lever operation effect and the vibration effect in the variation performance example 14 (see Figure 294). Note that Figure 447 (2) may also be the execution timing of the lever operation effect and the vibration effect in the variation performance example 33 (see Figure 350) or the variation performance example 52 (see Figure 408).

First, at time t71, the lever operation presentation begins (see Figure 294 (1)).
Next, at time t72, the vibration effect begins (see FIG. 294 (3)).
Then, at time t73, the vibration effect ends.
Here, the time from time t71 to time t72, that is, the time from when the lever operation effect starts to when the vibration effect starts, is time T71.
Furthermore, the time from time t72 to time t73, i.e., the execution time of the vibration effect, is time T72.

Figure 447 (3) shows the execution timing of the lever operation effect and the vibration effect in the variation performance example 19 (see Figure 301). Note that Figure 447 (3) may also be the execution timing of the lever operation effect and the vibration effect in the variation performance example 38 (see Figure 357) or the variation performance example 57 (see Figure 415).

First, at time t81, the lever operation presentation begins (see Figure 301 (1)).
Next, at time t82, the vibration effect begins (see FIG. 301 (6)).
Then, at time t83, the vibration effect ends.
Here, the time from time t81 to time t82, that is, the time from when the lever operation effect starts to when the vibration effect starts, is time T81.
Furthermore, the time from time t82 to time t83, i.e., the execution time of the vibration effect, is time T82.

Figure 447 (4) shows the timing of execution of the lever operation effect and vibration effect in the variation effect example 66 (see Figures 437 to 440).
First, at time t91, the lever operation presentation begins (see Figure 438 (15)).
Next, at time t92, the vibration effect begins (see FIG. 438 (16)).
Then, at time t93, the vibration effect ends.
Here, the time from time t91 to time t92, that is, the time from when the lever operation effect starts to when the vibration effect starts, is time T91.
Furthermore, the time from time t92 to time t93, i.e., the execution time of the vibration effect, is time T92.

Figure 447 (5) shows the timing of execution of the lever operation effect and vibration effect in the variation effect example 67 (see Figure 441).
First, at time t101, the lever operation presentation begins (see Figure 441 (1)).
Next, at time t102, the vibration effect begins (see FIG. 441 (5)).
Then, at time t103, the vibration effect ends.
Here, the time from time t101 to time t102, that is, the time from the start of the lever operation presentation to the start of the vibration presentation, is time T101.
The time from time t102 to time t103, that is, the execution time of the vibration effect, is time T102.

Here, time T71 is longer than time T61, and time T81 is longer than time T71.
Furthermore, time T72 is shorter than time T62, and time T62 and time T82 are the same length of time.
Furthermore, time T101 is longer than time T91.
Furthermore, time T92 and time T102 are the same time.
Furthermore, time T101 is shorter than time T81. In this case, time T82 and time T102 may be the same time or different times. When time T82 and time T102 are different times, time T102 may be shorter than time T82 or may be longer than time T82.

As described above, in this embodiment, the expectation is higher for the lever operation presentation of "BU5" (see FIG. 291 (44)) than for the lever operation presentation of "BU4" (see FIG. 246) (see FIG. 277 (35)). In other words, the expectation of a special game (jackpot game) is higher when the second operation display (display of the lever operation image 502 shown in FIG. 291 (44)) is executed than when the first operation display (display of the lever operation image 502 shown in FIG. 277 (35)) is executed. The presentation control unit 300 can make the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration presentation when a predetermined condition is satisfied different from the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration presentation when a predetermined condition is not satisfied. Examples of cases where a predetermined condition is satisfied include cases where the vibration presentation in the variation presentation example 13 is executed (see FIG. 291 (45), FIG. 447 (1)). In addition, examples of cases where the specified conditions are not met include cases where the vibration effect in variable performance example 13 is not executed and the vibration effect in variable performance example 14 is executed (see Figure 294 (3) and Figure 447 (2)).
In this case, the player can be given an element of surprise regarding the timing of the execution of the vibration effect, and coupled with the execution of the second operation display, which has a particularly high degree of expectation, the anticipation of the vibration effect being executed can be heightened, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specified conditions include a first specified condition (execution of a vibration effect in variable performance example 13 (see Figure 291 (45) and Figure 447 (1))) and a second specified condition (execution of a vibration effect in a revival performance (see Figure 301 (6) and Figure 447 (3))).
Furthermore, the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration presentation when the first specified condition is satisfied is longer than the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration presentation when the specified condition is not satisfied.
In addition, the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration presentation when the second specified condition is satisfied is longer than the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration presentation when the first specified condition is satisfied.
In addition, the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration presentation when the second specified condition is met is longer than the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration presentation when the specified condition is not met.
In this case, various vibration effects with different start timings are realized depending on the conditions under which the vibration effects are executed, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation that the vibration effects will be executed.

In this embodiment, in the variable performance example 14, the variable performance example 33, and the variable performance example 52, when the performance lever 163 is operated in the lever operation performance, the performance lever 163 emits light in white (see Figure 294 (2) etc.) and then emits light in rainbow colors, but this is not limited to this.
In the variation performance example 14, the variation performance example 33, and the variation performance example 52, even if the performance lever 163 is operated in the lever operation performance, the performance lever 163 may continue to emit red light. Then, when the vibration performance starts, the performance lever 163 may emit light in rainbow colors. In this case, the length of time that the performance lever 163 emits red light is the time T71 shown in FIG. 447 (2).

(Modification of the visual recognition mode of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the normal gaming state)
Next, a modified example of the visual recognition state of the middle row decorative pattern 41 until the start of the SP reach performance in the normal gaming state will be described.
In this embodiment, in the normal game state, it has been explained that the SP reach presentation starts after the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 10th visual mode in the normal reach presentation, but this is not limited to this.

First, as shown in Fig. 448(1), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the eighth visual mode, the first reach action is performed, the first reach line image 509 and the first reach notification image 510 are displayed, and the first reach sound is output. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 448 (2), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 11th visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is hidden, and a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 448 (3), the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode and a second temporary stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 448(4), the SP reach performance starts, and an SP reach image 517 is displayed.
In this way, even in the normal game state, the SP reach presentation may be started without the middle row decorative pattern 41 being displayed in the tenth visual mode in the normal reach presentation.

As described above, in this embodiment, in a variable performance in which the SP reach performance is executed in a normal game state (e.g., variable performance example 10, etc.), the display of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in a slow visual mode is executed before the start of the SP reach performance (see FIG. 275 (21)). On the other hand, in a variable performance in which the SP reach performance is executed in a special time-saving game state (e.g., variable performance example 64 (see FIG. 433 to FIG. 435)), the display of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in a slow visual mode is not executed before the start of the SP reach performance.
That is, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute, as the viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41, a first display (for example, a display using the fourth viewing mode (see FIG. 250-1(4))) in which the pattern of a specific row (for example, the middle row decorative pattern 41) is difficult to view after the start of the variable performance, a second display (for example, a display using the fifth viewing mode (see FIG. 250-1(5)), sixth viewing mode (see FIG. 250-1(6)), seventh viewing mode (see FIG. 250-1(7)), tenth viewing mode (see FIG. 250-2(13)), etc.) in which the pattern of the specific row is easier to view after the first display than in the first display, and a third display (for example, a display using the first viewing mode (see FIG. 250-1(1))) in which the pattern of the specific row stops after the second display. Furthermore, in one variable presentation, the second display of the patterns in a specific column before the start of a specific presentation is more likely to be executed when a specific presentation (SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation) is executed in the second mode (special time-saving play state) than when a specific presentation (SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation) is executed in the first mode (for example, normal play state).
In this case, in the normal game state, the special performance is likely to start after the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a slow visual mode to prompt the player that the variable performance is ending, so that the interest in the special performance can be improved. Also, in the special time-saving game state, the special performance is likely to start without displaying the middle row decorative pattern 41 in a slow visual mode, so that even in the variable performance in which the special performance is performed, the execution time of the variable performance can be set to be suitable for the special time-saving game state. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in one variable performance, the second display of the patterns in the specific column before the start of the specific performance is more likely to be executed when a specific performance is executed in the second mode than when a specific performance is executed in the first mode, including the fact that when a specific performance is executed in the first mode, the display in the second form of the patterns in the specific column before the start of the specific performance is never executed (0%), and the fact that when a specific performance is executed in the second mode, the display in the second form of the patterns in the specific column before the start of the specific performance is always executed (100%).
Furthermore, if, in one variable performance, the second display of the patterns in a specific column before the start of a specific performance is more likely to be executed when a specific performance is executed in the second mode than when a specific performance is executed in the first mode, the display in the second aspect of the patterns in a specific column before the start of a specific performance may be executed when a specific performance is executed in the first mode, and the display in the second aspect of the patterns in a specific column before the start of a specific performance may not be executed when a specific performance is executed in the second mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, in both the normal game state and the special time-saving game state, when the SP reach performance is executed, it is possible to make the middle row decorative pattern 41 invisible (difficult to see or invisible) (see FIG. 276 (25), FIG. 434 (9)). In this embodiment, the time from the start of the variable performance or reach performance until the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes invisible (difficult to see or invisible) is likely to be shorter when the variable performance in which the SP reach performance is executed is executed in the special time-saving game state than when the variable performance in which the SP reach performance is executed is executed in the normal game state. Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the player can be made aware that the performance is progressing quickly through the speed of switching the visibility state of the decorative pattern 41.
In addition, the fact that the time from the start of the variable performance or reach performance to the middle row decorative pattern 41 becoming invisible (difficult to see or unseeable) is more likely to be shorter when a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed is performed in a special time-saving play state than when a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed is performed in a normal play state includes the fact that when a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed is performed in a special time-saving play state, the time from the start of the variable performance or reach performance to the middle row decorative pattern 41 becoming invisible (difficult to see or unseeable) is always shorter (100%) than when a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed is performed in a normal play state.
Furthermore, if the time from the start of a variable performance or reach performance to the middle row decorative pattern 41 becoming invisible (difficult to see or unseeable) is likely to be shorter when a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed is performed in a special time-saving play state than when a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed is performed in a normal play state, the time from the start of a variable performance or reach performance to the middle row decorative pattern 41 becoming invisible (difficult to see or unseeable) may also be shorter when a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed is performed in a normal play state than when a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed in a special time-saving play state.

(Variation of variation example 5)
Next, we will explain a modified example of variable performance example 5 (see Figures 262 to 265).
Figure 449 shows a modified example of variable performance example 5.
First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 252 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 449 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 449(2), the lever operation presentation starts, lever operation image 502 is displayed, and a first lever sound is output. The operation effective period of this lever operation presentation is the first period.
Then, when the effect lever 163 is operated during the effective operation period in the lever operation effect, as shown in FIG. 449 (3), a second image 527 is displayed upon operation and a second operation sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 449(4), the role production is executed, and the left movable role 115A moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role second effect image 513 is displayed around the left movable role 115A, and the second role sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 262 (3) to (8), Figures 263 (9) to (16), Figures 264 (17) to (24), and Figures 265 (25) to (29) are performed.

In this way, the lever operation performance and the gimmick performance are executed after the decorative pattern 41 starts to change and before it temporarily stops, and after the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, a change performance may be performed in which the lever operation performance and the gimmick performance are not executed.
In addition, the example shown in FIG. 449 is not limited to the modified example of the variation performance example 5. As a modified example of the variation performance example 24 (see FIG. 319 to FIG. 321), the lever operation performance and the role performance may be executed as in the example shown in FIG. 449 before the decorative pattern 41 starts to vary and stops temporarily, and the lever operation performance and the role performance may not be executed after the decorative pattern 41 stops temporarily. In addition, as a modified example of the variation performance example 43 (see FIG. 376 to FIG. 379), the lever operation performance and the role performance may be executed as in the example shown in FIG. 449 before the decorative pattern 41 starts to vary and stops temporarily, and the lever operation performance and the role performance may not be executed after the decorative pattern 41 stops temporarily.

(Variation of variation example 10)
Next, we will explain a modified example of variable performance example 10 (see Figures 273 to 278).
Figure 450 shows a modified example of variable performance example 10.
First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 273 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 450 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 450(2), the first step performance is executed, step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed, and the first step sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 450(3), the second stage of step performance is executed, step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed, and a second step sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 450(4), the third step performance is executed, step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed, and the third step sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 450 (5), the step image 508 is no longer displayed, and the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 450(6), the zone promotion effect is started and a zone promotion image 505 is displayed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 274 (14) to (16), Figures 275 (17) to (24), Figures 276 (25) to (32), Figures 277 (33) to (40), and Figures 278 (41) to (43) are performed.

In this way, the lever operation performance and the gimmick performance are not executed after the decorative pattern 41 starts to change and before it temporarily stops, and after the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, a change performance in which the lever operation performance and the gimmick performance are executed may be executed.
In addition, the example shown in FIG. 450 is not limited to the modified example of the variation performance example 10. As a modified example of the variation performance example 29 (see FIG. 329 to FIG. 334), the lever operation performance and the role performance are not executed before the decorative pattern 41 starts to vary and stops temporarily, and the lever operation performance (see FIG. 333 (35)) and the role performance (see FIG. 333 (33)) may be executed after the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. In addition, as a modified example of the variation performance example 48 (see FIG. 387 to FIG. 392), the lever operation performance and the role performance are not executed before the decorative pattern 41 starts to vary and stops temporarily, and the lever operation performance (see FIG. 391 (35)) and the role performance (see FIG. 391 (33)) may be executed after the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

(Variation of variation example 11)
Next, we will explain a modified example of variable performance example 11 (see Figures 279 to 284).
Figure 451 shows a modified example of variable performance example 11.
First, the same presentation as that shown in Figures 273 (1) to (5) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 451 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 451(2), the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 stop. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive symbols 41. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 become invisible (difficult to see or impossible to see). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.
After this, the same presentation will be performed as shown in Figures 279 (4) to (8), Figures 280 (9) to (16), Figures 281 (17) to (24), Figures 282 (25) to (32), Figures 283 (33) to (40), and Figures 284 (41) to (46).

In this way, the lever operation performance and the gimmick performance are not executed after the decorative pattern 41 starts to change and before it temporarily stops, and after the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, a change performance in which the lever operation performance and the gimmick performance are executed may be executed.
In addition, the example shown in FIG. 451 is not limited to the modified example of the variation performance example 11. As a modified example of the variation performance example 30 (see FIG. 335 to FIG. 340), the lever operation performance and the role performance are not executed before the decorative pattern 41 starts to vary and stops temporarily, and the lever operation performance (see FIG. 339 (38)) and the role performance (see FIG. 339 (36)) may be executed after the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. In addition, as a modified example of the variation performance example 49 (see FIG. 393 to FIG. 398), the lever operation performance and the role performance are not executed before the decorative pattern 41 starts to vary and stops temporarily, and the lever operation performance (see FIG. 397 (38)) and the role performance (see FIG. 397 (36)) may be executed after the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

(Variation of variation example 13)
Next, we will explain a modified example of variable performance example 13 (see Figures 286 to 293).
Figure 452 shows a modified example of variable performance example 13.
First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 285 (1) to (8) and 286 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 452 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 452 (2), the zone promotion effect is started and a zone promotion image 505 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 452(3), the zone presentation is started, and a zone notification image 528 is displayed. At this time, a zone effect image 529 is displayed around the zone notification image 528, and a zone start sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 452(4), the pseudo consecutive symbols 41 stop. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive symbols 41, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 become invisible (difficult to see or invisible), and a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.
After this, the same presentation will be carried out as shown in Figures 287 (10) to (16), Figures 288 (17) to (24), Figures 289 (25) to (32), Figures 290 (33) to (40), Figures 291 (41) to (48), Figures 292 (49) to (56), and Figures 293 (57) and (58).

As described above, in this embodiment, the expectation of the lever operation effect executed before the start of the specific performance (temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41) is 3% (see FIG. 246), and the expectation of the lever operation effect executed after the start of the specific performance is 25%. Therefore, it is easier to execute a special game (jackpot game) when a variable performance (such as a modified example of the variable performance example 10 (see FIG. 273 to FIG. 278, FIG. 450)) is executed in which the lever operation effect is not executed before the start of the specific performance and the lever operation effect is executed after the start of the specific performance, than when a variable performance (such as a variable performance example 1 (see FIG. 252 to FIG. 254)) is executed in which the lever operation effect is executed before the start of the specific performance and the lever operation effect is not executed after the start of the specific performance. Also, in this embodiment, the expectation of the vibration effect executed before the start of the specific performance is 65%, and the expectation of the lever operation effect executed after the start of the specific performance is 25%. In other words, special games are easier to execute when a variable performance in which a lever operation performance is performed without a vibration performance is executed before the start of a specific performance (such as a modified example of variable performance example 13 (see Figures 286 to 293, 452)) is executed, rather than when a variable performance in which a lever operation performance is executed without a vibration performance after the start of a specific performance (such as a modified example of variable performance example 10 (see Figures 273 to 278, 450)).
In this case, the player's sense of expectation for the lever operation presentation can be increased as the variation presentation progresses. Also, even in the first half of the variation presentation, if a vibration presentation is executed, the player's sense of expectation can be significantly increased, so the player can be kept in expectation throughout the entire period of the variation presentation, and the interest of the game can be increased.

In addition, the fact that a special game is more likely to be executed when a variable performance is executed in which a lever operation performance is performed before the start of a specific performance and a lever operation performance is performed after the start of a specific performance than when a variable performance is executed in which a lever operation performance is performed before the start of a specific performance and a lever operation performance is not performed after the start of a specific performance includes the fact that a special game will not be executed (0%) when a variable performance is executed in which a lever operation performance is performed before the start of a specific performance and a lever operation performance is not performed after the start of a specific performance.
In addition, the fact that a special game is more likely to be executed when a variable performance in which a vibration effect is performed without a lever operation performance is executed before the start of a specific performance than when a variable performance in which a lever operation performance is executed without a vibration effect after the start of a specific performance includes the fact that a special game will not be executed (0%) when a variable performance in which a lever operation performance is executed without a vibration effect after the start of a specific performance, and the fact that a special game will be executed (100%) when a variable performance in which a vibration effect is performed without a lever operation performance is executed before the start of a specific performance.
In addition, if a special game is more easily executed when a variable performance in which a vibration effect is performed without a lever operation performance is executed before the start of a specific performance than when a variable performance in which a lever operation performance is executed without a vibration effect after the start of a specific performance is executed, a special game may be executed when a variable performance in which a lever operation performance is executed without a vibration effect after the start of a specific performance is executed, or a special game may not be executed when a variable performance in which a vibration effect is performed without a lever operation performance is executed before the start of a specific performance.

In this embodiment, the expectation of the special feature performance executed before the start of the specific performance (temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41) is 11% (see FIG. 246), and the expectation of the special feature performance executed after the start of the specific performance is 35%. Therefore, it is easier to execute a special game when a variable performance (such as a modified example of variable performance example 10 (see FIGS. 273 to 278, FIG. 450)) in which a special feature performance is not performed before the start of the specific performance and a special feature performance is performed after the start of the specific performance is executed, than when a variable performance (such as variable performance example 4 (see FIGS. 259 to 261)) in which a special feature performance is performed before the start of the specific performance and a special feature performance is not performed after the start of the specific performance is executed. Furthermore, special games are more likely to be played when a variable performance in which a reel performance is performed without a vibration performance before the start of a specific performance (such as a modified example of variable performance 13 (see Figures 286 to 293, 452)) is executed, than when a variable performance in which a reel performance is performed without a vibration performance after the start of a specific performance (such as a modified example of variable performance example 10 (see Figures 273 to 278, 450)).
In this case, the player's sense of expectation for the special effects can be increased as the variable effects progress. Even in the first half of the variable effects, if a vibration effect is executed, the player's sense of expectation can be significantly increased, so that the player can be kept in expectation throughout the entire period of the variable effects, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, the fact that a special game is more likely to be executed when a variable performance is executed in which a reel performance is performed before the start of a specific performance and a reel performance is performed after the start of a specific performance than when a variable performance is executed in which a reel performance is performed before the start of a specific performance and a reel performance is not performed after the start of the specific performance includes the fact that a special game will not be executed (0%) when a variable performance is executed in which a reel performance is performed before the start of a specific performance and a reel performance is not performed after the start of the specific performance.
In addition, the fact that a special game is more likely to be executed when a variable performance in which a vibration performance is performed without a reel performance is executed before the start of a specific performance than when a variable performance in which a reel performance is executed without a vibration performance after the start of a specific performance is executed includes the fact that a special game will not be executed (0%) when a variable performance in which a reel performance is executed without a vibration performance after the start of a specific performance is executed, and the fact that a special game will be executed (100%) when a variable performance in which a vibration performance is performed without a reel performance is executed before the start of a specific performance.
In addition, if a special game is more likely to be executed when a variable performance in which a vibration performance is performed without a reel performance is executed before the start of a specific performance than when a variable performance in which a reel performance is performed without a vibration performance after the start of a specific performance is executed, a special game may be executed when a variable performance in which a vibration performance is performed without a reel performance is executed after the start of a specific performance, or a special game may not be executed when a variable performance in which a vibration performance is performed without a reel performance is executed before the start of a specific performance.

In this embodiment, the specific effect is described as the temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41, but this is not limited to this.
The specific performance may be any of the performances executed in the variable performance, such as reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), pseudo consecutive performance, zone performance, step performance, role performance, etc. In this case, the expectation degree before the temporary stop of the role performance, lever operation performance, and vibration performance shown in FIG. 246 and the expectation degree after the temporary stop may be the expectation degree before any of the specific performances described above and the expectation degree after the specific performance.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a jackpot game, vibration effect, and red illumination of the effect lever 163 are more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which the third lever sound (see FIG. 291 (44)) is output is executed than when a variable effect in which the second lever sound (see FIG. 277 (35)) is output is executed.
In addition, in this embodiment, a jackpot game and a vibration effect are more likely to be executed when a variable effect is performed in which a special light-emitting effect (red light emission) of the effect lever 163 and the output of a third lever sound are executed, than when a variable effect is performed in which a specific light-emitting effect (white light emission) of the effect lever 163 and the output of a second lever sound are executed.
Also, a first variation effect in which a specific light emission effect and a third lever sound are output, and a second variation effect in which a special light emission effect and a second lever sound are output may be provided. In this case, a jackpot game or a vibration effect may be more easily executed when the second variation effect is executed than when the first variation effect is executed. Also, a jackpot game or a vibration effect may be more easily executed when the first variation effect is executed than when the second variation effect is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a special game and special light emission in which the effect lever 163 emits red light are more likely to be executed when a variable effect is executed in which a second effect (see FIG. 286(2) etc.) is executed in which a vibration effect is executed without a lever operation effect, than when a variable effect is executed in which a first effect (see FIG. 274(11) etc.) is executed in which a lever operation effect is executed without a vibration effect. Therefore, even when a vibration effect is executed that does not involve the player operating the effect lever 163, the player can be made to expect that a special game will be executed.
In addition, the fact that special lighting is more likely to be performed when a variable performance in which the second performance is executed is performed than when a variable performance in which the first performance is executed includes the fact that special lighting is never executed (0%) when a variable performance in which the first performance is executed is performed, and the fact that special lighting is always executed (100%) when a variable performance in which the second performance is executed is performed.
Furthermore, if special lighting is more likely to be performed when a variable performance in which the second performance is executed is performed than when a variable performance in which the first performance is executed is performed, special lighting may be performed when a variable performance in which the first performance is executed is performed, and special lighting may not be performed when a variable performance in which the second performance is executed is performed.

Next, the relationship between the stage (performance mode) controlled by the performance control unit 300 and the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 that the performance control unit 300 causes to be output from the speaker 156 will be described.
Figure 453 is a diagram showing the relationship between the stage controlled by the performance control unit 300 and the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41.

First, the stopping sound output from the speaker 156 when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the first stage (first performance mode) will be described.
The stop sounds output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop during execution of the reach performance include a first stop sound, a second stop sound, a seventh stop sound, and a fourteenth stop sound.
In addition, the stop sounds output when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops during the execution of the reach performance include a first stop sound, a second stop sound, and a seventh stop sound. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive symbol 41 is regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the pseudo consecutive stop sound is also included.
In addition, the stop sounds output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop during the execution of the normal reach performance include a fifth stop sound and a tenth stop sound.
In addition, during the execution of the normal reach performance, the stop sounds outputted when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops include the first stop sound, the eleventh stop sound, and the twelfth stop sound. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive symbol 41 is regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the pseudo consecutive stop sound is also included.
In addition, during the execution of the SP reach performance, the stop sounds outputted when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops include the third stop sound, the fourth stop sound, and the thirteenth stop sound. In addition, when the development symbol 41 is regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the development stop sound is also included.
In addition, the stop sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops during execution of the SPSP reach performance includes a sixth stop sound.
In addition, during the execution of an effect suggesting or notifying that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the stopping sounds output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop include the eighth stopping sound, the ninth stopping sound, and the twenty-third stopping sound.
In addition, during the execution of an effect suggesting or announcing that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the stopping sounds output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops include the eighth stopping sound, the ninth stopping sound, the thirteenth stopping sound, and the twenty-third stopping sound.

Next, the stopping sound output from the speaker 156 when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the second stage (second performance mode) will be described.
The stop sounds output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop during execution of the reach performance include a 15th stop sound, a 16th stop sound, an 18th stop sound, and a 19th stop sound.
In addition, during the execution of the reach performance, the stop sounds outputted when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops include the 15th stop sound, the 16th stop sound, and the 18th stop sound. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive symbol 41 is regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the pseudo consecutive stop sound is also included.
In addition, the stop sounds output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop during the execution of the normal reach performance include a tenth stop sound and a seventeenth stop sound.
In addition, the stop sounds output when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops during the execution of the normal reach performance include the 12th stop sound and the 15th stop sound. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive symbol 41 is regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the pseudo consecutive stop sound is also included.
In addition, during the execution of the SP reach performance, the stop sounds outputted when the middle row decorative symbols 41 stop include the third stop sound, the fourth stop sound, the thirteenth stop sound, and the twenty-fourth stop sound. In addition, when the development symbol 41 is regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the development stop sound is also included.
In addition, the stop sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops during execution of the SPSP reach performance includes a sixth stop sound.
In addition, during the execution of an effect suggesting or notifying that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the stopping sounds output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop include the eighth stopping sound, the ninth stopping sound, and the twenty-third stopping sound.
In addition, during the execution of an effect suggesting or notifying that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the stopping sounds output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops include the eighth stopping sound, the ninth stopping sound, the thirteenth stopping sound, and the twenty-third stopping sound.

Next, the stopping sound output from the speaker 156 when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the third stage (third performance mode) will be described.
The stop sounds output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop during execution of the reach performance include a first stop sound, a second stop sound, a 21st stop sound, and a 22nd stop sound.
In addition, the stop sounds output when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops during the execution of the reach performance include a first stop sound, a second stop sound, and a 21st stop sound. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive symbol 41 is regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the pseudo consecutive stop sound is also included.
In addition, the stop sounds output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop during the execution of the normal reach performance include a tenth stop sound and a twentieth stop sound.
In addition, during the execution of the normal reach performance, the stop sounds outputted when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops include the first stop sound, the eleventh stop sound, and the twelfth stop sound. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive symbol 41 is regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the pseudo consecutive stop sound is also included.
In addition, during the execution of the SP reach performance, the stop sounds outputted when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops include the third stop sound, the fourth stop sound, and the thirteenth stop sound. In addition, when the development symbol 41 is regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the development stop sound is also included.
In addition, the stop sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops during execution of the SPSP reach performance includes a sixth stop sound.
In addition, during the execution of an effect suggesting or notifying that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the stopping sounds output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop include the eighth stopping sound, the ninth stopping sound, and the twenty-third stopping sound.
In addition, during the execution of an effect suggesting or announcing that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the stopping sounds output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops include the eighth stopping sound, the ninth stopping sound, the thirteenth stopping sound, and the twenty-third stopping sound.

Next, the stopping sound output from the speaker 156 when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the fourth stage (fourth performance mode) will be described.
The stop sounds output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop during execution of the reach performance include a 25th stop sound and a 28th stop sound.
In addition, the stop sounds output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops during the execution of the reach performance include the 25th stop sound and the 28th stop sound.
In addition, the stop sound output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop during the execution of the normal reach performance includes a 26th stop sound.
In addition, the stopping sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops during the execution of the SP reach performance includes the 27th stopping sound.
In addition, during the execution of the performance suggesting or notifying that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win, the stop sounds outputted when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop include the 29th stop sound and the 30th stop sound.
In addition, during the execution of the performance suggesting or notifying that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the stopping sounds outputted when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops include the 29th stopping sound and the 30th stopping sound.

As described above, in this embodiment, the stopping sounds of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows are different from the stopping sounds of the middle row decorative patterns 41, or the number of types of stopping sounds of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows is different from the number of types of stopping sounds of the middle row decorative patterns 41.
In this case, a variety of effects can be realized depending on the symbols that stop, which can increase the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can output a first stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a losing variable performance in which the reach performance is not executed in the first stage. Also, the performance control unit 300 can output a sixth stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a losing variable performance in which the reach performance is executed in the first stage. That is, in this embodiment, it is possible to make the manner of the sound effect output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops different between the first specific variable performance (losing variable performance in which the reach performance is not executed) and the losing variable performance in which the reach performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the impression given to the player by the stopping of the middle row decorative pattern 41 different between the variable performance in which the reach performance is executed and the variable performance in which the reach performance is not executed.
In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the sound effect output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops common (for example, output the first stop sound in both cases) for the first specific variation performance and the second specific variation performance (a losing variation performance in which a normal reach performance is executed and neither an SP reach performance nor an SPSP reach performance is executed). Therefore, in the second specific variation performance, it is possible to prevent the player from getting excessively hopeful even though it is a losing variation performance.
In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the sound effect output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop common (for example, output the first stop sound in all cases) in the first specific variable performance, the second specific variable performance, and the third specific variable performance (miss variable performance in which the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is executed). Therefore, the stop of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows can be easily recognized by the player regardless of the variable performance.
In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the stop sound output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop in a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode) common between the third specific change performance and the fourth specific change performance (jackpot change performance) (for example, outputting the first stop sound in both), and can make the stop sound output when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops in a special display mode (low decorative display mode) different (outputting the sixth stop sound in the third specific change performance, and the eighth stop sound in the fourth specific change performance). Therefore, even if the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops in the same display mode, the impression that the middle row decorative symbol 41 gives to the player can be made different between the third specific change performance and the fourth specific change performance.

In this embodiment, the number of types of stop sounds for the middle row decorative patterns 41 is greater than the number of types of stop sounds for the left and right rows decorative patterns 41 in the first to third stages. In this way, by providing more variety in the stop modes of the middle row decorative patterns 41 than the stop modes of the left and right rows decorative patterns 41, the player can be more likely to notice the stops of the middle row decorative patterns 41. Note that the number of types of stop sounds for the left and right rows decorative patterns 41 may be greater than the number of types of stop sounds for the middle row decorative patterns 41 in the first to third stages. In other words, it is sufficient that the number of types of stop sounds for the left and right rows decorative patterns 41 and the number of types of stop sounds for the middle row decorative patterns 41 are different in the first to third stages.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to make the stop sounds output when the left and right decorative patterns 41 stop in the first stage and the second stage different (for example, the first stop sound and the fifteenth stop sound), and to make the stop sound output when the middle decorative pattern 41 stops the same (for example, the third stop sound). And, it is possible to make the stop sounds output when the left and right decorative patterns 41 stop in the first stage and the fourth stage different (for example, the first stop sound and the twenty-fifth stop sound), and to make the stop sound output when the middle decorative pattern 41 stops different (for example, the third stop sound and the twenty-seventh stop sound). Therefore, it is easier for the player to recognize the fourth stage as a stage with a different presentation from the first stage than the second stage.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, special play and red illumination of the effect lever 163 are more likely to be executed when a variable effect (such as a modified example of variable effect 13 (see Figures 286 to 293, 452)) in which a vibration effect is performed without a lever operation effect is executed before the start of a specific effect (temporary stop of decorative pattern 41, reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, zone effect, step effect, etc.)) is executed than when a variable effect (such as a modified example of variable effect example 10 (see Figures 273 to 278, 450)) in which a lever operation effect is executed without a vibration effect is executed from the start of a specific effect (temporary stop of decorative pattern 41, reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, zone effect, step effect, etc.) to the SPSP reach effect.
In this case, even if it is in the first half of the variable performance, if a vibration performance is executed, the player's sense of expectation can be significantly increased, so that the player can be kept in anticipation throughout the entire period of the variable performance, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, if it is easier to execute a special game and the illumination of the performance lever 163 in red when a variable performance in which a lever operation performance is performed without a vibration performance is executed without a lever operation performance before the start of a specific performance in a normal game state than when a variable performance in which a lever operation performance is executed without a vibration performance is executed without a vibration performance from the start of a specific performance to the SPSP reach performance in a normal game state, the special game and the illumination of the performance lever 163 in red may be executed when a variable performance in which a lever operation performance is executed without a vibration performance from the start of a specific performance to the SPSP reach performance in a normal game state, or the special game and the illumination of the performance lever 163 in red may not be executed when a variable performance in which a lever operation performance is executed without a vibration performance is executed without a lever operation performance before the start of a specific performance in a normal game state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, special play and the illumination of the effect lever 163 in red are more likely to be executed when a variable effect (such as a modified example of variable effect 13 (see Figures 286 to 293, 452)) in which a vibration effect is performed without a reel effect is executed before the start of a specific effect (temporary stop of decorative pattern 41, reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, zone effect, step effect, etc.)) is executed than when a variable effect (such as a modified example of variable effect example 10 (see Figures 273 to 278, 450)) in which a reel effect is executed without a vibration effect from the start of a specific effect (temporary stop of decorative pattern 41, reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, zone effect, step effect, etc.) to the SPSP reach effect.
In this case, even if it is in the first half of the variable performance, if a vibration performance is executed, the player's sense of expectation can be significantly increased, so that the player can be kept in anticipation throughout the entire period of the variable performance, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, if it is easier to execute a special game and the effect lever 163 to light up in red when a variable effect in which a reel effect is performed without a vibration effect is executed before the start of a specific effect in a normal game state than when a variable effect in which a reel effect is performed without a vibration effect is executed after the start of a specific effect until the SPSP reach effect in a normal game state, the special game and the effect lever 163 may light up in red when a variable effect in which a reel effect is performed without a vibration effect is executed after the start of a specific effect until the SPSP reach effect in a normal game state, or the special game and the effect lever 163 may not light up in red when a variable effect in which a reel effect is performed without a vibration effect is executed before the start of a specific effect in a normal game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of types of variable paths used is greater in the normal game state than in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, even in the normal game state, the excitement of the game can be increased by a variety of presentations.

In this embodiment, it has been explained that in a miss-changing performance in which a normal reach performance is executed and an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is not executed, the stopping sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is the same as the stopping sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode in a miss-changing performance in which a reach performance is not executed, but this is not limited to the above.
In a losing variable performance in which a normal reach performance is executed and an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is not executed, the stopping sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode may be an original stopping sound different from either the stopping sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode in a losing variable performance in which a reach performance is not executed, or the stopping sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode in a variable performance in which an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that in the fourth stage, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 change along the first change path, but this is not limited to this. In the fourth stage, when a reach effect is not being executed, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 may change along a change path different from any of the change paths used in the first to third stages. In this case, it can be emphasized that the fourth stage is an effect mode unique to the special time-saving game state.

In addition, the expectation of a jackpot game when a specific effect (such as a normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, pseudo consecutive effect, zone effect, gimmick effect, development effect, vibration effect, step effect, effect that changes the display mode of the reserved image 52 or the variable image 51) is executed may be varied depending on the stage. As an example, a jackpot game may be made easier to execute when a variable effect in which a specific effect is executed is executed in the second stage than when a variable effect in which a specific effect is executed is executed in the first stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 can make the operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 when it is temporarily stopped in the reach performance the same whether in the normal game state or the special time-saving game state. Here, the fact that the operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 when it is temporarily stopped in the reach performance is the same whether in the normal game state or the special time-saving game state includes not only that the operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 when it is temporarily stopped in the reach performance is completely the same in the normal game state and the special time-saving game state, but also that part of the operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 when it is temporarily stopped in the reach performance is the same in the normal game state and the special time-saving game state (such as the size and display mode being different but the direction of the operation when it is temporarily stopped being the same).

In addition, in the present embodiment, a li-zhi effect is executed when two rows of decorative symbols 41 are aligned, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, a reach effect may be executed by temporarily stopping one column of the decorative symbols 41 with a specific character. At this time, the remaining two columns of the decorative symbols 41 may continue to change.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sound effects output from speaker 156 include a first lever sound, a first stop sound, a first operation sound, a second stop sound, a first role sound, a first step sound, a second step sound, a first reach sound, a second role sound, a pseudo consecutive stop sound, a first re-variation sound, a third stop sound, a revival challenge sound, a revival failure sound, a fourth stop sound, a second reach sound (fifth stop sound), a first start sound, a third role sound, a third step sound, 2nd operation sound, zone start sound, 3rd reach sound, 1st change sound, pattern change sound, development stop sound, 4th role sound, 2nd lever sound, 6th stop sound, 2nd re-variation sound, 2nd change sound, 3rd change sound, 7th stop sound, 3rd lever sound, 1st success sound, 1st big win notification sound, 8th stop sound, 4th lever sound, 9th stop sound, 4th change sound, 4th reach sound (10th stop sound), 11th stop sound, 12th stop sound, 13th stop sound, 1st repeat Live sound, 14th stop sound, 15th stop sound, 3rd operation sound, 16th stop sound, 5th role sound, step 1 sound, step 2 sound, 6th role sound, 5th reach sound (17th stop sound), 2nd start sound, 7th role sound, step 3 sound, 4th operation sound, 18th stop sound, 19th stop sound, 5th operation sound, 8th role sound, 1st stage sound, 2nd stage sound, 9th role sound, 6th reach sound (20th stop sound), 10th role sound, 3rd stage sound, 6th operation The sound, 21st stop sound, 22nd stop sound, 23rd stop sound, 24th stop sound, 25th stop sound, 4th start sound, 11th role sound, 7th reach sound (26th stop sound), 5th lever sound, 27th stop sound, 5th changing sound, 28th stop sound, 6th changing sound, 6th lever sound, 2nd success sound, 2nd jackpot notification sound, 29th stop sound, 7th lever sound, 30th stop sound, and 2nd revival sound are all different sound effects (different sounds).

In addition, in this embodiment, there are a first start operation, a first fluctuation operation, a first stop operation, a first provisional stop operation, a second start operation, a second stop operation, a first reach operation, a second provisional stop operation, a second fluctuation operation, a third fluctuation operation, a third stop operation (second reach operation), a third start operation, a third reach operation, a pattern change operation, a fourth start operation, a fourth stop operation (fourth reach operation), a fifth reach operation, a fifth start operation, a fourth fluctuation operation, a fifth stop operation, a sixth start operation, a sixth stop operation, a sixth reach operation, a seventh stop The first motion, the seventh start motion, the eighth reach motion, the eighth start motion, the ninth reach motion, the fifth change motion, the ninth start motion, the sixth change motion, the eighth stop motion, the seventh change motion, the tenth start motion, the ninth stop motion, the tenth reach motion, the tenth stop motion, the eleventh start motion, the twelfth reach motion, the twelfth start motion, the thirteenth reach motion, the eighth change motion, the thirteenth start motion, the eleventh stop motion, the fourteenth start motion, the twelfth stop motion, and the ninth change motion are all different motion modes (display modes). In addition, even if the motion is the same "raise the right hand" as in the first reach motion (see FIG. 260 (14)) and the sixth reach motion (see FIG. 317 (14)), the decorative patterns 41 with different display modes are operated, resulting in different motion modes (display modes).

In addition, when there is no reservation for the winning of the first starting hole 121 and the special pattern has not changed, a game ball may win the first starting hole 121. In this case, first, a reservation for the winning of the first starting hole 121 occurs. Then, in this state, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table (see FIG. 24). Therefore, the "reserved number" when the variation pattern is selected is "1". Then, when a variation pattern is selected, the reserved number for the winning of the first starting hole 121 is subtracted. In addition, when there is no reservation for the winning of the second starting hole 122 and the special pattern has not changed, if a game ball wins the second starting hole 122, first, a reservation for the winning of the second starting hole 122 occurs. Then, in this state, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table. Therefore, the "reserved number" when the variation pattern is selected is "1". Then, when a variation pattern is selected, the reserved number for the winning of the second starting hole 122 is subtracted.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 in a state where no reservation has been made for the winning of the first starting hole 121 and the special symbol has not changed, "1" is displayed in the reservation number display 55 of the first starting hole 121, and the reservation image 52 is displayed. Then, "0" is displayed in the reservation number display 55 of the first starting hole 121. In addition, the reservation image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51.
In addition, when a game ball enters the second start port 122 in a state where no reservation has been made for the winning of the second start port 122 and the special symbol has not changed, "1" is displayed in the reservation number display 55 of the second start port 122 and the reservation image 52 is displayed. Then, "0" is displayed in the reservation number display 55 of the second start port 122. In addition, the reservation image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51.

Therefore, each of the above-mentioned change effects performed based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being "1" may also be a change effect performed based on a game ball entering the first starting port 121 in a state where no reservation has occurred for a winning ball at the first starting port 121 and the special pattern has not changed.
In addition, each of the above-mentioned change effects performed based on the reserved number for the second starting port 122 being "1" may also be a change effect performed based on a game ball entering the second starting port 122 in a state where no reservation has been made for a winning entry at the second starting port 122 and the special pattern has not changed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the variable performance examples 4 to 11, 13 to 19, 23 to 30, 32 to 38, 42 to 49, 51 to 57, and 67 to 70 are all variable performances that are performed based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being "1", but are not limited to this. Each of these variable performance examples may be a variable performance that is performed based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being any number from "2" to "4".
In addition, although it has been described that the variable performance example 63, the variable performance example 64, and the variable performance example 66 are all variable performances that are performed based on the reserved number for the second starting port 122 being "1", the present invention is not limited to this. Each of these variable performance examples may be a variable performance that is performed based on the reserved number for the second starting port 122 being any number from "2" to "4".

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the development prompting performance and the development performance are executed in the SP reach performance, but this is not limited to this.
During the execution of the normal reach performance or when the reach performance is not being executed, the development prompting performance and the development performance may be executed. In this case, the execution of the development performance may result in the execution of the SP reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the effective operation period in the lever operation presentation includes a first period to a fourth period.
Here, the effective operation period may be set so that the later the first period, the second period, the third period, and the fourth period, the longer the effective operation period.Also, the earlier the first period, the second period, the third period, and the fourth period, the longer the effective operation period.Also, the first period, the second period, the third period, and the fourth period may all be the same length of time.
In addition, the effective operation period of the lever operation effect in the SPSP reach effect and the effective operation period of the lever operation effect in the promotion prompting effect may be different times.

In addition, in this embodiment, different change paths are used for the SP reach performance and the SPSP reach performance, but this is not limited to this.
In an SPSP reach performance in a specific change performance, the middle row decorative pattern 41 may change along the same change path as the SP reach performance in this specific change performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, a distinction is made between the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect, but this is not limited to this.
The SP reach performance and the SPSP reach performance in one variable performance may be collectively regarded as the SP reach performance.

Also, in this embodiment, in the third stage, the middle row decorative pattern 41 performs the sixth fluctuation action (fluctuation along the sixth fluctuation path) at the start of the reach performance (see Figure 374 (14)), and then performs the first fluctuation action (fluctuation along the first fluctuation path) (see Figure 374 (15)), but is not limited to this.
In the third stage, the middle row decorative pattern 41 may execute the first variation action from the start of the reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the second stage, the movement path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 when a normal reach performance is being executed (see Figure 317 (15)) is different from the movement path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 when a normal reach performance is being executed in the first stage or the third stage (see Figure 260 (15), Figure 374 (15)), but is not limited to this.
The change path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 when the normal reach performance is being executed in the second stage may be the same as the change path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 when the normal reach performance is being executed in the first stage or the third stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the change path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 when a normal reach performance is being executed in the third stage is the same as the change path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 when a normal reach performance is being executed in the first stage, but this is not limited to this.
The change path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 when the normal reach performance is being executed in the third stage may be made different from any of the change paths of the middle row decorative pattern 41 when the normal reach performance is being executed in the first and second stages.

Also, in this embodiment, it has been described that variable BGM is output during the variable performance. Here, the type of sound output for the variable BGM may differ depending on the progress of the performance. As one example, the type of sound in the variable BGM may differ before the start of the reach performance, while a normal reach performance is being executed, while an SP reach performance is being executed, while an SPSP reach performance is being executed, and after the reach performance is executed when a missing number decorative pattern 41 or a repeat number decorative pattern 41 is being displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that each of the variable performances from variable performance example 61 to variable performance example 70 is a variable performance in a special time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this.
Each of the variable performance examples 61 to 70 may be a variable performance in a specific time-saving game state.

The above-mentioned "second visual recognition mode in which the symbols in the specific row move at a slower speed after the first mode and become visible" also includes a visual recognition mode when the decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped. In other words, the "slow speed" of the symbols in the specific row after the first mode also includes the speed of the symbols becoming "0".
In the present embodiment, the display time in the fifth visual recognition mode and the sixth visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41 is provided even in the special time-saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the special time-saving game state, the display in the fifth visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41 may not be executed. In the special time-saving game state, the display in the sixth visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41 may not be executed.
In the special time-saving game state, neither the fifth visual recognition mode nor the sixth visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41 may be executed. In other words, in the special time-saving game state, the display time of the "second visual recognition mode in which the patterns in the specific row slow down after the first mode and become visible" may be 0 seconds.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 and the development pattern 41 are displayed. Here, the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 and the development pattern 41 are images displayed in place of the middle row decorative pattern 41. Therefore, in a broad sense, the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 and the development pattern 41 are also included in the middle row decorative pattern 41.
In addition, the pseudo consecutive patterns 41 and the development patterns 41 may be displayed instead of the left row decorative patterns 41 or instead of the right row decorative patterns 41. In other words, the pseudo consecutive patterns 41 and the development patterns 41 may be regarded as the left row decorative patterns 41 or as the right row decorative patterns 41.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that in the normal game state, after the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is executed, there is no sound when the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed again (see Figure 268 (18)), but this is not limited to this.
In the normal game mode, when a highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed again after an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is executed, the revival failure sound (see FIG. 268 (17)) may continue to be output and then become silent.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that various stop sounds are output when the decorative pattern 41 stops.
Here, the timing at which the stop sound is output is not limited to the same time as the stop of the decorative pattern 41. If the stop sound is output when the decorative pattern 41 is stopped, the output of the stop sound may start before the decorative pattern 41 stops, or may start after the decorative pattern 41 stops.

In addition, in this embodiment, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are arranged in the left-right direction, but this is not limited to this.
The three rows of decorative patterns 41 may be arranged vertically.
Furthermore, the decorative patterns 41 in a particular row among the three rows of decorative patterns 41 may be displayed shifted vertically or horizontally relative to the decorative patterns 41 in the other rows.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the decorative patterns 41 stop in the order of the left row decorative pattern 41, the right row decorative pattern 41, and the middle row decorative pattern 41, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the decorative patterns 41 may stop in the order of the left row decorative pattern 41, the middle row decorative pattern 41, and the right row decorative pattern 41. In this case, the relationship between the operation of the decorative patterns 41 and the output of the stop sound in each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples is reversed between the right row decorative pattern 41 and the middle row decorative pattern 41.
Also, for example, the decorative patterns 41 may stop in the order of the right row decorative pattern 41, the middle row decorative pattern 41, and the left row decorative pattern 41. In this case, the relationship between the operation of the decorative patterns 41 and the output of the stop sound in each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples is reversed between the left row decorative pattern 41 and the middle row decorative pattern 41.
In other words, the "design of a specific row" mentioned above using the middle row decorative design 41 as an example may be the left row decorative design 41 or the right row decorative design 41.

In addition, in this embodiment, the relationship between the change performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "1" and the change performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "4" (see FIG. 445, etc.) has been described, but is not limited to this. The relationship between the two change performances described above may be a relationship between a change performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "1" and a change performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "3". The relationship between the two change performances described above may be a relationship between a change performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "1" and a change performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "2". The relationship between the two above-mentioned variable performances may be a relationship between a variable performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "2" and a variable performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "4". The relationship between the two above-mentioned variable performances may be a relationship between a variable performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "3" and a variable performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "4". The relationship between the two above-mentioned variable performances may be a relationship between a variable performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "2" and a variable performance based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "3".

In addition, in this embodiment, when the development teasing performance is being executed, one of the middle row decorative patterns 41 and the development pattern 41 change (see Figures 383 (2) and (3)), but this is not limited to this.
When the development teasing performance is being executed, a plurality of middle row decorative patterns 41 (for example, "4" and "5") and the development pattern 41 may change.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that when three rows of decorative patterns 41 consisting of highly decorative display modes come to a stop in unison, a single stopping sound is output (see Figure 257 (6)), but this is not limited to this.
When three rows of highly decorative decorative patterns 41 are aligned and stopped, a stop sound may be output three times. In this case, the three stop sounds may be output so that consecutive stop sounds overlap each other.

In addition, in this embodiment, the highly decorative pattern 41 in the first stage (see Figure 252 (1)), the highly decorative pattern 41 in the second stage (see Figure 309 (1)), and the highly decorative pattern 41 in the third stage (see Figure 366 (1)) have different display modes for the character portions, but the display modes for the letter (number) portions are the same, but are not limited to this.
The highly decorative pattern 41 in the first stage (see Figure 252 (1)), the highly decorative pattern 41 in the second stage (see Figure 309 (1)), and the highly decorative pattern 41 in the third stage (see Figure 366 (1)) may have the same display mode for the character portion, but may have different display modes for the letter (number) portion.
In addition, the highly decorative pattern 41 in the first stage (see Figure 252 (1)), the highly decorative pattern 41 in the second stage (see Figure 309 (1)), and the highly decorative pattern 41 in the third stage (see Figure 366 (1)) may differ in the display mode of the character portion and the display mode of the letter (number) portion.

Also, in this embodiment, the display size of the middle row decorative pattern 41 differs when the reach performance is not being executed (see Figure 259 (2), Figure 270 (9), etc.) from when the normal reach performance is being executed (see Figure 261 (18)). Here, the middle row decorative pattern 41 when the reach performance is not being executed and the middle row decorative pattern 41 when the normal reach performance is being executed are regarded as display modes that are the same decorative mode (both are specific display modes).
In addition, in this embodiment, the display size of the middle row decorative symbol 41 is made different before the start of the reach performance and during the execution of the normal reach performance, but this is not limited to this. The display size of the middle row decorative symbol 41 may be the same before the start of the reach performance and during the execution of the normal reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that a change effect (the effect shown in FIG. 305 (27)) is executed in which the display mode of the identification information (variable image 51, pending image 52) is changed to a specific mode (e.g., green). Here, the specific mode may be green or blue. In other words, the specific mode may be any display mode as long as it is different from the normal display mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the expectation level (ease of winning) of various effects has been described. Here, the expectation level of the effect may be the expectation level that suggests or notifies that an effect image will be displayed when the effect is being executed. The expectation level of the effect may also be the expectation level that suggests or notifies that a sound effect will be output when the effect is being executed. The expectation level of the effect may also be the expectation level that suggests or notifies that the effect body (effect lever 163, movable role object 115) will emit light or operate when the effect is being executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the following change performance of the change performance example 12 is described as the change performance example 13, but is not limited thereto. The following change performance of the change performance example 12 may be the change performance example 10 or the change performance example 11. In this case, the role performance, the third start operation, and the start time third effect image 525 performed in the change performance example 12 and the change performance example 10 or the change performance example 11 are each regarded as a continuous performance and as a pre-determination performance.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the following change performance of the change performance example 31 is described as the change performance example 32, but is not limited thereto. The following change performance of the change performance example 31 may be the change performance example 29 or the change performance example 30. In this case, the role performance, the seventh start operation, and the seventh effect image at the start 567 performed in the change performance example 31 and the change performance example 29 or the change performance example 30 are each regarded as a continuous performance and as a pre-determination performance.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the next change performance of the change performance example 50 is the change performance example 51, but this is not limited thereto. The next change performance of the change performance example 50 may be the change performance example 48 or the change performance example 49. In this case, the role performance, the eleventh start operation, and the eleventh effect image 581 at the start performed in the change performance example 50 and the change performance example 48 or the change performance example 49 are each regarded as a continuous performance and as a pre-determination performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the revival promotion performance is executed, a middle row of decorative patterns 41 with low decorativeness are displayed (see Figures 267 (15) and (16)), and then three rows of decorative patterns 41 with high decorativeness are displayed (see Figure 268 (18)), but this is not limited to this.
Even when the revival teasing performance is executed, the highly decorative three rows of decorative patterns 41 may be displayed without displaying the less decorative middle row decorative pattern 41. In this case, the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in a swinging motion to tease whether the doublet decorative pattern 41 will be displayed or not.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the revival promotion is not executed after the revival promotion is performed (if the revival promotion fails), the revival promotion image 520 is displayed in a manner in which the revival promotion failed (see FIG. 268 (17)), but this is not limited to this. Even if the revival promotion fails, the stage image 61 may be displayed again without displaying the revival promotion image 520 in a manner in which the revival promotion failed.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of the stage, after the revival stimulation performance is executed, the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 moves through the first movement path (see Figure 251-1 (1)), but is not limited to this.
For example, the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 (see Figure 323 (18)) after the revival stimulation performance is executed in the second stage may move through the fourth movement path (see Figure 251-1 (4)).
Also, for example, the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 (see Figure 381 (18)) after the revival stimulation performance is executed in the third stage may move through the sixth movement path (see Figure 251-1 (6)).

In addition, in this embodiment, in a variable presentation (such as variable presentation example 4) in which a normal reach presentation is executed and an SP reach presentation and an SPSP reach presentation are not executed, a lever operation presentation is not executed, but this is not limited to this.
In each of the variable performances in which the normal reach performance is executed and the SP reach performance and the SPSP reach performance are not executed, the lever operation performance may be executed. In this case, the execution timing of the lever operation performance may be after the start of the variable performance and before any of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 is temporarily stopped, or may be during the execution of the normal reach performance and before the middle row decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
In addition, in the lever operation performance in the variable performance in which the normal reach performance is executed and the SP reach performance and the SPSP reach performance are not executed, a common performance (common performance image, common sound, etc.) may be executed between the case where the performance lever 163 is operated and the case where it is not operated during the operation effective period. In addition, if a different performance (different performance image, different sound, etc.) is executed more easily between the case where the performance lever 163 is operated and the case where it is not operated during the operation effective period when any of the SP reach performance, the SPSP reach performance, and the big win is executed and a variable performance in which the lever operation performance is executed is executed than when the normal reach performance is executed and the SP reach performance and the SPSP reach performance are not executed and a variable performance in which the lever operation performance is executed is executed, a different performance (different performance image, different sound, etc.) may be executed between the case where the performance lever 163 is operated and the case where it is not operated during the operation effective period in the lever operation performance in which the normal reach performance is executed and the SP reach performance and the SPSP reach performance are not executed. In addition, the fact that a different presentation (different presentation image, different sound, etc.) is more likely to be executed between the case where the presentation lever 163 is operated and the case where it is not operated during the effective operation period when either the SP reach presentation, the SPSP reach presentation, or the jackpot is executed and a variable presentation in which a lever operation presentation is executed is executed than when a variable presentation in which a normal reach presentation is executed and neither the SP reach presentation nor the SPSP reach presentation is executed and a lever operation presentation is executed includes the fact that, in the lever operation presentation in the variable presentation in which the normal reach presentation is executed and the SP reach presentation and the SPSP reach presentation are not executed, a different presentation (different presentation image, different sound, etc.) is always executed between the case where the presentation lever 163 is operated and the case where it is not operated during the effective operation period (0%), and the fact that, in the lever operation presentation in the variable presentation in which either the SP reach presentation, the SPSP reach presentation, or the jackpot is executed, a different presentation (different presentation image, different sound, etc.) is always executed between the case where the presentation lever 163 is operated and the case where it is not operated during the effective operation period (100%).

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that various lever operation effects are executed.
Here, under a specific situation in the variation performance, instead of the lever operation performance, a button operation performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 161 may be executed. As an example, when neither the SP reach performance nor the SPSP reach performance is executed in the variation performance, instead of the lever operation performance, a button operation performance may be executed. Also, all of the lever operation performances in each of the variation performances described above may be button operation performances. When the button operation performance is executed, a button image that imitates the performance button 161 may be displayed instead of the lever operation image 502. Also, when the button operation performance is executed, a sound effect according to the button operation performance may be output. In this case, the various "lever sounds" described above may be read as various "button sounds".

In addition, in this embodiment, when the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" stops and a pseudo consecutive performance is executed, the temporary stopping action of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 is continued (see Figures 303 (14) and (15)).
Here, the temporary stop time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 when the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" stops (no stopping sound is output) may be longer than the temporary stop time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in a miss variable performance in which a reach performance is not executed (see Figure 253 (16)), or the temporary stop time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in a miss variable performance in which a normal reach performance is executed (see Figure 261 (20)).

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display on the image display unit 114 the determination information (random number value) determined by the special symbol determination unit 234 or the identification information (variable image 51, reserved image 52, etc.) corresponding to the determination information not yet performed. In addition, there is a first stop performance (for example, the performance shown in FIG. 253 (15)) that outputs a specific sound (stop sound) different from a predetermined sound (variable BGM) when a specific row of symbols (for example, the middle row decorative symbol 41) stops in a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode), and a second stop performance (for example, the performance shown in FIG. 278 (42)) that does not output a specific sound when a specific row of symbols stops in a specific display mode. In one variation performance, a change performance (performance shown in FIG. 275 (20)) that changes the display mode of the identification information to a specific mode (for example, red) may be more easily performed when a change performance (for example, change performance example 10) in which a second stop performance is performed is performed than when a change performance (for example, change performance example 1) in which a first stop performance is performed is performed.
In this case, in a variable presentation in which a change effect is executed, since it is difficult to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, the player can be more impressed with the execution of the change effect than with the fact that the patterns have stopped, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the fact that a change performance is more likely to be executed when a change performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed than when a change performance in which the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that a change performance will not be executed (0%) when a change performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed, and the fact that a change performance will be executed (100%) when a change performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed.
Furthermore, if a change performance is easier to execute when a change performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed than when a change performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed, the change performance may be executed when a change performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed, and the change performance may not be executed when a change performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second stage (e.g., the third stage (see Figure 274 (9))) of the step performance may be made easier to execute when a variable performance in which a second stop performance is executed (e.g., variable performance example 10) is performed than when a variable performance in which a first stop performance is executed (e.g., variable performance example 1).
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the second stage of the stage presentation is executed, since it is difficult to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, the player can be more impressed with the fact that the second stage of the stage presentation has been executed than with the fact that the patterns have stopped, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the second stage of the stage presentation may be any stage that can be executed after the first stage of the stage presentation.
In addition, the fact that the second stage of the stage performance is more likely to be executed when a variable performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed than when a variable performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed includes the fact that the second stage of the stage performance is never executed (0%) when a variable performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed, and the fact that the second stage of the stage performance is always executed (100%) when a variable performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed.
Furthermore, if the second stage of the staged performance is more likely to be executed when a variable performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed than when a variable performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed, the second stage of the staged performance may be executed when a variable performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed, or the second stage of the staged performance may not be executed when a variable performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it may be made easier to execute a change performance (see Figures 275 (24), 276 (25), and (26)) that changes the display position of the temporarily stopped pattern in the image display unit 114 when a change performance in which a second stop performance is executed (for example, change performance example 10) is executed than when a change performance in which a first stop performance is executed (for example, change performance example 1).
In this case, in a variable presentation in which a change effect is executed, since it is difficult to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, the player can be more impressed with the execution of the change effect than with the fact that the patterns have stopped, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the fact that a change performance is more likely to be executed when a change performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed than when a change performance in which the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that a change performance will not be executed (0%) when a change performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed, and the fact that a change performance will be executed (100%) when a change performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed.
Furthermore, if a change performance is easier to execute when a change performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed than when a change performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed, the change performance may be executed when a change performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed, and the change performance may not be executed when a change performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it may be made easier to execute a change performance (see Figures 276 (27) and (28)) that changes the characters of the stopped pattern in the reach performance when a change performance in which a second stop performance is executed (for example, change performance example 10) is executed than when a change performance in which a first stop performance is executed (for example, change performance example 4) is executed.
In this case, in a variable presentation in which a change effect is executed, since it is difficult to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, the player can be more impressed with the execution of the change effect than with the fact that the patterns have stopped, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the fact that a change performance is more likely to be executed when a change performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed than when a change performance in which the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that a change performance will not be executed (0%) when a change performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed, and the fact that a change performance will be executed (100%) when a change performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed.
Furthermore, if a change performance is easier to execute when a change performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed than when a change performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed, the change performance may be executed when a change performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed, and the change performance may not be executed when a change performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lever operation presentation includes a first operation presentation (the lever operation presentation shown in FIG. 252 (5)) in which the operation effective period is a first period (e.g., 3 seconds), and a second operation presentation (for example, the lever operation presentation shown in FIG. 277 (35)) in which the operation effective period is a second period (e.g., 5 seconds) different from the first period. The second operation presentation may be made easier to execute when a fluctuation presentation in which the second stop presentation is executed (for example, fluctuation presentation example 10) is performed than when a fluctuation presentation in which the first stop presentation is executed (for example, fluctuation presentation example 1).
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the second operation presentation is executed, since it is difficult to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, the player can be more impressed with the execution of the second operation presentation than with the fact that the patterns have stopped, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the fact that the second operation performance is more likely to be executed when a variable performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed than when a variable performance in which the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that the second operation performance is never executed (0%) when a variable performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed, and the fact that the second operation performance is always executed (100%) when a variable performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed.
Furthermore, if the second operation performance is easier to execute when a fluctuation performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed than when a fluctuation performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed, the second operation performance may be executed when a fluctuation performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed, or the second operation performance may not be executed when a fluctuation performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the action presentation (game presentation) that operates the presentation body (e.g., movable game piece 115) includes a first action presentation (the game presentation of "CH2" (see FIG. 246) shown in FIG. 259 (5)) and a second action presentation (the game presentation of "CH4" shown in FIG. 277 (33)) that has a higher expectation of a special game (jackpot game) being executed than the first action presentation. The second action presentation may be made easier to execute when a variable presentation in which the second stop presentation is executed (e.g., variable presentation example 10) is performed than when a variable presentation in which the first stop presentation is executed (e.g., variable presentation example 4) is performed.
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the second action presentation is executed, since it is difficult to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, the player can be more impressed by the execution of the second action presentation than by the fact that the patterns have stopped, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, the fact that the second action performance is more likely to be executed when a variable performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed than when a variable performance in which the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that the second action performance is never executed (0%) when a variable performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed, and the fact that the second action performance is always executed (100%) when a variable performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed.
Furthermore, if the second action performance is more easily executed when a variable performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed than when a variable performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed, the second action performance may be executed when a variable performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed, or the second action performance may not be executed when a variable performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the emphasis effects that emphasize the reach effect include a first emphasis effect (first reach line image 509, first reach notification image 510 (see FIG. 260 (14))) and a second emphasis effect (second reach line image 531, second reach notification image 532 (see FIG. 275 (19))) that has a higher expectation of a special game being executed than the first emphasis effect. The second emphasis effect may be made easier to execute when a variable effect in which the second stop effect is executed (for example, variable effect example 10) is executed than when a variable effect in which the first stop effect is executed (for example, variable effect example 4) is executed.
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the second emphasis presentation is executed, since it is difficult to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, the player can be more impressed by the execution of the second emphasis presentation than by the fact that the patterns have stopped, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, the fact that the second emphasis effect is more likely to be executed when a variable performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed than when a variable performance in which the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that the second emphasis effect is never executed (0%) when a variable performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed, and the fact that the second emphasis effect is always executed (100%) when a variable performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed.
Furthermore, if the second emphasis effect is more likely to be executed when a variable performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed than when a variable performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed, the second emphasis effect may be executed when a variable performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed, or the second emphasis effect may not be executed when a variable performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed.

In this embodiment, the action presentation in which the symbols in some of the stopped columns (e.g., the decorative symbols 41 in the left column) are made to move after the start of the reach presentation includes a first action presentation (see FIG. 260 (14)) and a second action presentation (see FIG. 275 (19)) in which the action mode of the symbols is different from that of the first action presentation. The second action presentation may be made easier to execute when a change presentation in which the second stop presentation is executed (e.g., change presentation example 10) is performed than when a change presentation in which the first stop presentation is executed (e.g., change presentation example 4) is performed.
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the second action presentation is executed, since it is difficult to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, the player can be more impressed by the execution of the second action presentation than by the fact that the patterns have stopped, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, the fact that the second action performance is more likely to be executed when a variable performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed than when a variable performance in which the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that the second action performance is never executed (0%) when a variable performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed, and the fact that the second action performance is always executed (100%) when a variable performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed.
Furthermore, if the second action performance is more easily executed when a variable performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed than when a variable performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed, the second action performance may be executed when a variable performance in which the first stop performance is executed is performed, or the second action performance may not be executed when a variable performance in which the second stop performance is executed is performed.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific performances (reach performances, pseudo consecutive performances, development performances, etc.) and prompting performances that prompt the execution of specific performances (reach prompting performances, reach prompting performances, development prompting performances, etc.).The specific performance may be made easier to execute when a variable performance (e.g., variable performance example 10) in which a second stop performance and a prompting performance are executed is performed than when a variable performance (e.g., variable performance example 4) in which a first stop performance and a prompting performance are executed is performed.
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the specific presentation is executed, since it is difficult to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, the player can be more impressed with the execution of the specific presentation than with the fact that the patterns have stopped, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, the fact that a specific effect is more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which the second stop effect is executed is performed than when a variable effect in which the first stop effect is executed includes the fact that a specific effect will not be executed (0%) when a variable effect in which the first stop effect is executed is performed, and the fact that a specific effect will be executed (100%) when a variable effect in which the second stop effect is executed is performed.
Furthermore, if a specific effect is more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which the second stop effect is executed is performed than when a variable effect in which the first stop effect is executed is performed, the specific effect may be executed when a variable effect in which the first stop effect is executed is performed, or the specific effect may not be executed when a variable effect in which the second stop effect is executed is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the SPSP reach presentation is not executed in the variable presentation in the special time-saving gaming state (specific time-saving gaming state), but this is not limited to this.
In the variable performance in the special time-saving game state (specific time-saving game state), the SPSP reach performance may be executed. For example, the lever operation performance in the variable performance example 64, the variable performance example 66, and the variable performance example 67 (see FIG. 434 (14), FIG. 438 (15), and FIG. 441 (1)) may be a lever operation performance (button operation performance) in the SPSP reach performance. That is, in the variable performance example 64, the variable performance example 66, and the variable performance example 67, the SPSP reach performance may be executed after the SP reach performance. Also, in the variable performance example 64, the variable performance example 66, and the variable performance example 67, the SPSP reach performance may be executed instead of the SP reach performance. That is, in the variable performance in the special time-saving game state (specific time-saving game state), the SPSP reach performance may be executed without executing the SP reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, when an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is executed in each stage (performance mode), the image displayed as the background on the image display unit 114 changes from a stage image 61 corresponding to each stage (performance mode) to a performance image corresponding to the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance.
Here, the SP reach performance and the SPSP reach performance are not performances that change the stage (performance mode), unlike the performance in which the stage change image 585 is displayed. Therefore, in one variable performance in which the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is executed, the stage (performance mode) before the start of the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance and the stage (performance mode) during the execution of the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance may be regarded as the same stage (performance mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, the stopping sounds of the performance symbols include the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing number in a variable performance in which a reach performance is not executed (see FIG. 253 (15) etc.), the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing number in a variable performance in which a normal reach is executed and an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is not executed (see FIG. 261 (19) etc.), the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing number in a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed (see FIG. 267 (13), FIG. 269 (6) etc.), the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing number in a variable performance in which an SPSP reach performance is executed (see FIG. 277 (36) etc.), the stopping sound of the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 (see FIG. 263 (14) etc.), the stopping sound of the development pattern 41 (see FIG. 276 (32) etc.), the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a double number (see FIG. 292 (50), FIG. 292 (53) etc.), etc.
Here, in each stage (each presentation mode), the output time (execution time of the stop sound) of the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing eye in a variable presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed, and the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing eye in a variable presentation in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed may be made longer than the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing eye in a variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed, and the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing eye in a variable presentation in which a normal reach is executed and an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is executed.
In addition, in each stage (each presentation mode), the output time (execution time of the stop sound) of the stopping sound of the pseudo-consecutive pattern 41 and the stopping sound of the development pattern 41 may be longer than the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing eye in a variable presentation where a reach presentation is not executed, the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing eye in a variable presentation where a normal reach is executed and an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is not executed, the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing eye in a variable presentation where an SP reach presentation is executed, and the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing eye in a variable presentation where an SPSP reach presentation is executed.
In addition, in each stage (each presentation mode), the output time (execution time of the stop sound) of the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a double number may be longer than the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing number in a variable presentation where a reach presentation is not executed, the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing number in a variable presentation where a normal reach is executed and an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is not executed, the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing number in a variable presentation where an SP reach presentation is executed, the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing number in a variable presentation where an SPSP reach presentation is executed, etc.
In addition, in each stage (each presentation mode), the output time (execution time of the stop sound) of the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with repeated numbers may be longer than the stopping sound of the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 or the stopping sound of the developing pattern 41.
In addition, in each stage (each presentation mode), the output time (execution time of the stop sound) of the stop sound of the pseudo consecutive pattern 41 or the stop sound of the development pattern 41 may be longer than the stop sound of the decorative pattern 41 of the repeated numbers.

In addition, in each stage (each presentation mode), in a variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed, the time from when the stopping sound of the deviating decorative pattern 41 is output (from when the output of the stopping sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the variable presentation ends) may be longer than the time from when the stopping sound of the deviating decorative pattern 41 is output (from when the output of the stopping sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the variable presentation ends) in a variable presentation in which a normal reach is executed and an SP reach presentation or SPSP reach presentation is not executed.
In addition, in each stage (each presentation mode), the time from when the stop sound of the deviating decorative pattern 41 is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed, or the time from when the stop sound of the deviating decorative pattern 41 is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a variable presentation in which a normal reach is executed and an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is executed, may be longer than the time from when the stop sound of the deviating decorative pattern 41 is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a variable presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed, or the time from when the stop sound of the deviating decorative pattern 41 is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a variable presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed.
In addition, in each stage (each presentation mode), the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a miss is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a jackpot fluctuation presentation may be longer than the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a miss is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a fluctuation presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed, or the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a miss is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a fluctuation presentation in which a normal reach is executed and an SP reach presentation or SPSP reach presentation is not executed.
In addition, in each stage (each presentation mode), the time from when the stopping sound of the deviating decorative pattern 41 is output (from when the output of the stopping sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (when the fluctuation presentation ends) in a variable presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed may be longer than the time from when the stopping sound of the deviating decorative pattern 41 is output (from when the output of the stopping sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (when the fluctuation presentation ends) in a variable presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed.
In addition, in each stage (each presentation mode), the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with a miss is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a jackpot fluctuation presentation may be longer than the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with a miss is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a fluctuation presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed, or the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with a miss is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a fluctuation presentation in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed.
Furthermore, in each stage (each presentation mode), the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 for a miss is output (after the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a fluctuation presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed may be longer than the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 for a miss is output (after the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a fluctuation presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed, or the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 for a miss is output (after the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a fluctuation presentation in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the SPSP reach effect is executed in the variable effect in which the development pattern 41 is displayed, but this is not limited to this.
In the variable performance, the SPSP reach performance may be executed without displaying the development pattern 41.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the variation performance based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 being "2" or more, in which a reach performance is not executed, includes a variation performance in which a start sound is not output (see Figure 257 (2), Figure 431 (2), etc.), and a variation performance in which a start sound is output (see Figure 285 (2), Figure 436 (2), etc.).
Here, in each stage (each presentation mode), when a miss-changing performance in which a reach performance is not executed based on the reserved number being "2" or more is executed, it may be easier to win in the next changing performance when a changing performance in which a start sound is output is executed than when a changing performance in which a start sound is not output is executed. Also, in each stage (each presentation mode), when a miss-changing performance in which a reach performance is not executed based on the reserved number being "2" or more is executed, it may be easier to execute an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance in the next changing performance when a changing performance in which a start sound is output is executed than when a changing performance in which a start sound is not output is executed. In other words, in each stage (each presentation mode), when a miss-changing performance in which a reach performance is not executed based on the reserved number being "2" or more is executed, it may be harder to execute the sound effect (stop sound) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode in the next changing performance when a changing performance in which a start sound is output is executed than when a changing performance in which a start sound is not output is executed.

In addition, in each stage (each performance mode), when a miss-type variation performance in which a reach performance is not executed based on the reserved number being "2" or more is executed, it is easier to win a jackpot in the next variation performance when a variation performance in which a start sound is output is executed than when a variation performance in which a start sound is not output is executed, including the fact that a jackpot is not necessarily won (0%) in the variation performance next to a variation performance in which a start sound is not output. Also, in each stage (each performance mode), when a miss-type variation performance in which a reach performance is not executed based on the reserved number being "2" or more is executed, if a jackpot is easier to win in the next variation performance when a variation performance in which a start sound is output is executed than when a variation performance in which a start sound is not output is executed, it may be possible to win a jackpot in the variation performance next to a variation performance in which a start sound is not output, or it may be possible not to win a jackpot in the variation performance next to a variation performance in which a start sound is output.
In addition, in each stage (each presentation mode), when a miss variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed based on the reserved number being "2" or more, it is easier for an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation to be executed in the next variable presentation when a variable presentation in which a start sound is output is executed than when a variable presentation in which a start sound is not output (it is harder to output a sound effect (stop sound) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode). This includes the fact that an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is not always executed (0%) in the variable presentation next to a variable presentation in which a start sound is not output (the sound effect (stop sound) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is always output (100%)) and that an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is always executed (100%) in the variable presentation next to a variable presentation in which a start sound is output (the sound effect (stop sound) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is always not output (0%)). In addition, in each stage (each presentation mode), when a miss variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed based on the reserved number being "2" or more, if it is made so that an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is more likely to be executed in the next variable presentation when a variable presentation in which a start sound is output is executed than when a variable presentation in which a start sound is not output is executed (the output of a sound effect (stop sound) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is less likely to be executed), it is possible that an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is executed in the next variable presentation after a variable presentation in which a start sound is not output (the output of a sound effect (stop sound) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is not executed), or it is possible that an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is not executed in the next variable presentation after a variable presentation in which a start sound is output (the output of a sound effect (stop sound) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is executed).

Also, in this embodiment, it has been described that the displayed effect image changes depending on the stage of the step performance. Here, the effect image displayed depending on the step performance may be an effect image made of a specific color. As an example, a blue effect image may be displayed when the first stage of step performance is being performed, a green effect image may be displayed when the second stage of step performance is being performed, and a red effect image may be displayed when the third stage of step performance is being performed. In other words, the color of the displayed effect image may change as the stage of the step performance progresses.

In addition, in this embodiment, a change performance (shown in FIG. 275 (20)) in which the display mode of the identification information is changed to a specific mode (e.g., red) is more likely to be executed when a change performance in which the second stop performance is executed (e.g., change performance example 10) is executed than when a change performance in which the first stop performance is executed (e.g., change performance example 1). And, although it has been explained that the identification information includes the change image 51 and the reserved image 52, it is not limited to this.
For example, the step performance is a performance that suggests or notifies the expectation level according to the stage being executed. Therefore, the performance image displayed according to the step performance is regarded as identification information corresponding to the determination information (random number value) determined by the special symbol determination unit 234. Also, the performance that changes from the performance image corresponding to the step performance of the first or second stage to the performance image corresponding to the step performance of the third stage is regarded as a change performance that changes the display mode of the identification information to a specific mode.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the claims, not the above description, and is intended to include the meaning equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.
Moreover, various configurations in the above-described embodiments may be combined.

[Technical Features of the Invention]
◆ The first configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) includes a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means (e.g., a performance control unit 300) for controlling the performance, the main control means is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and is capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination, the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance in which a plurality of rows of symbols (e.g., three rows of decorative symbols 41) are changed and then stopped in a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, a predetermined sound (e.g., a variable background music) is output in the variable performance, the symbols of some rows of the symbols of the plurality of rows are stopped, and a reach performance in which the symbols of the remaining rows continue to change is executed, and a specific variable performance (e.g., a miss variable performance) is executed to indicate that the special game is not executed and to display the symbols of the plurality of rows after the reach performance is started. the reach presentation includes a first reach presentation (e.g., a normal reach presentation) and a second reach presentation (e.g., an SP reach presentation) in which the expectation of the special game being executed is higher than that of the first reach presentation, the specific variation presentation includes a first specific variation presentation in which the first reach presentation is executed but the second reach presentation is not executed, and a second specific variation presentation in which the second reach presentation is executed, in the first specific variation presentation, when a pattern in a specific row (e.g., a middle row decorative pattern 41) stops in a specific display mode (e.g., a highly decorative display mode shown in FIG. 265 (27)), a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) different from the predetermined sound can be output, and in the second specific variation presentation, when a pattern in the specific row (e.g., a middle row decorative pattern 41) stops in the specific display mode (e.g., a highly decorative display mode shown in FIG. 278 (42)), it is possible not to output the specific sound (stop sound).

◆A second configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) includes a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means (e.g., a performance control unit 300) for controlling the performance, and the main control means is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and is capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped in a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, and is capable of executing a reach performance in which the patterns of some rows of the patterns of the plurality of rows are stopped and the patterns of the remaining rows continue to change, and is capable of outputting a predetermined sound (e.g., a variable background music) in the variable performance, and is capable of outputting a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) different from the predetermined sound when the patterns stop, and the specific sound includes a specific row of patterns (e.g., a middle row decorative pattern There is a first specific sound that can be output when a specific symbol (for example, a highly decorative display mode) stops in a specific display mode, and a second specific sound (for example, a pseudo-continuous stop sound) that can be output when a special symbol (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol 41) stops, and a specific variable performance (for example, a miss variable performance) that displays the multiple rows of symbols can be executed in addition to indicating that the special game is not being performed, and in one of the specific variable performances, when the reach performance is not performed (for example, when the reach performance is not performed in the variable performance shown in Figures 252 to 254), it is more likely that the output of the first specific sound (for example, a stop sound) will be executed when the specific row of symbols (for example, a middle row decorative symbol 41) stops in the specific display mode (for example, a highly decorative display mode shown in Figure 253 (15)) when the special symbol stops (for example, when the pseudo-continuous symbol 41 stops in the variable performance shown in Figures 279 to 284).

◆A third configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling the presentation, the main control means being capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and being capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation in which multiple rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped in a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, and being capable of outputting a predetermined sound (e.g., a variable background music) in the variable presentation, and when the patterns stop, A specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) different from the predetermined sound can be output, and the specific sound includes a first specific sound (e.g., the stop sound of the left row decorative pattern 41) that can be output when the first row of patterns stops, and a second specific sound (e.g., the stop sound of the middle row decorative pattern 41) that can be output when the second row of patterns stops, and in one of the variable performances, the first specific sound (e.g., the first stop sound shown in FIG. 264 (19)) and the second specific sound (e.g., the third stop sound shown in FIG. 267 (13)) are different, or the number of types of the first specific sound (e.g., the number of types of the left and right row stop sounds shown in FIG. 453) and the number of types of the second specific sound (e.g., the number of types of the middle row stop sounds shown in FIG. 453) are different.

◆A fourth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) includes a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling presentation, the main control means being capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on the judgment information acquired by the establishment of a start condition, being capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the judgment of the judgment information, and being capable of storing a predetermined number of pieces of judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as reserved memory, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped in the display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in association with the variable display, being capable of outputting a predetermined sound (e.g., a variable background music) in the variable presentation, being capable of outputting a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) different from the predetermined sound when the patterns stop, being capable of stopping the patterns of some rows of the patterns of the plurality of rows and changing the patterns of the remaining rows. It is possible to execute a reach effect that continues the above, and the reach effect includes a first reach effect (e.g., a normal reach effect) and a second reach effect (e.g., an SP reach effect) that has a higher expectation of the special game being executed than the first reach effect. It is possible to execute a specific variable effect (e.g., a miss variable effect) that indicates that the special game will not be executed and that displays the multiple rows of patterns more. In one of the specific variable effects, when the reach effect is not executed (e.g., when the reach effect is not executed in the variable effects shown in Figures 252 to 254), it is more likely that the specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) will be output when the specific row of patterns (e.g., the middle row decorative pattern 41) stops in a specific display mode (e.g., the highly decorative display mode shown in Figure 253 (15)) than when the second reach effect is executed (e.g., when the SP reach effect is executed in the variable effects shown in Figures 279 to 284).

◆ A fifth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling the presentation, the main control means being capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and being capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped in a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, the presentation mode for executing the variable presentation being capable of being executed by a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode, a predetermined sound (e.g., a variable background music) being output in the variable presentation, and a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) different from the predetermined sound being output when the patterns stop. In the variable performance of the first performance mode (for example, the variable performance shown in Figs. 273 to 278), the specific sound (for example, the first stop sound) output when the first row of symbols (for example, the left row decorative symbol 41) stops can be made common to the specific sound (for example, the first stop sound) output when the second row of symbols (for example, the right row decorative symbol 41) stops, and can be made different from the specific sound (for example, the sixth stop sound) output when the third row of symbols (for example, the middle row decorative symbol 41) stops. In the variable performance of the first performance mode (for example, the variable performance shown in Figs. 273 to 278) and the variable performance of the second performance mode (for example, the variable performance shown in Figs. 329 to 334), the specific sound (for example, the sixth stop sound) output when the third row of symbols stops can be made common.

◆A sixth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling presentation, and the main control means is capable of controlling a first mode (e.g., a normal game state) and a second mode (e.g., a special time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first mode, is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on first judgment information obtained by the establishment of a first start condition or second judgment information obtained by the establishment of a second start condition, is capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the judgment of the first judgment information or the result of the judgment of the second judgment information, and is capable of controlling the first judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed to ... presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300). The display control means is capable of executing a variable effect in which a plurality of rows of symbols (e.g., three rows of decorative symbols 41) are changed and then stopped in the display means (e.g., the image display unit 114) in association with the variable display, and is capable of executing a reach effect in which the symbols in some rows of the plurality of rows are stopped and the symbols in the remaining rows continue to change, and is capable of executing a specific variable effect (e.g., a miss variable effect) in which the special game is not executed and the reach effect is not executed as a result of the judgment, and is capable of executing a specific row of symbols (e.g., the middle row decorative symbol 41, etc.) after the start of the variable effect. and a second display (for example, a display in a fifth visual mode) in which the symbols in the specific row are more easily visible than the first display after the first display. A stop display mode that is a process from the second display to the stop of each of the symbols in the multiple rows can be displayed. The stop display mode includes a first stop display mode (for example, a mode in which three rows of decorative symbols 41 stop in sequence) and a second stop display mode (for example, a mode in which three rows of decorative symbols 41 stop all at once) that is different from the first stop display mode. In one of the specific variable performances in the first mode, the specific display based on the number of the first reserved memories being a first specific number (for example, "4") is displayed. A display in the first stop display mode is more likely to be executed when the specific change performance (the change performance shown in Figures 252 to 254) is executed based on the number of the first reserved memories being a second specific number (e.g., "1") less than the first specific number, than when a change performance is executed, and in one of the specific change performances in the second mode, a display in the second stop display mode is more likely to be executed when the specific change performance (the change performance shown in Figure 431) is executed based on the number of the second reserved memories being the first specific number (e.g., "4") than when a change performance is executed based on the number of the second reserved memories being the second specific number (e.g., "1").

◆The seventh configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling the presentation, and the main control means is controllable between a first mode (e.g., a normal game state) and a second mode (e.g., a special time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first mode, and is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on first judgment information obtained by the establishment of a first start condition or second judgment information obtained by the establishment of a second start condition, and as a result of the judgment of the first judgment information, a variable display can be executed based on the result of the judgment of the first judgment information or the result of the judgment of the second judgment information, a predetermined number of the first judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed can be stored as a first reserved memory, and a predetermined number of the second judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed can be stored as a second reserved memory, and the performance control means can execute a variable performance in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped in a display means (e.g., the image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, and a reach performance in which the patterns of some rows of the patterns of the plurality of rows are stopped and the variation of the patterns of the remaining rows is continued. a specific variable performance in which the special game is not executed and the reach performance is not executed as a result of the determination (for example, a miss variable performance in which the reach performance is not executed); a first display in which the patterns in the specific column are difficult to see after the start of the variable performance (for example, a display in a fourth viewing mode) and a second display in which the patterns in the specific column are easier to see than the first display (for example, a display in a fifth viewing mode) can be executed after the first display; and the specific variable performance is executed based on the number of the first reserved memories being a specific number (for example, "1") in the first mode. (For example, when a miss variation effect in which a reach effect is not executed) is performed, the average time from when the pattern in the specific row (for example, the middle row decorative pattern 41) becomes the second display until it stops is a first time (for example, time T5 + time T6 + time T7 shown in FIG. 445), and when the specific variation effect is performed based on the number of second pending memories being the specific number in the second mode, the average time from when the pattern in the specific row becomes the second display until it stops is a second time (for example, time T25 + time T26 shown in FIG. 445) that is shorter than the first time.

◆The eighth configuration that achieves the above objective is realized as an gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) is equipped with a main control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and the main control means can determine whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a start condition, and can execute a variable display based on the result of the determination, and the presentation control means can execute a variable presentation in which multiple rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped on the display means (e.g., image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, and can output a predetermined sound (e.g., variable background music) in the variable presentation, and can output a specific sound (e.g., a start sound) different from the predetermined sound when the variable presentation starts, and the special game is more likely to be executed when the variable presentation in which the specific sound is output (e.g., the variable presentation shown in Figures 286 to 293) is executed than when the variable presentation in which the specific sound is not output (e.g., the variable presentation shown in Figures 252 to 254) is executed.

◆A ninth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling the presentation, the main control means being capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and being capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped on a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, being capable of executing a vibration presentation suggesting the expectation that the special game will be executed in one or more of the variable presentations by vibrating an operating means that can be operated by a player, being capable of executing an operation presentation suggesting the operation of the operating means, being capable of executing a specific presentation in the variable presentation, and The special game is more likely to be executed when the operation performance is not performed before the start of the specific performance and the operation performance is performed after the start of the specific performance (for example, the change performance shown in Figures 273 to 278, 450) is executed than when the operation performance is performed before the start of the play and the operation performance is not performed after the start of the specific performance (for example, the change performance shown in Figures 252 to 254). The special game is more likely to be executed when the operation performance is not performed before the start of the specific performance and the vibration performance is performed (for example, the change performance shown in Figures 286 to 293, 452) is executed than when the operation performance is not performed after the start of the specific performance and the vibration performance is performed (for example, the change performance shown in Figures 273 to 278, 450).

◆The tenth configuration that achieves the above objective is realized as an gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling presentation, and an operation means operable by a player and movable between a first position which is a reference position and a second position, the main control means being capable of determining whether or not a special game is to be played based on the establishment of a starting condition, and being capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped on a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, and being capable of executing a vibration presentation in which the operation means is vibrated when the operation means is moved from the first position (e.g., a non-operation position shown in FIG. 244) to the second position (e.g., a reception position shown in FIG. 244), and an operation display (e.g., a lever operation image 277(35)) and a second operation display (e.g., the display of the lever operation image 502 shown in FIG. 291(44)) that suggests the operation of the operation means by a display mode different from the first operation display can be executed, and the expectation of the special game being executed is higher when the second operation display is executed than when the first operation display is executed, and the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration effect when a predetermined condition is met (when the vibration effect shown in FIG. 291(45) is executed) (e.g., T61 shown in FIG. 447) can be made different from the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration effect when the predetermined condition is not met (when the vibration effect shown in FIG. 291(45) is not executed and the variable effect shown in FIG. 294(3) is executed).

◆An eleventh configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling the presentation, the main control means being capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and being capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped on a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, and being capable of executing a specific presentation (e.g., a temporary stop of the decorative patterns 41) in the variable presentation, and being capable of executing an operation presentation that suggests an operation of an operation means that can be operated by a player, the operation presentation including a first operation that can be executed before the start of the specific presentation. There is a first operation presentation and a second operation presentation that can be executed after the start of the specific presentation, and in the variable presentation in which the first operation presentation is executed, it is possible to make the type of sound output different when the operation means is operated during the operation effective period in which the operation of the operation means is effective in the first operation presentation (for example, as shown in FIG. 274 (12)) and when it is not operated (for example, as shown in FIG. 426 (2)). In the variable presentation in which the special game is executed as a result of the determination and the second operation presentation is executed, it is possible to make the type of sound output common when the operation means is operated during the operation effective period in the second operation presentation (for example, as shown in FIG. 291 (45)) and when it is not operated (for example, as shown in FIG. 426 (8)).

◆A twelfth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling the presentation, the main control means is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and is capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped in a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, and a specific presentation is executed in the variable presentation, and a presentation mode in which the variable presentation is executed is a first presentation mode. It can be executed by a presentation mode and a second presentation mode, and the variable presentation includes a first variable presentation in which the path of the change of the pattern of a specific row (e.g., middle row decorative pattern 41) in the first presentation mode is a first path (e.g., the first variable path shown in FIG. 251-1(1)), and a second variable presentation in which the path of the change of the pattern of the specific row is a second path different from the first path (e.g., the fourth variable path shown in FIG. 251-1(4)). In both the first variable presentation and the second variable presentation, a common presentation (e.g., output of a first reach sound) that is common when the specific presentation (e.g., reach presentation) is executed can be executed.

◆A thirteenth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling the presentation, the main control means being capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and being capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped in a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, a predetermined sound (e.g., a variable background music) is output in the variable presentation, and when the patterns stop, a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) different from the predetermined sound is output, and when the patterns stop, a specific presentation (e.g., a display of an effect image) is output. ) can be executed, and the execution mode for executing the variable performance can be executed by a first execution mode and a second execution mode, and the variable performance includes a first variable performance in which the path of the change of the pattern of the specific row (for example, the first variable path shown in FIG. 251-1 (1)) in the first execution mode is a first variable performance, and a second variable performance in which the path of the change of the pattern of the specific row is a second path different from the first path (for example, the sixth variable path shown in FIG. 251-1 (6)) in the second execution mode, and it is possible to make the specific sound output or the specific performance executed when the pattern stops in the first variable performance common to the specific sound output or the specific performance executed when the pattern stops in the second variable performance (for example, the first stop sound is output in both).

◆A fourteenth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) is equipped with a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling the presentation, the main control means is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and is capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped in a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, and is capable of outputting a predetermined sound (e.g., a variable background music) in the variable presentation, and is capable of outputting a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) different from the predetermined sound when the patterns stop, and is capable of outputting a specific presentation (e.g., display of an effect image) when the patterns stop. The variable performance can be performed in a first performance mode and a second performance mode, and the variable performance includes a first variable performance in which the path of the change of the pattern in the specific row (e.g., the middle row decorative pattern 41) in the first performance mode is a first path (e.g., the first variable path shown in FIG. 251-1 (1)), and a second variable performance in which the path of the change of the pattern in the specific row is a second path (e.g., the fourth variable path shown in FIG. 251-1 (4)) different from the first path, and it is possible to make the specific sound (e.g., the first stop sound) output or the specific performance executed when the pattern stops in the first variable performance different from the specific sound (e.g., the 15th stop sound) output or the specific performance executed when the pattern stops in the second variable performance.

◆A fifteenth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling the presentation, the main control means being capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and being capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped in a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, and being capable of outputting a predetermined sound (e.g., a variable background music) in the variable presentation, and being capable of outputting a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) different from the predetermined sound when the patterns stop, and being capable of outputting a specific presentation (e.g., For example, display of an effect image) can be executed, and the execution mode for executing the variable performance can be executed by a first performance mode and a second performance mode, and the variable performance includes a first variable performance in which the pattern can be displayed in a first display mode (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 252 (1)) in the first performance mode, and a second variable performance in which the pattern can be displayed in a second display mode (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 366 (1)) different from the first display mode in the second performance mode, and it is possible for the specific sound output or the specific performance executed when the pattern stops in the first variable performance to be the same as the specific sound output or the specific performance executed when the pattern stops in the second variable performance (for example, both output a first stop sound).

◆A sixteenth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling the presentation, the main control means being capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and being capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped in a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, and being capable of outputting a predetermined sound (e.g., a variable background music) in the variable presentation, and being capable of outputting a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) different from the predetermined sound when the patterns stop, and being capable of outputting a specific presentation (e.g., , display of an effect image), and the presentation mode for executing the variable presentation can be executed by a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode, and the variable presentation includes a first variable presentation in which the pattern can be displayed in a first display mode (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 252 (1)) in the first presentation mode, and a second variable presentation in which the pattern can be displayed in a second display mode (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 309 (1)) different from the first display mode, and it is possible to make the specific sound (for example, the first stop sound) output or the specific presentation executed when the pattern stops in the first variable presentation different from the specific sound (for example, the 15th stop sound) output or the specific presentation executed when the pattern stops in the second variable presentation.

◆ The seventeenth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) includes a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling presentation, the main control means being controllable between a first mode (e.g., a normal game state) and a second mode (e.g., a special time-saving game state) different from the first mode, being capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and being capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of rows of symbols (e.g., three rows of decorative symbols 41) are changed and then stopped in a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, and being capable of executing a reach presentation in which some of the symbols in the plurality of rows are stopped and the variation of the symbols in the remaining rows is continued, and the reach presentation is capable of executing a reach presentation in which a plurality of rows of symbols are changed and then stopped in a remaining row. In the variable performance, a specific performance (e.g., SP reach performance) can be executed, and a first display (e.g., a display in the fourth viewing mode) in which the pattern of the specific row (e.g., middle row decorative pattern 41) is difficult to see after the variable performance starts, a second display (e.g., a display in the fifth viewing mode) in which the pattern of the specific row is easier to see than the first display after the first display, and a third display (e.g., a display in the first viewing mode) in which the pattern of the specific row stops after the second display can be executed, and in one of the variable performances, the second display (e.g., the display shown in FIG. 275 (21)) of the pattern of the specific row (e.g., middle row decorative pattern 41) before the start of the specific performance (e.g., SP reach performance) is more likely to be executed when the specific performance is executed in the second mode than when the specific performance is executed in the first mode.

◆An 18th configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling presentation, the main control means being capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and being capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped in a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, and a presentation mode for executing the variable presentation can be set, and a first display (e.g., a display in a viewing mode as shown in FIG. 250-1(4)) in which the patterns in a specific row are difficult to see after the start of the variable presentation, and a first display in which the patterns in the specific row are difficult to see after the first display, and a second display in which the patterns in the specific row are difficult to see after the first display, can be set. It is possible to execute a second display (for example, a display in the viewing mode shown in FIG. 250-1(5)) that is easier to see than the first display, and a third display (for example, a display in the viewing mode shown in FIG. 250-1(1)) in which the symbols in the specific row stop after the second display. In a specific presentation mode, it is possible to make the movement mode when the symbols in the first row (for example, the left row decorative symbol 41) are in the second display different from the movement mode when the symbols in the second row (for example, the middle row decorative symbol 41) are in the second display. In the specific presentation mode, the movement mode when the symbols in the second row are in the second display includes a first movement mode (for example, the movement mode shown in FIG. 251-1(7)) and a second movement mode that is different from the first movement mode (for example, the movement mode shown in FIG. 251-1(2)).

◆A 19th configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling the presentation, and the main control means is capable of controlling a first mode (e.g., a normal game state) and a second mode (e.g., a special time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first mode, is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on first judgment information obtained by the establishment of a first start condition or second judgment information obtained by the establishment of a second start condition, is capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the judgment of the first judgment information or the result of the judgment of the second judgment information, is capable of storing a predetermined number of the first judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a first reserved memory, and The second judgment information in which the judgment has not been executed can be stored as a second reserved memory for a predetermined number of times, and the performance control means can execute a variable performance in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped in a display means (e.g., image display unit 114) in association with the variable display, and can execute a reach performance in which the patterns of some of the plurality of rows of patterns are stopped and the patterns of the remaining rows are allowed to continue to change, and a first display in which the patterns of a specific row are difficult to see after the start of the variable performance (e.g., a display in a viewing mode shown in FIG. 250-1(4)), a second display in which the patterns of the specific row are easier to see than the first display after the first display (e.g., a display in a viewing mode shown in FIG. 250-1(6)), and a display in which the patterns of the specific row are stopped after the second display. and a third display (for example, a display in a visual mode as shown in FIG. 250-1(1)) in which the special game is not executed as a result of the determination, and the variable presentation in which the special game is not executed includes a first variable presentation in which the reach presentation is executed and a second variable presentation in which the reach presentation is not executed, and in one of the second variable presentations in the first mode (a miss variable presentation in which the reach presentation is not executed), the display time of the second display of the specific row of symbols (for example, a second display based on a first specific number) is longer in a case in which the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of the first reserved memories being a second specific number (for example, "4") that is greater than the first specific number than in a case in which the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of the first reserved memories being a first specific number (for example, "1"). In the two-variable performance, time T5 + time T6 + time T7 shown in FIG. 445, and time T15 + time T16 + time T17 in the second variable performance based on the second specific number, tend to be shorter, and in one of the second variable performances (miss variable performance in which a reach performance is not executed), the display time of the second display of the specific row of symbols (time T35 + time T36 shown in FIG. 445 in the second variable performance based on the second specific number in the second mode) tends to be shorter when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of the second reserved memories being the second specific number (e.g., "4") in the second mode than when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of the first reserved memories being the second specific number (e.g., "4") in the first mode.

◆The twentieth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling presentation, the main control means being capable of controlling a first mode (e.g., a normal game state) and a second mode (e.g., a special time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first mode, being capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on judgment information acquired by the establishment of a starting condition, being capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the judgment of the judgment information, being capable of storing a predetermined number of pieces of judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as reserved memory, the presentation control means being capable of displaying identification information (e.g., a reserved image 52) corresponding to the judgment information for which the judgment has been executed or the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed on a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114), being capable of executing a change presentation for changing the display mode of the identification information to a specific mode (e.g., green), and A change performance can be executed in which multiple rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped in accordance with the change display, a predetermined sound (e.g., change BGM) can be output in the change performance, and a stop performance can be executed in which a specific row of patterns (e.g., middle row decorative pattern 41) is stopped in a specific display mode (e.g., a highly decorative display mode) in the first mode. The stop performance includes a first stop performance (e.g., the performance shown in FIG. 253 (15)) that outputs a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) different from the predetermined sound when the specific row of patterns stops in the specific display mode, and a second stop performance (e.g., the performance shown in FIG. 303 (14)) that does not output the specific sound when the specific row of patterns stops in the specific display mode, and in one of the change performances, the change performance (the performance shown in FIG. 305 (27)) is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed.

◆ The twenty-first configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) is equipped with a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling the presentation, the main control means being capable of controlling a first mode (e.g., a normal game state) and a second mode (e.g., a special time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first mode, being capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and being capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped in a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, and being capable of executing a stage presentation (e.g., a step presentation) capable of developing the presentation in stages, the stage presentation being capable of executing a first stage and a second stage which can be executed after the first stage. (e.g., the third stage), a predetermined sound (e.g., variable background music) can be output in the variable performance, and a stop performance can be executed in which a specific row of symbols (e.g., middle row decorative symbol 41) is stopped in a specific display mode (e.g., a highly decorative display mode) in the first mode. The stop performance includes a first stop performance (e.g., the performance shown in FIG. 261 (19)) that outputs a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) different from the predetermined sound when the specific row of symbols is stopped in the specific display mode, and a second stop performance (e.g., the performance shown in FIG. 303 (14)) that does not output the specific sound when the specific row of symbols is stopped in the specific display mode. In one of the variable performances, the second stage of the stage performance (e.g., the third stage shown in FIG. 304 (21)) is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed.

◆ The 22nd configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) is equipped with a main control means (e.g., game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) for controlling the presentation, and the main control means is capable of controlling a first mode (e.g., normal game state) and a second mode (e.g., special time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first mode, and is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and is capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed in accordance with the variable display, and then the patterns are temporarily stopped and then fixedly stopped, and a change presentation (e.g., FIG. 305 (31)) for changing the display position of the temporarily stopped patterns in the display means is executed. , (32), and (33) in FIG. 306), a predetermined sound (e.g., variable background music) can be output in the variable performance, and a stop performance can be executed in the first mode in which a specific row of symbols (e.g., middle row decorative symbol 41) is stopped in a specific display mode (e.g., a highly decorative display mode). The stop performance includes a first stop performance (e.g., the performance shown in FIG. 253 (15)) that outputs a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) different from the predetermined sound when the specific row of symbols is stopped in the specific display mode, and a second stop performance (e.g., the performance shown in FIG. 303 (14)) that does not output the specific sound when the specific row of symbols is stopped in the specific display mode, and in one of the variable performances, the variable performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed.

◆A twenty-third configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling presentation, the main control means being capable of controlling a first mode (e.g., a normal game state) and a second mode (e.g., a special time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first mode, being capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and being capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped in a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in response to the variable display, and being capable of executing a reach presentation in which the patterns of some of the patterns of the plurality of rows are stopped and the variation of the patterns of the remaining rows is continued, and in the reach presentation, a reach display is displayed before the reach display is displayed. It is possible to execute a change effect (the effect shown in Fig. 306 (34) and (35)) that changes the character or decorative aspect of the pattern, it is possible to output a predetermined sound (e.g., a changing BGM) in the change effect, it is possible to execute a stop effect in which a specific row of patterns (e.g., a middle row decorative pattern 41) is stopped in a specific display aspect (e.g., a highly decorative display aspect) in the first mode, and the stop effect includes a first stop effect (e.g., the effect shown in Fig. 261 (19)) that outputs a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) different from the predetermined sound when the specific row of patterns is stopped in the specific display aspect, and a second stop effect (e.g., the effect shown in Fig. 303 (14)) that does not output the specific sound when the specific row of patterns is stopped in the specific display aspect, and in one of the change effects, the change effect is more likely to be executed when the second stop effect is executed than when the first stop effect is executed.

◆The 24th configuration that achieves the above objective is realized as an gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling presentations, the main control means being capable of controlling a first mode (e.g., a normal gaming state) and a second mode (e.g., a special time-saving gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first mode, being capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and being capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped in a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, and being capable of executing an operation presentation suggesting an operation of an operation means operable by a player, the operation presentation being a first operation presentation (e.g., a first operation presentation in which an operation effective period during which the operation of the operation means is effective is a first period) ...). In the first mode, a predetermined sound (e.g., variable background music) can be output in the variable performance, and a stop performance can be executed in which a specific row of symbols (e.g., middle row decorative symbol 41) is stopped in a specific display mode (e.g., a highly decorative display mode) in the first mode. The stop performance includes a first stop performance (e.g., the performance shown in FIG. 253 (15)) that outputs a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) different from the predetermined sound when the specific row of symbols is stopped in the specific display mode, and a second stop performance (e.g., the performance shown in FIG. 303 (14)) that does not output the specific sound when the specific row of symbols is stopped in the specific display mode. In one of the variable performances, the second operation performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed.

◆The 25th configuration that achieves the above objective is realized as an gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) includes a main control means (e.g., game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) for controlling presentations, and a presentation body capable of executing presentations. The main control means is capable of controlling a first mode (e.g., normal gaming state) and a second mode (e.g., special time-saving gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first mode. The main control means is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and is capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination. The presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped in a display means (e.g., image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, and is capable of executing an action presentation (e.g., a device presentation) for operating the presentation body. The action presentation includes a first action presentation (e.g., a device presentation shown in FIG. 259 (5)) and the There is a second action presentation (for example, the role presentation shown in FIG. 306 (40)) that has a higher expectation of the special game being executed than the first action presentation, and a predetermined sound (for example, variable BGM) can be output in the variable presentation, and a stop presentation can be executed in which a specific row of symbols (for example, the middle row decorative symbol 41) is stopped in a specific display mode (for example, a highly decorative display mode) in the first mode. The stop presentation includes a first stop presentation (for example, the presentation shown in FIG. 261 (19)) that outputs a specific sound (for example, a stop sound) different from the predetermined sound when the specific row of symbols stops in the specific display mode, and a second stop presentation (for example, the presentation shown in FIG. 303 (14)) that does not output the specific sound when the specific row of symbols stops in the specific display mode, and in one of the variable presentations, the second action presentation is more likely to be executed when the second stop presentation is executed than when the first stop presentation is executed.

◆The 26th configuration that achieves the above objective is realized as an gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling presentations, the main control means being capable of controlling a first mode (e.g., a normal gaming state) and a second mode (e.g., a special time-saving gaming state) which is more advantageous to a player than the first mode, being capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and being capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped in a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, being capable of executing a reach presentation in which the patterns of some rows of the patterns of the plurality of rows are stopped and the patterns of the remaining rows are allowed to continue to change, and being capable of executing an emphasis presentation to emphasize the reach presentation, the emphasis presentation being a first emphasis presentation (e.g., the third emphasis presentation shown in FIG. 260 (14)). 261(19)) that outputs a specific sound (e.g., a stop effect that stops a specific row of symbols (e.g., a middle row decorative symbol 41) in a specific display mode (e.g., a highly decorative display mode) in the first mode. The stop effects include a first stop effect (e.g., the effect shown in FIG. 261(19)) that outputs a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) different from the specific sound when the specific row of symbols stops in the specific display mode, and a second stop effect (e.g., the effect shown in FIG. 303(14)) that does not output the specific sound when the specific row of symbols stops in the specific display mode. In one of the variable effects, the second emphasis effect is more likely to be executed when the second stop effect is executed than when the first stop effect is executed.

◆The 27th configuration that achieves the above objective is realized as an gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) includes a main control means (e.g., game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) for controlling presentation, the main control means being capable of controlling a first mode (e.g., normal game state) and a second mode (e.g., special time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first mode, being capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and being capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped in a display means (e.g., image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, being capable of executing a reach presentation in which the patterns of some rows of the patterns of the plurality of rows are stopped and the patterns of the remaining rows are allowed to continue to change, and being capable of executing an emphasis presentation in which the displayed patterns are emphasized when the reach presentation is started (e.g., a presentation in which the decorative patterns 41 are operated), The highlighting effects include a first highlighting effect (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 260 (14)) and a second highlighting effect (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 305 (26)) in which the highlighting manner of the pattern is different from that of the first highlighting effect. In the variable performance, a predetermined sound (for example, variable BGM) can be output, and in the first mode, a stop performance can be executed in which a specific row of patterns (for example, the middle row decorative pattern 41) is stopped in a specific display manner (for example, a highly decorative display manner). The stop performance includes a first stop performance (for example, the performance shown in FIG. 261 (19)) in which a specific sound (for example, a stop sound) different from the predetermined sound is output when the specific row of patterns is stopped in the specific display manner, and a second stop performance (for example, the performance shown in FIG. 303 (14)) in which the specific sound is not output when the specific row of patterns is stopped in the specific display manner. In one of the variable performances, the second highlighting effect is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed.

◆ The 28th configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling the presentation, the main control means being capable of controlling a first mode (e.g., a normal game state) and a second mode (e.g., a special time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first mode, being capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and being capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped in a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, and in the variable presentation, a specific presentation (e.g., a pseudo consecutive presentation) and a teasing presentation (e.g., a teasing presentation shown in FIG. 303 (13)) for teasing the execution of the specific presentation are executed. In the first mode, a predetermined sound (e.g., a variable background music) can be output in the variable performance, and a stop performance can be executed in which a specific row of symbols (e.g., a middle row decorative symbol 41) is stopped in a specific display mode (e.g., a highly decorative display mode) in the first mode. The stop performance includes a first stop performance (e.g., the performance shown in FIG. 261 (19)) that outputs a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) different from the predetermined sound when the specific row of symbols is stopped in the specific display mode, and a second stop performance (e.g., the performance shown in FIG. 303 (14)) that does not output the specific sound when the specific row of symbols is stopped in the specific display mode. In one of the variable performances, the specific performance is more likely to be executed after the variable performance is executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed.

◆A twenty-ninth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling the presentation, the main control means being capable of controlling a first mode (e.g., a normal game state) and a second mode (e.g., a special time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first mode, being capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and being capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped in a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, being capable of outputting a predetermined sound (e.g., a variable background music) in the variable presentation, and being capable of displaying a specific row of patterns (e.g., It is possible to execute a stop effect in which the central decorative pattern (41) is stopped in a specific display mode (e.g., a highly decorative display mode), and the stop effect includes a first stop effect (e.g., the effect shown in FIG. 253 (15)) that outputs a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) different from the predetermined sound when the pattern in the specific row stops in the specific display mode, and a second stop effect (e.g., the effect shown in FIG. 303 (14)) that does not output the specific sound when the pattern in the specific row stops in the specific display mode, and the specific sound includes a first specific sound (e.g., the first stop sound shown in FIG. 253 (15)) and a second specific sound (e.g., the seventh stop sound shown in FIG. 285 (7)) different from the first specific sound, and in one of the variable effects, the output of the second specific sound is more likely to be executed when the first stop effect is executed than when the second stop effect is executed.

◆A thirtieth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling the presentation, the main control means being controllable between a first mode (e.g., a normal game state) and a second mode (e.g., a special time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first mode, being capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on judgment information acquired upon establishment of a starting condition, being capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the judgment of the judgment information, being capable of pre-determining the judgment information before the judgment, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped in a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, and being capable of executing a pre-determination presentation based on the result of the pre-determination. In the variable performance, a predetermined sound (e.g., variable background music) can be output, and in the first mode, a stop performance can be executed in which a specific row of symbols (e.g., middle row decorative symbol 41) is stopped in a specific display mode (e.g., a highly decorative display mode). The stop performance includes a first stop performance (e.g., the performance shown in FIG. 285(7)) that outputs a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) different from the predetermined sound when the specific row of symbols is stopped in the specific display mode, and a second stop performance (e.g., the performance shown in FIG. 303(14)) that does not output the specific sound when the specific row of symbols is stopped in the specific display mode. In one of the variable performances, a specific pre-determined performance (e.g., a symbol action performance as a pre-determined performance shown in FIG. 285(2)) is more likely to be executed when the first stop performance is executed than when the second stop performance is executed.

◆The 31st configuration that achieves the above-mentioned objective is realized as an gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) includes a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling presentations. The main control means can be controlled to a first mode (e.g., a normal gaming state) and a second mode (e.g., a special time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to a player than the first mode. The main control means can determine whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and can execute a variable display based on the result of the determination. The presentation control means can execute a variable presentation in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped in a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display. The presentation control means can execute a reach presentation in which the patterns of some of the patterns of the plurality of rows are stopped and the patterns of the remaining rows are allowed to continue to change. The presentation control means can execute a provocative presentation that encourages the execution of the reach presentation. The provocative presentation includes the following: There is a first prompting performance (shown in FIG. 272) in which the reach performance is executed after prompting the execution of the reach performance, and a second prompting performance (shown in FIG. 437) in which the reach performance is executed after prompting the execution of the reach performance in the second mode, a predetermined sound (e.g., variable BGM) can be output in the variable performance, a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) different from the predetermined sound can be output when the pattern is stopped, and in the variable performance based on the determination that the special game is executed, the multiple rows of patterns can be stopped in a specific arrangement, and the specific sound includes a first specific sound (e.g., the first stop sound shown in FIG. 253 (15)) and a second specific sound (e.g., the 29th stop sound shown in FIG. 439 (21)) that is output when the multiple rows of patterns stop in the specific arrangement, and in one variable performance, the output of the second specific sound is more likely to be executed when the second prompting performance is executed than when the first prompting performance is executed.

◆The 32nd configuration that achieves the above objective is realized as an gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a main control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling presentation, the main control means being capable of controlling a first mode (e.g., a normal gaming state) and a second mode (e.g., a special time-saving gaming state) which is more advantageous to a player than the first mode, being capable of determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, being capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of rows of patterns (e.g., three rows of decorative patterns 41) are changed and then stopped in a display means (e.g., an image display unit 114) in accordance with the variable display, and in the variable presentation based on the determination that the special game is to be played, the plurality of rows of patterns are stopped in a specific sequence, and in the variable presentation being capable of outputting a predetermined sound (e.g., variable background music), and when the patterns are stopped, a predetermined sound (e.g., variable background music) is outputted. A specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) different from the predetermined sound can be output, and a stop effect can be executed in which a specific row of symbols (e.g., a middle row decorative symbol 41) is stopped in a specific display mode (e.g., a highly decorative display mode) in the first mode. The stop effect includes a first stop effect (e.g., the effect shown in FIG. 253 (15)) in which the specific sound is output when the specific row of symbols is stopped in the specific display mode, and a second stop effect (e.g., the effect shown in FIG. 301 (5)) in which the specific sound is not output when the specific row of symbols is stopped in the specific display mode. The specific sounds include a first specific sound (e.g., the first stop sound shown in FIG. 253 (15)) and a second specific sound (e.g., the eighth stop sound shown in FIG. 292 (50)) that is output when the multiple rows of symbols are stopped in the specific arrangement. In one variable effect, the second specific sound is more likely to be output when the second stop effect is executed than when the first stop effect is executed.

41...decorative pattern, 51...variable image, 52...reserved image, 61...stage image, 100...pachinko game machine, 114...image display unit, 121...first start port, 122...second start port, 200...game control unit, 231...random number acquisition unit, 234...special pattern determination unit, 300...performance control unit, 501...first effect image at start, 503...first effect image at stop

Claims (1)

A main control means capable of controlling the progress of the special game;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
The main control means
Determination information can be acquired based on the establishment of a start condition,
A variable display can be executed based on the determination information ,
The performance control means includes:
A variation effect can be executed in which a plurality of rows of symbols are varied and then stopped in the display means in accordance with the variation display,
The patterns include a first pattern and a second pattern different from the first pattern,
A predetermined sound can be output in the variable performance,
When the symbol stops, a specific sound different from the predetermined sound can be output.
When the symbol stops, a special effect can be executed.
The presentation mode for executing the variable presentation can be executed by a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode,
A specific performance can be executed in the variable performance,
The game device is capable of executing an operation presentation that suggests an operation of an operation means that can be operated by a player,
The operation performance includes:
A first operation performance that can be executed before the start of the specific performance, and a second operation performance that can be executed after the start of the specific performance,
In the variation performance in which the first operation performance is executed, the manner of the sound to be output can be made different between a case where the operation means is operated and a case where the operation means is not operated during an operation effective period in which the operation of the operation means is effective in the first operation performance;
In the variable performance in which the special game is executed and the second operation performance is executed as a result of the determination, the manner of the sound to be output can be made common between a case in which the operation means is operated during the operation effective period in the second operation performance and a case in which the operation means is not operated ,
The above-mentioned change performance includes:
A first variation performance in which a path of variation of the symbols in a specific column is a first path in the first performance mode;
In the second performance mode, a path of the variation of the pattern of the specific column is a second path different from the first path.
It is possible to make the specific sound output or the special effect executed when the first pattern stops in the first variation performance different from the specific sound output or the special effect executed when the second pattern stops in the second variation performance;
This gaming machine is capable of making the specific sound output or the special effect executed when the second symbol stops in the first variable performance common to the specific sound output or the special effect executed when the second symbol stops in the second variable performance.

Images